CORNELL

UNIVERSITY LIBRARY

FROM

Digitized

by Microsoft

Cornell University Library

PA 258.C98

1871

The student's Greek grammar: a grammar o

3 1924 021

601 046

All

books are subject

to recall after

two weeks

Olin/Kroch Library

DATE DUE
JJ^^pl*^^

PRINTED

IN U.S.A.

Digitized

by Microsoft

This book

was

digitized

by Microsoft Corporation

in

cooperation with Corneii University Libraries, 2007.

You may use and print

this

copy in

iimited quantity

for your personai purposes, but

may not distribute

or

provide access to

it

(or modified or partiai versions of it)

for revenue-generating or other

commerciai purposes.

Digitized

by Microsoft

'HE

STUDENTS' MANU
(Continued).
&i!,

VIII.-LANGUAGE, LITERATURE,
P.

THE STUDENT'S ENGLISH LANGUAGE. By GEORGE

MARSH.
Edited with additional Cliapters and Notes.

Poat Svo.

7s. (xl.

THE STUDENT'S ENGLISH LITERATURE. By

SHAW, M.A.
Svo. 7t.6d.

T. B.
Post

Edited with Notes and lUiistrations.

THE STUDENT'S SPECIMENS OP ENGLISH

RATURE,

LITE-

SHAW,

M.A.

aeleoted from the Best Weiteks. By THOS. B. Edited with Additions. Post Svo. It. 6d.

IX.-GEOGRAPHY.

THE STUDENT'S ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY. By Rev. W. L. B EVAN. M.A. Woodcuts. Post Svo. ed. THE STUDENT'S MODERN GEOGRAPHY. By Rev.
7s.

W.

Ij.'

BEVAN.

Woodcuts.

Post Svo.

7a.

M.

X.-PHILOSOPHY AND LAW. THE STUDENT'S MORAL PHILOSOPHY. With

tations and References. Post Svo. 7s. ed.

QuoBy WILLIAM FLEMING, D.D.

THE

STUDENT'S

BLACKSTONE.

Ststematio

Abridgement of the entibe Commentaries, adapted to the Present State of tiik Law. By E. MALCOLM KEBK, LL.D. Post Svo. 7s. lid.

ELEMENTARY SCHOOL HISTORIES.

MRS. MARKHAM'S HISTORY OF ENGLAND.
100 Woodcuts. 12mo.
4s.

From

the First Inv.asiou by the Romans ; -with Conversations at the end of each Chapter. Nevj Sdition, continued to 1S65. With

MRS. MARKHAM'S HISTORY OF FRANCE. From

;

the Conquest by the Ganls with Conversations at the end of each Chapter. New dUion, coutiuued to 1S61. With 70 Woodcuts. 12n)o. is.

MRS. MARKHAM'S HISTORY OF GERMANY.

the Invasion by the Romans under Marius. continued to 1867. With 50 Woodcuts. 12mo.

From
Edition,

New
4>.

LITTLE ARTHUR'S HISTORY OF ENGLAND.

Lady Callcott.
Prince of Wales.

By

New Edition, continued to the

Woodcuts.
:

Marriage of the

ISmo.

'Is.

Qd.

STORIES FOB CHILDREN

OF England.

selected from the Histort

Woodcuts.

B^ Mr. Croker.

16mo.

2.

Qd.

WM. SMITH'S SMALLER SERIES. A SMALLER HISTORY OF GREECK With 74 Wood16mo. 6d. cuts. A SMALLER HISTORY OF ROME. AVith 79 Woodcuts. 16mo. U. A SMALLER HISTORY OP ENGLAND. With 63 WoodQd. cuts. 16mo. A SMALLER CLASSICAL MYTHOLOGY. With TransDR.
St.
6(1.

3L

lationfl

With 90 Woodcuts.

from tho Ancient Poets, and Questions On the Work. 16mo. Ss. id.

A SMALLER HISTORY OF LITERATURE. A SMALLER SCRIPTURE

;

16mo.

3s. 6d.

SPECIMENS OP ENGLISH LITERATURE.

Selected

from the Chief Writers, and arranged Chronologically, with Notes. 16mo. Ss. ad.

HISTORY. In Three Parts: Old Testament Histoiy Connection of Old and New Testaments New Testament History to a.d. 70. With Illustration!^
;

16mo,

3.

M.

JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE STREET.

January, 1871.

Cornell University Library

The
tine

original of

tliis

book

is in

Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright

restrictions in
text.

the United States on the use of the

http://www.archi)^e.^or^^d^tai^s^u31 924021 601 046

The Student's Greek Grammar.

A GEAIMAE
OF THE

GEEEK LANGUAGE.
By DE.

GEOEGE CUETIUS,

PROFESSOR IN THE TTNIVERSITT OF LEIPZIG.

TRANSLATED UNDER THE REVISrON OF THE AUTHOR.

By WILLIAM SMITH,

D.C.L., LL.D.,

EDITOR OP THE CLASSICAL AND LATIN DICTIONARIES.

For tbe Uae

of Colleges

and the Upper Forms in Schools.

FOURTH EDITION.

LONDON:
JOHN MUEEAY, ALBEMARLE STREET.
Digitized

1871. by Microsoft

4^ S- S"^1r
CURTIUS' GREEK

GRAMMAR EXPLAINED.
Beady,

Now

ELUCIDATIONS OF THE STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR. Translated from the German of Ernest Cuktids, with
the Author's Aid and Sanction. 7s. 6d.

By Evelyn Abbot.

Post 8vo.

THE STUDENT'S LATIN GRAMMAR.

D.C.L., and

Theophilus D. Hall, M.A,

By William Smith, New Aditwn. Post

8vo.

6s.

FOR THE MIDDLE AND LOWER FORMS

IN

SCHOOLS.

A SMALLER LATIN GRAMMAR.

12mo.
3s. Gd.

By Dr. William Smith.

Abridged from Cuetius'

A SMALLER GREEK GRAMMAR.

Larger Work.

12mo.

3s. 6d.

A FIRST GREEK
Book adapted
CuRTins.

COURSE.
to

the

Greek Grammar

Being a Delectus and Exerciseof Dr. Geokcje

12mo.

3s. 6d.

"'CORr^'ELL
Ur-ilVERSITY;

/n.o.
LONDON
raiKTEiD BT

WILLUAM CLOWES AND

AMD CHARING
CROSS.

SONS,

STAMFORD

STEKF.T.

Digitized

by Microsoft

EDITOR'S PREFACE.

of Dr. Curtius is acknowledged by the most competent scholars, both in this country

The Greek Grammar

in

and

Germany,

to be the best representative of the

It
is,

present advanced state of Greek scholarship.

indeed, almost the only
inflexions of the

Grammar which

exhibits the

language in a reaUy

scientific

form;

while

its

extensive use in the schools of Germany, and

it

the high commendations

has received from practical

its

teachers in that country, are a sufficient proof of

excellence as a school-book.
that

It is surprising to find

many

of the public and private schools in this

all

country continue to use Grammars, which ignore

the

improvements and discoveries of

still

modem

philology, and

cling to the division of the substantives into ten

declensions, the designation of the

Second Perfect as
Dr.

the Perfect Middle, and similar exploded errors.

Curtius has stated so fully in his Preface the principles

on which

this

Grammar

is

constructed, that

it

is^unnecIt only

essary to say

more by way of

iutroduction.

remains to add, that the translation has been made from the fifth edition of the original work (1862), with
the author's sanction, and that the proof-sheets have

enjoyed
revision.

the

advantage

of

his

final

correction

and
is

An

abridgment for the use of the lower forms

published simultaneously with the present work.

W.
London, March, 1863.

S.

a2
Digitized

by Microsoft

FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

a few years the present Grammai has found its way into a large number of schools in various countries of Europe seems to be a satisfactory answer to the question whether a thorough knowledge

The

fact that within

Greek is attainable by the method I have adopted. Much, therefore, of what I thought it necessary to state on the first appearance of the book does not now rebut I consider it incumbent quire to be repeated upon me to make some observations upon the objects and the use of the Grammar, and I beg to recommend
of
;

these to the careful consideration of teachers.

Few

sciences have within the last half century

been

reformed as the science of language. Not only has our insight into the nature and history of
so completely

human

speech been greatly advanced, but

still

and

this is

justly regarded as a matter of

greater importance

quite a diiferent

method

in treating language in general

new era had been opened up by the philosophical inquiries of William von Humboldt, and the historical investigations of Francis Bopp and Jacob Grimm. No one, unless he desires to exclude schools from the progress thus made, and to confine them to the mechanical repetition of imperfeet and antiquated rules, will probably doubt that the new knowledge, the principles of which have stood the
has been discovered, after a
test of

nearly half a century, ought to exercise

its in-

fluence on the teaching of language. If the teaching of a language in our schools

Digitized
is in-

by Microsoft

PREFACE.
tended to lead not only to a thorough understanding
cultivate

of

the master-works of literature, but at the same time to

and

stir

up the youthful mind by indepen-

dent exertion and by occupation with a subject so immensely rich and so harmoniously quickening the most
different

mental powers as language, such teaching

is,

cannot possibly continue to keep aloof from the progress of scientific inquiry, which

unfortunately,

still

the

case in

many

places.

The teaching

of Greek, however,

seems to be specially called upon to make a commencement. The modern science of language has, indeed, exercised its influence on every part of grammar, but none
has been more affected by
called the accidence.
it

than the
scientific

first,

commonly
same

In Latin

inquiry into the

structure of the forms has not yet reached the

completeness as in Greek.

The

structure of the Latin

is less transparent, and we miss so many aids which we possess for the Greek in the liigh antiquity of A scientific treatment its literature and in its dialects. of the structure of the Latin language in schools is, moreover, a matter of great practical difficulty, on account of the early age at which the elements must

language

necessarily be learnt.

We

ought

not,

however, on this
all

account to separate the teaching of Ijatin from

con-

tact with scientific inquiry, the influence of which can

show itself with advantage, at least, in a more suitable arrangement and distribution of the matter. Granting,
therefore, that our boys, as heretofore,

must commit
;

to

memory
perhaps,

a large portion of Latin forms

granting that

the most important object in learning Latin consists,

more

in the acquisition of fixed laws of syntax,

which obviously form the principal strength of the Latin language ;the case of the Greek is different. The Greeks are justly called an artistic people, and the
Digitized

by Microsoft

Vi

PEEFACE.

Greek language is the most ancient work of art whicb The they have reared upon a very primitive basis. approaches the Greek after he has already student, who
gone through a considerable preparation by the study of Latin, ought to be impressed with the idea that the structure of this language is one of the most marvellous
productions of the intellectual powers
sciously.

acting uncon-

Everything

lies

here clear before us: the

sources of our knowledge are

more

varied,
is

and the

necessity of analysing the given forms

absolute, even

rendered so

on account of the Homeric dialect, that

never been entirely wanting, appearance of Buttmann, in 1782,

this analysis has, in fact,

and

after the first

made

considerable progress.

The attempt,

therefore,

to connect in

still

higher degree the practice of the

school with the spirit of science,

can here point to

vsdth so

numerous precedents, and

a reception.
sistent system,

it is,

no doubt, mainly owing

favourable

to this circumstance that it

has met

My

object has been to produce a con-

cise exposition, rather

a careful selection, and a clear and prethan an entirely new system.

In selecting and expounding the results of scientiiic have always kept in view the idea that the book was intended for practical use in schools. The
inquiry, I

therefore, was not to admit anything beyond the sphere of the school, to explain only that which is necessary, and to admit only that which is absolutely certain. For a school-book must speak categorically, must exclude all matters of mere opinion, and has no space for discussion and inquiry.
first

requisite,
is

which

It

is[

however, perfectly indifferent whether a result has been obtained by special researches into the Greek language,
or

by the more

general

inquiries

of

comparative

philology.
Digitized

by Microsoft

PREFACE.

Vli

I was further obliged to admit only those things which find their explanation in the Greek language

or at most in a comparison with the Latin but, even within these limits, I have confined myself to such innovations as really afford an important insight
itself,
;

into the structure of the forms, whereas all that belongs

learning and many other things have been passed over because they seemed unnecessary. Among such superfluous innovations I include especially all changes of terminology, and the entire alterato philological

tion of whole parts of

less necessary,

Grammar which

are often

still

but to which formerly too

much

impor-

tance used to be attached.

The new

technical terms I have

of,

generally been approved

my

preface to the

first

introduced have and the principle stated in edition, though not followed
signifie. g.,

with pedantic consistency, "if possible, to put

cant names in the place of dead numbers," as for

A
for

Declension,

Declension,

instead

of

First

and

Second Declension,

will scarcely

be found fault with,

information, and therefore facilitates learning.

a name with a meaning at once gives a piece of Doubts

have been raised only about the expressions strong and weak, which I have employed to distinguish the two I am as well aware now as I was Aorists and Perfects.
at the
inquiry,
first that,

from the point of view of

scientific

much may be

said against the expressions, but

I nevertheless feel that I cannot give

them

up.

For

the old designation by numbers

is

unsatisfactory, unless

we

are prepared for

its

sake either to sacrifice a more

consistent arrangement of the verb, or to mislead the

pupil

by

calling the Aorist

first

which

is

treated of
is

first

the
ac-

second, and

the one with which he

made

quainted afterwards.

But a common name

by Microsoft

to distin-

Digitized

Viii

PEEFACE.

Passive,

guish the two forms of the Aorist Active Middle and and of the Perfect Active, is indispensable

in a system of

Greek Grammar.
for'

An

innovation had

here become necessary,

tive reasons.
this

both negative and posi-

The

expressions strong and weah have

after being introduced

advantage

that

by Grimm

into his

German Grammar, they have

;

also

been adopted

by English Grammarians and though I use them not quite in the same sense, they are easily intelligible. It will surely not be difficult to make a pupil understand that those forms are called strong which spring from the root, as it were, by an internal agency, and weah those which are formed by syllables added externally especially as he may easily compare the English take, took, and love, loved. I still know of no designation which, with so few disadvantages, offers so many advantages as tliis, and I shall retain it until a

better one

is

suggested; and, after

often

all,

iu necessary

innovations

it is

more important

that

men

agree,

than on what they agree.

The fact that the most essential changes made in the arrangements of the subjects
example, the
strict

I have
as,

for

adherence to the system of Stems iu all the inflexions, and especially the division of the verb according to temporal Stems have met with the approval of practical teachers, has been to me a source

of great gratification,

it

being a clear proof that the

demands

of scientific inquiry are

by no means
is still

so

much

imagined by many. The arrangement of temporal Stems is made less upon scientific than upon didactic grounds, in such
a

opposed to a right system of teaching as

manner that kindred forms are joined

is is

together,

and
is

due regard

paid to the progress from that which

easy to that which

more

difficult.

Digitized

by Microsoft

PKEFACE.

IX

The chapter on the formation of words, though somewhat enlarged, has for the same reasons still been kept very brief. But, in treating of the verbs, I have directed
attention to the formation of verbal nouns
:

in treating

of the verbs of the different

directed attention,
ples, to

classes,

I have always

by a number of

characteristic

exam-

the application of the different Stems in the

means the learner has an his grammar, of making himself acquainted with a number of words, and I have no doubt that teachers will give their sancformation of words.
opportunity,
this

By

during

the

study of

tion to this arrangement.

In regard to Syntax, the

part of the

positive results of recent

linguistic inquiries are as yet less

numerous.

In

this

Grammar,

therefore, I follow the principle

of stating the essential idioms of the

Greek language
especially in

with the utmost possible precision, and in the utmost

logical

order.

Only

in

some

chapters,

that on the use of the tenses,

siderable differences
disquisitions,

my

system presents con-

conjectures,

from the usual one. All minute and more or less probable
especially the

theories

among
In this

them

ever-repeated

theory about the original local meaning of the cases,

have been rigorously have never neglected to compare the phenomena of the Greek language with
all

with which I cannot agree at

excluded.

part, also, I

the corresponding ones of -Latin, and occasionally also

of English, where this could be done with brevity and

advantage;

for as the usage of a

language must be
of

mainly comprehended by a

feeling

language, I

imagine that every appeal to a Latin usage already embodied with our feeling of language, or to an EngKsh usage familiar to us from childhood, advances our

knowledge much more than philosophical

Digitized

definitions or

by Microsoft

PREFACE.

technical terms of vague or various meanings.

For the

same reason I everywhere attach great importance to an accurate translation of a Greek idiom into English I need hardly guard myself against the or Latin. opinion as if I considered such a translation to be a philosophical explanation of a linguistic phenomenon. A real explanation is beyond the problem of a

Grammar.
I scarcely need repeat here that the present book
not intended, like an Elementary
is

Grammar,

to

be combut, in

mitted to

memory paragraph by paragraph;

should be

teaching, a suitable selection, according to the degree

of the pupil's advancement,

teacher.

made by the

By

a difference in type I have myself, at

in general that the first business

least partially, indicated this. It

may be remarked
is

everywhere

that

of

memory, and only when the

actual forms, with the aid of the paradigms, have been

committed to memory, analysis

knowledge,

may be
this

added.

First

then understanding
;

leading principle
"

ought to be the but, as I have said in another place,

neither accurately grasp the great variety of Greek forms nor retain them, unless it be supported

Memory can

by an analysing and combining intelligence, which furnishes, as it were, the hooks and cement to strengthen that which has been learned, and permanently to impress it upon the mind." If details learned at different times and carefully committed to memory, during a
subsequent repetition variously combine with one another, and form various groups if, then, many things
;

at first sight strange, appear to the pupil in the light of

a law pervading the language, such insight is certainly not a mere support of memory, but animates the desire
to learn,

and

incites to exercise the

Digitized

power of thought

in

by Microsoft

PKEPACE.
a variety of ways.

Xi
offers to teachers

The present book

abundant opportunities for such exercises, and acquires its highest efiBcacy under the guidance of thinking teachers who are truly famihar with it, and take a
delight in
its

subjects.

That the book has

actually

found such teachers has been proved to

ways, and caused

me

in various

me

sincere gratification.

G. C.

Digitized

by Microsoft

Digitized

by Microsoft

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

INTRODUCTION.
The Greek Lanquage and
its Diaiectb.

FIEST PAET.
I.

ETYMOLOGY.
and Sounds.
Sec.

Letters

Chap.

I.

The Greek Characters.

A. Letters
B. Other Characters 0. Accents D. Punctuation

23

1016 1722

Chap.

II.

The Sounds.

A. The Vowels
B.

The Consonants
III.

2429 3034

Chap.

Combinations and Changes op Sotjnds.

A. Vowels in Combination B. Other kinds of Vowel Changes C. Consonants in Comhination with one another D. Other Changes in the middle of a word B. Changes of Sound at the end of a word Chap. IV.
Division of Syllables and their Quantity.
of Syllables

3539 4043 4454 5562 6369

A. Division
B. Quantity

70 7'3
7478

Chap.

V.Accents
Digitized

7999
by Microsoft


KJT

CONTENTS.

II. Inflexion.

A. Inflexion of Nouns and PBONOtnrs.

Chap. VI.

Declension op Substantives and Adjectives.

Sec.

First Principal, (or Vowel) Declension.

A. The

Declension
the First Declension.)

112-113 114119 120123

124^131

(^Gomnrndy called
1.

Feminines

2.

MascuUnes
Declension (^Commonly called the Second Declension.)

B. The

Attic Declension

132133
.

Second Principal (oe Consonant) Declension ( Commonly called the Third Declensiom,.'\
1.

135

143

Consonant Steins
a.
6.
c.

Guttural and Labial Stems Dental Stems Liquid Stems

146149

145 150 153

144

2.

Vowel Stems
a. Soft
J.
c.

Vowel Stems Diphthong Stems Stems

:

154158 159161
162

163
171 177
179

3.

Stems suffering Elision

a.
h. c.

Sigma Stems
T-Stems K-Stems

164 168 170

174 178

167 169

Irregularities in Declension

Case-like Terminations

Chap. VII.

Other Inflexions op the Adjective;

A. Gender B Comparison 0. Adverbs of Adjectives

Chap. VIII. Chap. IX.

180191 192200
201 205 204

Inflexion op PEONouifs

219 224

The Numerals
Digitized

220
by Microsoft

CONTENTS.

XV

B. Inplexiok or Verbs.

Sec.

General Remarks

225
List of Pabadiqms.

230
I.

Table.

'Elfii,

I am 7
loose (exhibiting

Synopsis of Xum,
the Tenses)

the meanings of
II.

Verbs in Q.
A. Vowel Stems
1.
2.
:

Uncontracted, Xum
Contracted, rtfida, Trotea, dov\6<o
. ,
.

III.

IV,

B. Consonant Stems
1. 2.

3. 4.

Guttural Stems, xXeVia, (^euyo), T-ao-tra Dental Stems, \jfv8oii,at, weiBa, KOfii^a Labial Stems, ne/imai, Xeiira, KoXuTrrco Liquid Stems, dcpa, dyyeXKa, aTreipto

... ..
..

V. VI.
VII.
VIII.

Verbs in MI.
First Class, rlBrffu, bibtoju,
larrjiii

IX.

Second Class, SeiKw/u

I^ITAP.

X.

X.
I,

^FiRST Principal
:

Conjugation or Vekbs in Q.
Sec.

The Present-Stem
B.

A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem

231

233

The Augment

C. Contracted Verbs D. Distinction of the Present -Stem from the Verbal Stem

234242 243244

245253

n. The Strong Aorist-Stem

III.

254257
258266
267271
272

The Future-Stem

IV. The

Weak

Aorist-Stem

V. The Perfect-Stem
1.

Perfect Active

276282
283

2. 3. 4.

Pluperfect Active

Middle and Passive Pluperfect Middle and Passive

Perfect

284289 290291

VL

Forms

of the Strong Passive

Stem

292295
296299
300

VIL Forms

of the

Weak

Passive

Stem

Verbal Adjectives Verbs which leave their Stem- Vowel short

Digitized

....

301

by Microsoft


KVl

CONTENTS,

Chap.

XI.Sboond

Peincipal Conjugation oe Vbebs

IN MI.

SEa
302

Preliminary Remarks
1. First Class

304

2.

Second Glass

305817 318319

Chap. XII. Ieeegulae Vbebs of the Fiest Conju320 ^327 gation 328 330 Anomalies in Signification 331 333 .. Outlines of the Accentuation of Verbal Forms 338 D 334 . Peculiar Verbal Forms of the Ionic Dialect

III.

Derivation.
339
for

Chap.

XHI.
forming

A. Simple Derivatives 1. The most important Suffixes

Substantives
2.

340

341349
Suffixes for forming

The most important

Adjectives

350352
..

3. Derivative

Verbs

..

.,

.,

..

353 354

B.

Compound Derivatives 1. Form of the Combination

2.

358

Meaning of Combination

..

359360

SECOND PAET. SYNTAX.

Preliminary Remarks

361

Chap. XIV. Chap.

Numbbe and Gendbe The Abticle

:

362
368

367
391

XV.

Chap. XVI. Dsb op Cases A. Nominative

B. Vocative
C. Accusative

392
ggg ^qj
'.'.
'.'.

393 3g^
^Qg

D. Genitive E- I^a*'^e

^qr

429443
444 448

Chap. XVII.
1.

The Peepositions
One Case
Cases
..
..

General view of the Prepositions

Prepositions which take only
2.

Prepositions which take

Two

3. Prepositions

which take Three Cases

Digitized

449 458 462

457 461 468

by Microsoft

CONTENTS.

.XVIJ

Sec.

Chap.

XVIU.The

Pronouns

469475
476

Chap. XIX.

The kinds of Verbs

"Use of the forms for the forms for the Future forms for the

483
484

Chap.
1.

XX.
The The The The

Tenses
Incomplete Action
Indefinite (Aorist) Action
..

2. 3.

4.

Complete Action

491 498 499501 502 506

486 492
507

Chap. XXI.

Use of the Moods.

Indicative

A. In Simple Sentences
1.

2. 3. 4.

Subjunctive
Optative

508513 514517
518
:

Imperative

B.

In Compound Sentences

519 Connexion of Sentences with one another 1. Dependent, Declarative, and InteiTOgative 525 Sentences 530 2. Sentences expressing a purpose 534 3. Conditional Sentences 551 4. Relative Sentences 556 5. Temporal Sentences
.

524 529 533 550 555

558

Chap. XXII.
1.

The

Infinitive.

2.

559 Use of the Infinitive in general The Case of the Subject and Predicate with the
Infinitive

566

3.

4.
5.

The The The

with the Article Infinitive with aV Infinitive instead of the Imperative

Infinitive

567572 573574 575576

.. ..

577

Chap. XXIII. On Participles.

1.

Attributive

Use
.. ..

578

2.
3.

Appositive Use

The Participle with an Absolute Case

Supplements to Participles

4.
5. 6. 7.

579 584 587

583 586 588

595 596

The The

Predicative Participle
Participle with av

589594

Verbal Adjectives

Chap. XXIV. Some Peculiarities in Relative Sentences .. .; ax Digitized by Microsoft

.^

^^'^
j)

^^^


XVUl

CONTENTS.
Sec.

Chap.
Chap.
1. 2. 3.

XXV.
XXVI.

Intbbeogative Sentences

606

611

The Negatives. Use of Simple Negatives .. Several Negatives combined Some Negative Phrases
Paeticles.

..

..

...

..

612 619

618 621
622 623

Chap.

XXVII.The
1. 2.

A. Conjunctions
Copulative Conjunctions Disjunctive

3. 4.
5. 6.
7.

Adversative Comparative
Declarative

624 626 628

625 627 630

633 636 637 638 639 640

631632 634635

Temporal
Causal
Pinal

8. Inferential
9-

10. Hypothetical

641

11. Concessive

B. Emphatic Particles

643

English Index GbEEK InDEH

^^'*-^'^-

""

nlc

Digitized

by Microsoft


THE

STUDENT'S GEEEK GEAMMAE.

INTEODUCTION.
THE GKEEK LANGUAGE AND
ITS DIALECTS.

The Greek
Hellenes

("EA.Xijves),

language is the language of the Ancient the inhabitants of Greece, with all

its islands and numerous colonies. It is related to the languages of the Indians, Persians, Romans, Slavonians,

Lithuanians, Germans, and Celts. These are all sisterlanguages, and together form the Indo-European family.

The Greeks were early divided into races, each of which spoke a different ialect. The chief dialects of the Greek language are the AeoHc, Doric, and Ionic. At first each race employed its own dialect both in poetry and in prose. 1. The Ionic dialect was spoken by the Ionic race, especially in Asia Minor and Attica, in numerous islands, and in the Ionic colonies. It was the first of the dialects developed by poetry, and produced three different but nearly related dialects, viz. a) The Old-Ionic or Mpic dialect, which is preserved in the poems of Homer and Hesiod as well as of their
,

followers.
h) The New-Ionic dialect, which we know chiefly from the history of Herodotus.
Ols.

The Old and New Ionic

dialects are also designated

by the

common name,

Ionic, as distinguished

from the Attic.

c) The Attic dialect, in which are written the numerous works in poetry and prose produced at Athens in

B
Digitized

by Microsoft

INTEODUCTION.

the time of her glory.

Attic dialect are

the tragedians, Aeschylus, Sophocles,

The

principal writers of the

Euripides, the comic writer Aristophanes, the historians

Thucydides and Xenophon, the philosopher Plato, the orators Lysias, Demosthenes, and Aeschines. Through the importance of Athens in Greece, and the excellence of the Attic literature, the Attic became the
great
chief dialect of the Grreek language.

Ohs.^A less important distinction is made between tte earlier and

later Attic writers.

The tragedians and Thucydides belong

:

to

the earlier Attic, and the remaining authors to the later. The language of Plato is intermediate between the two that of the
tragedians has also

many

other peculiarities.

dialect was spoken by the Aeolians, Asia Minor, Boeotia, and Thessaly. Alcaeus and Sappho wrote in this dialect. 3. The DoEic dialect was spoken by the Dorians, chiefly in Northern Greece, in the Peloponnesus, in Crete, and in the numerous Doric colonies, especially Sicily and Lower Italy. Doric is essentially the dialect
2.

The Aeolic
in

particularly

of Pindar's IjtIc poems and Theocritus' bucolics (herdsman's poetry). The choruses in the tragedies also contain some Doric forms. 4. After Athens ceased to be the leading city in Greece, the Attic dialect still remained the language of educated Greeks. But it soon began to degenerate from its primitive purity and excellence, and thus from the
third century before Christ the
(r/

common Greek

dialect

was distinguished from the Attic. On the boundary-line between the older Attic and the common Greek dialect stands the great philosopher
KoivTj SiaXeKTos:)

are

Amongst later authors, the most important the historians PolyUus, Plutarch, Arrian, Dion Cassius; the geographer Straho; the rhetoricians Diony&ius of Kalicamassus and Lucian.
Aristotle.
:

Digitized

by Microsoft

Part

First.

ETYMOLOGY.
I.LETTERS
AJSTD

SOUNDS.

LETTERS.
2.
:

2.

For

s there is

ter

<T

at the beginning

a double sign in the small characand in the middle, and ? at the

end, of a word. Hence, avv, aeLm, ^aav, but ttovo';, Kepa<;. In compound words ? may also stand at the end of the iirst word in the compound rrpo^-ep'^o/j.ai,, Bv';-/3aT0';.
:

3.

From

the

names

of the first two letters arose the

The characters of the Greek alphabet do not essentially differ from those of the Latin and of modern languages. All come from the
expression "Alphabet."

alphabet of the Phoenicians.

to

In regard to pronunciation the following points are be observed

:

4.

All Greek letters are always pronounced alike.

But 7 is an exception, since, before y, k, ;i^ or ^, it is pronounced Tig. Hence in Latin it is represented by n T677(o is pronounced tengo ; avyKokm, syngkOlo ; XoryxTj, longche ; ^opfjiuy^, phorminx
:

5.

is

pronounced like the English

s.

It is of

very

different origin in different cases.

fieyiav) from /ie^a? ; yoke; &c.,
^t)

Compare

fj^l^av (for

^vjov with Latin jugum,

Engl.

we pronounce as /, but probably the Greeks 6. pronounced the p and h separately ; hence ph, not /, is used in Latin for ^ (piXoa-o^ia, pMlosopMa ; ^iKokti^ttj';,
:

PMlootetes.
7.
8.

we pronounce
;

like the English fh.

at

Of the diphthongs,
oi as
;
vi,

and
;

ei

are both pronounced

as ei in height

oy in boy
in

av, as
;

aw

in law
tjv,

ov,

as

ow in bow
new.

as

wy

why (hwy)

ev

and

The

iota

subscriptum (underwritten)

is

ew in nofproas

3. Dialects. The Greek language had in the most ancient times another letter, F, which was called Digamma (Siyajti^a " double

gamma ") from

its

form, and

Vau

(Fai) from its pronunciation.

was pronounced like the Latin v : Foivos, wine Lat. vinum. later time it was written only by the Aeolians and Dorians. Digitized by Microsoft-

It

At a

14.

OTHEK CHAKACTEES.
a, y, a.

nounced in

It is not written under, but after,

capitals, as At, Hi, Hi,

but

still

remains unpronounced.

9. When two vowels, usually pronounced together, are to be pronounced separately, the latter has over it

a diaeresis, (SLaipecn<!=s&paration) nounced ^o-i's ; avirvo^, a-upnos.

B.

thus Trat?

is

pro-

Other Characters.

10. Besides the letters,

also the sign

to which it nounced hex ; oLTra^, hapax. asper, " rough breathing."

11.

the Greek language has which is placed over the initial vowel belongs, and represents the h: e^ is pro',

This sign

is

called spiritus

For more exact

distinction,

the Greeks also

mark

those initial vowels which have not this b:5eathing with the sign ' i. e., the spiritus lenis, " gentle breathing."

This sound indicates only the raising of the voice which is necessary for the pronunciation of a vowel when no consonant precedes e is pronounced ek ; ar/w, ago.
:

12. In diphthongs the breathing stands over the second vowel: oiTo<;=-howtos ; elhov=eidon. But when the first vowel is in large character, the breathing stands

before it: "AiSri<;= Hades; 'D,iS'^=Ode.

13.

pwy^(ph6<i, pevfia.

over ' is usually placed over the first, and the second: 'n.vppo^=Pyrrhus ; KaXKipp67]=OaUirrhoe.
'

the p ia a word,
:

p has the spiritus asper over it: In Latin the aspirate is written after rhapsodus, rheuma. When two ps come together
initial

Every

Ohs.

Many write the double p without any breathing

Xlippos

KakXipporj.

" over a 14. As in Latin, so in Greek, the sign vowel denotes that the vowel is long, " that it is short, and " that it is sometimes one, sometimes the other. In Greek they are used only with the vowels a, i, v,

since

e, 17, o,

are distinguished
Digitized

by

their form.

by Microsoft

15.

ACCENTS.

15'

The

sign

'

at the junction of

two words indicates

the omission of a Towel or diphthong, and is then called an apostropJie: -Trap eKeiva for irapot, sKeiv^, with that
one
; /j,^ 'lyco

for

fir]

iyd) (ne ego).

16.

The same

sign has the

name

coromis

(xopavk)

when it stands over the junction of two words contracted into one, Touvofia for to ovofia, the name ; Kor^aQo'i for Kol arjaQb<i, and good. It indicates that a erask {icpadi'i,
mixture) or contraction of two words has taken place, and, like the breathing, stands over the second vowel
of a diphthong
;

tovto for to avro, the same.

Accents.

17.

The Greeks

also indicate the tone or

Accent
is

(irpo^wSla) of words.

The

sign

'

over a vowel
that
is,

called

the acute accent (o^ela

raised tone
:

Tr/aospSt'a),

the sharp or

thus

A
is is

'Koyo';, tovtcov, irapd, eTepo<;. The syllable marked must be raised above the rest. word having the acute accent upon the last syllable
:

called oxytone (o^vtovov)

irapd, ehre, ^acriXein;.

A word having the acute A

two
is

accent upon the last but onelast

called ^aroa;/i<me {irapo^vTovov): Xeyco, ^aivco.

word having the acute accent upon the

called proparoxytone (n-poirapo^vrovov)
:

but

T^^eraiy

eXireTe,

18.

Ohs. proparoxytone having a long vowel or diphthong in the second syllable of the word, ought to he pronounced soas to give the accent on the third syllable, and yet preserve the

length of the second syllable : j3f/3i)Ka should he pronounced lebeka ; dn-o^aive, apohaine. The accent, however, is usually
disregarded in the English pronunciation of Greek words.
19.

The
is

sign

'

over a vowel
It indicates

is

called the grave accent

is,

(^apeia Trpo'imBia).

a low tone, that

that

a syllable
last

not raised in tone.

Thus

in dvo^alve, the

two might have the grave accent. The marking of them, however, would be superfluous, the absence of the acute being a sufficient guide. AU words without
Digitized

by Microsoft


23.

PUNCTUATION".
final syllable
:

7
are
therefore
called

an accent on the
barytone (fiapvrovd)
20.

'kh^co, erepoi.

The sign \ however, also denotes a subdued and occupies the place of an acute in every oxytone not immediately followed by a pause airo, from, but airo tovtov, from this ; ^aaiKev^, a king, but
acute,
:

^acriXev'i iyevero, he became king.

Oxytones, therefore,

retain their accent

unchanged only at the end of a

over a vowel
Trpo<;mhia),
is

sentence.

21.

The
is

sign

"

called the circumflex

its

accent

(irepia-Trcofievr]

from

shape.

The
^.

circumflex

A A

a combination of the acute and the grave word having a circumflex on the last syllable
;

is

called 'perispomenon (Trepia-Trdfievov)

a/^aQoh,

ctkiS,';.

word having a circumflex on the

is

last syllable
:

but one
<f>evye,

called properispomenon (TTpoTrepKyn-miievov)

^^re.

In diphthongs the accent, like the breathing vowel ^evyei, tovto. When the circumflex accent and the breathing meet upon the same vowel the accent is placed over the
22.

( 12), is put over the second

breathing

ovro'?, ^ffo<;,

'Uto?.

The

acute, in a similar
:

case, stands to the right of the breathing

\.(OV.

aye, ep'xpfiai,

Obs.

The acute

is

placed between the two points of a diaeresis

(9), dffiios, but the circumflex over

them,

irpavvat.

D.

Punctuation.

23. For the purpose of dividing sentences and periods the Greeks employ the comma and the fullFor the sign of interrogation they tise the point.

For the rl etTra? ; what did you say ? semicolon colon or semicolon they place a point at the upper part epaTco vfmr tl eTrotija-aTe ; I ask you of the line
: :

what did you do? iairipa rjV Tore was evening ; then a messenger came.
Digitseddiy Minvsoft

riXdev w)fyeXo<i,

it

VOWELS.

24.

Chap. II.The Sounds.

A.
24.

Ttie Vowels.

like tlie Latin, has five Latin, of which the first four are like the vowels, Greeks But instead of the Latin u, the a, e, 0, i. have V (pronounced nearly like the French u and the

The Greek language,

German
25.

U).

Th

vowels, apart from the distinction of long

and
the

short, are divided into

soft

vowels

a,

e, tj, o,

two classes ^the hard and are hard v, i, soft.

;

26.

From

arise diphthongs {hi^doyyoi,

the union of hard and soft vowels together They i. e., double-sounds).
ov from o and
ot
rjv

are:

av from a and ai a
ev
et

v.
t.

v.
L.

o
7]

e
6

V.
t,.

V.

27.

The union

of long hard vowels with

produces

The Dialects, in many words and forms, 24. Dialects. Thus different vowels from those usual in the Attic Dialect.
:

admit

1. The Ionic (Epic and New-Ionic) dialect prefers r], for Attic a Att. 6atpa^, Ion. 6i>pr]^, hreastplate : Att. ayopd, Ion. ayopri, market: Att. vavs. Ion. vijCs, ship: but Ion. (xftrofi/Spi'ij for Att. Iieartifi^pia, midday. 2. The Doric, on the contrary, prefers a Att. Stj/ios, Dor. Sap.os, people : Att. /iijTijp, mother. Dor. (xdnjp (comp. Latin m4ter) Dor. 'Addva for 'A^ijra, goddess Athena, even in Attic poets. 3. The Ionic dialect often changes c to ei, and o to ou Att. |eVor, Ion. ^eij/os, foreign : Att. /eKa, Ion. eii/cica, on account of: Att.
:

}i6vos. Ion. fioScos, aZonc

Att. ovop.a, Ion.

Ion.

oSj/o/io,

name.
not.

Earely

o to

ot,

or a to ai

Att.

rjyvoria-c,

rfyvoii^tre,

he

knew

<i>v,

26. Dialects. The New-Ionic dialect has moreover the diphthon< which, however, only comes in place of av in the other dialects.

Savjia for 6aviia, wonder: etuvrov for tavrov, of himself: be pronounced as ou.
Digitized

av must

by Microsoft

33.

a,

CONSONANTS.
rj,

Tirritten iota is
28.

the spurioits diphthongs, not heard.

m, in

which the under-

(Comp.
also

8.)
i,

The Greek language

Towels
:

combines v with

but

only before

fivta,

a fly.
(o,

29.

We further distinguish the obscure o-sound

(a),

w),

the
fl,nd

medium a-sound

and the clear e-sound the more obscure v from the clearer t.
B.

(e, iy),

The Consonants.
:

The consonants are divided I. According to the position in the mouth where they are produced, i.e.,
30.

according
into
:

to

their

organ

(Spyavov,

" instrument

"),

1.

2.
3.

Gutturals Dentals
Labials

(throat-sounds)

k, y, xt, S, 6, v, X, p, a.
it, /3,

(teeth-sounds)
(lip-sounds)

^,

/x.

31' II. According to their poioer, that is, whether they can be pronounced with or without a vowei

into

32.

1.

Mutes
(a.)
(5.)
(c.)

(mutae)

:
k, t, tt.

hard
soft

(tenues)

(mediae)

7, h,
^>

/8.
i>-

aspirated (aspiratae) X'

Obs.

The
2.

aspirated consonants contain each a hard consonant

with the rough breathing, x therefore=K (kh);

<^=,r' (ph).

5=t

(th);

33.
(a.)
(b.) (e.)

Vocals

(semivocales)
A,,

Liquids (liquidae)
Sibilant (sibilans)

p. 4), v,
fi,

Nasals (nasales) 7 (7 before gutturals,

o- (9).

In the Ionic dialect the aspirates often lose the 32. Dialects. breathing hinojiai for Attic Sixofiai, accept; avns for Attic av6is, again. The New-Ionic sometimes transposes the breathing kiBwv for Att. ;^tTa)j', tunic ; ivdeirev for Att, ivrevBfv.
: :

Digitized

by Microsoft


10
34.
^,
i/r,

VOWELS IN COMBINATION.
The
double

;:

34.

cmsmants belong

for f =Ko-, \lr='ira,

f=S

to both kinds with a soft sibilant

(5).
OJs.
Ko-

only occurs in compounds with ck

iKo-w^o),

I rescue.

Chap.

III.

Combinations and Changes of

Sounds.

A.
35.

Vowels in Combination.
may
want
is

In the inner part of a word not aU vowels

34. Dialects.
for
1.

A peculiarity of the Greek language

The
v,

the

of the breathing v.

however, was not altogether wanting

The digamma

( 3, D.) occurred in the

:

Homeric
;

dialect in

the beginning of the following words

ayvvfu, break
ava<7tra>,
[yer']
; ;

SXis,

numeswarm,
;

rous; SKiaKOfiai,
please
;

am

caught; ava^, ruler;

;

rule; avhava,
eSpos,

apaws, tender

aarv, city ; eap, spring

people ; eUoan, twenty [Dor. fiKari, Lat. viginti]

press; eK-qTi,wiUingly
eXnov, spoke
;

e'lKia,

yield
;

eiXm,

cKvpos, father-in-law ; eKoiv, willing

e (to, sui) i'oiKa,

cX^ro/ioi,

hope; the pronominal Stem

;

cpyov,
;

work

fpya>, close
;

epea, shall say

eTTjs,

iuBffs, clothing

appear; ciros word; go on ; ipvm, draw ; dpa, dress (Stem fes, Latin vestis) ;
in ;
'dppa,
;

relative; rjhis, agreeaUe ;"lXior, city llios

;

Icros,

equal; oIkos,

wine (vinum). On the operation of the digamma, see 63 D., 75 D. 2. The f in the middle occurred in ois, sheep, from ofis, (Latin avis') ; vrj-os, of the ship, from vaFos (Latin navis). Gen. of vav-s. 3. The Dorians and Aeolians retained the digamma at the beginning of many words Aeol. feVoy, year. Dor. KSioj, own. 4. In Homer, at the beginning of many words, e stands for f. U, Mm, self ; ifUo<rt, twenty; eta-r), equal; eeSvov, marriage-gift=:
house
olvos,
:

ehvov.

The Dialects vary much in regard to the com 35. Dialects. binations of vowels. The Epic and New-Ionic leave many syllables
uncontracted : ev=ev, well: otopat=zo'iopaL, I think: jrair=7raTsloy: t6os=vovs, sense: <(>iKeriTe=(bikiJTe ^ametis): aUoiv^aRav,

vnwiUing.

Some

of the forms usually uncontracted are, on the

Digitized

by Microsoft


37.

VOWELS IN COMBINATION.
The
soft
:

: :

combine.
best
1.
:

dissimilar vowels pair with one another

The

generally remain unchanged before the

a-o^ia,

hard vowels
slumber:
2.

wisdom

Xua,

loosen

lavw,

vet, it

rains: evvoia, benevolence.

Sard

vowels before soft ones become diphthongs

Trail?, iral<i,

ev, eS,

good :

boy

yive'i, yevei, to

the race.

Obs.

Diphthongs sometimes
becomes
|3o-oy

lose their second part before vowels

^ou-dff

(bav-is),

nai-a,

ica-a,

hum.

Comp.

160, 248, Obs. 36.

Similar ( 25) vowels cannot well stand to-

gether,

and hence when they meet are often contracted

:

according to the following laws

1. Two similar vowels melt into one long vowel \aa<! becomes A,a?, stone; ^rpway, ^tj'KSi, I am sealous; Xti.09, Xio?, a Ghian ; tfxXerjTe, {f)iXr]Te, ametis, in which cases 6 and rj, o and co are similar. Still it must be observed that ee usually become et,. and o o become ov irolee, iroLet, do ; ttXoo?, TrXoO?, passage by sea. Vowels before a similar one beginning, ttXoov, ttXov, of a passage ; a diphthong disappear
:

olKeei, olKei, dwells ; ^iXerj, (jsiXy, amet.

37. 2.

Dissimilar vowels form a

compound

in

which

contrary, contracted in these dialects: ip6s=Upas, holy: j3<!)o-as=

one who has called. abbreviation in the diphthongs ending in 1; is explained by this letter first becoming F, and then being quite dropped (comp.
^ofjo-as,
2.

The

34,

D. 2)

fiov-os

37. Dialects.

(3of-o's

[bov-is]Po-6s.

1.

The

Dialects supply

many

exceptions.

Thus

in ITew-Ionic especially, eo and eov are contracted into ev, not into ov : TTOieo/xei', Troievfiev, we Tnake : Troteoucre, TroteOtre, they make.
2.

In the Ionic

dialect.
:

So

(jio),

often changes to fm

'Arpe/Sao,
a>

'ArpeiSea, of Atrides
Tloa-eihmv, the
3.

tXaos, IXecas, merciful,

e
:

a before

is often

changed into the thinner sound

noo-de<B=noo-8ao', Att.

God

Poseidon.

In Doric,

ao, aa, are contracted into

'ATpei8ao='Arpei8a,

Xloa-eiSdav^lIocreibdv, 6eaa>v
Digitized

(dearum)=6eav. by Microsoft

12
a) < 29).

VOWELS IN COMBINATION.
the

38.

obscurer

vowel overpowers the clearer

Thus from


43.

13

OTHER TOWEL CHANGES.

B.
Other hinds of Vowel-changes.

40. Another change of the Towels consists in their

being lengthened.
tingviished, tIz.
1.
:

Two

kinds of lengthening are dise.,

Organic kngthening,

i.

inflexion or derivation.
a generally becomes
o always
f
,,
i;

By

that which is required by organic lengthening

Tifufirtt).

nnda>,
fijXom,
TToiiui,

)>

a
1
I
ci

I honour, Fut. I am jealous, I make,

^rjkixra
ttoi^o-o).

X either

or

sometimes
V either
or
41. Ohs.

rta,

I honour,

tTo-o).

St. Xr,

Pres. XeiVo),

/ leave.

oi

\ar.
\va>,

I hose.
p,
;

Adj. \om6s, remaining, Put. Xoo-m.

Pres. <pevya>,

ev St. <pvy,
e, i,

Jflee.
ij
:,

After

and

is

changed to a instead of

ida,

leave, allow; fut. cd<Ta

St. la, hecH; larpds,

physician;
ea,

St. opa, see;

opd/ia, a view.
eij,

The Attic
iij,

dialect is altogether

averse to the combinations,

la,

pij,

cmd frequently puts

pa, in their place.

42, 2. Gompensatort/ lengthening, i. e., that which used as a compensation for lost consonants. By it d, even when e, i, or p does not precede, is often changed e generally becomes to d: Tra?, everi/, from TrdrVT-'; ei o generally becomes elfjbi, I am, from icr-ixi ( 315) ov hiZov<} for St8o-i'T-9 [Lat. cUMtrs'\ I always becomes 8ei,Kvv-<} for SeiKw-vr-i;, showing. I, and V always v
is
:

Ohs.

Exceptions, in which e becomes ij, and o becomes given in 147, and in which a becomes ij in 270.

a>,

are

43. The three short hard Towels often interchange one and the same Stem, when, generally, e is regarded as the Stem-Towel rpeirco, I turn ; erpairov, I

in

40. Dialects.

am

come, from

41.

The extension of v to ou appears in flK^Xovda, Stem e\v6 ( 327, 2). The Old and New-Ionic dialect does not avoid the Dialects.
irj
:

combinations eij, larpos, physician

and

prj

iTeij=Attic Ired, pasture

lrjTp6s=Att.
try.

7rftp^tropai= Att. iveipdaopai,

I will

The Doric
a
:

on the contrary, regularly lengthens 2 inte nfisa-a=niji^<ra, I vnil honour ( 24, D. 2). Digitized by Microsoft
,

dialect,


14

CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION.

44.
76V09, race

turned; tjoottos, turning : Stem 761/6?, [comp. Lat. generis, Nom. genws]
:

Nom.

jiXeyco,

I bum; I
help

<f>\6^,flarm.
7]

also is at

times changed to

co

apijyo),

Apayo';, helper.

C.

Consonants in combination with one another.

Consonants, in regard to their combiaation, are still greater limitation and change than the

44.

subject to
vowels.

Those which are

dissimilar (comp. 32, 33)

agree best with one another, especially the

mutes with

the liquids.

That discordant consonants may continue together, they are either made more like one another (assimilated) or more unlike (dissimilated). The essential laws for the necessary changes of consonants are the following
45. 1. Before mute dentals ( 30, 31) only consonants of other organs which are of the same order (that
is,

both hard, both

soft,

or both aspirated,

32) can

stand;

consequently, the only allowable combinations

kt, ttt, 78, ySS, %3-,
<f)
.

of sounds are

a different mute stands before the dental, through inflexion or derivation, it must be assimilated to the order of the latter. Consequently,
k8 and ^S become y&. Kd yd xdjrS

When

and

<^S liecome j8S.

T(9

^e
(flT

^e.
TIT.

X^

..

tr.

^T

Therefore,
irkeK-Brjvai

Xfy-roy
\ey-6r)vai

becomes liXexBrivm from XeKTor

'KfxBfjvai

TrXe/cto,

I weave.
I say I say.

Xeyto,

\lectus instead of hg-tus\.

,,

Xcyoo,

S^x-Tos
TVTT-Orjvai

ficKTos

1 receive {tractus instead of trah-tus from traho],

Sexajjiai,

TvrjiSfjvai

from TvirTa,

I strike.
I write.

unchanged in running out.

ypa^-Tos
ypacfi-Sriv

ypaiTTos

ypd^Srjv

ypd(f)a,

OJs. The
all

preposition ex, out o/(Lat. ex) remains

:

combinations

out Digitized by Microsoft

eKOfcris, casting

E/cSpo/iT/,

; :

48.
46. 2.

CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION.

15

Before mute dentals, mute dentals to be audio-

ble are changed into

TT, St,

{Dissimilation)

therefore,

and 6t

1)600116

or
:

t6, 88, 89 ir8 hence awT-Tos becomes amctTos, accomplished,

from

avvro),

aS-reoK
7rei6-dr]vai

aarcov,

canendum

3.

TTeKrdTJvai, to

be persuaded
est

aSa,

I accomplish, I sing.
1 persuade.
a-,

ireida

47.
//,.

Before

a guttural becomes

7,

a dental

labial

Therefore,
SteoKo),

huoK-iios

becomes SuoyfUs, persecution, from

I pursue.
I wet.
I

^e-^pfX-f''"'
lS-p.ev

^e^pp^juu,
Xtrp.ev,

I have

heen wetted,

ixova. ^pc-)(a,

we know,

flora olda,

I know.
accomplish.

rimT-fim,
ire-7rci8-p.evos

rjinxTpju,

have heen perfected, I'rom dviru), persuaded, from

7rel8a>,

irerreKruevos,

KOTT-p-os

Kopp6s, a striking, from

Terpippai,

kott-t-o),

I persuade. I strike [summui

from sup-mus'].

Te-Tpt0-pat

I have

heen rubbed, from rpi^a,

ypd<j)a,

rub.

ypa<^-pa
Obs.

ypdppa,

letter,

from

I write.

Sometimes in derivation the gutturals and dentals remain unchanged : aKpr/, bloom ; pv8p6s, movement, rhythm ; dpidpos, number. The preposition ex leaves its k unchanged iKpdiraa, wipe out.
:

come

beo-, as a hard consonant, 7 and and /3 becomes tt {Assimilation ) /to- is then written ^, and tto- ilr therefore,

48. 4. Before
K,

jj;

dy-a-a becomes dn-a-a, written a|-a), I shall lead, from ayu), I lead [rexi instead of reg-si from reg-o].
Sc;^-i7o/xai
,,

8eK-cro/iai, written 8c^o/tat,ZsMZ receive, from Scpfo/iai,

J receive
Tpij'i'O CO

[traxi instead of trah-si from traJi-o].

rpti/rct),

is

Tpe7r-o"co,

written

Z s^aZ2

^wJ, from

rpijSft),

J raJ
ypa<j)'(ra>

[sCTi^si instead of scrib-si

from sc6-oJ.

ypair-irco, 'wvitten ypd^jrco,

I shall write,irova.ypd<l)-a, I write.

5r

Obs.

It

clear

from 34 that every k and

with

o-

must

47. Dialects. The change of dentals and gutturals before p frequently omitted in Ionic 'U-pfvos, favourable, from St. Ik (iKava, I come) ; aKaxpevos, pointed, from St. ok, (Lat. acuo) dvTpfj, breath ; oSprj, smell, from St. oS (ofo) lod-orl, Att. 6a--pri iB-pev, we knoy>:= Att. Itr-pev: KeKopv8pivos, equipped, from St.
is
:

Kopv8 (^Kopv(ra-a)=MSiitm!iik&f^eimofm


16

CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION.
:

*-

cr,

ttXeko), become | and ^;r hence n-XcK-wm becomes" jrXe'|iB from I weave ; \em-<ra becomes Xeii|f<o from \eiira, I leave. before 49. 5. The dentals, when standing separately

are Aio^^ed without compensation; in like Therefore, disappears before ?

avvr-a-is

manner

nS-o-ouai
Kopvd-a-i

becomes

Si/uo-ts,

accomplishment, from avvTa,

ija-ofiM,

shall rejoice,

from

^So/xai,

I accomplish. I rejoice [laesi

helmet.

Kopva-t, to the helmets,

for ixed-si from laed-oj. from Kopvs, Gen. Kopv-Bos,

Saifiov-a-i

Sai'/ioo-j,

to the dosmons,

irvv-Cvyos

(ritvyos,

yoked
o- is

together,

from from

haSfiav, dcerrwn.
a-vv, together,

and

^vyov, yoke.

Hence
Ols. 1.

er

before another
;

lost

Teix^a--(ri

becomes reix^-cn, to

walls (from relxos, wall)

itr-tropLai, e-a-ofjuii.

V is not always dropped before cr or f in composition. In the preposition iv the v remains for the sake of clearness i

evard^a,
all,

trickle in

ev^eiyvvfu,

harness.

The

u in nav,

every,

and

ttoXiv, again, either

assimilated to the following a-:

remains unchanged, or is navaoi^os, all-wise, jraXiV:

is

o-uToi from Trdktv-tTVTos, starting hack. The v in a-vv, with, dropped before f or n- with a consonant following a-i^vyos (see above) a-varrjpa, system ; it is assimilated before a simple avira-inov from irvv-amov, common meal. <r
; :

2.

3.

remains unchanged before o- in the 2d. Pers. Sing, iri-c^av-fTai, thou hast appeared. In exceptional cases compensatory lengthening ( 42) takes place wheii a single v is omitted for instance, a) In some Nominatives Sing. : jieXa-r, black, for /ieKav-s. 6) In the 3rd Pers. PI. of the chief tenses, where o- has taken the place of r \v-ov-a-i, they loosen, instead of Xv-ov-a-t

Sometimes

of the Perf. Mid.

(originally Xu-ow-ti) ( 60). c) Often in derivation : yepovcria, senate, instead of yepovria, from St. yepovT, Nom. yepav, old man.

50.

6.

The

combinations

vt,

vd,

v^,

are likewise

omitted before a, but cause a compensatory lengthening

navT-a-i'becomesnaa-i, to
all,

from

St. jrai'T-

Nom.

n-a-s

nOevT-s
yepovT-tri

Tideis,

putting,

ridevr.

yepovari, to old

men,

y^povr

Nom.

yepaiv.

Homer often assimilates a mute to the following o 49. Dialects. woo-cri=Att. TToa-t for ttoS-o-i (pedibus). He often preserves one a
before another
:

cir-a-oucu,.,! shcdl be.

T>i0tizedby Microsoft


51.

CONSONAIITS IN COMBINATION.

17

fi(iKvvvT-cri,hccorResSfiKm(ri,i

>,from St.SiiKwvT Nom. SeiKwC-s,

iTncvS-a-a
TrevS-aronat

o-7rei(r(a,|

^^^^ff^J'^

.,

OT^fS
ttcj/S

Pres.

o-TrsVSca.
n-ei,(r;(<B.

ireia-oixai,

I shall suffer,

Prea.

Ois. 1.

vT disappears, without compensation, in the Dat. PI. of Stems of Adjectives in evr Nom. ct-s: St. j^apievr, Nom.

2.

Of

XapUii, Dat. PI.

vfl

^apU-m
:

for p^aptfi/T-o-i.

tefore
St.

o-,

remains in eXftiv-s, tape-worm, instead of

i\iuv6-s,

iKfuvd

Tipvv-s,

the

city

Tiryns,

instead

of

Tipvvd-s, St. Tipvvd.

505. In later Attic

n-

is

Old Att.

x^P^'ovrjo-os,

New

readily assimilated to a preceding p Att. x^ppdviicror, Peninsula; Old

Att. 6ap<r5>,

New

Att. dap pa,

I am

courageous.

it

51. 7. ! remains unchanged before mute dentals; becomes the nasal 7 before gutturals ( 4), /t before labials, and is assimilated before liquid consonants

avv-TiBtjiu,

(Tvv-KaKea,

I put together, I caU together,

unchanged. heoomcs crvyKoKeo.

is

crvv-xpovos, contemporaneous,

avyxpo^os.
fliiTfipos

tv-veipos, experienced,

from fv and

jrelpa,

proof

[so

in-peritus becomes iniv/'ux'7> s"**^-

peritus].

iu-^jmxos, inspirited,
ev-fierpos, metrical,

ep.'^Xo^ from iv and

efLfierpos

o-vv-pca,

I flow
I

together,

ffuv-Xeyo),

collect.

from ev and fierpov, measure [so in-modicus becomes im-modious]. avppea from crvv and pera, I flow [so con-ruo becomes cor-ruo]. ffuXXey from (rvu and Xeyo), / j'oiAer [so con-ligo becomes
col-ligo].

Ohs. 1.

in the preposition

iv

remains unchanged before p

cvpvBp^s, rhythmical.
2.

avrip,

combined with p by means of S in av-S-p6s Gen. of man. So is p, with p by ^ in p^(nip,-P-pia, mid-day, instead of fuatjp^e^pta (jieiros and ^pepa, comp. 61, c).
V
is

fi

In the Epic dialect |3 is often inserted between 51. Dialects. and p, and between p. and X /it-fi-j3-XoMca, 7 have gone, from Stem at the be/loX, by metathesis ( 59). p before X or p becomes ginning of a word : j3X<o-o-(c<a, I go. Present of the Stem p6K |3poTds, mortal, for pporos, from the Stem /tpo or /top [mor-io?-, mortuus sum].
: ;

Digitized

by Microsoft


18

CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION.

52,

52. 8. Mard mutes (tenues) unite with a following rough breathing (spiritus asper) into aspirates (%, 6, ^)

hence tV

(eVi)

and

rjfJpa,
fijiepa,

day, become
day,

icftrj/ieposj/or

a day.

Sek ISeKo) ten

bexhp-eposifor ten days.

avT

(Jlvt'C)

viraros,

Consul

avBxmoTos, Proconsul.

53. 9. At the end of a word, when the following word begins with a spiritus asper, the hard mute is changed into an aspirate

ov^ ovTos, not

a(j)

this,

for ov< oiros.

ia-nas, from the hearth,

Koff fijiipav,

by day,

an (oTro) iarias. kut (Kara) fj/upav.

Ohs.

If another

the

first

mnst

e<t)6fifiepos,

hard mute stands before the one to be aspirated, also be aspirated ( 45) : enrd and ^jiepa form for seven days ; vvktu and oXtjv become vvx6' oXiji/,

totam, noctem.

536.

10.

Two

syllables

immediately following one

another caimot both begin with aspirates in the following cases:

a)

In reduplication the corresponding hard mute

x-X'*P'?'"'i
6i-6rijXi,

takes the place of the aspirate

Ke-x^piKa for
n-driiu
Tre-(f>vKa

I have proceeded,
become.

from

x<i>p^(a,

I proceed,

I put.

<j>e-<j)VKa,

I have

h)

The
:

Aorists Passive of the verbal

Stems de (ridrjfii,^

adopt the same modificae-re-6rjv, I was put, for i-6e-67]v ; i-Tv-O'qv, I was tion (Comp. 298.) sacrificed, for i-6v-6rjv. e) In the Imperative of the First Aorist Passive ( 297), on the contrary, the second aspirate is changed a-o)-97]-n, be saved, for cra>-6ri-6i. to a tenuis
put), 6v (0VCO,
:

I sacrifice),

d)

Isolated
;

instances

are

afjiir^ym,

embrace,

for

afi^ey(a)
to hold, 52

iKC'xeipia, for ej^e'yeipia, armistice,

from

exeiv,

and xdp, hand.

and 53. Dialects. ^The aspiration is omitted in New Ionic for a day ; a.m-q\ii, I send away ; ovk ovTms= oix ovras^ not so; air oS,from the time when, Att. d<p' oi. Digitized by Microsoft
.

iitripepos,


55.

.:

OTHEE CHANGES OF SOUND.

19

Obs.

Sometimes the spiritus asper is changed to the lenis, because the following syllable begins with an aspirate 8-<f>pa, tiU, for 6-(l>pa from the relative Stem & ( 213, 217) exa for
:

eX<o

from

St.

ix ( 327,

6).

54.

to
(

Some Stems beginning with t change this letter 6 when an aspirate at the end cannot be retained This happens 45).
In the Substantive Stem
Dat. PI.
Opi^L
TjOt%,

a)
hair,

whose Nom.
cases are

is 6pi^,

The other

regular,

formed from the Stem rp^x

T/jt^e?).

(Gren. rpixpi,

Nom. PL
is

5)

for

In ra^iK;, quic , whose comparative Ta^iav ( 57 ; comp. 198). In the foUowbg Verbal Stems
Pres.
6aT!T<i>,

Bdacroiv

c)

To^
rpecj)

I lury,

>.

Tpc(/)<B,

'P^X

rpv^
TV' ;<^

,,

I nourish, I run, Bpiirra, I rub to pieces, Tvcjxo, I smoke, ,,

rpi}(a,

Put. 6a^<o, Aor. Pass. iTafjiijv, Subs. Ta(f>6s, grave. dpe^u, Subs. Spcu/ia, cattle
fl/>e|o/iat I

Bpir^a
6v\lra>

>
J

(260).

Obs.

In the Passive First Aorist ( 296) and in the Infinitive of the Perf. Mid. the aspirate of the Stem remains unchanged, yet
initial tenuis is aspirated,
felt to

the not

because the Stem-consonant is be necessarily an original aspirate, as it might have been modified by the influence of the 6 after it ( 45)
idpi^BifV, Te6pa<j)dai.

D.

Other changes of Consonants and Vowels in the

middle of a word.

55.

Important changes of sounds are produced by

the modifications of the soft vowel c in connection with consonants (comp. 186, 198, 199, 250-253). Frequently, for instance,
1. t after i/ or p is put a syllable farther back, where it forms a diphthong with the preceding vowel. Hence,

Digitized

by Microsoft

20
relva

OTHEE CHANGES OF SOUND.

from
Tev-ia,

56.

liaivo/iai

fiav-iojiai,

I stretch, I rage,

St. rev [tendo].

a/ieivaiu

Keipia

afiev-iaiv, better, from Kep-ia, I shear,

ioreipa
X^ipaiv

is

horep-ia, the giver, fern.

fJ'OV. a/iev. Kep. borep

X^P-

{hoTr]p, giver).

X^P-"""'

'^'>rse,

56. 2.

assimilated to a preceding
SX-Copjii,
ak-1,09,

/mXXox from pdK-iov, more, from paka, much.

aWopai
aXXos
oreXXcB
57.
3.

I spring, / send,

St. dX. [salip].

,,

another [alius].
St. (TTf\.

(rrfX-io),

Gutturals (r and 6 less frequently) coalesce

t

with a following
^cra-av

to acr
less,

(New

Att. tt)
St.
fjK,

from

fjn-Mv,

superl. ^Kia-ra.

Opaa-a-a
Taa-a-a

QpaK-ta, Thracian, fem. (masc.

6p5|)

St.

&paK.

ray-ia,
KprjT-ta

I arrange,
smaller,

St. ray.

iKaa-a-av,,

i\ax-i-<ov,

Kopicra-a
Kprja-a-a

Cretan, fem.

eXax, superl. eXapftoTos. (masc. Kp^s) St. Kpr/r.

St. Kopi)5 (Kopvs, helmet).

Kopv6-im,

I arm,

58.
I

4.

and sometimes 7 coalesce with a following

iS-.op.ai,,

to

^.

efo/iot

from

Kpafm

Kpay-ia,

I sit, I cry,

St. tS (to eSoy,

St.

f/ie

seaf).

Kpay (Perf. Ke-Kpdy-a).

Other changes of sounds are

59. 1. Transposition

(fieTd9ecn<;),
fi,

quently occurs with X,

Bpcua-Ka

p, also with

which most and v

fre-

6pda-os together with dapa-os, boldness.

^i-P\r)-Ka
Tf-dvrj-Ka
T/iiJ-erif

from the

St. Bop,
fidK,

I spring. Second I have thrown,

Aorist edopov. e^oKov.

,,

6av,

I am,
a
cut,

dead,

is

edavov.

rep,

Pres. rcpvai,

Ohs.

In the

I cut.

last four

examples the vowel

moreover lengthened.

59.

Dialects.

Transposition
:

is

more frequent in the Homeric

dialect (comp. 295, D.)

Kaprepos and Kparepos, strong ; KapTia^Tos= Att. KpaTKTTOs, the strongest, from Kparos, strength ; rpan-dopev
for rapir-eiopev,

(comp. 295, D.)

Tiropai).

we desire

to rejoice, St. i-epTr (rep;

So

also in eSpuKoy,
jrepfl

I saw,

St. Scpu (Se'pKo/iat)

eirpadov,

destroyed, St.

(Trepda).

Homer: aTap7rds= Att. drpanos,

by Microsoft

path.

Digitized

::

; :

62.

OTHEE CHANaSS OF SOUND.

21

60. 2. The weakening of single consonants. most important weakenings are

The
o:

a)

The very frequent one, especially before

want offeeling,
for avaurBrjna,

t,

of t to

dvaurdriaia,
t^atri fo

from dvaiadrjTos,
without feeling,

^avTt,, they swy.

On the rejection of v and the compensation for it, which frequently occur in this case, see 49, 05s. 3, c ; comp. 187. b) The weakening of initial o- before vowels to the
spiritus asper
5r,

swine, together with

for ai-a-Trj-iu,

<rvs.

Comp. Lat.

su-s.

1-a-Trj-ii.i,

I place. Comp. Lat. si-sto ( 308,

of sounds.

327,

5, 6).

61.

3.

The

entire rejection

The

fol-

lowing cases are important

a) cr is rejected where it would have to stand between two consonants in inflexion
yeypdcj>-dai for yeypa(j)-a-dai, to be written, St. ypa<i>, Pres. ypd(j)o>.

TcTV^-6e
b)
a-

Te-Tvcj)-cr6e, be

ye struck,
is

tvtt,

TinTa).

between two vowels

very often rejected

Xiye-ai, Xeyi; ( 38) for Xfyetrat, thou art said, St. Xey, Pr. Xtyo). ibfiKw-o for e6eiKw<T0, thou wast shewn, Pr. SeUvv/ii.

yive-os for ycvEcror, of the race, St, ycvecr ( 166).

The rejection of a vowel between consonants in (?) the middle of a word is called st/ncope (crvyKOTrr])
i-TTT-o-iJbTjv

for e-n-er-o-fi/qv,

I fiew,

St.

tt^t

326, 34).

Comp.

51, Obs. 2.

62. 4.

The

doubling of a consonant.

This

is

rare.

60. Dialects.

The

older Att. less frequently: T^/iepoi'=(7ij/iepoj/, to-day.

is
:

61. Dialects.
TiTTore,

why

ever,

62. Dialects.

The Dorians retain t: they say. Syncope more frequent in Homer tiVte why? dKeKKeTO=i-Ke-KeKeTo, he In Homer simple consonants are readily doubled
(j)avTi=(j)a(ri(y'),

for

called, St. iceX.

the mutes more rarely: ojrjr(Bs=Att. on-oir, how; o;rroios=Att. diroms, gualis; oT7-4=At.t, ori, that: the vocal consonants often:


22

CHANGES AT THE END OF WOKDS.

6S,

it has not arisen through the assimilations menThe liquid p is the tioned above ( 47, 505, 51, 56). hurled most frequently doubled eppl-^fra for 6ply}ra,

when

dppr]KTo<s for a-prjKTO'i, not hreaJcable.

The

aspirates can
:

be doubled only by the corresponding tenuis

Ba%o?,

E.

Changes of sound at the end of a word.

63. When a word ending in a vowel is followed by another beginning with a vowel, whether accompanied by a spiritus lenis or asper, there is a hiatus. The Greeks very often suffer the hiatus in prose ; but frequently the hiatus is avoided, especially if the &st word
is

is

a shorter one and of itself of little importance. This done in three ways, that is, either by elision (rejec-

tion of the final vowel), or

by

crasis

(contraction of

the two vowels), or by synizesis (collapse of two syllables

into one).

eXXa|3E=Att.
smiling
great;
lack.
;

eXa|3f,

Tie

took

<^tXo;ifiet8^s= Att. (piKo/ieiSfis, readily

;

iiSvvTjTos= Att. fv-myros, well-woven

6(r<rov= Att. otTOV,how

vcKva'(Ti= Ait. vckvcti, to the corpses; 6iritr<ra= Att. oniaa,

Homer sometimes has a single p where the a>Kvpoos=aKippoos, swift-flowing. Often also hoth forms are usual together 'Ax'Xeuj and 'AxiKKcis, 'OSutreur and
the contrary,
:

On

Attic has double

'Odv(r(Tevs.

63. Dialects, ^The Homeric dialect admits the hiatus in manycases : the most important are :
1.

is

The

hiatus

only apparent in words with the digamma

Kara

oiKov for Kara foiKov, at home.

2.
is

It is allowed after
:

weak vowels

in forms with

which

elision

naiSi oiraa-acu, he gave to the son. 3. It is softened by a pause or a csesura after the first short syllable of the third foot : Kadtjo-o, iji^ 8' inmetdeo fivBc^, sit down,

not usual

and obey my word ; rav o ?| iyevovro eVi fieyapoitri, of which six were horn to him in the chambers. 4. A long vowel or diphthong before another in the thesis becomes short, and causes only an improper or weak hiatus : 'ArpuSai re Kol aXXoi VKvr]p.iBes 'Ax<"-'h ^^ Atridae and ye other weU-greaved
Achaeans

---_

Digitized

Comp. 75^ by Microsoft

j) 2.

: :

65.

ElilSION

CEASIS.

23

64, 1. Elision, or

the rejection of the final vowel,

of which the apostrophe ( 15) is the sign, occurs only with short final vowels, but never with v; most fre-

quently at the end of dissyllabic prepositions, conjunctions,

and adverbs
eBvvaro,
;

Itt'

aiT&

with

ovB'

he could not even,

Mm, for lirl avraj, aW' ^\6ev, but he

came

less frequently at the

01 iravr

eha/yyeXXovre';,
the whole,

i. e.,

end of nouns and verbs oi irdma eha'yyeK'KovTe';,

who reported
Obs. 1.

round, axpi and /lexP' ^^^> ^^^ never suffer elision. 2. In compounds also the elision occurs, without however heing indicated by the apostrophe eTr-epxoiuu from iTn-ep^oiiai, I come up ; but ircpiipxoiiai, I go round, 3. On the change of consonants occurring with elision (e'^' fniepa),
prepositions jrepi

The

the conjunction

Sn

that,

see 52.

65. 2.

Cram

(Kpaa^, mixing),
is

is

governed, on the

frequent with the poets even in nominal and verbal forms are elided, but also the diphthongs at and oi, in the verbal terminations /iot, <rai, rat, (rBai, and in the forms \ioi and toi. In Homer i in on that is also sometimes elided.
64. Dialects.
;

Elision

much more
,

than in prose

thus, not only f and

change of the final vowel, occurring only in poets, is the Apocope (airoKomi). It is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word beginning with a consonant. The apocope is frequent in

Homer with

the prepositions avd, Kara, itapa, and with the conjunc:

and vno it takes place in compounds as well as at the meeting of two separate words. The v of av(a) then suffers the changes described in 51 ; the t of Kar^a), the TT of a5r(d) and vit(o) are made like the following consonant avhveTat^=ava^veTai emerges, Kait jrediov^Kara Tre&lov on the plain, Ka\X(7re=KarcXure left behind, 7rdp8eTO=^7rapi6TO put before, djr7rip.i^fi. mroTteiJAJrei, will send away, KarBaveiv := Karadaveiv die.
tion apa now, seldom with airb

Crasis in Homer is very rare, but very frequent 65. Dialects, Kal oSiperai and in the Attic poets : e. g. oi^ 6 i^, KaiSvperai

=
:

is

laments,

king, x^TFoa'ci^Koi dirocrot andhow many. Herod. SiXXoi=oi oXXoi the rest. The loss of a short initial vowel

Z)va^^& Sva^

sometimes indicated by the apostrophe ( 15)

ego, ^St] '^epx^rai

ne

p^

'yi>

pij

iya

rjbjj

i^epxerai

hfi is

dkeady coming

out.

Digitized

by Microsoft

24

STNIZBSIS.

66

whole, by the laws given for contraction ( 36 39). I occurs chiefly after forms of the article, of the relativ(

pronoun (especially o quod and a quae), after the pre position irpo, for, before, Lat. pro, and the conjunctior Kai, and. The syllable produced by crasis is neeessarili,
long.

The
from

sign of crasis
to,

is

the coronis ( 16)

to,

rop/aOd
the othei

bona,

ar/a9d,

raXKa from

dWa,

things, rovvofia, the

name, from to

ovofjua,

ravTo, the game,

for TO avTO.
Ohs. 1.
its

The rough breathing of the

:

article or relative

maintains

place in spite of crasis

ai/ijp

the

man

irregular for 6 avrjp,

which case the coronis disappears ; in Bolimriov from to Ijidnov the dress, the spiritus asper has changed r into 6 ( 52), so also Bdrepov irregular for to irepov tlie other.
in
2.

The new when t is

becomes

syllable,

formed

by

crasis,

has

subscript only
koI eV arid in

the last of the contracted vowels:

On

but koI elra and then becomes Kara. the accent with crasis, 89.
kuu,

66. 3. Synizeds (sinking, comp. 39) occurs at the meeting of two words, only after a long vowel, especially after the conjunctions eirei, as, rj, or, rj num, fiij, not, and after eyo), I: ewel oi,as not; firj dXkoi, ne alii,

eyw^v,

I not.

It is perceptible only in

The poets,

who

reckon the two syllables as one.

67.

vocal ones,

v, p,

Greek word ends in any eonsmant except the and ? (f, -,|r). The only exceptions are
:

(before consonants ov) and the preposition eK, out of (before vowels ef), which attach themselves so closely to the following word that their can hardly be looked upon as final.
ou/c

the negative

When any other consonant, except these three, appears

at the end of a word, it
p.Oii

is

usually rejected

honey (meT)io-! jieXiT (Gen. fieXiT-os) 1 1^''^' hody crcop.aT (Gen. <ra.ftaT-(ft) f ''P- ^o-av they were ^jo-avr (comp. Lat. eratit)
,r&p.a

Digitized

by Microsoft


68.

; :

MOVEABLE CONSONANTS.

25

But mute Dentals

vocal
s.

in this case are often changed into

from wpori

S061

wpo'r for TtpoT

to (Horn.).

80s

80B

give.

Tepas

repar Gen.

repar-os miracle.

68. Certain words and forms have, after a short vowel at the end, a moveable v (v e^eXKvariKov). This V is used before words which begin with a vowel by which the hiatus is avoided and before longer pauses. Poets employ it also before consonants, espe-

cially at the

end of the verse, to make it more sonorous. The words and forms which have a moveable v are
:

the following
1.

The Dat.
Trao-i

PI. in cri(v)

iracnv eScoKa,
it

I gave

to all

but
2.

hoKel ovtco^ elvai, to all

seems
(7i(v)
:

to be so.

The

designations of place in
;

'Adi^vrjaiv ?iVy

he was at -Athens

but

'Kdrivrjo-t

roSe iyevero, this hap-

pened at Athens.
3. The single words eUoa-L{v), twenty ; 7repva-i(v), last year; audi nravrdTrdai(v), entirely ; e'lKoa-iv dvBpei;, twenty men ; but eUoav 'yvvaiKe'i, twenty women.

4.

The

third person Sing, in

e(i')

eaaxrev avTov<;, he

saved them,

but

ea-toa-e

tov? 'A^iji/atbu?, he saved the

Athenians.
5. The third person PI. as well as Sing, in a-i(v) XiyovaLv eS they speaJc well, but Xeyova-L tovto, they saythis; heiKVucnv eKeure, he points there, but Seiicvvcrt tou

dvSpa, he points out the man.

68. Dialects. To the words which have a moveable v there ar& avev6e{v), from added in Homer the adverts of place in 6e(v) afar; n:apoi6e{v),fromlefore, formerly ; the particles KeXv), ^erAops, and vi(y), now. The New-Ionic dialect, which admits the immediate succession of On the k in ovk before a spiritus vowels, omits the moveable
:

asper,

52 D.
Digitized

by Microsoft


26
69.

DIVISION OF SYLLABLES.
Ols. 1.In like manner which becomes x before the
ov, not, takes

69.

spiritus asper (

k onl^ before vowels, 52) ov tprjo-i, he

:

ovk diros, not he himself; oix ovras, not so. The k appears also in ovuin and jxriKin, no more. rijc voKeas, out of 2. ex, out of, is e'l before vowels (Lat. ex) : the city ; e| aKpoTvokeas, out of the acropolis, or castle ; iicKeya,
says not
;

I speak
3.

out

i^sKeyov,

I spoTce

out.

Without any

definite reason the

words ovras, thus (adverb

of ovTos, thii), axpis, iiexp's, till, very frequently lose their final s ; hut TroWaKis, many times, loses it only in the poets

Chap. IV.

Division
A.

of Syllables and theik

Quantity.
Division of Syllables.
collection)

70.

The Syllables (avkXa^ij,

in

Greek

words are divided according to the following rules. Every vowel which stands before another, but does not form a diphthong with it, or collapse with it by synizesis ( 39), is reckoned a separate syllable: i-arpoi;,
physician, trisyllabic.

consonant which stands between two vowels, 71. belongs to the second syllable e-%6f, has ; ov-to^, this ;
:

l-KOrvoi;, capahle.

Two
left

or

more consonants usually belong

:

to the fol-

lowing vowel

o-ttXoS?,

simple ;
a-fiv6<;,

d-pi,-a-Te-p6<i,

on the

hand; e-axov,
e-^co,

had;

lamb;

i-y6p6<;, ini-

mical; likewise double consonants:

see;

o-yjro-fjt,ai,

shall

T sit.

l. Liquids and nasals join the 72. Exceptions, preceding vowel: ap-fia carriage; aSe\-(f)6';, brotJier

I laugh; ev-Bov, within; d/x-<p(o, loth, ambo. only join the foUowiag vowel: tcd-fivo), I suffer. 2. When a consonant is doubled, the first belongs to the preceding, the second to the follovsdng syllable: iTT-Tro?, horse ; ^aX-Xo), I throw ; Ilvp-po'i. The same
Ka/y-Xa^co,
fiv
Digitized

by Microsoft


76.

QUANTITY.

27

takes place -when aspirates follow the correspondiDg tenues ^Kt-OIs, BaK-j^o?, "Zair-^co.
:

73. Compounds are divided into the elements out of which they are formed <7vv-exo>, I Jiold together
:

e^'dyeo,

I drive
With

out.

B.
74.

Quantity/.

regard to the quantity (length or shortness) of syllables, the same rules, in general, hold good An important excepfor the Greek as for the Latin.
tion, however, consists in one vowel before the other not needing to be short in Greek Ow^, penance ; '\d6<;, Nor do the special Latin rules people ; ^eKrfov, better.
:

for final syllables

hold good in Greek.

syllable is long by nature when it contains a 75. long vowel or diphthong ifiet<;, you ; Kpivw, I decide ; aha, I sing. The recognition of quantity in Greek is rendered much easier by the characters h6fw<;, room, house; S&fui, hmtse ; in other cases by the accent the rest can be learnt only by practice, ( 83, 84)
:
:

and from the

Ohs.
J

lexicon.
syllable must, of course, he long
:

Every contracted
A
syllable

aicay.

^ aiKiov, lp6s = Upos, Iwly.

is

76.

long by position,

when a vowel

is

Diphthongs and long vowels are very seldom 74. Dialects. shortened before vowels in the same word Hom. olos '^qualis " "),
:

and

/Se^Xijat,

with short

tj.

1. The' quantity of the common vowels is very 75. Dialects. fmcertain generally, but especially in Hom. "tojiev, let us go. Apes Ares, Ares. Apes, final syllable ending in a long vowel or diphthong in Hom. 2. and the tragic choruses is shortened before a following vowel ooi ('"" '), rjjievri iv, sitting in^'"" '). Comp. they were at home

fcrai/,

63, D. 4.
"" tl/uicriv ("

But those words which began with digamma

( 34, D.)

leave a preceding vowel long in

xoXXct re arlX^av koI ""), glittering with beauty and garments. Digitized by Microsoft
:

Hom.

28
followed
a)

QUANTITY.

77.

by two

or

more consonants, or a double conso-

nant, whetner

both consonants or the double consonant stand

:

m
.

the same word

b)

x^/'A'"'

^oy {'

")> e'l'?'

^^^ C ")'

Ka<rT&j/>

rest the first concludes the first word, and the God {"' "), iv tovto), Oeo'i Be, hut begin the second
:

meanwhile ( ), or the beginc) both or the double consonant stand at ), ning of the second word to, KTTjfiaTa, the goods (
:

i^Syv,

the living one ("

").

Ohs.When

the vowel thus placed is already long hy nature, this in the pronunciation : the a in TrpSa-a-o), I act, sounds differently from that of Tatra-m, I arrange, though both words make a spondee in verse ; that in fiaXKov different

must be indicated

from that of koKKos, beauty, though both form a trochee.

a vowel short by nature stands before a v, /m following, the syllable may be long (^ or short reKvov, child (' "), tk^Xo?, blind "), rt Spa?, ('')? what art thou doing The syllable, however, is necessarily long in the fol 77.

When
:

mute with

\, p,

lowing cases
78. a) when the mute stands at the end of the first, the liquid or nasal at the beginning of the second

in

word e'/c vrjcav, out of tJie ships ( ), and in compounds which the mute belongs to the first element iKXeya,
: :

I speak
b)

out

when a

soft

mute

^i^Xos, book

( "),

(/3,

7, S) is

followed
"),

by

X,

/a,

or v
).

Ta/y/j,a,

task

"
(

e'^iZva,

snake

77. Dialects. In Horn, a mute with X, p, v, fz following, almost regularly makes position: reKvov ri Kkaieis, child, why vttvos navbafioraip, all-subduing sleep weepest thou ? ( ), "" Nay, even X, p, v, fi, at the beginning of words have "). ( often the power of lengthening the short final vowel of the pre-

ceding word KoKrjVTc iieyDiKrjVTe,abeaut'^ulandgreat ( """"V fi in the Stan Sei (SeTcrai), fear, and in Sijv, long, has the same
:

effect.

Digitized

by Microsoft


83.

ACCENTS.

29

Chap. Y.
79.

Accents.

The general
:

rules for tlie accentuation of words

are the following

1. Every word must have cme and can never have more than one principal accent, which is called simply

the accent
<3-KevaaTo<;,

iroKinrpop/iJLocrvv'q,

busy occupation ; atrapa-

unprepared.

On

the designation of words

according to the accent, see 17, 19, 21.

80.
2.

accent or the acute

circumflex

There are two kinds of accents, the sharp (o^ela), and the lengthened or the

(irepccnrco/jievr]).

On

the

mode

of using both,

see 17, 21.

81.

3.

The

acute

may

syllables, the circumflex only

be upon long or short on such syllables as are

X'^jco,

long hy nature :
beautiful ;

as, Xeyeo,
trUiC ;

I say ;

I cease ;
man ;

Ka\6<;,

a\,rjd'^<;,

av6pco7ro<;,

KSLfievo^,

lying

Keirai, he lies ; aSi/ia, body ; eS, well.

82. 4.
three

The
last

acute accent can be only

on one of

the

last

syllables,

when
said.

the

airoiKov (Gen.)

but two only is short: diroiKo<;, colonist, but not eXeyov, I said, but not eKeyrjv, I was
the
last

and on

83. 5. The circumflex can be only on owe of the last two syllables, and on the last but one only when the ctvkov, fig, but not avKov, iMst is short by nature (Gen.) o-m/jm, body, but not aafjuiTo^ (Gen.) irpd^i';,
:

act,

but not

'7rpa^ei<i

(Nom. PL).

Ols. 1.

When the last syllahle is long by position, it does not hinder the circumflex from being on the last syllable but one a?\a^, furrow, Gen. avkaKos, but it does when it is long by nature as well as by position, 6(i>pd^, hreast-plafe. Gen. Smpaxos.
Comp.
145.

2.

Exceptions to 4 and 5 will be adduced separately in the chapters on infiexions. It is specially to be observed, that
Digitized

by Microsoft

:;

30
most
01
:

ACCENTS.
of the exceptions occur

S 84.
final syllables

with the
3,

m cu

and
he is

ajrotKot,

although

ot is long, yvmfiai, opinions, rvTrreTai,

strucJc.

Comp.

108,

122 D.

133, 157, 229, 268.

last syllable but one, when long by 84. e. nature, can have no other accent but the circumflex, if

the last
^PXov,

is

short

by nature:
: :

(pevye, flee,

not ^evye:

reigned, not fip^ov

^\ff, (Gen. ipuKo<;) however, be without an accent

of the same age, not It may, 'Kparlvo'i, not 'Kpartvo<;.

rjKi^,
:

elTri,

speak ; avOpooiro'i,

man.
Obs. 1.

Apparent
:

exceptions, such as more, so that, ^8e, this,

are explained in 94. 2. So fixed is the rule, apart from these cases, that the quantity
of the final syllable or of the last but one may often be inferred from the accent Wi (X), go ; wpSra [prima Nom. PI.] (&) yvvalKas (5), women, Aco. PI. ; yvaims (a), opinions. Ace. PI.

Compound words have the accent on the but one of the word, as far as is possible according to 82, &c. amOi, go away; a^CKo<;, friend 85.
7.

last part

less ;

(j)LK6<yvvo^,

friendly
besides.

to

women

aTroSc;, give

back ;

7rapev6e^,

put in

(Comp.

359, Obs. 2.)

86. The accent of a word is variously altered by the changes which a word undergoes, as well as by the connexion of a word with others in a sentence. That is
1. Every oxytone subdues its sharp tone when followed by another word, so that the grave takes the nlace of the acute. (Comp. 20.)

87.

2.

syllable

In a contraction in the middle of a word, the produced by contraction acquires no accent if

it:

none of the syllables to be contracted had

yevov;, of the race;
rifiae
-rlfia,

7ei'eo?

honour.

The accent

of a contracted last syllable but one is manifest of itself from the general rules on accent, hence rifi&vre^, honouring (Norn. PI.) from nfjAovre<!, ti/moivtcov (Gen. PI.) from rifiaovTwv (according to 83 and 84). A

contracted final syllable has

Digitized

by Microsoft

91-

ACCENTS.

31

) the circumflex,

when
:

syllables
'Xpvcrov,

was accented

niidei, rt/ia, he

the first of the uncontracted honours ; 'xpva-eov

last

b)

of ff olden ; the acute, when the

standing.

was accented: eorai?

ecrT(B9,

88. 3. With elision ( 64) oxytone prepositions and conjunctions entirely lose their accent ; all other kinds of words throw it upon the previous syllable as acutes

eV
seus

avT&, on him

= iirl

airS, ovB'

iSvvdfj/rjv,

not even

= ovSe
With

iSvvd/jLrjv,

el>' 'OSva-eu<;,

I could I am Odys-

elfil

'OSuo-eu?, cttt' ^crav, there were seven

= eirTo,

rjaav.

the first word wya6d, Oolfidriov, the dress TO Ifidriov. Only when paroxytones change the first syllable by crasis into one long by nature, this receives a circumflex: ra ak\a, alia, gives raXKa, to
is lost
:

89. 4.

arasis ( 65) the accent of

Tar/add, bona

= ra

epyov, the work, Totipyov.

On

the changes of the accent in declension, see 107-109 the accent of verbs, see 229, and 331-333.

on

90.

The

dissyllabic prepositions, with the exception

of
to

dfi<})l, dvrl,,

dvd. Bid, when placed after the noun or verb which they belong, throw their accent on to the first
:

syllable like

tovtoiv

irepi

about those (rrepX Totnav)

in

manner when, used

evea-Ti,
it

adverbially, they include the

substantive verb, as irdpa

evi

= irdpean,

it

is there,

near ;
446.

is

therein, is possible.
is

This drawing

back of the accent

91.

called anastrophe.

Comp.

Some words

of one and of two syllables unite so

enclitics (iyKXtTiical

closely with the preceding word, that they throw their

accent on to it. Such words are called

90. Dialects,

Prepositions,

whose

final syllable is lost

by elision,

have not the accent even when they occupy the position indicated in 90. Horn. T^a-i trap elvdens xoKkcvov, among them I forged nine
years long.
Digitized

by Microsoft

32
Xe'^et?,

ENCLITICS.

S2

e.

inclining words),

and the throwing hack of th

accent, is called inclination.

92.
1.

The following are enclitics The indefinite pronoun rh, tI, some
all

one, something

through
2.
fiol,

forms

( 214).
/u,ov

The
fi.e,

three personal pronouns, in the forms

mei,

mihi,

me;

crov,

croi,

a-e,

tui,

tibi,

te

01), ol, e,

sui, sibi, se ;

crcficoiv,

to

them two ; and

afiai,(v)

to them.
3.

The

Indicative Pres. of

el/Mi,

I am,

and of

(j^Tjfii

inquam, with the exception of the second Pers. Sing

el

and
4.

<f>y<;.

The

indefinite adverbs
irol,
;

ttou or
;

ttoOl,

somewhere.

TTij,

somehow ;
sometime

somewhither

iroOev,
-ttco,

from somewhere

irore,
5.

ttcb?,

somehow

yet.

The particles 76, qwidem ; re, and ; rot, trulg ; vvv oi now ; Horn. Keu or /ce, perhaps, I suppose ; pa, (apa), then vv, Horn, dijv, truly ; -Trip, very ; and Se (meaning towards and as a demonstrative appendage). Comp. 212.
93.

These words throw their accent back on

preceding oxytone leaves
(

th(

preceding word, in the following manner

a)

A
:

subdued
clitic

20),

and
ri,

aryaOov

its sharp tone un tnen serves also for the en something good ; avTo'i ifyrjatv, hi

this

himself says.
entirely lost

After a perispome the accent of the enclitic ii opo) rti/a?, I see some ; eS iarw, it is well Ti/J,a> a-e, I honour thee. c) After a paroxytom, enclitics of one syllable entirelj
b)
:

lose their accent;

their accent

on the

last syllable:

Xojo^
Tivojv

a speech ; (Gen. PL).

Tt?,

but those of two syllables retail ^tXo? /aov, my friend but \670t rti/e?, some speeches, Xoyan

92. Dialects. also

<r(i>ias

The Ionic additional form of

= Att. o-^as and
by Microsoft
Digitized

el, e?t is

enclitic,

si

(Ace. PI.) them

/xiV,

Um,

her,

205

97.

ENCLITICS.

33

and properispomes retain theii but receive also from the following enclitic another accent as acute on the last syllable, which remains unsubdued: dvOpwirots rt?, a man; ^e^aiol
d) Proparoxytofms

accent,

ela-Lv, Tti'e?,
e)

they are firm

a-a/id ye, the

body at

least ; TratSes

some

boys.
(

Atona
acutes
:

97) receive

the accent of following enclitics as

;

oil

^ijo-w, he says not

as

re,

and

Jioiv.

94.

words of one syllable form one word with thus, asre, so that ; fire, sive ; ovre, neque jirjTc, neque ; owsre, capable ; osris, whoever ; rJToi, truly KaiToi, and yet ; to this also helongs the he mentioned in 92, obe, this one ; o'lKaSe, homewards. These words form partly 5 apparent exceptions to 79 and 84.
Obs.
enclitics following
: :

Several

95.

/)

When
its

sereral enchtics follow one another,

:

each throws
<jyr)cri

accent upon the preceding

ever says to me.

e'i

rk

fiol

TTOTe, if

any one

96.

The

enclitics in certain cases retain their accent

(become
1.

orthotoned), viz.

enclitic forms the first word in the senand therefore has nothing on which to throw its accent: rtve? Xer/ovai, some say. This position, how-

when an

tence,

ever, is rare.
2.

when an
denotes
there is

mean you
ecTTt

no one
Comp.

encKtic

is

made emphatic:
possible, it

<re 'kiryco,

else ; el ea-riv, if it is really so.

When
:

exist,

be allowed,

retains the
ea-ri

accent and that too on the last syllable but one

0eo<!,

a God; ovk ecmv,

it is

not allowed, not

possible.
3.

315, Obs.
:

2.
yjrevSrj,

After ehsion
i^enS^.

ravr

ecrrt,

this

'is

false

Tavrd ian
93, c. 97.

4. Enclitics

of two syllables, in the case mentioned

Atona,

i.

e.,

proclitics or inclinia(g>f&i'i*]/i(fer(^ceeveral

words without accent, also called words of one

34
syllable,

ATONA.

which have so little independence, that i regard to accent they combine with the following word

They are the

1.

following

2.

(into
3.

o, t], ol, al the prepositions, ev (in with the Dat.), eV or ei with the Ace), iic or i^ out of ; the conjunctions, el, if, and o)?, how, that, th

of the article, the forms

latter also in its use as preposition to ;

4.
Ots.

the negative ov or ovk (ovx).

ovxi,

a more emphatic

ov, is

always accented.
cases, viz.

98.

Atona receive the accent only in two

a)

when they are at the end of a sentence, and therefon

: 5

have no following word on which they can rest ^^? ov Do you say so or not P ; so always ax; when place( after the word with which a comparison is made 6eo d)?, like a god, Horn.
; :

b)
its

when followed by an
:

enclitic,

accent

ov <^<n, he says not.

which throws bad Comp. 93, c.

99. The following particles are distinguished accord ing to the accent: rj, as, or, and 5}, truly, or interrogative, Lat. num ; dpa, now, consequently, and apa as ai

interrogative
of transition
;

vvv, now,
to?,

and enclitic vv(v), now, particle how, and wy, so; ovkovv, therefore, and

ovKovv, not therefore.

Digitized

by Microsoft


100.

DECLENSION.

35

11.INFLEXION.

A.INFLEXION OP NOUNS AND PEONOUNS.

Chap. VI.
^Declension of Substantives and Adjectives.

100. Inflexion is the change which nouns, pronouns and verbs undergo, to indicate their relation in a sentence. A distinction must be made in inflexion between Stem and Termination. Stem is the fixed part, Termination the changeable part which is appended to the Stem to

indicate the different relations.

.

The

inflexion of nouns

and pronouns

is

called Declen-

the nominal and pronominal Stems are modified according to Cases, the terminations added to them
sion.

As

are called Qase-endings. The form, which arises, from a case-ending being added to a Stem, is called the Caseform. Thus -Trpa/y/j.aT-o^ is a case-form of the Stem

formed by means of the case-ending -09. Great care must be taken not to confound the Stem and the Nominative case. The Nominative is itself a case-form, often quite different from the Stem. Thus the Nominative of the Stem irpar/fiuT is wpai^iia, thing. x6yo<;, speech, is the Nominative of the Stem Xcyo, which appears, for example, in the compound word Xoyo'
irpar/fiaT,
r/paxfyo-g,

a writer of

speeches.*

The Greeks
1.

distinguish in the Declension

:

Three Numbers

the Singular for one, the

Dual

for

two, the Plural

2.

for several.

Mve

sative, Vocative.

Gases: Nominative, Genitive, Dative, AccuThe Dual has only two case-forms,

one for the Nom., Ace, and Voc, the other for the Gen. and Dat. In the Plur. the Voc. is always like the Nbm.
3.

Three Genders: Mascidine, Feminine, Neuter.

Digiluad by Mlcr6S6fe&
TliA St-pm
-nnll

alwavR

lip,

left

unaccented.

36
^ 1.

GEHDEK OF SUBSTANTIVES.
101.

lO'l

The gender

is

known :

certain general characteristics of sex, ii which the Greek language almost entirely coincidei Besides the rule founded in the with the Latin.

From

nature of things, that the designations of male personi are masculine, those of females feminine, the following
rules are to

be observed

102. a)

rivers

The names of rivers and winds (gods a and winds) and months (o fjurjv the month) arc
:

masculine

6 Eu/xBra?, the river

Eurotas ;

6 Zecj)vpo^,

th

west wind; o '^Karofi/Satdv, the month Secafomiaeon.

103. b)
{fj

The names

of trees, lands

(rj

yr)

the land)
,

islands
f)

vrjao<; the

island)

oak; 17 island of Lesbos;

Bpv'i,

the

and most cities, are feminine 'ApKaSla, Arcadia; rj Aecr/So?, thi

K.6\o^a>v, the
i. e.

7)

Most

abstract substantives also,

city of Colophon. those which denote

:

a condition, relation, act or property, are feminine

iX/Trh,
rj

9;

hope ;

rj

vmtj, victory

t]

BiKaiocrvvr), righteousness

TU'^vri]';,

quickness.

104.

the Jig ;

c) Many names of fruits are neuter : to (tvkov. most diminutives also both of masculine and
:

feminine words

to 'yepovriov dimin. of
rj

yipcov, the ola

man;
a word

to <yvvaiov dimin. of

<yvvri,

word, which is name " man ;" to BiKaioavmi. the idea of "righteousness;" and the names of the letters, to aX<f)a, to a-lyfia.
ther, every
:

name and

woman. Furadduced merely as

the

to avOpairo'i, the

105.

2.

From

the ending of the Stem the gender u

known according
3.

to 113, 125, 137-140. In Declension the Neuter may be distinguished

from the Masculine and Feminine, for all Neuters have a) no Accusative or Yocative distinct from the Nom. b) no s as case-sign of the Nom. Sing. c) the ending d in Nom. Ace. and Voc. PI.
106. The Greek language, like the English, employs the definite Article. The forms of the Article are Digitized by Microsoft the followin"'
:

109.

ACCENT IN DECLENSION.

37

'38

THE A DECLENSION.
rififi
ttoi;?,

Ub

Gen. Sing, of Trora/io?, river ; honour ; ttoS&v Gen. PL of

Pat. Sing, of
foot;
uurjvolv

n-fir],

Gen.

Dual of

iJLT^v,

mcmth.

110. Originally there was only a single declension, which reason much has still remained common, which we shall put together below, 173. But we disfor

Two Principal Declensions according, to the ending of the Stems 1. the First Principal Declension (vowel declenMon), which comprehends the Stems ending in a and a, and 2. the Second Principal Declension (consonant declentinguish
sion),

which comprehends the Stems ending in consoc,

nants, but also those iu the soft Towels

v,

in diphthongs,

and a small number of Stems in

o.

First Peincipal Declension.

(

Vowel-declension^

111. The into two, viz.

first

principal declension

is

subdivided

A.
B.

TJie

A Declension
O
Declension.
is

The

What

is

common
A.

to both

put together below,

134.

The

Declension.

(Commonly

called the First Declension.)

112. The A Declension comprehends those words, whose Stems end in a. In certain cases, however, this a becomes tj. Hence the A Declension of the Greeks corresponds both to the A or first, and to the E or fifth Declension of the Latin language.

113.

The

Declension contains only Masculines

and Feminines.

The two genders are most easily distin-guished in the Nom. Sing., in which the mascuUnes take ?, the feminines no case-ending. Hence the terminations
Digitized

by Microsoft

115.

THE A DECLENSION.

39
17,

of the

Nom.
a?,

Sing, are
179.

in the feminine a,

in tlie

masculine

114.

1.

Feminines.

Examples.
Stems.

;;

40
a)

THE A DECLENSION.
a remains
in the

116.

Nom.
crocf>id,

Sing, after

e, i

or

p, (

41)

St. ao^ia,

Nom.

Sing.

wisdom ; Dat. PL

Trirpai^,

Nom.

Sing, irerpa, rock.

I) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after o- and after the i|r, <ro-(or t r ), XX, as well as in double consonants f, the feminine designations in -aiva: St. afia^a, Nom. Sing. a[ia^a, carriage; Gen. PL Xeaivaiv, Nom. Sing.
if,

Xiaivd, lioness.
c)

changed into
ySoj;,

After other vowels and consonants a r] in the Nom. Sing. St. /Soa,
:

is

generally-

Nom.
Koppr),

Sing.

cry ; Ace. PI.

neck

'yvmij-d'i,

Nom. Sing.

<yvQ}iJi-r)
;

(opinion).
temple ;

More important exceptions

Seiprj,

are

to b)
;

ToKp,a, ioldness

dew to c) a-rod, Simra, mode of life.

epa-rj,

to a) Koprj, girl

hall

XPo; colour

2. In order to form the other cases in the 116. Singular according to a given Nom. Sing.

a) If the

Nom.

Sing, ends in
:

17,

throughout the Sing.

Slkt], justice, SIkt]^,

h) If the Nom. Sing, ends in a, always in the Ace. and Vac. : a/j,a^a, dfia^av. c) If the Nom. Sing, ends in a, this letter remains also in the Gren. and Bat. when preceded by a vowel or p Nom. Sing, a-o^id, wisdom, Gen. aocpid^ Nom. ( 41)
:

remains SUy, hUrjv, Ukt). this letter remains

this letter

Sing. cTTod, colonnade, Dat. a-roa

also in

some proper

names with long a: Nom.

Sing.'AT^Sa, Gen. AjjSw, and in fivd (contracted from fj,vda). Gen. yam?. d) Otherwise a of Nom. Sing, becomes 7} in Gen. and Dat. Nom. Sing, fiovaa, Gen. /j,ova7j<; ; Nom. Sing. Blaira, Dat. BiaLTy.
:

117.

Sing., the general ride is

after

For the quantity of a in the Nom. and Ace. a purum (after vowels) and p is long, every other a is short: Bed, goddess
:

afiiXXd, fight.

The exceptions are generally shown by the accent ( 84, Obs. The most important are the fem. designations in -rpia
-f
;

2).

and m fcO^rpm, female player ; fiao-iKeiS, queen (but ^aa-i-Xeia. dominion), and several words with diphthongs in the last syllable but one, ^f^^f^StSt^ood-witt, polpajale.

^^ff^^^/j

120.

THE A DECLENSIOS.

41

118.

bines with the

The Gen. PL has the ending av, which comStem a to form dmv, contr. wv. This is
Q-en.
:

the reason that the

(Exceptions,
181.

PI. of

all

words in

this declen-

sion has the circumflex

"xpopa j(o)pS>v,

\eawa

Xeaivoov

Comp.

123).

119. The Dat. PI. originally ended in <rt, before which t is added to the a of the Stem. The aicri thus formed is usually shortened into at?, but the original form is found even in Attic writers, in poetry and prose.

<Comp.

128, D.)

120.

2.

Masculines.

Examples.

: :

42

THE A DECLENSION.
Ezamples
for Declension.

121

Ta/ilas, treasurer

orparnin??, warrior
jraiSorpi^rjs, wrestling-

dSoXeaxis, iabbler
'AXKi/3iaS>;s

NiKtas, Nicias
Kpirrjs,

Judge

master

121. In the Masculines, as well as in the Feminines,

or p precedes, the a of the Stem remains long after every other letter it becomes 17 in the Nom. Dat. and Ace. Sing. Those words which in the Nom. Sing, end in ti;-s,

when a vowel
and
is
;

and compound words, have a short in (Nom. Sing. Hepar]-^ Persian), ^eafieTpa (Nom. Sing, yecofiirprj-'; landmeasurer). The Voc. Sea-TTora (Nom. Sing. Seo-TroTT?-? lord) draws back the accent, contrary to 107, a, to the first syllable. All others have rj in the Vocative KpoviSrj (Nom. Sing. Kpovi87]-<;).

names

of peoples,
:

the Voc. Sing.

TroXlra, liepad

122. The Declension of the Masculines guished from that of the Feminines

is

distin-

1.

2.

in the Nom. Sing, by ? being added by the Gen. Sing, ending in o v.

to the Stem,

Obs.

The termination of the Gen. Sing, of the masculines

-0,
;
:

is

pro-

which with the a of the Stem forms -ao (see the Homeric dialect) by weakening a to e ( 118 D.) and contracperly
tion ( 37) arises ou

woKirao

(ttoXit-co) ttoXiVou.

121

omits the
imroTo.,
scriba.')

and 122.Dialects. 1. The Epic dialect in some words s of the Nom. Sing., iii which cases the a remains short
ve(^eX?)yepe'Ta, cloud-gatherer.

horseman,

(Comp. Lat. poeta,

71

2.

The Dorians
( 24

also in the
;

masculines put 5 for

and contract 5o

into a.
3.

D.

37 D.
:

3.)

Homer has

three forms in the Gen. Sino-.

a) the original -So

b) -ea>

'Arpeibdo

with the quantity transposed (where is lost by synizesis, 'ArpeiBea. The accent remains unchanged, in 37 D., 39 D.)
:

spite of the

a>

in the final syllable.

The New-Ionic form

is

the

same,
c :)
-a,

by

contraction

'Ep/icia

'Ep/i^s), ^o/)f(B

(Nom.

Sing, ^opeds).
Digitized

(Nom. Sing. 'Epp,ela-s Comp. 37 a.

= Attic

by Microsoft


125.

THE

DECLENSION.

43

^op^as (contracted from /3opea-s nortJi wind), contracts the original So in tlie Gen. Sing., after Doric fashion, into d: fioppd. The same takes place with some Doric and Eoman proper names, and a few other words 'SvWas, Sidla^ 6pvi6o6fipas, fowler Gen. Sing. a.
:

123. In the
is

Masculines

Dual and Plural the Declension of the the same as that of the Feminines.

Exceptions to the accentuation prescribed in 118 are p^p^onj-r, usurer, irrjcrlai, trade-winds. Gen. PL j(pfj(rTa>v (xpicrSiv in
the 0-declension from xpnoros, good) and
irrja-iav.

B.

The

Declension.
Second Declension.)

{Commonly

called the

124. The O Declension comprehends those words whose Stems end in o, together -vvith the few whose Stems end in w ( 132). It answers to the o- or Second Declension in Latin.

125.

The

Declension

is

A Declension in regard to gender.

The termination

the complement of the It contains Masculines

and Neuters, but only few Feminines.

of the Masculines and Feminines in

the Nom. Sing, is o - ?, that of Neuters o-v [Lat. u-s, itrm']. The Masculines and Feminines are declined alike the Neuters are distinguished from them (comp. 105^^

only
1.

by
The Nom. and Voc.
:

Sing, taking the Accusative-

ending V
2.

Bmpo-v

(gift)

[donu-m],
PI.

The Nom. Ace. and Voc.

ending in a

8Sipa

[dona\.

Digitized

by Microsoft

M
Examples

THE O DECLENSION.
126.

123.

130-

THE
Single words:
/3i/3\os,

DECLENSION.

45

5.

hooh; p&^hos, staff; biaKcKros, dialect; dew ; 8ok6s, heam. Many designations of personal beings are common, that is, with the same form they are masculine when they denote a male, feminine when they denote a female d deos, god ; rj deSs, goddess ; 6 3v6pamos.
vocros, disease; Sp6a-os,
:

and

fi

SvBpumos-

128. The ending of the Gen. Sing, is -o, which with the o of the Stem is contracted into ov (comp. 122)

avOpcoiro-o

= avOpmirov.
The Nominative form
is sometimes used the Vocative of deSg:

129,

instead of the YocatiTe form:

is
deX(j)6i;, hrother,

always the same as the Nom. w ^609 [Lat. deus] i has dSeXcjje in the Vocative with the accent thrown back.
Contracted Declension.

130. Several words which have

or

before the
ea,

last letter of

the Stem

may

contract these vowels with

:

the

o.

The

rules of 36

and 37 are here applied

however, contrary to

38, is contracted into d.

128. Dialects.

The Epic
;

dial, in

the Gen. Sing, has the older

:

form -to for the ending

lo with

of the St. produces oio

wdpaa-

iroio, TTcSioio (jrehio-v, field).

We also, however,
:
:

find the Attic av.

Other Epic peculiarities are

Dual ; &fioav
av6panT6iixL(y),

(&fios, shoulder)

-ouv

oiv in the

ort(v)

ois in the
is

which

is also

New-Ionic and

Gen. and Dat. Dat. Plur. : found even in Attic

writers (comp. 119).

130.
Dialects.

The Ionic

dial, leaves the

forms uncontracted.

Digitized

by Microsoft

46

CONTEACTED O DECLENSION.

1S1.

Examples. Stems.
Singular.

O VOV'S

TO oa-Tovv, hone

voo

6(TT0

Nom.
Gen. Dat. Ace.
Voc.

VOO-i

vovs
vol)

o(TTeo-v

oa-Tov-v

vnov

OGTeOV
6a-Ta

o(rTov

via
v6o~v voe
vov-v vov

OfTTa

doTeo-v
oa-reo-v

OCTOV-V
o<rTov-v

Dual.

N. A.

r.

voa
VOOLV
volv

ocrreo)

OfTTOi

a.D.
Plural.

oa-Teocv

OtTTotv

Nom.
Oen. Dat. Ace.
Voc.

vooi

VOL

ncTTea

oa-ra
OffTUiV

voav
VOQIS

vav
vols

oarecov
oirreois

ocrots

voovs
VOQl

vovs
voX

oa-rea ocrria

oara
oa-TCL

Examples
ttXovs,

for Declension.

voyage

^oSs, stream

i8e\<p,8o{ls, Irother's son

131.

Some

irregularities of accentuation occur in

viz.,
is

the contraction,
1.

the

Nom, Dual

made

oxytone,

contrary to
last

87.
2.

compound words leave the accent on the

syllable but one, also contrary to 87: KepLifkfc, Dat. of irepuTfKov^, circumnavigation, for wrepiirXS, from'-^a,. 3. the word Kdveov, basket, is contracted into

contrary to

Kamvv

'

87.

On

contracted adjectives, see

183.

Attic Declension.

132.

A small number of words, instead of

(o),

0-sound

the short

have the long

().

This

a,

at the

end of the

uen. Smg. from the Nominative nfretJ-y.

Digitized

'

by Microsoft

g 134.

ATTIC

DECLENSION.

47

Stem

goes through all the cases, but at the same time takes the case-endings as far as possible. Most of these words have e before a, and for -eto there also occurs the
additional form -do:
Xeoo-?, people,
veco-'i, temple, together with mo-?, together with \d6-'i (comp. 37, D.). This Declension is called the Attic.

On

adjectives in -?, see

fluctuate

between

this

184 on some words which and the second principal declen;

sion, see 174.

Examples.

48
1.

CONSONANT DECLENSION.
the
-9.

ISS.

masculines

have

in

the

Nom.

Sing,

the

ending
2.

the masculines have in the Gen. Sing.

-ov.

( 122,

128)

the ending

3. all three genders have i subscriptum with a long vowel in the Dat. Sing. 4. all three genders have -v in the Ace. Sing. 5. all three genders have the Stem vowel lengthened in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual. e. all three genders afSx -iv to the Stem vowel in the Gen. and Dat. Dual. 7. all three genders have -wv in the Gen. PI. 8. aU three genders affix -aiv or ? with preceding i to the Stem vowel in the Dat. PI. 9. the masculines and feminines affix -i to the Stem vowel in the ISTom. PI.

10. the masculines

and feminiaes

affix -? (for

i/?)

in

the Ace. PL, lengthening the

for the V dropped. ( 42.)

Stem vowel

to compensate

The difference therefore is only in the formation of the Gen. Sing, of the feminines and in the accentuation
of the Gen. PI.

Second Peincipal Declension.

Consonant-declension.
{Commonly

called the

Third Declensim.)

all
I

135. The Second Principal Declension comprehends the Stems which end in consonants, the soft vowels

and V, or diphthongs, and a smaU number of Stems in (Nom. ft)). The Stem is best recognised in the Gen. Sing, where what remains after rejecting the terminao

tion OS

may

XiovT-o<;,

St. 'KeovT

generally be considered as the Stem Gen. (Nom. Xeav, lion), Gen. ^vXaK-o'i,
:

St.

j)vKaK (Nom. (pvKa^, guard).

Digitized

by Microsoft

: :

139.

CONSONAJST DECLENSION.

49

Uence for the exact recognition of a word of this declension, not only the Nominative hut also the Stem or the <3enitive is necessary
as,

Nom.

Soi'r,

St. Suit or

Gen. dairis, meal [Lat. rex,

St. reg or

Gen.

regis].

To

the second principal declension correspond in Latin the third

i.

declensions. In it the case-endings usually appear not mixed up with the end of the Stem. The Stems ending in the soft vowels follow the third declension, hecause the soft vowels ( 35, 1) can be used together with the vowels of the terminations : Gen. 7ri'TU-oy(Stem mrv, Nom. Tviru-s, pine-tree'). In the Stems ending in diphthongs the v is sometimes resolved into F: for example, the Stem ./Sou (Nom. ./SoO-r, ox) was originally in some forms ^oF (Lat. lov), as Gen. '^oF-6s (= iov-is). See 35, Obs. The O Stems have probably lost a final consonant.

and fourth
pure,
e.

136.
all

The Second Principal Declension comprehends

inflexion,

three genders.
105, from their having the

The Neuters may be recognised by the

according to

Nom. and

Ace. alike, and these cases in the

ending -a

awfuiT-a (St.

arasixar,

PL always with the Nom. Sing, cr&ixa, lody).

137. For determining the gender from the Stem the following are the most important rules

Stems in ev (Nom. ev-?), TTjp rap), vt (with Nom. 9 or i; preceded by a long vowel), as well as most Stems in v
a) Masculine are the
rr)p),

(Nom.

Top (Nom.

(of various Nominatives) with a preceding long

St.

'ypa(j>ev,

Nom.
St.

ypa^ev^, writer;
p tjt op,

St.

vowel and Nom.

St.

cfmrrip,

saviour;

Nom.

prjTwp, orator;

\eovT, Nom.

Xecov, lion, leo ; St.

and Nom.

07001', contest.

138. b) Feminine are all Stems in S (Nom. -t? ,-?), most in i (Nom. -t-9)j those in o (Nom. -co or -ca-?), and the names of qualities in ttjt (Nom. -tij-?) St. eXTrtS,
:

Nom.
la-orTf]'^,

iKrrk, hope;

St.

iroXt,

Nom.
St.

TroXt?,

city;

St.

ire 160,

Nom.
equality.
c)

-TreiO-L,

persuasion;

laoTrjr,

Nom.
ytta),

139.

Neuter are the Stems

?

fiar (Nom.

<the substantive SdJ^ffiseiiii^Wdfeoifem. 0? or a?, those in

t

or V which append no

in the Nominative,

and those

50
in p preceded

CONSONAKT DECLENSION.
:

140,

by a short Towel in the Nom. St. cr <b /^ a t, hody ; St. ^evey, Nom. YeVo?, genus; St. Nom. a-Mfia, and Nom. '^r]pa<;, age; St. and Nom. aivanri, mustard;
St.

r)

and Nom.
140.

aa-rv, city ; St.

and Nom.

rjrop, heart.

The following words must be noticed separately

hand; to oS?
r)

r^adTTip (St. <yaa-Tep), belly; 6 irov'i (St. ir oh), foot;

f]

yelp (St. %6tp),

(St.

wt), ear; 6

"Trrj^vi;

(St. -jTrixv),

forearm;

^prjv (St. <f>p6v), diaphragm,

mind; 6 TreXe^u? (St. ireXeKv), axe; 6 ^onrpvi (St. ^orpv), lunch of grapes ; 6 aTa^v^ (St. crra^u), ear of com; 6 a-cfy^^ (St. a-<f>r]K), wasp; 6 /jlv'; (St. /ti/?),
mouse [jwMs]
air ; to
;

tp(;^i5s

(St.

ixSv), fish ; 6 arfp

(St. ae/j),

ttO/j (St.

'Kvp),fire; to vSaip (St. vBut), water.

:

Of two genders (common)

17

6 and are several names of animals, as aXeKTpvau (St. dXe/crpuoj'), cooA and Aera; d and ^ &, or (TVS (St. ii or o-u), swine [susj; 5 and ^ at| (St. aiy), jroai;

d and

(Stem ^ov),ox; and many names of persons j'lVZ; 6 and ^ baljuov (St. baifiov), god and goddess ; 6 and ^ jxavrts, prophet and prophetess.
6

and

fj

/3o{)s

f)

nais (St. n-atS), 5oy and

141.

The endings of the consonant declension

are

the following

CONSONANT DECLENSION.

; ;

143,

51

142.

The accent
:

in the Second Principal Declenlaid

sion deviates from the rales

down

in

107

in

the following point

Words

of one syllable accentuate the Gfen.

and

I>af.

of all numbers on the case-ending (circumflex

if

the

vowel be long,
iroSSiv, TToai.

109)

ttoS-o?, ttoS-i

(but ttoB-o), irohoiv,

Exceptions.
fidvTos

accentuate
1.

Participles, as

&v, heing,

oyros

/3as,

going,

the Genitive and Dative of

all

numbers on

2. TrSr, 3.

the last syllable but one. omnis, has jravros, iravri, but

ttclvtoiv, 7ra<n(y).

The words
TO
<j>S)s,

Trais, io!/
ij

hjiiis,

slave
ij

Bias,

jachall ; Tpds, Trojan

light;

(j>^s, ilister ;

85s, torch; to ovs, ear; 6 arjs,

moth; are paroxytones in Gen.

6(i-av, Tpii-(op, (jidr-av,

PI.

and Dual

jraiS-av, SiJ-d-av,

(j)ci&-(ov,

698-coc, coT-oiv, (ri-av

(Com-

pare further 177, 9).

4.

The words which have become monosyllables by

p

contraction

= cap, spring (ver), rjpos,

6.

rjpi,

142

In regard to the quantity

in
spite

it

must be observed that

short

Stem-vowel, are lengthened: St. no 8, Nom. Sing, nov-s, foot; St. iravr, Nom. Sing. Neut. nav, everything; St. trvp, Nom. Sing. Trip, fire;
several

monosyllables,

of

the

St. a-v,

Nom.

Sing.

<rBr,

loar

143. The Stems

of the Second Principal Declension

Classes

are

divided
I.

into

three

with

different

sub"

divisions

Consonant Stems.
1.

2.
3.

Guttural and Labial Stems. Dental Stems. Liquid Stems.

n. Vowel Stems.
1.

Soft-vowel Stems.

2.

Diphthong Stems.
Stems.

3. o

Ill Elided Stems.

1.

Stems.

2. 3.

T Stems.
Bi^iemSoy Microsoft

52

CONSONANT DECLENSION.

5 144

I.

Consonant Stems.
Guttural and Labial Stems,
in k, %, 7,
ir, (p,

144.

1.

i. e.

Stems

^.

Examples.

t47.

CONSONANT DECLENSION.
146. 2. Dental Stems,
Steins ia

53

i.

e.

t, 6, S, v.

Exam.
Stems.

: ;

54

CONSONANT DECLENSION.
t,
B,

1*^-

sigma the consonants

disappear
altogether
Kopv6-<;, Kopv-^,

0,

when they stand

:

alone,

49)

Xa/47raS-9,

Xa/J-'rra.-^,

but v and vt have the short vowels of the Stem lengthened by way of compensation ( 42), so that d, tj V, become d, I, v; but e

Mmet;

becomes
owe/

i,

and

o,

ov:

Travr-?, 7ra-?, everi/ ;

ei*-?,

el-?,

6BovT-<i, oSov-^, tooth.

Exceptions. The monosyllaHc Stem ttoS [jped] ( 142, b) has the vowel lengthened exceptionally, irov-s [Lat. ^e-s, i. e. ^ec^s] SajxapT has Nom. Sing. ^ Safiap, spouse, for daiiaps, because
of its harshness.
2.

M'fAoMf Sigma being affixed to the Stem;

stead the

but

Stem-vowel, in case it is short, is lengthened, so that by this lengthening ( 42, Obs.) e bein
its

comes
vowel
o

7},

and
St.

becomes
riyefiov,
itself,

a>:

St. Troi/iei',
Tjyeficov.

Nom.

Troifitjv,

shepherd;
is

long of

Nom. the Nom.

If the Stemlike the

Sing,

is

Stem

ar/c6v, contest.

The T of the Stems in vr in this formation is 67: yepovr, Nom. ^yeprnv (for <yepaivT). The simple t of the Participial Stems in or is changed into ?: St. XeXvKor, Nom. Sing. XeXvKco?
rejected according to
(for XeXvKaT), having loosened.
Ohs. 1.

one

The vowel a> shows that s is not a mere affix in XfXuKtir, who lias loosened. Comp. xP'-s', favour, St. x^P"";

05s. 2.

The Stems in 6, 5, as well as those in avr, evr, always form the Nom. Sing, with sigma but Stems of substantives in ovT and the Stems in v generally without y.

147

b.

The Neuter has the pure Stem

(

in the

Nom.

Ace. and Voc. Sing.

136), as far as the laws of sound

in regard to final consonants ( 67) loosened (see 187), \eXvK6<i (for

milk,

admit

it

Xv66v(t),

XeXuKor); yaXa,

lact-is).
Obs.

from the Stem jdXaKr (Gen. YaXa/cr-o? On m-av (Stem Travr), see 142 b.
in
v,

= Lat.
it, id,

On the Aco. Sing,

vd, v8, see 156.

belonging to some Stems in

iS,

Digitized

by Microsoft

 149.

CONSONANT DECLENSION.

55

148. The Vocative of masculines and feminines sometimes has the pure Stem, as far as is possible: "Apre/ii (St. 'ApT6/itS), Alav (St. Alavr), yepov (St. yepovr); sometimes it is like the Nom. (necessarily so when the accent is on the last syllable) ^ye/imv and in all participles even when the accent is not on the last syllable: Xeycav (St. Xeyovr), speaking. The Voc. m-al, boy, from the St. TraiS, is specially to be observed.
: :

Ohs.

The Stems 'ATrAXttH/, Iloa-etSSv, whicli are like the Nom., shorten the Towel and draw back the accent in the Vocative "AjtoXXoj', HocreiSov. The accent is also drawn back in
:

many componnd words

'Aya/iE/o<o', 'Apia-ToyeiTov ( 85).

149. The formation of the Dat. PI. results from the laws of sound ( 49, 50). t, 8, 6 and simple v, are dropped before crt,(v) without leaving any trace; but VT is dropped with the previous vowel lengthened by

way

of compensation.

Exception.

The

adjectives

(not participles) in evr admit no

:

lengthening of the vo*el by way of compensation St. ii^apteiT (Nom. Sing. xap'"f> graceful, Dat. PI. xa/"'f <''(') See Inflexion, 187).

The Vocative of the Stem di/a/cT (Nom. Sing. 148. Dialects. Va|, ruler) is in Hom. ava (shortened from a k a k t : comp. the neuter yaXa, 14-7 5) ; some Stems in vt lose the v in the Voc. : "ArXo for
"ATXavQr).
149. Dialects.
7roS-cri(i'),

Homer forms the

(irovsj/oot)
;

Dat. PI.

7roa-a-i(v)

instead of

Att.

iro<riv

the 8 being assimilated instead

of being rejected.

Digitized

by Microsoft

56
150.

CONSONANT DECLENSION.

150i

Sl54.

CONSONANT DECLENSION.

51

y a a- rep,

Arj/jLrjrep (Noms. iraTrjp, father ; liryrrip, mother; dvyaTrip, daughter; yaaTifjp, belly ; Arj/j.'^T'ripy, reject e in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. ( 61, c.) The first four throw the accent on the case-ending ; the last draws it back (Trarpo?, Aj^/iijr/aos). The e is accented

where it appears firjTepa, in spite of fiijrrjp, except in the Voc, where the accent is drawn back: iraTep, in
:

spite of Trartip, but Ace. Sing. A-^firjrpa.

PI. the syllable
fi7jTpd-a-i(y).
Obs.

In the
(

Dat..

rep becomes by metathesis

ao-Tep

59)

rpa:

The Stem

(Nom.

Sing,

da-rrjp, star)

telongs to these

words only in the formation of the Dat. PI. : da-Tpa.(ri(v). dv^p (St. dpep), see, under the irregular words, 177. 1.
II.
154.
1.

For

Vowel

Stems.
i.

Soft-Vowel Stems,

e.

Stems in

t,

and

v.

Exam.

58

CONSONANT DECLENSION.
155.

155,

The Norn.

Sing. Masc.

and Fem.

is

always

formed by Sigma.

The Neuter

Sing, as well as the

Vocative Sing, of all genders has the pure Stem. Yet sometimes the Norn, form is used for the Vocative, and In the Ace. Sing. this is the case in all monosyllables. Masc. and Fem. v is affixed to the Stem. On the lengthening of monosyllabic Stems, 142 b. But this lengthening takes place also in the Nom. and
Ace. Sing, of some polysyllabic words.
156. Barytones in vr, tZ, lO, uS, vd (Nom. 19, 119), form the Ace. Sing, generally by affixing v after rejecting the Stem-consonant: St. epoh (Nom. epi-'i,

Ace. epi-v; St. KopvO (Nom. Kopv-';, helmet), Ace. Kopv-v ^i. opvld (Nom. opvl-';, bird), Ace. opvl-v. The Oxytones, on the contrary, always have a: e^.7^^-9, hope, Ace. eXTriSa; /cXet'?, key, stands alone; St. KXeiS, Ace. likelv, (seldom KkelB-a,) Ace. PI. /cXet? or KkeiSa's.
strife),
;

Examples.

s,

hope

158.

CONSONANT DECLENSION.

59

Dual and PI. Before the ending of the Gen. Sing, this remains unchanged in the Stems, however, in t, and in some substantive Stems in v, e is followed by cos
;

(instead of o?), called the Attie termination, which does not prevent the accent from being on the antepenult
:

7ro\e-t09, 7re\K-eo'; (Tre\eKV-<;, axe).

Nom.

In the Dat. Sing, ei is contracted into et, in the PI. 66? and Ace. 6a? into et?, and ea of neuter
into
rj.

substantives

Adjectives

tracted form

ea

aarrj,

maintain the unconbut ykvKea.

158. The contraction of 6 6 to i? in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual is rare. The Gen. PI. of Stems in i follows the accent of the Gen. Sing. Troke-cov like TroXe-to?.
:

in v leave this vowel unchanged; but others like aaTv follow the analogy of Stems in t, and change v into e. ve are sometimes contracted into v in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual in
;

Most substantive Stems

the Ace. PI. also

fisK),

we

find t%^t)?, with lyQv-a'^

ofpv-';, eyehrow.
:

{I'^Oi-^;,

and

6(f)pv^,

Ace. PI. of
in the

eyx^eXv--;, eel, retains

v in the Sing.

Gen. e^^eXu-o?
into e
:

but changes
7^^Xei?.

it

Dual and PL

Nom.

PI.

The
its
I

adjective

ffi|Oi-?,

acquainted with, St.

all

Ihpi,,

keeps

imchanged through

the cases.

In the Dat.

158. Dialects. PI. o-is

The Dat.

Ixdv'i is

sometimes doubled

in Horn, coatracted into IxBvl. viKv-aai^v) with yEKu-c(7crt(i')

{vUv-s, corpse)

Digitized

by Microsoft

60

CONSONANT DECLENSION.
159. 2. BipTaJiong Stems,
i.

3E&.

e.

Stems in

ev, av, ov.

Exam.

S 162.

CONSONANT DECLENSION.

61

Some compounds
like

of ttov-?, foot, form the Ace. Sing,

Tpi-jrov^,

Stems in ov:
vav-<;,

three-footed,

Ace. rplirovv.

For

see

among

the iiTegular words,

ei^

177, 11.

161.

The stems

in

moreover have in the

a)
b)

Gen. Sing.,

ax; for 09.

Comp.

157.

Dat. Sing., ei always contracted for el. c) Ace. Sing, and PI., a is long and not contracted. d) Nom. and Voc. PL, ee? contracted by older Attic writers into 17?, by the later into et?.
e) Words which have a vowel before ev may be contracted also in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., and in the Ace.

PI.:

St.

Gen.
Xod'i.
Obs.

Ueipaio)';,

TLeipatev, Nom. Ueipaiev-^, port of Athens, Ace. Ueipatd %oei/-9, measure. Ace. PL
;

The Gen.
is

( 37,
final

in -ems has arisen by transmutation of quantity D. 2) out of the Horn. rjos. Hence the length of the syllable. In the same manner the Ace. Sing, ed has
rja
:

arisen out of

still

ea

is

also found, like eas in the Ace. PI.

as

contracted

by

later writers into eir.

162.

3.

Stems,

i.

e.

Stems in

and a.

Examples.
Stems.

62

CONSONANT DECLENSION.
Examples
!j

163.

for Declension.

rjxoi

(St. Tjxo), echo

KaXvyjro), Ajjra, Sfia-s (St. fi/ito) slave

jx.r]Tpa>-s

(St. firjTpa),

avunculus.

163.

The Stems

in

o, all

feminine, form the N"om.

Sing, without sigma, except the

alSco-i,

shame, Ace.

aiSS).

Stem ai8o, Nom. Sing., The Ace. which is like the

:

Nom. is oxytone (contrary to 87) TreiOw, not n-eiOos. The Vocative ends in ot; all other cases are contracted. The Ace. of Stems in tu usually remains uncontracted. The Stem ka, 'Earn. ^ ew-?, dawn, has
Gen. Sing,
(from
Obs.

ew, Dat.

ea (according to

132), Ace.

eo>

etoa).

Several Stems in ov follow the atove declension in some of

:

dridav, nightingale, Gen. drjSovs, with aijSocos ; eUmv, image, Gen. ehovs (oomp. 171).

their forms

tives also in

eor and vs ('OSytrevs), Datives in

7; :

eV, et,

and Accuj3ao-iXe'-Es.

satives in ea,

TtiS^.
dial, leaves e

The New-Ionic
163. Dialects.
MiVo).

frequently uncontracted
TJpa'L

into old and poetic form for em-y is ^m-s (St. ^0), declined like albi>-s. Some proper names in a in the Nom. Sing, have in the

Horn,

contracts

into ^pa,

Mlvaa

The

New-Ionio

dial,

an Ace. in ovv

tuijToiv,

'low.

Digitized

by Microsoft

165.

CONSONANT DECLENSCON.

63

III.

Elided Stems,
164.
1.

i.

e.

Stems which
Stems which

reject the final

consonant in certain forms.

Stems,

i.

e.

elide sigma.

Exam.
Stems.

: :

M
into o in the
^h)o<;.

CONSONANT DECLENSION,

168.

Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Sing.: St. yeve';, Neuter adjectives leave e unchanged: eiiyevh. Masculines and Femiuines form the Nom. Sing, by lengthening e? into i?? ( 147, 2), as s cannot be affixed evyev^'i from evjeve^, like rroi/i'^v from Trotyu.ei'. Masculines and Femiuines have the pure Stem in the Voc. Sing., and in compound vrords which are not oxytone in Nom. Sing, the accent is on the last syllable but two (comp. 148, 85): Nom. ^(OKparTj^, Voc.
XcoKpaTe<;
Ohs.
;

Nom.
Neuter

Arj/jLoadevrj';,

Voc.

Ar/fioa-Oepe';.

The

aXrjdis (Maso. aKrjdris, true)

:

draws back the

accent in interrogations

SXrjBes, really ?

166. In all other forms ?

^ive-i for yevea-i, \^gener-i\.

:

they are contracted ee in become rj; ea generally rj, but when another vowel stands before e they sometimes become d, according to

is rejected ( 61 and 49) Wherever two vowels meet the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual

41:
St.

St.

ivSee^,

Nom.

eVSe???, defective.

vyie<;,

Nom.

v^wj?, healthy,

vyifi;

The

St. %/3 6 6 9, adjectives in

Nom.
-(f>vri<i

to xP^o<;,

Ace. eVSea; Ace. vyM, but also debt, Neut. PL xped.

(St. (f)ve<;)

have

^vij

and ^va:

evtfivi]';,

well-disposed, ev^vrj

and

eicf>vd.

05s. Barytone
last syllable

adjectives have the accent in the Gen. PI. on the but one, contrary to 87 avrapKav (Nom. airdtiais, self-sufficient). So also rptripris, trireme, used as a substantive, Gen. PL rpcripiDv.
:

167. Proper names in -kXey/s compounded with xXcoy, glory (St. /cXeer), have a double contraction in the Dat. Sing., and a single one in all the other cases Nom. (nepiKXe^f) nJpiK^s, Gen. (nepiKXo9)nepifcXe'o.;r,Dat. (nfptKXcei, UepucXe^i)
:

(cXel,

Acc.

UepL-

(nepilcXeea)

nepmXed, Voc. (n^piKXees) Hcpi'^Xf ty.

vowel before c is often contracted with it in Gen. aTrdovs, Dat. o-Trij-t (from a-Treei) I)at. PL o-Tr^eo-o-^./) and o-jreVo-^j/) ; ^kXc^s:, glorious, Acc. eiiKXelcil <trom cvKXeeas), but o/cXt^eT? (from okXe^s, inglorious).
Horn.
:

166. Dialects.

o-n-eosor a-m'ios, cave,

Herod

.VSee'ey (eVBc^s:, defective),

dv0pm7ro4>via, (dvepmTrocjyv^s,

human)

167. Dialects^The Epic dial, forms 'Hpa^fj,, 'UripaKXij-o,, HpaKX,,-L, HpaKXr,-a; the New-Ionic, 'UpaKXi,,,, Hpa^Xe-os HpaicXc-1, HpaxXf-a.

Digitized

by Microsoft

169.

CONSONANT DECLENSION.

65
elide r.

168. 2,

Stems,

i.

e.

Stems which

Examples. Stems.

66
170.
3.

CONSONAIJT DECLENSION.

170.

Stems,

i.

e.

Stems which

elide

v.

Example.
Stem.

172.

CONSONANT DECLENSION.

67

172. Synopsis of terminations ia the Second Prin-

cipal Declension.

Nom.

68

CONSONANT DECLENSION.

172

Nom.

173.

CONSONANT DECLENSION.

69

Njm.

70

IREEGTJLAEITIES IN DECLENSION.

174.

The
1.

principal differences in the endings are

In the Gen. Sing., where the Second Principal Declension always has o ? (u)?). 2. In the Norn. PL, where Masc. and Fern, of the Second Principal Declension always have e?.
Irregularities in Declension.

174.
is

The mixing

of two

Stems which

may have om

Nom.
sion),

called Heteroclising (eTepoKXoala, different in-

flexion)

: Nom. aK6To<;, darkness, Gen. aKotov (O-Declenand ctkotov; (Second Principal Declension) Xa/yom,
;

hare, according to the Attic declension, but Ace. Xar/o).

important irregularity of this kind occurs with t;?: XwKpaTTj'; (St. 'Z(oicpare<;), but Ace. Xa>KpdT7;v (as if from Stem XooKpara of the ADecleusion) with ScoKparr;. But those in -xXij? ( 167) follow the Second Principal Declension exclusively.
proper names in

An

175.

which cannot be that of the Nom.

(jieTaTrKacrix6<;,

The formation of some cases from a Stem is called Metaplasm

change of formation)
:

Nom.
from

Sing, to hev-

Spov, tree, Dat. PI. BevBp(Ti(v), as if

St.

BevSpe<;;

Nom. Sing, rb SaKpvov, tear, St. SaKpv (poet. Nom. BaKpv)

Dat. PI. SdKpvcn(v), from

;

to 'rrvp,jire, PI. to, irvpd, Dat. Tot? irvpol^ (0-Declension) Nom. Sing, ovetpo-^, dream, Gen. ovelparo^, Nom. PI. ovelpara.
;

176.

A
rjv

peculiar

irregularity

appears in several
a,

174. Dialects.

Several Masc. Stems in

Hom.
has PI. rh

Nom.

?j

in Herod.,

have ea
St.

for

in the Ace.

Sing.: Seo-Tronj-y,
o'^ra,

master, Sea-irorea.

6 oxo-s, carriage, in

'6xe(T(t>i(v),

ox^s-

OiSiVoM has poet-fonus from a

St.

from the OiSiiroSa, Gen.

Sing. Oldi7r6Sao, trag. OiSwrdSa.

Hom. Sapm/8a>i/, Stems ^apwriSov

:

and 2apTTTitovT.
175.

Mivms, Ace. Sing. Mivaa ( 163), and Mivav.

Dialects. Hom. metaplasms are

;

Dat. PI.

ai/8pa7rd8e<r(ri(i'),

Nom.

Sing. dvlSpdmSov, slave

;

Nom. Aco.

PI. Kpoa-aTrara,

Nom. Sing.
;

n-poVmTTOv, countenance
confidential,

SeV/iara, bonds, Sing. 6 Sicriios

epirjpoZ,

Nom.

PI. iplr,p(s;
;

ia-pivri battle, va-pXvi

oKk^, strength, Dat. Sing. oKk-i; Ix^p, divine blood, Aco. Sing. lxS>.

Digitized

by Microsoft

71

177.

IREEGULAEITIES IN DECLENSION.

Neuter Stems in apT,as <j)peapT. They reject t in the Norn. Ace. and Voc. Sing,, and p in the other cases to
:

^peap, well, Gen. j>peaTo<s (also ^priTo^) to rj-n-ap, liver, Gren. rjiraTO'i TO aXei^ap and aXeicfid, salve, Gen. aXei; ;

(f>a.TO<;.

To these correspond the Stems crKa(p)T and w 8 a (jo) t Nom. a-Kcop, dirt. Gen. a-icaT6<; vhwp, Gen. vBaro^.
;

1.

177. Special irregularities in alphabetical order

avi^p, man, (comp.

153) rejects

e
:

of the St. avep,

w-S-p-o?, avSpi,
PI. dvBpe<;,

and

inserts 8 in its place ( 51, Obs. 2)

ai^ep;

dvBpa; Voc.
2.

Dual, dvBpe, avSpoh;

:

avSp&v, avhpcUniy), dvBpas.

"Aprjs
d/3z/,

(the

god Ares)

"Ajoeo?, Acc."Apr}v,
3.

together with "Ap?;

without

Nom.
;

'Ape?, Gen. "Apeoy; and Voc. regul."A/3e?. Gen. rov and t^? apv-o'i, of
St.
;

dpva Dat. PL apvaaiiy). TO <^6vv, hnee {genu), Nom. Ace. Voc. All the rest from St. yoz^ar, Gen. yovaTo^. 5. rj 'yvvrj. Woman. All the rest from St. <yvvaiK-, Gen. yvvaiKO';, Dat. yvvatKo, Ace. yvvuLKa, Voc. yvvai
the lamb, apvi,
4.
;

Dual
6.

yvvaiKe, yvvaiKolv

PI. yvvalK-ev -wv -^t(v) -a?.

St.

TO So pv, wood, spear :

SopaTo^, poet. So /DO 9, Dat. Sopt

7.

Sop a t (comp. and Sojoet.

4).

Gen.
Ace.

Zev9
Voc.

(^Ae

^0^ Zeus), Gen. Ato?, Dat.

dog,
:

Atif;

At'a,

Zet).
r/

8. o

and

Kvav,

All the rest from

/ci>z/

with Voc. kvov from St. kvov. Gen. kvvo^, Dat. a;w4 Acc. Kvva ;

PL

Kvve^, KvvMv, /cvai(v), Kvva<;.

9.

o A,a-9,

s^cme,

from Hom. Xaa-9, Gen. Xa-o?, Dat.

are peculiar to dialects
; :

177. Dialects.
1. dvrjp,

The following forms

poet, 'avep-os, 'avep-i, 'avep-a

Dat. PI.

av8pfrT<n(^v').

2. "Aprjs, 4. yoTO,

Hom. 'Apijos, "Apirfi, "Aprja.

Ion.

and poet, yovvdr-os, yovvar-a, yoxivacri^v) ; Ep. Gen. Sing, yovvos, H. yovva, yovvav, youi'-co-crt(v). Sovpi, Sovpe, Sovpa, Sovpiou, 6. dopv, - Soiparos, Bp. 8ovp6s,
8avpe<riTL(v).
7. Zeuy, poet. St. Ziji/
:

Zr)v-6s, Zrjv-i, Zfjv-n (also

Z^v from

Zij).

Digitized

by Microsoft

72
\,a-l,

lEEEGULAEITIES IN DECLENSION.

177

Acc. Xaa-v, Xav, PI. Xa-e?, Xd-cov, \a-e(T(n{v) or

'Ka-eai{y), Xa-a^.

10. d

/J,

dp TV-';,

witness, witli

Dat. PI.

/j,dpTva-i(v),

from the
11.
T}

St. /ia/srv.

The

rest

from the

St,

/jLuprvp:
ve-cov,

p,dpTvpo<;, fidprvpt,

&c.
vr)-t,

vav-<;, ship, ve-w's,

vaii-V, PI. z^-e?,

vav-<jl(v), vav^.

159. Ohs. The Nom. Acc. Sing, and Dat. Aco. PI. rest on the St. Before vowels vav becomes (according to 35, D. 2) vtjF, ve-m is for vrj-os ( 37, D. 2).

Comp.

vuv.
vt)
,

12. d

and rj

opv%-<;, bird, St.

o/swi'
;

opvWi, opvlOa and

PI. 6pvlde<;

opvid and o/az/i and opvei^,

opvlO-o';,

opvecov.

13. TO o5?, ear. All the rest from St. (ut: tord?, wTi; PI. (Sra, wrwy, Q}-a-i(v). (On the accent, 142, 3.) 14.
57

Hvv^

(the

Pnyx),

St.

ivvkv, Hvkv-o^, ILvKv-i,

TLvKv-d.
15. d "Trpea^v-^, the aged,

Sing.,

and throughout the PL

Sing,
wpea^vrrj';)
;

has in the G-en. and Dat. its forms from irpecr^vTa

Trpicr^ecov,
irpeis

(Nom.

irpia^ei'i,

<T^e(n{y)

signifies

ambassadors, to which the

Sing,

Trpecr^evT'q';.

16.

Tav. Only Voc.

w rdv or w
vt,

rdv, friend or friends,

a defective Stem.
17. d utd?, son, St. yto,

utev, Gen.
vieaL{v),

vteo?,

D.

i/tet,

Acc. viea (rare),

18.

PL

i^tet?, utewi;,

vlei<;.

But
Dat.

also

regular! V viov, &c.

57

;;^etp,

hand, St. %6tp,

Dual

%e/3oti/,

PL

Xep<Tl(y)Dialects.
i/^-a,

11. vaii-s, from St. vj/d,

vrii(Ta-i(v), vr)V(rl(y),

lon.i^jC-s,
vr/as.

Horn. Aco. Sing,

Dat. PI

Aoo.

from from

St. i/eu, Ion. ve-dj, vf-f, vt-a, ve'-ef, i/f-Sj,, ve-ea-cri, ve-as.

St. Kou, Dor. m-os, va-i (navi), vS-e(Tcn{v).

13. ovs, Ion. ouas, ouar-os;

17. vl6-s, Bp. Gen. uf-os,
18.^ xeip, poet,

PL

ovar-a, Dor. Sy, mr-dy.

vl-t, vT-a, vl-es, vt-da-t(v), vl-as.

and New-Ion. x^p-of,

x^p-',

Ep. Dat.

PI. xe'p-ecr.

or \etp-(ra-i(v').

To
19.
also

these add the words

which

are

Hom.

'AfS;,-9 (Att. "AiS^f),

St. 'Al-S,

anomalous only in dialects Gen. "AVS-oj, 'aVS-i.

:

'Ai'SfflveiJ-f,

with regul. inflexion, according to 159.

Digitized

by Microsoft

178.

CASE-LIKE TERMINATIONS.
Case-like Terminations.

73

178. Besides the case-endings, there occur certain suffixes or appendages, which in meaning very nearly resemble case-endings. To these belong
1.

-6 1, answering to the question where: aXko-6t,

elsewhere
;

2.

-dev,

to the question whence: oUo-Oev,

from home
3.-^6,

to ih.e qaesiion whither

:

o'Ua-he,

homewards.
Dialects.

20. o epmy, love,

21. dijus, justice, St. 5e/it

22. TO Kapa, head,B.OTa. St.

Stems eptuT and ipo, poet. Aco. Epo-i/. and Befuar, PI. dejiia-T-es, Senurr-as. Kap-qr, Kapr/aT, Kpdar, Kpar, Rap.
Kpdaros, Kpdros.

Horn.

Nom.
Oen. Dat. Ace.

Sing. xapj;.

,,

KiipriT-os, Kapfjar-os,

KaprjT-i, Kaprjar-i, Kpdar-i, Kpar-i (trag. Kapa).

Kapn],

rhv Kpar-a, t6 Kap.

Nam.
Oen. Dat.
Ace.
23.
fj

PI.

Kapa, Kaprjar-a, KpSar-a, secondary form Kaprjva.

Kpdrav, Kaprjvav.
Kpdal(y).

= Nom. (also roiis Kpar-as).

Hom.
Dat. pdcrn, Ace. p-aari-v.
priv.

pda-Ti^, whip,

24. 6 p-us, month. Ion.

= Att.

25.

ia-a-e,

eyes.

Nom.

Aco. Dual, Neut. in

o(ro-oi(Tt(i').

Hom.

The

trag.

have Gen.

PI. ocra-av, Dat. oa-a-ois or

178. Dialects.
:

The
:

three local suflSxes are very frequent in

Hom.

irpo, in front of Ilios ; ovpav66ev,from heaven; ayoprjQ^v, from the assembly. 6ev also supplies the place of the Gen.-ending koto Kprjdeu, down from the head, entirely ; i^ -Se is generally affixed to the Ace. oucovSe, SK66ev, out of the sea.
otKodi.,

at

home ; 'iXwdi

Iwmewards ;
into /light.

KKuririvSe, into the tent

7r6\ivSe, into the city

(jio^ovSe,

0ijyaSe, into flight,

and

epa^t, to the earth, are peculiar.

is (j)i,(v); it is

A
the

suffix peculiar to the

Som. language

added to

Stem of nouns, and supplies the place of the Gen. or Dat. termination in both Sing, and PI., as 1. A- decl. : piri-4>i,ivith force; (cXicriij-i^i, in the tent; djro pevp^<lM/,from the low-string. 2. 0-decl.: 6e6-(j>iv, from the gods ;
3;
'lKw-(j)iv,

from

Hios.

Oons.-deel.

KoTvXrjSov-o-^iv, with the suckers (on the feelers

of the polypus) ; air Sxe(r-(l>i(y), from the carriage ; vapa vav-(f)i,(v), alongside the ships; cmo KpdTea--<j>iv,from the head. ( 177, D. 22.)
Digitized

by Microsoft


74
These

;:

INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.
suffixes are joined to

179.

the
o

Stem
r))
;

of the

"KdrivqGev,

from

Atliens, (with Ion.

icvKKodev,

noun from

the circle, (/ci/zcXo-?).

:

Sometimes

comes in place of the

:

A.-sound pi^odev (radicitus) from pi^a {radix) ; it also serves as a connecting vowel with consonant-stems iravrThe o is sometimes accented, o-6ev, from all sides.

contrary to

107, a

Kv/cX-o-Oev,

MapaOav-o-dev, from
( 92, 5) is

Marathon.

The
to

enclitic suffix
:

Se

often also

combined with the Ace. form

'EXei/o-w-o-Se,

Meryapa-Se, to

Eleusis.

o'U-a-he,

home, from

Megara Stem

oIko,

is irregular.

For 8e we
Theles

find ere,
;

fe,

with the same meaning:

dXXoae, elsewhither
;

^KOriva^e, to

Athens ; @i]^a^e,

to

6vpa^e (foras).

179. Moreover, a few words have

an old Locative

in

(without a preceding i) for the Plur., answering the question where: o'Uoi, at home;
for the Sing.,
a-i(v)

and

Tivdol, at

Pytho ;
;

'IctO/jloX,

on the Isthmus ;
;

^A9'^vr](n(v),

in Athens ; MXaraiacniy), in Plataea

door, (foris)

dvpdai(v), at the

&pdcri,(y), at the right time.

Chap. YII.

Othek

Inflexions of the Adjective.

A.

Inflexion according to Genders.

Adjectives of the

Yowel

Declension.

180. The most numerous class of adjectives is that which in the Masc. and Neut. follows the 0-Declension, and in the Fem. the A-Declension which, consequently,
;

has in the

Nom.

Sing. 09,

rj

(or a), ov [Lat. us, a,

uml.
r)

180. Dialects. The lonians

have frequently here also

for

Att, a

alaxpn.

Digitized

by Microsoft

182.

INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.

75

Sing.

76

INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.
:

183.

endings, the Masc. being used for the Fern.

Masc. and
adjec

Fern.

r)(Tvxo<;,

Neut.

rjo-vxov,

quiet.

Compound
:

fives especially are all of

less ;

only two endings

dre/cvo';, child-

KapTro(f>6po<;, fruitful.

183. Adjectives ending in eo?

and oo? in the Norn.

:

Masc, are generally contracted ( 130) and atrXoos, simple, are thus contracted
Sing.

xpv(Teo<;, golden,

185.

INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.

77

the Attic 0-Declension

gracious;
a^ioxpeajf,

( 132): "Xem?, ISTeut. "Xewv, Neut. -av, considerable; TrXeeo?, irXid, wXemv, full, o-fi? (from a-do^, salvus) lias in the Norn. Sing. Pern, and Neut. PI. a-a; but also the forms
(70)09, (TQjd,

PI. (7W0t, CTOJai.

Adjectives op the Consonant Declension. 185. Other adjectives in the Masc. and Neut. foUow the Consonant Declension, and form from the Stem a

peculiar

Fern, with the ending ta, which, however, undergoes various changes in combination with the Stem.

Such adjective-stems of three terminations are 1. Stems in v (Masc. and Neut., 154). The Fern, is formed from the Stem as it appears in the Gen. (^ 8 e) 6 and la are contracted, and the accent remains on the last syllable of the Stem hence
:

78

INFLEXIONS OP ADJECTIVES.
Examples yKvKvs, sweet
for Declension.

186,

^paxvs, short
Taxis, swift

evpvs, broad.

PpaSvs, slow
Obs.

drjXvs, female, differing also in accent,

occurs as a Feminine.
is

186.

2.

Stems in

v.

The

in

la

transferred

the preceding syllable (55): St. /j-eXav, Nom. Masc. /ieXa?, Fem. /j^eKaiva (from fieXav-ia), Neut.
to
fjLekav, black.

Singular.

 187.

INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.

79

80
Obs.

INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.

188
i

The form

of the Pern, is explained from t before

i

becoming

being dropped after o-, and v before <t being thrown out and compensated for by a lengthening of the vowel :
a, according to 60,
77avTia^ Travaca, Travaa, nafra
;

XvovTca, Xuovcrta, Xvovcra, \vov(ra,

188.

4.

Stems in or.

The

participles of the Per-

&>?, Neut. o?) have via in the Fern. XeXvKoi^, \e\,vKvca, XeXvKo?, one who has freed. See 146, 147.

fect

Active in OT (Nom. Sing. Masc.

:

Singular.

; '

191.

INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.
Other Examples for DeclenBion.

81

y.vr)jui,v,

mindful of
TroKvirpdyjMav,

cViXV/""''. forgetful of

much

occupied

3.

Isolated forms, as
tS/Jts
i'dpi,

acquainted with

Gen.

l'8pi-os

(Inflexion according to 157 D.)

appr)V (apa-rjv)

appev, male
suoli

Gen. appev-os
as

Compounds
St.

of

substantives,

dwdTmp, Neut. ajvarop,

bva-prjTmp,
iifiTr]p,
;

.jrarep (Nom.

iraTrjp) fatherless;

motherly ; (piKojroXis, -i, Gen. (Gen. eveKnih-os), hopeful.

-ib-os,

loving the city

unevKms

190. 4. Besides these there is a large number of adjectives which have only one ending, because either

their

rapackms,
ar^vd)<i,

meaning or form excludes a Neuter: apira^, St. a it a<y; <^v^d'i, fugitive, St. (jjvyaS;
unacquainted, St.
;

a^vwr;

aTrat?,

childless,

St.
;

a TT a t S
ryv/jivrji,

/xaicpoxeip, long-handed ; ttez^?, poor, St. tt e z/ 97 t

light-armed, St. jv/mvtjt.

Some

adjectives of

one ending follow the A-Declension, and are almost substantives, as ideXovrri^, Gen. ideXovrov, voluntary/ they occur only in the Masc.
:

191.

The

following adjectives are irregular

fiiyaf,

great;

much, and irpao'i, gentle, the forms of each being derived from different Stems, viz., in fj-eyai;,
ttoTiv?,
190. Dialects.

Horn, has

men

also many adjectives in the Pern, only

KaWiyvvcuKa Aco. Sing,

l3a>Tidvetpa,
e.

e.g., 'S.Traprqv,

abounding in heautiful wom^n I

g. idia,

nourishing.

In Horn, both Stems, n-oXu and ttoXXo, in 191. Dialects. the Fem. is Masc. and Neut., are ahnost completely declined
;

regularly ttoXX^.
Sing.

^.
D,

TToXvs
or

TTQvKvs or ttoXXos
jtoXeos
TToJlX^

N.

irokv irov\v ttoKKov

Q. jroXXoC
A.. TToKvV

ITOVKVV
(ttoXe ly)

TToXXdv
TroXXot

I^. TToXv TTOvKv TToKKoV

Plur.

N.
G,

TTokees
TToXXiai'

ttoXXo

or

TTokiav
7roX(r<ri(i')

D. A.

7roXeto-(Ti(i')

n6\<n(v) or noXXoIs
jroKKois

iTokeas

N. iroXXa

Herod, has scarcely any forms except from the Stem ttoXXo!
TTuWdpf aroXXot.
Digitized

by Microsoft

(J

82

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

192.

from the Stems fie^a and fieyaXo; in ttoXv?, from TToXv and ttoXXo; in irpao'i, from Trpao and Trpai).

Sing.


197.

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

83

1.

193.

The following points are to be observed The Stems in o leave o unchanged only when the
is

preceding syllable
to
CO

long
:

( 74, &c.),

but lengthen
worse
;

it

when

that

is
;

short

irovrjpo-Tepo';,

wikoo-

rarov, most bitter

a-o^d>-Tepo<;,

wiser

a^ico-rdrT),

most

Every syllable with a vowel followed by two consonants or a double consonant is here considered long
worthy.
( 76, 77).
194.
2.

The
:

o is

always rejected

after at in

the adjective

yepai6s, senex, sometimes in iraKaiSs, cmtiquus,

and

crxoXaios,

at leisure
195. 3.
like
;

yepalrepos, irdKairaTos.

The

o or

eiSStos,

Trpcoiairepov.
cj)iKos,

changed to at in fiecros, medius; uros, npmos, early ; S-^ios, late : linrairaTos, rjavxas, peaceful, has fjirvxai-Tepos, and fi<Tvxo>Tepos ;
is

clear

dear, besides (j)i\a>Tepos

;

-raros, also (piXrepos -raros,

and

<l)tKalTepos -raros

irKrja-tairepos, TrXrjcrtaLTaros,

belong to
the same

irXrjtrlov,

near,

and

napaTrXr/cnaiTepos,

more

like, to

irpovpyiairepos to Trpovpyov,
196. 4.

from

irpo cpyou, advantageously.

The endings eorepo-s, eo-TOTo-f,

: :

are inorganically

applied

a) to Stems in ov
tunate).

ira^povia-repos (St. (ra>(j)pov,

reasonable"), Ahaiixoviarepos (St.

evSaifiov,

Nom. o'oxjipav, Nom. evbalp,a>v, forireirairepos -raros,

TTLorepos -raros, fvoui'irlwVffat,

and

from

rvirrav, ripe, are exceptional.

6) to the

Stems of anparos, immixed ;

:
:

ippaiievos, strong

atrfievos,

willing
c) to

oKparea-repos, eppaiievecrrepos.

More seldom

to others.

some Stems in o o contracted from eiivovs, well-disposed.

5.

cvvovirrepos for evvoiarepos

197.

ta-Tspos,
;

ta-raras,
oijfocl>dyos,

occur with

\dXos,

talkative;

irraxos, heggarly

epicure ; povo(j)dyos, eating alone,

kXctti)-s, thievish
:

and some adjectives of one ending, as

(TTepos, TTraiXioraros, KKcrrriarepos.

XoKi-

Others of one gender in

Tfpos from
v/S/Dio-njs,

rj-s

follow the rule of those in o

vfipurro-

haughty.

The quantity of the 0-sound in poets is rather 193. Dialects. doubtful Horn. oiCvpSraros, the most wretched. Horn, has Wivrara, from Wis, straight; ^aavraros, from ^acivos, glittering ; dxapla-repos (for dxapir-repos, according to 46), from
:

&Xai.<.s, graceless.

^.^.^.^^^

^^ Microsoft

84

COMPAEISON OF AJtJECTIVES.

198.

The compounds

and Superlative as

of x<P'S' grace, favour, form their Comparative if they ended in xap'To-s ; imxapi^TutTepos,

198.

The

second and rarer termination of the

Com-

parative is lov (Nom. Masc. and Fern, icov, Neut lov); of the Superlative, la-ro (Nom. tcrTO?, larrj, kttov). The

Stem-vowel

is

rejected before

t.

The accent

is

placed

from the end in the Comp. and Superl. So is formed from Inflexion of the Comp., 170.
as far as possible
:

Positive.
rj&vs,

Stem.
fihv

Comparative.
i]&iav, -ov
Oda'a-ayv 'OV

Superlative.
rjBia-Tos
-rj

agreeable

-ov ~ov

Tavisj swift
neyas, large

Tax'^

tclxicttos

-ri

(from raxiaiv, according to 54, 57) fieya (from

Ohs.
jxii^mv -ov
fieyicov,

fieyuTTos.

according to 58)

The length of a in Baa-a-ov (comp. fiaXXov, 202), and the diphthong of jxei^av, is explained from the t passing into the preceding syllable, as in ajieivcov (comp. 55).

Further with suppression of p

c'xflpd -s, hostile

ixBiav

-ov

Superl. ex6i.(rTos.
,,

ala-xpo -s, shameful

al(Txi'OV -ov

a'tcrxioTos.

oiKrpo

-s,

pitiable

o'iktiutos.

ix6p-6s and oUrp-os also have the forms in repo-s and toto-s.

199. This

comparison occurs also in connection

The endings icov, kttos, are more frequent in 198. Dialects. the poets Horn. tpiXimv ((^iXos, dear) ykvKiav (yXvKvs, sweet)
:

&Ki(rTos {wRvs, swift)

^ddia-ros (PaBvs, deep)

poet.
;

^pd(raa>v

= fipaxlav
^dpSurns
;

(lipaxvs, short), Sup.

(PpaSiis, slow, 59,

Ppdxia-Tos,

Hom.
(Dor.

Superl.

D.)

naa-a-wv

= jraxiav

= p-dKimv (poKpos,
KapntTTos

(jvaxvs, thick)

fiacro-mw
;

long),

Sup. pfiKurros

paKurros)

Kvhlav

(KvSpos, famous); pe^av,

199. Dialecta. 1.
;

New-Ion.

for pei^av.

Hom. Comp.
;

dpsiav. Positive Kparvs, Superl.

Kpia-a-cov

Comp. Xatrepos

New-Ion.

= KpsLinTav
more
xftpoVfpor

poet.

fiikrepos, ^eXraros, (peprepos, (^EpraTor, or (fiepitrTos,

excellent,

most
2.

excellent.

Hom. KaKwnpos
eaaav

Ion,
4.

xepi/s, x^pf't"", x^P^^or^pos,

New-

fja-a-av.

(Comp. Kpea-amv, p^^av,

by Microsoft

198, Ohs.)

Hom.

vTr-oki^tov.

Digitized

: ;

199.

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

85

with other peculiarities in

the following adjectives,

where the changes of sound of 55-58 are often applied

1.

For the idea of good

Positive.

Comparative.

Superlative.

ayad6s
[St. a/ivj
[St.
dfielvcoVj afieivov

apes]

[apeiav, Horn.]
^eKriaiv, PeXriov
Kpei(Tcra>v (^KpeiTTcov)

apiaros,

J),

ov
r],

jSeXto] [St. KpaTv'\

[St.

^cKtuttos,

ov ov

Kpdn&ros,
Xaaros,

rj,

N.
[St.

Kpclo'a'ov (/cpetTroy)
'Kattcov

X 0) u]

or \aatv

7],

ov

N.
Ohs.

X&'iov or "K&ov Spia-Tos

afifivav

and

rather express excellence, capacity

;

Kpeia-a-iov,

rjiTatav is

Kpanaros, strength,, preponderance, (Lat. superior) opposed to Kpu(T(ra>v.

2.

For the idea of lad:

Positive.

Comparative.
KaKlCOV

Superlative.
KUKltTTOS
x^'P'o'''''^

KaK6s
[St.

x^p]

[St. Tjnv]

x^^P""' (deterior) rja-aav (inferior)

N, KCLKIOV N. x^'P"" N. rjaa-ov N.

smaller

PI.

rJKia-Ta, least

of

all.

3. yuKphs, small, besides fiiKporfpos jiflav,

4-.

liiKporaros

N.

pelov
oXiyia-Tos

oXiyos,

little

[St.

cXa^u]

ika(r<Tav^ .eKdcrcov iKd^icTTOs

ttXei'iuv

5. TToXis,

much
N.

(nX-iav)

wKe'iaros

irXiov (also Trkeiv)

6.

KoKos, heautiful, as if from

KoXXos,

leauty

KoKKiav

N. koXXiov koKKio-tos

7. paSios, easy

[St. 8.

pa]
aXyeivSs,

p^iBV

N. paov

paa-Tos

pamfid, as if from dXyitov aXyos, pain

N. SXyiov

aXyurros

Dialects,

5.

Horn, contracts jrXeov to irXevv, jrXioves to rrXevves

Plur. also, irXees, nXias, jrXea.

Horn, forms 7. Ion. prjtSios ; Horn, prjirepos, pri'iaros, prjiTaTos. single degrees from substantives: Kvvrepos, more doggish (Kuav, dog); plyiov, worse, piyos, cold, shudder.
Defectives
:

iveprepoi,
;

also

tragic

veprepoi

(inferi,

for

which

Positive cvepoi)

Hom. irvpaTos and

Digitized

Xo~iar6os, Xo'ktBlos, last, vtrrcunos

= vaTaTos,

Seiraros, in a like sense, n-pairitrTos=7rp5ros, the first.

by Microsoft


86

: :

ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES.

:

2O0.

200. Finally observe further the Defectives

va-Tepos, later

va-raTOS, ultimus ctrxaros,

extremus

(yios,

new)
wporepos, prior

vearos, novissimus
vjraros,

(ifffp, over)

summua

(npo, before)

npSrros, primus,

{mpav, on the other side) Trfpaircpos.

Adverhs of Adjectives. G. 201. Adverbs are derived from the adjective

a> ?.

by

affixLQg to it the syllable

:

entirely dropped

^/Xoy, adv.

Stem The o of the Stem is (piXax;. The Stems of the

as in
clear,
Ta')(eai<i
;

Second Principal Declension have the same form

the

Genitive

Ta'^vi,
;

swift,

cra<f>^i;,

<ra^ea><;, contr. cra^cD?

aoa^ptav, reasonable,

(raxjjpovco';.
it.

Contraction occurs only where the Genitive also has

always the same as that of the Genitive Plural of the corresponding adjective
of the adverb
is
\jrv'xp6<;, cold, \jnij(pS)<i
;

The accent

hiKaio<;, just, SiKaio)^

Tra? (St.

iravt),
Plural,

TrdvTQ)';,

every way.

The Neuter Accusative, both of the Singular and the

is

moreover very often used as an adverb.

202.

An

older adverbial form

is

that in

a,

as:
ip&r-

Ta')(a

from
; a/x,a,

Tayy<i, quick

(meaning, in Att. prose,

very.

haps)

at the

same time ; fiaXa,

The Comp.

of

fj,aXa is fiaXkov {potius)

(potissimum).

ev,

well,

56) ; Sup. fioKiara as an adverb to ar/a66<;, good,

= fiaXiov (

stands alone.

w ? are also formed from Comparaand Superlatives ^e^aioripm, more firmly ; koXXtw(B9, mare beautifully. But as a rule the comparative

203. Adverbs in

tives

202.

Dialects.

The adverbs in a are more numerous in Homer

Uas, New-Ion!

\iya, aloud, Xtyis ; Kapra, strongly, very, to ; Kparvs, comp. 59, D., a-d(pa {clearly, crai^jjs). Hom. has for ev or ii the adjective its or rivs, good. 203, 204. Dialects. Hom. iKaaripa, iKa^ara (from

&Ka, {guichhj, wkvs)

far)

dyxiov), do-o-orepm (S.yxi, near), ayxta-ra ; dyxordTw, dyxSrara. In addition to this there is the
;

i(rtrov

(=

Hom.

iir-

acrarvrepoi, crovided,

with u instead of
Digitized

o.

by Microsoft


205.

PEESONAL PEONOUNS.

87

has the Neut. Ace. Sing., the superlative, the Neut. Ace Fl. as an adverb ^e^aiorepov, koXXiov ; ^e^aiorara,
:

KciXkiaTa.
204.
E^o),

Adverbs in a, like outside, have no

ava>,

above ; Kara, helow

ea-a, inside
:

in

Comp. and

Superl.

KaTmrepa, likewise antoTepai, fwrther (from cmS)

(or iyyvTspov), eyyvrdTio (or eyyvraTo),

avaTcpa, iyyvripa
nea/r,

from iyyis,

and

some

others.

Chap. VIII.

Inflexion of Peonouns.
are

205.

The Personal Pronouns

Singular.

Nom.

Gm.
Dat.
Ace.

88

PEESONAL AND POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS.

206.

206.

The Stems of the Sing, are:

ere,

ifie, for the

first

person;

for

the second;

e,

for

the
is

third.

The Nominative, however, is them i'yca, <tv, and that of the third person
:

formed differently from

enturely

wanting.
Js. The
o- of the Stem o-c has arisen from t ( 60, a) \te], which remains in many dialect-forms. The Stem e goes back to f f, and this to a still older fonn <rfe [Lat. se for sve]. ( 60, J.) In the form er^e, the f is hardened into <^.

The Stems of the Dual are: vw \no-s], o-^w, crc^a. Ihe Dual of the third person does not occur in prose. The Stems of the Plural are: 57/^6, uytte, a^e (e is
generally contracted with the ending, hence the circumflex

see Dialects).

207.
92, 2

When
it
;

there

is

Pronoun,
in

becomes
/i.

enclitic in the

no emphasis on the Personal forms mentioned

as well as gene-

in that case the iirst person has the forms

beginning with
first

But when emphatic,

:

rally after prepositions, it retains its accent,

and the

person has the fuller forms So/cet fwi, it seems to me ; ifiol oii aol tovto apicTKet, this pleases me, not you. The Gen. Dat. and Aco. Plur. of the first and second persons, when not emphatic, sometimes have the accent on the first
syllable i^jiav, vii.lv, and in this case the final syllable of the Dat. and Aco. is usually shortened tjimv, fjiias (Hom.). When emphatic with the final syllable shortened they are
: :

written

^filv, v^ilv,

Possessive Pronouns are formed from tho Stems of the Personal Pronouns

208.

The

St. ijxe, ijios,

my
thy
his,

St. ^fie, fmirepos,

Obs.

Dialects. [tuus], ios [suus],

The ending repos that of the comparative ( 192). 208. Hom. additional forms of the Possessives
is
Afjios
:

o-f,
e,

a-os,

her.

i/ie, i/ieVepos,

our yowr

OS,

(r(pe, (r(l>Tepos, their.

reos

(properly Dor.),

i/j-os,

(t(J>6s.

From

the

Dual Stems

ua>, cr<j>m

two, ap-os (also

a.p,6s)

you often means my, Ss sometimes means own,

vatrepos, nos-ter, a-(f)a>tTpos, belonging to

without any reference to a particular person.

Digitized

by Microsoft

21t.

EBFLEXIVE AND OTHEK PEONOUNS.

209, auTo-?, avTT], avro,
self, is

89

declined like a

common

adjective, except that the

Neuter in the Nom.

Ace. Voc. Sing, has no v (comp. the article to). o auTO? (auTO?), 17 'avTrj (avrrj), to ainb (tovto or
TavTov), the same, Lat. idem.
210. The Stems of the Personal Pronouns, combined with avTot;, produce the Beflexive Pronouns.
Singular.

Gen. M. N.

F.
-7)5 -rjs -rjs

Dat.

M. N.

P.
-fj

Ace. M.

F.
-rjv -rjv

JST.

1st person

ipuvrov
creavrov
or aavTov

efuxvra

fiavr6v

myself
thyself
-6 himself, herself, itself

2d person 3d person

a-eavra -g

(reavrSv

cravra

-^
-fj

aravTov

-fjv
-fju

eavrov
or avTov

-rjs
-rjs

eavra avra

eavT6v

-3

airdv

-rjv -6

In
PlnraL

tliG plural,

toth Stems are declined together

Dat.

Gen. M. F. N.
r}^i5iv

M. N.

F.

Aco.
rifxas

M.

F.

1st person

avr&v
'

^[juv aiiTols vfiiv

-ais -ais

2d person 3d person

vjxStv avriiyv
a-cfyav

avTois

avrovs -as ourselves vjias avrovs -as yourselves

acjias
(T(j>ea

avrav

u^io'iv avrots -ais

Neut.

avrovs -as themselves avrd

:

Yet the 3d person plural has

iavrav
or avrSiV

also the

compound form

iavToXs -ais

iavTovs -as -a

avrols

-ais

avrovs -as

-a.

211.

aWo-9,

oXXtj, aXKo,

another (alius),

is

de-

clined like avTO';.

The Stem aXXo combined with

Meciprocal Pronoun

itself

produces the
oc-

aW-TjXo

(for

aXX-aWo),

curring only in the

Dual and

Plural.

209. Dialects.

New-Ion.

ojutos, avrrj,

rairo

Horn, airos

=o

avros.

210. Dialects. The Epic dial, declines both Stems together iavra, &o. ifiavrov, oi avra even in the sing. t/xe avrov Now-Ion. ifieavrov, a-cayurov, iavrov, stand for the forms with av.
:

Digitized

by Microsoft

90

DBMONSTKATIVE PEONOIWS.

212

Dual.

a.D.
Ace,

214,

RELAT. AND INTEEEOG. PROSOUNS.

Dual.
|t6)

91

ra
rdSe

Ta
TuSSe

(tolv

raiv raivSc

tolv

N. A. V.<T&8e
\TQvr^

G.

DArohSe

TolvSe

ravra
;

Tourco

\rovToiv ravraiv TovTotv

The adverb
TotrovTos

of oSe is S8e

that of oStos ovtois or ovtod, in this way.

:

Like ovTos are declined

TOcravTr]

Totrovro

or too-ovtou,

TOIOVTOS
Ti/XtKoOroff

TOiaiTTj
TrjKiKavTT}

TOIOVTO

OX TOIOVTOV, Sllck (feZls)

rrjKtKovTo or rrjKiKovTov^ so old

is

in which, however, the t of the forms beginning with t

: ;

dropped ravra, but Too--au7-a by affixing the enclitic fie we have the forms too-oiSe, so large ; rolosSe, of such quality rriXtKds-Se, of such an age, with a regular adjective declension
before the syllable Be.
eKelvo-s, eKeivri, ineivo, that, is declined like alros.

A long

accented

is

to strengthen the

often affixed to the Demonstrative Pronouns meaning, without affecting the declension, but
airriT, roisSr.

the e of he is lost : ovrosi, o8r, ckciviovI, pare the Lat. ce in his-ce, has-ce.

Com-

213.

The

Relative

Pronoun has the rough breathing

in all cases, as
Singular.

92

INTEEEOG. AND INDEF. PEONOUNS.

215,

guished only by the accent. The Interrogative Pronouii has the accent always on the Stem syllable ; the Indehence rt'?, who ? ti?, enclitic, some one. finite is enclitic
:

 217.

COEKELATIVE PBONOTJNS.

93

216.

The

following are called Correlative

Pronmms:

Interrogative.

94

COBEELATIVE ADVEEBS.
Demonstrative.
evoa ivddde EVTdvSa
evQev evdevSe ivrevdev

S21g,

Interrogative.

Indefinite.
TTOV

Relative.

TroO,

where ? (ubi?)

,.
J.

i-\

[some(where

there

ov
OTTOv

where

(iU)

!(uhi')

jTodiv
TToBfv, vjhence

from

from
there
(inde')

(unde
jroi,

?)
f

somecunde) where
(ali-

odev

\whence

orrdBcv )(unde)

whither (quo ?)

^"f

some

quo)

("'l"

[whither
)

evda ivdab^ ivravda

Tore,

thither
(eo)

ol
oiroi

vwhither

i(jMo)

TTore,

when
I I [

TTore,

sometime

then
at that

ore, oTTOTe,
qv'iKa

when

at

rrjViKa
TTji/iti-dde

TnjvUa

what
time
f
?

time

Tr)j/CKavTa

\at what oTTrjViKa) time

as
TTWS,

how

TTcSr,

somehow
our cos

thus
thither,

as, ojrms, OS
whither,

{whither ?
in what

way?
Obs.

^ I some whither ^^\in someway

I fi,

in this
ravTT]

oTrrj

<
{

in what

way

way.

evBev, in tlieir original demonstrative sense, occur only in a few combinations in Attic prose (cvBa 617, just then; evOa Kol ev6a, here and there) but they are regularly used in a
;

v6a and

relative sense

where, whence.

To

the Correlative Adverbs there belong also eas,

;

quamdiu

(Eela-

tive, as long)

reas,

tamdiu (Demonstrative,
(for

so long), as well

as the poetic

o0pa
and
;

o^pa, 53,

c,

Obs.) used in the same

meaning

as ear,

T6(f>pa as tcuk.

To the simple ckuvos

of place exei, there

212) correspond among the Adverbs eKsWev, from there ; hela-e, thither. The Demonstrative ms occurs in Attic prose only in koI as, even thus, and ovS' as, not even thus. It is also written hs in these com(tJiat,

binations.

218.

The conjunctions

61;,

brjnoTe,

and ovu (meaning

:

ever, Lat.

cunque), and the enclitic jrep,

may be joined to any relative proSa-ns

817 irorc,

noun

or adverb to give

prominence

whosoever,

OTras oiv, (utcunque), Scrjrep, ju,st as.

Sometimes ^

is affixed to the interrog. in the sense oiwhy f and to the corresponding indirect interrogative o : Wij, oriri, why ?

219. There are also negative pronouns

ovTis, firjTts,

and adverbs

to be noticed

ovSaixov,

no one; oiSerepos, firiSerepos, neither, neuter; p.?)8a/ioC, nowhere; ov&ap.as, ji.r)bap.as, in no way.

Digitized

by Microsoft


220.

THE NUMEBALS.
Chap. IX.

The Numeeals.
:

220.

The

Cardinal, 0rdinal,aQ.d.Adverhial'SvLva.6Tsi[s,

with their Talue and signs, are

1

96
Ohs.

THE NUMEEALS.

221

The

letters of the alphabet are

used in numbers also in un-

interrupted

succession.

In
;

given above, stigma (g') is to ff are therefore units

the most frequent designation, inserted after e for the number 6

i

is 10,

20

after

tt'

(=

80),

9^(koppa=90)
=900).
letter

is

inserted;

and
it
;

after

a (=800)'^

(sampi

The alphabet begins again

the accent under

has

at 1000, but here' each hence ^t^iS'=2344, /ko^^

=1862.

221.

The Cardinal Numbers

1 to

4 are

declined.

1.

Nbm.
Gen. Dot. Ace.

; : ;

224.

NUMERALS.

97

222.

The numerals 5
The units and
and
:

to 199 are indeclinable.

tens are united
;

We

also find rpels, rpla Koi 8e<a, rea-aapes, ria-a-apa Koi Sena, for

13 and 14.
tens are
first
first

by Km,

in

any order

ciKoiTi Koi TtevTe

jrcvre koi eiKoo-t

or without koi

when the

e"Kocn nevTe,
els

25

so also cKarbv Sexa.

we have

koI clKoards, or

irparos

kcu.

For twentycIkocttos, and

(Ikocttos irpStTos, &C.

The Cardiaal numerals from 200

are, like the Ordinal,

:

regular adjectives of three terminations

StaKoaioc, ai, a.

The Ordinal numerals have

tive,

the endings of the superla-

except Sevrepo?, which has that of the comparative (comp. 192),

223.

butives

a-iv, the numeral Stems form Distritwo and two ; a-ivrpets, three and three Multiplicatives, by the syllable vKovs (from ttXoos, Lat. plex) dn-XoSs, simple; SitrXovs, TpijrXovs, nevranXoiJs, &c. Observe
:

By combination with
a-vvSvo,

also Sicra-os, twofold;

rpura-Ss, threefold; hnrkcunos, twice

as

much ;

rprnXda-tos, &c.,
:

iroXKairXdinos,
;

many

times as much.

Adverbs
rrepirds,

povaxji, simply (ji,6vos, alone') hixv or ^'X'^i doubly. Substantives: fiomj (St. povah), unity ; ivas, rpids, rerpas,
c^ds, cfiSopAs, oySoar, ivveds, SeKas, elKas, eKarovrds,
;

xCKids, p,vpias

hence rpeis pvpidSes

^ 30,000.
of
either;

224.

The

most important general Adjectives

eKucrro';,

quantity are:
irdcra, irav (St.

each;

eKdTepo<;,

wa?

iravr), all;
:

jroa-TO'i,

ottoo-to';

[quotus]

and the adverbs

7r\ei(7TdKi<{,

7roX'KdKt<s,

many times, often ;

eKaardKi^,

every time; oa-aKK, as often as; Toa-auTaKt';, so often;

very often

oXtyaKt^, seldom.

7' 'L

Digitized

by Microsoft


98

: :: : :

THE VEEB=

22&,

E.

Inflexion of Vbebs.
CremrcH Remarhs.

1.

225.

The Greeks

distiaguish in the

Verb

Three Numbers : Singular, Dual, and Plural.

2.

Three Voices:
Active:

Middle:
Passive
:

I loosed I loosed for myself ikvOrjv, I was loosed.

eXvaa,
iXvcrafj/rjv,

Verbs which occur only in the Middle or Passive are

called Deponents : Bexo/iat,
Ols.

I receive.
Future have special forms
for tie
:

Only the Aorist and

Two

tlie

Passive ; and only the Aorist special forms for the Middle
all other tenses

in

the Middle forms have also a Passive meaning.

3.

classes of Tenses

A.

Principal, viz.
1.

Present : Xvas,

2. 3.

Perfect: XiXvKa,

Future :

I loose I have loosed Xvaco, I shall loose.

:

B.

Historical, viz.
1.

Imperfect :
Pluperfect
:

2. 3. 4.

Aorist:
viz.
:

I was loosing I had loosed eXvaa, I loosed.

eKvov, iKeXvKecv,
Xvco,

Four Moods,
1.

Indicative

Finite

2. 3.

Verb.

Subjunctive: Xva, Optative \voifii,

I loose I may loose I would loose

4.
5.

Imperative

Xve, loose.
viz.
:

Three Verbal
1.

Nmms,

Infinitive:

\veiv, loose

2.

Participle

Xuav, hosing
Xvreo?,
to

3.

Verbal Adjective:
Digitized

be

hosed,

solvendus.

by Microsoft

227.

THE PERSONAL ENDINGS

226.

TENSE-STEMS.

99

The Personal Endings had

originally the

following forms
Active.

100

TENSE-STEMS.

228.

2. The Strong Aorist Stem, from which the Second or Strong Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed. 3. The Future Stem, from which the Future Act. and Mid. are formed. 4. The Weah Aorist Stem, from which the First or Weak Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed. 5. The Perfect Stem, from which the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future-Perfect are formed. These five Stems belong to the Actiye and Middle. There are added to them, for the special forms of the

Passive
6.

The Strong Passive Stem, from which the Second

or Strong Aorist Passive and Second Future Passive

are formed.
7.

or

Weak

The Weah Passive Stem, from which the First Aorist Passive and First Future Passive are
all

formed.

The form from which

the Tense-Stems of a verb

may be

derived

is

called the Verlal Stem.

228.

and the ending.

solv-a-mus ;

The Subjunctive is indicated between the Stem Long vowels are peculiar to it :Xv-a)-/iev,
\ii-7]-t6, solv-d-tis.
t is

The vowel
Xv-oi-fj^v,

characteristic of the Optative, which

generally becomes

a diphthong
loose.

with other vowels:

Subjunctive has

the endings of the principal tenses; the Optative (except 1 Sing. Act.) those of the historical tenses. The Imperative has the following peculiar endings
Active.
Sing.
2. -6t 3. -T6>

we would

The

Middle.
-0-0
-a-6<o

Dual
Plur.

2. -Tov 3. -r<Bi/ 2. -re

3.

-a-Bov
-irdaiv

-a-6e

-vTav or -T<o<Tav

-trdav or -o'dacrav

228. Dialects.

The

Horn.

dial, often shortens

the long vo-ff^

oi the

Subjunctive in the Dual and Plural. Digitized by Microsoft


230.

CONJUGATIONS.

101

229.
is,

The general law

for the accentuation of the

verb

from
Ohs.

that the accent is placed as far back as possible the end, final ai not being considered long, except
:

in the optative
sion (chap,

An exception

Xvm, Xvere, 'Kvofuu. is formed by the Participles, which

in declen-

on

possible ( 79-87), always keep the accent the same syllable as in the Norn. Sing. Masc. : Part. Pres.
vii.), if

Act. ^aa-iKfiav, regnans, Neut. ^aaCKevov (not fiaalXevov according to 84), Part. Fut. Act. ^aa-CKeva-av, regnaturus,

Neut.
230.
1.

^aa-ikeva-ov.

(The special exceptions, see 331-333.)

Two Principal Conjugations more frequent connects the personal endings with the first two Tense-Stems by a connecting vowel: Xv-O'/xev. The verbs belonging to it are called verbs in a because the first Pers. Sing.

We distinguish
First

The

the

far

Pres. Act. ends in

2.

The Second

to

Xvco.

^the less

frequent, but older

first

afiixes

the personal endiags to the

two Tense-Stems without

fit

a connecting vowel: ia-jjiiv. They are called verbs in because the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. preserves the original ending /it: el-ixi. The forms of the other :^ve Tense-Stems are common

to both conjugations.

The Paradigms

of the verbs are given

is

mation of each Tense-Stem

I am

first: the forthen explained in order.

List of the Paradigms.

Ei/ii,

Table

I.

Synopsis of \iu, tho Tenses)

loose (exhibiting

the meanings of

U.

Vbebs in Q.
A.
Vowel Stems. 1. Uncontraeted, \ia
2,

Contracted,

rijiioi, iroUojj

Sov\6c0

III.

IV.

B.

Consonant Stems. 1. Guttural Stems, ir\KM, ipiiyu, -rikaam 2. Dental-Stems, \f/eiSonm, ireiBa, Koftl^a 3. Labial Stems, Tre/xirw, Xei-jva), Ka\6irTQj 4. Liquid Stems, S4pa, ayyeWai, (nrelpm
.^^

....
.,
.. ..

.. ..

..

V. VI. VII, VIII.

Verbs in MI.
First Class, T/eT)^!, Si5iBtt;,V5TJ);ui..

IX.

Second Class, Se^^i9%.<^^r.'W'cCosoft

102

PARADIGMS OF VEKBS.

Tal

PAEADIGMS OF VERBS.
Eliil,

lam.

Stem .

Table U.

PAEADIGMS OF VERBS.
S

103

to

O u
o
J^'*'?
-(JO
03

i iri.
55

11 S
tu

(3

(u

"^^

SSI-

ii

SSS,S5,S SSS-i-Srl

,!!lllt J

97ppiinaqcj95[ii

^^^^ p p p

o o < * b b b b _c-,_ fee 5-2 9ippiai9q:^93[i|

-s

^1

^ '^ "^ ^

;3

=>

a. a.>3-;
_

^ b.3ffi

b a. b a. a- 3--3O O u ^o K 3 Q u u ~o P p p p-^p p b b b b 2 b b b b b
a.-3:

Ph

>-o"fc

S b
.s

B
is"

P '5 =>
/<

3
t?

:^

S,o
W
05

i 8 3

>?>

til
I

r
f-a

tf.S S

s " S ?!

5>

B
rS

s,<

SSSrg-Sr
3-

J I i o SSSrS
e:

"'

S:

I
3 3 o
3IV

a *
<w

3 o 3 b b b b

!>

V V K 3 a o a a p-p-p p p 5 b b b b b (<'<'<(<'< p '^

a<
atf

a 3 o

HI

3 3

a^

b b
'5 '5 -

ra -g -g, &<.-

a CQ OmAPh J

-9 -S. &'

11.^

Ph
|i(

t>-

Digitized

by Microsoft

104

PAKADIGMS OF VERBS.

VEKBS

IN O.

Table

II

A.VOWEL

STBMl

AcTn

Tenses.

Table III.

PARADIGMS OF VEBBS.

^VEEBS

IN

II.

.105

1.UNCONTEACTED.
Voice.

106

PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS.^VERBS IN

12.

Table

III.-,

A,VOWEL

STEMS. Middle amd

Tenses common

Tenses.

contirmea.

Jl'AKAUiUJllS

OF VJCKBB

VEKJ3H IN

li.

107

1.UNCONTEACTED.
Passive Voices.
to hoth Voices,

( 225, Ohs. 2.)

Optative.

Imperative.

Infinitive.

Participle.

Xvoifir]!/

XieirBai

XvSfievos Xvo^evr]
Xv6fici/ov

Xvoio

\vm>

XvoiTo
Xvoifiedov

XvevBa
XvetrSov

Xvourdov
XvoicBrju

\via8av
XveaBe
XveaBcDV or XvecrBaxrav

XvoineBa
\voity6e

\V01VT0

Xv(Toijxr]V

Xvaecrdai
Xv(rofjivr]

etc., as

in the Pres. Xvoijojv

XeXiKrdai

Xvao^evov

XeXvfKvos

e'irjv

XeXv^evos
XeXvfievr]

XeXvo'o
XeXv(T6a>

XeXvfjLevov

XcXv(t6ov XeXitrdav

XeXv(r6e
XeXva-dtov or

XcXiirBaxTav

X(Xv(roifiriu
etc., as

XfXvaeirSai
Xvoi/ujij-

XeXvcofievos
XeXvcTOfiej/rj

in the Pres.

igitized

by Micros

)ft

XeXvo-QfievQV

108

PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS.

VEKBS

IN O.

Table

III,

A.VOWEL STEJ
Middle a
Tenses peculiar

Tenses.

continued.

PARADIGMS OF VEBBS.

VERBS

IN O.

109-

I.UNCONTRACTED.
Passive Voices.
the

Middle

Voice.

Optative.

110

PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS.

VEKBS JN
Present

fl.

Tab

A.VOWEL
Ttjua,

ST]
Ti

and Imperfect

/ hoiwuT

'Table IV.

PARADIGMS OF VEEBS.

VEEBS

IN

fl.

Ill

n.CONTEACTBD.
Indicative Mood,

112

PAEADIGMS OF VERBS.

VEBBS

IN O.

Table

AVOWEL
Present

st:
21

and

Imperfect

oontinued.

PABADIGMS OF VERBS.

VERBS

IN O.

113

II.CONTEACTED.
Indicative Mood.

114

PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS.

VEBBS

IN

SI.

Table IV.-

A.VOWEL STEMS
{Uncontractec

Tenses.

continued.

PABADIGMS OF VEEBS.

^VEEBS

IN

i2.

115

II. OONTEACTED.
Tenses,)

Imperative.

Infinitive.

Participle.

Active Voice.
Tifirjo'eLV
TTotijcreti/

TToifitrav

SovKoHTetv
TifOjirai,

8ovXa>(Ta>v

iToLrjtrov

noi^<rcu
8ov\a)(T(U
TeniirjKevai
jreTTOtqKevai
TTCiroirjKas

SovXaa-ov
TenfirjKe

ScdovXcoKevai

deBovXoiKaiS

Middle and Passive Voices.

Tifirjceo'dat-

Tifirja-onevos

jToirjirea-Bai

7rocr]a-6^evos

dovXao'eo'dai
TeTlflTjO'O

dovXaxro^evos
TeTijirjfievos

wejroirj<76ai

TTenotriiievos

8e8ovXai(ro

dedovXatrOat

TeTifirjaeaBat
TreTTOLTjcrfa-Bai

Tinfajirdiiivos
ireTTOtrfO'Sfievos

dedovXuKreaOat
niirjOrjvai
TTOlflBrjTl

dedovXtaadfievos

irotrjdrjvac

jrotrjOeis

dovXa6T]Ti

8ovXco6rivat

dovXcoBels
TijajBrjiTOiievos
TTOirjSrjo'Ofievos

SovXadjia-icrBai

SovXaBijo'Ofievos

Digitized

by Microsoft

110

PAEABIGMS OF VERBS.

^VEEBS

IN O.

Table V.

B.CONSONANT STEMS.
ttXcko),

I plait

(class 1); tji^iyio,

Iflee (class 2)

Tenses.

Table V.

PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS.

VERBS

IN

li.

117

I. GUTTURAL STEMS.
Toaa-a,

I arrange

(olass i).

Verbal Stems: ttXck, <pvy, ray.

118

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.

VERBS

IN

il.

Table VI.

B. CONSONANT STEMS.
yjrevboiiM,

I lie

(class 1), neida,

I persuade

(class 2)

Tenses.

Table VI.

PAEADIGMS OF VERBS.

VEEBS

IN O.

119

n.DENTAL STEMS.
Kofii^a),

lea/rry (class 1,

&.).

Verbal Stems: ijrfvS, nid, KOfud.

120

PAKADIOMS OF VEEBS.
I have

Table TU,

B.CONSONANT STEMS.
TTc/in-o),

I send

(class 1)

XeiVa),

(class 2);

Tenses.

TaHe VII.

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.

121

III.LABIAL STEMS.
KaXvTTTO),

I cover (class

3).

Verbal Stems:

7re/x7r, Xitt, *caXu/3.

Optative.

Imperative.

Infinitive.

Participle.

Active.

TrefXTTOtut

ItefXTTcav

XeiiroLfii

XetTre

XeLTTClP KaXlfTTTCLV
irefiylrciv

XetTTcoi'

KaXvTTre

KakvTrTcav

Xeiyj/oijiL

Xei-^eLv

Xeiyjrtav

KaXyyjroLfjLi

KaXv^etv
XtVc
KoKvyf/o
XiTrelv

KaXv^frav

Xt770t/i

XlTTOiV

KaXvylraifiL

KaXv-^ai

KcCkvy^ras

7re7rofi(f)

TrcTTO^cficvai

XeXotTTot/it

XeXotTre

XeXoLwevai

XeXoLTras

Middle and Passive.

TreflTTOlflTJV

TTefiTrea-dat

7refi7rofj.i/o$

XeiTTOLf^riu

Xeiirov

Xelirea-OaL

XeiTTo^evos
KaXvTTTOfieuog
Treix-yjrofievos

KaXvirTOLfirjV
7refjL\j/-oilx7}V

KaXvirrov

KaKvTTTea&ai
Xei\^e(r6ai

XeLyjroLfjuriv

Xl^jr6flvos
KaXv\lr6fj.evos

KaXvyj/^oLfirjv
Trefxiijraa-dai

7r[xyj/'dfievos

Xnroiyj}V
KaXvylraifirju

XtTTOV
KdXv\j/-a

XtTTeoSat
KaXvyjrao-Oat

XiTTOfievog
KaXvylz-dfieuos

TreTrefXfievos eirju

TTCTrefifj^vos

XcXetfifxevos Lr)V

XeXetT^o
KeKaXui/z-o

XcXct^^ae
KeKaXv(f>6ai

XeXeififxevos

KeKaXvfXfievos
XeXiyjroifJ.T]V

e'crjv

KKaKvfxpAvos

XeXel-^eo-dat
KKaXvyj/-(Tdai
7rH(j)dr)Ti

XeXef^ofxepos
KeKoXvyjrofievos
TrefXipdcLS

KeKaXvyj/^olfiTjv

XcKpdelrjv
KaXvtpBclijv
TTefUpSrja-OLfirjv
Xet(})dj](ToliXT}p

XeL(j)Br)Ti

XetcjydijvaL

XeLcfyQeis

KaXvcf>6T}Ti

KaXvc})6iivai

KaXvcfiOeis
iTeix<l)drj<T6fiepos

Xei<f)67}(r(rBat
KaXv<fi6T)a-(Tdai.

XeLffyOTjcofievos
KaXv(f)dr]o-6fxeyos

KaXvcl)Brj(roLfj.7]V

2. TrejLtTTTeos, XetTrreoff,
Conjugatioii.

KaXvnTeos.

(class 2), as to its Perf., see

the

escort

Xonr-o-s,

279 BaTrra, I hury (class reTnamvng ; r) KaXv^"!}, the hut ; 6

;

3),

Stem

toc/i

rpoTT'O-s,

the

Digitized

by Microsoft

322

PAEADIGMS Of VEEBS.

Table VIII

B.CONSONANT STEMS
Sipto,

I skin (class 1)
Tenses.

dyyiiiXa),

I announce

(class 4, c)

a-neipa,

/ sow (clasi

Table VIII.

PARADIGMS OF VEEBS.
fi,

123

IV.LIQUID STEMS (X, p, p). 4, cZ); fiialva, I soil (clsi&B 4:^ d). Verbal
Optative.

Stems

Bep,

dyye\,

o-Trcp, fiiav^

Imperative.

Infinitive,

Participle,

oepoi^L
dyyeXKoLfxt,
(nreipoLfiL
fj.taivoip.1

Bepe Syye}<Xe
OTTClpe
fitatve

hipeiv

bipav
dyyeXXcBV
(nreiptav

dyyeXKeiv
(nreipeiv
fitaivetv

fiLaivav

depoip.1,

Sepetp

bepSiv

dyyeKoip.1
(nrepoifii
fjLiavotfAt

dyyeXelv
(TTVepGLV

dyyeXSiV
fT7repa>i/

fxiaveiv

fiiavayv

delpaifjLi

Beipov

deZpuc

oeipas

dyyelkatfii
<nrLpatfiL
fiLavaifii.

ayyeiXov
{TTreipov

dyyeTKai
(TTrelpaL

dyyi\as
(nreipas
fitdvas

fxiavov

fxtavai

^yyeXKotfiL

rjyyeXKevat

r}yye\Kas
coTrapKoas
fiefxiayKCDs

eawdpKOLiML
fiefiLoyKOifii

(nrapKe
fxcfiiayKe

ifnrapKivai
p.IXLayKvai

Bepotfirjv

Bepov

Bepeo-Bat

BepSfxevos

dyydKkoLp.r]v
o-ireipoipjjv
p.iaivoiixi]V

dyyeKkov
o-irelpov

dyyeXkeadat
O'lrelpea'Bai

dyyeXXofievos
(nreip6fjLPos

fiiaivov

fitatvefrOaL

p,iaLv6p.vos

6pOLp.JJV

Bepeia-Oai

Bepovfievos

dyyekoifjuqv
(TTTipoifirjv

dyyckeia-Qat
(nrepelo-Bat
fiiavelo-BaL

dyyekovfievos
(nrepovfievos
fitavovp,uos

p.LavoLp.7}v

BeLpalp-iju

Belpat

Beipao-Oai

oetpafievos

dyyeiXaifjLTjv
(TjreLpalprjp
p.iavaifxrjv

ayyetXat
cnreTpai
fiiavai

dyyetXao-Bai
(Tireipaa-Bai

dyyeCXdp.VOs
(nreLpdfievos

pidvaaSai

ptapafxevos

BeBapfievos
eoTrapfievos

eLr}v

BeBaptro
^'yyeXa-o

BeBappepos

7)yy\p,evos etrjv
tlrjv

qyyeXOai
ifnrdpQai
pefiiavBat
Baprjvac

TjyyeXpevos

etTwapcro
fxep-iatro

itnrappepos
peptaffpepos

p.fiia(rfiej/os c'ltjv

Bapeirjp

Bdpr}0L

oapeis

dyyeXBeLTjv
{TTrapeLTjv

dyyiXdrjTi
(TTTdprjOi

dyyeXBrjpat
aTraprjvat

dyyeXdels
(TTrapels

piapBeirjp
BapT}(roipT}v

pLdp6r}Tt

piap6r}vaL
Bapr}a-(r6ai,

ptapOeis
baprj(ropepos

dyyeXdrj (rolpt] p
<T7rap7](roLpT)p

dyyeXdrjo-eo-dat
(prrap-qa-ea-daL

dyyeXBrja-dpePOs
tTTraprjaopepos

ptapQ-qaroLp-qv
2,

ptap6rj(T(r6at

piapBqo-opepos

BapTOs, dyyeXreos, (nrapreos^ piapreos.

Digitized

by Microsoft

124

PARADIGMS OF VEEBS.

^VEEBS

IK /M.

Table IX.

VEEBS IN

/!.

Table IX.

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.
CLASS.

VERBS
afifix

IN

fH.

125

^mST

This First Class consists of Verbs which

their tenninations

126

PARADIGMS OF VEBBB.

VJfiKiJH

iJN

fCl.

Jaoio

U./,

VEEBS

IN

cmtimted.

PABADIGMS OF VERBS.

VEEBS

IN

/ii.

127

FIRST CLASS.
This First Class consists of Verbs whioli
affix their

terminations

128

PARADIGMS OF VBEBS.

^VEBBS

IN

fJLl.

Table

VERBS IN MlSECOND CLASS.

atis Second Class consists of Verbs wHoli form the Present to the Pure Stem.

Stem by

adding

buRvvfu,

I sliew.

Pure Stem, Sf4K.

Present Stem, 8 eiK-u.


I,

THE PEESENT-STEJT.

129

Chap.

X.Fibst
I.

Principal Conjugation

or Verbs in m.

The Pkesent-Stem.

A.

Inflexion of the Present-Stem.

231.

after rejecting

The Present-Stem is w in the 1 Sing.

the form which remains Pres. Act.

the distinction of the Present-Stem from the 245, &c. The following Table exhibits the way in which the Personal Endings are affixed to the Present-Stem by means of the connecting vowels.

On

Verbal-Stem, see

232.

130

I.

THE PEESENT-STEM.

232.

-233.

PERSONAL ENDINGS.

131

233.

Ols. 1. The E-sound (e, ;;, Et) is used as a connecting vowel, except before nasals, where the O-sound (o, <o, ov) is

used.
2,

In 1 Sing. Ind. Act. &> is the connecting vowel lengthened, the ending fu being dropped. In the 2 Sing, eis is for ea-t. In the 3 Sing, ei for en : Xu-ei-y for Xv-e-a-i, \v-ei for Xu-e-tj [comp. solv-i-t]. The ov of the 3 Plur. has arisen out of o bycompensative lengthening (42): Xi-ov-n from Xv-o-vm for the original and Doric Xu-o-vri [comp. solv-u-nt]. In the 3 Sing.

Imperf. e(v) stands for original e-r comp. solveba-t end could not maintain its ground ( 67).
3. In

as t at the

the 2 Sing. Ind. Pres. Mid. rj or ei arose from e(<T)ai. ( 61, 38) : Xir) from Xvf(o-)at ; the ending et is the Old Attic one exclusively used in oXu, thou thinhest, ^ovXei, thou wishest;
is

rj

the one later in general use.

a,

Comp. the Put.

ij,
r;,

oyjrfc

( 259).
r)

-4.

The Subjunctive has always

of the 2 Sing. Mid.
is

for o (ov), e, ei; the

5.

contracted from ij(o-)oi (comp. 228).' In the 2 Sing. Imper. Act. the termination after the connecting

vowel is quite lost, ou in the 2 Sing. Imperat. and Imperf. Mid. has arisen from e((r)o, eo: Xvov =Xve(a-')o, iXvov=: Xu(o-)o ( 61, 37); oto in the 2 Sing. Opt. Mid. arose from
o 1 (a-) o.

233.

Dialects.

The Epic

dial,

sometimes has the original

:

ending
'2

fii

o{ the 1 Sing, ia the suhjunctive

iBiXa-fii, velim ; the

Sing. Subj. and Opt. often has the fuller ending

a-Ba (for s):

ii6eXrj-ada^edeXrjs, Kkaioi-aBa

= icXaioK (icXaia, I weep); the 3 Sing. Subj. has the old ending ai.(y) from Tt edeXr)-<Ti(v) = ideXr/.
:

2.

The long vowels of

:

the Subjunctive are often shortened in

Horn.
3.

lOvvere for IdvuriTe (IBvvai,

dial, often

I put
:

straight) (comp. 228, D.).

has fievai or fiev in the Inf. Act. connected with the Stem by an accented e ajivv-i-iievai, or afiMV-i-iiev

The Epic

= dfivvetv,
4.

to defend.

The 2
;

Sing. Mid. often remains uncontracted in the Ion. dial.

ex"?"" (hoiearis), also

XiXaUai, thou wishest ; Subj.

(miscearis)

shortened, fita-y^aL

want
5.

of.

Imperat. rfo, follow; Imperf. iheveo, thou wast in eo is also contracted to eu ( 37, D.) : ejrev.
in poetry often hasa-

^ovXafietrBov, -fieada,
6.

The 1 Dual and 1 PI. Mid. we wish, aro ( 226, D.) occurs in the
:

for 6

Ion. dialect regularly for vto in

PI. Opt.

fiaxoiaro

oral.,

aro, are also

they may fight. In New-Ion. sometimes fouhd in other forms where f is the

(= [laxotvTo),

Digitized

by Microsoft


132
I.

THE PEESENT-STEM.
B.

234-.

The Augment.
increase) is tlie

234.

The Augment (Augmentum,

225,
3.

sign of the past in the Indicative of all the historical

tenses
(

B).

It

has two forms, that

is, it

ap-

pears either
a)
5)

As a

Syllabic Augment, in the syllable e prefixed, or

As a Temporal Augment, in the lengthening

vowel.

of the

initial

All
Syllabic

verbs

beginning
:

with a

consonant

have the

Augment
Syllabic
e

e-Xv-o-v, i-TinrT-o-fj^rjv,
:

is

doubled after

epplTrrov,

from

I was struck, phrTm, I hurl.

I
could,

Oils.

The
I

Augment

instead of
6~fi7jv,

in fj-iieXK-o-v,

appears in the stronger fonn of 17 was about to, from iiiXKio ; fj-fiovX;

wishedj from j3ovXo/iat

Tj-dvvd-nTjVj

from

hvva^iai.

235. The Temporal Augment is used in all verbs which begin with a vowel, whether aspirated or not. The Temporal Augment changes

a
6

to
,, ,,

7;

7
CO

Head I drive oveiSifo), I reproach *iKTeiioi, I beseech

ay a,
f \auv<o,

Imperfect rjy-o-v
,,

7J\avv-o-v

oveiSi^-o-v
'iKersv-o-v

connecting vowel instead of o ^ov\~i-aTO := i^ovkovTO.

7.

Krjh-e-arai

= Kij8-o-rai,

they care^

Horn., quite peculiarly, has in the 3

Dual Imperf. tov, <t6ov

two made; and Attic writers have Tr)v for the 2 Dual of an historic tense elxiTTjv, ye two had, evperrjVy ye two found.
for TTjv, a-drjv: irevxeTov, the
:

^In Hom., and also in other poets, the Augment be eatirAj omitted : TeSpff, he made; ex^v, he hud. X, fi, ^, o-, are also sometimes doubled after the Syllabic Augment {XXiVo-eto

234. Dialects.

may

(from

Xia-a-qiiai,

heseech)

6 only in the

Stem

eSSeto-a (i

beared, 317, 5).

epaiTTojiev (paTrro),

235. Dialects.
S-yoi/.
ill

On the contrary, p is sometimes left single / sew, spin). By the Temporal Augment a becomes 5 in Doric
is

The Temp. Aug.

very often wanting in Herod,

especially

the case of diphthongs.

Digitized

by Microsoft

.238.

THE AUGMENT.
to

133

-B

5
7)

'vppl^cD,

su

,,

tuirBavofiai,

av
OL

rjv
CO

av^dvco,

I insult I perceive I increase

1 pity

Imperfect 'v^pi(-o-v

olKTeipa,

jicrBav-i-fojV

rjH^av-o-v

axTeip-o-v

Before vowels, a becomes d, not tj alio, I hear, 'dlov. The long vowels 17, a, I, v, and usually the diphthongs t, ev, ov, remain without Augment.

I conjecture, eiKa^-o-u (also ^Ka^ov), I find, evpia-K-o-u (seldom Aorist rjvpov), ^also a V and o i immediately before a vowel avaiva, I dry, aiacvov, olajci^co, I steer, oldia^ov, and .other
eiKa^at,
fvplorKcn,
:

diphthongs in isolated instances.

Ohs.

The
e

rough hreathing precedes

form when

the verb in its

the augmented unaugmented form had it.

7?)

286.

becomes

et (instead of

in

some

verbs, viz.

in

earn.

Heave;
ep-irai

i6i^a>,

I become

accustomed; iXiaaco, 1

I draw ; eiro/j,ai, Ifollow ; ipr^d^ofiaL, I creep ; kcmdw, I entertain hospitably ; xo>, I have. Comp. below the Aorists 318), eVKov (alpew, I take, 327, l), elaa, 1 (
roll; eXKO) or eXKvco,

I work ;
eXjjb'tjv

or epirv^co,

placed
Obs.

269, D., and

275).

began with a consonant, and therehad the Syllabic Augment: hpya^-o-p,ai ( 34, D.) i-Fepya^-o-pr)v arcx-"' ( 327, 6) i-a-ex-o-v. Then the consonant was dropped i-epya^-o-prjv, i-ex-o-v, finally te was regularly
originally
fore
; :

These verbs
ei

contracted to

( 36)

fipya^-6-p.riv, elx-o-v.

237.

has the Augment in the second impra^ov for fjopTa^ov (comp. 37, D. 2). Verbs which originally began with a digamma ( 34, D.), consequently with Si consonant, have the Syllabic Augment in spite of their initial vowel avhava, Iplease; e-dvbavov, ovpeto, Iraake water; aBeoi,
iopra^a,
:

celebrate,

vowel

1 push; aveopai, I buy ( 275). Temporal, are combined in opaco,

Both Augments, Syllabic and

I see, capaov {iapav)

av-oiy-a,

I open,
238.

av-eay-o-v.

Verbs compounded with a preposition have

tJie

237. Dialects, Hom. forms eavoxoti from olpoxofto, I pour out twine; ifjvSavou (Herod. idvSamv) and rjv&avov from ivhavie, 1
f^ease.

Comp.

34,

D. 1 and 4
Digitized

by Microsoft

: ; ;

IM
earry
i/c,

I.

THE PKESENT-STEM.
after the preposition
irpo';-wy-a),
:

239;

Augment immediately
in, ek-e-tftep-o-v
of,
;

out

becomes

e'f

before the

ek-^ep-w, I I lead to, 7rpo<;-fjy-o-v Augment i^-fjy-o-v, I

:

led out.

The

true forms of
(

iv, in,

and

(tvv, with,

altered

by assimilation
fore e
:

51) in the Present, appear again be-

(Tv\-'ker/-a),

I collect,

crvv-e-\ey-o-v

ifi-^dW-a,

invade, iv-i-^aXX-o-v.

The final vowel

of a preposition is elided
;

d7r-e-<f)6p-o-Vf

from diro-cf>ep-a> only irepl and rrpo never lose their final vowel but Trpo is often contracted with e irpov-^aivov from irpo-e-^aiv-o-v, I marched on.
carried away,
;
:

239.

Exceptions. Some verbs, which are not merely compounded with prepositions, but derived from already compound nouns (Deoomposita), have the Augment at the heginning: havnoofiat (from ivavrlos, against"), rjvavTiovjafv (from oofujv), I was against; poet, jjvapov from ivaLpm, 1 slay; 5ra/5/5i;<riafo/xac (from irapprja-ia, freedom of speecK), inappr)tTia^6pr)v, I spoke freely; but the majority nevertheless have it in the middle cKKkri(Tm^a>, I assemble, from KK\rja-ia, assembly, i^cKKrjfria^ov vjroTTTevm, I suspect, from viroirTos, suspicious, vTranrrfvov KaTTjyopim, 1 accuse, Kar-qyopovv (from eov). vapavop-ia, I act contrary to law (from irapd-vopos, contrary to law), has irregularly Traprpiopovv {fov).

240.

Many
I

prepositions have in

some compounds so

far lost
:

their distinctive meanings, that the verbs are treated as simple

KaOeibtD,
sleep,

fKaSevSov yet Ka&rivdov also ; KadL^a, I sit, fm6i^ov. Comp. the verbs Irjpi (a(f>ir;p.i., 313), ei/mpj, (dp(jiUvinjpi, 319, 5), rjpai (^KaBrjpai, 315, 2). Some verbs also have a double Augment dve^opm, I endure, rjveixoprjv
:

;.

dvopdoa,
rivi>-)(Kovv

raise up,
;

rjvapSovv

(ooy)

ivox>^^a>,

encumher,

(eov)

irapoivka,

I act
Siaira,

as a drunlca/rd, iivapavovv

So

also hiaiTaai,
BiaKoveto,

I live (from

mode of

life),

ibir'jrav

(aov)

Z serve,

edtrjKovovv, (eov).

241. Sis, lad, ill, in composition is preceded by the Augment when the second word begins with a consonant or long vowel :
SvsTVxe'-'

I am

imfortunate,

ibvsrixovv
;

(foi/);

SurmjreiB,

make a sour face, iSvswTrovv (eoy) but short vowels receive the Temporal Augment after Sis Svsdpearia, I displease, Susij:

pecTovv

(eoi').

Compounds with cv generally have no Augment: eirixow (eov),. I wasfmiunate but short vowels occasionally receive the Tcm;

Digitized

by Microsoft


243.

CONTEAOTED VEEBS.
Augment
after eS
:

135
with eicp-

poral

evrjpyeTovv (eov), togetter

yiTovv, from eiepyeTca,

I do

good,

242. All other compounds have the Augment at the beginning j]6vjwvv, from a.dvp,cu>, I am without cov/rage.
:

C.

Contracted Verbs.
a, e,

243. Verbs whose Present-Stem ends in

or

o,

regularly contract these Towels in all forms of the

Present-Stem with the connecting vowel, and hence

243. Dialects.

The
:

Ion. dial, very often does not contract

differently.

hut the three kinds of contracted verbs are treated A. Hom. inflects the a-Stems in three ways
1.
qpere

The

syllables regularly contracted

by the Attic

writers remain

and unchanged
0).

doiSid-ei, he sings, vaicra-ovcri, they dwell,

and

the Fem. Part. vm^Taaxra for vauraova-a, with a remarkable change

of OV to
2.

dperd-u, he thrives, from takes place apera Trpos-avSda, I address. dperaa ; Trpos-r]iba jrpos-r]v8a-e, from Sometimes ae becomes rj (not d) irpos-avbtjTrjv (3 Dual Imperf.), (from opd-eat) Att. Spa (2 Sing. opr/ai also with regular accent

Contraction

Pres. Ind, Mid.).

the same kind

:

Extension instead of contraction takes place when a vowel of is inserted before the long one which results from contraction 6pda>, I see, contracted opS>, extended opoa.
3.

a) This inserted vowel

inflected.

is

usually short.

Hence

oadai is thus

Act.

Pr


136
I.

THE PEESENT-STEM.

243.

are called Cmtracted Verbs.

The laws

of contraction

given in 36-38 are observed. Paradigms of ibe three verbs Ti,//,da), iroiew, SovXoco are given on pp. 110-113.
Ois.
^As the fi in the Infinitive civ is not original, aeiv, oeiv do not become av, oiv, but av, ovv (37, ObsS).

Dialects.
i)

sometimes l<mg,

e. g.

i7/3a-0U(ra

Att. rfiSxra

Horn. r\^&ti>(Ta

from T]&aa,

I am

youthful, so also from Spaw,

hpa-ova-i Att. bpaa-t

I do Hom. Spmoxri

and from

p.vdop.ai,

I remember
/ivd-eadai

Att. fivacrdaiTiojn. /ivdaa-Bai.

is

After long vowels the one following

liva-ojievos Att. jivap-evos

sometimes shortened

Horn. p.va>6p,evos
lou,,'

fj^d-ovTes

Tj^avTes

The metre
or short.
(
"),

chiefly determines

rj^aovTEs which of the vowels should be

dpfrda
("
),

Such forms,

for instance, as

^^oavres

are inadmissible.

In Herod, the Stems in a often pass over into the conjugation of the Stems in c opea (but opas, opa), opeopev, opeovcn, Spiovres. Hom. also has ijvTeov Instead of co we also find ea: 6peiovTs.
:

Att. Tjvrav (from avrd-o),

use of.

I meet),

;(pE(u/xEi/os= Att. f^piijuvos,

making

B. Stems in

fluctuate

fo

is

often monosyllabic

between the open and contracted forms, by synizesis ( 39): iSprjveov, I com:

Att. plained; often also in Ionic contracted to ev Hom. veviiai veLKova-i, viopai, I return home, eov rarely becomes ev: veiKEva-t they quarrel, ee becomes r; irregularly in Hom.: ofiaprrjTrjv {ojxapTia, I meet with), dweCkijTrjv (dn-eiXem, I threaten), dopTrrjrrjv

(dopTTea,

I sup),

Inf. (fiopripevai

= Att. cpopelv,
is

to carry.

An utterly
:

anomalous Infinitive

is (fiop!]vai..

The second

c in

the 2 Sing. Mid.

sometimes dropped

jxoBeai for

fivBieaL (Att. /iuflj, p.vBf'i, thou sayest), TriaXe'o

= Att.
:

cVibXoC, thou
jivBeiai.
e.i

hadst intercourse
first

sometimes

ee

are contracted to c t

The

way

is
:

usual in Herod.
veiKeia

Hom.

also prolongs e to

without

contraction

= Att.

veiKco,

eVeXcict-o

= Att.
a
:

ireKelTO (reXm,

complete).

G. Stems in o are mostly contracted

yovvovpim,

supplicate.

Some have an
apova-i.(v),

extension
;

like

those

in

dp6atm(v)

= Att,

they plough

Srj'iocoev

= Att.

BrjioUv they

would destroy
contracted to

vnvcaoirras

= Att.
o

virvovvras, the sleepers.

is

In Herod,
Eu
:

ebKalevv

sometimes changes to e, and with o Att. edLKaiovv, deemed right.

Digitized

by Microsoft


2-15.

PKESENT AND VEEBAL-8TEMS.

Ols.

137

i 244.

Monosyllabic Stems in e admit only the conAll syllables which, contracted, would produce another sound remain uncontracted.
1.

traction ej.

Stem TrXe

(Pres. ttX/o),
jrXfis
TrXei

I sail,

,,

Inf. TrXeiv)

w\eeis
TrXe'ei

but

irXeu
TrXeovai
eirKeov.

eWXees
Se'ffl,

cTrXet?

hind, forms

&c., to

an exception, having to Sovv (St'ov), Sovfiai, distinguish them from forms of dea, 1 am in want of,
duty.
r),

Set, it is necessary, to beov,

2.

Some Stems

in a have a preference for

fa-<.
;

which they admit

;

in

the place of d: hungry, TTdvrjv

scratch ;
a-fia-a),

Hive,

f^s, fj,
thirst,

^re, f^v
;

Trcivd-m,

lam

SLijfd-cD,

I stroke ;
has
o>

yffd-a>,

so also Kvd-a>, I Siiff^j/ I scrape, and xpa-oitai, I make

Ve

of.

3. piyo-a,

I freeze,

and a

for

ov and ot:

Inf. piy&v,

Opt

ptymjv.

4. Xouo),

I wash, lav-o, has a peculiar contraction ; that is, the connecting vowel after o u disappears c-Xou for e-\ov-e, XoC-ftai
:

for \ov-o-fiai, &c.

to

ol-fiai,

In like manner ot-o-jiai is often contracted think, and the Impf. to-o-jirji/ to w-firfv.

D.

Distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verbal-

Stem.

a verb the Verbal -Stem from the combination of which with the terminations of persons, tenses, moods, infinitives and participles,
245.
call that part of

We

consistently with the laws of euphony, all the forms

of the verb

may be

explained:

Xv, Pres.

Xi^co,

Perf.

XeXvKa, Put. Xva-m; rofia, Pres.

Put.
TlfJbrj(T(0.

Tifido), Perf. rerl/j/rjKa,

Ohs.

From the Verbal-Stem also nouns are formed by means of the nominal sufiSxes 'Ki-tn-s, loosing ; Xv-rijp, looser ; Xv-rpo-v, redemption fee; Ti-iirj-a-t-s, valuation ; rifirj-^-s:, censor.
:

When
back,
it,

the Verbal-Stem cannot be traced further

called a Root: Xv,
:

it is

a Boot- Verb
244. Dialects.

Xvco.

and a verb formed from But when the Verbal-Stem is

Herod, has
xpS-foi-

2.

For

xp^'"'"

4.

Hom. 3

Sing. Imperf. Xde (for XoFf, 35, 06s.)

Digitized

= XoCe, TKove.

by Microsoft

138
itself

I.

THE PKBSENT-STEM.

24S

a Nominal-Stem formed by
said to be derived:
of
rtyu.??,

means of a nominal
Ti,/j,a is

suffix, it is

at once the

Nominal-Stem
suffix fid
it is

Tumour, formed

by the nominal
firom

a derivative

from the root ri, and the Terb formed one n/j-dco.
:

Ohs.

Boots

are almost all of one syllable

syllables.

derived Stems are of

two or more

246.

The Verbal-Stem

is

not

always Kke
is
'Keitr-co,

the

Present-Stem, but the Present-Stem

extension of the Verbal-Stem: Pres.

frequently an

leave,

Present-Stem Xenr, Verbal-Stem Xiir (Aorist eknrov).

Such additions are

Stem.
Ols.

called enlargements of the Present

is

the Verbal-Stem divested of them

the pure Verbal-

Where tbe Verbal-Stem differs from the Present-Stem, nouns are usually formed from the former, not from the latter v Verbal-Stem ^uy, Present-Stem (jievy, substantive (jivy-ri
(fug-a), adj.
<l>vy-6.(h)-s, fugitive.

to the 247. The relation of the Present-Stem Verbal-Stem produces four Classes of verbs with some
subdivisions.
1.

FiEST Class (unenlarged).

The Present-Stem is like the Verbal-Stem. This comprises first of all the pure verbs, i. e., verbs whose Stem ends in a vowel (with the exception of a
small

number
;

in ew, 248),

and many others besides

TijjLa-o),

^ov\o-(o, TraiSev-a),

I honcmr

dpx-a>,

T educate ; \v-a, I loose ; tZ-g} I 'rule ; dy-oa, I lead ; Xey-a>, I say.

248. 2. Second Class (lengthened class). The Stem vowel is lengthened in the Present-Stem. This comprises several verbs whose Stem ends in a mute, and which in the Present have a diphthong or a long vowel, as

248. Dialects.

To these belongs the Horn,

Digitized

o-euw,

I htnvy,

from

the

Stem

av.

by Microsoft

249.

PEESENT AND VEEBAL-STEMS.

I flee
Heave
Pure Stem <pvy
{tpvy-i], flight,

IBS'
Lat./M?o)

(pevy-cD,

XeiV-o),
TTfid-o),
TiJK-o),

I persuade I melt
1 rub

raifi-a,

Xijr
iri

(jrid-avo-s,

persuasive)

Tax
Tpi/3

But

besides these there are also six verbs in t <, viz.

TrXew, Jsai'Z
jrvfo),

Pure Stem ttXu

J otcw

140

I.

THE PEESENT-STBM.
(I-class).

25C

250. 4.

FouETH Class

The Present-Stem adds i to the Verbal-Stem [Lat. The i is here subject to the fug-i-o, Pure Stem fug]. various changes and transpositions discussed in 55-58,
viz.

a)
<r(r

The Gutturals
I guard,

k, 7,

')(^

form with

i,

the group

(New-Att. tt) (57):

instead of
(j>v\aKia>,

<j)v\acra-a>,

Pure Stem (jivXaK

(c^uXaKij,

o guard)
TcuTda,

I arrange,

rayia,
rapa)^i(o,

ray
rapa)^

(^Tay6s,

arranger)
TapdcrtTco,

T confuse,

(rapayrj,

confusion)
Other Examples,
jlXltrcr<o(^K),

I roll Kr]pvcra-a)(^K), I ^oclavm

Ols.

irpa<T<Ta(y),
fr(l>dTTQ>(y),

I do I slay I

6pva-(Ta>(x),

I dig
I

The

character of the Presents ap/ioTTa,

7rXa(rcrci),

I fit,

naa-a-a,

scatter,
n-TiVo-o),

shape, (^pdcra-a,

seethe, tpeaa'a,

I hoil,

I stamp, ^\'i.TTa>, I abstract honey, has Stem n-en- irregularly.

b)
h,

row,

is

a Dental;

wea-ara,

251.
:

and

more rarely
;

7,

with

t,

form

t,

58)

e^ofiai,

I sit,

instead of eBiofiai, Pure

Kpd^eo,

Stem

eS

(eS-o?, seat, Lat. sedes)

I cry,

instead of Kparjia,

JPure

Stem

Kpa'^.
other Examples.

(ppaCa>(8),

I say
:

o^w^S),

I smell

(rxtia(8),

I split

Obs.

Present-Stems
ffrafca,

Stem in y
moreover,

in f which express a sound have theVerhalorerafo), I sigh ; olpa(w, I wail; olpay-rj, a wailing;

trickle;

a-Ti^a,

prick,

Lat.

inrstig-o,

250.
\la-a-opai,

Dialects. The Stems of the Presents Ipaaa-a,

I whip;
end

beseech; Kopva-a-a,

I arm;

Herod,

dc^ao-o-ca,

I touch,

in Dentals (Xtr,

Kopvd); Hom.

ivia-a-a,

I blame, has

irregularly

the

Stem

e'vtn-.

251. Dialects.

In

all dialects

Presents in -f<a
in

quently have a Guttural in aXajraftn, I conquer ;

Tvokfui^m,

for their character,

Saifco,

I war;

oTV(j)f\i^w,

/ divide ; I strike, &c.

much more freHom. especially p.fpp.ripi^o, I ponder

Digitized

by Microsoft

253.

PEESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. I whip, and some

;

141
Stem xXayy,

liaa-rl^u),

others.

xXafii),

call,

a call ; TrXofoj, I mislead ; (roKmia, I hlcru) a trumpet have a Pure Stem in yy vl^a, I wash, has irregularly the Stem
K\ayy-ij,

252.
^aXXo),

c)

with

forms

X\

56)

throw, for

jSaXito,
dXto/iiai

Pure Stem ;SaX Ot'X-os, o sSo<)

,,

aXXo;uai,
TiXXa),

foap

dX
TiK

[saZ-i-o]

I pluck

tCKuo

Other Examples.

6aX\ai,Ibloom a-(j)aXK<o, I cause to stagger a-TeXKa, I send TToKKai, Iwield dyyeWa, I announce \jraKKa, Tplay on tJie lyre

253.

d) V

syllable of the
Tcivie,

and p tlu-ow the Stem ( 55)

for Tevia,

into the preceding

I stretch,

Pure Stem rev

(^i

(t6v-o-s,

a stretching,
Lat. tendoy

<j>6eipa),
<j>aivai,

I corrupt

I show

cjidepita

6 e p (<^6op-a, corruption)

(paviu)

(j>av (^d-(j>av-rjs, invisihle)

Other Examples.
Iiatvofiai,

I rage
If the

atrflpa,

I sow
J collect
i
i :

eyelpa,
vipaivco,

I awaken

aipa,

I raise

dyelpa,

I weave
is-

Ohs.

Stem

syllahle has

or

v for

its

vowel, this

lengthened by the
KpXv-ita
;

retreating

npiva,

sever, judge,

from

avpo),

I drag,

from

avp-tco,

A single
The
I

Stem in X

also follows this formation, viz.

oc^fXico, to distinguish it

o^eX, Pres.

ocfKika,
increase,

owe, for

from d^eXXo), J

with the same Stem.

sacrifice

unites immediately with the final vowels of the Stems Kav

their v (f)
:

and KKav, which then

icKa-ia,

Ka-ia,

I hum,

I weep.

Additional fonns in Attic are Koa, icKda ( 35,

less

Ohs.).

N. B.

The other

usual classes of verbs are given below.

Horn, joins t immediately with Vowel Stems Jhurn, Stem 6a fia-Loiiai, I seek. Stem /xa ; va-la>, I dwell. Stem va ; and he uses ocfieXKa in the sense of the Att. ocf/fiKa but, on the other hand he has AXm, I press, from the Stem eX, for which one might expect eXXm (Class 4, c).

253. Dialects.

ha-la>,

Digitized

by Microsoft


142
II.

THE STRONG OE SECOND AOEIST-STEM.

254.

n.

The Strong ok Second Aoeist-Stem.

The Strong or Second Aorist Active and
is

254.

formed from the Strong Aorist-Stem, which the Pure Verbal-Stem, except the few cases .named in 257.

Middle

is like

Pres.

Xeiiv-a,

I leave

TvirT-io,

I strike

j3a\X-(B,

throw

Stem

XtTT

rvir
Active.

Aorist Ind.

-Xm-o-v,
I

I left

e-Tvir-o-v,

struckl e-/3aX-o-i/,
\

threw

e-XtTT-c-r
I

e-nnr-e-s

e-^aX-e-r

etc., like

the Imperfects
I

eXftn-oi>, eTVirrov,

t^aKkov

Subj. n^^

jXijr-Q)
iiT-rj-s
I

Tvir-O}
I

^aX-o)
^aX-7/-ff
I

TVTr-Tj-s

etc., like tlie Pres.

f^
,

Subjunctive XtiVto, runTa, jSaXXm

TVTT-oi-iu
I
I

|(Xi7r-ot-yL

/3dX-oi-;xi
I

|\XlV-OI-f
etc., like

TVTl-Ol-S

|3dX-0l-S

the Pres. Optative XeiTroifu, rviTToifu, /SdXXoifxi

Txm-e
I

fXiTT-f

0dX-e
I \

'j\Xt7r-C-Tft)

TV7r--TQ>

jSoX-e-TO)

etc., like

the Pres. Imper. Xcmg,

TiWe, ^dXXe
j3dk-LV

Iniin.

Xiir-eiv
Xtff-cbi/,

Part.

XiTr-ovcaj

TVTT-av, Tvir-ova-a,
rvTT-Qv,

^aX~a>Vf
(TO,

^aX-oV'

Xm-ov, Oen.
OVTOS

Xm-

Gen. tutt^

/SoX-dv, Oen.

^aX-6vTos

Middle.
Indie '
l/^'"^"''"""^"?''
I

e-TVTr-6-fj,Tiv
I

i-^dk-o-jUjv

|\e-Xi7r-ov
etc., like

l-Tvir-ov

c-^aX-ov
e^dXXoiirjv

the Imperf.

jXeiTrofirjv, iruTrToiirjv,

rim-at-pxtL

^aX-a>-fiai

....
etc., like
I

"JT-j

^aX-u
pdX-oi-ixrjV
j8aX-oi-o.

the Pres. Subj. XetVojjugi, TvirrajLm, ^aXXafiai

nm-oi-fi.ijv
I
I
I

Opt. A'^'^-o'-f"?"
'

l\Xi7r-ot-o

Tvn-oi-o

etc., like

the Pres. Opt. Xemoifiriv, rwKTolfir)v, ^aXXoiixriv

TV1T~0V

)3aX-oO
I
1

^
Infin.

''\Xi7r--crda>
I

Tvw-i-a-da>

^aX-e~(rdai

etc., like
I

the Pres. Imper. XeiVou, run-Tou, fiaXXov

TVTT-e-a-aai
?;,

Xm-i-g-dm
Xt7r-o'-/^eyo-y,

^aX~e~(r6aL
?;,

Part.
I

o-v

Tinr-d-;iej'o-y,

o-j"
|

fiaX-o-jievo-s,

rj,

o-v

Digitized

by Microsoft

257.

II.

THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM.

143

1. The Inflexion of the Strong Aorist-Stem from that of the Present-Stem (Imperfect and Present tenses) only in the accent of the following forms the Infin. Act. is perispome (Xmelv), the Infin. Mid. paroxytone (\nrea-6ai), the Part. Act. accents the O-sound (Xi/ircov, Xiirovaa), the 2. Sing. Imper. Mid. is perispome (Xiirov).

255.

differs

2.

The

Aorist Middle has not, like the

the Present
thus

Middle,
e^dXofj/riv

meaning also of the Passive: means only I threw for myself, but not,

/ was

thrown.

On

the

Augment

of the Indicative, 234-242.

256. The Strong Aorist can be formed only from such verbs as have a Present-Stem different from the Pure Verbal-Stem, therefore not from the verbs of the First

^unenlarged) Class

Also it is not usually formed ( 247). from many verbs of other classes, and scarcely occurs &i all from any but Root- Verbs ( 245).
Obs.

On

the Aorists of the verhs 6v-o> and <^i-a (class 1), see

316, 16, 17.

257. In a few verbs the Strong Aorist

Stem

is
<=

distinguished

from the Pure Verbal Stem ; viz. instead of of the latter, the Strong Aor. sometimes has a, by which rpeir-a, I turn, though belonging to the first class, has a Strong Aor. E-rpaTr;

o-v (Impf. e-rpeir-o-v), i-rpan-o-jiriv. An isolated formation is Pres. Tpay-a, I gnaw, Aor. e-rpSy-o-v. ay-io, 1 drive, likewise belonging to the first class, by doubling the Verbal-Stem forms

the Aorist-Stem ay-ay, whence Ind.

Inf. ay-ay-civ.

fjy-uy-o-v, Subj. ay-ay-a.

1. All the peculiarities enumerated 233, D. 255. Dialects. extend likewise to the Strong Aorist : 2 Sing. Subj. ^a\r]a-6a, 3. Sing. The Inf. Aor. Act. ends in Horn, also in ieiv instead of ^akri<n, &c.
'

ilv (/SaXeetv).

2.

The Middle
19),

316,

oiiTa

Aorist forms of the Stems Kra ( 316, 4), ^Xij (316, 20), exceptionally have a Passive

meaning.
Digitized

by Microsoft


144
III.

THE FUTUEE-STEM.

258;

III.

The Futuee-Stem.

258. From the Future-Stem are formed the Fut. Actiye and Middle.

First Future

{The

a-

Futwe).

; :

269.

I.

THE FtTTUEE-STEM.

145

is the Present-Stem, i. e., that of the ;0- Future is the ordinary Inflexion, that of the contracted future is the Inflexion of the contracted Present of 6 Stems ( 231, 232, and 243).

259.

1.

The

Inflexion of the Future-Stem

Bame

as that

of the

260. The o- Future forms the Future-Stem by adding o- to the Verbal-Stem: Xv, Tivo-. All Stems ending in a vowel or a mute have the a Future. The

labials i^,

according to 48, with gutturals makes ^, with and admits of no dentals before it ( 49) a7-Q), I drive, Fut. a|-&) jpd<f>-a>, I write, Fut. jpa^jr-o)
a,
;

aB-co,

sing,

Fut. acr-w
(

cTTrevS-co,

liho,

Fut.

crTretix-a)

for

c77revB-(7co

50).

About

Opeijrco,

Stem rpe^,

and others, see 54. Verbs of the second or extended class ( 248) retain the extended Stem also in the Future Xeiir-o), A,6ii|r-a) th six verbs in eta mentioned in 248 show their strengthened form in the Fut., though it is not seen in the Present ttXeo), "TrXevao/iat in like manner jckaieo brings out its Pure Stem kXuv in KXavcrw, and
&v-\{rQ},

Stem

rv(j},

2.

Kaioa in Kavaco ( 253).

3.

About

and of those of the fourth or I class ( 249, &c.), the Pure Stem must be found in order to form the Future Timrco (class 4), Pure Stemi TV IT, Fut. Tvi^a>; (pvXdcrcra), Pure Stem ipvXaK,
of the third or
:

Of verbs

x^"'' class,

^^^

'^^^^

(^Tcprr-o-fuu,

rejoice);

Stem

<j)tS

(class

2), (l^iSofiai, Inf.

Aor.
are:

iire-4>i8-e-(rdm,

also

Fut. jre-^iS-^-o-ojuat.
;

Isolated

Aorists

from KeXojuat ni-f^v-o-v, I hilled (Stem cj}ev); re-Tfji-o-v (^I hit, Stemre/i); Tf-ray-av (^seizing. Stem ray, rjv-irr-air-o-v (J scolded, Pres. cvItttoi) along with Lat. tango), ev-eviTT-o-v, and rjpvK-aK-o-v (J kept hack, Pres. epvKO)) have the The reduplication in this reduplication in the middle of the word. case everywhere belongs to the Tense-Stem, and, as in the PerfectStem ( 273), is preserved in all the moods, in the Infin., and the The Indio. may add the Augment or omit it before the Participle. reduplication. ( 234, D.) About the contraction, see 248, D. 259. Dialects.
c-Ke'-K()X-e-TO, he called,

Digitized

by Microsoft

146
Fut. (pvXd^a;

III.

THE FDTUEE-STEM.
Pure Stem
cf)pa8, Fut.

2ClL

cjipd^a),

<ppdaw.

Accordingly, verbs ending in the Present in -aaa or -TToj generally make the Fut. in -^m, and those having

the Present in
ekicra-eo,

foj

generally have their Future in -aw.

rule, let the

Future be formed of irpdaaa, I do; Soicd^o), I judge ; oifXl^o}, I arm ; and a-xl'K'^, let the Presents be found to the Futures opu^co, a-cpd^w,
According to this

I roll; I split ;

K7)pvaa-a>,

I proclaim;

^laaofiai,, Xo'ytaofji.ai.

Verbs with a dental character ending in the Present

in -aao) or -tto) naturally ( 250, 05s.) make the Future shape), dpfioaeo (Pres^ in -aa irXdaai (Pres. irXdaaa),
:

dpfWTTO},

I fit)
7,

and, on the other hand, those with the

character

make
sigh),

their Future in -feu

which have the Present in -fo ( 251, Obs.} aTevd^a (Pres. aTevd^co, I
:

arl^a (Pres.

crTi^a,

I prick).
;.

261. Vowel-Stems have their vowels long before oa becomes d if preceded by e, i, or p ( 41), in all other cases it becomes 1?. Every other short vowel is changed

into the corresponding long one

Id-ofiat,

Id-a,

I leave,
;

eacr-co
;

heal,
;

idcr-oixai

Bpd-o),

do,

hpcux-co

but

TipA-w,

Tipi.ria-ai

^od-w,

I cry out,
;

^orja-ojjiai,

iyyvd-o),

hand

over,

iyyvija-co

-iroik-to,

7roirja-w,

BovXocOy

Bov\d>(T-a).

The Stem XP"'

iXP''^>
tj

-^^*'^^ ^'^ oracle; xpaop'ai,

:

use) exceptionally has

in the Future

xPV''^> XPV^'^f''"''' >

whereas dKpoaofj,ai, J listen, has uKpodcrofiai. Eespecting the Future with a short vowel, see

301.

262.

The contracted Future forms the Futui-e-Stem

Dialects.

261.

The

Ion.

dial,

has

?;

ireiprja-oiiai,
<r

I shall

endeavour.

The Ep.

dial,

even after t, i, pi sometimes doubles the

when the vowel is short: albea-a-ofnai (aiSto/jiai, I feel shame). The Horn. Futures dXa7rd|<B, TroXf/ii^m, arv^iKl^a, and others with
262. Dialects.
6ipo)),ai,

their Presents in -fm are explained in 251, D.

Stem 6ep has in Horn, the Fut.

k
e

Bipa-opMi, Pres.

I grow warm ; Stem

;

Fut. Kepa-a

p (Pres. class 4, d, Keipa, Stem (jivp, Pres. Kprpa, I mix, Fut. (jiipa-ai. Digitized by Microsoft

I shave),

264.

HI.

THE PUTUEB-BTEM.

147

by adding

e to the Verbal-Stem: ^dv, <j)dv6. This form of the Future occurs ia Stems ending in X, fi,v,p; and the Stem vowel is short: vefta, I distribute, Put. ve/iw a/MVvco, I defend, ajjuvvas. Verbs of the seventh class here show their Pure Stem ( 252, 253) ^aXXa,
;
:

throw, ^aXo)
;

<paivai,

(f)dvii)

KTeivm,

Mil, KrevS)

^deipco, ^depa>

ar/yiWa), ar/yeXSi.
this rule, let the

According to
a<j)dWM,
rave
;

cause to fall; ariXKo),

Future be formed of I send ; fialvofiai, 1

(class 4) of (rn-epw,

atpm,

I lift ;

and the Present

iroiKiXS), (Tiqiiavm, rjZtJvSi.

Exceptions.

The Stems
(jcvpia,

and Kvp
Obs.
a-

xeX (xfXXm, class 4, c, Henoch against) meet) have the a fonn of the Future:

KX<rai, KvptTOi).

contracted Future is properly a peculiar form of the Future, for <f>ave-a> has arisen from <pav-e-a-a> ( 61, b), in which e is the connecting vowel.

The

e (Pres. em), aS (Pres. a^w), throw out the a- in the Futiu-e. Those in e and aB then contract the vowels e and a with the connecting vowel: reXi-co, I covvplefe, Tekea-a, reXia, reXw 1 Plur. TeXeofj,ev, Te\ov/j,ev (as in the Present) ;

263. Several Stems in

tS (Pres. i^co),

and

^ijSd^Q},

bring,

/3i^da-6},

/3i^dw,

^i^ay;

Plur.
iXco,

^i^dofiep, ^i^&fiev.

To

these also belongs eKdat,

2 Sing. 6\a?, 3 Sing.

eXavvco,

iXa, from the irregular Present

comp. 321, 2. dropping the o- insert e, which is contracted with the connecting vowel ko/ii^co, I carry, Fut. Act. KoijA,(j-a, KOfii-e-(c, KofiiS), 1 Plur. KOfiieo/Mev, Ko/Miov/J^v, Fut. Mid. Ko/Miovfiai. This form of the Future is called the Attic.

I drive;

Stems in

tS after

264.

Some verbs take an

e after

the <r of the Future,

:

which

is

contracted with the connecting vowel

irvv, nrvevcrovfiai
;

Trveto,

breathe,

Stem

TrKew,

I sail. Stem ttXk,

The Futures in am in the Hom. dial, are treated 263. Dialects. exactly like the Presents ( 243 .D. A.), hence i\6a, ikaas, iKda.
Digitized

by Microsoft

i8

III.

THE FUTUEE-STEM.
;

265>

nrXeva-o/iai, <f)evyo}, I flee, Stem and ^ev^ofiM. This kind of Future which occurs only in the Middle voice with an Active meaning is called the Boric.
7rXev(rov/j.ai,

along with

^117, (pev^ov/xai,

265.

Few
:

verbs form their Future without any

tense sign

')(e(o,

I pour,
iriofj.ai,

Fut. Act.

%6(b,

Mid.
321,

^(koiiai,

and so

also

among the
and

irregular verbs

eiiofiai,

I shall
4).

eat ( 327, 4),

I shall drink

sense, but in

The Future Middle generally has a Middle many verbs it has a Passive, and in not a few an Active meaning the last is the case espe266.
; :

denoting a bodily activity aStu, I sing ; d/covQ), I hear ; aTravrdco, J meet ; diroXavo), I enjoy ^aBi^o), I walk (^aSiov/j-at) ^odm, J call out; ryeXdw,
cially in verbs
;

laugh

olfxco^a),

silent ;

cnrovSd^o),

I bewail; ai/ydco and cnwirdxo, I am I am zealous. Irregular verbs ( 320,

&o.) very frequently have a Middle Future with Active

meaning.
265. Dialects.
^idsi),

The Horn.

/Sct'o/iat

or piojiai,

I shaU

live,

akin to

I live,

is

likewise formed without a tense sigu.

Digitized

by Microsoft


267.
IV.

THE WEAK OE FIRST AOEIST-STEM.

149

IV.

The Weak, oe Fiest Aoeist-Stem.

From the Stem of the Weak or First Aorist
(or

267,

are

formed the Weak

Pres.

Mrst) Aorist Active and Middle.


150
IV.

::

THE WEAK OR FIEST AOEIST-STEM.

The
e,

268.

268.

characteristic vowel in the inflexion of

is a, which in the 3 Sing. Ind. Act. but everywhere else remains unchanged In the Subj. a is before the personal and modal signs. lengthened to a and r], whereby the endings become the same as those of the Present. In the Optat. Act. the foims with ei in the 2 and 3 Sing, and 3 Plur. are more common than those with at Xvueta?, Xva-eie(v), Xva-etav. In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Act. v is added by which the a \v<ro-v ; and in is rendered so obscure as to become o 2 Imp. Mid. t is added which with the a makes ai. In the 2 Sing. Ind. Mid. a- is thrown out as in the Pres. and Fut., so that i-\iia-a(cr)o becomes eKvaeo according

the

Weak

Aorist

becomes

to 37.
Ohs. 1.

Three forms
first

of the

Weak

Aorist are the same, the 3 Sing.

;

Opt. Act., the Infin. Active, and the 2 Imperat. Mid.

but in

accent they
( 229), the
Xutraij

differ, for as

the ai of the Optat.

is

regarded as long

of these three forms is always paroxytone

ypa^ai

(ypdcfioi,

I write), Traideva-ai

(TratSeiJo),

2 educate)
:

the Infinit. always has the accent on the penultimii

TraiSeCo-ai, ypa\jfai
;

XCo-ai,

the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid., where possible, has the accent on the antepenultima TraiBeva-m, XOcrai, ypdijfiu. The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Weak Aor. Act. is the same Obs. 2. in form as the Neut. Partic. Fut. XOo-ov, but in Verbal-Stems of more than one syllable it differs from it by the accent : n-aideva-ov, but the Neut. Part. Put. is TratSeScrov ( 229).
:

269.

The

o-

form of the Aorist

differs

from the Stem

268. Dialects.In the Ion. dial, the 2 'Sing. Indie. Mid. frequently leaves the vowels uncontracted : iKia-ao. Some Aorists in Hom. take the vowels o and e instead of a lov, I came, jfes c^rja-eTO (paiva, I walk) ; Sva-ero (he set or went down, Sva) ; so also the Imperatives opa-eo, arise ; a^ere, hring ; oio-e, hring ; \e^eo, lie down; irekdo-a-eTov wekaaaTov, from n-fXafo), 1 approach.
: ;

dij>i^a>,

a<j)va-a-a>, I draw water, has in Hom. the Put. but the Aor. atpva-aa. Irregular Hom. forms without o- are eX^va for exeva-a, from Pres. xf<, I pour ; ektjo, 1 Plur. Subj. Krjopey

269. Dialects.

or Kfio/xEv, Imperat. k^ov or kciov. Inf.

Krjai.

or

Ks'iai,

from Pres. Kaia,

irevai,

I lurn; Stem Kav

(Att. eKava-a);
Digitized

eVo-euo, Pres.

drive

by Microsoft

270.

IV.

THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM.

:

1.51

of the Puture only by the addition of the a Xver, Xva-a 7/3ai|r, <ypai^a ^vSm^, (j>vXa^a. Respecting the change
;

of vowels and consonants before er, eomp. 260, 261. The irregular %ew ( 265) has the Aorist e%6a for 6%evcra.

Comp.

the irregiilarity in elva, IspoJse;

T]veyica,

lore,

327, 12 and 13.

270.

The Stems
o-

in X,

fi, v,

p,

forming their Future

without

reject this consonant also in the

Weak Aorist,

which gives rise to the supplementary form, for the TOwel of the Stem is lengthened by compensation for *he loss of the a:
5 after i and p becomes d
otherwise
'<
:

Pres. irepaiva (class 4, d),

Ipenetrate. Stem

17:

irepav, Fut. ncpava, Aor. i-^repdva ( 41). Pres. (Iiaiva (class 4, d). Stem ^av. Put.
Pres.

becomes

ei

dyyeWa
vip,a>

(class 4, c),

^avSi, Aor. e~(l}r]va, I announce.

ijyyeCKa.

Stem dyye\. Put. dyyeKw, Aor.

X:

Pres.

(class

1),

distribute.

Put.

j/f^m,
X

Aor.

e-veifia.

06s.

Pres. KpiVco (class 4, d),

J J

/arf^'e,

Stem

Kpiv, Put. KpCvm, Aor. e-Kpiva.

Pres. dp.Cva

(class 4, d),

defend,

Stem

dp,vv. Put.

u/iui/ra,

Aor. rjpvva.

The

Stems dp (aipm,
?;
:

J Zi/'i) aud A\

(oXXofiat,
:

J Zeap)
jj

in the Indicat.

because of the

Augment

^pa,

j^Xa/iT/v,

have but in

the other forms a

Spas, oKijuvos.

a instead of

occurs in

away

the Infinitives dKevaa-Bai or dKeaaSai, to avoid

hariaa-Bai,

from bariopai,
ela-a,

I distribute.
is

I placed,
and
o-

Part,

e'uj-as

ea-a-as

-doubling of the

a defective poet. Aorist, the Horn. Inf. is ia-trai. On the (dvicras), 3 Sing. Mid. Ucra-aTo. eXoucra (Xoum, see 261, D. \6ea-a-a (Xof-e-owo)

I wash),
.X,
p., !>,

with

e inserted.

270. Dialects.

p with

er:

(Comp. 35, Ofo.) 1. Homer makes the Aor. of several Stems in eXa-a from etXo), I press; the defective dmepira,
o-

away. In the Aeol. dial, example of it in Horn,

2.

I tore

is

assimilated to preceding X, p.,v,p; an

for aic^eX-o-a

is

a^fXXa

= Att. acjxiXa, Pres.

J/om,
is

.o0eXX(B,
3.

I increase.
^etpa, Pres. eipai,

quite irregular.

The Augment of the Hom. Aor. Comp. 275, D. 2.

Digitized

by Microsoft


152
IV.

THS WEAK OE FIKST AOEIST-STEM.

:

271,

some few verbs

a-rjfiaiva,

Kepbalvm,

I
rj

indicate

ia-r]jxava
a,

gain ; opyaivto, I muse anger On tha along with ia-fiii-rjva.

other

hand

instead of

in spite of the p, occurs in Terpalvta

I bore,

eTGTprjva.

271. The Weak Aorist is the usual form in aU verbs which, according to 256, cannot form the Strong Aorist, that is, in all deriTative verbs and in verbs of

the

first class

cially those

but radical verbs of other classes, espewith Stems in X, fi, v, p, also have the Weak
;

Aorist.

The Weak Aorist Middle

only a Middle sense and
is

like the Strong one ha% never Passive ( 477, &c.).

V.

The Peefect-Stbm.

272. From the Perfect-Stem are formed the Perfect and Pluperfect Active and Middle, and the third Future (Futurum exactum) which occurs only in the Middle.

273.
is

The
the

essential characteristic of the Perfectjre-TrTiy-a

Stem
verbs

reduplieatim, (comp.

with

Lat..

pe-pig-i),

which generally takes the

first

place, but in
put, like the

compounded with prepositions is Augment, after the preposition ( 2.38):

iK-Xe-\vK-a.

Xi-Xv-Ka, but'

The
is

redu'plication belongs to the Perfect-Stem,

and

therefore, unlike the

moods, infinitives, In verbs beginning with a consonant it consists in the initial consonant with e being placed before the Stem Stem Xv, Perf-Stem XeXv, 1 Sing. Perf. Ind. Act.
Xi-Xv-Ka.
273. Dialects.

Augment, preserved in all the and participles (comp. 258 D).

:.

The

reduplication cannot, like the

;

Augment,

be-

omitted in the Epic

Se'x-aT-at),

dial.

diy-fmi.

forms an exception (3 Plur.

though we also find Se-dey-pai, from Pres. 8e'x-o-/iai (comp. beginning with a vowel do not lengthen New-Ionic dialect.
fie-Sey-n/i/of,

I expect,
it

or receive. Part..

316, 34).

Some

verba>

in the Perfect in the

Digitized

by Microsoft

273.

V.

THE PEKFECT-STEM.

153

154

V.

THE PEEFECT-STBM.
Middle and Passive.

II.

275.

V.

THE PEEFECT-STEM.

155

by

aspirate, according to 53 a, is represented corresponding tenuis: Stem %o/3e, %<j3w, 1 retreat, Ke-ymprj-Ka ; Stem 6 v, 6va>, I sacrifice, ri-dv-Ka ;
1. tlie

An

Stem ^av,
2.

7ri-(f>r]v-a.

a verb begins with two consonants, only the appears in the reduplication, and even this only when it is a mute followed by \, fj,, v, or p Stem jpa^,
first
:

When

r/pd^co,
strike,

write,

rye-ypacfi-a
;

Stem irXay,
irvia),

irKrja-ao),

-Tre-TrXryy-a

Stem

irvv,

breathe,

ttc-

TTvev-Ka.
3. In every other case a Stem beginning with two consonants takes only e for its reduplication: Stem

jcrev, Kreivw,
i-^'qTrj-Ka.

I hill,

e-KTov-a;

Stem

^ijre, ^rjra>,

I seek,

4. Stems beginning with p likewise have only e, after which the p is doubled: Stem pt^, pLirTO), I throw,
ep-piip-a,

(comp. 62, 234).

Exceptions.

with yv, y\, and sometimes those have a simple e for their reduplication. Stem yi/o), i'-yva-Ka, I have come to know; Stem ^Xaa-Te (pXaara, I germinate'), e-^a<rrri-Ka. The Stems Kra ((crS/ioi, I acquire') and liva, on the other hand, have Ki-KTrj-fioi and fie-ixvrj-iim, I remember, me-min-i, Comp. iri-Trra-Ka, I 'have fallen, and
^Verbs beginning
|8X,

beginning with

n-e-nra-juat, / am spread out, 319. 3, 327. 15. Instead of the reduphcation ei appears in ei-Xtj^-o, / have taken ( 322. 25), ct-Xijx-, I have obtained ( 322. 27), el'-Xoxa (from

Xeyto,

gather), Si-et-Xey-fim (from Siakcyo/Mt,

converse),

ci-prj-Ka,

I have
Stem

said ( 327. 13), and in the aspirated d-jiap-rai,

/xep.

it is fated,

275. Initial vowels are lengthened as in the case of

275. Dialects. 1. The Attic reduplication is more frequent in Homer, as dp-^po-rai from ap6a>, I plough ; dX-aXi;-/iai, from a\do-fiai, I wander; ap-rip-a, lam joined. Stem ap; oS-mS-a, I smell, ofa, comp. od-or ; on-am-a, I have seen, from the Stem o tt and
:
;

with a V inserted iiiv-rifiv-na, from the Pres. Herod, has dp-alprj-Ka from aipew, I take.
:

rip,v-a,

I droop the head.

2. Instead of e'l-a>da Horn, also has e-w6a, which is the only form From the Stem iXir (originally FcXtt) c-oX7r-a, 1 used by Herod. hope; from Stem ipy (Jepy) e-opy-a, I have done. From the Stem dp (Lat. sero), Pres. e'ipa, 3 Sing. Pluperf. Mid. eepro, Part. Perf.

Digitized

by Microsoft

156
the Temporal
el

V.

THE PEKFECT-STEM.
(
:

27G.

raise up, (op6co-Ka.

Augment The

Stem opdo, op65>, 1 235) verbs mentioned in 236 have

here also
1.

eHXiyfiM, Pres. eKia-aai,

I roll.

Some Stems beginning witli a, f, or o exceptionally take wtat is called the Attic reduplication instead of the mere lengthening This reduplication consists in the initial vowel of the vowel. with its following consonant being repeated, and the vowel of the second syllable being lengthened: Stem dXicp (dXft'^m, class 2. 1 anointy, dX-^\t0-a ; Stem ok o, a/covo), I hear, aK-rjico~a (for d/cijKofaj 35.06s.), but Mid. rJKova-fj.ai; Btem 6 pv ^(^opvo'a'di,
class 4,
lect)

/ dig)

ay-Tjye p-Ka;

eX-^Xa-Ko,

Stem ayep {dyeipM, class 4, d, I colStem tXa (Pres. iXavvat, I drive, 321. 2) Mid. ik-TjXa-pai Stem eXpy^i Pres- ^^yx"') -^ ^sfi^te
op-oypvx-o;
; ;

(class 1), Perf.

Tjyop-a,

Mid. eX-^Xty/iai (comp. 286, Ohs.) iypI am awake, from the Stem iyep, Pres. iyflpm, I awaken
prisoner),

(class 4, d), is irregular.

2.

The Stems dXo) (a\la-Kopai, 324. 17, I am made ay {ayvvpi, 319. 13, I break), clu (not used in.
317. 7),
:

the Pres.,

and oive (Jsviopai, I iuy) are hkewise irregular; but originally they had an initial consonant ( 34. D) t-dXa-Ka, e-dy-a, e-oiK-a, i-dyvrj-pac the Stem di/oty (di/otyoj, /open) has av-eay-a. To these may be added k'l-aid-a, I am accmtomed, from' the Stem 4$, originaUy ftO (comp. 236, 237).
',

1.

The Perfect

Active.

276.

The terminations

of the principal tenses are

appended to the Perfect-Stem in the Indicative bymeans of the connecting vowel a. The first person has no personal ending at all in the third a is changed The Subjunctive, Optative, and the Imperative into 6. (which rarely occurs) have the vowels of the Present the Infinitive ends in -evai (always paroxytone), and the Participle in -fB9, -via, -6?, Gen. -oto'; (Stem ot,
;

188).

Mid.

eepiievos

(oomp. 270,

T>. 3).

The

following two are defective

if is

Perfects in

Hom.

dv-rivo6-e(^v), it

gushes forth, iv-rjvo6-e(y),

dial,

upon.

Both

also occur as Pluperfects.

276. Dialects.

In the Hom.
:

the Part. Perf. Act. sometimes

TedvrjKoTos

has w instead of o
die)
;

tiBvyjuitos

= Att.

(from

BvrjtrKa,

KeKkqyams

for KeKXijyoTfs, calling,

from Pres. xXafm.

Digitized

by Microsoft

278.
Ohs.

THE PEEFEOT ACTIVE.

157

The Subjimctive and Optative

by
elfii,

periphrastically
of

are not unfrequently formed the Participle with the corresponding forms

I am.

277.

The Perfect Active

is

formed in two different

ways
1.

The Strong Perfect (Second Perfect)

:

formed, like the Strong Aorist, directly from the Stem Stem Trpdy, Pres. (Class 4, a) Trpda-crco, I do, Perf. The Strong Perfect, Hke the Strong Aorist, ire-Trpdy-a.
is

occurs almost exclusively in the case of radical verbs ( 24.5), and is generally the older and rarer form.

278.

The
its

following changes of vowels are to be

observed in
a
after

formation
Stem
k pay,

p becomes d:
i; :

Pres.

Kpa^a>,

/'

scream, Perf. Ki-Kpay-a

a otherwise becomes

Stem n-Xay,
Stem
ipav,

Pres.

irXrjo-cra,

I
I
Comp.
4:Oto43.

strike,

Perf ve-jrKrjy-a
ipaiva,

Pres.

show, Perf. Trt-^ijv-a

becomes

o: Stem
ot

orpe^,

Pres. o-Tpc^m,

turn, Perf. e-o-Tpofjy-a

t
:

Stem

\i7r, Pres. XciVd), Jfeaae,

Perf Xe-XoOT-a
V
vi

Stem ^uy,

Pres. 0euy<o, jT^ee,

Perf. 7re-^euy-a

The change
Perf. ep-payy-c,

of d into

a> is

quite isolated:

I am

torn, Pres. p^jyvv-fii ( 319, 24),

Stem pay, and

fect

The Hom. dial, is partial to the Strong Per 277-280. Dialects. ; the aspiration does not occur in it : Stem kott ((edn-ra)), KeKcarais.

The Part. Tre-^uf-dr-er, from Stem (pvy (^ewyu) is quite an isolated Horn. form. Hom. forms the Weak Perfect only from Vowel-Stems, and even here he has sometimes strong secondary forms Stem 0v, 3 Att. ireipvKda-i,, from (j>ia>, I hegef ; Stem Plur. Perf. Act. ire(j)vd(Tt KOTc (Korea, I am angry). Part. Perf. (cocorijar, 317, D. In the Fem. Part. Perf. shortenings of vowels often occur Stem dp, Masc.
:

Part. Perf. dp-rjp-ws, Joined, Fern, dp-dp-vla;

Stem da\

(SdXXaj,

1
is

hloom), Masc. Part. Perf Te-drjX-ais,

Te-Tpr/x-a,

Fem.

Te-OaX-vZa.

The

Perf.

I am

restless, Pres. TapaiT(ra>,

I disturh, Stem rlajpa^,

irregular.

Digitized

by Microsoft

158

v.

THE PBKFECT-STEM:.
to:

279.

so also tliat of e into

Stem

id, Perf. e"-co6-a,

I am

With the Attic reduplication, and. ( 275). in some other cases also, there is no lengthening of the dig ; ryevowel Stem o/jy%, op-mpvx-O', Vves. hpvaaw,
accustomed
:

rypaxjj-a,

from

'ypd(f)Q),

write.

279.

Some Stems ending

in the consonants

k, y,

it, /8'

change these into the corresponding aspirates, generally without any lengthening of the Towels
Stem

KTjpvK, Pres. Kripva-a-a,

ay,
KOTT,

^Xa/3,

I proclaim, Perf. Kc-Krjpvx-a I lead, ^a (ayfjox-a) K&nTa, I hew, Ke-Kocj)-a /SXaTTTiB, I hurt, ^e-^acp-a
aya,
ins

In spite of the aspiration the vowels are changed

Ke-Kkoj>-a,

Stem K'Ke'jr,
Pres.

Pres. KKeirro},

I steal;

ire-iTOfiji-a,

Stem
Perf.

-TrefjuTT,

Tre/iTTco,

I
is

send;

Te-Tpo(j)-a,

Stem
as the

rpeiT, TpeTTO),
of the

turn,

which

in form the

same

et-Xo%-a (comp. 274),

Ohs. 1.
rate

Stem rpe^ (Pres. rpe^a, I nourish); Stem Xe^, Pres. 'Ke'^co, I gather.
liave

both forms with and without the aspiI do) has both ire-irpdy-a (intransitive, / have fared) and ire-npax-a (transitive, I have done); Stem avoiy, Pres. avolya, I open, Perf. av-iay-a (intrans. I stand open) and av-iax-a (transit. I have opened). 2. The aspirated form of the Perfect, contrary to 277, occurs.
:

Pew verbs
the

Stem npay

(Pres. 7rpda-(ra>,

also in a

number

of derivative verbs

StemdXXay,

dXXdo-cro),

change, from aXXos, Perf. r/'Wax-a.

280. 2.
is

The Weak Perfect

The Weak Perfect
is

(Fiest Perfect)
:

formed from the Stem by the insertion of k

all

Stem

\v,.

Xe-\v-K-a.

the more recent form,

use,
t, 8,

and with
while
0,
it is

Vowel-Stems

it is

the more
in

common
p.

the only one in with Stems ending in

and those
Ohs.

fi, v,

The only complete Strong Perfect of a Vowel-Stem in Attic

is dxijKoa

prose

( 275, 1)

but comp.

317,

281. In regard to the vowel the

cr

Weak Perfect foUowa

Bpd.a,, Si-Bpa-m
^

the

Future

( 260^,261^

:^t^m^ a,

 283.

THE PLUPEEPECT ACTIVE.

Ttfia,
Tifjurjcreo,

159^

Stem
yeco,

rerifirjKa;
(nTeiOa),

Stem

-rrXv, irXevaeo, ire*

ireiafo, "TriireiKa. (

ifXevKa;

Stem

ttiO

I persuade),

I pour,

Perf. Keyptca, is

an exception

265).

For

other exceptions see

301.

Stems in t, S, 6, throw out these consonants before a without any other change Stem KOfiiS, KOfii^as, I carry,
:

KeKOIXlKU.
282.

The monosyllabic Stems

change
this e in the

in \,

v, p,

having

t in

the Stem
o-rcX,

syllable,
cTTiKXco,

Weak

Perf. into a:

Stem

I send,

Perf. e-o-ToX-Ko;

Stem

<j>6ep, (jidelpa,
:

I destroy,.

Perf. ?-(j)dap-Ka.

Several in v throw out the v

;

Stem KpXv^

Kpiva,

I judge,

Perf. Ke-Kpi-KO

Stem kXXv,

kXIvco,

I incline, Perf.

Ke'-xXi-Ka;

Stem nXvv,

liKvvay,

IwasTi, Perf. vi-nXv-Ka; Stent

rev, Tfiva,

I stretch,
k, it

out before
ipav,

Wherever v is not thrown becomes according to 51 a nasal y Stem

Perf. Te-rd-Ka.
:

cf)alvco,

I show,

Perf. ni-fpay-Ka.

Other Stems of this kind and some in p. admit of metathesis ( 59): Stem ^aX, jSaXXm, I throw, Perf. fie-^Xri-K-a ; Stem Kap, Kdpva, I grow tired, Perf. <i-Kpj]-K-a ( 321. 9).
2.

Tlie Pluperfect Active.

283.

The
;

Pluperfect takes the

its

Augment

before the-

Perfect-Stem
torical tenses.

terminations are those of the hissteps

in,

Between the Stem and the termination

et

the diphthong reduced to e.

Ohs.

which in the 3 Plur.

and more modern.

is

The 3 Plur.
is

in curav is rare

The Temporal Augment

vowel

of verbs beginning with a not recognisable, because their Perfect-Stem

282. Dialects.

The Horn. fie-pPXa-Ka

I went)
is

for pe-pXa-Ka,

from the

Stem poX

(Aor. epoXov,

explained

by

metathesis.

Comp.

51, D., 324, 12. The Ionic dial, has the antiquated endings of the 283. Dialects. 1 Sing, ea, 2 Sing, eas, 3 Sing. (!/), contracted 1 1, eiv or Pluperf. the 2 Plur. New-Ion. ea-re. Horn. cTe-6rj7r-ca, I was astonished ; ri

3 Sing.

SeSearvrjKeiv,

from

dens-vea,

I dine.
fjvasyov

e-pepT]K-ov (Perf. pepxjKa,

(Perf. avtcya,

1 Heat) and

along with rjvoayea

I compel)

are formed quite irregularly according to the

manner

of Imperfects.
Digitized

by Microsoft

:;

1(50

V.

THE PEHFECT-STEM.
:

284.

has already a long vowel Verbal-Stem 07, ariw, I drive, "^^^ Syllabic Augment is Perfect-Stem tjx, TO"^''^often omitted. The 1 and 3 Sing, in the older Attic
dialect has
77

instead of

et

and

ei-v,

as e-XeXiiK-rj.
is

The formation

of the Pluperfect

exactly the same

as that of the Perfect, and like it it is either strong or weak, and has the vowel long or short or unchanged.

284.

3.

The Perfect Middle and Passive

in one way, that is, by appending the personal endings of the principal tenses of the Middle, without any connecting vowel, to the PerfectStem, i.e. to the reduplicated Verbal-Stem Stem Xv,

can be formed only

Perf.

M. \e-Xv-fiai. The Infinitive and the

:

Participle always have the

XeXvcrdai, XeXvfiivo';
;

accent on the penultima

Stem
as in

TratSev,

ireTraihevcrOai,

from iraihevw,

I educate.
same way
reTi/jLTjiJiai,;

285.

The vowels
Perfect:

are treated in the

the

Weak

Stem

Tifia, rerL/irjKa,
;

Stem

Tj-td, irkrrei.Ka, jreTreicrfiai,

Stem
and

<f)6ep, e(f>6apKa,

e^Oapfiai;
Tpecpeo,

Stem

/3aX,

/Se/SXij/ca, ^i^rj/j-ai.

The

verbs
turn,

I nourish,

Tpeirai,

1 turn,
e
:

aTpi<f)0),

a,lso

take

a instead of

Te-Opafi-fiat,

Te-rpufi-fiai,

e-a-rpafi-fiai.
286. The final Consonants of consonantal-Stems change according to the general laws of sound ( 45-49)

284. Dialects.

Pluperf. Mid.
fuejimjo-ai

In the Horn. dial, the o- of the 2 Sing. Perf. and sometimes thrown out between two vowels /xtfi'^ai (meminisW), contracted jiiiivrj ; so also the New-Ionio
is
:

the Imperat. nefiveo for

The Horn. we-irpa-Tat, Stem wop (Strong Aor. 285. Dialects. i'wopov, I gave) is explained by metathesis. The following have a
short vowel
mcjivyfjLsvos
:

fxefiirqa-o.

Temyfiai, from revxa,

from
:

^eu-yo),

/ flee ;
from
:

ea-trvpai

1 prepare, 3 Plur. TereixaTai from aevoi, X hasten v

,*

instead of u

ne-nvv-pjai,

The 6 of the Stem Kopv6 (Kopiaata, I arm) 286. Dialects. remains unchanged in Hom. Kf-KopvO-fievos. alaxuvui, 1 put to ehame, has rjax^ppAii.
Digitized

irvia),

248.

by Microsoft

287.

THE PERFECT MIDDLE.

Before
dental
labial

IGl
fi

1.

all

terminations beginning with

:

every guttural becomes y

cr

Stem ttXek, ttXckib, I twist, iri-itkey-iim Stem tti 5, Trei'^o), ij5ersMO(ie, jre-7reio--/ie6a
Stew. ypa(p,ypd(j)io,
is

Obs.
is

"When a

ju:

I write, yc-ypa/ji-iicvos.

guttural or labial
:

preceded by a nasal, the latter

thrown out before /x Stem Rafitr, Kap-wra, 1 hend, Kt/ca/u^ai Stem e\yx, iXeyx"), I refute, iXfiXeyiicu ( 275. 1). Some Stems in v by way of exception do not change the v before /i into <r, but into /i: a^n/im, from o|wi, I sharpen; those which throw out the v in the Perf. Act., do the same here KcKpifiai (comp. ire-(j>aa--iji.ai from the Stem (pat/); ( 282) OTrivha, I offer a libation, Fut. (nreicro, has etnTeurjiai.
;

2.

Before
labial

ak,

every guttural becomes

3.

dental

is

o-

and

this

with

o-

becomes ^

iri-irke^ai

i^: ye-ypa^ai
Tre-Treicrai

thrown out

Before t
:

every guttural becomes k

W-jrXfKi-ai

Stem Xey, Xe-Xex-rat

(Stem (^ay,
5re'-<^ai'-Tat)

4.

labial

,,

tt
(7

ye-ypan-Tai
jrc-7r(r-Tai

dent, (except v)

The

of a-9 after consonants ( 61)

is

dropped,

and then
every guttural becomes
,,

x
<^
cr

ni-TrKex-Bov for Tre-TrXe/e-o-^ov

labial

ye-ypa(p-6c for ye-ypa(p-(rde

7r-7re7a-dai for 7re-irei6-ir6ai.

dent, (except v)

V, A., and /> remain imchanged before the ^ which Stem has arisen from a-6: Stem d)aj', ireifxivdai
;

287. The ending j/rat of the 3 Plur. is irreconcileSometimes the Ionic able with Consonantal-Stems.

287. Dialects.

In the
:

Ion. dial, the forms

Plur. are

common

Horn, has ^e-^XTi-arai,

in

arm and arc for the OaXXm, I throw), neTro-

njaro

(jroTaopai,

tepXaro (eipya,
(jrapao-Kcudfa,

I flatter), teSaiarac I shut in, 319, 15) I prepare), KeKoa-fjiiaTai.

:

(data),

divide),

epxarai,

New-Ion. irapeaKevdSaTo Three (K.oap.ia>, I adorn).

cppd-S-arai (paiva, I besprinkle), diaix^-6-aTo I am grieved), i\riXd-8-aTo (Stem c'Xa, e\avv(o, I drive); tpripeSarai from ipeiSa, I support, is irregular.

Horn, forms insert 8

(axm-iuu,

Digitized

by Microsoft

162

V.

THE PEEFECT-STEM.
(

288.

UTM
IT

takes

its

place
:

226, D), before which 7,

k, /3,

and

are aspirated

Toaaa,
ruh).

(Stem ra^, arrange), Te-Tpi^arai, (Stem rpt^, rpi^a), I

'^e-'^pai^-wrai, TerTay^arai,
:

But the common practice is to use the periphrasis by means of the Participle with el-cri(v) yeypaf/./iivoi Comp. Lat. scripti sunt and 276, Ohs elaLv.

The following paradigms supply examples of the above-mentioned changes.

Perfect Middle and Passive.

291

THE FUTCKE PEEFECT,

163

290. 4. The Pluperfect Middle and

Pasdve

differs in

every verb from the corresponding Perfect only by the addition of the Augment and the personal endings which are those of the historical tenses. Eespecting the 3 Plur. in vto and ara, and their places being supplied by periphrasis, see 287, which is here
applicable also.
291. 5.

The Future Perfect or Futurum Fxaetum

adds <T to the Perfect-Stem with the inflexion of the Future Middle; the or produces the same changes in the preceding consonants as in the ordinary Future Middle; "Treirpd^erat (Stem vpay, Trpdcrcra, I do), it
will have been done; 'ye<ypa\^erai,

{Stem ypa(p, ypdcpa,

I write),
endings
(
:

it

will have been written.

There are two isolated Future Perfects with Active ia-ri^^o) ( 311), I shall stand, and reOvij^m 324. 4.), I shall be dead, from the Perf. ecrrrjKa,
Otherwise
its

Tedvr]Ka.

place in the Active

is

supplied by the

Part, of the Perf. with the Fut. of

'Ke\vicai^ ecrojiat,

elfil,

I am

(ea-ofiai,)

J shaU have

loosed (solvero).

Digitized

by Microsoft


164
VI.

THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM.

29!

VI.
292.

The Strong Passive Stem.

Strmg

the Strong Passive Stem are formed tb or Second Aorist, and the jStrong or Seoom

From

T'uture Passive.

Present

(palvco

; :

295.

Vr.

THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM.

165

Second Principal Conjugation ( 302), to the Stem without a connecting Towel, and the e of the Stem is lengthened in the Indicative and Imperative to t]. In the
Subjunctive the e
Subjunctive
:

is

contracted with the vowels of the

<f>a,v5) ; in the Optative the e combined with the modal sign tiy becomes etij j>ave-ir]-v. The Infinitive always has the circumflex on the penultima, and the Participle in the Nom. Siiag. Masc. the acute on the last.

^ave-w,

294.

The Strong

Passive Stem, just like the Strong

Aorist Active and

classes,

Middle

256), is formed
it

very

rarely from derivative Stems, but

occurs in verbs of all

even the first ( 247), e being added to the Pure Verbal-Stem Pros. pd-nT-co (class 3, 1 sew), Pure Stem pa^, Strong Passive Stem pa^e, Aor. Pass, ippdiprj-v a-<j)dTT(o (class 4, 1 slaughter), Pure Stem a-^ay, Strong
:

Passive

Stem a^aye, Aor.

Pass.

ia(j)dr/r]-v,

Fut. Pass.

Strong Pass. Stem The Strong Passive Aor. ypdcjje, Aor. Pass, eypd^-v. occurs only in such verbs as have no Strong Active The only exception is rpe-n-co, I turn, Aor. Act. Aorist.
cr(j)ar/'^-crofi,at ;

Pres. ypd<f)-a> (class

1),

e-rpaw-o-v, Pass. i-Tpdirrf-v.

Obs.

By way of exception

^XXdyiji' is

formed from

tlie

derivative

Stem aWay,

Pres. oKKda'aa,

I change,

295. As in the Strong Aorist Active ( 257) the e sometimes changed into d: Kkeir-r-w, I steal, i-Kkd-mj-v; is cneWco, I send, i-crrdXi^v; rpecfi-o), I nourish, i-rpdcjyri-v;
irkeK-co,

twist,

i-7rXeKr]-v

and

i-TrXdKrj-v

irXrja-aco,

In the Dual and <j>avri-ij = (j)av^. and sometimes to modal vowel is shortened where this lengthening of the
ij
:

Plur. the
e

occurs
find the

Saiiel-ere (for Sa/xcT/Tf, Att. Sa/i^Tc).

In the

Infinitive

we

Hom.

fuvat or

/jtev

/iiyriiieuai, Safajfiev,

295. Dialects.
light,

Homer here
Digitized

in the Strong Aor. Act.

also employs metathesis ( 59) as and Mid. ( 257, D.) Pres. ripv-a, I de:

Aor. Pass.

i-Ta.(mt)-v,

Subj. rpaire-a, 1 Plur. Tpairetonev (gatt'

deamus).

Inf. Tpanrj-nevai.

by Microsoft


166
striJce',

Vri.

THE -WEAK PASSIVE STEM.

29C

has

i-vXij'Y'jrv, TrKrjy^-tTOfjMi,
;

e^-e-TTkop/rj-Vi eK-irXary^-^'o/iat

but ia compositioi the Ptire Stem of verbi

:

of the second class here reappears

I corrupt), e-(7d-jrt)-v
pea (Stem:
pi),

tij/c-o)

cr??7r-( (Stem o-utt (Stem xa k, I melt), i-rdKrj-v

Iflow),

e-ppwj-v, pvi]-a-o/j,ai.

VII.
296..

The Weak Passive Stem.

the

From

Weak

Passive

Weak

or Ftrdt Aorist and the

Stem are formed the Weak or First Futur

Passive,
Pres-.

Xvm, Stem \v.

Weak

Passive

Stem \v6e.

l.^Weah
Ind:
i-\i6r]-v

or First Aorist Passive.

Sub. \v6Si
\v6rj-S

Opt. Xydeirj-v

I was

loosed

e-Xvdrj-s
etc., like-

the Strong or Second Aorist Passive.

Inf.
\v6rj-vai,

Imp.

Xu^j;-Ti
"Kvdrj-Ta
etc.,,

Part, \v6ei-s, \v6l<Ta, Xi Gren. \v6evT-os

like the
2.

Strong or Second Aorist Passive.

or First Future PassiveInf.
\v6ri-o-ea-6ai
'KvBtj-o'^ij.cvo'S,
rj,

Weak
Opt.

Ind.

\v6r]~(T0}iai-

XvBrjro-oijjirjv

Part.

297.

The

inflexion of the

Weak
c.

Passive

Stem

entirely like that of the Strong.

XcOij-Ti,

Respecting the t

instead of XvOrj-di see 53.

296. Dialects.
dialect.

297. Dialects.

298. Dialects. V before 5: ajmvv-v-6r)

(i8pva,
<t>aiva>,

The Weak Fut. Pass, wanting in the Homer Eespecting the 293, D. The Horn. some Vowol-Stems
is

inflexion see
itvkw,

dial, after

inser

(Stem nvv,

breathe),

i&pv-v-i
((paeivi

I fasten), and changes the I appear") into a, (badvdnv. ^^

^ Digitized

e of

the Stem <jia(v

by Microsoft

$299.

VII.

THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM.

167

298. The Weak Passive Stem is formed from the Verbal-Stem hy appending the syllable ^e. Before this syllable the vowels of Vowel-Stems are lengthened as ia the Future, the Weak Aorist Active, and the Per-

fect: Tifjba, eTCfMJdTjV, "Tret pa, eTreipdOrjv,

J tried.

As

to the exceptions see

o-

301.

As
:

in the Perfect Middle,

is

inserted before

6,

especially after short vowels,

but often also after long ones e-TeKk-cr-dtiv from reKeo), I complete; i-KeXev-a-Onjv, from KeXevco, I order; and this is the case in the verbs mentioned in 288, and
especially in yeXda),

laugh, iyeXdadriv; Spaa,

do,

iSpdadTjv; iravw,
iiravdrjv.

cause to cease, eTravadrjv, but also

The Aor. Passive

is

other hand,

of a-aitfo, I save, on the formed from the shorter Stem am without

the

o-

icr(io6rjv.

the Weak Perfect Active and the Perfect Middle, the e before X, v, p is sometimes changed into a: Stem rev (relvo}, I stretch), i-TdOrj-v (comp. 282). The changes of the consonants before d are explained

As

in

by the laws

of sound
;

45):

Stem Trpdy,
ifrevSco,

irpdaa-w,

do,

i-Trpd'^-6rj-v

Stem

'yfrevB,

deceive,

-^evcr-0r]-v;

Eespecting
OdTTTco)

Stem

Trefiv, irepm-cc,

send,

e-7rifj,(p-6r]-v.

idpi(p6r]v (Pres.

Tjoe^w),

i6d<p6r]v (Pres.
iridrjv,

see 54, Obs., (Stems 6e, 6v), see 53

and respecting
5.

eTvdrjv

299.

The Weak Aorist Passive and the Weak Future

are,

on the whole, more common than the Strong, and in the case of derivative verbs, as of nearly
Passive
all Vowel-Stems, they are the only customary forms of the Aorist and Future Passive. There are some primitive verbs of which both Passive Stems are in use Stem ^Xa^, Pres. ^Xdirra, I hurt,
:

Aor. Pass, epXd^rjv and e^lKd^Orjv.

Digitized

by Microsoft

108

verbal adjectives.

30(

Veebal Adjectives.

300.

The Verbal

Adjectives are a kind of Passiv(

loosed,

Participles.

Pres. \voo,

Stem Xv,

1. Xv-Toii,

-q,

bv,

eapahl

of being loosed
2. Xv-rko-'i, a, ov, to he loosened

solvendu-s, a, urn

The

First Verbal Adjective is formed

by means o

the syllable ro (Nom. to-^, ttj, to-v) from the Verbal Stem, and has the meaning either of a Participle Per
feet Passive
:

Xv-To-s^solu-tHr-s, or of possibility, capabl

of being loosened.

The Second Verbal Adjective

the syllable reo (Nom.
Tio-<;,

is

Tea, reo-v),

formed by means o which is neve:

:

contracted, from the Verbal-Stem,

and has the meaning

Xu-reo-?, one

of necessity, like the Latin gerundive

is

wh

to be loosened,
est.

Xvreov

ia-rl,

loosening

must take place

solvendum

The vowels preceding the t are in general treatec exactly in the same manner as in the Weak Passiv( Aorist o- is inserted in the same cases as in the Aoi Pass. reXe-cr-To^, KeXev-a-Teov. The consonants befop
;
:

T are treated in accordance with the laws of sound

'TrpaK-TO'!

(Stem

Trpdy,

Pres.

irpdaaco),
KoixL^m,

ypa-ir-ro-

{ypd^o}), KOfM<T-reo-v

(Stem KOfiiS,

I carry!)

Verbs which leave their Stem Vowel short in the formation

of their tenses.

301.

The Vowel remains

short throughout in

300. Dialects.

Spa-ro'-s is

derived

by metathesis

( 09) fror

the

Stem Sep

(bepai,

I flay).

301. Dialects. The Horn. dial, epda,

pT]v; dpK<o,

love,

I ward
;

off,

rjpKea-a; Kopea,

satisfy,

Aor. Mid. ripaaa cKopewa; Korea

ijrudge, Kcrrccra-aTO
(T

ipva,

I draw,

eipva-a.

On

the usual doublin

of the

after short

vowels

(ipd(r(raTo, ipitrtraro) see 261,

D.

Digitized

by Microsoft

301.


170
6va>,

VEEBS WITH A SHOKT VOWEL. I offer, I loose.

Put.
(9c'o-(o,

302.

Aot. Mt.Wva-a,
^

Perf. Act. Perf.

TtBvm, Aor. Pass.

riBviiai.

iTv6t]v,

Mid.

Xva,

Put. Xva-co,

Aor. Act. ekva-a,

Perf. Act. XeXvKo, Aor. Pass. ekvBrjv,

Verb. Adj. \vt6s, Perf. Mid. Xikvuai.

IS short in the Future and Weak Aorist and Middle, but lorig in the Perfect, Aorist Passive, and Verbal Adjective of KaXico, I call, KoXiaa, 3.

TAe wwe?

Active

KeK\7)Ka, eicKrj6r)v, kXtjto'?

ijveKa, rjveOriv, alveToi;,
4. iroOea,

alvea>,

I praise,

has alvkaw,

but Perf. Mid.

rjvr^ixM.

fluctuate

I long for ; irovem, I toil ; and hva, I sink, between the short and long vowels woOeaoixaii
:

and

iroOrjcroi

jroveaw,

iTrovija-d/j.rjv

Boa-co,

Aor. Pass.

Chap.

XL

Second Peincipal Conjugation

or Yerbs in
fii.

Peeliminaey Obseevations.

The Second Principal Conjugation differs 302. from the First only in the inflexion of the Present and Strong Aorist-Stems, and in the case of a few verbs also in the Perfect and Pluperfect Active. The
1.

special terminations of this conjugation are

Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient /xt:

The 1 Sing.

(prj-iii,

I say
2.

( 226).
(for

,,

,,

ri)
:

,,

<''(')

<j>r,a-t(v)

3.

3 Plur.

inserts the

vowel

( 226). a before the

The Horn, dialect often has the ending ada in 302. Dialects. the 2 Sing. Ind. Act. : rlBi^-arda, tliou puttest ; e-^i;-o-5a, and jievai or fiev instead of vai in the Inf. (pd-fievm, t^a-fiiv ; and a short v
:

instead of the (rav of the 3 Plur. of the Preterite

-cj)a-v.

sometimes lengthens the Stem-vowel in the Subj. and shortens the Modal- vowel as in the Aor. Pass. ( 298):
dialect
'zoiifu=:'ta>iJ,ev

The Horn,

(eamus).
Digitized

by Microsoft

304.

SECOND PEINCIPAL CONJUGATION.

a-i.

171

.termination

(for vrt) ( 226,

by compensation

(i-d<n(y), they go,

<l>dai(y),
it]

comp. Dial.), and this a is lengthened from the Stem i), and unites

with the a of the Stem : 4. In the Optative

directly to the

i), the Modal-sign attaches itself comp. 293. (j>d-6i, 1 5. The 2 Sing. Imperat, has the ending 6i pqo > tpd-vm 6. The Infinit. has the ending vm 7. The 3 Plur. of the Preterite has a-av e-^''-o-a>/ (3 Plnr. Imperf.)

(tf,

Stem

(jia-trj-v

All terminations of these two tenses are appended to the Stem without a connecting vowel: ^a-jxev (comp. in the Participle Ttfia-o-jMev), ^a-Tco (comp. Tifia-e-TO))
;

also vT attaches itself directly to the

Stem

^ a-v t,
:

of

which the Nom.

formed by the addition of a <pd<i Stem So, Sov? (comp. 147, i). In the Subjunctive alone the final vowels of the Stems are contracted with
is

the long connecting vowels as in the ordinary contracted

verbs
Swfjiai.

(.

243)

(j)dra,

(pS)

TtrOk-ai,

Tirdw,

B6-w-/mu,

303. In the Vowel-Stems of this conjugation a change of quantity takes place in such a manner that

vowels in themselves short are lengthened in the Singular Indicative Active, a and e becoming ?, o a, and v v <^-fii, I say, Plur. <f>d-fiev, e-(pT]-v, Dual, e-^d-rov [e-Orj-v,
:

Jplaced];
/Mev.

Plur. e-Oe-ftev; SeUvv-fii,

I shmv, Plur.

SeiKvv-

Ohs.

Those forms which always have the vowel long

AU verbs
in
fit

are specially

noticed below.

1.

304.

are divided into 2 classes

Those which in the Present join their terminations

directly to the
2.

Stem
:

^-fii;

Those which form the Present-Stem by adding vv hei/c-vv-fjn,, I show, Pure Stem, S e s , to the Pure Stem Present-Stem, BeiKvv,

Digitized

by Microsoft

172

FIEST CLASS OF VEEBS IN

/it.

130

I.

FiEST

Class of Veebs in

fu.

305 and 306. The Paradigms of this Class of Vert are inserted on p. 124, fol.

307.

Some few forms

of the Verbs in fu are forme

The following are Ionic secondary form 305, 306. Dialects, those enclosed in brackets helng the New-Ionic.
Active.
2. Sing. Pres. Ind. TL-Brj-a-da
3.

bi-hoi-aBa also hi-hoi-s

Si-SoI
8i-Sov(ri{v)

,, ,,

,, ,,

Tl-6fi
Ti-6'L(n(v')

[t-OTo]
\^i-(rTc-a(rt(v)\

3. Plur.

also (^7rpo)6ov(ri(v)
2. Sing. Pres.

Imperat.
Ti.-6t}p.e-vai

Si-Sa-ei
hi-Zo-jxev

(meyi-ara

Inf. Pres.

dt-dovvai

Imperf. 1 Sing. y-n-Be-a']

[e-Si-Sov-v]
['-<7Ta]

[e-Ti-de-e]

Middle.
S. PI. Pres.
-,,

Ind.

[ri-Bi-arai

Si-So-arai.

i-crre-aTcu]

Imperf.
n-6fj-jicvos

[i-ore-aro]

Pres, Part.

Active.
2. Aor. Ind. 3 PI.

earav
etTTaaav

3.

Subj. 1 Sing, deia [Bio]

>j

)>

2 3

Beirjs
Belli

or

Brjrjs

Sms
Smin(v) or

OTTjTJS

2 D.
1 PI.
Becofiev or

arficTov ( 302
D.;

Smoiiev

oTctajLiep
(TTeiOfiet/

or

Belofiey
3J
)J
"*

Bifievai, Bffiev

Sa)(0(rt(i')

Inf.

Sofnevai. dofiev

oTrjjifva.

Middle,

Ind.
Subj.

iBeo, i'Bfv ( 37,

[Beafiai] Belo/iai

D. 1)

[Herod. TrposB^Kavroj

Imper

Beo, Bev,

Digitized

by Microsoft

308.

FIEST CLASS OP VEKBS IN

fll.

173

after the First Principal Conjugation, as

Imperf.
Tt,6e.

e. g., the 2 Sing. the 3 Sing, hldei, as if from the Stem In the Imperf. the forms iSiSovv, iSiSov;, iSiSov

eVi^et?,

Stem BtSo; they are formed in the same manner as those of contracted verbs ( 243). Other similar forms will be noticed in treating
are the only ones in use from the

of the separate verbs. In the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. contraction

:

is sometimes employed Ti6ei<n, SiSovcri, In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Pres. Act. the real ending 6c is dropped, and the Stem-vowel is lengthened to com-

pensate for

it

SlSov for BlSodt.

In the same person of the Aorist after a short vowel I only is dropped, and the remaining 6, according to So-6i, Soy, but o-ttj-Oi, which 67, is changed to ? only in compounds sometimes appears as a-rd, e. g^ KaTaard. In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Present and Imperfect th& o- between the two vowels is preserved rlOe-aai, rlde-a-o, eride-ao only the 2 Sing, of the Subj. is treated entirely like the contracted verbs of the First Principal Conjugation. In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Strong Aorist, on the other hand, the o- is thrown out, which gives rige to a. contraction: e-de-a-o, e-de-o, e-6ov; Imper. de-ao, 6e-o,.
:
:

00V.
Ols.

The forms of the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. compounded with monosyllabic prepositions, after contraction throw the accent as a circumflex upon the last syllable irpo-doi but Homer has: ;

avv-Beo and ncpi-dov.

308.

tinguish the Present-Stem from the

duplication, that
is,
:

The three verbs conjugated above (p. 124) disPure Stem by rethe initial consonant with
;

is

prefixed

BuZo 6e, nOe ( 536) l-aTa for In like ai-<TTa according to 60 I. (comp. Lat. si-sto). manner the Stem ^pa in the Pres. becomes ki-xp^ (Ki^prj-fjLi, I lend); irXa and n-pa, with the insertion of a nasal, become irirfi-TrXa, m-iJ.-Trpa (irlfi'TrX'rifii;
before the

Stem

So,

Digitized

by Microsoft

174

FIRST CLASS OF VEKBS IN

iri/nrpij/M,

(1,1.

301

I burn); but av^tr-irlrirXri-iit, e/j.-'Tn the Stem e becomes i-rj-fu I send ; and, wit the reduplication within the Stem itself, ova become I fill ;
n-X7]-//,i
;

h-vi-vrj-yi,!,,

I benefit.
iirlaraijuu, I understand I hang together with the Aorists cTrpia/iriv, I bought I benefited, withdraw the accent, even in the Suhjunc
;

309.

The Deponents Simnat, I can;

KpijxafMi,
avrjjj.r)v,

tive

and Optative,
(comp.

as far as possihle
tcrrw/xat, torati/ro).

from the end

bivajia

eTrlaraiVTo

Other

peculiarities of verbs of this class are

The three Stems 6e (ridrifii). Bo {BiStofu), an( form an irregular Weak Aorist in ku eOrjKa L eSoDKu, rjKa, but in the Middle we find only '^Ko./j/riv. the Sing, of the Indicative the Active forms are custo mary instead of those of the Strong Aorist, but in th( Dual and Plural of the Indicative they are rare. Th( other moods and the Participles have the strong form;
310.
I (iT/yat)
:

exclusively.

The

really customary forms of the Aorist, therefore

are these
Ind.

312.

FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN

Pass.,

jJii.

175
:

Mid. and Aor.

and ^e

in 'the Aor. Pass.

Be-Bo-fiai,

iSoOfjv, ecTTddrjv, iTeBrjv, redriaofiai.

On

the meaning of

the different forms of

u7tij/ii,

see 329, 1.
/i t

312.

To

the First Class of the Verbs in

in

there

also belong

A) Verbs whose Stem ends

1.
^-/At
7i

a (comp.

La-Trjfu)

(comp. Lat.

d-io),

I say,

only in the Impf. ^v,

8 Sing.
(

(comp.

213, Ohs.).
1/

2. o-vlrV7]-iJLi

(Stem o
Opt.

a,

308), Ihenefit, Mid. ovivafiai

309),

have advantage, Strong Aor. Mid. mvij/Mjv,

;

&vri<To, &vr)To
crOai,,

ovaifiTjv,
;

Imperat.
Aor. Pass.

oinja-o,

Inf. 8pa-

Fut.

ovrjCTw, ovija-ofiai

wvijOtjv.

3. 'n-l-fi-TrXri-fM
-TrXjjeo),

(Stem TrXa,

308).

Additional form,
Perf.

Jill

[Lat. ple-o],

Fut.

ttXijo-co,

Mid.

vre-TrXrja/jyai,

Aor. Pass.

eTrX'ijadijv.
IT pa),

4.

irlr^irTTfyrj-fjiv

(Stem

additional form, Trpijda

(quite like 3).

5.

^-fil (Stem ^a),

<f>a.9c
;

say,

2 Sing. Impf.

e^aOa
92, 3).

(enclitic in Pres. Ind.

except 2 Sing., comp.

Imperat. ^ddl, or
6.
')(pri

comp.

i^aanca, 324, 8.

(Stem %/3a, XP^) "^^ must, Subj. xpfl. Opt. ^pfjvat. Part. 'xpeoDv (only Neut. from Xpaov, according to 37 D.). Impf. ixpv^ or XPV^'
XpeiT],
Inf.

Fut. 'XPW^''i a.'jTO'xpVt ^t suffices, also 3 Plur. airoXpa)a-i(v), &c., as above airoxpaw.
7.

Ki-^ij-fiL

(Stem %/5a,
-^0^^-

308), Ilend, Inf.

Kixpd-

vai, Fut. XPV<^^> nents :

8.

e%/3i7<ra.

Further the depo-

arya-fiac

(Stem 'ay a),

I admire, Fut. ar/aa-o/jiai,, Aor. I

can,

Pass. TjydaOrjv, Verb. Adj. dyaaro^.

.

9. Buvdrfiai
(

(Stem Suva)
Impf.
3.

rare

309),

iSvvdfirjv,

2 Sing. Ind. Bwy is 2 Sing. eBvvio, Fut.

312. Dialects.

3. Plur. jrkfjvTO, Opt. irK^/jajv, or TrkfijirjV,

6.

Horn, has the Aor. TrXijTo, it was Imper. [e/njTrXTjo-Qi

8.

Herod, airixpa. Horn, ayaofiai,, dyaio/iai.

Digitized

by Microsoft


176
Bvv^a-ofiat,

FIRST CLASS OF VEEBS IN

Aor.
ehvvrjd'nv,
t)

/i*.

312

seldom

iBvvda-dTjv.

The Aug

Tfient is frequently/

234, Ols.), Perf. SeSvvjjfiat, Verb

Adj. Swaro?, capable, possible. 10. eiriaTOriiai (Stem eiria-Ta)

eTTia-Taaai,
aofjMi,

I understand,
Put.
eina-rrjTO'i.

2 Sing
i'TTiaT'^-

Imporf.

^Trto-ra/x?;!',

rjiriaTco,

Aor.

TjiTiaTrjO't^v,

Verb. Adj.

11.
epdco),

epa-fj,at,

(Stem

e/aa),

poetic,

Zowe

(comraonlj

Aor. Pass.

ripda-Oijv.

12. Kpefia-fiM
Kpe/jiTJao/iai,

(Stem Kpe/Mo),
eKpefjida67]v.

Aor.

I hang ( 309). Fut Additional forms, 319,

o ho-rrjp, the giver ;
rj

OJs.

The
:

following

may

serve as examples of the formation o

;

words

to 6i-fia, the position

ij

trra-o-i-f

tte rise; differing

fu-s,

ovrj-a-i-s,

the benefit,
;

from the Pure Verbal-Stem

fj <^r)-ii-q,fd-ma, talk ; fj hvva from the Present-Stem power; tj iinaTq-in), knowledge, from the Verbal-Stem which is the same as that of the Present.

Dialects.

13.

Hom.

ajxevat, satiate,

Stem,

d, Subj. ecoftcv.

14.
14. 15.

Stem /3 a, Part. jStjSds, stepping. b. Stem 8 e a, 3 Sing. Imperf. hiaro, seemed, Aor. fiod-o-craro. Stem l\a, IXdcTKoiiai, iXaofiai, I am gracious, Hom. Imperal
Stem Kepa (comp.
Kepavvvju,

16.

1 mix), Hom. 3

Plur. Subj

Mid. Kipavrai.

To

these belong also, in regard to the inflexion o

the Present-Stem, those Hom. verbs, which either are tised only ii the Present-Stem, or form the Present-Stem from the Verbal Stei by affixing the syllable -v a : a) haix,-vr]-p.i (also hap.-va-a), I tame. Mid. iaii-va-p.ai, Ful Sajudco, dapidas. Weak Aor. Inf. 8ap.dcrai, bapaaaadai, Perf. dedfiTj
fiai,

Aor. Pass.

i&p.rjdriv,

8apda-dr]v,

and Strong Aor.

Pass.

eSdfirj

(Subj. Sapeico).
J) KipvTjpi (also Kcpdwvpi, 319, 1), I mix, Part. Kipvds, SSinj Imperf. cKipva, comp. 319, 1. c) Kpripvdpai, poetic additional form of Kpcpa-pai (12), comj also 319, 2. d) pdpvapai, I contend, 2 Sing. Imperf. ipApvdo.
e) TrepvTjpi,

Sing. e-TtXTj-ro. g) irirvripi, I spread. Part, jrirvas, Imperf. irirvavro, com] 319, 3. /() iTKl&vrjpi, 1 scatter, a-Klhydrai, comp. 819, 4.
Digitized

f) nlXvapat,

I sell, Part. Trepvds, Trepvapevos. I approach. Stem neX, Aor. 3

by Microsoft

313.

FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN

313.
Mj-/it

fM.

177
e

B) Verbs whose Stem

(Stem
6,

ends in
i.

(comp.

1.

Pres.-Stem

t-e,

e.,

t-l

according
(secondary-

to 308),

I send.
ieiriv

Act. Pres. 3 Plur. Ind. lacn{v), Opt.

3 Plur. lotej/). Imperf. 'ir)-v (secondary forms [ww], let?, t'et), Plur. 'ie-fiev, 3 Plur. ie-a-av, a<f>iei and ^i^iet Comp. 240. (a<f>l7i/j,i, I send away).
hifii,,

forms

Aor.

rf-K-a, riK(K, '^Ke(v), elrov, e'irrjv, elfiev, etre,

elcrav.

Subj. &, Opt.

et?

etT?!/,

Imperat.

e?,

Inf. eti/at, Part.

(Stem ivr).
jmu,

On

this Aor.

comp.
la/iai,

310.
&c..

Put.

^a-cD,
'{re-

Perf. el-K-a.

Mid. Pres.
Opt.

I hasten, strive, Subj.

(additional form,
Ebi;,

Ifj,

teZ/ii;!/

lOL/Mrjv),

Imperat.

tWo, or

Imperf.
elro,

t-e/irjv.

Aor.

ei/iT?!',

elo-o,

Subj.
o"fj/rjv).

&fiai,,

Opt.

6i/ii;j;

(additional form,
Ohs.

The

et of the Ind.

et-jaiji', is

caused

by

the

Augment

( 236),

that of the Opt.

by

the Mood-sign ( 302, 4).

313. Dialects.!. Horn.

ieiiTi(v)
"rj(n(y')
;

2 and 3 Sing. Pres. his, lei ; 3 Plur. 1 Sing. Impf. leiv, leis, lei 3 Plur. iev, 3 Sing. Subj. Inf. Ufievai ; Aor. Act. eijKa ; 3 Plur. ea-av ; Subj. eia ; Aor.
;

Mid. 3 Plur.
2.

ej/ro.

Put.

^o-ca

and

(dv)a-ai

[Herod.

fiefieTijiivos as

a Part. Perf. of

lj.eTiT]iu=iie6iTjni, 52, D., as if

from

fiCTia

with irregular reduplica-

tion].

Moreover
3.

Stem

a(f)e, Pres.

aijjut,

J iZoto,

2 Dual

ajjToi/,

3 Sing. Impf.

017

and
4.

aei, Inf. dijvai

and

dij/ievai.

Part. Aor.

Nom.

Plur. aevres, Mid.

Stem

e,

(eV) BUa-av, they frightened, hUvrai, they

flee.

Opt.

Stotro.

5.

Stem bi^e,

Si^Tjfiai,

additional form, Sifm, Iseeh, 2 Sing.

hi(riai.

Inf. 8i^Tja-6ai,
6.

Put.

Si^rjiroiiai.

Pres. Kixifu (comp. 322, 18)

obtain, Subj. Kix^ia, Opt..

Kixfi^v, Inf. Ki^rivai, Part, kix^'ls.

Mid.

Kip^^/iEvoj.

Impf. 2 Sing. ^''X^i5,^f,fiTi/T3lb

178
Fut.

FIEST CLASS OF VEKBS IN

rfcroimt,, Perf. el-iiai,

fll.

314

Plup.

eC-fi'qv.

Aon
2.
SI-St]-/!,!,

Pass.

e'lOi^v,

Subj. eOm.

Fut.

idi^aofiai.

Yerb. Adj. ero?, erio?.

(Stem

Se),

I bind,

a rare additional font

t

of S^-Q, ( 244, 1).

314.

C) Verbs wbose Stem ends in

1.
el-jii

(Stem

I,

Lat. t-re),
l'-/cv

I go.
Subj.
i-ta

Pres. Ind, ct-^i

ei
er-(7i(>')

t-js etc.
l'-o(j etc.

t-Toy T-Tf

i-Tov i-acri(v)

i-oii)v Opt. Imperat. t-Bi

i-rco etc.

Inf. l-i-vM

Part.
,^a

i-a)>',

t-oSo-a, i-di'

3 Plur. l~6pra)v or i-raa-av (Gen. i^wr-os, comp. Lat

,17/xew

Impf.

jyeiv
_^'eiy

or

^eifiev or
tjtov, ffecre

ijeicrBa ^eiTov,
,,

tjts

Ijei

^eiv

rjeiTijv, h'tiji'

rjeirav

Verbal Adj.
necessary to go).
Obs.

tro?,

tVeo? (additional

form

iTrjTeov, it

ii

The

Present, especially in the Indicative, has a

Futun
ii

meaning ; the Imperfect has the endings of a

produced by the Augment preceding
2. Kel-fiai
c
(.

Pluperfect, ^

Perfect.
KerjTai,

(Stem xei), I Me, has the inflexion of i 2 Sing. xel-aM, 3 Plur. Keivrat, Subj. 3 Sing
kqIcto,

Opt. KeoiTo, Imperat.

;

Inf. KelaOai, Part

Keifievo^

the

compound

TrapaKeifMao, Inf. irapaiceicrOai

(Comp.

fifj^ai,

315,

2).

314. Dialects. 1.
ir)<jiv,

Stem

I,

2 Sing. Pres. Ind.

'la/icv.

tltrBa, Subj.
iei'i)

'!.ri<rea

1 Plur.

'Vojifv, 'lOfiev,

and

Opt,

loj,

or

etri,

Ini

Impf. fia and ^iw, 3 Sing.

^loi/, ij'i<Tav,

^'ie(v)

or

te(i/),

1 Plur. ^oj^v, 3 Plui

l^ut. 2.

with itt/v, I'/iej', to-ay. et(ro)Liat, Aor. eladfiTjv and

ieKrdfirjv.

Stem

K e t, 3 Plur. KciWai, Kcarai, Keuvrat, Impf. Keiaro, Kear

\_KiTm=KeiTai], Part. Fut. Kccav, CMJi<Mri(S, Inf. Keiiftev.

ovo is an Hom. Stem in o, Pres. Svofim, I vituperate, ovoa-ai 3 Sing. Opt. SvoLTo ( 309), Put. ovoa-a-ojiat, Aor. avoa-afuqv, am from the Stem o v, avdfirjv.

pv

or

epv

is

an Hom. Stem in
;

u,

3 Plur. elpvarai, they rescui

protect. Inf. pua-dai, epvaBai, elpifievos, Impf. 2 Sing. Upuaa, 3 PIui

pvaro, ipvaro, e'lpvvro

moreover. Inf. Act. elpvuevai, to draw, Aoi

^liJ. pva-aro, he rescued, epitraaro, he drew. Digitized by Microsoft


315.
Obs.

FIKST CLASS OF VEEBS IN

/if.

179
is

When

identical in

compounded with meaning with the

Ti6r)ja
:

prepositions,

Kiijiai

almost

Perf. Pass, of the coiTesponding

compounds of
VTr6iiiTai, it is

viroridrjiu,

lay as a foundation,

laid as afoimdation.

315.
1.

1/111

D) Verbs whose Stem ends (Stem is Lat. esse"), I am

el-fil

in a consonant

(o-)

Pres. Ind.

(for e<r^i)
iiT-rov
es-t")

iir-jiiv

ft (for ia-iTi)

ea-Tf (es-tisy
el-(Ti(y)
eirffiev

ia-Ti(y) (Lat.

ctr-rov
cirfv

Subj.

S
lis
j;

Sifiev

Opt.

Or

c';ej'

rjTOV TjT ^roi/ o"i(v)

eirjs eirjTOv
e'lTj

or etroj/ etjyre or eire

elrjrrjv

or

etTTji*

eiqfrav Or etei'

Imperat.

lo-fit

eotoj/

tore

Inf. tivai

eo-ro)

eoTOiV earaxrav

Part,

^j/

uuo'a ^v

(Stem ovt)

(Lat. esto) earcovj SvTav

Impf. ^v or 7
TjaOa
jyv

TJfiev

rjuTOV or rov
TjCrTriv

rjTf

or ^ore

or

^Vt/i'

^crai'

Impf. Mid. Fut.

ijfiriv

(rare)

UtTOfiai

3 Sing, eorai

V. Adj.
Ohs. 1.

icrriov.

The loss of the cr of the Stem is compensated for by the vowel being lengthened in the 1 Sing. ( 42) eljii for eV/xi, in the 2 Sing, el for ia-i, which has arisen from the eVo-i preserved in Homer (comp. 49, 61, 6). In the 3 Sing, the original ending t t is retained cVtiX"), the 3 Plur. has el(ri{v) from fo-vn. The Subj. S stands for ea (Hpm.) from eVm the Opt.
:

Ionic additional forms : 2 Sing. eV-o-i or eif, 315. Dialects. 1 Plur. elfih, 3 Plur. eaa-i,{v) ; ia-irl is also enclitic, but not aa-l(v).
Subj. 1 Sing, em,
eici),

2 Sing,

ejjs,

3 Sing.

er}ai.(y),

wK"), %j

3 Plur.
Opt. also

cw(ri(j')

ois, ot,

2 Sing. Imperat. Mid.

i'cra-o,

3 Act. earco,

3 Plur. ea-Tav
Inf. e/i/ifvai (for etT-fievai),
efi/ji^v,

eficvai, Ujiev

Part, emy, iovcra, i6v

(Stem iovr)
;

Imperf. 1 Sing, ^a, ta, eov 2 Sing, ejtr^a [eaj], 3 Sing, rjev, erjv, rjriv, [2 Plur. ea], 3 Plur. fo-ai-; 3 Plur. Mid. eiai-o (^.ro)

Fut.

e(T(rojjuu,

3 Sing, eaerai,

etraerai, i&celTai (

264)

2. 3. Plur. earai, etarai, Imperf. earo, elaro

3. Inf. tSfievai, to eat, Pres. ea-da, ia-dia,

eSa lhat.es-tis

editis']f

Comp.
4. 2. Plur.

327, 4.

Imperf. <}>epTe=(l>peTe, Iring [Lat./crfe]. Digitized by Microsoft


180
lirjv

FIKST CLASS OF VERBS IN

for
ia-~irjv,
;

fXl.

31(

from
the
05s.
2.

itT-av.

&v for iav (Horn as the Inf. ctvai for id-vai In the Impf. the Dual has most fully preserve
i

(T.

dfi.1 is enclitic in the Pres. Ind. except the 2 Sing, (comp. 92, 3) tori is paroiytone when it denotes existenc or means the same as c|foTi "it is possible," as well as at th
;

heginning of a sentence and after the particles oi, jiij, i, mj Kal: earI 6eos, there is a God; ovk ean, it is not joossibli When merely external causes prevent it from heing encliti ( 93, c), ea-Ti(v) is oxytone : (piKos icrrlv f'/xoC, he is myfriena Ohs. 3. In the compounds of elfii the accent remains on tli

Stem-syllable
ottS, ajrelev, in

e.g. in the Imperf. Trapijv, in the Suhj.

the Inf. and Part,

direivai, irapoyv, in

and Opt the 3 Sing

Fut. napeo'Tai.
2. rjfiat

(Stem

17?),

sit,

has,

like xeifiai, the

in

flexion of a Perfect.

Pres. ^/iat
?j<jai

rjfiedov
fjcr6ov

rifieOa

rjaraL fjcrOov

Impf.

rjfirjv,

fjao,

&C.

pound
kclOov

In Attic prose we find almost exclusively the comKadr)fiai,, of which 3 Sing. KddrjTai, Subj. Kadto/xai Opt. Ka6olfir]v, 3 Plur. KaOolvro, Imperat. KaQr^ao 01

Imperf

(from KaOeero), Inf. Kadrjadat, Part. Ka6rjfx,evo<;, iKadrjfirjv ( 240) or KadrjixTjv, 3 Sing. eKadijTO 01 KadrjcTTO, 3 Plur. eKadrjino or KaOrjvTo.

316.

The

following Strong Aorists formed without

connecting vowel from verbs

whose Present-Stem mostly

/u.

follows the First Principal Conjugation, likewise belong

to the First Class of

Verbs in

Stems in
1.

a.

(Stem /3 a), Pres. ^aivm, I go, Imperat. yS^^t, in compounds also /3a (KaTd^d), Inf ^rjvai,, Part. jSa?.
e-^7]-v

316,

FIRST CLASS OF VEEBS IN

/it.

181
y7jpd-i7Ka;,

2. jTipa-vai

(Stem yrjpa),
324,
1.

Inf. to

the Pres.

I grow
3.

old,

e-Sparv

(Stem Bpd), Pres.

Si-Spd-criea},

324,

2,

I run,

Inf. Bpd-vai, Part. Spa?.

4. e-icTorv

(Stem k t a), Pres. KTUvm,

I kill.

Part. KTa-i,

Part. Mid. Kra-fievo^ (killed).

5. e-TTTTj-v

(Stem Trra, (Stem rXa),

rXfjOi,

Trre), Pres. TreTo/iat,

I fiy.

Part. TTTa?, Mid.

6.

Trrdfievot;, Inf. TrreaOai,.

e-T\r]-v

J
Inf.

endured, Subj. tXoj, Opt.

rX^vai, Put.
TXrjo-ofiac,

rKairjv,

Imperat.

Perf. T6T\9ya ( 317, D., 10). 7. e-cfidrj-v (Stem ^^a), Pres.

<f>0dv{0,

I anticipate, Inf.
irpiw.

8. e-irpid-ij,r]v

(Stem Trpia), Thought, Imperat.

Stems in
e.

9.

e-a^Tf-v

(Stem (Stem

cr/3e),

Pres.

a^ivvvfii,

quench,

319, 7, Inf. <7/3^i/at.

10. eraickrj-v
o-zcXiji/at.

cr/eXe), Pres. o-eXX&),

I dry.

Inf.

11.
6X0),

Imperat
327,
6, 1

cr;i^e-?,

from

<j-)(i-Oi,

(Stem

o-;)^e),

Pres.

Sing. Ind. e-ax-o-v.

Stems in
12. k-oKa-v
fiai (

us.

(Stem d\a),

I was

caught, Pres. okLitko-

324, 17), Opt. aKoiijv, Inf. akSsvai, Part. dXom. 13. e-^Lco-v (Stem /Stw), Pres. /Siow, i" Zve, Opt.
^i,ov<;.

^lanfu. Inf. ^L&vai, Part.

Dialects.

2. Part, yr/pas.

3. [Her. cSpi;^]. 4. 3 Sing. cKTa, 3 Plur. eicrav, Subj. KTeafiev, Inf. KTa/ifvm, Mid. tKTaro (he was killed, 255, D. 2), Pass. Aor., 3 Plur. eKraSev. 5. Mid. ejrraTo, Sabj. bt^toi, Dor. 1 Sing. Act. orrav. 6.

7. Subj.
<j>6ea>iiev.

3 Plur. eTXai/. 3 Sing,

(pdrjri,

or

(^55(7((i'), (Trapa)(j)6alrja-ij(v'),

1 Pluj.

12. ;}X(ax, Subj., liXcia. Opt. 3 Sing. dXoij;, Inf. dXto^Ecat.

Digitized

by Microsoft


182
FIEST CLASS OF VERBS IN
/Ml.

31f

14. e->yvai-v

(Stem yvco), Pres.

Opt.
ryvol-nv,

yi-yvai-a-Ka),

come

Mow

324, 14),

Imperat.

7i'w6't,

Id

ryvavai. Part. 71/0V9.

15. Imperat.

-Tri-di,

Stems in t. (Stem iri), Pres.

(

ttIvco,

drink

1 Sing. Aor. Ind.

emov

321, 4).

Sterna in v.
16.
e'-Su-i'

(Stem Bv), Pres.

8i5ft),

/ diVe,

Imperat.
see 329,

S)^

Inf. Bvvac, Part. 809.

As

to its

meaning

4.

17. e-^v-v
Inf. (j>vvai.
Dialects-

(Stem

<jiv),

I became, Pres.

^vco,

I produce

14. Subj. -jv&kh. Inf. yvaiievai.

n-iV.

15. Imperat.

16. 3 Pliir. cSu-i-, Subj.

Inf. Sviiev.

Stfo),

Sr^j, 3 Sing. Opt. Sst] (from

Su-i'i)]

17.

3 Plur.

c<^t;i/.
:

Besides these the following are peculiar to the Ep. Dial. 18. Part, anovpas, Pres. diravpawj I take away.
19.

Stem

jSXi;,

Pres. /SaXXm,

throw, 3 Dual, ^h^Xtjttjv (me

e/SXT/ro

together), Fut. ^vp^Xfjo-ojiai,

(was At*, 255, D. 2]) Subj. /3X^--Tai, 2 Sing. Opt. ;8Xcio, Inf. ^ijcrBai, Part. /SXij/ievo
Mid.
(All!).

20.
21.

Stem out a,

vat, Part.

Pres. oiram, I wound, 3 Sing. oStS, Inf. Mid. ovrajievos (wounded'). Verb. Adj. oCrarof.

oirofit

Stem

Trra, Pres.

n-Tijo-a-m,

sioop,

2 Dual,

c-jjt^-ttjj',

Part

Perf. 5rfnT7)o)r.

22.
23.

24. 25.
26.

Stem ttXo, Pres. jreXafm, I approach, Aor. Mid. irX^ro. Stem /Spa, Pres. jSt-^pti-o-Kw, i ea ( 324, 13), Aor. tfipav. Stem n-Xa), Pres. ttXcoco, / sa7, 2 Sing. Aor. en-Xmr, Part. TrXm-s Stem kti, Pres. Kn'fw, Ifound. Part. Aor. Mid. iv-Kri-jj-evo
Stem
qbfli, Pres. (pdivm,

(well-founded).

I waste away,

Subj. Aor. Mid. 05ie

Toi, Opt. (pdlii-qv, (J)61to, Inf. (j)dl(Tdai, Part. <^6lfiiVos.

27. 28.
29.

Stem kXv,
(ce/tXi/TE.

Pres. kXuib,

I Jiear,

Imperat. Aor. kXC^i or KexXB^i

XCro.

jcXCre or

Stem Xu, Pres. Xiim, i Zoose, Aor. Mid. Xvp-riv, Xuto or Stem nvv, Pres. Trvim, I ireathe, Aor. Mid. ap.vvvTO
Stem <rv, Stem xu,
Pres. o-fum,

(he

covered ireath).
30. 31.
Pi^es. xe<, -f

I scare, yow

Aor. Mid. otuto, Part, cripfvos.

( 248), Aor. Mid.

ex") X^"

Part. j(ypevos.
Digitized

by Microsoft

317.

PIKST CLASS OF VERBS IN

fu.

183

&

317. Several Perfeots also iave some formB witkout connecting yowel

A) Vowel-Stems, A number of Vowel-Stems form the Sing. Perf. Ind. Act. regularly, but in the Dual and Plural of the
Perfect and Pluperfect Ind., in the other moods, and in

the Infinitive and Participle, may connect the endings immediately with the Perfect-Stem. 1. Stem /3 a, Pres. ^aiva, I go i(, 321, l). Perf. Ind. ^e^rjK-a jSe^a-fiev

3 PL Subj. ^e^&aoiy). Part.

/SeySwTO?.
2.

ySe^Sw?,

^e^mcra, Gen.

Stem

rya (for yev), Pres.

rylryvofjuu,

Iheeome, Perf.
'yeyay<;,

lye-yov-a, Plur. also <yi-'yd-/j.ev ( 327, 14), Part.

Gen.

ryeySiTo^.

Dialects.

32. Stem d\

(aXXo/iai,

I sprmg), Aor. Mid.

SXo-o, 3\ro,

Subj. SKerai, Part. SK/ievos. 33. Stem yfv, only in yEvro,

34.
hlKTo,

7i

took.

Stem Sex

(Pies. SexofO'j

accept),

Aor.

iiiyjirjv,

3 Sing.

Imperat. S/Jo, Inf. hexBai (comp. 273, D.). 35. Stem Xey (Xcym, I collect), A'or. Mid. Xekto, Ae counted. 36. Stem Xex (i^o Pres.), Aor. Mid. Xckto (he laid himself), Imperat. Xe^o, Inf. \ex6m. Part. (jaa-ayUyjievos, Aor. Act. eXe^a,

Mid. iKeiaro, Fut.

37. 38.

Xffo/iai.

Stem /ity, Pres. filoya, I mix, Aor. Mid. %iuk.to, iukto. Stem op, opvufu, I excite, Aor. Mid. ^pro, Imperat. Sptro

or

opa-eo (Spa-ev), Inf. opdac, Part. -Spixevos.

39. 40. 41.

Stem n-ay (jr^yw/it, Ifix), Aor. Mid. rCTn/KTo, ii was fixed. Stem jraX (ttoXXci), I wield), Aor. Mid. n-dXro. Stem jrepfl (wepSa, I destroy). Inf. Aor. Mid. n-ep5at(io 5
tkese are to be added the Participles whicb bave become aa-p-cvos, ylad (Stem dS, &vbava, I please), "iKjievos,
|3e/Sa<Bf,

To

Adjectives,

Javmurahle (Stem Ik iKviopxu., I come). 317. Dialects.1. Hom. 3 Plur. jSe^aao-iCf), Part.
2.

Dual.

Horn. 3 Plur. yeyaaa-t^v). Part, yeyaas, yeyavia. Gen. ycyaSyros,

D''al Plup. (fir)ycyaTijV.

Digitized

by Microsoft

184
3.

FIRST CLASS OF VEEBS IN

fU.

317.

Stem Ova,

Pres. 6vr]-aK(o,

die,

Perf. Te-dwij-Ka,

redvdvat, Part. TeOvew'i, Te^j/fiftjo-a, re^z/eo?, Plupf. 3 Plur. eTedvatrav (^ 324, 4). 4. Stem crra, Pres. t-trrTy-yitt, Perf. e-ariq-Ka I Stand,
Plur. Ti-6va-/j,ev, &c., Inf.
Plur.
e-cTTci-fiev,

Subj. karSijMev, ea-Ta)ai(v), Opt. eoTairjv,

Imperat. earadi, eaTara, ecrrarov, ear are, Inf. ierrdvai. Part. ea-Td)<;, kcncocra, e<7r6<;, Gen. Io-timto?, 3 Plur.
Plupf. eo-rao-ai; ( 306 &c.). 5. Stem St, Perf. Se-St-a or Se-Boi-Ka,
SeBi-fiev, SeStacrt(i'),
B'iBiOi, Inf. BeBievai,

I fear,

Plur.

Subj. SeSw, Opt.

BeSiei'rjv,

Imperat.

Part. SeStcoy, Plupf. iBeSieiv, 3

eSetcra,

Dual
Set-

iBeBlTTjv,

3 Plur. iBiBiaav, also Aor.

Fut.

Ois.

The regular and

irregular forms are mostly both in use.

B) Consonant-Stems.
In tliese the peculiar changes of the vowels and consonants ( 45-49) must be obserred. 6. Stem Id (Aor. elSov I saw, 327, 8).
VerlAnA. olS-a, I know itr- fie v Subj. el8Z oi-ada \(r~Tov 1<r~Te eldjjs
oi8-t(i')io--roj'

303)

eliZiiev

slb^Tov eld^re

Opt.

8ei7;v,

Imp. to--^!
itr-ro)

'<T-da-i(v') el&jj 'icr-Tov 'la- -re

eiS^rov 3S<n(i/)
Inf. 8eVat

icr-TO)!' i(7-T(oo-ai' Part.eiS'cif, elSvIa,

elBos, Gen. eifior-os

Plup. fjSeiv
jSei(i/)

or

nfi?)

(i knew)

jlbeia-Ba ^Srjada

^8e ltov
itrrt'oi/.

or rj(TT0V
fja-rriv

Put.

cia-ofiai,

^trj Verb. Adj.

rjbeirrfv

Seiiicv or ^aiifv ^Seire ^ore fjSecrav yaav

Dialects.

3.

Imperat.

ndvadt,

Inf.

^^^/^{^(ai),

Gen. Part.
TfOinjv'ia.

TefceSrof, TfSi/ijSroy, TeBveiaros, reBprjoTos, TcBveioTOS,

4.

Fem.

2 Plur. Ind. also

sa-TrjTc,

Part, eoraiij, Gen. forarfTor [Her.

(TTea>s, ea"reS(ra].

5. Sfi'Sea,

Aor.
6.

tfideio-a

Sei'dtju.fi', Imperat. SeiSiOi, 1 Sing. Perf. also Sei'SoiKo, (comp. 77, D.). 1 Plur. U-ficv [Her. and sometimes also in Att. writers o'Ba/iev,

3 Plur.

oiSao-i]

Subj.

eiSem

or

ISea,

Plur.

eiSofifv,

fiSfrf, Inf.
^ci'Sj;

i8;teK{ai),

Part. JSuIa, Plup. [^Sra] ^fi'S^y, J'SfeCv) or Plur. sSeWe], 3 Plur. 'Uav, Fut. elSriaw.
Digitized

Fem.

[2

by Microsoft

ola-Qa

318.
Ohs.

SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN

fit.

185
xi&eis,

Besides

we

rarely have oZSas,

nSe/iei',

more frequently

fl&Tjs,

together with ySeitrda, and

JSere instead of pci/ifi/,

fjSeiTe,

7. Stem Ik, only in the Perf. eotKa I resemble, appear, 1 Plur. poet, eoiyfiev, 3 Plur. quite irregularly el'^aa-i(v) (comp. icraa-i). Inf. elKevai (poet, with ioiKevai),

Part.
8.

eiKm^ (with eoiKms), elKvXa, cIko^, Plup. imaetv. Stem Kpay, Pres. Kpd^w, I cry, Perf. KeKpar/a, Im-

perat. Ki-Kpa^-di,.

n.

Second Class of Verbs in

The Second Class of the Verbs in

/i^i.

318.

1.

/i t

belongs

to this conjugation only in regard to the inflexion of

Dialects.

7.

Plup.
9.

itnTTiv,

Impf. eote [Her. 3 Sing. Plup. Mid.

oiko, oikms],
ij'iKTo

Dual

t'iinTov,

3 Dual

or ci'KTo.

Besides

Stem

fia,

2 Dual Perf. /uftaTov,

Part,
/j-efiaais,
v'ta,

strive, jifjiajiev, fiifmre, /leimda-i,

6s,

Imperat.
fieiiatrav,

ji,eiw.Ta>,

Gen. aros, 3 Plur. Plup.

10. Stem rXa, Perf. TcrKriKa, I am patient, 1 Plur. TerKafiev, Opt. TfrXairjv, Imperat. TtrkSBi, Inf. TeTXa/iEy(at), Part. rcTkrias,
rjvla.

Gen.

TerXiydroy.

11.

Stem dvay, Stem iyep,

Perf.

avayya,

I command,

Imperat. avaxOi, 3 Sing. ai/caxSa, 2 Plur.

12.
Perf. eyp-riyop-a,
iyprjyopBf, 3 Plur. Ind. iyprfyopdaorify")

S.va-)(6e,

1 Plur. avayfieu, Plup. ^i/iiyea.

I am

awake, 2 Plur. Imperat.

eiXi^Xou-

13.

stem e\u5,
Stem

Perf.

X^Xou5a, Ihave come, 1 Plur.

-^

6nev.
14.

TTcvd, Perf. ireirovBa (Pres. 7rdo-x<B,

(for ireirovB-Te),

sM/e?*, 327, 9),

2 Plur. miroa-de
15.

Pem.

Part. irevaBvia.

Stem

TTtd, Perf. 7rroi5a (Pres. jreWu,

TriireitrBi.

jjeretWKZe),

1 Plur.

Plup. eiremdiicv, Imperat. Further the Participles

16.

Stem 0po,
Stem
n-Tf,

(fii^pao-Kw,

I eat,

324, 13), Part. Perf. ^e^pa>s.

Gen. PePparos.
17.

vra

(mirrcn,

I fall,

327, 15), Perf. TreVrcoKa,

Part. Gen. jreirTfrnros,

318. Dialects. Ion. 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. -Co-i(i') together with -va<ri(v). Horn. 2 Sing. Imperat. -v and -iJ^t (Sai'vu, o/ivuBi), Horn, forms from Saivv/u, Inf. Hom. -ififvai, vficv (vymp,ev).

Nom.

TrfTrnor.

I feast,

the Opt. SatvCro, for

Digitized

fiaiyu-i-ro.

Similar cases see below,

by Microsoft

186

SECOND CLASS OF VEEBS IN

/ii.

31

the Present-Stem. The Present-Stem of this Second Clas

formed by adding the syllable i/u to the Pure Stem. 2. The quantity of the v is determined by the rule in 303, hence SeUvvfM, but ihelicvvfiev. 3. Vowel-Stems double v in the Present-Stem Stei Kepa, Kepor-wvfM, I mix. 4. Here also numerous additional forms are in us according to the First Principal Conjugation {Sencvvw especially in the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Seiicvvova-i(v), an these forms are exclusively used in the Pres. Subj. am Opt.
is
:
:

Aorist

have the Wea. (Stem c/Se), forms thi Aorist ea-^rjv. Inf. a^rjvai, comp. 316, 9; 319, 7. The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs are inserted oj
5.

Most of the verbs of

;

this class

only a-^evvvfii

I quench

p. 128.

319.

The

following verbs belong to the Seconc

yti

Class of Verbs in

Stems in
1.

a.

Kepavvvfii
Aor. eKepaa-a

(Stem /cfpS, xpa),

Perf. Act. KeKpdKa

I mix
.
'

jiKpadrjv

2. Kp(p.a.vvvp.L

Mid. KeKpap.M

'XiKepaadriv
trans.

(Stem Kpep,a),

I hang,

Mid. Kpepafuu,
iKpepAaBriv

hang, intr. ( 312, 12

Fut. Kpeixu, ( 263) Aor. eKpefiatra

3.

ir^Tavvvpi (Stem ireTo), TTfj-S ( 263)

CTTeTaa-a

I spread
iirerdirBTiv

T!-en(eyrap.ai [pate-6]

4. a-KeSavvvfit (Stem a-Keba),

o-KcSS ( 263)

I scatter,

additional foiTa
injpi

a-iclS'

( 312, D. 16, h:
e'a-KiSdo-erjV

ea-Kedaaa

ea-Kedairpai,.

319, 32. In the New-Ion. D. the

i'Se^a,

of the

Stem Scixis

lost in 8c|<

SeSeypMi,

eSe';(5i;i/

Hom.

Pf. (8ei8Ey/iai,

salute) 3 Plm-

Seidexarat.

Other forms

Comp. 312, D. 16, and 312, D. IG, h Kepam, K(pala>, Aor. eKprjcra. 2. Fut. Kpii6a,, Kpepaas ( 243 D),
319. Dialects. 1.
:

Digitized

by Microsoft

319.

SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN

Siems in
e.

/it.

187

Ohs.

Several of these Stems originally ended inr.

(Stem
originally hs,

5. evvvfii

comp.Lat.

ves-tis)

I clothe,
is

(only

diupt-evwiu
diKpi-S> ( 263) Fut. Mid. dfi(l>i-a'ofiai rjficjiUtTiiai Aor. ^fi^i'-eo-o ( 240) Inf. Aor. Mid. imfo-aa-Bai, 6.

in use)

Kopevvvfii

(Stem Kopi) I satisfy

eKopeaBriv
KSKopetTfiai

iKopeira

7.

a^ivuvpi
jv

(Stem
I

crfie),

1 quench

ca-pea-a )

transiijive

( 316, 9)

intransitive ( 329, 5)
I

Fut.
8.

trliTjaofiat

<TTopivvvp,i (Stem a-rope) (comp. 11 and 25), T spread, (comp. Lat, ster-n-d) aropS) ( 263) iarSpea-iiai
caropeaa.

Stems in
9.

co.

i&vvvfii

(Stem

f<o),

I gird I strengthen (2 am strong")

comp. No.
8.

e^wcra (Mid.)

efaxrd/iT/c

10. pavvvfjii
pcatrto

(Stem

p<),

eppa)p,ai

tppaaSrjv
eaTpadrji/

11. <TTpiivvvp,i
trTpa)(r<a

(Stem

o-Tpia),

eoTptOficu

earpcoaa
12.

xpmvvviii
C}(pa)(Ta

(Stem XP"")) ^colour

Ke^poKTiiai
i^pmtrBtjV.

Consonant-Stems.
13. ayvvp.1,
a^at

(Stem ay

orig. Fay 34:, D.),

1 break
idyrjv

fdya (/ am hrohen")
( 275, 2)

?ala ( 237)
Dialects.

5.

Impf. etwov for i(r-rvov [Inf. Pres. eiwo-^at], Fut.

dpi^Ucrai, ecrtrm,

Aor.

etrtra.

Mid. ieacraTO, Perf. Mid.

3 Sing, coro, Act.
eeo-ro,

ci/xoi, eira-at,

Part, eipevos, 2 Sing. Plup.

6.

co-o-o,

3 PI. eiaro.
satiated

Aor. Mid. Kopea-a-aro, Part. Perf.

KCKoprjpMi.

K<oprj&is,

Mid.

13. ?|a with ?a|a [Her. Perf. ?.)ya].

Digitized

by Microsoft

188
14.

SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN

SeUvvfii,
see 318.

fll.

31

15. e1.pyvvjx.i

(Stem elpy),

J sAi m (addit.

form eipym)

elp^a Part, ep^as clpyp.ai

16. ^fvyvvp.1,

(Stem fuy),

Hind
UC^^X^"!
KT-tiVw (

cfet'la

elevyiiai

17. KTlvvvp.1
18. filyvvfii.

(Stem (Stem

ktej/),
p-ty),

i MZ, with

253)

i mix, with piaya

( 327, 7)

epi^a
19.

pepuypai

'

epiyr]v

(Stem oiy), 7 opera (with oiym) oi'lfi) EipX" ^od emya ( 279) eaypai eto^a ( 237) (Stem oX and oXe), for oXw/it, 20. oWvpi oXeiXeKa ( 275, 1) oXS ( 262)

olyvvpi

iwj(6']v

I destroy

oiXfa'a

Fut.Mid.3Xoi;;.a
<OAopT)V

""^'-'^"lintrans.
^

J perish

21.

opuvpi
apoa-a

(Stem

o/i,

ofio),

I swear

opovpai (Act.) g
gjj^^_ pgj.j_ ' '

oipotrdn" oiiapoKa ( 275, 1) j^^^jopaporm Verb. Adj. (dv)ii/ioTo

*
'

opatpoarai

22.

opopyvvpi (Stem opopy), I wipe

out
a)p6p)(Briv

&pop^a (Mid.) 23. TTTiyvvpi (Stem Tray),

'ii7T)^a

J/x

[comp. liStUpangd]
f
'

TreVpjya

(J am fixed)

e'ni]x6r]v

Trayr)v

(Stem pay), Jiear eppj)|a (Mid.) eppaiya (T am torn) ippayrjv payr\aopai ( 278) 25. (TTopuvpi (Stem a-rop), with a-ropivvvpi (8) and cn-pav
24.
vvpi.

prjyvvpi

(11

26. <j)pdyvvpi

(Stem

(j>pay), also (fidpympt,

and

aoc. to
in, lock
ii

Class 4, a,
Dialects.

(f>pa<T<ra,

I shut

15.

Impf. eepyj/u with eVpym

(

fpxarat, Plup. 'dpxaro

[epy<a], 3 Plur. Perf. Mid 287) Part. Perf. UpypAvoi, Aor. Pass

ipx6eis, with Impf. epyadov.

19. oSi^a,

18. Aor. Mid., 316, 37. aa [avoi^a], Imperf. mtyyuj/ro.

20. oXeVo-o) [oXcm], Part. Aor. oiXopcvos (destructive), with oXexa 21. apLoo-aa or Spotraa,

To

these also belong

27. a'lmpai, dnoaivvpai, 1 take

Digitized

away, used only in the Pres.

by Microsoft


320.
Ohs.

IKREGULAE VERBS.

189
ij

Nouns

the

are formed from the Pure Vertal-Stems, as announcement ; 6 Kpd-Trjp, the mixing howl ; to
for hcr-jia
;

bd^i-s,
the

el-jia,

clothing

Co-vrj, the girdle

ftiy-o-v, the

fj

pa-jir), the

strength

TO arpa-iia, the carpet; to

frost.

ruin ; 6 mv-inji&Trfs, the conspirator ; 6

irdy-o-s, the frost,

yoke; 6 Skc-dpo-s, the hoar-

Chap. XII.

Ieeegulak Verbs op the First

Principal Conjugation.

320.

The

irregularities of tlie

Greek Verb

chiefly

consist in the Present-Stem differing from the Verbal-

from that which has been To the four classes there enumerated the following four classes are to be added.
different

Stem, in a way

pointed out above,

245, &c.

Obs.

In these as well as in the following lists, the principal forms only are given from which the rest are easily formed.

Dialects.
rjvvTo.

28.

amfu (and

avva),

complete, only Imperf.

Mid.

29. apvvfuii,
.ijpao,

acguire, Aor.

i]p6p,rjv.

Inf. dpia-dai,

1 Aor. 2 Sing.

3 Bing.
1),

rjpaTO.

30. axvvfiat,

grieve, Aor. aicaxovTo ( 257, D.), Perf. aRaxqiiai

aKrix'^barai ( 287, D.),

< 275,

3 Plur.

Part. aKaxTjuevos
31. ydwp,ai,

and

dKrjx^p^vos.

3 Plur. Plup. aKaxeiaro, Moreover the Active aKaxiCo

<(/ grieve), Aor. rJKaxov

and

a.Ka.xr]<ra

(comp. 326).

32. Plur. Saivvar, Fut. daia-a (Mid.), Aor. cSaia-a (Mid.) 33. Kaim/iai (Stem Kab), I surpass, Perf. KeKacrfiai

I rejoice. Put. yam<r<TTai. h<uvvp.t, I entertain. Opt. Pres. Mid. 3 Sing. Smvvto ( 318, D.),
(J

am

dis-

iinguished).
34. Klwfiai,

move, additional form of Ktvia, Preterite

Opt. Ki-oi-fu, Part. Ki-av.
additional form of TiVm, 321, D. 5.

e-ia-o-i/

went, Suhj.
35.

ki'-g>,

Ttvup.1., Tlvvp-ai,

36. opiyvvp-i, additional form of opiya,

I stretch

out, 3 PI. Perf.

Mid. opapexarai ( 287). 37. '6pvvp.i. (Stem op), I excite, Fut. opa-a, Aor. apopov ( 257, D.), Perf. opapa ( 275, 1), I have arisen [Lat. or-ior'], Aor. Mid. 3 Sing, SipTo, arose ( 316, 38), Perf. Mid. 3 Sing. Ind. opap-e-rai, Subj. ipaiprjTai,, with Imperf. Mid. opeovTO. 38. Tavvfjuu with Tavia, relva, I extena, stretch,. Digitized by Microsoft

190

FIFTH OK NASAL CLASS,

321,

(Mid.) added to a tense denotes that in addition to the Active^

the corresponding Middle form
is also

in use,

e.

g. in addition

to eno-a (No. 5), eTiaajirjv also is used.

Fifth or Nasal Class.

321.

The Verbal-Stem

is

strengthened

by

the

addition of k or of a syllable containing v to form the

Present-Stem.
a) V

alone, often
is

vowel,

united with lengthening of the added to the following Stems

:

1. Stem ^a, Pres. ^alva, I go Put. Aor. Act.

?-/37,-v
?/37)-(7a

Perf.
jSe'/S)?

Pass.

( 316, 1)

)3^<7o/iaj

( 317, 1)

2.
^-XS-o-a

Stem i\a,

i3>5<r<-(329,2) drive Pres. i'Kavvai,

Verb. Adj. ^aro'y

eXS ( 263)

iki)KaKa ( 275, 1) ijK&Brtv ikrjXa^ai Verb Adj. eXareos

3.

Stem

05 a,

Pres. <j>6ava,
i^Brja-ofmi

I anticipate
'i(p6a.Ka

(e-05?)-!'

(316, 7)
ffi,

ie-<pda-(ra

4.

Stem

Pres.

niva,

I drink

(additional

Stem

iro)

comp.

327, 10
e-TTL-o-v (

316, 15)
Tt,

moiiat ( 265)

5.

Stem

Pres. rtvai,
riVo)

I pay

penalty
TcVrita
Teria-fiai
ir'uTBrjV

-Ti-cra

(Mid.)

6.

Steal

(j>

6 1, Pres. cjidtv a,
Pres.

I perish, waste away

<^6niai

e-<j)6t,~a-a

<^6io-oiiai

i^6i6riv

7.

Stem

8 V,

hiva (with bia

Svcru)

G\. V),

I immerge
iSiOriv

-8v-v ( 316, 16)

i'SHcra,

SeSvKa

I dipped
Stem Sat,
Pres. 8aKva>,
Sijlofiai

8.

I bite
Be'Srjxa

i-&aK-o-v

&rix6r]V

321. Dialects. 1. Aor.

2. Pres.
TJKa<Tajir]V.

Mid.

i^f,a-To,

268, D.
'

eXao),

Put.

eXo'to,

eXaas, 243, D., Aor. eXao-(ra, Mid.

3. 5. 6.

3. Plup. Mid. ikrfKdbaTO (287, D.) [^Xao-^i/i/]. Bp. ^ddva. Part. Aor. Mid. <p6dfj.evos. Ep. TrwiB with Ti-<B and Tivvfii, 319, D. 35. Bp. (jidivm, <f)6ia, Aor. eipdifiriv, i(j>etTO, 316, D. 26

with

Pres. (pdivvBa.
7.

Aor. Mid.

f'Suo-ero,

268, D. [Pres. eVSuyeco,

I put

on.

Compi

323].

Digitized

by Microsoft

322.

FIFTH OE NASAL CLASS.

Stem
Stem
Kofi,

191

9.

Tree. Kajxpa,
Kafuivjuu

I weary
KeKjj-rjKa

e-KUfi-o-v

( 282)

10.

Tffi,

Pres. refivo,
Tefiai

I cut
TeTfiqKa (

c-refi-o-v (fTCLjiov)

282)

iTiiTjBrjV

322. 5)

The

syllable

aK

is

added to the following

Stems
11.

Stem

al(rd, Pres, aio-fl-av-o-fiat,

ai(r6-rj-(roji,ai

I perceive
sin
^iiapTrj-dr]V

^a9-6-fir]v

rjaO-rj-iiai

12.

Stem djiapr, Stem a i^,

Pres. cLjiapr-av-to,
&iiapT-rj-(TOji,ai

I err,

tjfiafyr-o-v

rjfidpT-rj-Ka

13.

Pres.

av ^ - dv- lo ani av^a, linorease

av^ija-a
ai^Tjcroiiai

[aug-ed]
Tiv^fi6riv

iji!|-ij-(ra

ijv^rjKa

(Passive)
1/0),

14. 15.

Stem

j3X a o-T, Pres. /3X a 0-7 a

Tres.

7 5m(Z
c^XdaTrjKa ( 274 exc.)
deSdpBriKa

e-jSXao-T-o-y

/SXacrr-^-tria

Stem 8ap5,

Sap 6 dv a, I sleep
Sap6-r\-crojxai

e-8ap6-o-v
16. Steme'x^,
{drT)r]-)(6-6-p,rjV

Viea.{aTr)exddvop,ai,
(&n)ex6-r]-(T0jUU

lamhated
(diryfixStjiuu

17. 18.

Stem (f, Stem <ix,

Pres. tfaffl
Pres.

and

tjio,

I seat myself

Kixava, I meet (oomp.

Kix-Tt-TOfiai

313 D. 6)

i-Ki^-o-v

19.
20. 21.

StemoiS,

Pres.

olbdva and olhea, I swell

olBr]-(ra}

adtjKa

Stem o\ier5,

Pres.

oXca-ddva,
6\itTd-7j-crQ>

I slip

StkitrBo-v

Stem

oaffip, Pres. 6<r(j>paivopai,,

o<T<j)p-ri-(Top.ai,

I smell
and
6(f>eiKa,

u>(T<j>p-6-p,r]v

22.

Stem o0X,

Pres. oipX-io-K-dv-a (comp. 324)

I owe

Dialects.

9. Part. Perf. /cfKfiijms,

Gen.

KeKji-qaTos.

Aor. Pass. 3 Plur. iTfuiyev, with Pres. Tifiei. Peculiar to the Horn, dialect are Aor. t^d-eiy) ,Uluxit, Put. 7re-<^^ a-ofioi, from Stem ipa, Pres. ^aiVfii ((jyaeiva), I shine, shew, Aor.
Tfiriyo),
:

10. with

Pass.

(j]adv6r]U.

322. Dialects.

12. Aor. ijfi^poTov for fjppaTov ( 257, D., comp.

51, D.). 18. a(Of|<B.

15. Aor. eSpadov ( 257, D.). 18. Bp. Kixivo). 21. [Herod, oadipdiffiv,! Aor.] '^'^ Digitized birMicrosoft

192
23.
24.

FIFTH OB NASAL CLASS.

Stem dS, Stem 6iy, Stem Xaft
Vres. dvSdvco,
Pres.

322,

I please Siyydva, Itcmch

f-Bty-o-v

Si^ofiai

25.

Pres. Xa/ji^dva,
X^i/fo/iai

I take
eiXi)0a ( 274)
elXrjfiiiai
i\rj(j)6riv

-Xaj3-o->

(seldom XcXij^/xat)

26.

StemXa^,

Pres.

Xavfla via,
X^o"Q>
\ritjofiai,

Jam Ai(Mera, with X^5a> (CI. 3), Mid. Iforget.

\e\rjda
XeXrjo-fiai

-\d6-o-u

Mid.
27.

eXadofLTjv

Stem Xa;(,

Pres. Xa'y;;(dj/a),
Xfi^o/iai

I attain
fiXijp^a

i'-Xd^-o-v

( 274)

fiXi^y/xat

28.
29.

Stem

/xafl, Pres.

fiavdava,

I learn
fifiddi]Ka

^~fid6-o-v

fiad-rj-ao^at

Stem nild,

Pres. nvv6dvojj.ai,
vficrofiai

I learn, with
mirvafiai

7reu5o/iaj, CI.

i-irvB-o-fiTjv

30.

Stem

ri/Xi

^''^^s.

CI. 2, f-Tup^-o-v 31.

Ti^yx"""*! I ^eet, with t^vx^, Tcv^ojuu Te-rOx-1-^ seldom rcrevxa

I prepare,

05s. 1.

Stem (^uy, Pres. ipvyydva, Iflee, with (j)evyoj (01. 2). The verhs in 23 31, whose Stem forms a short syllable,

a v. In ^alva (1) has crept in (<5 253), as well as in KepSaiva, I gain, which forms only the Perf. kckepStjko from the Stem KepSa; all the other forms are regular according to Class 4. A large part of the verhs (No. 11-^16, 1822, 28 and 30) form either some or all the tenses, except those of the Present-Stem, from a Stem in e (comp. helow, 326).

insert another nasal in addition to the affix

and

oa-cppaivoiMi (21)

Ohs. 2.

The following may serve

:

as examples of the formation of

the consumption ; 6 /cii/tassumption; ^ X^6-ij, the

nouns

to

Prj-fia, the step ;

fj

(fiBi-a-t-s,
tJie

uTo-s, the

exhaustion; to X^;x-/ia,

Dialects. 23. Imperf. 237, D., Aor. [caSoc] evaSov ( 237),

faS))0"Q)] eada.

25. [Her. Fut. Xd^\(Ao/iai, Perf. \eXd^j]Ka, Aor. Pass. iXafujieriv.

Hom.

XcXafi/xat, Verb. Adj. XafMirds.] Aor. Mid. XeKafiiadat ( 257, D.). 26. Pres. with (KkriSdva, cause to forget, Aor. cXtjo-o and XeXdfloK

Inf.

( 257, D.), \(\ad6ij.r,v (Iforgot), Perf Mid. XeXacr/xae. 27. Aor. XeXaxov, I shared with [Fut. Xd^o/iaj], Perf. XcXoy^a. 29. Aor. Opt. Tren-ufioiTO ( 257, D.). 30. Also Tevx<o, Aor. reruKfiv, Mid. TfTUKOvro, Perf rirvyiuu, 3 Plur. TfreiJ^arai, Aor. iTvx6r)v, with the Pres. Ti.TV<TKOjmi ( 324 D. 37) I aim at, Aor. erivria-a, I met (S 326\ ^ Digitized by Microsoft

3'24.

SIXTH CLASS OK INCHOATIVE VEEBS.

fj

193

forgetting;

tvx-j],

the

chance, accident,
c
:

and

from Stems
to

which

are lengthened

hy

ij

aM-rj-ai-s, the sensation ;

&IMpT-r]-iia, the error ; 6 iiad-rj^fj-s, the scholar.

323.

c)

The

syllable ye

is

added to the following

Stems
32. 33.

Stem Stem

jSv,

Pres. fivva,
^iJo-o)

I stop wp
Mid.
/3e/3uo-/iai

-/3u-o-a
IK,

Pres. Jxyovfiai,

come, with IfAva, according

to

322

iK-6-\a\v

t^ofiai

lyiiai

34.

Stem kv,

Pres.

Kwia, I hiss

-Kv~(ra

f-TTGcr-o-u (for e-7rer-o-j'} together

Ifall (comp. ttiVto) J 327, 15). with e-niTP-o-v SQ. Stem. viTex,7xes.ijri(rx''ovfiat, I promise (comp. ex''>
35.

Stem

ttet,

Pres. iriTvea,

327, 6)
iTretrxof"/"
VTroa-x'IO'OfUU
iijreVx'yf""

SO likewise aiima-xvovfiai
Inf. d/nTno-x"".

I wear

(also diiTrixoi^ai), Aor. rjiinia-xov

324.

^SiasiA

Ctes

or Inchoative Verbs.

The Verbal-Stem is enlarged by affixing o-k to form the Present-Stem. This o-k is added to Vowel-Stems (exc. 21) at once, but to Consonant-Stems after the Several of the insertion of the connecting vowel i. verbs belonging to this class (Nos. 2, 6, 7, 13, 14, 16, 20) further strengthen the Present-Stem by means of ryi-ryvoo-crK-o) [Lat. a reduplication with the vowel t
:

(g)^w-sc-o].

323. Dialects. 32. [Herod, ^ivco]. 33. "tKa, Aor. I^ov ( 268 D.), Part. 'Ujievos, favourable ( 316 D). 34. Kvcro'a. Moreover, (to a c) the Verbs 37. Stem dX IT, Pres. aKiTalvm, I sin, Aoi. ^"Xiroy, Mid. dXiVoj/ro,

Part. Perf. dXiTij/ievoj, sinful. 38. Stem dX^, Pres. aXtpdva, 1 acquire, Aor. ^Xi^ov.

39. ayivea, only in Pres.,

40. ipvyyava,

I lead, with

aya.

I roar,

41.

Stem

x-^j

Aor. ijpvyov, Pres. also epcvyofiai. Pres. p^aySdyo), / embrace, Aor. e^aSov, Fut.

X^ia-oiJMi, Perf. KexavlBngitized

by Microsoft

194

SIXTH CLASS OE INCHOATIVE VERBS.

of

324,.

As many
coming
into

these verbs denote a

all

beginning

or

being,

of

them are usually

called

Inchoatives.

Stems
1.

m a.
ye-yT]pa~tca

Stem yripa,

Pres.

y.tj

p a-

a-

k- u>, 1 grow old (seldom yripd-aj comp. sene-sc-o

i-yT]pd~<ra

yrjpd-o'Ofiat.

Inf. yrjpd-vm ( 316, 2.

2)

Stem Spa,

Pres.

Si-Spd-a-K-^ I run (used only

Spd-CTO/iai

in

com-

pounds)
'd-bpa-v
3.

Stem

^ /3 a,

Pres. ^/Sd-o-x-s),

Se-SpS-KcC ( 316, 3) become marrmgedble (comp.

puhe-se-o)

rj^rj-a-a

4.

Stem 6va (from 6av),

Pres. Bvrj-a-K-a,

I die,

(usually
dirodvria-Ka^

f-Sdv-ov

6dv-ov)iai

ri-GvYj-Ka ( 317, 3)

Put. 3, reevrj^a 291

5.

fivij-TO-t

{mortaiy

Stem tXa,
iXa-trd-^iji;

Pres, l^d-tTK-ofiai,
tXa-cr-o-jnai

conciliate
iKd-irBTj-v

Mid.
6.

Stem/iva,

Ties. ni-nvrj-o-K-ai,
fiVTj-<Ta

I remember
i-fivrf-a-Btf-v
fi.vrj-iTdjia'Oiiai

e-fLvrj-a-a

fi,i-p,vq-jxai

[memini]
7.

(for the

Stemirpa, Pres. Trt-Trpd-o-K-o), JseZZ Aor. and Put. anMfiriv, wi-irpd-Ka

aTroSmroiiai) Tre-jrpa-^at
ire-Trpd-a-Qfiai

i-wpd-drjv
Trpa-BTjiTOjia;

8. 9.

Stem (j)a, Pres. <j>d-a-K-a), I say, comp. (jirj-ni, 312^,5 Stem xa and x^v, Pres. xa-o-K-a, I open the month
^^av-oO/xat

f-X^v-ov

Ki-xr}V-a

Stem in
10.
ijpe-tra

e.

Stem ape,

Pres. dpl-a-K-m,

I please
rjpe-a-fftjv.

api-am

Stems in m,
11.

Stem^jm, FieB.(ava)Pia-(rK-oiiai, Irevive

{dv)e-fi'm-v ( 316, 13)

324.
12.

SIXTH CLASS OK INCHOATIVE VERBS.

Stem

195

p\a

(from

fioX, 51, D.), Pres.

^Xib-a-K-a, Igo

e-fMik-ov

fioX'OVfiai

13. StemjSpco, Tvea.

^L-^pa-a-K-a, I consume
Be-^pa-Ka (Part, ^e^pas, 317,

D. 16)
^e-fipa-fuu
14.

Stem )/(,

Pres. yi-yva-a-K-ai,

I recognise [Lat.

(jr)jio-sc-o]

E-yj/to-j/

( 316j 14) yva-a-ofiai

Pres.

e-yva-Ka
-yvQ) -<r-fiai

i-yv&-cr6i]v

15.

Stem dpai (from 6op),

Bpa-o-K-a, I hap

t-6op-ov 16.

Stem

Tpo), Pres. Ti-Tpa-aK-a,

I wound
Tc-Tpto-fiac
i-rpa}-6rjP

e-rpa-cra

rpm-cra
dXa>-iro/xat

17.
(

Stem &\ and

&Xa>, Pres. dX-i'-o-K-o/iai,

/am

to^e

c-aXto-j'

t-aXco-fca or rjkai-Ka

Ip^av ( 316, 12)

18.

(comp. 237)

Stem

dp.jB'K

and dp,^Xa>, Pres. ap.^X-i-o'K-a,

TJfijSXa-Ka

I miscarry

TJp,^\c^(Ta

19.

Stem dva\ and dvaXu,

also r]vd\a-cra

Pres.
i

dvdX-i-aK-a, I expend
I

dvoKa-ira or df^Xoxra dvaka-a-a

dvaXa-Ka

dvdXa>-6r]v

Idvrjkai-Ka

\dvTJXa>-6riv.

Stem
20.

in

i.

Stem

tti,

Pres. m-Tvt-a-K-a,
TTi-aio

give to drink, comp. m-v-a>

321,

c-7rt-(7a

Stems in
21.

v.

22.

Stem Kv, Pres. kv-l-o-k-co, Ifructify Stem /xeflu, Pres. /jieBi-a-K-a, I make dnmh, Mid. 7 lecome drunk
c-fie5u-(rAji'^

e-fieBv-aa

23.

Stem d^TrXax,

Pres. diiirXaK-i-a-K-a, Ifail

ajm\aK-ri-a-at

rj/iirXaK-ov

24.

Stem (Jv^aip,

Pres. (JiT)avp-l-(rK-oiiai,

I enjoy

iirrpip-oiiriv

Inf. eTravp-eirBai

324. Dialects. 12. Perf. iii-p.-^-'Ka-Ka (comp. 282, D).

51,

D. and

13. Aor. -Ppa-v ( 316, D. 23), with the Pres. /Se/SpAfl*). 15. 3. Plur. Put. Bopeovrai [with 66p-m-pM, according to 319].
16. "With rpa-a.

19G
25.

SIXTH CLASS '^OE INCHOATIVE VEEBS.

Stem eip,
Pres. evp-'i-a-K-o),
evp-fj-a-a

324,

I find
evp-rj-K-a

eup-ov (Mid.)
26.

clp-e-Brfv
evp-e-6f]-iT0jiai

vp-r]-pai

Stem o-rep,

Pres. orc-p-i-o-K-cB,

/ deprive (with
(rripoiiai,

o-rcpS,

Mid.
i-a-Tcp-rj-a-a

I am

deprived)

tTTep-rj-ira

i-a-Tep-rj-Ka

i-arep-rj-Bi^v

e-CTep-rj-iiaL

27. rfkv^a 28.

Stem aXux,

Pres. dXv-o-K-oJ,

I shun

dXv^co

Stem SiSax,

Pres.

StSa-a-K-a,

I teach,
i-8i-8dx6riv

-8i8a|a 29.

fiiSa^o)

fie-8iSa;(-a

Se-6iSay/xat

Stem Xok,

Pres. Xq-o-k-ib,
\aK-r]-(rop.aL

I utter,
j

speak

e-\aK-ov
-\dK-7]-(Ta

Xe-Xi)K-a

IXe-XoK-a.

05s. 1.

The last three Stems suppress a Guttural before o-k. Several of the Stems quoted form a part of the tenses by afiix6

ing

to the

Stem (comp.

322, Ohs.,

and

326), especially

Nos. 23, 25, 26, 29.

06s. 2.

The
:

following

may

serve as examples of the formation

;

of nouns

6 6dv-a-To-s, death
tj

to

fivTj-fielo-v,

the

memorial
rj

6 auT(5-fioX-o-s, the deserter; the

yv^-pjrj, the

opinion;

aXa-ci-s,

capture;
;
fj

teacher

(from the Present-Stem), the 8180^-^ (from the Verbal-Stem), the instruction, and
6

Sidda-K-ako-s

from Stems which are enlarged by

17

to evp-rj-fm, the discovery;

a-Tep-tj-a-i-s, the

deprivation.

Dialects.

26.

Aor.

a-repecrai, Part. Pass.

Aor. cmpe'is.

28. [8iSacrK^o-ai] a secondary

( 326, D. 40).

Stem
Fem.

is

6 a, Aor. bebaov,

1 taught

And
30.

29. Ion. form \r)K.la ( 325), the Special Verbs :

Part. Perf. \dka.K.via.

Stem oKha, Pres.

great.

aX8ij(rK<,

become great, Aor. fjXSavov, I

made
31. 32.

33.

Stem kXc, Pres. kikKtio-koi, with KoKea, I call. Stem <pav, Pres. [<pav-a-K-a>] wt-cpai-a-K-a, I slww. Stem diracj) (from dcj>), Pres. dTr-a(f>-i-<rK-a>, I deceive, Aor.
Subj. dird^oi.
Pres. dp-ap-i-om-a),

ri77a<^ov,

34.
upr]pa,

Stem dp,

I fit,

Aor. ^papov,

I fitted, Perf.
suitable,

"Weak
35.

Part, dpdpma. Part. Mid. apfievos, Aor. fjpaa, I fitted, Aor. Pass. SpSrjv.
suit,

Fem.

Stem

Ik, Pres. i-t-o-K-a>,

ia-K(i/),

I make

equal, (comp. 317,

7).

36. Impf.

he spoke.

37.

Stem tvy (comp.

agiUzed by Microsoft

322, 30), Pres. nrvaKouai, '^

I aim

at.

325.

SEVENTH OE
325.

E-CLASS.

197

Seventh or JE-dass.

A short Stem alternates witli one enlarged by e. A) The enlarged Stem in e is the Present-Stem, the
shorter serves to form the other tenses.
1.

Stem

yafi, Pres. yaij.i-<o,Imarry(^Act.uxoreinduco,M.id.nubo)

yaji-Si

t-yqfi-a

(Mid.)

ye-ya/i-Tj-xa
ye-ya)LA-7^-/Aat

2.

Stem

yri8, Pres. yrjBi-a,

I rejoice
y-yr;d-a,

am

rejoiced

3.

Stem 8 OK,
Stem Kvp,

Pres. ho<e-at,

I seem
SeSoy-fiai

i'-So^a
4.

Pres.

8d|a) Mid. Kvpi-a, and Kvpa,

I meet

e-Kvp-fra
5.

Kvpato
Pres.

6.

paprvpe-co, 1 am witness Mid. papT^popai, I call to witness Stem vp, Vres. ^vps a, I shave Mid. ^vpopai

Stem /tapTvp,

i-^vp-aprjv
7.

e^ip-rj-pai.

Stem Stem

iraT, Pres. iraTi-op.ai,

I eat
weiracrpai,

e-7ra(rdprjv

8.

(5t(^,

Pres. pnrT-e-ta,

and

ptrrT-a (according to 249),

I throw
cppi^a
9.

pi^a
Q>6, Pres.

ppL(j)a

jippi<jitjv
I

eppippai

ppi<j)6r]v

Stem

ade-a,

I push
Mid.)
e-ai(T-pai i-axrOriv

-acra ( 237)

acrai (a>6fi(Ta

325. Dialects. 1 Put. yap-ea, 3 she will marry.

3. [SoK^cfio, eSo/CT^o'aJ.

Sing. Put. Mid. yapea-o-erai.,

8.

3 Sing. Plup. Mid. ipipmro. Besides

o) Stem
ycyai'^o-a).

yeyau,

Pres.

yeymve-m, I

call,

Perf.

yeyava, Put.

b)

Stem 8ar,

Pres. hari-opm,
Pres. bovni-a,

distribute, Put. Sda-opai, Aor.

ddo'O'aTo, Perf. beSaa-TCu.

c)

Stem Soujr,

I make

a sound, Aor. i{y)hovm)-(Ta,

Perf. Se-Sovjr-a.
<i) Stem eiX, e\, Pres. fi-Xe-o), I press, Impf. ietKeou ( 237), Aor. 3 Plur. eXo-av, Perf. Mid. eeXpat, Aor. Pass. edXiji' (295), 3 Plur. oXey, Inf. oKripevai.

e) Stem KeXaS, Pres, KeXaSe-m, I resownd. Part. KEXaS-av. /) Stem KeiT, Pres. Kevri-o, I sting, Aor. Inf Kev-aai.

Digitized

by Microsoft


198
Obs.

SEVENTH OK E-CLASS.

M6.

In some verts the Stem with

Examples wedding ; tj So^a,
t)

extends even further than

the Present-Stem.
6 ydfi-o-s, the
the testvmony
;

of the
the

formation of nouns: appearance ; to fiapTvp-UMi,

Z>-ai-s or adrj-ms,

pushing.

326. B)

The
e
1

shorter

Stem

is

the Present-Stem, the

enlarged one in
10.
11.

serves to form the other tenses.

Stem a 6(f), Pres. aiS-ofiai ani alSe-oum, I am ashamed Stem dXe|(c), Pres. d\ci-a, I ward off
aKi^-r)-(TOft,ai,

rj\e^at>.r]v

12.

Stem ax6{e),

Pres. axB-ojiai,

I am

vexed
TjxSe-aBrjv
a-)(de-a6i]tT0juu

d^Be-aoiuu
13.

Stem

^o(ric(c), Pres. jioa-K-a,

;

I pasture

from the Stem ^o the Verb. Adj. /So-rdy jioa-KTi-a-a Stem /3ouX(e), Pres. jSouX-o/xai, 2 will (Augment 234) /3E-^ouX7j-/xai )3ovX^-o-ofiat i-^ovXfj-drjV 15. Stem Se(e), Pres. Se-m, I need (8ei, it is necessary), Mid.
14.
Sfo/iai,
f-Serj-ara

I require
328, 2)

Sfrj-a-a

Se-Serj-Ka

i-her)-6r)V (

16.
17.

Stem

ep(e), Pres. not usual ( 327, 13)

iprj-a-opai, Inf.

T]p-6fiT)t/,

I ashed

epeadai

Stem lpp(y),

Pres. epp-a,

1 go away
rjppr)-Ka

^ppjj-cra

epprj-a-a

Dialects. g) Stem ktvtt, Pres. Krviri-a>, I ring, Aor. h) Pres. nU^o) and tne^i-a, I press, Aor. itrietra.
i)

eicr"iT-ov.

Stem piy, Pres. piyc-a>, I shudder, Perf. eppXya. V) Stem a-Tvy, Pres. a-ruye-a, I hate, shun, Aor. etrrvyov and
tTTvyrjirm, etrrv^a,
I)

I made

dreadful,

Stem 0iX,

Pres. cjiiXea,

Hove, Aor.

6-0rX-a-/ii)j/.

m)

Pres. xpo'c/^f <, ^ ^e?P, Aor. expaurp-ov. Three Verbs in am with a moveable a are here to be noticed n) Stem yo, Pres. you-m, I wail, Impf. c-yo-o!'.

o)

Stem

/la/c,

Pres.

pr)K6.-o-pai,

I
1

low,

Perf. fU-p.riK-a,

Aor.

?-;iaK-oi'.

^) Stem
f/ilJK-OV.

/iuK,

Pres.

iwKa-o-p/u,

roar, Perf.

iiifivn-a,

Aor.

10. ^Utraro, Imperat. mSeo-o-ai, Fut. albl-a-opm, 326. Dialects. Aor. Pass. 3 Plur. aiSeo-^eK. 11. oKdkKov ( 257). 14. Pres. /SoXcToi, Impf. i^okovro, Perf. ^ifiovXa. 15. Aor. iSeir]a-a, once 8^<ra, J was waref o/j also Pres. Siiopju. 16. Pres. 6pojua, Fut. eLp7)(Top.ai,

Digitized

by Microsoft

^326.
18.

SEVENTH OR E-CLASS.
Stem evS(e),

199

Augm.

Pres. evSa, I sleep (geneially KoBeiSa) 240 (Kaff)evS^-(ria 19. Stem E^(e), Preg. \jf-a), 1 coqh

Verb. Adj. i^dos

20. 21.

Stem 0f\(e), or e5eX(e),

(i^dekfj-vco
e'S,

Pres. 6eX-a, or eflcX-o,

rjdcXij-Ka

will

i)6Kq-iTa

Stem f(Oj Pure Stem

Pres. ifo/iai,

I seat

also i^avo), Class 5,

iKaBurafirjv (

myself comp. i^ofiai

240) Ka6i^ri<roiuu and KaBeSov/iai ( 263)

Pres. (c\ai'<o (icXao)),

22.

Stem kXov and kXoic,

KKairjrTa

I weep,

comp.

253
^xKav-iTa
23.

with

ickaviTOjim

Stem iiaxC^X

Pres. /idxoiiat,

IfigM
fo

i-jiaxe-(rajir)V

263) /ie-fidxTj-iJiat 24. Stem /ieX(e), Pres. jueXet /ioi, ii is a care

irnxov/iai, (

me. Mid.
e-fi.ekr)-6r]v

liiKoiuu,
e-jiA\r)-(re

I cwrefcr,

take care oj

iieX^-a-ec

jj^-fuX-q-Ke

(7rt)fie\rjaofmt

25.

Stem

/ieXX(e), Pres. /ieXX-m,

jueXXi^-a"(a

1 am on

the point, hesitate

i]-IJ,e\\r]-(ra

( 234, 06s.)

26.

Stem

fiev^e), Pres. jiiv-a,

I remain I sueh I assign

[mane-o, man-si], Verb.

Adj.
f-fieiva
fiev-Si

fiev-e-To's

jie-fievrj-Ka

27.

Stem

j[ii;f(),

Pres. iivCa,

-fivCri-(ra

fxv^-lj-a-o

28. 29.
ti^rj-a-a

Stem Stem
Stem Stem

i/e/i(f), Pres. veji-a,

ve/i-S)

f-Vfi/ia

vf-vefiTj-Ka,

(Mid.)

e-ve/jLrjrdriv

of(e),

Pure Stem 6S, Pres. of-o,

ofij-o-m

I smell
0(Z-or]

30.
31.

oi(e), Pres. oi-ofiai,

olrj-tTOjuii

oS-(o8-a ( 275, D.) [Lat. think (comp. 244)

ajj-;6r]V

olxi^)! Vxei. oi;(-o;uaj,

olx^-O'Ojxai,

I am

off

ot;(-(U/c-a

Dialects,

19. [Imperf.

e'^ee.']
iiaxf](rofi.ai

23. fiaxc-ofiai. Part, /laxeiofievos or fiax^ovficvos, Fut.

and

iiax^a-ojuu,
fiffi,r]\fi,

24. Perf. lUiirjKe, Plup.

-ro), 51,

Perf. Mid. /le-ju-^-Xe-rat

(PIup

D.

26. Perf. /ie/iova, 31. Perf. oixi/fa

am disposed,

strive.

30. Pres. ot-ojiai, ot-a, Aor. Mid. otaaro, Aor. Pass, atadrjv.

(fiixW^' mUh tbe

Pres. otx-ve-a), according to

323.
Digitized

by Microsoft

200

SEVENTH OB E-CLASS.
275] for
olx-a>X''^>

32S.

(oi^-uwc-oj witli in-eg. Eeduplication [

comp.

35, a) 32.

Stem oiEiX(e), Pure Stem

dcj)e\, Pres.

64>ei\a>, 1 owe( 253, Obs.y

ai(j)cK-ov [titinaTn] ocjxiXrj-cra)

oi^eiXij-Ka

33.

Stem
Stem

7rep6(f), Pres.

irepSm
7re-7rop5-a

-7rapd-ov

napbrj-a-o^t

34.

7r(e)T(e), Pres. iveT-oji.ai,

1 fly

( 61 c) 35. Stem pv(e), Pres. peca,

i/ow

( 248)
ippvjj-Ka
ippirfv

ppcv-cra (rare, 200, 2) pvr]-tTOjxaL

(with
36.

peiKrofiai)

Stem

a-

rt 13(e), Pres. a-T^ip-a,

I tread

37.

~TV7r~ov

Pure Stem rinr ( 249), Pres. Tvirra, I strike e-TV7r-rjv Mid. re-rujit-^at 38. Stem x"'pf) P^i'e Stem ;(ap, Pres. xa'P<"> -^"i'^'c^ (258)

Stem

rvn-i-e.

TV7rT7j-aa>,

Xaipr}-<Ta>

Ke-xapr]-Ka
Ke-xaprj-fiaL

i-xip-rjv

Ohs.

The e sometimes appears in all the tenses except the Present, sometimes only in some of them sometimes it is added to the pure, sometimes to the strengthened Stem: jxcv-e, trTi|8-e, The formation of nouns shows the same iff, off, TVTTTe.
;

varieties

al8fj-piov,

shame-faced ;

rj

^oiXrj-a-i-s,

voluntas ;.

Dialects.

38.

Part. Perf. KfxapT/mr, Fut. Kexapfja-o, Aor. ixvparo,,

257, I).

and 3 Plur. Kexapovro,

Besides
39.

40.

Stem d\d(e), Pres. akd-op.cu, Ilecome well, Fut. aKSfj-iropai. Stem da, Aor. SeSaoi/ ( 257, D.), I taught, Aor. Mid. InL
iba.T)v

SeSaaa-dai (to get to TcnovS), Aor. Pass.

(1 learned'), besides

Fut.
41.
KJjS-a

8ar](ropat, Perf. SeSdtjKa, Part. Perf. Sefiams.

J)

Stem K 8(e), Pres. K-qB-a, I grieve, Fut. KrjSrj-a-a), Perf. ke(I am concerned), Fut. KeKaSTja-opju. 42. Stem /iffi(E), Pres. ^e'S-m, I ruZc, Mid. J reflect, Fut.

iifS^-0"0jLta(.

43.

Stem nid, Stem

Pres. neida,

I persuade,
and

Fut. also

mflijo-a, Part.

Aor.

TTidrjcras,

44.
45.

T.op(f), Aor. '4-Top-ov

e-Topri-cra,

lored through,

Fut. TfTop^-cro).

Stem

<^tS, Pres.

0fiSofioi,

spo9-e,

Aor. Mid.

77f(l>i.Sea6at

( 257, D.), Fut.

Trf(j)t8ri-a-ofiai.

Digitized

by Microsoft

327.

EIGHTH OK MIXED CLASS.

voluntary;
6
ixaxy-Tri-s,

201
fj

idtKri-jxav,
a-i-s,
fi

the

warrior;

fiiWrj-

the delay;

jiov-ijio-s,
;
fj

remaining;

6 voji-o-s, the law;

68-117],

the smell

xP""> '^^ joy.

327.
^

Mghth

or

Mixed

Class.

Several essentially different Stems unite to form one verb:

1. Present aipi-a,

I take;

Mid.

I choose;
^prf-KU

Stems aipe and

Tjpi-Brjv

e'X.

cIX-ov ( 236) Inf. eXeiv

iK6]i7}v

aipT\-a-a

alpTj-o'oiJiat

^prj-p^i

2. Pres.
fj)\^'\6-ov

epx-op.ai,Igo,come; Stems ipx and i\(v)6

iKfv-(TOjiai

iK-TJKvB-a ( 275)

Imperat. iXBi ( 333, 12)

Inf. i\6eiv.
3.

The

place of the Put. is generally supplied

by

elpn.

Pres. cpfi-to

and pe^-a,
'^p^'"

I do; Stems

ipb, ipy,

pey

f-pea
Ohs.

ipex^riv

The

D.) largement of the Present

this tpS-m.
loss of
cl. 4, is

original Verbal-Stem is fepy, hence to Npy-o-v ( 34, Attic epy-o-v, work ; from (f)fpy, by the addition of the eni (ol. 4), arose (J)ipy-i-a>, and from But by metathesis, ff py became fpey, and with the f, pcy, whence the regular Present according to i. e.,

pe^-a,

pey-i-a> ( 251).

4. Pres. iaBl-co,

I eat, Stem

iadi, e8(f)

[ed-o']

and

(j>ay
fjSe-crdTjv

e-(pay-ov

Fut. eS-Ofim
( 265)

e8-r]8oKa (
i8-rjSe<rp.ai.

275)

5. Pres.

fiT-opai,

I follow,^

(Impf. e'mofujv, 236) Stems

cV

and
e-iTTT-opriv

o-(e)7r

clonal

Subj. (nrm-pai

Inf. irvea-Oat

Ohs.

The original Stem is o-en-, from which en- has arisen by weakening o- to the rough breathing ( 60 V). In the Aot. Ind. the rough breathing is not organic, e being properly only the Augment. Besides this there is a syncope ( 61 c).

327. Dialects.

1. [dpalprjKa, apaiprip.ai,

275.]

2. Aor. ^XiJOou, Perf. elX^Xovea ( 317, D. 13), Part. i\riXov0as. 3. [Pres. >8-ffl] Perf. eopya ( 275,
e/)|a

D.

2),

Plup. ecipyetv, Aor.

and ipe^a.
Pres. Aot.
fircB,

4. Pres. ecr^o) 6.
OTTiBK,

and eSm, Inf. e8-p.evat, Perf. e8-i;S-a, Mid. iSrjSorai. i asm occijpied, Aor. e-a-ir-ov, Inf (rrrclp. Part.
Subj. Aor. Mid.
tcjroijLtai,

Put.

ei|fai,

e<TJroiprjV,

(nritr6ai,

fo-jrop^vos

Digitized

by Microsoft

202
6. Pres.

EIGHTH OK MIXED CLASS.

fx
<>

327.

J'^ave, hold (Impf. elx"" ^36),

1. c|io

Stems ex and

(rx(e)

i-(Tx-ov,

I seized

(Mid.)
e-(rxi)-(ca

Subj. (TxS, Opt. (TxoCrjv Inf. ffxeii', Part, trxmi'

2.

o-x^-tw

i-(rx^-6r]V
^'"'os crxero's

Imperat.

o-xt'-y

( 316, 11)

e-trxTI^'^^

Mid.

i-a-X'Of^rjv, (rx^/iiat, etc.

Inf. (TX-ccrBai

Ohs.

is o-cx, from whioli ex ^"'^ arisen by rough breathing ( 60 6). From trex by syncope came e-cx-o-i', by metathesis (rxe> from wliich trxe-r, From ex came the Future e^m, and the Verbal Adj. f-crxq-Ka. K-T(J-f, whilst in the Present-Stem the rough breathing was changed into the soft breathing, because of the aspirate in the following syllable ( 53 h, Obs.} ex-m for ex-m. Comp. also All the Stem forms imcrxveoixai aud ap.mtrxviojiai, 323, 36. to (rx^-fia, the form; also appear in the formation of nouns

The

original
a-

Stem

weakening

to the

f]

eii-s, the

hearing; ix-vp6-i, firm, tenable,

7. Pres. filay-m,

I mix,

misc-eo,

Stems ina-y and

18, ott

/iiy, additional

form, fityvvfu ( 319, 18).

8.

Pres. 6po-Q>,
eI8-ov

I see. Stems 6pa,

(Mid.) oy^ofiai
ZSe'

e-atpa-Ka
oir-aTT-a (

aipdrjy

275)
opdros
OTTTOS

Imperat.
Inf.

Mid. iSoC ( 333, 12)

empa-fxai
SifL-fiai

iS-eiv

Obs.

On the irregular Augment of the Stem Spa

237. The Stem
;

(Impf. iiipav)

vid-e-o

fid ( 34 D.). Comp. the Aor. Ind. therefore, i-hS-ov, with Syllabic Augment,
"S-to,

lb was originally

contracted to eU-o-v, but Subj.

this

Opt. W-oi-fu.

Stem

is oiSa,

I know

( 317, 6).

All three
the sight
;

The

Perf. of

Stems appear
;

also in the formation of

e'S-or, the

Nouns
f/

to opd-pia, the spectacle

to
the

form, appearance ;

oi/^i-r,

ro

o/i-fia,

eye, look.

9. Pres. irao-x-tu,
e-TTa6-ov

I suffer. Stem

naa-x, ira5(e), jrevB

Tre-TrovS^a
TraOrj-rSs
'

TT^L-a-Ofiat

(for TvevB-a-ojj.ai,

50)

Dialects. 6. Perf. Plup. sSxaTO.

8.

6'x-fflK-a

( 326, 31), Perf. Mid. Syjuai, 3 Plur.

Aor.

iSoi/,

to the Pres. dboiiai,

Weak Aor. Mid. hiaaro and eio-oTO, Part, hurdfievos I appear, resemble (comp. 34, D. 4). As a
Stem dp a we
find in

chorter additional form of the

Homer

the

Stem
9.

op(fo/>), thence 3 Plur. Pres. eVi op-o-vTat, they overlook.

2 Plur.

Ttirroade ( 317,

D. 14), Part. mTraBvia.

Digitized

by Microsoft

^'^'^''-

EIGHTH OR MIXED CLASS.

203
:

Obs.

^From

the shorter Stems

;

we have

the nouns

tA iraB-os,

the suffering

t6 irivB-os, the moiurning.

10. irlv-a,
e-TTi-ov

I drink,

Stems

n-n/, ttj, tto [Lat.^o-tus]

comp.

321, 4.

Fut.

Tri-Ofiai (

265)

we-n-a-Ka
iTe-ivo-fuu

i-!r6-6r)V

Imperat. ni-6i 316, 15

Ohs.
f]

no-ros
6
'ir6-Tr]-s,

From the Stem

7r6-ai-s, po-tio ;

the nomis to no-rfipio-v, po-culu-m,

tto

we have

po-tor;

11. Pres. rpEX"<"> I run. Stems e-Spa/i-ov SpSfioO/i-at

6pi^op,ai (

rpex and Spf/i

8e-8pap,ri-Ka

dpeKreov

54
:

c)

Ohs.

Nouns from both Stems

I
o'L-cron

6 Tpox-6-s, the wheel; 6 8pop,-v-s,

the runner..

12. Pres. (jyep-a,

rjveyK-ov

carry [ferd], Stems (^ep, eve(y)K, ol

ev-fjvox-a- (

275)

ol-a--6ri<rop.aL

ol-IT-TOS

jjveyR-a (

269)
o'liropac

rjVx-6r]V

flpeyK-a-iirjV

ivT]vey-p,ai

ivex-Bfjaojiiai.
:

Obs.

From the Stem (jxp we

6
(j>6p-o-s,

have the nouns

to ^ip-e-rpo-v,
6 (pop-ro-s, the

the bier;

the

contribution,

tax;

burden.
13. Aorist eiTTov,

I spoke. Stems
ip-Sy

f iir,

ip and pe
ippri6T]V
pTj-drjcrofiai

eHT-ow
f wr-a (

269)

Imperat.

et7r-e

Inf. elir-^Xv

d-pri-xa ( 274, Obs.) ei-prj-^c

( 333, 12) el-pij-a-opM

prj-To-s.

Obs.

i-eir, and from fe-hn, the reduplicated Aorist-Stem of the VerbalStem ferr (oros, word, 34, D. 1). This is the reason why the diphthong el belonas not to the Indicative alone ( 257, D.). The Stem ip (Fut. ipSi), to which the Mid. ipeirOai, to ask

The

Stem

elir has arisen

by

contraction from

e-en-

( 326, 16) belongs, has likewise lost f, it being originally fep (comp. Lat. TCr-bu-m). From fep, by Metathesis ( 59) arose

Dialects.

11. edpi^a [Spa/icofiai], beSpopa.

Pres.
(j>ep-Te

12.

2 Plur. Imperat.

[Lat. ferte],

3 Sing. Opt. eveUai

(ei/eiKot) [Perf. evrjveiypai],

Imperat.
o-ett,

Aor. rjvuKa, Aor. oio-e,

Inf. olaipevai ( 268, D.) 13. Pres. f[/j<B (01. 4. d), Aor. eo-Tr-ow

(Stem

comp. 5) 1

spoke, Imperat. ea-ir-ere, Pres. iv-iir-a, Imperat. ewcjre ( 62 D.), Aor. ivuTTTov, Subj. evia-ira. Opt. 2 Sing. eyiWoiy, Imperat. evunre

and

cvunres, Fut.

ivi^a and

ew(nrij(r<a.

Digitized

by Microsoft

204
fpe,

EIGHTH OK MIXED CLASS.

after the loss of tte
F,

32S,

pe,

hence

ei-prj-Ka for fe-fprj-Ka,

ipp^-dri-u for e-fpri-6ri-v, pr)-T6-s for Fpri-ro-s.

^ij/ii, Xt'yo),

As

Present forms

and, especially in compounds, dyopeia may be used, I forbid ; Aor. aitemov, Fut. dtrepSi, Perf. e. g. dtrayopeva, Nouns from the Stems cV and p jj oi|/', fte wice; amipriKa.
:

7-0

prj-fM, the

word ;

6 prj-rap, the orator. re-

In addition to these there are three verbs which

duplicate the
14. Present

Stem

in the Present

yi-yv-op.ai (also yiv-ap.ai), Ihecome Stem yi-y(e)v&Ti<\yev(e') (Lat. gi-g(e)n-o, Perf. gen-m)
yevr)-(Top.ai

i-yev-o-pjjv

ye-^ov-a
ye-yivT]-p.ai

Obs.
01

From

the Stem yevwe have to yiv-os, the race, genm yovsis, the parents ; from yevf, rj yeve-cri-s, the origin.

15. Pres. Tvl-TfT-a (from tti -rreT-o)),

I fall. Stem

niirr, irfr,
TTTOi

e-TviiT-ov

from

e-n-er-ov (

60

a), Treer-oC/iai (

264) Tre'-Tn-a-Ka (comp. 323, 30).

Obs.

From the Stem irra

Ti-rpa-a, I
e-Tprj-a-a

rj

irrSi-cn.-s,

to

trrSi'p.a, the fall,

16. Pres.

lore,

Stems rirpa and rpa

Tpf]-a-a>

( 270, Ols.).

Ieeegulaeities oe Meaning.
irregularities of meaning between the Active, Middle, and Passive, as well as, on the other hand, between the transitive and intransitive meaning.

328.

The most important

consist in the fluctuation

A)
1.

Active, Middle,

and Passive Meaning

Very many Active verbs have a Middle Future with Active meaning ( 266). This is the case with
most verbs of classes 5 to 8. 2. The Deponent verbs are to be regarded as Middle,
Dialects. 14. Perf. 1 Plur. ye-ya-fi^v, 317, D. 2, comp. 329, 15. Perf. Part, n-c-jn-e-is, 317, D. 17 Besides :
17. l-ava,
8.

Stem av,

df,

I sleep

(i

as Eeduplication,

comp. 308),

Aor. aecra.
Digitized

by Microsoft

329.

lEItEGULARITIES OF MEANING.

205

and

also make most of their tenses in the Middle form. Those are called Passive Deponents, whose Aorist has a Passive form e.g., ^ovXofiai, I wish, S^ovX'^Otjv, I wished. The most important Passive Deponents are the following; of which those marked * have a Passive Future, which is used along with the Middle ayajiai, I admire ( 312, 8) evXafieofiai, I am on my guard *aiSo/iai, / dread ( 301, 1) *ilbojiai., I rejoice akdofim, I ramble *iv il icike to heart \ ^ r r \j am inclined &fx,CKKaofi.m, I rival npo I *apveojiai, I deny II am anxious *i'wi
:

''

*ay6ou,ai,

I am,

indignant

lieXofiai

<

(826,12)
^ovKofiai,
bioiiai,

'''"'

I repent
j

1 wish ( 326, 14)

Z2Q, lb)

ajro

i.

I despair
reflect

I need {^ depKOfiai, I look

Siva/iai,

*&ia
iy
jrpo

,^

^^

\l
^

I ponder
30)

"SiaKeyoiiM,

I converse I can ( 312, 9) fvavTi6o[iai, I am opposed

I know ( 312, 10)
Obs.

[l anticipate

*oiofiat,

emaraijuii,

I am of opinion ( 326, (re^ojiai, I reverence (\iiKonji,eojiai, I am ambitious

have the Middle Aorist

Several of these verbs

The Passive

as well as

the Passive.
8.

Aorists of several Active verhs have a

evcl)paiva>, I rejoice, ei^pavOrjv, I. I cause to turn, ia-Tpd^v, I turned I show, i<f)dvrjv, I appeared, &c.

Middle meaning:
rejoiced; a-Tpejxi),

myself
4.
Ss'Xp/jLai,

<f>a,iva>,

The Passive forms

:

of several Deponents have also

a Passive meaning

Idofiai,
iBe')(dr]v,

I
:

receive,

I heal, Iddnjv, I was healed ; I was received; in some

fiefj,lfi7]/j,ai,

even the Middle forms have both Active and Passive

meaning

fii/ieofiai.,

imitate,

have imi-

tated, or have been imitated.

329. B) Transitive and Intransitive Meaning.

When

the meaning of a verb fluctuates between

329. Dialects. The Strong Aor. erpacjiov (rpei^co, / nourish) in Horn, has an intransitive meaning, I grew up. In Herod, aveyvav (avayiyviia-Kio) means I read, aviyvaira, I persuaded ; Hom. TJpnrov, 1 fell, Aor. to ipema> (cl. 2), 1 throw doum; svaa-o-a, I caused to

dwell, Aor. to vaia>, I[^-^fSed

by Microsoft

::

206

IKEEGULAKITIES OF MEANING.

329.

intransitive

Transitive and Intransitive, the Strong Aorist has the and the Weak Aorist and Future Active the transitive meaning; when there are two Perfects the

Str<mg liiewise has the intransitive and the Weak the transitive meaning; if there is only one Perfect, it is The most important cases of this kind are intransitive.

I place, Weak Aor. I shall place, Pres. Mid. XcTTajjiai, I place myself, Strong Aor. ea-rriv, I placed myselfstood, Perf. eartjKa, I have placed myself, or stand ( 503), Plup. kcnr^iceiv, I stood, Eut. ecTrj^m ( 291), I shall stand.
1.

Stem

trra.

Pros.

Xcrrrjixi,

earrja-a,

I placed,

Fut.

ctttjo-o),

Ohs.

This same important distinction appears in the numerous compounds a^i<TTqfi.i, I cause to revolt, to separate, aweaniv, I revolted separated, a^e<TTr]Ka, I have revolted ; i^iarqfu, I put over, iirecmiv, I put myself over, etf/iarriKa, I am put over,KaSiarrjiu, I put down, Kar^oTrjv, I put myself forward, Ka6eonjKo, I stand there or forward. The Aor. Mid. has a specially

Middle meaning, (comp. 479).

2.

c. g.,

(caTeor^o-oro, he determined for himself

Stem

/Sffl,

Pres. ^alva,

I go,
;

is

commonly

intransi-

but iu the poets, / cause to go, also in the Weak Aor. e^rja-a, Fut. /Sijo-ta but intransitive in the Strong Aor. c^tjv, I went, /Se/Siy^a, I
tive with the Flit, ^^ao/j.ai
;

have advanced, stand firm (^e^a-io-'i, firm). 3. Stem <p V, Pres. cpva, I beget. Weak Aor. efva-Uy ^iKTw; but the Strong Aor. e6vv, 1 was begotten,
ire^vica,
4.

I am

by nature, to which the Pres.

is (pvofiai.

Stem

S V, Pres. Sva>,

I sink,

hide, often ti-ansitive

KaraBveo,

sunk myself, put off.

5.

I cause to sink, I dived;

also ehvcra, Bvao)

eveSvv,

but eSw, put mi; i^eSvv,

;

I I

Stem

o-/Se(?), Pres. a-^evvvfii,

I quench, Weak

Aor.

I quenched. Strong Aor. ea^Tjv, I was quenched, a-^7]Ka, I am quenched. The Pres. to it is a-^ivw/jLat. 6. Stem crxeX, Pres. a-KeWa, I dry, but Aor. ea-KXTjv, I grew dry, with the Pres. aKeXkoaai.
e-a-^e-a-a,
Digitized

by Microsoft

331.

ACCENTUATION OP VEEBAL POEMS.

207

7.

Stem

TT

i,

Aor. einov,

I drank,

eirlaa

{iriiria-Kai),

caused
8.

to drink.

Stem

<yev, Pres. yeivofiai

iyeivdfj/riv,

(comp.

327, 14),

I am

bom, Aor.

I begat. 9. Stem 6X, Pres. SWvfu, I ruin. Strong Perf. I am ruined, peril, Weak Perf. o\a>k6Ka, I have

oXaiXa,

ruined,

perdidi.
330. In a number of verbs the Strong Perfect alone has only an intransitive meaning, as
1. dyvv/jLi,

2. iyeipco,
3. ireido),

I break, I awake Ifasten I tear

Pf. iarya,

iyprjyopa,

Ipersuade

I am broken ( 275, 2). lam awake ( 275, l). miroida, I trust (Tretdofiai, I
follow, obey).
irkirrfja,

I stick fast. 5. prfyvvfjii, eppwya, I am torn ( 278). 6. a-rjiro), I cause to rot aecrriira, I am rotten. 7. TTjica, I melt TeTrfica, I am melted. 8. <^aiv<o, I show (rarely shine), Pf. jricprjva, I have appeared (cfialvo/jLat, I appear).
4. irriiyvvfii,

On

between

the distinction between aveaya and avemxa, and jreirpar/a and Trevr/aa^a, see 279.

331.

Geneeal View op the Accentuation OF Veebal Foems.

removed
rule given 229, that in the verb the as far back as possible from the end, is
is

The general
accent
is

subject to the following exceptions

For
from

all

contracted syllables the accentuation

seen

87.

Hence
327, 15),

So/cw,

iXa/jLev
(

(TrtTTTftj,

Ti6S)fj,ai

( 263), Treo-oO/^at 302), Xv6&, \v6y<;

( 296).

Comp. however

307, Obs.

330. Dialects.

9.

Horn, haia,

set fire to,

Pf.

Se'Sija,

caught fire. 10. Horn. TKira,

11.

I give hope,

Pf. eoKira,

I hope.
destroyed.

<t>eipa>,g^0^^i^y0^^pa, I am

; : :

208

ACCENTUATION OF VEEBAL FOEMS.

332.
laid
:

33i.

rule

Compound Verbal forms follow the general down in 85, with the following limitsyllable

ations
1.

The accent never goes back beyond the

first

on which the
(eVt),
2.

word had
not

it

before the composition

iiriaye';,

7r6So9, give back (airo),

ciTroBo';;

hold in

not

e'jTbcrj^e'i.

beyond the
in besides.
3.

In double compounds the accent never goes back first aweKBo<;, give out with ; irapevOe';, put
:

The accent
This
is
is

never passes beyond the

Augment

or

Reduplication: awrfkOe, he went away ;

arrived.

dfpiKTai,,

he has
or

the case even when the

:

Augment

not expressed vwelKov, I gave way avevpe, he found again; a-vvoiBa, I know along with, from olBa, I know, forms an exception.
Reduplication
333.
1.

The other
:

exceptions are

All Infinitives in vai, have the accent on the penultima ndevai, Oelvai, 'KeKvKevai, XvOfjvai.
2.

the Infinitive of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs

in

CO is

perispome

Xa^elv.
in the Middle
is

3.

the same form

paroxytone:

Xa/3ecr^at.
4.

the Infinitive of the

:

Weak

Aorist Active has the

accent on the penultima

Obs. 1).
5.

TratBevcrat, iiraivicrai ( 268,

so likewise the Infinitive of the Perfect Middle

ireirai.BevaOab, KeKOfiiadai.
6.

the Participle of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs

in

o) is

oxytone

Xa^aiv.

the Participle of the Present and of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs in /a t is oxytone ridei^, airo7.
:

Bov^.
8. so

likewise the Participle of the Perfect Active

(via, 6?,

XeXvKw
9.

Gen.

oro'?),

and

that of both Aorists Passive : XvOei^, ypa6ek. 'I' T ' ^ Digitized by Microsoft

337.

FOEMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT.

Middle
is

209

10. the Participle of the Perfect

paroxy-

tone

\eXvfj,vo<i.

H. the contracted 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aorist Middle is perispome: Xa/3o{). Only the compounds of monosyllabic forms with dissyllabic prepositions form an exception: TrepLOov (TrepiriOTj/Mi), comp

307, Obs.
12.

The 2

Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aorist Active

is

in the following verbs

oxytone

eliri,

speak

i\6e,

come

evpe, find

ISe, see ;

\a^e, take.

But

direnre, &c.,

according to 85. On the accentuation of the three equal forms of the Weak Aorist, see 268, Obs. 1.

Peoctliab Fobms of Vebbs.

ijf

THE Ionic Dialect.

The Iterative form denoting the repetition of 334. Dialects. an act is frequent in Homer and Herodotus, though foreign to Attic
prose.
Its characteristic sign is the letters ctk afBxed to the historical person-endings in the

means
always.

of the connecting vowels o

Mid. aKOfi-qv.

Active as well as in the Middle by and e hence 1 Sing. Act. o-kov. The Augment is generally wanting, in Herod,
;

The

inflexion is quite the

same as that of the Imperfect.

335. Dialects.

The
:

Iterative (tk

as well as to both the Strong and

distinguish Iterative Imperfects, as
Iterative Aorists, as
'IS-c-ctk-o-v,
:

may be afSxed to the Present Weak Aorist-Stems hence we

;

ex-^-cKo-v,

1 used

to have,

and

used to

see,

eXacra-o-K-e-v, he

used

to drive;

the former denote the repetition of continuance, the

latter the repetition of the occurrence of

an action ( 492).

336. Dialects.

In

verbs of the First Principal Conjugation f

is the constant connecting vowel for the Iterative Imperfects and the Iteratives of the Strong Aorist fiiv-e-a-Kov (/levo), I remain),
:

pocrK-e-<TKovro

(/Soo-ku,
its

1
:

pasture'),

(j>vy--(TK

((pevyco,

flee)

a occurs rarely in
(^KpvvTai,

stead

p'nrr-a-a-Kov (piVto,

/ hurl), KpvTrr-a-crKov

I hide).

Contracted verbs in the Iteratives either leave the

:

two vowels uncontracted KoKif o-kov (/caX/m, I call), or reject one of them adeoKov (wBito, I push), ^'iatrKov (^iam, I leave) the Stems
:
;

in a sometimes change ae to aa

vaierdacTKov (vaierao),

I inhabit),

comp.

vaieraa, 243,

D.
verbs of the Second Principal Conjugation
:

337. Dialects.
tTK is

In

aiSxed immediately to the Stem

Digitized

e-<pa-crKov

(Stem
-p

<p a,

cttrj/ii,

by Microsoft

210

FORMS OF VEKBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT.

338.

1 say), cna-irKov (fonji', I placed myself), ea-Kov instead of ia-a-Kov (Stem i s, flii'i, I am), Ke-o-zcero (Stem k e i, Kcljiai, I lie), ri-Be-aKov (jiBrjjxi,, I put), priym-<TKov (p^yi/uynt, 1 tear). For tlie Stem oX, as
in other formations ^aXecra, oXeaa), e is the connecting vowel:

oX-e-CKero.
a-K

is

further

iprjTva-a-a-Ke (Jpr]Tva>,

appended directly to the Weak Aorist-Stem: 1 pacify), \i.vi]aa.-aKfro (/icao/iat, I remember).

338. Dialects.

Many Stems of the Present

and

Strrnig Aorist

in poetry (seldom in Attic prose) have 6 added without cular modification of meaning.

any

parti-

The Preterite is the most frequent of the Stems thus strengthened. The 6 is connected with the Stems sometimes by a, sometimes by e. The most important forms
of this kind are
SiwKa, additional form Siaxdda,
f"(c<a
,,

1 pursue
I warded
off

dfivva
f'lpya

,,

clKaBa,

I yield I separated, shut off

I went
were assenibled

TjiivvaBov,

epyaBov (^iepyaOov),
cKlaOov,

Kia
aelpop,ai

ayeipco
<t>6iva>

))

rjepcBovTai, they hover

rjyepiBovTo, thcy
<j)6ivv6a)

X<

<TX^6teip,

Aor. Inf. to hold.

Digitized

by Microsoft

340.

SIMPLE DEEIVATION.

211

in.DERIVATION.
Chap. Xni.

single

A word is either simple, i. e. sprung from a Stem: \07-0?, gpeech (Stem X67), jpoA^-w, I write (Stem ypa^), or compound, i. e. formed from two or more Stems Xoyo-rypd^o-i;, speech-writer.

339.

A) Simple Dekivation.
Simple words are either primitive (Verhalia), i. e. are formed directly from a Verbal-Stem ( 245) apx-^j beginning, from the Verbal-Stem apx (apx<o, I begin) or derived {Denominativa), i. e. formed from a NominalStem ( 100): apxarlo-'i, incipient, ancient, from the J^ominal-Stem apxct) Nom. dpxVs beginning.
:

^whether from a 340. Nouns are usually formed Yerbal or from a Nominal-Stem by means of a termination. This termination, added to the Stem, is called a derivative-ending or suffix. Thus Xo-yo-? is formed by means of the suflSx o from the Verbal-Stem Xey, dpxa-to-<; by means of the suffix 10 from the Nomiual-Stem dpx<^- The suffixes serve more clearly

to define the idea of the noun, or to mark the different relations in which the general idea of the Stem is to be

conceived:
pose),
irolrf-fiair),
(lypdcjxi),

Verbal-Stem -Koie
compos-er;
rypaxji-ev-<s,

{iroiS),

I produce,

com-

iroirj-rrj-^,

'rrol/rj-air';,

composi-^ibw
rypa<p

composi^jow,
write),

poem;

Verb.-Stem
y.pa(fi-i-<;,

writer;

writing

instrument ;

lypafju-jjua,

writing ;

rypaftrfjiri,

line ;

Nom.~

Stem Sta
a-vvT),

{hiKri,

right),

hlKOrio-'i,

right,

just; Sikmo(fiaa-CKev-^,

righteousness;

Nom.-Stem ^aacXev
^axnXe-id,

Idng), /SacrtKe-id, queen;

ik6-<;, InngiTy.

Hagdom;

^aa-Ck-

Ohs. 1.

Only few primitive nouns

Digitized

are formed witliout a suffix:

(cjivKda-a-a,

<t>v\a^,

guard, NominaJ and Verbal-Stem (f>vXaK

by Microsoft

a,

212
cl.

SUFFIXES FOK FOKMING SUBSTANTIVES.^

4,

34J.

guard);

Stjf,

voice,

Stem

ojr,

Ver"b.-Stem eV

(eiTTElI').

Ohs. 2.

Consonant-Stems undergo tbe necessary changes ypa<p, ypd/jL-lia, Xey, Xe^is, word; diKaS (SiKd^a), 8iKa(T-Trjs.juilge. Vowel-Stems readily lengthen the vowel and sometimes insert cr before several suffixes, as in the Perf. Mid. ( 288), and in the Weak Passive-Stem ( 298) 5roij;-;iio (comp. jre-Troiij-fiat), a-ei-<r-}i6-Sy shaking (comp. o"e-o"ft-(r-/iat).
before suflSxes beginning with a consonant ( 44, &o.)
: :

The

Ohs. 3.

In many primitive words

the

Stem undergoes a change

which generally is like that of the Strong Perfect ( 278): Stem \ad, \r]6-r], forgetfulness, comp. \i-\rjd-a; Stem IT f fin, Troim-rj, escort, comp. ire-7rofi.(j)-a Stem Xitt, The most frequent \otir6-s, remaining, comp. Xt-XoiTr-a.
in its vowel,
;

vowel-change
n-oiar-T],

is

that of e to o

Stem

wefiir

Qiriji.TTa,

I escort'),
flame;

escort;

Stem

0Xfy

((jAeyca,

I hum),

(jiXoi,

Stem Tpcn (rpiva, I

Ohs. 4.

turn), rpon-os, turning, manner.

A
I.

general

Neuters are almost

8S)-po-v, gift ;

accent of nouns is, that the barytone ( 19): to ytVor, the race; \el''^avo-v, remains ; wev-fia, hreath.
rule for the
all

341.

The most important

Suffixes for

forming

Substantives.

A) Substantives denoting an agent are called nomina The person acting or occupied ia and belonging to something is indicated by the following sufSxes
agentis.
:

1. eu,

Nom.

(v-s (always oxytone), Maso. ( 137).

Examples of Primitive words are

ypa(f)-ev-s, writ-ER,

Verb.-Stem ypa<j>, Pres.

ypd(j)a> (cl.

1)

yov-ei-s, begett-ER
Koup-eu-y, Z)ar5-BK

yev Kcp

yiyi/o/iai (cl.

8)

Keipo

(cl. 4, d).

An
tives

example of the not very numerous DenominaNom.-Stem wop dp-o, Nom.

TropSp^is, passage.

is

5ropfl/i.-ev-y,/erry-MAN,

Ohs.

Several Masculines in
:

ev-s have Feminines in eta (pro-

paroxy tones)
2. rrip

/Sao-tXeur,

king; ^aa-lXeia, queen.

Nom.

Trip

-j

Top Ta

T<u/)|Masc.,
Tjj-s)

reipa Nom. Teipa\ rpta rpm 1^<="rptS T-pi'-j

I

TlS
Digitized

TJ-S

by Microsoft

213

343.

SUFFIXES FOK FORMING SUBSTANTIVES.

of Primitive nouns are
a-a-Trjp, deliver-ssSi, Masc.
-i

Examples
Stem and Nom.

,,

Verb.-Stem

a-

(o-wfu))

pij-Top

<Ti>-Tiipa

/5i)-T(Bp,

Fern.

( 298)
icpi, Vies.

orcj-TOB,

Verb.-Stem pe, Ftit.epS (327,13)

,,

Kpi-ra
jroiTj-Ta

Kpi-TTj-s,

judge
poet
\

Kpiva

iroiri-Trj-s,

,,

( 253, Obs.) ttoie, Pres, ttoieo)

(ol.

Stem and Nom.

av\r]-ra ai\r]-Tpt8

iroiij-rpia, poetess)

1)

aiXjiTrj-s,

flute-play-ER, Masc.l

Verb.-Stem ai\e,
Pres. av\e<o (cl. 1)

avXrjTpi-s

Fem.

Examples of Derived words are

Stem TToXi-ra, Nom.

noXlrrj-s, citizen,

Nom.-Stem

sroXi,

Nom.
W(iXt-S
"Norn.
oi/co-j

oiKe-To oiKE-TiS
342.

olKerrj-s,

domestic, MsiScA

stem oIko,

oiKen-s

Fem.

B)

Substantives
for

expressing

an action are
sufiixes are

called nomina actionis ; the

foUomng

the

most common
1. ri,

them

Nom.
,,

Ti-s
o-i-f,

m
(Tta

from

Ti-s,

according to 60a [comp. Lat. ii'o]

Feminine,
Barytones.

,,

crta

All nouns of this kind are Primitives, as

n'i.a--n-s,

faith,

Verb.-Stem niB, Pres. Mid.

iretdoixat (cl.

2)

)j.i.p.r]-cn-s,

imitation

jn

ju e,

Pres. (Dep.)
,,

^t;ae'o;aat (cl.

1)
3) a)

<rKe\jn-s,

contemplation

a-

Kin,

o-KeWo/xai

(cl.

irpa^i-s, action

,,

irpay, Pres. Act.

n-pacro-a) (ol. 4,

ydve-ari-s, origin

y(v(j), Pres. Mid. ylyvojiai

^

( 327, 14)

SoKip-a-trt-a,
2. /io,

examination
/io-s

,,

8oKip,a&, Pres.

Soxt/iafto (cl. 4,

b)

Nom.

(always oxytone), Masc.

cramp, Verb.-Stem erjra, Pres. a-Traa (cl. 1), I draw i"5jW Se iond Sew 68vp oSjpo/iai (cl. 4, d, OJs.) oovp-jio-s, wailing
tnra-a--jj.6-s,

^t-a--p6-s,

Ohs.

Prom verbs in eva> substantives in eta are derived, wbich denote the action, and are ail paroxytone iraiSeia, I educate, TraiSeia, education ; ^aa-iXeva, I am king, /Sao-iXei'a, king's rule.
:

Comp.
S 343.

341, 1 Ohs.

C) The result of an action

Digitized

is

indicated

by

by Microsoft

214

SUFFIXES FOK FOEMING SUBSTANTIVES.

344

Norn, im, Neuter (accent, 340, Ohs. 4). Verb.-Stem npay, Pres. npda-aa (almost the same as ro irenpayfievov, Lat. factum) prj-palr], luord, Verb.-Stem p e, Fut. epa> ( 327, 13) (comp. TO flptjpevov, Lat. dictum)
1. liar,

Trpay-iialr], the thing done,

(cl.

4,a)

T/ii7-/ia[T], cut,

Verb.-Stem rep., Pres. repvo) ( 321, 10) (comp. TO TCT/Jiripevov, the piece cut off).

2.

fs,

Nom.

OS,

Stem Aax-fs, Nom. \axos,

,,

ie-es TCK-f s

Neuter (accent, 340, Obs. 4). lot, Verb.-Stem Xax, Pres. Xayxavto ( 322, 27> e fl, Perf. eim^a ( 275) Wos, custom
,,

TCKos, child

TSK, Pres.

tikto)
(cl. 3).

Obs.

The same
fJ^rJKos,

suffix in derived

words denotes a quality

^dpos, weight, Adjective-Stem fiapv, ^ados, depth

length

Nom.

,,

Padv paKpo
or

^apv-s ^a6v-s paxpo-s

344.

D) The Instrument

means

for

an action

is

expressed by
Tpo,
apo-T p

Nom.
- V,

plough,

rpo-v [Lat. fra-m] (accent 340, Obs. 4) Verb.-Stem a/)o. Vies, apoat (cl. 1) [aro/tru-rn\

Xi-rpo-v, redemption money

btSaK-rpo-v, a teacher's fee
Obs.

\v SiSax

\ia>

(cl.

1)

StSdo-xm ( 324, 28)suffix

The
:

meaning of the kindred feminine

rpa

is

less

fixed

^v-17-Tpa (^^ia>,I scrape), scraper, instrument for rubbing ;

6pxr]-<r-rpa (opxeopai,

dance^, dancing place; TroKai-ir-Tpa

(ndKala,

I urrestle),

wrestling school.

345. E) Flace

is

indicated

by

Neuter proparoxytone aKpoa-TTjpio-v, audi-toriu-m, Verb.-Stem, aKpoa, Pres. oKpodopai

1. TTfpio,

Nom.

T-qpio-v

(cl. 1).

OiKaiT-Tripio-v,

judgment
cio-v,

hall

biKob

SiKofoj

(cl.4 b).

Neuter properispome Xoy-eio-j', speofe'ra^ jaface, from the Nom.-Stem Xoyo,

2. e
1

0,

Nom.

Nom.

\oyo-r
Kovpei-s

Kovp-eXo-v, barber's ship

M.ov(T-e'io-v, seat of the
3. (ov,

Muses

Kovpev,, Mouo-a ,,

MoCo-a

Masc. oxytone, denotes a place where anything is in abundance: apneKav, vineyard ; avbpav, men's room ; olvav, wine vault.
toy,

Nom.

Digitized

by Microsoft

348,

SUFFIXES FOR FOEMIN& SUBSTANTIVES.

215

346. F) Substantiyes of quality are derived from Adjective-Stems by means of the following suffixes
1. TTjT, Nom. nj-r, Fem. [Lat. Stem naxv-rrjT, Nom. 7raxvn;r,

tat, tut,

Nom.

tas, ties]

thickness,

veo-TTjT
t(ro-Ti)r

a-ivr],

ve6n]S, youth

Adj.-Stem traxv, Nom. na^i-s veo

Nom.
laoTT)!,

vio-s

equality

to-o

Nom.
2. (Tvva,

uTo-s

Nom.

Pem. pavoxytone.

biKaio-a-ivrj, justice,
j-(i>cj}po-<rvv7],

soberness

Adj.-Stem SiKaio, Nom. SiKaio-s trcaippou <ra^pa>u

a-o(f>6-s

<ro(/)-ia,

Nom. la, Fem. paroxytone wisdom, Adj.-Stem crocjjo, Nom. evbaifxov fvBaifiov-i a, hliss
3.
I

a,

evdalfiaiv.

vowel e of the AdjectiveStems in -69, Nom. -?;? becomes eta; and when the final o of an Adjective-Stem is preceded by another o, it becomes oia, oia (proparoxytone).
suffix
akri6e-ia, truth,

The

ta with the

Adj.-Stem
os.

a\rjde[^s'],

Nom.

oKrjdrjs (

165)

eijvo-ta, benevolence

4. es,

Nom.

evvoo Neuter, 343, 2.

eiivov-s

347. G) Diminutives are formed from NominalStems by the suffixes

1. 10,

Nom.

lo-v,

Neuter

fraih-io-v, little boy,

KrjTT-i o-v, little

Nom.-Stem

iraib,
kjjtto
181.0

Nom.
,,

iraX-s
KrJTro-s.

garden

Obs.

Other
(

forms of to are

(Nom.
;

iSto-v),

apto (Nom.
vXXio-k)
little
:

apto-v),
oiKi 8

vSpio (Nom. vbpw-v), vXXto (Nom.

a
little

o-v,
;

house

(o'/co-s)

iraiba p
;

o-v,

boy
little

(Tral-s)

piKvbpio-v, a

little

song (^eXos)

dbiWio-v, a

picture (eiSos).
2.

Masc. la-Ko, Fem. la-na,

Nom.

utko-s, lanri, paroxytoiier

veav-itTKo-s, adolesceniMZifs,
7raih-iirKT],girl
(rTe(j)av-l<rK0-s,

Nom.-Stem veavia, Nom. TratS

veavla-s
irai-s
crTeKJtavo-s.

little

garland

<m<^avo

which denote more rarely the descent from a father (or ancestor) descent from a mother are most frequently formed by the suffix ba (No^^.^|g59^/jgr^the Jasculine, and only S
348.

H) Patronymics

or substantives

21G

SUFFIXES FOE FORMING SUBSTANTIVES.

349.

(JSTom. -9) for

the Feminine. The Masculines are parThis suffix is added osytone, the Feminines oxytone.

to

Stems

in

a without any connecting vowel

Nom.-StemBopca, TSTom. Aiveia
Bopea-s
Alveid-s.

Masc.

Bopfa-5i;-f, Pern. Bo/jfa-y,

Alveia-Sr]-!

The same
the vowel
Maso.
i
:

is

affixed to

CmsonantStems by means

of

KiKpojT-t-&t]-s, Pern. KcKpon-t-s,

Nom.-Stem KexpoTr, Nom.

KeVpoT/r,

Second Principal Declension also adopt the connecting vowel i, before which the v of v is dropped Ilrj\s-L-Sr]-s from the Nom.-Stem rtiyXeu, Nom. n^Xcu-s

Stems in ev and

o of the

ArjTo-i-Srj-s

Homeric additional form nrjXrj'iaSrj-s (comp. 161, D.) from the Nom.-Stem Atjto, Nom. Atjtw, son of Leto.
of the O-Declension substitute
t

The Stems

for o

Masc. TavTdK-t-8rj-s, Pem. Tavrdk-i-s, Nom.-Stem TavraXo, Nom.

TdvraXo-s

Kpov-i-Srj-s

in to

Kpovo, Nom.
Kpovo-s.

Only those
to la:

(Nom.

to-?)

change these

letters

Masc. Bea-Tid-Srj-s, Fem. Oeand-s, Nom.-Stem eccrrio,

Nom.
GetTTto-ff

Obs.

MevoiTid-S 7] -

MevoiTto, Nom,
MevoLTio-s,
is

A
:

more

rare sufSx for Patronymics

lov or

imi',

Nom.

Kpovlav, son of Kpovo-s. with regard to the metre.

lap

The Poets take many

liberties

349. I) Gentile names or substantives describing persons as natives of certain towns or countries have

the suffixes
1. ev,

Nom.

evs (comp.

341) oxytone
tcL

Meyap-ev-s,

Nom.-Stem Meyapo, Nom. Eperpt-ci-r 'Eperpio 2. TO, Nom. Trj-s, paroxytone

Meyapa

'"Epirpia.

Teyed-Trj-s (Teyca), Aiyij/ij-Tij-s (Alylvrj), 'HTTSipco-rrj-s ("HTTfipo-t),

2.KAii-r,-j (2.Xm).

^.^.^^^^ ^^ Microsoft

35i.

SUFFIXES FOK FORMING ADJECTIVES.

217
:

Obs.

The feminine gentile names end in 6 (Nom. -s) MfyapiS, Norn. Meyapi'f ; TeyeartS, Nom. Tfycans StKeXiarii,
;

Nom.
3.10.

SiKeKiaTis,

II.

-The most important Suffixes for forming

Adjectives.
to-?

1.

10,

Nom.

(proparoxytone)

expresses the most general relation to the idea of the

substantive from %hich the adjective
io-<;,

ovpdvbelonging to evening (icnrepa). The t sometimes combines with the final vowels of Vowel-Stems to diphthongs, which then frequently receive the circumflex: ar/opa-Lo-<;,
is
:

formed

heaven-?z/

(ovpavo';);

ea-irep-io-^,

from the Stem alho from the Stem BiKa '(Nom. SiKT], Justice) so also after rejecting the 9 we /have from the Stem depe<; (to 6ipo<;, summer) depe-to-?, summer-like. By the suffix to, adjectives are also formed from Adjective-Stems eKev6ep-bo-<;, liber-aZi's (ikev6epo-'i, liber) and gentile adjectives ( 349) from names of places, which, however, are also used substantively MfXijer-to-? (for Mt\7;T-to-9, from MtXiyro-?, according to 60),
{opensis {ouyopa)
;

atSo-to-?, modest,
SiKa-to-'; Just,
;

(Nom.

alSdos:)

but

'A6r)va-io-<; ('Adrivai,).

351. 2. KG, Nom. /co-s (always oxytone) mostly afHxed to the Stem by the connecting vowel *, and, in words derived from Verbal-Stems, denotes fitness : apx-t-Ko-^, suited for governing ; '^pa^iKO';, suited Many Verbalfor writing or painting (picturesque).
is

Stems
(

insert

the

syllable

tl

before

the

suffix

ko the

342):

ala-Orj-Ti^Ko-s,

capaile

of perceiving;

Trpa-

KTi-Ko-'i,

suited for acting.

From Nominal-Stems

forms adjectives denoting what is peculiar, belonging or referable to the thing expressed by the noun: ^aa-i\,tK6<;, kingly; ^ucrt/co?, natural:
suffix KG,

Nom.

o-9,

iroXe/MKO'!, warlike.
Ohs.

By means of this suffix are formed the names of many arts and sciences, the Feminine being used substantively, originally iiova-i-ic^, musk. with the siAdiliBf^it^g^^iffB^fi^ence :
17


218
ij

SUFFIXES FOK FOEMING ADJECTIVES.

352.

ypaykfiar-i-Kr], from to ypaiijiara, litterae, grammar, the art of Tho corresponding Masculine writing; tj raKT-i-Krj, tactics. 6 fiovdenotes one who is experienced in such art or science a-iKo-s, musician ; 6 jpaixjianKo-s, grammarian ; 6 raKTiKo-s,
:

tactician.

352.
6 0,

3.

ivo,

Nom.
60-9

wo-9, proparoxytone,
eu-s],

and

4.

Nom.

perispome,

proparoxytone (ou? 183), denote the material of which any[Lat.

;

^uX-tvo-9, thing consists: Xt6-ivo-<;, of stone (Xt^o-9) wood-en {^vXo-v); %/3i/o--eo-9, %/3iio-oi}9, gold-en [aur-eurs]
(X/31'0-6-9).

Ois.

IV
evT,

o,

Nom.
:

ivo-s,

IV OS, yesterday's,

oxytone, forms adjectives of time: ;(5co-from x^> yesterday ; eaptvos, vernus; with

enlarged suffix
5.

vvKT-ep-i v 6-s, noct-ur-nu-s.

6^-9,

Nom. Masc.
;

Fern, ecraa, Neut.

ev,
;

denotes abundance : %a/3t-e t-9, grace-/MZ (%api-?)

wood-t/
{vK'rj)

vKri-e t-9,

ijfj^ado-e t-9,

sand-j/

{ajjuado-'i).

Comp. Lat

osu-s: gratiosMs, siivosus, aienoms.

6. /jLov,

Nom. Masc.

/ioji/,

Neut.

fiov,
:

denotes the ient or inclination to something /j,vij-fi co v, mindful ; tXi]-/x tu v, patient ; i'7ri.\ria--fjL a> v, forgetful.
Ois.
vo,

Adjective
j/o-r,

suffixes of less defined

:

meanings are

Nom.

oxytone, mostly passive

(o-t/3-o-fiai-),

Sd-vo^s, terrible

cnfi-vo-s

venerable
Sti-Xo'-t,

Xo
jio

\o-s,

mostly oxytone and active:

aTraTTj-Xo-s, deceitful

fearful;

fio-s,

a-ifio

proparoxytone, partly active pax-i-p-o-s, warlike and partly passive doi8t-|i o-s, capable of being sung ; akin to it is proparoxytone a-ifio-s, vseful ; xpria-ip-o-s, ^v^ift.o-s,
; : :

capable of being fled from, avoidable

fs
rjs,

Neut.

es

-v^euS-ijr,

false,

almost exclusively in com-

pound words ( 355).

353. III.

Derived Verbs

are formed in various ways from Nominal-^tem.s.

The

most important endings of derived verbs, differing little from one another in meaning, are the following, arranged
according to their forms of the Present
Digitized

by Microsoft

^ADVERBS.
(jiurBo-s, hire)

353

6.

DEEIVED VERBS
:

219

1.

o-a

fiurdora,
Xpva-6-a>,
fi)fito-m,

IMre I gild
I punish
1 blame

{^^pvao-s, gold')
(^^rjiita,
(j'^i''^,

punishment)

2.

a-a

nfid-o),

I honour
I wail

alna-onai,

honour) (^alria, blame)

(yoo-f, wailing)
(dpi5/io-s,
(^fvTvxl]s,

yod-a,
3. e-co
:

4. ev-a

I number cirvxe-co, I am fortunate ia-Topc-co, I search ^aa-CKev-co, I am king

dpiBiie-co,

number)

fortunate)

(Jo-rap, searcher)
(fiaa-CKev-s,

king)

5.

if-o)

Pov\fv-w, T advise eX7rif-o>, I hope

(PovXrj, advice)
(iKtrl-s,

hope)

I speah Greeh <l>CKi.mri^-a>, I am inclined

iKhjvt^-a),
to

("EXXtji/)
l ,

Philip ]

(!^O.m,ro-s)
i^l-Kr],

6. a^-a>

StKa^-a,

ipya^-ofiai,
jSmf-ojxat,
7. aiv-ia
:

I judge I work
I
use violence

justice)

(epyo-v,
(/3ia,

worhj

violence)

\evKaiv-a>,

I sign (tr^p^, sign) I whiten (Xcv/co-j white) Xa^ciralv-ta, I am indignant (xaXe7rd-r, severe,
o7jp.alv-oi,
,

in-

dignant)
8. vv-a
:

fjSiv-a),

Xap.irpiv-co,

I sweeten I brighten

(rjSi-s,

sweet)

(Xa/n7rpd-r, bright).

Obs. 1.

From

different

a few Nominal-Stems verbs are derived with endings and with different meanings thus from
;

SovXo, Nom. Sov\o-s, slave: Sovkd-a, I enslave, SouXcu-m, 1 am a slave; from TroXep,o, Nom. irokefio-s, war, !roXe;ie-o> and irdXepl^-a, I make war, jroXe/id-a, / make hostile. Obs. 2. ^A desiderative meaning belongs to verbs in creia, as well as to several in aa and taa yeXaa-eia, I am inclined to laugh; hpaaeia, I desire to do; <j)oiida), I want to murder; The verbs of the last two terminaKKava-idai, I want to weep.

tions frequently indicate a bodily weakness or illness

wxpidiny

I am pale ;

o^daKjuda,

I suffer in

the eyes.

IV.

Adverbs.

3535.

On

the Adverbs formed from Adjectives,

comp. 201-204.

Prom

Verbal

and Substantive -^\Bm.a adverbs are

formed by the

suffixes
Digitized

by Microsoft


-220

; ; ;

FOKM OF

COMPOSITIOlf.

"54.

&r]v {ahriv), paroxytone

Sov, oxytone: ava-tpav-Sov, openly; ayiKrj-Sov, gregatim Kpi^S rj v, clam ; cvXXrjPSriv, collectively,
:

briefly

(Stem Xa^);
(TTrep), a-ireipco,

<nrop-abriv, scatteredly

(Stem
tI, oxytone: ivop,aa--T i, ly

I sow
iKkrivicr-T
i,

name

(ovojia^a)

graece
(JKkqvl^ai).

B) Composition.

354.

I.

Form

of Composition.

noun, standing first in a compound, appears in the

its

form of

Stem

ocrTV-yeiTcov, neigJiiour to the city

cra/cey-TraXo?,

yopo-SiSdaKoXo-^, teacher of the chorus;

shaJcer of the shield (to aaKOs:).

Consonant-Stems are usually united to the second part

by the

connecting-vowel o

avBpiavT-o-Troi6-<; (6 avBpid-s:),

maJcer of statues, statuary ; -Trarp-o-KTovo-';, murderer of a father. This o, further, is frequently inserted after

weak vowels
of

<pvcn-o-\6yo-';,

acquainted with nature

in place

lj(0v-o-(pdyo-<;, fish-eating,

and regularly stands

a

a in the Stem
:

rjijbepo-hpofio-^,

')((opo-ypd(f)o-<;,

descriher of
xP'V'yo-''}

a country.
it

runner hy day The o is dropped

before vowels
dSeX.<f>o-<;,

leader of the chorus ; nrarp-

a father's brother;

remains, however, where

the word originally began with

digamma

34, D.)

Horn.
Ohs.

Sri/xioepyo-^, Att. BTjfiiovpyo^, artisan.

Thus Stems in ocompounds ^i(J)o-kt6vos, killing with the sword (Stem ^ ^ e y) Teixo-fiaxi-a, a contest at the wall (Stem reixes); the final vowel of A-Stems is sometimes preserved as a or dpcra-Xoyor, a speaker about
to these rules are frec[uent.

Exceptions

often appear in an abbreviated form in

t

?; :

virtue

funeral offerings. case-form seldom occurs instead of the Stem-form: veas-oiKos, shed for ships ; opf cro-t-(3aT!)r, wandering on the hills.
;

x'>^-4>opos, hearer of

355.

The

ending of a word

is

often

somewhat
ambitious

altered in composition, especially

when the compound

The ending

word

is

an adjective

Tifirj,

(f)iX6-Tifio-^,

TrpayjjLa,

7roXv-7rpdry/j,wv,
Digitized

much

occupied.

by Microsoft

358.

FORM OF COMPOSITION.

221

1J9

notice

Masculine and Femiaine, e? Neuter, deserves special this ending occurs a) in many adjectives formed directly from Verbal;
:

Stems

a-/3A^j8-77?,

uninjured (^Xa/3, Pres. ^XdirTa)

avTdpK-7j<;, self-sufficient (avro-'i

and apKew). b) in adjectives, whose second part comes from a substantive in e? (Nom. o?) Se/co-eT?;?, ten years old
:

(ero?)
Ohs.

/ca/co-j^^i;?,

of a had nature

(fl6o<;).
:.

Observe
A

avTo-xeip-i,
irav-br]fi-el,

compound adverbs in ft or t, oxytone with one's own hand; a-jwrB-L, without pay;
also the

with the whole people.

356.

verb

without

changing

its

nature

can

only be compounded vcith a preposition.

The looseness

of the connection in such compoimds is the reason for the position of the Augment mentioned in 238 aTTO^aXKa, I throw away ; a-rre^aXov, I threw away.

For the same reason

prepositions are frequently sepa-

rated from their verbs in the poets and in Herodotus,,

and in some cases even in Attic prose (comp.

This separation
is

446).

called tmesis.

When any other word is to be compounded with a Verbal-Stem, a noun is first formed of the two, e. g. from \i6o-'; and Stem ^aX, Xt^o-/3oXo-?, throwing stones, and thence \i6o^o\e-a), I throw stones ; so likewise from
vav-<; and fid-xpjj,ac comes first vav-fid'^o-^, fighting at sea, and thence vav/^La'^ico from eS and Stem ipry, eue/oyexTy?,
;

benefactor, evepyeTeci),

J do good.

357. A substantive of an abstract meaning can only be compounded with a preposition without changing its termination Trpo and ^ovXij make Trpo^ovXri, previous consultation. In every other compound the abstract substantive must take a derivative ending: Xi6o<i and ^dX-i) make Xi6o^oXld, throwing stones ; vav^ and fJ.d'XT], vavfia^ia, sea-fight; e5 and Trpd^K, evirpa^ia, well being.
:

358.

Compounds having the

Digitized

first

part formed

by Microsoft


222
directly

MBAilING OF COMPOUNDS.

359,

in the poets.
1.

from a Verbal-Stem are rarely met with, except They are formed in two ways, viz.

to

the Verbal or the Present-Stem is joined directly Stems beginning with a vowel, and to those beginning with a consonant by means of the connecting-

vowels e, t, or o: BuK-e-Ov/j^o-^ (Pres. haKV-m, cL 5), heart-gnawing ; jreiO-apxo-';, obedient to order (7reldo/j,ai,

and apxn) ap%-t-T;TCBj/, master-builder ; fucr-o-yvvo-^, women (j/,icria}). 2. A form strengthened by cr and resembling the Weak Aorist-Stem is joined in the same way to the second part of the word: 'Kvcr-i-irovo-<;, freeing from
>

hater of

trouble;
horses
;

irXri^-i'n-iro-'i

{irXrfa-aa,

cl.

4,

a),

whipping

arpe'y^L-hi.Ko-'i (o-r/je^tD, cl. 1),

perverter of right.

359.

II.

Meaning of Compounds.

In regard to their meaning compound Adjectives and

Substantives are divided into three principal classes

In them the second in any way altering its meaning, is merely defined by the first. These compounds may be paraphrased by changing the first part either into an Adjective or an Adverb;
1.

Determinative
is

compoimds.

word

the principal,

which,

without

aKp6-iro\i-<;,
ir6Xi,<;

high town,
;

castle,

i.

e.

ciKpa ttoXi?
i.

(Horn.
Tj/jbipa
;

aKprf)

fiea-rjfi^pia,
i.

mid-day,

e.

yu.eo-7;

yJrevBo-Kfipv^,

e.

ylrevSrj^
i.

Krjpv^, false

herald;

6p,6-

SovXo-?, fellow-slave,

e.

ofiov

BovXevav
;

fieyaXoTrpeTrij';,

grand, properly, appearing as great

i.

6->lri-yovo<;,

late-bom,

e. 0T|r6 yevofievo';.

This class

is

the least numerous. yet

so,

is

2. Attributive compounds. indeed also defined by the

In them the second word

first,

that the latter

alters its

meaning and together with the first forms a new idea, which is attributed as a quality to another word. These compounds can generally be paraphrased by employing the Participle of exa or a verb akin to it in meaning, and adding to this the second word as an
Digitized

by Microsoft

;: ;

!559.

MEANING OF COMPOUNDS.

223

object, the first

becoming an attribute to the object:

i.

fiaKpo-yeip, longi-manuB, Icng-handed,

6%(Bj/

e. fiaicpk<;

Xipa<;

(not the long

silver

hand

itself)

dpyvp6-ro^o-<;, provided

with a
TjOOTTo-?,

how,

of the

ojjloi. e. apyvpovv to^ov <j>epaiv; same kind, i. e. 6/ioiov rpcnrov exjcov

;

ryXavK-MTTt-';,

bright-eyed,

i.

e.

yXavKoix;
litter

6(f>6aXfiov^
Kov(f>6;

exovcra

iriKpo-^afio-';,

having a

wedding ;

vov-<i, frivolous, trifling ;

SeKcireTi]<;,

a-<i>-(f>pa}v,
i.

ten years old,

e.

of sound sense, sober having or lasting ten years

avTo-xeip, making use of one's

Obs.

own hands.
adjectives in -mSj;s

To
:

these belong the

numerous

and

oeiSrjs

yvvai.Kai8rjs=yvvmK0-eiSris (eiSoy), womanKA;e, womam's/i.

3.

Objective

compounds, or those of dependency.

In

them either the first word is grammatically governed by the second or the second by the first, so that in the
case: ^i'^o;j^o-?=t^

paraphrase one of the two must be put in an oblique rivia ex^ov, guiding the reins, driver
\oyo-ypd^o-<;, speech-writer,
Xoyo-'s,
i.

e.

X07011? ypdt^av
;

d^io-

worth speaking, i. e. "Koyov d^tc; loving the Muses, i. e. ^CkSiv rdi; Movcra?
fearing the gods, i. e. BeBico^ made by hand, i. e. %6/3crl
toik; Balfiova<;
-Troirjro^
;

(j)i\6-fwva-o-i;,
;

SeKn-Saificnv,

^etpoTrow/To?,

6eo^Xa^i]<;, injured
;

by

Crod,

i.

e. vtto
i.

6eov ^e^Xafi/j,evo<;
oXic<o yev6fjLevo<s.

olKoyeviji;,

born in

the house,
Ohs. 1.

e.

iv

Prepositions may be joined with substantives in any of the three principal classes (1) Determinative : ajK^i-diarpov, a round theatre, i. e. a theatre extending itself round in a circle air-ekevdepos, one who has been freed by another, not by himself,

1. e.

a freedman
i. e.

(6 ajro tivos i\ev6epos &v)

(2) Attributive
himself,

iv-6eos,

iv eavra 6e6v ex'""' carrying

a god in

god-inspired ; afi^tKicov, viz. ve^s, i. e. Kiovas apx^ iavTov ^^ov, a temple encompassed around with pillars ; (3) Objective : iy^aipios,
i.

e.

ev

TJj

x^P^

^^ ^^

home;

iffylirTrios, i. c.

e^'

tTTTro) atv,

heing on a horse, belonging to a horse.

Obs. 2.

Against

compound words draw back the

the general rule ( 85), according to which accent as far as possible from

the end, those compounds in -o-s in the Nominative whose second part comes directly from a Verbal-Stem ( 356), usually accent this Stem JmJMSMife|mgining. They are paroxy-

224

MEANING OF COMPOUNDS.

360

tone wlien the last syllable but one is short, oxytone when it is long Xoyo-ypd(j>o-s, speech-writer ; /xj/rp-o-KroVos, mothermurderer ; TraiS-aycoyd-r, boy -leader ; /ifXo-jrojdr, composer of
:

songs.

When

the meaning

is

passive, the second

word remains

unaccented: avT6-ypa<f>o-s,written'by one's self;

firjTp-o-KTOvo-s,

murdered hy

the

mother ; Svcr-dycoyos, hard

to guide.

360.

The

prefix

av [comp.
consonants

dvev, without, Lat. in-,

Engl.

un-~\

before
called

[comp. Lat.

i-

in
its

i-ffna-ru-s],

alpha privative

on account of

meaning, is found in a very large number of compounds, which belong to the determinative class if the second part has arisen from a verb or an adjective, but chiefly to the attributive if from a substantive d-ypa^o^, un:

written,

i.

e. oil
;

yeypafMfj.evo';
av-athrj<;,

av-e\ev6epo';, unfree,
i.

i.

e.

ovK eKevOepo'i

shameless,

e. alhS)

ovk e^^wv

Determinatives airai-';, childless, i. e. iralha'; ovk ej(ttiv. with av (a) from substantives are rare and poetic: fjLijTTjp afirjToip, an unmotherly mother, i. e. /jltjttjp ou
firjTTjp

ovaa.
originally
:

Ohs.

"Words

have a not av

beginning -with digamma ( 34, D.) a-eKav, contracted aKcov, unwilling ; a-f iK-jjr,
;

contracted alK-qs, reproachful (Stem cIk, foixa)

tracted apyo-s, inactive (epyo-v, work).

d-cpyo-s, con-

The

prefix S u ? corresponds to the English mis, and,

as the opposite to ev, denotes something unfortunate,

a-wkward, difficult: Sv^dpaTo<;

2i/9/3ouXo9, ill-advised,
i.

324, lo), displeased;

e.

KaKa^; ^ovXd<; exoJv (attribu-

tive)
too,

determinative
:

Sy?a\a)T09, hard to capture ( 324, 17). Here, compounds from substantives are
Au?7rcr,|0t9,

rare

Hom.

unfortunate Paris.

Digitized

by Microsoft

225

Part Second.

SYNTAX.
Preliminary Remarks.
361. 1. Syntax (<7vvTa^i<i, arrangement) teaches the use of the forms discussed in the first part of the grammar, and the way in which words are arranged

into sentences,
2.

sentence
is

sentence

and sentences are combined together. is either simple or compound. Every simple in which the necessary parts of a

sentence occur only once. 3. The necessary parts of a sentence are a) the Subject, i. e., the person or thing about which

something
h)
Obs. 1.

is stated,
i. e.,

the Predicate,

that which
finite

is

stated.

verb ( 225, 4) contains a complete sentence in itself, in -which the personal ending contains the Subject, and the Verbal-Stem the Predicate ^j//xi', I say;
:

Every

form of the

i^afiev,

Obs. 2.

In

we

said.

many

cases the Subject remains undefined:

;

<f)acri,

4.

not defined, because readily understood by the Greeks vei, lie rains, i. e., Zeus, for he alone can cause rain ia-aXiriy^e, he blew the trumpet, i. e., the trumpeter The Subject of the impersonal verbs for it is his business.
they say, people say or
it is
: ;

Set,

xpVt

'*

*'*

necessary, is also undefined.

The Predicate is either Verbal or Nominal; it is Verbal when expressed in the form of a finite verb: KOjOo? i^aa-lXevere, Cyrus ruled; it is Nominal when
tive)
5.

expressed in the form of a noun (substantive or adjecKvpo<; ^aaiXei/'; r)v, Cyrus was king.
:

The Predicate must agree with the Subject, viz., ihe Verbal Predicate in number, the Nominal in number
and
case,

and whgj^/^g j^yajft^c^jy^ive, in gender Q

also

226
ol
"TToXe/jLiot,

PKELIMINAEY EEMAKKS.
ivLKTjcrav,

361.

the

enemies

conquered;

fj

iicu)(r,

ueyaXt]

r)v,

the lattle

was

great.

Exceptions, 362-366.
6.

In
:

many
o

cases this

agreement alone
/m6vi/j,o<;,

is sufficient

to

express the relation of a Nominal Predicate to the Subject

^k^as SX^o'i ov

great prosperity

is

not lasting ; Aepioi kukoI, the Lerians (iahabitants of the

island of Leros) are lad.

dicate
is

But mostly the Nominal Preby

oX^c; ov This verb, thus used,
:

more
to

clearly connected with its Subject

the yerb
jjLovifio^

be

(substantive verb)
elcriv.

d fii^a<;

ianv, Aepiot kukol

intransitive
be

is

called the Copula.

7.

The

and passive verbs, which denote

made, appear, be named, designated, chosen and the like, in order to produce a complete sentence, often require a Nominal Predicate along with the
to become,

Verbal one.

In this case also the Nominal Predicate must agree with the Subject KOpo? iyeveTo ^acriXevt;,
:

Gyrus became
8.

Cyrus rex factus The Greek language expresses

Jcing,

est,

comp.

392.

many

definitions of

time, order,
tives,

and kind, less frequently of place, by adjecwhich are expressed in English by adverbs or prepositions with substantives. These adjectives, which must agree with the Subject, are to be considered as
supplementary Predicates
:

TpLToiot, airifKBov, they

went

away on

day ; AaKSaifj,6vi.oi varepoi a^iKovro, the Lacedaemonians arrived later, posteriores advenerunt opKio'i <TOi Xeyco, I tell you on oath.
the third

On
9.

the similar use of the participle as a supplementary Predicate,

see 589, &c.

simple sentence
to the verb.

is

enlarged by an Oiject being

is

added

The Object
:

that to which the

action of the verb extends

"^oj/cpdrrjv, the

oi 'A6rjvaioi,

airmTeivav tov

Athenian's killed Socrates.

On

the different kinds of Objects and the

are indicated, see 395 Digitized

402. by Microsoft

manner

in

which they


361.
10.

PEELIMINAET BEMAKKS.

227

The Active

verbs, which correspon-L in

meaning
7, i.e.

to the Intransitive and Passive ones mentioned in

the verbs which denote to make, name, designate, choose and the like, frequently also require a Nominal Predicate. But as this belongs to the Object, it must agree with it oi Tiepaai, tov Kvpoi> e'lKovTO jSaaiXea, the Persians chose Cyrus Icing \_Persae Cyrum regem elege:

runt}.

Comp. 404. This kind of Predicate is called a Dependent Predicate. As the Dependent Predicate here appears in the Accusative, so it may in other cases appear in the Genitive or Dative. Comp. 438 Obs.
;

589, &c.
11.

Another enlargement of the sentence is the Attrie., any nominal definition added to a substantive as essentially belonging to it and forming with it one idea KaX6<; wttto?, a fine horse ; 6 irapiov Katpo^, the
bute,
i.
:

present time (the present).

Ols.

The Greek

language in

many

cases adds

an Attribute
: ;

to

the designation of a person, expressive of a generic idea

rjpaies

Horn.
avtpcs

Aavaoi, ye heroes

Danai (ye warring Danai)

is

SiKatTTai,

ye judges, judices.

12. Different

from the Attribute

the Apposition.

Apposition

such a subordinate deiinition added to a substantive as does not exactly form one idea with it,
is is superadded rather for describing or illustrating and hence might generally be expressed in the form
:

but
it,

TlapvaaTi<;, rj tov K.vpov fiijTijp, of a descriptive clause TOVTOV fiaXKov icf>lXei, r) tov ApTa^ep^Tjv, Parysatis, the mother of Cyrus who was Cyrus' mother loved him more than Artaxerzes ; ivTevOev Kvpo? i^eXavvei Sia,
'

^pir/ia^
/j.eyaXTjv,

6t? H-oXocraovi, ttoXiv olKovfJLevqv, evSai,/j,ova

Kol

Colossi,

Cyrus marches through Phrygia to a populous, prosperous, and large city (which

from
.
.

there

was a

city).

Attribute and Apposition must agree with the substantive to which they belong, in the same way as

The

the Predicate

(5, 7)..,. '

^

^^ ,, .. Digitized by Microsoft


228

; ,

NUMBER AND GENDEK.

362,

Chap. XIV.

Numbek and

CtENDek.

362. The Singular sometimes has a collective sense, denoting a plurality iadri<;, clothing, clotJies ; yrXlvdo';,
:

bricks;

r)

iTnro'i, cavalry ;

f)

acnrii;, the heavi/-armed.

Sometimes a Predicate or Apposition in the Plural

refers to collective substantives in the Singular
vaiaiv
:

^Adrj-

o'iovrai "iTnrapxpv rvpavvov ovra aTTodavelv, the mass of the Athenians believe Hipparchus
7rX'fj0o<;

TO

died

as

ruler;

to crTpaTevfia

eiropi^eTO

oItov k6-

7rT0VTe<; tov'; jSovi xal ovov;, the

hilling the oxen

army

obtained food by

and asses. formed in Greek from many words, especially abstracts, which have no plural in Enghsh especially when the repetition of an idea is to be expressed: al eiri^dveiai koI XafiTrpoTrjTei ix twv ur^oivayv ^Ir^veerOai <f)i\ovcn,v, celebrity and glory usually

A Plural

is

arise from' the contests ; i/Mol al cral fieyaXai eiiTv^^iai

ovK apea-Kovcnv, your (repeated) great success does not

please

me; Hom.

Trai/re?

OdvaToi

aTvyepol, all hinds of

death are hateful.

Ohs. 1.

Poets frequently use the Plural in a generic sense where

the singular with the indefinite article
Kakoifj.eB' av,
(pCkoi,
:

we employ
yvvaiKav
Ohs. 2.
inferior to a

ovk hv

rja-aoves

1 should not

like to he called

The speaker often uses the

a

woman ;

a friend.

[oomp. Lat. nos\.

first person Plural of himself In this case the Masculine is used even

when

woman

is

the speaker.

Thus Electra
will fall, if it

says, v^aoijieff

Xphy ""'pi Tifiaipoviiepoi, father's avenger.

Ohs. 3.

must

he,

as

my

In Homer there are many Plurals of ahstract

; :

ideas,

which

we

express in the Singular

the Plural, however, properly

'm-irocrivrjs

denotes the various manifestations of such ideas

vooio, in the foolishness (the foolish

eKeKaaro, hy horsemanship he w<xs distinguished; at^pahlriai.

thoughts) of his mind.

The Neuter Plural comes very near in its 363. meaning to the Singular. This explains the peculiar Greek custom, that the Neuter Plural has the verb in
Digitized

by Microsoft

;:

366,

NUMBEK AND GENDEE.

229
this to
thiyigs

the Singular : ttw? ravra iravaerai; how is end? ra -Trpdyfiara ravra Seipd ecmv, these

are

terrible.

Ohs. 1.

Some

Plural Neuters,

which denote a plurality

:

of

persons, sometimes have the verb in the Plural, as in the sense of the authorities
Ohs. 2.
;

tcL reXr;,

The

ra

'iOvt],

the peoples.

Homeric and the

Common

Greek Dialects (Intro-

duction, 4), generally allow the Plural Verb with the Neuter Plural : Horn, trtrapra XcXwi-at, the ropes are loosed.

it)

364.

With an

indefinite

Neuter Subject
it is

(in English,

the Adjective Predicate

is

frequently in the Plural

impossible to escape;

dSvvard

scttiv diro^v^eiv,

this is the case especially with

the Verbal Adjective in

to be attempted.

T60-?: iiri-x^eipriTia

r/v, it

was

persons or things are spoken of, the always admissible as well as the Dual, and both numbers may be used in referring to the same thing: iyeXao'dTTjv aiJ,<pa), ^Xeyfravre'} et? dWrj\ov^, they both laughed after looking at one another;
365.

When two

Plural

is

S T 6 jrapdSet/yfj.a, S) Aa^^ij? re kuI NiKia, give an example, Laches and Nicias ; u Ad-)(7]<; re Kal Ni/ct'a, ei-Trarov, Laches and Nicias say.
366. The Neuter of an adjective in the Singular as well as in the Plural easily becomes a substantive iv fleam, in medio, in the midst; iv rm Trapovri, at the
:

present moment, for th present

ix ttoWov, for along

time ; Seivd, terrible things. Hence a Neuter Adjective often stands as Predicate to

one or more Masculine or Feminine substantives to express a class or genus in general Hom. ovk dyaObi
:

government of many is not a good thin^ ; opOov ak7]6eC del, truth is always the right thing; Seivbv ol iroXKoi, KaKovpyovi orav e)(acri, irpoa-rara';,
iToXvKoipavi'r], the

a bad thing is the many when they have base leaders rapaxal Kal a-rda-eK oXeOpia Tal<i troKeaiv, disturbance

and

discord are


230

THE ARTICLE.
367.

367
instead of being

The demonstrative pronoun,

Neuter as in English, frequently agrees in gender and number with the Predicate to which it refers, just as
in the in Latin:

ovroi

elcnv avSpe';, those are

men;

oi)To<i
rt?

opo(; icTTl BiKaioavvrj^ aXrjOfj

re Xeyeiv kol
to

a av Xd^rj

awoBi,S6vai,, this is the idea of justice,

speak the truth

and
esf].

to give

back what we have received [haec notio justitiae

The relative pronoun also often agrees in Gender and Number, not with the preceding substantive to which it refers, but with the substantive following, which is added
as a Predicate
:

<f>iXou,

b /j.eytcrTOv

wyadov eanv, ov
is the

(f)povri^ovaiv, they

do not care for a friend, which

greatest good.

Chap. XV.

tive

The Akticle.
57,

368.

The

Article
still

6,

to

is

originally a demonstror
as such in

Homer, both and adjective sense, and frequently also in the language of the other poets Hom. ttjv iym 01 Xvcrco, HEE I mil not give up ; poet, tov, & Zev irdrep, <p9icrov, HIM, father Zeus, destroy ; Hom. (pfflaei ere to
in a substantive
:

pronoun, and

employed

(70V

fj.evo(;,

this

thy courage will he thy ruin.

Article in this demonstrative sense
is

369.

The

also

employed in the following cases ia Attic prose 1. In connection with fikv and Se d jjkkv, the one ;
:

6 Se,

the other.
Ols.

Used

adverbially, to (to) fiiv

to (to)
;

Si,

mean

partly

partly,
2.

Sometimes
In
370.
irpo

also
;

with Kai and Be

kuI

and
3.

that he ordered

tov koX tov,

the one

top KeXevcrai,, and the other.

TOV, before that, formerly.

real Article generally corresponds to the

The

English

definite

sa^i^edij^imfsm^

set forth

an

object,

374.

THE AKTICLE.

231

either as a single one (the individualising article) or aa

a class
Ols.

(the generic article).

o,
fj,

Yet in many

TO in Homer almost always has a demonstrative power. cases comp. especially 379 the nse of these

forms approaches very near to that of the Attic Article. The Article, however, in Homer is scarcely ever necessary, and is
frequently omitted also in the Tragic writers.

371.

1.

The

Individualising Article

sets

forth

single object above others of the

same kind, and that

a) as known or having been pointed out before Herod. XaX/ttSee? ra? ett' 'Aprefiiaio) e'iKocri vfja^ irapelr XovTO, the Ohcdddeans furnished the (before mentioned) twenty ships at Artemision; Hep^v^ a^eipa<; rrjv avapiOfj/rjTov (TTpaTiov riXOev iirl rrjv 'E\Xa8a, after having collected the (well-known) innumerable army, Xerxes marched against Greece.
Ohs.

In this sense proper names also, which in general do not need it, may take the Article 6 SoiKpaTjjr, Socrates, whom you know, or who was mentioned before.
:

372. b)

A thing as

distinguished from others

:

by the

addition of distinguishing circumstances

XiopKov/jLev, the city

6 rcav 'Adrjvaioov

^fio^, the Athenian people (no other) ; 17 ttoXw rjv irowhich we are besieging (just this).

373. The distinguishing circumstance expressed by the Article is often indicated in English by the possessive pronoun eKacrro^ tSjv STjfuovpy&v rrjv Te')(y7]v Ka\co^
:

i^eipyd^ero, each of the artisans practised

Ms

art well.

374. In connexion with numerals the Article sometimes denotes that the number to which it is added

stands in a deimed relation to another

fji^pr),

number

two-thirds

tS>v Tpiijpav rpiaKoaicov ovcrwv

ri

ra Svo t&v

iracT&v ra<; Si,aKO(ria<;

iroXi^ Trapic'^^eTo, of the triremes,

of which there were three hundred in all, the city furnished The Article has a similar effect with two hundred. quantitative adjectives of a more general kind iroXKol,

many

oi

iroXkoL most

TrXeoye?, more Digitized by Microsoft

:

ol ifKeove^, thi

; ;

232

THE AKTICLE.

375.

greater part ; SXKoi, alii

of

ol aXXot, caeteri ;

oXijoiiUfew

ol oXiyoi, the oligarchs.

375.

2.

The

Generic Article indicates a whole class

objects
ol TroXirat,
;

homogeneous

all the

citisem

6 prjTcop, the orator

(by profession)

hel tov <rTpaTiayn)v

the

Tov

soldier
Obs.

ap^ovra fiaXKov rj roii'i iroXefilov; ^o^eiaOai, mast fear his superior rather than the enemy.

Hence the Article may

when

the plural
Ohs. 1).

a whole class

a-6ev(ts, orators like

with proper names in be described : o i ArjiioDemosthenes (a Demosthenes, comp. 362,

is to

also be used

376.

The

Article
an.

is

not used
:

when a

substantive

only expresses

dv6pa>7rov -^vxh tov deiov /iere^et, man's soul partakes of the divine ; so Geo?
;

idea in general

denotes the deity

wise,

6 6e6<s,

a particular god; so likeexpressions,

in

many
vvKTO'i,

other

current

the

more

ancient

method

of not using the Article has been pre-

served
KUTo,

hy night

; ri/jbipa^,

by day ;

eiri

OaXdaa-y,

at sea; tt/jo? darv, to

yt]<;,

town; kot
;

ar^pov, in the country

; i^ai,pS>

under

the earth

iv Se^ia, on the right

Xoyov,

I exempt.
The
Article
is

377.

omitted with a number of sub-

which by custom have almost acquu-ed the force of proper names: /SatrtXeu?, the king (of the
stantives,

Persians)

TrpvrdveK,

the presidents

(as officials)

ev

d/cpoTToXei, in the Acropolis

(Athens).
361,
3,

378. The Predicate

Article: Kvpo<; iyeveTo

lo) generally has no

ruiv Uepcrcbv,

^aaiXeii^

Cyrus

became king of the Persians; irovo'; evKkeia'; Trarijp, labour is father of fame ; ol 'Adrjvawi lieptKXea eiXovro cTTpaTiryov, the Athenians chose Pericles general (comp.
387, 392, 403,
^

and 438,

Obs.).

any adjective, paradverb, as well as the infinitive, may be made a substantive : Horn, o yepav, the old man ; ol irXovaioi, the rich; 6 ^6V!'./J/^/^lg^mero&/!i^^?, the neighbour;

379.

By means

of the Article,

ticiple, or

 3*^-

THE ARTICLE.
rk
kcitco, the

233
under (part)
;

oi irapovTe';, those present ;

ot

iraXai, the ancients

Ohs.

to

/j,ia-eiv,

hating or hatred.

tence,

the Neuter Article any word, or even a whole senbe represented as one ohjeot : to avTjp, the word dvrjp or the idea "man;" tA Tvadi <reavT6v, the saying or rule

With

may

"

Know

thyself."

Article ( 375) generalises the idea of a participle, which then is to be translated by a relative phrase: Troieira) tovto 6 fiovKoixevo^, do that,

380.

The Generic

who will; firj ^r)Telre rov ravra Xe^ovra, seek not who mil say this (comp. 500). 381. By the Article many adverbs placed between it and
stantive

(one)

a sub-

become attributive
r]

adjectives: oi
fjSovfj,

cf that time;

irapavriKa

the

totc avBpanoi, the people momentary pleasure ; at

ij

evddSe
excessive

yvvaiKcs, the

women

of this place;

ayav

iXevBepia, the

freedom.

same way a genitive or a preposition with a subbetween the Article and another substantive, becomes an attributive clause : tA tUv 'Ad-qvaiwv irpdyfiara, the affairs of the Athenians ; ol iv rfj iroXej avdpamoi, the people in the city ; rj Ka6' rjpepav Tpo(j>fi, the daily nourishment; oi avv ^virap rjSovai, the
382. In the

stantive, placed

painless pleasures.
383. The Article often stands alone, sometimes with the Genitive of a substantive (comp. 409, 410), sometimes with a preposition followed by a substantive; in such a construction the Article has the force

of a substantive

379)

to, tSsv ^Adrjvalcov,

the affairs
rfi iroXei,

(possessions, interests) of the Athenians ; ol iv

the (people) in the
later (events).

dty

ra

fieTo,

Tavra, what follows, the

384. When a substantive with an attributive ( 361, ll) adjective has the Article, the adjective stands between the substantive and the article : o ar/ado^ avrjp, the good

man.
is to be prominent, added as apposition ( 361, 12), the substantive stands first, and the adjective with the

385. If the substantive alone

to be

and the adjective

articU follows, thug,^^,,^^^

^^ ^.^^^^^^

234

THE AETICLE.

386

a) The substantive witliout Article, when the case is such that the substantive, if put alone, would have no article, rt Btacftepei avOpanro'i aicpaTr)^ d'qpiov tov aKparea-TaTov ; in what does an ungovernable man
differ from the most ungovernahle beast ? for if drjplov stood
it would be without Article, 07]plov, from a beast. The substantive has the Article, when by itself, even without an adjective, it must have the Article ol Xtot TO Tetyo? irepieZkov to kuivov, the Chians pulled down the new one (which they themselves had (their) wall built) for even without the adjective it would have to

alone
b)

be TO

TeZ)(p';

irepieTKov ( 373).

886.

The same
:

rule holds good with regard to the

the

position of the attributive additions

and 382
StJ/xo?,

o ^A9r}vaiaiv

BrjfjLa,

mentioned in 381 Athenian people ; 6

is,

o tcov 'A67]vala)v, the people, that

the Athenian ;

6 ixeTh TavTa ypbvo'i, the after time; TavTa, the time which folloived this.

o yjpbvo'i o /iera

387. An adjective which without the Article either precedes or follows a substantive having the Article, is predicative, i. e. the character is assigned to the substantive only by this word ( 361, 4, 8, and lo) ayaOb^ 6 avTjp or o avTjp ayaOo'i (viz. effTuv), the. man is good;
:

airavTe'i 6')(pfiev to acofia dvTjTov, we all have a body (which is) mortal. The translation may often be effected by a relative clause ol A.6r)valot, riyovvTo avTovofiav to TrpwTov avfifid'xaiv, the Athenians had the lead of allies (who) at first (were) independent ; (paivofiai, /xeyaXa? ra? vTTocT'xeaei'; TToiovfjuevoi;, I seem to make promises which
:

are great.
Obs.
tain,

Comp.

378.

the use of the Article is very unceradded to which they belong 6 'Ev<f>pa'n)s norafios or 6 norauos 6 Eirc^paTijr, the river Euphrates ; fj A'iTvri

With proper names

when the
class is

TO opos.
Tj

Mount Etna;

'Sinikia

rj

vrja-os,

the island of Sicily;

iroXis ol Tapo'ol, the city qf Tarsi,

388.

Article

The when

possessive

pronoun

is

preceded by the
referred to:

^ig&l^^el'^^'^jj/crosfe'^* ^

SSMI.

THE AETICLE.

235
ifiof

6 e/io? eralpo';,

my

(particular) friend;

eratpo?,

a friend of mine.

389.

avTO'i, as a predicate, put before or after a

substantive with the Article,

means

self: avrb'i 6 ttotj;/?

or o TTarrjp

an

but as put between the Article and the substantive and means same: 6 avTo<s dvijp, the same man, idem vir. With the demonstrative pronouns ovtoi, oBe, iKelvo<;, a substantive, not being a predicate, has regularly the
a\)r6<i, it is

the father himself, ipse pater ;

attribute

Article

o5to? o avr/p or d av7]p

gift.
is

ovro'i, this

man ;
is

eKeivo

TO htopov, that

But when the substantive

wanting
:

a pre-

dicate the Article

ovTO'i,

eV IXepcrat? z/d/io9 eaTiv

among

the

Persians

this is law.

Comp.

367.

390. TTa? without the Article before a substantive without the Article means in the Singular every : iraaa The Article before ttS? gives it the ir6Xi,<;, every city.

meaning of whole :
Tvdvra'i
6-irKiTa<i,

r/

-Trdcra 7r6\t?, the

whole city

Toii'i

the whole of

the heavy-armed.

Most

generally ttS? as well as 0X09 without the Article precedes or follows a substantive provided with the Article Tvdaav vjuv Tfjv dXrjOeuiv ipa>, I will tell you the whole

truth; TOP dpiOfwv iTavTa Bi-)(a Sie\.d^ofj,ev, we divided the whole numher into two parts ; rrj'; rifj,epa<; 0X.17? hirpK.Oov ov ifKeov irivre koX elKoai cTraBlcov, during the whole day
they proceeded no mare than twenty-five stadia.
Obs.

Tvas with, the Article

translated

by " altogether

added to a numeral may often he " or " in all : " Aapeioc e/SacriXeuo-e
Da/rius ruled altogether thirty-six

ra navra l|

Km

TptaKovra

err],

.391. Expressions for measures are to be understood differently,

according to the position of the Article ecrxafov to opos, the extreme end of the mountain ; to ea-xo-Tov opos, the farthest mountain (in
:

contrast to other mountains)

market-place

77

fieoT]

^ ayopa p,ecrr], the middle (of the) ; ayopa, the middle market, that placed in the

middle of several others.

In Latin /<wto medium means both.

Digitize

;: ;

236

THE NOMINATIVE.

392

Chap.

XVI.Use

of the Cases.

A) The Nominative.

392,

The Nominative

is

the case of the subject and

of the predicate belonging to the subject ( 361, 3, 4). Hence, as in Latin with jio, dicor, videor, creor, &c.,
so in

cative
tive:

Greek with verbs of the same meaning the predinoun referring to the subject is in the NominaKaOia-TCLTai

ySacriXei/?,

he

is

appointed

Mng

'AXe^avBpo^ 6eb<; wvo/iid^eTo, Alexander deus appellaComp. 361, 7, 378, 403. batur.
Ohs.

aKoia, I

hear, in the sense of

:

I am
iv

called [Lat. audio],

also

belongs to these verbs

Koi 6eoXs

oi

'Adrjvais

^Ckmm^ovres

ix^pol rJKovov, the PMlippizers in Athens were called flatterers and objects of the gods' hatred.
393. The Nominative is frequently used instead of the Vocative in addressing a person, especially in connection with oJros o 'ATToXXoSmpoff ovTos, ov TT^pcfievels
stop ?
;

KoXaKes

You I

Apollodorus, won't you

and

also in exclamations

vrimos, the fool

B)

Tlie Vocative.

The person or thing addressed is in the VocaIn Attic prose & is generally put before it, except sometimes in animated discourse /xt) Oopv^elre, Si a.vSpe'; 'AdTjvaloi, don't make a disturbance, Athenians cLKovei'i Alff-^ivT) ; do you hear, Aeschines ?
394.
tive.
:

Ohs.

The

structure of a sentence,
inclosed

Vocative, like interjections, does not belong to the whence a word in the Vocative is

by commas.

C) The Accusative.
395. The Accusative, Genitive, and Dative mark an object as dependent, whence they are called cases of dependence {casus ohliqui, oblique cases).

The Accusative is the case of the Object, and therefore denotes generally the person or thing to which an action
is

directed.
Digitized

by Microsoft

398

THE EXTERNAL OBJECT.

is

237

The Object
it is

either external to the action

by which

affected
i. e.

internal,

tov BovXov, I strike the slave, or already contained in the action itself
tv-ktu)

Ti/TTTw irevTrjKovTa ifKrp/d'i,

Ohs,

I strike fifty

blows.

The Accusative
ol

therefore in the great majority of cases is

Only in a very few cases does it happen that a substantive after the manner of a verb is followed by an
dependent on a verb.
Accusative;
(rvfj-fiaxoi

reBvatn

ra 8eet

rovs

toiovtovs

aTTooToKovs, the allies are dead (beside themselves)

from fear

of such ambassadors.

396.

1.

The External

Object

expressed by the Accusative with transitive verbs as in other languages. Several verbs, however, are treated in Greek as transitive which in other languages are inis

transitive.

Such verbs are

benefit or injure,

a)

Those which signify to

whether

it

be by act or speech: ev or wyadov

iroikw, evepyerea),
;

I benefit
o)(f>e\eco,

(tovs evep'^eTrjo-avra';,

my

benefactors)
iroieo),
;

ovlvtj/mi,

I am
&c.
;

useful ; /ca/cw? or kukov

KaKoeo,

do

ill; aSi/ceo),

I do

wrong; v^pi^a,

I insult
and

jSXdTTTco,

I hurt,

also Ko\aKevco,

I flatter,

Ttficopio/n,ai,,

I avenge myself {tov lj(Qpov, an my enemy") ; o %a>KpdTr)<; ovSeva rSiv ttoXitwv ^SiKi^crev, Socrates acted unjustly to none of his fellow-citizens.
397.
its

Not
fioi jioi

object
:

what should properly be the

eijrt, el

clause

km

unfrequently the verb of a principal clause takes as subject of a subordinate tov vJoi/ elni, ei /le/xadijKe t7]v Texvriv, more animated
6 vlbs ftefidBr/Ke t^v re^^vrjp,

than Kai

and

tell

me

about

my son,

whether he has learnt his trade.

Comp. 519,

5, Ohs. 2.

398. b) The Accusative of the external Object is used with the verbs (pevyeo (comp. fugio), airoStBpdcrKa}, I run away from; (f}Odvco, I get before; BrjpdM, OTjpeva, I hunt after ; luixiop^at (comp. imitor), ^tjXoco, I rival
:

d/j,ei/3o/iai,

I repay, I respond
;

to ;

\av6dva (comp.
rj

lateo),

iKKeiirm (comp. defido)

deficit.

eKXeiiret, fie

ekivk, spes

me

Digitized

by Microsoft

238

THE INTERNAL OBJECT.

399.
c)
:

399.

This Accusative
alBeo/Mai,

is

furtlier

of emotion

ala'xyvo/j.at,
;

I am

used with verbs ashamed (tov

irarepa, before

am

my father) cjivXaTTOfiai, evKa^eo/MU, 1 my guard against; Oappea, I have confidence (rrjv l<T')(yv, in my strength) eKTrX-^rrofiai,, KaraTrXijTTofiai, I am amazed at ; similarly with o/ivv/jli, I swear
on
;

by

(rov'; deovi, the gods).

Ohs.

-As with ojj.wyi.1, so in exclamations, the Accusative is used even without a governing verh vai fii. tov Aia, Tes, by Zeus
:

( 64:3, 16).

3995.

The Space and Time over which an

:

action

extends are often expressed by the Accusative koivtjv oBov r)X6on,ev, we came by a common road ; Horn. KXifiaxa
vyjrTjXrjv

Kare^rjaero, she came

to

down

the

high ladder;

frXeiv
'ifieive

OaXaaffav,
i7/iepa9

ivravOa Kupo? vevre, there Cyrus remained five days.

navigate the sea;
4.06.

Comp.

405.

On

the Accusative of the aim, see

400.

2.

The

Internal Object

is

expressed by the Accusative not only with transitive, but also with intransitive and passive verbs. The internal Object is
a) a

word of cognate
8'

origin with the verb:

Horn.
alii

dXXoi
^ovTai,,

a/M(p'

oKXrjcn iidj^^rjv e/j.d'yovTO irvXrjatv,

circa alias portas

pugnam pugnahant ;
a wall;

Tel')(^o<i

rei^t-

they wall (build)

iroinrr^v irefiTreiv, to

send an escort,

make a solemn
;

procession;

KaKicrT7]v

SovXeiav eSovXevcrev, he served the worst service (endured

the worst slavery)

/SovXrjv ^ovXevar],

Horn, tw ireiaeai 09 ksv

apia-rriv

the best advice

you will obey him who advises (gives) r-qv ivavTtav vocrov vocrovfLev, we suffer

(sicken)

the opposite sickness ; fieydXTjv Ttvh Kpiaiv Kplverai,, he is judged (tried) in a great trial;
b) or

from

TVTTTeTai ^apvTaTTjv, he

a word akin to the verb in meaning; -nXrj'yrjv is struck a very severe blow; Trao-as
Digitized

by Microsoft

; ; :

402.

DOUBLE OBJECT.

23&

vocrov; Kafivei, he suffers

yoda-dai, to

from all diseases ; poet. oSvpfiara moan lamentations; iroke^ov ia-Tpdrevcrav

Tov lepov KaXovfievov, tTwy marched, out to the so-called holy war ; 'ypa(f>rjv Swu/cew', to pursue with a writ (comp. '^pa<j>r]v ypd^eadai) ;
c)

or a substantive defining the verb

;

^OXv/nria viKav,

to

conquer in the Olympic games

rydfiov; eariav, to give

a marriage-feast ; Horn, voarov

the return
;

o^vpofievoi, weeping

for

fievea irvelovret; 'Aj^aiol, the courage-breathing

a/yyeXlrjv i\6elv, to

Achaeans ;
looks)

go a message

; m-iip

6<pOa\-

fioicTi SeSopKO)';,

looking fire with the eyes (flashiQg fiery

by the verb a wound (produce by blovcs) opKia rd/iveiv, foedus ferire, i. e. foedus hostiam feriendo efficere; poet. r)he (97 dvapyld) rpoira? Karapp^iyvvai, it (anarchy) breaks flight, i. e. produces flight by breaking through the ranks.
cZ)

or the

resfult

of the action expressed

eKKO'i oiiTaaai, to strike

tive or

401. Often, especially in the poets, a neuter adjecpronoun in the Accusative is added to a verb as

a special qualification, almost hke an adverb ( 400, c) oXljov a/rreivai,, to be a little way off ; fjui'^a i/revSerat, he tells a great lie (comp. fier^a \jrevBo<; y^evSerai) roijro yalpco, at
this

rejoice;

tL

y^pijcrofiai,

rovrcp,

what use

shall

I make

of this?

irdvTa

wdcrop.ai,

I tvilt

obey in all things.

402.

3.

Double

Object.

Many
dffuhle

verbs have a double

;

object, consequently

Accusative

the following, which most frequently

occur wdth this construction

fncerum musicam)
alreo),

may

serve as examples:
fiovcriK'^v,
;

SiSdcTKCo (iSlBa^av tov iraiSa rrjv

;

docuerunt

KpCirrui,
TrpdTTo/j.ai,

hide

epwrdw,
present) '

I
;

asK

I demand ;
^

acquire (apyvpiov tovi;

yrapovra';, ^

money from
Digitized

those who are by Microsoft

KaKov

240
Xeyco Toii? ex^poiK;,
peofjAU, aTToa-Tepio),

DOUBLE OBJECT.

403,

of ; ivBvai,

I speak ill I deprive of ; ajji^ievvvfii, I put on

irepi^aKKo^iM,
:

of

my

enemies

acjiai-

avafUiMvrjcrKO),

I remind
a coat on
ttoXiv,

(riva

%tTciJi/(x,

some one)

I encircle

(ret^T? rrjv

tj he fLeyav icrrov v^aivev Horn. ScTrKaKU, she wove a double garmnt at the loom ( 399, 5).

the city with walls).

Ohs. 1.

In

the passive construction the

:

thing remains in the

;

Accusative fitSacrKO/xat Tf}v iiovciktiv I am rdbhed of the horse.

Obs. 2.
tive,

dcf)7ipi]^cu

Tov

ittttov,

Many other verbs

by an

besides these have a double Accusa-

external object being added to the internal one:

Horn, ov Zevs (j>tKet iravTolqv <j>cK6Tr]Ta, whom Zeus loved with multiform love, i. e. to whom Zeus manifested love in various

ways

( 400, a) ; Alcrx^vts KTrj(n<j>S)VTa ypacjifjv wapavojiatv ihlmKev, Aeschines prosecuted Ktesiphon with a charge of vio-

lating the law ( 400, 6) ; poet. ttoXKcl ce ohvpjiara Kareldov t^v 'HpaxXeioj/ e^oSov yoa>p,ivrjv, many wailings I saw you give vent
to

jSpoTos ovraa-ev avrjp,

about the departure of Heracles ( 400, c) ; Hom. eXxos o tlie wound which a mortal man struck

/le

me

( 400, d).

The Accusative as a Predicate. to an Object is in the Accusative. Hence the verbs mentioned in 361, 10, and 392, which signify naming, deeming, making, appoint

403.

4.

dependent Predicate relating

and the like, have a double Accusative in the Active, one of the external Object, and one of the Predicate : ol /coTut/ce? AXe^avhpov deov
ing, choosing, representing,
^

a>v6/u,a^ov,

the flatterers used to call

Alexander a god

alpeiaOai tov a a-Tpar 7] y 6 v, eligere aliquem ducem ; ov TOV? ifKeldTa e^ovTa'i evSatfiovecTT a t o u 9 vofii^co, I do

deem those possessing most the happiest ; wapeym ifMavTov eviretO ij, I show myself obedient ; 'iKa^e tovto S&pov, he received this (as) a gift.
not
Obs.

The want of the Article often of itself distinguishes the predicative accusative from the objective ( 378). In the passive construction both Accusatives must become Nominatives
according to 392.

404. 5.

In a freer way the Accusative

Digitized

is

joined to

by Microsoft

405.

DOUBLE OBJECT.

241

verbs and adjectives, to point out to what the idea of these words refers, in reference to what they are to be understood Kajivw ttjv Ke^a~Kriv, I suffer in the head
:

(comp.

400, V)

dBiKO^ iracrav dBiKiav, unjust in

every (kind of) injustice (in every way, comp. 400, a) ; "EXXTjviv etcri to jivo';, they are Greeks in race; ev
eyofj,ev

ra aoDfiaTa, we
If/ceXo?

are well in body ; Horn, ofifiaja

KoX ice^a\i)v

Ati TepTTi/cepavvo), in eyes and head

Zeus; 7rap6evo<; /caXij to etSo?, a maiden beautiful in form, or of beautiful form (facie pulchra) ; ovSeh avOpanro'; avTo>; vavTa ao^<;, no man
like thunder-loving
is

himself wise in everything ; 6 M.apava<; iroTafio^

el-)(e

e'lKoai,

KoX irevTe TroSa';

to

6 5/3 09,

the river

Marsyas was
is

twenty-jive feet in breadth.

This Accusative

called

the Accusative of reference.

Ohs.

^Hence
way ;
;

a great
:

number

of independent, almost adverbial.

Accusatives
this

to

Svofia,

in name,

hy name

to nXridos,

in

numher ; tov
sibly
b'lKTjv,

Tp67rov,

rjfv (\>v<tiv,

in character ; tovtov tov rpmrov, in hy nature ; jrpo^Scrti', ore the pretext, ostenttoXv,
?
*''^ ^'^^^ f {gratia) ; to ttav, by far ; ri, quid, what ? why ? avTO. TavTa iJKca, for this very

like

x^P'"! /'"'
;

altogether,
TL KKaiets
;

on the whale

why

weepest thou

reason

I come.

405. In regard to the ideas of space and time, the Accusative expresses extension (comp. 399, b) Hom. irav rji^ap ^epofirjv, a whole day I was borne along, totum diem ferebar ; ^aaKev<; Kal"EWrjve<; dTreixpv dXX'qXav TpioLKovTa aTaSia, the king and the Hellenes were thirty stadia distant from each other ; Horn.,

'XeiireTo

Sovp6<;
/juev

ipcoijv,

he

remained a spear's throw

fiefiinjo'daL
eiiOii^

behind ; tov

eS iraBovTa Bel

Xpovov, tov

Se 'irovr]cTavTa

eTrCKeKrjaOai, he

tov irdvTa who

to

has received kindnesses ought

all time, but he

to

remember them throughout

forget

who has done them immediately

them.
Ohs. 1.

An

to time, is to

Accusative used with ordinal numerals, in regard t^p^^HS^ tecfSSeft^^/o" or ago: e^bofiTji

242
fjijLcpav
fj

THE GENITIVE.
dvydrrjp

406.
daughter ?iad died

avT^

eTeTeXevTrjKCij his

seven days he/ore.

Ols. 2.

Freer Accusatives,
'^t
;

rov xpo""")

^'"'*

reXos, at last

referrible chiefly to time, are : tovtov to Xoittw, for the future, henceforth ; vporepov, formerly ; apxrjv, ii/p to the beginning,

time

hence entirely

ttjv Taxi<rTrjv,

supply

oSoj', the

quickest

(way)

p,aKpav, far, distant.

406. In the poets the Accusative joined to verbs of motion also denotes the place towards which an action

is

directed: Horn., tov he KXeo';

reaches

up

to

heaven; ttw? ^X^e?

ovpavbv Ik1, Ms fame "Ap709 quomodo Argos

;

venisti ?

On

the absolute Accusative of participles see

586.

D) The

Genitive.

407.

The Genitive generally denotes a thing

helonging to another.
Ohs.

Hence the Genitive is most commonly dependent on a noun, and even where it is governed by a verb, its use resembles that with a noun.

408.

1.

The Genitive with Substantives.

One
ways
1.
;

Substantive
the most

XaKparr]';
:

may be joiued to another in various common are 6 ^wcppovlaKov vtd?, Socrates son of

Sophroniscus
2. 3.

Origin.

^ ouKia TOV iraTpo';, the father's house: Possession.

v6fj,c<T/j,a

apyvpiov, a

silver coin

Material.

4.

Horn. hewa<; o'lvov, a cup of wine : Contents. ol irKelcTTOL tS>v '^Wrjvwv, most of the Sellenes:
^6^o<; tSiv TroXefMiwv, metus hostium,
a) the
i. e.,

Partitive Genitive.
5.

either

fear of the enemy,

i.

e.,

the fear which the

enemy
b) the

feels {Subjective Genitive), or,

fear about the enemy, i. e., the fear of which the enemy is the object {Objective Genitive).

6.
7.

hovKo'; irivre fivSiv, a slave

<Ypa(j>r)

worth jive minae

theft
:

Value.

kXott?}?,

an accusation of

Cause.

8.

TToXtTon

apev^mzmtwvJKbm^fm : Quality

4-12.

THE GENITIVE.
Horn.
Tpo'u)]<s

243

9.

iTToKiedpov, the city of (called) Troy

Designation.

Whicli of the two substantives in any particular case has to be expressed by the Genitive, is generally quite
as clear from their meaning as in English.

But the following

of

special peculiarities

in

the use
to

the

different

kinds

of

Genitives

deserve

be

noticed

409. a)

The Genitive denotes descent from a

of a Substantive
:

father,

even without the addition

0

%a>KpdT7]<i

liox^povicrKo v, Socrates the son of Sophroniscus ;

IKlfjimvo
<;,

MtX-

Ti,dSr](;

"'A/jTE/it?,

Miltiades son of Kimon; poet., Ato? Artemis, daughter of Zeus.

410. I) The Neuter of the Article with a Genitive has very different meanings (comp. 383) : ra rasv

'^XX/^vwv, the affairs, interests, possessions of the Hellenes (comp. rh '^XXrjvtKo) to Trj<; oXtyap^/a?, the nature
;

of the oligarchy; on the other hand, to tov AiyyttoaQkv 01"?, the word of Demosthenes ; to, tcov (plXco v Koivd, the property of friends is common.

411.

c)
:

The

expressions
{house),

i. e.,

idea of abode is to be supplied in the eh SoSaa-KaXo v <f>oiTa,v, to go to the master's to go to school iv or ek"Ai,Sov (Homer,
;

elp 'Ai'iSao h6fioi<;, in

Hades' dwelling, dominion), in or into

the lower world.

The Partitive Genitive (4), denoting a 412. d) whole to be divided, is most common with numerals and superlatives: iroWoX twv Kdrjvaiav, multi Atheniensium; vorepo'; rwv aSe\<j}v; which of the two
'

omnium optimus ; but also with various adjectives: ol airovhaloi, TOiv iroXiTav, the assiduous among the citizens. So, more freely in the
irothers? TrdvTwv dpia-To^,

Homeric poems
hrjiMov dvr\p,

Bia 6ed<ov, the divine one of the people

;

man

and

similarly, dvi)p

among goddesses ; t&v

pijTopcov,

a manfr^^t^^y.u^er^o^Jie orators.

: ;

244

THE GENITIVE.

41S.

The Partitive Genitive with names of places denotes jjySat t^? BottBTta?, Thebes in the whole territory JBoeotia ; with Neuter pronouns it sometimes denotes a eh tovto avoia'i Avhole which is attained by degrees
: :

rjXOov, eo
Ois.

usque insaniae progressi sunt.

which have a Partitive Genitive sometimes
:

Adjectives
; fj

follow the gender of the Genitive dependent upon them o rjjiKTVs ToO xpo""'"! ^^^ ^'^If 9f ^^ time (instead of to ijiwru tou

Xpovov)

ttXciVti) rrjs x^P'^^t '>nost of the land.

413.

e)

The

Objective Genitive (5, b)

may

be trans-

lated

by various

prepositions

evvoia

twv

cpiXcov, bene-

volence towards friends

Horn.,

epo'i iSrjTvo s

drinh ;
deeds

7]<jvyia

dwopla o-lto v, want of food ; ^Be irorriTo ?, eagerness for food and eyQpSiv, peace from enemies; arywve^
d<popfif)

Tuiyco V, contests in speeches ;

;

epyco v, stimulus to

d'woaTCKyt.'i
Xvo-l,^

tcov

'

Kdrivaiav,

defection

from
;

the

Athenians ;
citizens.
2.

Oavdrov, deliverance from death

^la
thf:

TrdXiTwv, with violence against the citizens, in spite of

Genitive ivith Adjectives

and Adverbs.

414.

The Genitive

is

joined to
i.

many

relative adjec-

tives

and their adverbs,

e.,

to such adjectives and

to

adverbs as are conceivable only in reference

something,

and points out the person or thing they refer to. The most important adjectives of this kind are 1. Koiv6<;, common ; Xhio';, olKelot;, own, peculiar, and others which imply property or belonging to, as vaos
:

Tov 'ATToXXdji/o?, tcmplc sacrcd session, comp. 408, 2).

tfijoo?

to

Apollo (pos-

2.

Adjectives
3),

denoting plenty and want (contents,

efiTrXew?,
irkrjpT)';,

408, rich;

as:

/j,ear6<;,
irevrjt;,

full; -n-Xovaw^,

evBeij<;,
:

necessitous;

further,
fjv,

the
all

adverb

aXt?, enough

iravra eixppocrvvri^ TrXea

was full

of joy3.

Those signifying acquainted or unacquainted with

peritus
;

e/i7recpo<;,

;ag7ei(@9%j2M?jg^igB;

i'jriarijiu.cov,

skilled

416.
in

THE GENITIVE.
an art);
fiv^ficov,

245
mindful and

{Ti'xyrj';,

afivij/uMv,

unmindful.
4.

a^w9, worthy ;

avd^io<;,

unworthy : ifXeicnov a^iov,

(

tvorth most, the worthiest thing ( 408, e).

5. it

Adjectives ivcr^lymg participation

:

408, 4), whether

be positive or negative
;

/^eroT^o?
;

tov

ttovov, partieeps

laboris

dfioipoi;,

without a share

atno^, author, guilty,

reus,
Ohs.

these belong many adjectives compounded witli dv (a, 3G0) privative, which, especially in poets, are joined with the genitive poet. ali>u kokZv ayevaros, a life which has not tasted of misfortunes ; (j)iXav a/sXauTos, unwept hy friends.
:

To

6.

Adjectives in -iko?

fitness

for

( 351) denoting capability or (comp. 3) something: BiSacrKaXcKo^ ypafi-

^aTiKYj';, capable of teaching

grammar ;

irapaa-KevaariKO'i

Tb)v

eh TOV
415.

TToXefiov, skilled in obtaining the necessaries

for war.

Many
;

Genitive, which
412)
:

is

TTov 775s

Adverbs of Place are joined with a mostly of a Partitive nature (comp. where on earth? so with ez/ro?, within ;
;

eicTw, inside ;
'TrXrjalov,

skto^, without

e^w, outside

ariyi, i^yv'i,

near ; -jrpoaw ov iroppco, forwards ; -jrepa, beyond; evQv, straight towards; irpoa-Qev, ejunrpoaOev, in front; OTTiaOev, behind; afi^oripcoOev, on both sides; avw,

upwards
rrjii

(-Trora/iaiv, up-stream) ; and corresponding with these also some adverbs of time and manner : irrjviKa
fiiiepa<; ;

<yvcofj/>]'i

at what time of the day'? what do you think ? \ddpa tcov

tto)?

ex^'-'i

t?)?

'yovicov, secretly

from

the parents.

416. The Comparative may have the object with which anything is compared in the Genitive (as in the

Ablative in Latin)
i. e.,
rj

6 dBeX<f>o^,

fiel^wv tov aSeXipov, major fratre, than the brother; ov Trpo'iijKei tov
i.

apxpVTa

TCOV dp^pfj^evoiv irovripoTepov elvai,

e., rj

tov<;

Apxo/J'ivov';, it is not

becoming that the governor should be

worse than the governed.

Ohs.

l.-This Genj^iv^J^i^^^os^t^^quently where

it

repre-

; :

246
sents
rj

THE GENITIVE.
;

417.

more

freely represent

with the Nominative or Accusative yet it may also poet. liKuav xpovosy ij with the Dative
:

ov Bel 1^ apea-Kdv Tols Korai Tutv ivBd&e (rj rois ivddSe), longer is the time that I must please those helow than that I must please
those here.

Ohs. 2.

Like the Comparative, the Superlative is sometimes joined with the Genitive of the things with which anything is compared: poet., tpdos KaWia-Tov tS>v nporlpav, a light

most heautiful in comparison with the former ones, where we might have expected <^dos koKKwv t&v jrpoTfpcov, lax prioribus pulchrior, or (j>aos koKXio-tov navrav, omnium pmlcherrima. Ohs. 3. All adjectives expressive of a comparison follow the rule of Comparatives SiTrXdcnos, doubly (as great as) Sevrcpos (oi8f Kos), second (to none) ; varepos, later than ; erepos, another

than.
3.

The

Grenitive

with Verbs.

Very many yerbs are joined with the Genitive on the

general principles mentioned in

408.

417. 1. The Genitive represents a Predicate ( 361, 7 and lO) with verbs which denote leing, hecoming^ making, deeming, in order to predicate something of a

substantive, as originating from, possessing, consisting

of,,

any other way qualifying it, 408 SraKpari;? "Za<\>povl<7Kov riv, Socrates was Sophroniscus's son ( 408, l)
or in
:

ri

oiKia Tov TTUTpo^ iyevero, the house hecame the father's

Tre-TrolriTai,

property ( 408, 2) ; to retT^o? \i6ov has been made of stone ( 408, 3) ;

'^XKrjvoav
Tjcrav,

the wall
tS>v

oi

eaaaXol

the Thessalians belonged to the Hellenes

( 408, 4) ; TToXiTov ayaOov vofiL^erai dappelv, to be courageous is deemed a good citizen's quality ( 408, 8).
Obs.

Genitive often occurs with verbs of perception and way that it is properly dependent on a noun or pronoun tovto vfiHv jidkiara 6avp,a^op^v, this we most
observation in such a
:

The

admire in you (properly

this of

you we most admire).

The Genitive of Material ( 408, 3) is also used with verbs of plenty and ivant (comp. 414, 2)
418.
2.
jrl/jiTrX'ri/M,

TrKTjpoa,

Beofiao (Bel fiot),

a-o(f>ia<;,

I fill; 7rKjj9co, yefiai, I am full; I need ; to, wra eveifkyjaav Saifwviai

the

tliey filled

ears with zumdrous

wisdom

S419.

THE GENITIVE.

247

present time

irapwv Kaipo'; ttoXX^? ^povrlSo'; koI /SovXijs Beirai, the is in need of much rejkction and advice.
419.
3.

with
a)

many
With

The Partitive Genitive ( 408, 4) is used verbs which only partially affect the object
all verbs

of the action

//.ere^cB {/MeT<7Tl

/jloo),

which contain the idea of sharing I have a share in ; fMSTaXa/M^avw,

J take

a share in;
;

fjLeTaBlBaiij,i,

I give

a share

(tij? Xe/a?,
;

of the booty)

Koivcovias,

I share

(comp.

414, 5)

Horn.
the

cn/Tov 8' aihol/T) rafilT]

irapedrjKe ^^api^ofiivrj irapeovToiv,

the modest stewardess brought bread supplying

store.
Obs.

from
Tie

SfiB,

I smell,

also belongs to these

luipav of,

smells of

myrrh.
b)

With verbs which denote

awTO/iai,
ifravco,

touching, laying hold

;

of,

seizing

touch

e^pfiai,

J I

hold by,

border (rtvot;) on something; dvre'^^ofiai, eTriXafi^dvofiac,

by the hand;

lay hold of; Xafi^dvas rtvd rij? 'x^eip6<;, seize one begin (t'^? -TraiBelai;, with the dp)(pfiai,,

education); poet.

Qavovrwv

ovhev

d'hiyo'i

dineTai, no

pain touches
c)

the dead.

)(a^ofMU
strive ;

With verbs which denote striving, aiming at : <ttoTov aKoirov, I aim at the goal ; opeyajjiai, I
Sf\}rdo},

thirst ; Tvyxdvai,

J hit,

attain (eVu^e

ra)v dOXeov, he

won

the

prizes);

icfiiicvov/j-ai,,

reach,

attain;
d)

fjKai,

I have

attained (Herod. Swdfiw;, power).

enjoying: icrOio), I eat; I drink ; ^euw, I give a taste ; ea-rtdco, I entertain ; dwdKavoi, I enjoy (jie^iarav dr/aOav, the greatest bless-

With verbs which denote

irlvco,

ings);

evo<; dvSpb'!, ei ^povrjaavro'i ttoXXoi dv diroXavaeoav, many would enjoy a man who has thought sensibly.

e)

With

verbs denoting the opposites of the ideas

enumerated under a d, that share in something dire')(p[iat,

:

is,

the exclusion from a

I refrain {a-irov, abstineo cibo) ; 'Xfopl^a, I separate ; e'lpym, I keep off ; (TTepi(7Ka, irapaj^wpew, I yield; I deprive ; iravoiMav, I cease;
e'lKco,

Digitized

by Microsoft

; ;

248
Xi5(B,

THE GENITIVE.

420.

loose ;

e\v9ep6co,

afiapTciva}, oMTOTvy^dvoj,
J.

I free (f)eiBoiu,ac, I spare I miss '^jrevSofiai, (K^aXKofiai,

; ;

am
Ohs.

deceived (ttj? iXiriSo';, in

my

hope).

Many

of these verbs are also joined object

:

when an

is

to be expressed as wholly

with an Accusative encompassed by

the action TrXelarov jiepos nvos fierex^iv, to have the greatest part in anything ; Triva olvov, I drink wine ; o'ivov, some wine \ayx<ivo> n, I attain something ; Ttra'r, a share in something.
420. 4. The Genitive is joined with many verbs denoting a sensuous or moral perception or emotion (comp. 414, 3), as aKova, aKpodofiat, J hear ; aurddvofiai, I perceive ; fitfMvijcrKOfiai,, I remember (tov if>i.\ov,
:

Tnemini

amici)

iiriKavOdvo/xat,

forget

fiekei

fwi

Tivo<i, eTTi/neXeofiai,

I am

concerned about something,

care

ivrpewofiat, Horn. dXiyo), dXeyl^oj,

concern

my-

self ; d/ieXetB,
ipdco,

J neglect ; oXiycopea, I care little about; J love ( 419, c) ; eVt^v/xeto, I desire ; irwOdvofiai ri TLvo<i, I learn something about one.
Ohs.

The
:

Accusative also
if

is

admissible with several of these

is

verbs

with aKovm

the object

directly audible

(j>d6yyov,

sound, but tov SiSao-KciKov, the teacher.

421.

5.

With verbs

of estimating, buying,

selling,

&c., the

Genitive denotes the valvs or price (comp.

408,

6,

and

417)

SovXo'; irevTe fivoov rifia/rai,

;

the slave is valued at jive

minae

ttoWov mveiaOai, magni

emere

raXdvTov
6.

dirohotrdai, to sell for a talent.

422.

With verbs

oi judicial proceedings the Geni-

tive denotes the cause (

<ypd(j><T6at, ala-)(p6v,

408,

7,

414, 5):
;

KXoTrrj'?

furti aeeusari turpe est

(f>6vov Buo-

Keiv, to prosecute for murder ; (peiiyei iTapavo/^cov, he is charged with violating the law; dire^vye KaKr]'yopia';,

he

was acquitted of
Ohs.

libel ;

idXacrav 7rpoSoaLa<;, proditionis

condemnati sunt.

With verbs
:

of emotion the Genitive likewise expresses the

cause, as

6avfidCa> ere T^r aatppoa-ivr]!,

;

moderation

I admire thee for thy Horn, p^ud/xerar yvvaiKos, angry aholtt the woman.
Digitized

by Microsoft

425.

THE GENITIVE.
423.
7.

249

The Genitive

is

also joined with verbs

( 416), as

which imply the meaning of a Comparative

tcparea)

(Kpolao^ Av8S)v VPX^^' Croesus ruled over the Lydians); ^aaiXeva, I rule;
(jcpevnoyv elfii), dpyat

irepUifLi, irepir/lp/vofiai,
t/ii'),

I am

superior

r^TTdofuu (rjTTeov

I am
Ik6<;,

inferior

Xeiirofcai,

vaTepew,
;

I am

behind;

SM<pepco rivot;, differo ab aliquo

dp'^eiv
it

^ap^dpav "^Wijvas

is

reasonable that Hellenes should rule

over barbarians.
424. 8. The Genitive is joined with verbs compounded with prepositions, which either always, or in the sense which they have in the compound verb, require the Genitive (comp. Chap. XVII.) eK^aXka TLva Ti.fiT]^, I eject some one from office ; irpocrTaTevei, ttj?
:

K6\e()i<;,

he presides

over the state

la')(pv
;

tov Sixaiov
KaTa<f>poveiv
to accuse

TrpoTldrja-LV,

he prefers might before right

Ttvo?, to despise

any one ; KarTiyopeiv

ri,

ti,vo<;,

one of a thing ; 'rrdrpLov rjv ry ^AdTjvalcov iroXec irpoecrTdvai Tcov '^WtJvoiv, it was a hereditary custom for the city

of the Athenians
4.

to be at the

head of the Hellenes.

G-enitive.

Freer use of the

425.

The

Genitive, without immediate connexion

with a noun or verb expresses 1. Place (local Genitive), almost exclusively in the language of poetry, and that either the place from

which something is removed la-raaffe ^ddpcov, get up from the steps ; inrdr/eiv t^? oZov, to go out of the way
:

(comp.

419,

e)

or the space within which something

:

takes place (comp. 412, 415) t^? 'Icoviaf tovto alcr')^pov vevofiicTTai, within Ionia that is considered disgraceful ;

Hom. ve(po<; ov <f)aivTO irdcrT}^ <yairj<;, no cloud appeared within the compass of the whole earth ; epy(0VTat, TreSioio, they go through or within the plain (comp. the
ich gehe des Weges).

German

On

another local Genitive, see

Digitized

412.

by Microsoft

; :

250

THE DATIVE.

426.

is

426. 2. Time (temporal Genitive), in which case it a Partitive Genitive expressing the wTwle of a space of time ( 412), withia which something takes place rph Tov iviavTov, thrice in the year; rjfj,epa<;, hy day;
vvKro<i,

hy night;

tov

avrov

xei.fiavo^,

in the

same

tov Xoittov, for the future ; x^povov avxyov, for some time ; eKoaTov eTovi, each year.
winter
;

427.

3.

Cause (causal Genitive, comp.

:

408,
'

7,

o'lfwi 422), in exclamations my fortune (comp. the German

t'/j?

tvxv'!, ^s
;

for

des Leides)

and in

Infinitives with the Genitive of the Article (in order to).

574,

3, Obs.

428. 4. Occasion, time, circumstances, &c., as an

absolute Gfenitive, in

connexion with

participles, just like

/3a<Ti\evovTO<;,

the absolute Ablative in Latin:

Kvpou

Gyro regnante,
Misses).
Obs.

584 (comp. the German: stehenden

like the absolute

Tlie absolute Genitive very rarely occurs,

he occurs in the clause the participle

Ablative of the Latins, witbout a participle;

to

when
is

the verb

&v

to be used

te ^pueTO,

dov

iraidos ovtos.

E) The Dative.
\ 429.
thiSig
Obs.

The Dative denotes, in general, the person more remotely connected with an action.
therefore, depends just as often

or

The Dative,
1.

adjectives (adverbs), but very rarely

on verbs on a substantive.

as on

Dative of the person concerned. and English, so in Greek, the person more remotely affected by something is in the Dative, and: a) with transitive verbs it is the so-caUed indirect object: Horn. eirTa Se oi Sdicro) ewawfieva irToXieOpa,

430.

As

in Latin

and
b)

I will give

him seven flourishing

cities.

with intransitive verbs it expresses the person or a thing conceived as a person to which the action
Digitized

By Microsoft

;:

435.

THE DATIVE.
:

251
;

refers
Tivo<;,

irpeirei,

I need

fioL ri, a thing becomes me somMhing ; ifwl ovrco SoKei exeiv,

crvfj,/j,d')(pi,<;,

Set
it

fiot

seems
sociis
6eol<;,

to

me

to be so ; ^o-qOS} rol';

succurro

irelBov rot? vofioi^, obey the laws

ev^yecde rot?

fray
Obs.

to the,

gods;

fiefi<po/j,at

rots fiaOrjraX';,

reproach

the scholars.

Substantives derived from

the Dative
:

sucli verts are

sometimes followed

by
c)

t)

to the allies

m the war.
:

Iv tiS noXeiuf rots aviifjA^ois ^ofjOcia, the help

'with Adjectives

6 a/ya6o<; Ta>

ayadS

fiovo^ ^/Xos,

the good alone is dear to the good.

431.

2.

Datiye of
is

interest.

The Dative denotes the person for vrhom

interest

something
:

for

whose

or takes place

hence
{dot.

a) the

person benefited or injured

ttS?
avrjp

commodi, intoils

commodi)

avrm

irovei,

every

man

for

himself ; ^66vo<; fieyierrov kukov Tolf e'xpvaiv avTov, envy is the greatest evil to them that have it.

432. b) the possessor with

:

el/j,i,

ylryvo/iai,

and similar

verbs
Obs.

ttoXKoI

/moi (j}iKoi, elcrlv,

is

I have many friends.

<r(pi,

The possessive Dative

;

sometimes, like the Genitive, joined

jSoes, tJieir oxen.

vpith a Substantive

Herod., oZ

433.

e)

the sympathising person (ethical Dative)

?i

poet,

TeKvov,
left lis

^e/SrjKev ^fuv 6 fez^oy,

fiat

child,

has the
SofjLouri,

stranger

? tI yap irafrip

irpea^v; iv

Spa, for what is

my aged father

doing in the house ?

434. d) the acting person with passive verbs (com-

monly
Sdfiev

vTrd with the Genitive), which viewed as one interested in the action

is
:

then to be
TroXee?

Hom.

"ETOjOt

Siq),

many

were

overcome
;

by godlike

Sector ; rl ireirpaicTai to4s aXXot? wTiat has been done by the rest ? This Dative is regularly joined with the Verbal Adj. in -reo? ifiol 'iroXefjurjTeov ia-riv, mihi jnig:

nandum
435.

est.

e)

the yfigjggg^j^j:^^ connected with an

; :

252
action:
redv-rj')^

THE DATIVE.
vfilv

436.

rraXai, he died to

you long ago;

Horn.

iraa-Lv

Kev Tpcoecrai, kOSo? dpoio, thou mightest get

; Horn, rolffw dvicrTt}, among them arose; iiiroXafi^dveiv hei t& toiovtw oti evrjO'rj'; ea-Tiv, in regard to such a one we must suppose him

thee fame with all Trojans

simple.
Ohs.

In

this

maimer participles

are

most frequently used, partly

with, partly without, an accompanying noun : Hom. fjulp tiVaTOff iart TrepiTpoTretov eviavTos evddde fiijivovTea-a-tv, it is the ninth

year for us lingering here ; r] Bia^avn top Ttorafiov npos iintipav oSo'f, the road westward when you have crossed the river ; yiyverai n e'/ioi ^ovXojihai, something happens to me as I wish ; a-uvc\6vTt or a>s (Tvvekovn emelv, to speak briefly.
436. 3.

Dative of community.

and adverbs, wliich denote community, agreement, friendly or hostile meeting, the person or thing with which such a community, agreement, or such a meeting takes place, is in the Dative. a) Verhs of this kind are Koiva>vea>, I share (rtvl
verbs, adjectives,
:

With

Tivo's,

something with one)

avfi<pcovieo, ofxo'Kcr/eai, crvvaBaj,

ofiovoeai,

I agree ;
I fight ;
jJi-r]

ciate with ; Sta.Xe70yu,a.i,

fjid'^o/jiai,

I resemble ; ojiCKeo), I assoI converse ; St,a<ppo/j,ai,, I differ ; ipi^o), I dispute to, epya ov avfi<f>(ovel
6/j,oi6ofiai,
:

TOi?

XoyoK, the deeds do not harm,onise with the words;

irpo^oiJ[,i\ei

poet. KaKolcnv

dvSpdaiv, aXX' alel tcov

not associate, but always

dyaOcbv e^eo, with bad

hold to the good.

men do

b) Adjectives: 'ia-o<;,like; ofiow'Sj-Trapa-TrKija-io';, similar

6 avTO'i, the same

;
;

oIk6io<;, t'Sto?,
6fiQ)vvfj,o<;,

peculiar

; koiv6<;,

common

(comp.

414, l)

of like

name ;

avvcovv/jLo<;,

of like meaning ; Bidcjiopo^, different ; evavrLo^, opposite oyir\t,fffievoL fjaav rot? avTol'; K.vpa) 07r\oL<;, they were
the same weapons as Cyrus. Adverbs : besides those derived from the adjectives just mentioned, especially dfj,a, at the same time ; ofiov,
e)

armed with

together
%

d/j,a

tS

eralpo), at the
is Digitized

same time with

his friend.

437.

The Dative

used with
by Microsort

many
'

verbs which. '

440.

THE DATIVE,
prepositions,

253
a
contact

compounded with
ev, a~w, eirl,

denote

or

union, especially with such as are

yet also
v-iro,

compounded with with those compounded with Trpoy,

eTncrTrjfj/riv

irapd, irepi,

as

ifi'TTOieiv

ttj

"^vj^ji,

to

bring knowledge into the soul ; eirtKeladaL rivi, to press

upon,

to urge, one
;

iTririfiav tlvi ri, to reproach one

hrjijuw, to

something

wpo^ievai, Ta>

TrapicTTacrdai, irapeivaL rivi, to

Tivi, to

with come before the people ; support one ; -TrepiiriTrTeiv

meet one.

438. 4. The Instrumental Dative, answering to the Latin Ablative, denotes that hi/ or 5z/ means of which an action is brought about, hence

a)

the means
/J,ev

or

instrument

(comp.
toi<;

Bid,

458)

Horn.. Tov

Kara, (TTfjOoi /Sake Bovpi, the one he struck

6<ji6aX/jLol<;,

on the breast with the spear ; 6p5sp.ev

see

we

ovBeU eTratvov TjBoval'; iKrrjaaTo, no one gained praise by pleasures ; ^tj/xwvv Tiva OavaTa, to punish one with death; Horn, tiaeiav Aavaol ifia
with the eyes
;

SaKpva crolai ^iXea-aiv, hy thy darts.

Obs.

may

the

Danai pay for my

^(prjaBat, to

tears.

Hence the Dative

is

used with

make

use of; as

the Ablative with uti in Latin.

often added ( 361, 10) them he used as guards.
:

A second predicative Dative is

<j>vXa^iv ixprjTo,

roirav na-X

some of

439.

b)

the operating power or cause from which an

:

action proceeds

by nature
rdvofiev,
Ohs.

fitted

dv6po)7ro<; ^vaei ttoXitlkov, man (is) for the State; iroXKaKi'i arfvoia dfiap-

we

often err from ignorance;

^o^m, from fear.

tj
liovcriKrj,

With verbs of emotion the Dative expresses the ground or

:

occasion of the emotion

^hojiai, p^aipa

delight in

music; arcpya,

"kuTTOVfiai,

I am grieved;
satisfied

ji^aXeTraij/m,

/
;

am, angry;.
alax^vofiai,

ayairai,

I am

(with something)

lam

hi/

ashamed (about something).

440. c) the measure, by which a thing is measured. which one thing surpasses another, bj/ which it is
:

distinguished

TaD'fsihL^tjtMimpBiaS^v rot? yejevrj/ievoit;,

254

THE DATIVE.

441-

the future we judge of by the past ; Se/ca erea-i irpo t^s ev 'toKaiuvL /u.a%??? ol 'ABTjvaioi iv MapaOoivi, evUrjdav,

ten years before the battle of Salamis the Athenians con-

quered at Marathon; -ttoWS

iroXv, 404,

fieil^mv,

multo major (also

^povrjaei, to differ

Obs)

hiajiepew

rivo<;

from any

one in insight.
5.

The freer use of tlie Dative expresses way and manner, or an accompanying cir^ cumstance Tovrm Ta> Tpoirai, in this way ; /3ta, by
441.
a)

the

force

cnrovBr},

with zeal ;
in

aiyfj,

in silence

epyo),

in

fact;
publiee
Ohs.

T&
;

ovTi,,

truth;

Ihia,

privatim ;

Br^fioa-ia,

Horn.

vrjineycTi,,

in his folly ( 362, Obs.).

Dative with airos should he particularly noticed: 6 ^iXiTTiros TrevraKoaiovs iinreas eXa^ev avTols toIs OTrXotff, Philip took five hundred horse together with their armour. (Comp. the Dative of community, 436.)

The

442.

5)

The

place

where

something happens

is

expressed by the Dative more rarely in prose than in poetry MapaOcbvi, at Marathon ; Horn. 'EXXaSt oiKta
:

vatfov, inhabiting his house in

ex<>>v,

Hellas ; Horn. t6^^

;

&ixoicn,v

having the how on his shoulders

poet.

oBol'i,

on the

way.

443.

c)

Time

is

expressed by the Dative as

defi-

ry on the following day; Terdpra erei, in the fourth year; 'OXu/iTTiot?, at the Olympic games ; poet, '^etfiepiip voTtp, in a stormy south
TrjBe

nitely limited in answer to the question

vvktI, hoc

when :

node;

rfi

va-repala,

wind.
Obs.

Notice the difference between the Accusative ( 405) and the Grenitive ( 426), in their application to relations of time.

Digitized

by Microsoft

447.

THE PREPOSITIONS.

255

Chap. XVII.

The

Pkepositions.

'

Either they 444. Prepositions have a double use. are combined with a verb, to define the direction which
the action of the verb takes, or they are used independently, and serve, in connexion with different cases,
to point out the relation of single words in a sentence to one another more distinctly than could be done by the cases alone.
445.
first

Ohs. 1.

As

tlie

name praepositio
(poet.

(jrpodetns) points to the

of these uses, those prepositions which are not comhined with

:

verhs, such as
till;

avev, without
evexa,

Six"; X""?'*)

"W'

/^^'XP''

on account of; TrKfjv, besides, are called spurious. They are all used with the Genitive (oomp. 415), except as, to, which has the Accusative.
jj^ra^i, ietween;

All Prepositions were originally adverbs ; 446. Ols. 2. of them are still used as such in poetry, and a few even in prose
beyond, very
;

many
:

irepl,

iierd, later

irpos,
is

addition.
;

origin, their position in

Homer

very free

On account of this they may be separated

:

from their substantive Hom. cV 8' avrog iSitrero vapoira x'^'^o": ^'^ himself put on the glittering brass aficj)! 5e ;(atTat c^fiots dwaovTcu, and the manes wave around the

from

their verb, as well as

shoulders.

On

see 90.

In prose only

the anastrophe in placing the Prepositions behind, irepl is sometimes thus used.

447.

With regard
Accusative

tions, the following

1.

to the cases joined with Preposigeneral rules are to be noticed

The

with Prepositions expresses the

object upon which, over which, towards

which an action
Prepositions the

extends ( 395, 405), and with goal of an action itself ( 406).

2.

many

The

Gfenitwe frequently, denotes

(

the place from

which an action proceeds

positions in the
in
3.

425), often also a moral

it depends on- other Preon the adverbs mentioned

relation ( 408, etc.), whilst same way as

415.

The Dative denotes a more

Digitized

external connexion

C5% 435, 442). ^''' ' /

by Microsoft


256

PEEPOSITIONS "WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.

448.

General View op the Prepositions.

ease

448.

I.

Prepositions

which can have only on&

A) the Accusative: el;, oi?. B) the Genitive : avri, wko,

cuyfii,

e/c

(e^)j

ttjOo

avev,

/^e%p') f^era^v, eveica, ttXtJp.

:

C) the Dative
II.

iv,

crw (^w).
Kara, virep.

Prepositions which can have two cases

A) the Genitive and Accusative B) the Dative and Accusative :
:

Std,

avd.

III.

Prepositions which can have

cases
:

all

the three oblique

afi(pi, eVt, fierd, -Trapd, irepi, irpo';, inro.

I.

Prepositions which can have only one Case.

1.

449.

A)

Prepositions with the Accusative

c.

et?

or 6? (Lat. in,

Accus.,

and

inter), to,
is

into,

points out the goal towards which the action

directed.

The

opposite

is i^, out.
:

ek

is

used

eke^aXov et? rrjv 'AtLacedaemonians invaded Attica ; et? BiKocrTripiov ehievai, to come into court; Xeyeiv et? to Tr\r]0o<;, to
a) of place
ol AaKeBaifj,6viot
TiKriv, the

ek avhpa<i iyypdcpetv, to enroll Comp. iv, 456, a. h) of time : ek ttjv va-repaiav, in diem proximum, for the next day; ek ecnrepav, towards evening; poet. eVo? ek ere;, year hy year ; ek Kaipov, for the right time. c) of measure and number : ek BiaKoaiovi, up to two hundred ; ek Bivapnv, up to one's power, as much as is in
speaTc to the multitude;

among men.

one's

power.

the

: 'x^pijcri/jLov ek tov "jroKep-ov, useful for war ; ek Tohe rjKOfiev, for that we have come. In compounds it is to be translated by into, in, to.

d) of purpose

450.

2.

ft)-

(comp.
Digitized

631), to, by Microsoft

only of persons:

453.

PEEPOSITXONS WITH THE GENITIVE.

o)?

257

Horn,

alel tov o/xolov a/yei 0eo? always brings like to like.

rov

ojjlolov,

God

1.

451. B)- Prepositions with the

G-enitive.

opposite

avTv (comp. Horn, avra, avrrjv, avriKpv), originally to (comp. ev-ainlrc;), then instead of, for: Horn. avTt Kaa-i/yvijrov ^elvoi ff iKiT7j<; re rervKrai, a
stranger and a suppliant

brother)
a-6ai, to

is instead of a brother (like a ovtI 6ptjtov o-co/iaro? aOdvarov So^av aXXd^a-

exchange a mortal body for immortal glory.

it signifies

In compounds

against.

452.

2. airo

(Lat. ab, a, Engl, off), from, in the

sense of separation, severance, and origin

a) of place:
off
tJie

Horn.

a(f>'

LTnreov

SXto

p^ayiiafe,

he sprang

chariot to the ground.

:

b) of time

from, since
by,

air iKeCvT]'}

rrj';

rjfiepa'i,

from

that day.
o)

of cause:

from, through:

avrovo/x.o';

airo ttj?

elpi^vrj^,

independent through the peace.

:

Phrases

airo aKowov,

far from
crKrjv^'i,

the goal ; airo yva/j/rj^,

to

contrary to expectation; airo aT6/j,aTov T^yeiv,

from, mem/rry
actors.
;

speak
the

ol

airo

those of

the

stage,

In compounds
453.
3.

it signifies

frmn,

off,

away.
e),

Ik,
et's),

before vowels

e'^

(Lat. ex,

out of

(opposed to

denotes removal from within or from

(pevyei, he is

amongst
a) of place Sparta.
b) of time
c)
: :

Ik

'%irdpTr]<;

banished out of

ix iraihav,
:

from boyhood

(a pueri).

of origin

bk 7rarpo<i 'XpTjtjTov iyevero, he sprang

from a
d)

brave father;
connection

riiJLaadaL bk tivo<;, to be honoured

close

seldom with a Passive verb: by any one. and conformity with : after,

secundum:

'^oyov ^K.^^^gy i^e^e>^o deliver speech after

258
speech;
iic

PKEPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE.

45t

t5)v ofioXoyovfiivav, according to the agree-

ment (Lat. seeundum). Phrases: sk Se^ta?, on the right; i^ Xaov, equally; Bfjaai, KpefiAaai Tt e/c two';, to fasten, to hang one thing
to another (Lat.

pendere
:

In compounds

out,

ex, ab aliqua away.

re).

454.

4. TTjoo (Lat. pro), for, before, instead,

a) of place, before: Trpo Ovpmv, before the door h) of time : irpb tij? fid'^r)';, before the battle.
c)

of preference
lie

irpo

rovrcev

reOvdvab
i. e.,

/j,3X\ov

av

eKoiTo,
this.

would

choose death befiyre this,

rather than

d) for, a rare use

vpo iraiZav

ficuxea-Qai,

to fight

for the children. Phrase irpo iroXKov

:

iroteicrOai (c), to

prefer greatly.

In compounds

before, forth, beforehand,

forwards.

455.

The

spurious Prepositions
j^toyat?, St%as,

5. dvev,
6.
7.

without (poet,

drep),

a%pt, /^6%pt, until.

fiera^v, between.
eveica,

8.

also

eveKev,

elve/ca

(poet.

ovveKu), for

tlte

sake of an object to be attained (Lat. causa): tt}'; vyteia'; eveKU 'y^pcofieOa rm larpm, we employ a physician

for the sake of health.

(Comp. Sta with Ace.

458, B.)

9. ifkriv, besides (praeter). Obs.

irKriv is
:

often used quite adverbially without governing a

S.p' 'AxaioU avSpes ei(ri n-Xfjv oSe ; have then the Achaeans no men lut this ? It miglit be nX-qv ToOSe, besides

case

poet, ouk

thisi

456.
1.

C) Prepositions with the Dative.

ev (Horn, evi, ev, Lat. in, c. Ablat.

and

inter), in,

answers to the question where ?

a)

of place:
:

ev

'AdijvaK;,

in Athens;
ev

also

among

(inter)

iv

tovtoi';,

among them ;

Btj/^co

\eyeiv, ta

speak before the people (comp. 449, a). Digitized by Microsoft


I
458.

PREPOSITIOKS WITH THE GEN. AUD ACC.

:

25&

b) of time
c)

iv

rourp tS
:

erei, in that year.

:

a moral
17

relation

with

ev

t& Oem to

ttJ? fJ-a^Ti

T-fiXo?,

the result of the battle rests with God.

Phrases:
thon ;
iv

iv

TOK
;

TrpoJTo?, first
irpo<;9r)KT)<;

MapaOStvo fidxHt the battle at Maraby far ; iv Kaip^, at the

jxepei,

right time

iv

in addition ;

iv %epo"f

^idivai, to

put

into

the

hands

(comp. Lat. in mensa

ponere).

In compounds

in, into, on.

The accented evt=eveaTi

signifies, it is in, it exists, it is possible.

457. 2. crvv or fw (Lat. cum), with, denotes companionship (opposed to dvev, comp. /lerd with Gen. a-vv 'Adijvri ivUnjaev, he conquered with (the 464, B.)
:

help of) Athene ; aiiv v6fj,<p, in accordance with the law (opposed to irapd with Ace. 465, C, b).

In compounds

with, together.

II.

^Prepositions

which can have two Cases.

The Qenitive and Accusative.

"Obs.

Here,

as everywhere in

sition is placed first in

what follows, that use of a Prepowhich its original meaning is most

manifest.
1. hid (akin to hvo, as between 458. \twain^, originally between, then through. is

to

two

A) with the
a)

Genitive
:
:

most frequently through (Lat. per) ^X^e ^aeiV7J<; o^pi,/j,ov ej'xp';, through the glittering shield pierced the mighty lance. b) instrumental: by or with: Bid rwv 6<jiOaXfiwv opMfiev, by (by means of) the eyes we see (comp.
of space

Hom.

Sta fiev

ao-TrtSo?

438).
c)

^(eipwv

of space and time : among (inter), during, in : Sid hid vvkto^, during e-xeiv, to have in hand ;

night ; Sid

(piKla'; iivai, to be on friendly terms. Phrases: Sid crTouaTo'; exeiv,tajiave in the mouth, to

260

PEEPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN.

Bt

AND

ACC.
to

459^

be talking about;
nothing
;

ovSevo<;

7roiela-6ai,

deem

a-

Bia jjMKpov, after a long interval, interruption.

B) with the Accusative a) of space and time almost exclusively

through, during
Btci vvfcra,
:

in the poets Horn. Bia BwfiaTa, through the rooms

,*

during night. I) usually causal : on account of (the operating cause) (comp. eveKa, 455, 8) Bia, rrjv vocrov ypw/j.eda ra^ luTpS, we employ the physician on account of the illness.
:

Phrases

avTo<; Bi kavrov, by himself ; Boa tl

Blo,

why ?

In compounds
like Lat. dii:

is

through, or denotes separation

Bi,acj)epco=differre, Biaipeco,

J sever.

459. 2. Kara (comp. Adv. Kara, down), originally downwards, down (the opposite to dvd).

A) with the
a) of space
:

Qenitive

down from : Horn, ^fj Be kut OikvfnrotoKaprjvaiv, he came down from the heights of Olympus; helow (sub) to, Kara 7^?, things below the earth.
:

b) tropically:

about,

against:

'Ker/eiv

kuto,

tivo<;,

to

speak about, against one.

Phrases
completely

iroXiv

kut

dKpa<; eXelv, to capture a city

Karh, vojtov, behind.

it

B) with the Accusative

thing
:

denotes in
to,

its

most general

sense extension over, relation

a) of place:

direction towards some-

Kara

poov,

down a stream; Kara

jrjv

Kal 6aXaa<Tav, hy land and sea;

Balra, Zeus went to the feast.
b) of time oi
:

Hom.

Zev?

e^7)

Kara

Ka&
c)

r)ii,d%,

xar meivov tov ^(povov, at that time y our contemporaries.

this

way ;

of other relations : Kara tovtov tov rpoirov, in Kara, rrdvra, in every respect; Kara Bvvafiiv,
ability,

according to
vo/jiov^,

as

much

as possible;
;

Kara
to

rov<;

in accordance with the laws

Kar

e/xe,

as regards

me ; Kara YllvBapov dpiarov vBwp, according

water
is best.

Pindar

Digitized

by Microsoft

461.

PREPOSITIONS
in

WITH THE DAT. AND

divisions
:

ACC.

2(J1

d) distributive

Horn. Kara ^vka, by

7]fi,kpav,

tribes; Kara

Tpel<;,

by threes;

Ka&

daily.

In compounds: down, downwards, very often untranslateable.

against, towards,

460.

3. virep,

Horn, also vireip (Lat. super), radical

meaning over. A) with the

a) "/ space:

Genitive
6
^Xi,o<;

virlp rifjMV iropeverai, the

sun

passes over us.

b) tropically,

any

for : fidxea-Oai v-rrep tivo<!, to fight for one (originally over, e. g. over a corpse) o vwep rij?
:

irarpL^o'; KivSvvo<;, the

danger for

one's

country

instead

of: ijQ} virep aov airoKpivovjiai, 'of you.

aver, beyond

will answer instead

B) with the Accusative of space and measure: Horn.

vTrep ovBov inrep

e^ijaero, he went

over

or beyond the threshold;

Svva/Mv, beyond (his) power.

In compounds

over,

away

over, excessively, for.

With the Dative and Accusative.

461.

4.

avd (comp. adv. avw,

above), originally upon,

up (opposed to KUTo). A) with the Dative only

poet, on the top of,

upon:

"Horn, ypva-ea dva aKrprTpf^, cm the top of a golden staff.

B) with the Accusative avd denotes the direction upwards, up towards something, then spreading out over something (comp. Kard). a) of space : dva poov, up the stream ; dva Trdaav ttjv rfrjv, over the whole earth, over the whole country. b) of time : dvd rrdaav rrjv rjfjiepav, per totum diem. c) tropically : dva Xoyov, in accordance with. d) distributive: dva reTTapa<;, by fours '(four men ^ep, comp. /card, 459, d). Phrase dvd arofia ex^iv, to have in the mouth, to bi talking about (comp. Sta). In compounds up, upwards, again, bach.
: :

Digitized

by Microsofi

:: ::

262 PEEPOSITTONS WHICH

CAIT

HAYE THREE

CASES.

462-

III.
Ols.

Peepositions which can have theee Cases.

The

original

meaning

is

usually most manifest in connexion^

with the Dative.

462.

1.

afj,(jib

(Lat.

amb-,

German um, akin

(i. e.

to

afx.(j)Q},

both), radical
irepL).

meaning around

on both

sides,

comp.

A) with
only poet. belt around
:

the Dative

Hom.
the.

ISpcoaet TeKafjmv afKJsl cTTrjOeaai, tP.e

breast will sweat; dyu.^t ^o^cp,

from fear.

B) with the

Genitive
aeiBetv, to sing about love.

Hom.

ajjijii tpiXoTTjTO'i

C) with the Accusative

of place, time, measure, occupation
the boundaries;
dfj,(f)i
:

afi^l to,

opi,a,

about

afj,(f>l

tovtov tov
cireiter

^(^povov,
;

about this time;

aficjil

to;

k^rjKovTa,

sexaginta

S^iTrvov

iroveiv, to be
:

occupied about a meal.

Phrase ol ajM^i ruva, any one with his attendants ;: hence even ot dfKJA TTXaTcova, Plato and his followers. In compounds about, around, on two sides, douhly.
:

463.

2.

eVi,

radical

meaning, upon,

on,

on

the-

surface, by.

A) with the Dative

a) of space:

Hom.
iirl

eTrl

)(9ovi

crlrov

eSoj/re?, to

eating-

bread on earth;
the sea.
b) of time
c)
:

OaXdcrcrrj

olicelv,

dwell by

iirl to-utoi';,

thereupon.

of an ethical relation : iirl rot? wpdy/jLaaiv ehai, to preside over the business ; hrl rot? Tro'X.efi.LOK elvai, to be
in the

power of

the

enemy ;
this

cTrt rivi %at/3en^, to rejoice at

:

a thing ; especially also of purpose

e/j,a9e<;,

iirl

Tvaiheia tovto

you learnt

for education ; and of condition

iirl t6koi<;

Savei^eiv, to lend on interest; iwl tovtm, on

this condition.

B) with the

Genitive

a) of space, in

answer to the question where

Digitized

KOpo?

by Microsoft

: : :

::

465.

PKEPOSITIOKS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 263

i(f>

n-pol^aweTo

apfiaroi;,

Cyrus appeared on a chariot ;

eirl

and to the question whither :

Samos.
Croesus
on,
;

Xdfwv

ifkelv, to sail to

(Comp.
also in

419,

c.)

h) of time:

eirl

Kpala-ov apxavTOi, in the reign of

many

connections
'hnrov,

near, hy.

C) with the Accusative

orirto:

ava^aiveiv
tJte

i(j>^

to

mount

(on-to)

horse ; eVl he^ia, an

right.
;

Phrases
i/Me,

ms

eirl

to ttoXv, for the most part

on, at, hy, in addition, he-,

ro

iir

for

my part.
:

In compounds
untranslateable.

very often

464.

3.

p,eTa

(German

mit), radical

meaning, in the

midst.

A) with the Dative

in poet, only
:

amidst,

among

(inter)

Horn. "^KTopa, o?

6eo^ eaxe fier

avSpdai, Sector, who was a god among

Genitive

men.

B) with the
:

mth, in the sense of participation with (comp. avv, fierci, rmv ^vfip.d'^aiv KivBweveiv, to fight with 457)
(in alliance with) the allies ; fiera SaKpvcov, with tears.

C) with the Accusative a) into the midst, among : poet. Horn. Imv fiera eralpmv, going among the crowd of companions.
:

eOvo'i

h) usually after:

Hom.

o'i'xpvrai fierd
jMercc

helwov, they

go after
c)

(for)

a meal;

tov

HeXoTrovvrja-iaKov

iroKefiov, after the Peloponnesian war.

to

seldom in (as with the Dative) fiera %6tpa9 have in hand (comp. Zed) fieB^ rjp,epav, interdiu.
: ;

ex^i'V,

In compounds: mth,. after, transpose).

(fieTaTiOevai, trans-

465.

4.

irapd

(Hom.

Trap, irapaL), radical

meaning,

beside, near.

at or near:

A) with the Dative Hom. irapa

Digitized

VTjvcrl

Koputvicri fiifivd^eiv,

to

by Microsoft

264 PEEPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES.

linger near the curved ships
ia-Tiv,
;

466.

koI Trap"

ifJ.oi

ni
also

ifiireipia
is,

I also

have some experience [with

Genitive

me

&c.).

B) with the
a)

from, with verbs of motion, and such as denote receiving either bodily or mentally: Horn, avovoareiv
TTapa
vrjSiv, to

return from the ships ; 'Kafi^aveuv, fiavdar

veiv irapd tivo<;, to receive, learn from

h) hy,
:

some

one.
'loyi?;-

very rare, and only poet. vaieraiv Trap' vov peLOpmv, dwelling hy the waters of the Ismenus, C) with the Accusative :
a) to
:

Hom. tm
near hy

8'

avri'; lttjv

vapa

vrja';,

they went

again

to the ships.

h) along,

of place
heach.

Hom.

-irapa

diva

daXdcrcr'r}';,

along the sea

of time

during : Trap

o\.ov

top

/3toj/,

per totam vitam,

oKK-qKas ridevai,

during the whole of life ; compared with : Set ra?

irpd^ei'; irap

you must put

one

the acts

hy

the side of (or

compare with)

with the comparative, puel^ov Trapa TovTO, something greater than this ; on account of (comp. propter, near, and on account of)
another;
:

Trapa

rrjv

-^fierepav

dfLeXeiav

^LXnnro^

av^erai,

on

account of our neglect JFhilip hecomes great.

besides : e')(pp,ev n Trapa ravra we have something else to say besides this ; contrary to (opposed to Kara with the Ace): irapa Tov vofMov, contrary to the law, properly past the law, by

Taken negatively
Xeyeov,

aXKo

evading the law. Phrases "jrapa to deem as nothing.

:

fiiKpov,

nearly

irap ovBev iroieurOai,

In compounds:
j3aivetv, overstep).

near, at, past,

beyond, over

(irapa-

466.

5.

Trept

per-magnus),

radical

(Hom. adv. irepi, very = Lat. per in meaning around (from above),

comp.

a/i^t.
Digitized

by Microsoft

: :: :

407. PREPOSITIONS

WHICH CAN HAVE THREE

OASES, 265

A)

-with the

Dative

round, around, near, for: Horn. irepX %KMy<7i, irvkycn,, round, the Skaean gate; irepl rots (piXTo.TOi'i Kv^eveiv,
to

gamble for what

is dearest.

Horn,

irepl Krjpi, at heart ; 'irepl j)6^(p,

from fear.

B)
a)

witli the Genitive

Bo^av exeK
the war.
i) in

mostly in a figurative sense, about, Lat. de: riva "Trepl tovtwv ; what opinion have you about
tov
TroXe/iiou,

this ? fiovkexiovrai Trepl

they consult about

Horn,

over, above

to he above all others;

: irepl irdvTcov eiifxevai, aXKwv, hence the prose phrases: irepl

i.

iro'}OMv

iroieiaOai,
Trepl

to

place above much,

e.

estimate
i.

highly

ovBevo? irobela-dai, place above nothing,

at
all.

e.

estimate at

nMhing

0) with the Accusative ahnost the same as dfij>l ( 4<32) wepl A'lyvn-Tov (around, i. e. everywhere, in Egypt), about the country of Egypt ; figuratively in regard to, about, concerning: irepl <pi\ocro(pMv airovSd^eiv, to be zealous about
: :

philosophy.

In compounds (with adjectives round about, besides, over.

= Lat. per-)

round,

467.

6. 7r/)6?

(Horn, irpon, irorl), akin to

irpo,

radical

meaning
6

at, to

(towards the front), comp. irapd.

A) with the Dative

a) at, near: near Babylon.
b) on, to
:

Kvpa

yv

ttjoo?

Ba^vKcovt, Cyrus was

he

Horn,

iroil

Se

aicfprTpov jSaXe

'^alrj,

threw the staff on the ground; tov vovv

TovTtp, give

irpo^i'^^eTe irpo<i

your mind

to this.
iTpo<;

c) besides,
irpo's

in addition to:

rourot?, besides this;

TOO? dXXoi,';, besides the rest.

Grenitive

B) with the
Aid?
elcrit/

a) with, in the sense of

community

Horn, irpo^ yap

diravre^ ^elvoi re irTcajfpi re,

Digitized

mth

(protected

by Microsoft

; ;

266 PEEPOSITIONS WHICH CAM HAVE THREE CASES.

hy)

468.

Zem

are

all

strangers

and

the

poor ;

rrpo'i

Tivo<f

with (on the side of) any one; tt/so? larpoviariv, it is with (belongs to) a physician, medici est; any one 7r/309 Ttvos Xiyeiv, to speak for (in behalf of)
etvai, to be
irpo<;

6e5)v,

with (in presence

oath.
:

of,

by) the gods, per deos,

towards the

form of an
h)

towards (versus)
TT/Do?

tt/jo?

fieaTj/M^plai;,

with Ace. SX^o^ ttjoo? c) from, ly (comp. irapd with Gen.) Oecbv, blessing from the gods; sometimes with Passiye verbs ttjOo? two? (piXeicrdai,, to be loved by some one.
South, comp.
: :

C) with the Accusative

a)
to:
to

epxovTM

ttjoo?

jj/ia?

'7rpecr/3ei<;,

ambassadors
speak
ergo)
to the

come
b)

us; Trpos top

against
the

Brj/iov a/yopeveiv, to

jieople.

towards,

(versus,

adversus,

ttjoo?

IBoppav, towards
BiKa^ecrOai,
Trpo';

North (comp. Tr/ao? with Gen.) riva, to enter an action against any
Trpo'?

one

ir(,(n5)<;

BiaiceicrOaL tt/jo? riva, to be faithfully dis-

vosed towards some one;

crOai, to
c)

^acriXia a7rovBa<;

iroiei-

make a

treaty towards (with) the king.

to,

in regard

according to
to

Biaj>epeLv irpo^ apsTijv,

to differ in

regard

virtue;

irpb<;

vTrap'XpvTcov Bel

ra

XoiTrci 'TTpaneiv,

the future according to the best

irpo^

rh KaXXiara tuv we ought to arrange of the present means;

to

Tama, according
tt/jo?

to this.

Phrases:

rjSov^v,
tt/oo?

according

pleasure;
ovSev

Trpois

Xapiv, in favour of; /ie, nothing to me.

^lav, by force;

Trpo<;

In compounds

to,

in addition, near, together with.

468.

7.

vTTo (Horn, also viral, Lat. sub),

radical

meaning under,

below.

A) with the Dative

under: Hom. fSiv viro m-ocrcn fieja arevayl^eTO <yal(i, under their feet the earth loudly groaned ; vtt 'Adrjvaiot<s ehai, to be under (subject to) the Athenians; poet.
Digitized

by Microsoft

470.

THE PEONODNS.
v<j)

267
under

yepcrlv

r^fierepijo-iv

aXovcra, (Troy) conquered

(by) our hands.

B) with the

Genitive
:

a) under, in space

viro 7^9,
xnr

under the earth ; in the

sense of dependency:

avKrjTcbv 'xppeveiv, to dance

under (the guidance of) flute-players ; hence b) by, with Passives and verbs of Passive meaning:. 17 TToKi^ eakm viro twv '^XKrjvwv, the city was taJcen Jy the Hellenes ; iroXKol airedavov viro rS)v ^ap^dpwv, many
were hilled by the barbarians.
c)

from, because of : vwb

old age.

'yijpto';

acrOevr]^

tjv,

he was-

weakfrom
a)

C) with the Accusative under : Horn. a><; ehriov

opo<;

inro ttovtov iSvcrero KVfLalr-

vovra, having thus

spoken, he dived under

rjiiXi^ovro,

the billowy

sea; viro to

they spent the night

under

(at the foot of) the mountain.

b) of time : towards (Lat. smJ) viro vvktu, towards^night ; viro ttjv vvktu, during the night.
:

In compounds

under,

down under, gradually,

secretly^

often untranslateable.

Chap. XVIII.
is

The Pkonotws.
koX ah
oyjrei,

469.

1.

used, as in Latin, only

The Nominative of the Personal Pronouns: when the person is to be menamov, tu

i.

tioned with special emphasis:

quoque

eum
2.

videbis,

e.

ov fiovov eyd> (not merely I).

of the Possessive

470.

The place

Pronoun

is

frequently supplied by the article ( 373). article with the Possessive Pronoun, 388.
a) Instead of the Possessive

On

the-

Pronoun the Greek

likes-

to use the Genitive of the corresponding Personal Pro-

noun.
it

Such a Genitive, when the substantive to whichj belongs has the article, usually stands either before
Digitized

by Microsoft

-268

THE EEFLEXIVE PKONOUN.

:

471.

or gov 6 the article or after the substantive o vlo^ (70V, thy son, not d aov vl6<;. b) As the Possessive Pronoun approaches very near to a possessive Genitive ( 408, 2), it may be qualified

vm

by a Genitive

rafxa Bvarijvov kuko,,

my

ills, the.

unfortu-

nate one's \mea miseri mala\.

471.

3.

The

Meflexive

-subject of the clause in

aiyvoei,

ProTwun refers either to the which it occurs St wyade, fxir)

:

aeavrov, good friend, be not ignorant of thyself; or, in dependent clauses, it refers back to the subject

of the
a-vv

leading

clause

ehiAvat

eKeKevaev,
enter, if

el

fie\Xoi<;

eavrS eWXeti/, he bade you to sail away with him (secum).

Obs. a)

you were going

Instead
I think

of the Eeflexive

Pronoun the usual Personal

:

8okS juoi oIk. anapda-Kevos myself not to he unprepared. bs. V) The simple Pronoun of the third person, ov, of, e, &c., is commonly used reflexively by the Attic writers, hut in Hom. it is exactly like the English, of him, to him, him, &c. (like the
ehai,

Pronouns also

may he employed

'AttoXXo)!' iicheipai

Attic avTOv, aira, avTov, &0., according to 474) Xey^rai. Mapaiav ipi^ovra oi nepl (rotpias, dicitur
:

Apollo Marsyae cutem detraxisse de arte secum certanti ; Hom. airSpaTOs de oi X6e MivcXaos, sponte sua ad eum venit Menelaus.
Obs. c)

The Eeflexive of the third person sometimes supplies the

:

place of that of the first and second

Set rjpas avepia-Qai, eavTois,

we must ask

ourselves;

in like

manner the

Possessive os

sometimes stands for the Possessive of the first two persons Hom. ov yap eymye ^s yairis hivapai yXvKeparepov oXXo IbiaBai, for I can see nothing sweeter than my own country.

472.

The

following are used as Possessives of the

Meflexive

Pronouns
Pronouns, especially
:

a) the Genitives of the Eeflexive

in the Singular

i/navrov, creavrov, eavrov.

When

the

substantive to which they are joined has the article, the

tive

Genitives stand between the article and the substanZeii? TTjv 'AOt/vuv e<j)vcrev ex t?5? eavrov KeipaXTJ^,
:

Zeus produced Athene out of his own head. b) the Possessives of the Personal Pronouns, espeDigitized

by Microsoft

; :

475.

DEMONSTEATITE AND INTEEKOG. PEONOTOfS.

rjiierepo-i,

269is

cially in the plural:

vfierepo';

cr^eVepos

exclusively Eeflexive.
c)

avToi;

the Possessives in connexion -with the Genitives of rjfieTepoi; avrSiv, &c.

:

473.

The

Reflexive

Pronoun in

the

Plural

is

also
v.

used

instead

of

8ieXey6/ie6a rjfuv

the Redproeal Pronoun aXkrfKav avTol'i, vje conversed with one another

(among

ourselves).

474.

On

ai)T6<;,

self,

and

avro?, the same, see-

389.
auTo? in the oblique cases, like the Lat. is, ea, id, is used as a Personal Pronoun referring to some person or thing mentioned before: iSiovro avTov Trapa/jLeivat,.
they wanted

Mm to remain.
rj<;,

The
is

Genitive avrov,

wv, like the Lat. ejus, eorum,

the Engl,

his, her, their,

when

it

does not refer to the-

subject.

Its position is that pointed out in 470,

Still

6 vto? aiiTov or avrov 6 vL6<;,filius ejus.

tive of awTo? often supplies

the Geni-

the place of the Eeflexive of

the third person.

475. Of the Demonstrative Pronouns, ovto9 pointsmore to what precedes and is already known; oSe to what foUows and has not yet been named so likewise
;

are distinguished toiovtc;, of such quality ; toctovto^, from roio'iSe, rocro^Se, so great; t7]\ikovto<;, so old On the article with these Pronouns, 389. rrj'XiKo'iSe.

On

the demonstrative uses of

6'?,

213, Obs.

4756.
:

The

Interrogative
vroto?,

216

Tt?,

TTOrepa,

Pronouns mentioned in &c., are used exclusively

employed..

in direct questions.

In indirect ones the compound

Relatives

ocrn?, oirorepo';, otvoIo^, &c., are

The

former, however, are often used in indirect ques:

rt? el tions, though the latter never in a direct one who are you ? ehve /loi, '6<tti<; el or rt? el, tell me who you are. On the Attractiq^m^^^iffi^%^onouns, 597-603.


270
THE ACTIVE VOICE.

476.

Chap. XIX.

1.

The Voices of the Verb.

1.

476.

The Active

Voice.

The Active
to drive

voice not unfrequently has an intrantransitive

to ride ;

sitive as well as

means

a and

meaning.
to

Thus

iKavveiv

'i-xeiv,

have, hold,

and to

he

in a condition (/caXw? ^X'^h iene se haiet) and to be (eS 'n-pdrro), I am doing well) .and to become manifest.
In some verbs
ings
2.
:

irpdrreiv, to do,
SrjXovv, to

make
mean-

different tenses are assigned to the different

see above, 329, 330.

Simple verbs which are transitive often become

when compounded: fidWeov, to throw pera^dWeiv, to change; i's^dWeiv and i/ji^dXKeiv, to fall
intransitive
into, issue (of rivers)
;

Zchovat, to give
.;

ivSiSovai, to give

in ;

eTTiBiSovai, to

grow

KOTrreov,
j)epeiv,

to

cut ; "TrpoKoirreiv,

proficere,

make progress;

to

bear;

hiajtepeuv,

differre, to differ or be distinguished.

3.

The Active

often denotes an action which the

subject accomplishes not immediately but mediately, that

causes or allows to be done by others: o KO/do? KwreKavae to, I3aal\eia, Gyrus had the royal castle burnt This is called the Causative use. down.
is,

477.

2.

The Middle

Voice.

Its primary meaning is reflexive, i. e. the action of the verb in the Middle refers back to the subject from

which

it issues.
iirst place,

The Middle, in the

or intransitive;
it is

may be
when

either transitive
it

transitive
:

can have an

object in the Accusative

'jrpdTTo/xat j^prjfiara,

I gain
of

Jor myself money ; intransitive when it is incapable having such an object d-rrkypiuii, I restrain myself. The Middle, further, can vary much in its mode
:

of

Teferriag back to the subject. distinguish Digitized by Microsoft

We

^480.

THE MIDDLE VOICE.

1.

271

478.

Ine
:

Direct Middle,
is

in

which the subject

at the

same time the

myself ;

direct object

of the verb

Xovonai,

I wash

TpeTro/j,ac,

I turn

show myself; Lcrrafiat,, J place myself; KaXv-n-rofiai, I hide myself. This Mnd of Middle is the rarest. The Actiye with the reflexive pronoun in the Accusative is more generally used to express
mi/self; hnhelicvvfiaii,

direct Eeflexion.
Obs.

Through,
iriiii,

the direct Middle

:

several middle verhs

have

hecome

intransitive or passive
;

Traiat,

I cause

to stop

iraiofiai,

stop myself, cease

Kpalva,
lefiai,

appear ;

I send ;

I shew ; ipaivojiai, I I send Tnysdf, hurry,

shew myself,

479.
action.

2.

The

JwcZiVec^, or
is

in which the subject

Dafwe-Zife Middle (431), but indirectly affected by the

Here the

action takes place for or in the

interest of the subject, so that in other

Dative
myself,
ivife to

may

influence:

languages the generally be used to denote the reflex iropitfo, I provide; wopi^ofiai,, I provide for

e. g. '^pi^fiaTU,

money ;

dyofiai, ^uvaiKa,

J take

myself ;

fiia-Qovfiai, a-rpari(ji)ra<;,

I hire

soldiers

for

myself (but fucrdovp, hire

<me's self out)
;

out, fucrOovv

kavrov, to hire

fieTaTrefiirofuti nva,,

I send for some

the

one;

Hom.
ffirr]';

aiiTo^

i(^eKKeTai
to
it.

avSpa

criSripo^,

iron itself
:

draws a man

Hence the Athenian

says

6 vofioSrjfioi

TiBt^iTi vofiov^, the

lawgiver gives laws, but 6

itself.

TiBerai vofiovv, the people gives laws to

Obs.

The interest of the subject sometimes consists in an object being removed from its reach ajiivajxai Kivhwov, I ward off danger from me ; Trpotejiai nva, I send some one away from
:

me ;
ship.

airohoudai, vavv (to give

away for

one's interest), to sell

(Comp. 324,

7).

480. 3. The Subjective or ethical Middle. This denotes that an action originates not only externally, but also internally from the subject, i. e. from its means, power, or disposition: irapexew, to furnish;

fwrnish from one's iraoeveadai, to J '

own means;

jroi.eat

'^

Digitizedty Microsoft

272

THK MIDDLE VOICE.

n-oielcrBai
ri,

481,
to strive to
;

elpr]Vt]v, to make feace, ; make peace ; \afji,^dvei.v

elprjvqv,

to

take something

Xufi^ato

veaOai rova,
Ohs.The
verbs
active
;

to

lay

hold

of

something;

aKoireiv,

look at ; aKoiretaOai,, to reflect.

subjective Middle is formed
it
:

also from intransitive then expresses a state more intensively than the
to

n-oXiTevcu',

he

citizen

woXiTevecrdai, to act as

citizen; PovXeieiv, to give advice;

^ovXevea-dai, to deliberate

with

one's self.

481. 4. The Causative Middle. As the Causative Active ( 476,

s)

expresses an

action only occasioned by the subject, so the Middle is often used to denote that the subject has an action done
for or
ffn

itseK

o iraTrip SiSdaKerao rov viov, the father

iraparLOefiM hehrvov, I have a meal placed before me ; hiKd^ajjuab, I have judgment pronounced for me ; diroTeixvofiai ra? ')(elpa<s, I have my

has his son instructed;

hands cut

off.

verbs

following more important be adduced, whose meaning in the Middle essentially differs in various ways from that of the

4815.

As examples the

may
:

Active ypd^ei

apx^},

f-'^'^t,

apxa/J-ai,,

begin

6 prjrwp

vo/xov, the orator proposes (writes

down) a law;
rificopM

6 KUT'^opo'; lypdcfjeTat rov diiKrjaavra, the accuser prosecutes (has the

Tivi,

name written down) the wrong doer ;

I help one ; rificopovfiai nva, I avenge myself on one; alpoi, I take, alpovfiai, I choose ; Bavei^w, I put out to interest ; Savei^o/j,ai, I borroiv at interest ; irdQai, I persuade, iteiQoiiai, I allow myself to be persuaded, I obey.
One and the same Middle may occur
jxai (4),

in different senses

fiiSao-Ko-

cause to teach, or (1) I teach myself, learn ; rpeVofiai (1), / turn myself, or (2) I turn to myself: rpiivovTai tus yvafiai, they change their opinion; rpiTrovrai tovs woXefitovs,

they turn

away (put

to flight)

tJie

enemy

( 479, Ois.).

among the different 482. Obs. kinds of Middle verbs, and differ from the verbs mentioned only by Thus vma-xi'ovji.ai, I pledge myself, is a liaving no active form.
Digitized

The deponents are distributed

by Microsoft


^484.
direct Middle
direct
;

: ;

USE OF THE TENSES.

;

273
I
acquire, are in:

but

Se^of'"')

receive
otfiai,

ktoo/uu,

aymvi^oiiat,
to

contend ;
is

think, are subjective

ava-

fiioxraa-Bai,

revive,

causative.

On

the Passive Deponents,

328.

483.

3.

The Passive Voice

has a freer use in Greek than in Latin, viz. 1. even such verbs as in the Active take a different case from the Accusative, form a Passive Karat^povM
:

TWO?

424),

I despise
avrwv
;
;

one

KaTcuppoveiTai rt?
;

vir' i/xov

jTiarevovai,

to

^acriXel, they trust the king

6 ^acnXev<i

irtcTTeveTai vtt

eTrt^ovXeveo

rm

voXefiim, he plots

against the enemy

6 TroXe/iio? iiri^ovKeverat vtt avrov,

a plot is made against the enemy hy him. 2. Neuters of Passive participles may be formed even from intransitive verbs: rh arparevofieva, the warlike measures; ra crol jreiroXiTevfjieva, your political course, your policy. 3. The exclusively Passive forms even of Deponents are sometimes used in a Passive sense ^idtpfiai, 1 force, i^ida-drjv, I was forced ; in like manner a Passive may be formed from a Middle atpea>, I take, aipeofj-at, Pass. I am chosen; fiereTri/jicpOr), he was sent for, fieTOr Trkyjwoiiai, I send for ( 479).
:

Chap.

1.

XX.

^Use op

the Tenses.

484. In marking the time the Greeks distinguished

The Oedee of time. The three Orders of time being the Present, the Past, and the Future. 2. The KiSD of time. In regard to the Kind of time
an action
know;
h)
or,
is

either
e. g.

a) going on,

'^i^voxtkuv (gradually), to learn to

momentary, ^,^^'^^^v<^to^^<^^ive, know;

or,

27'

USE OF THE TENSES.

eompMed,
e. g.

485;

c)

i'yvmKevai,, to

have learnt, to

know

(Lat. nosse).
Ohs.

The

momentary

action

action going on to a line,

may be compared to a point, the and the completed action to a surface.

indicated indicated
indicated

An

action

ffoi77g

on

is

by the forms

of the-

JPresent-Stem.

A A

momentary action
completed action

is

by the forms of the by the forms

of the

Aorist-Stems.
is

Perfect-Stem.

The Future denotes the

^vwa-ojjbai,

future Order of time of an

action going on, as well as of a

momentary
and

action

shall (gradually) get to know,

shall

perceive; the Third Future (futurum exaetum) that of a completed action iyv6}Ka)<; eaofiai, I shall have learnt
:

(Lat. novero).

In the Present, Aorist, and Perfect, only

indicates a dBflnite Order of time;

the Indicative

the other Moods,

the Infinitive and the Participle, resemble the corresponding Indicatives only in regard to the Kind, not
in regard to the Order of time.

The following
relations

table presents a general view of these

Present.

Past.

Future.

Going on.

Ind. Pres.

Imperf.

Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf., Part., of the Present.

Momentary.

Aor. Ind.

I ^

Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf.,. of the Aorist.

Completed.

Perf. Ind.

Pluperf.

Futm-um exact.

Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf., Part., of the Perfect.

As the English as well as the Latin language 485. Ohs. generally neglects the distinction between an action going on and a
Momentary
action, it is difficult to

Digitized

comprehend by Microsoft

it.

similar dis-

; :

488.

THE PRESENT INDICATIVE.

may

275

tinotion, however,

QpcvycLv),

and escape
;

(c^vyeij')

be perceived in some Bnglisli verbs, as flee flicker and flash ; fear ((jio^cia-dai),
; ;

and

ie frightened (0o0))6^vai, hua-ai)

to he

worarfer (5au/xaffiv),
(wpacro-cij'),

and

to he

surprised (6aviJ,d<rai)

husy about

and

to

accomplish

(wpa^ai)

yeKav, to he laughing, and yeXaa-ai, to hurst out laughinC/.

1.

Forms of an Action
a)

in Progress.

The Present

Indicative.

486. The Present Indicative denotes, as in English and Latin, an action going on or in progress at the present time : iKerevofikv ere irdvTe^, we all im/plore thee. Hence by the Present are expressed general assertions, valid for all times, and therefore also for the Present ea-Ti

eo?, there

is

a God.
to the Past,

Ols.

Actions wbose commencement indeed belongs

effects
:

but whose

by

this tense
still

extend to the Present, are sometimes expressed axoia, I hear, also in the sense I have heard
:

and

bear in mind j/imm, I conquer, i.e., I am victorious (fievya, 1 am hanished ; dSiKtm, I am wrong (h&ve done wrong) ; In this sense alone are used ^xa, lam 6vfi(TKi, he is dead.
;

come ;

oixojiai,

I am

gone.

he represented as present, hence the

a lively apprehension a past action may use, very frequent in Greek, of the Historical Present, which frequently alternates with past tenses: poet. koX irSyi opdrat koX
487.

By

ripeOr)

and how

is

she seen,

and was

she captured ? eVel

roii<s

^yeiTO 'Ap^lBa/j,o'; kuI eTropevero ivl

avrnraXov:,

ivravda oiiToi ovk ihe^avro rov<s irepl tov 'ApxiScifj,ov, aXX' iryicKlvova-iv, as Archidamus tools, the lead and

marched against the enemy, the latter did not wait for the troops of Archidamus, hut retreat.
is

488.

5)

The Imperfect

the Preterite of an action in progress, like the Latin

Imperfect.

The Greek

therefore uses the Imperfect where he

wishes to describe past states or past actions in their progress, in their <^>M0MMM,&'^^g with others, or in

276
their

THE IMPEEFECT.
frequent,

489-

continued
ivl

repetition:

Horn,
oi

ol

fiev

dp' otvov
UTToyyoiai,

e/J^icryov

Kp7jT7]pcri,

koX

vhoap,

avTe

iroKvrprjTOicrt,

rpaire^ai;

vi^ov koX

irpoTiOev,

To\ 8e Kpea iroXKa BarevvTo, some were mingling loine

and

water in mixing-bowls, others cleaning tables ndth porous sponges, and placing them, the rest were carving much

meat; rov?
were fighting,
^fiap,

fLev

ovv irekTaara'; iSi^avTo ol ^dp^apoi

tJie

Kal ifxaxovTo, the barbarians met

Horn.
fJLohJ
it

peltasts,

and

then

6(^pa p,ev ^o)? ^v Kal ai^ero lepov

rjiTTero,
irlirTe

TOippa

ajx^orepcov jSeke

re

Xao9, as long as

was morning, and holy day

increasing,

so long the darts of both

were striking and people falling.

tojv

oinroTe

fjuelov

aTreaTparoTreSevovTO ol /3dp^apoi,

'K\X^va>v k^rjKovTa araSicov, the barbarians (did not

encamp) used never

the Hellenes.

to

encamp

less

than sixty stadia from

The Imperfect frequently expresses a merely 489. Ohs. 1. attempted but not accomplished action jrpSiTos KXeap^os tovs airov (TTpaTtoiTas ejSta^ero Uvat, ol 6e avrbv e^aXkov, varepov de eVet eyi/cr
:

oTt ov

bvvr](rcTaL ^idfracrOat.,

(rvvrjyayfv

kKKkruriav, first Olearchus

tried to force his soldiers to go, hut they shot at

him ; afterwards,
offered to give, to

however, as he perceived he would not he ahle to force them he sum-

moned a meeting.
distinguish
490.
it

So ihibov sometimes means he

eSowce!/,

from

Ae gave. of the verbs

Ohs. 2.

The Imperfects
what was done

and must
in

are used, just as in Latin, to denote

:

which denote should what should be done,

opposition to

eSei

roiis 'Keyovras jujre irpos

e)(^Spav wou'Lo-dai.

have

made
;

tJieir

tov Xoyoy fx^Te npbs x^P'") ^^ speakers ought to speeches neither from Imired nor from, favour (Lat.

oportebaf)

On

so xp^", '* ought ; ukos tjv, it would he fair. the Imperf. with &, 494, Ohs. 1, and 537, &c.
c)

491.

The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Participle Present

Infinitive,

simply express an action in progress, whether it lie in the present, past, or future iiaivojx^Qa TrdvTe';, ottotov
:

opyi^cofj.eda,

we are

all

mad when we

are angry

eXeyov
outoi

Tc5 ^vdvBij/jLo),

oTi wdvTe'i eToiiJLoi elev jjuavOdvew, they

told

Euthydcmus
^

that

tlieii

Digitized^by Microsoft

were all ready ^

to learn

; '

492.

THE AOEIST INDICATIVE.

av crv Kekevri<;, I will do agam, ut tu me agere jubehis)
ijKovcre, Si,a t5)v
eiT),

277
you may hid tavra Xeycov

iroirtao), ott&j?

<xs
;

me

{sic

dopv^ov
66pv^o<;

rd^eeov l6vT0<i koI rjpero,

saying

this,

he heard a noise pass through the

ranks, and ashed what the noise was.

Obs.

^These Present forms sometimes,

:

like the Imperfect ( 489),

fifj

express a mere attempt

to arroStSpdo-Kovfa

hivacrBai diro-

hpavai voWf] /impla, for a

man

not to he able to run

away

when

he tries

to

run away

is

great stupidity.

492.

2.

FOEMS OF A MOMENTAEY AcTION.

a)

The Aorist Indicative

the Preterite of a Momentary action, and therefore denotes the actual beginning of an action in the past, similar to the Historical Perfect of the Latins.
is

The Greeks employ the

Aorist Indicative

when they

wish to narrate past facts, to state past actions simply as having happened, or to represent them as individual facts without reference to other actions: p.era Trjv iv A.6r]vawi i^eXiirov ttjv ^oiwriav K-opccveia, /J,d')(rjv ol irdcrav, after the battle at Coronea the Athenians left all
Boeotia;

TLava-aviwi

e'/c

AaKeBaifiovo'; crTpaTrf/o'; virb

etKoai vewv
d-rro

'^Xkijvmv
vrjcrov,

i^Trefji(j}67i

/j,Ta

HeXoTrov-

^vveifKeov he Kal 'KOrjvaioi TpiaKOvra vavcrl Kal

yjravTo,

iaTpdrevaav e? Kinrpov Kal avrfj'; rd TroWd KarearpiPausanias was sent out from Lacedaemon as

general hy the Hellenes, with twenty ships from the Peloponnese, hut Athenians also accompanied him (accomceeded to Cyprus
To^iKTjv Kal

panying circumstance) with thirty ships, and they proand subdued the greater part of it;

laTpiKrjv Kal fiavriKrjv 'A'noWcov dvevpev, Apollo invented the arts of archery, medicine, and proHorn. Tr}v he ivoXv irp&TO'; the Ti^Xe/ua^^o? 0eophecy

et8?79, ^i)

h' Idv'i

irpodvpoio, veiieaarjOr]
i<j)eaTd/j,ev,

ivl

6v/ji,a>

^eivov

hrjBd

BvprjaiV

iyyvOi,

he

o-ra?

X^V

^'^

Se^ireprjv

Kal

ihe^aro

yakKeov

erfxo^,

but

her first
to

Telemachus of forS^givmtiibiit^lc^otlSd he went straight

278
tlie

THE AOEIST INDICATIVE.

and was ffrieued
at heart that

493.

porch,

a stranger stood

a long time at the door, and going near he took him hy the

hand and eased him of his brazen spear. As the Aorist Indicative simply expresses an action as having taken place in the past, it answers to
right

493.

the different Preterites in other languages, especially often in subordinate sentences to the Latin and English
all

pluperfect
T^js

487) diro Darius has Gyrus sent for from tJie province, over which he had made him satrap (fecerat). Thus the Aorist is used with the
:

Aapeto'; K.vpov

fieraTrefj.'ireTai,

apX'??

^? avTov craTpdTTTjv

eiroiTjcrev,

Conjunctions of time, ivel, &>?, Latin Perfect with postquam,

fj(r9eT0 Kpavyfj';, dveirriBr^aev eirl
criwv,

ore, as, wlien, like

ubi,

the

ut:

to?

KOpo?
ivOov-

rov

"irirov acrirep

when Gyrus perceived

(ut audivit)

cry, he

sprang

upon

his horse like one inspired.

494. The Aorist Indicative is used in statements of experience implying that a thing once happened, hut admitting an application to all times : poet. t xP"*"? V ^'"'J ""^^rtof ^\6' cnronaafiivr], with time avenging justice always came (and hence always comes) kol ^padvs ev^ovKos etXeu ra^vv avBpa diatKcov, even a slow man, when well advised, overtooh (overtakes) In/ pursuit a quich man. In English vre employ the Present in such general assertions, and often add such adverbs as usually, commonly, always, &c., ras tS>v <f>avXQ)v
;

crvvovalas Skiyos -j^povos biekvaev,

associations of the had.

because
it is

it is

a short time usually dissolves the is called the gnomic Aorist, often used in gnomes, proverbs, or maxims. In Hom.
This Aorist

often-also used in comparisons.

Ohs. 1.

In expressing what usually happens, the Aorist sometimes has av in order to express the case as one that may have occurred, ajid therefore may occur oftener : eKe^ev av, he may have said. In the same way the Imperfect is used, but referring to an action in progress
SirjpaiTaiv av, ri \tyoifv,
:

avakaji^avav airav
their

to. jroiriftaTa

taking

up

poems

I would asle

what

they meant.
Ohs. 2.

The Aorist Indicative, especially in the 1 Pers. Sing, is frequently used to express actions and states begimiing only at the moment of speaking : iyiXaara, I burst out laughing ; poet,
the

injivea-' epyov Kol jrpovoiav fjv Wuv, I praise the deed and prudence which you have exercised. On the Hypothetical Aorist, 537, &c.

Digitized

by Microsofi

496.

THE AOE.

SUBJ., OPT., IMPEEAT.,

AND

INFIN.

279

495. 5) T}ie Aorist Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative,

and
present, past, or future

Infinitive,

denote a Momentary action simply, whether

:

of the

rpiaKovra Trpo<;iTa^av airaja/yeiv Aeovra, tV airoddvoi, the Thirty commanded to take Leon away to die ; a/wopm, tL irpcorov fivrjaOS), I am in doubt what first to mention; firj dav/idaTjre, i^v irapdol

So^ov
<rv

elTTca to,

be not surprised if

I say something strange ;

answer, boy
S
;

fjboi

aTTOKpivai,

&

iral, give

me an

fLeya

x)lfj,at

epjov TO

dp')(r]v

Karairpa^ai,

tto'Xv

en

fiel^ov
to
it

to

Xa^ovTa tiaaaiaaaOai, I deem it a great thing a government, but a still greater to maintain
acquiring
Ohs.
it.

found
after

Imperative, and Infrnitive from the corresponding forms of the Present, just as the Aorist Indicative differs from the ImperSubjunctive,
Optative,
Aorist, therefore, differ
fect;

The

the Aorist forms express a single

^oKcttov to
Troielv,
e'L

fact,

oonoeived as a
it is

point, the Present, as a state or condition, sometimes of long

'duration

to Se KeXeOtrat pabiov,

di^cult

to do, easy to
firi,

command ;

717;

cx^'^ avrCkiyeiv, avrtkey^- ei he

iraxJa-ai TroWaKts Xeycov Tov airov \6yov, if you have any-, thing to say in reply, reply (even in a long speech), if not, cease (at once) freqmntly repeating the same statement.

496.

The

Aorist Participle
tooTc
:

regularly

expresses

something which

place earlier or before the act of

K/aoto-o?

the principal verb

"AXvv

Sio/Sa?

fieyaX'ijv

apxhv

KaToXiKTet,, Oroesu^, after crossing the

Halys, will

overthrow a great empire; iradiov Se re vri-Tno's eyvoi (by suffering) even a fool becomes ( 494), after suffering

knowing.
Qls_

As the Aorist generally indicates the moment at which an action actually iegins ( 485), so the Aorist Participle also only expresses that the beginning of an action took place hefore another action, whilst its progress may continue simultaneously with that
other
:

yeXaVas

ein-e,

he legan to laugh

and

said (laughing) [risu

ohorto dixit^.

Horn.

2jSc Sc tis ehrftrKiv lSi)v is ttXijo-iov aXXoy,

,uoi aTToKpivafi.vos,

thus would say many a one while looking at his neighbour; xapurai answer and oblige me, inasmuch as the x<^P^'
crao-^at follows

iiS4My ftftobifes^eginning

of the answer.

; : :

280

THE

FUTlirKE.

*7,

497. As tlie Aorist Indicative may frequently be translated by the Pluperfect ( 493), so also the Aorist Optative and Infinitive .11 assertions generally denotes something which took place he/ore lit 'ivSol eXe^v on ir4ii-^ei (rcfias 6 'IvSav (Sao-tXeis (Ind. otl

fnefv^i), the Indians said that the king of the Indians had sent them ; KixKams 'kiyovrai iv StKeXia oiK^o-ai, the Cyclops are said to

have dwelt in Sicily.

498.

Many
:

fiate,

denote in
to

verbs whose Present-Stem expresses a all the Aorist forms the entrance intoto

this state

ap'xew,
be

rule,

dp^ai, to obtain dominion

to

^aauKeveiv,

king,

^aaikevcrai,

become king;
;

layyav,
to
cT'xeTv, to

to be strong, layycrai, to
crvyricrai,,

become strong

aiyav,

be silent,

to

become silent;
voarjaai,

e%6ty, to have,

obtain

(f>aive(fOai, to

apparent;
begin
Ohs.

voaelv,
be

to

be

ill,

appear, ipavfjvai, to become ; to become ill

to

TToKefielv, to

war (bellum gerere), "TroXe/MricraL, war (bellum inferre). (Comp. 485.)

at
;

This meaning, however, is not always attached to these forms and iTToke/irja-av may also signify simply helium gessenmt
( 492).

499.

3.

The Futuee
ap^<o,

expresses the futurity both of an action in progress

of a

Momentary

action

I shall

become ruler,

and and

I shall rule.
Ohs.

The 2 Person Future with oi nearly resembles the negativeImperative, ovK eTnopKrja-ets, thou wilt (shalf) not swear falsely. The Future
that, is

Indicative in relative clauses, and in clauses worthy of notice, for there the Future denotes what may or should happen r ovk e^o/tev oVou alrov wvrjcro^cda, ive~ have nothing with which we can huy food (non liahemus, quo cibum 500.

with

offojj,

emamus)

Set ajravra

TdTos eorai, every

man

avhpa tovto Trapaa-Kevd^saSat, ottojs cos a"0(^a)should take care to he (that he shall he) as

wise as possible (oomp. 553). X^pa TToWrj KoX dyadr] rfv Kai 7]
I'lrge
e'a-Tai,

The

Participle is similarly used

ivrjcrav ol epyacTOfievot, the

land was
; t'is.

and good and

6 fjyrja-oiievos

there were people to (luho could) cultivate it

;

who

will he there to (luho can) guide us (comp.

380, 578).
Ohs.

av (Horn.

Ke) is

sometimes added to the Future Indicative

to denote that a case

may

possibly occur

(v 016'

on

aiTjiivos

Digitized

by Microsoft

503.

THE PERFECT INDICATIVE.

o-u el

281
well

&v irpbs avSpu oior

d7raK\ayri(reTm,

know
;

that he

will be glad to be reconciled to a

man

such as you are

Horn.
ilb'

6 6e Kv Ke^oXanxerai ov Kev

iKtafiat,

and he

will doubtless he

wrath whom I come upon.

501. The verb /leXXw ia used with the Present, Future, or, though more rarely, the Aorist Infinitive, to express an immediately/ approaching or at least intended

action /u-iXkco vfm<; wyeiv ek ^Acriav, I am going to lead you to Asia (in Asiam vos ducturus sum). This is called the periphrastic Future.
:

Obs. 1.

fieKXm may also be used in other tenses than the Present

Infinitive,

with an

like

esse

in Lat.,

TrXT^trioy rjdT] rjv 6

aTodfios evda efieWov KaraKva-eiv,

with the Part. Fut. r jam prope

rest.

aderat statio ubi deversuri erant, where they wished to

Obs. 2.

TTWE
4.

or TL ov fieWm,
?

is elliptical

in the sense of

Why

should

I not

Forms of a Completed Action.

502. a) The Perfect Indicative

the Present of a completed action, i. e. by the Perfect, the Greeks denote an action completed for and with reference to the Present : poet. X0709 XeXearat 7rd<;, the evprjKa, I have whole speech has been spoken [dixi] found, 1 have it ; Hom. rjhr) lyap TereXea-Tat a fioi ^tXo?
is
;

fjdeke

6vfj.6<;,
rj

desired ;

iroXi';

for now has been finished what my dear soul eKTiavat Trapa t&v ^opwOLaiv, the city
still

has been founded by the Corinthians (of a

city)
;

existing-

TO, '^^pi^fiara rot? irXovalot';

-^

Tvyj) ov BeScopTjTai,
leyit

dXka

8eSdveL/cev,

Fortune has not given, but

to the rich.

(at

interest), their
503.
Obs.

money

Several

Perfects have entirely a Present meaaing,

in

inasmuch as they present

uai,

a completed state the action of which

is

the gradual accomplishment

expressed

by the Present

fufivrjo-Ko-

I remind myself, fie/ivrjiiai, I bear in mind, remember {rnemini) KaXeofiai, I am named ; k/kXjj^m, my name is ; neiBofiai, I folloiv oKkv/xi, I am perishing ; oXmXa, I am lost iTCTroida, I confide in "larap.ai, I place myself; Keicr-qfiai, I possess KTaofiat, I acquire earrjKa, I stand PaiofgiizmSt^^^imtsiffm gone.
; ; ; ;

:282

THE FUTUKE PEEEECT.

i !504.

504. 5) The Pluperfect

action,
i. e.

is the Preterite of a completed

by

tlie

Pluperfect the Greeks express an action completed for :and with reference to a past time: Horn. Br] tots y' aTpe/ji,a<; evSe XeXacTfj,evo'; Sera i-rreKovoei, then truly

what lie had suffered ; iv rot? airaaw Spiaro TOt<; ajxapTavovcn tjjfila 6dvaro<;, in Draco's laws death had been appointed says an for all criminals as the only punishment Athenian after the laws were aboKshed. (As long as they were in force wpia-Tai.)
-he slept quietly,

forgetting
jjula

Apa.KOVTO';

v6fJ,oi<;

Obs.

The Pluperfects

of the Perfects enumerated in 503, are to

be translated by Imperfects.

On

the Aorist in the sense of the Latin Pluperfect, 493.

505. c)
is

The Futuee Peeeect

(FuTUEUlfl:
i.

exactum)

the Future of a completed action,

e.

it

denotes an
It is

action which will be completed in the future.

only in the Middle that the Greeks have a apecial form for this Third Future, which has generally a Passive meaning. In the Active the circumlocution by means

be used
to

of the PeTfect Participle and the Future of ehai must av ravr elSwfiev, ra Beovra icrofieOa ( 291)
:

eyvcoKore';,

when we know this, we shall (thence) have got know our duty; Horn, i/xol Se XeXelyjrerai, aXyea

Xvypd, but
Obs.

I shall have gloomy

:

woes

left

me.

Future Perfect of the Perfects mentioned in 503 serves as a common Future jiijivfjo-oiiai, meminero, &c.

The

506. d)

The Perfect of

all the

Moods, of the

Infinitive,

and of
expresses
refer to

the Participle

a completed action generally, and may any of the three Orders of time ov j3ovXev6crOai copa aWa ISePovKevcrdat, now is not the time to consult, but to have consulted (to be resolved) Sep|i;?
: ;

-&)?

iirvOeTo rov 'EXX'^o-ttovtov i^ev^dat,

Digitized

jrpofj'yev

6 ro)v

by Microsoft


511.

USE OF THE MOODS.

283
Hellespont had

"ZdpBemv,

when Xerxes

learnt

that

the

provided with a bridge, oTt e^evKTo), he marched forward from Sardis; ravra fiev ovv irpoeipija-Oa), thus rrmch he said beforehand (now to
still

been bridged over (and was

something
"IXto9
Ipij,

else)

Horn, ea-aerao rjfiap ot av itot a day will come when holy Ilios will
; ;

okoiXr)
he lost

(has been lost)

'xprjcriixov

n icrKe/i/ievo^ yKw, I am come

after having devised something useful.

Chap. XXI.

Use of the Moods.

A) The Moods in Simple Sentences.

507.

1.

The Indicative.
with the usage of

The

Indicative,
is

in accordance

other languages,

employed simply to state something positively or negatively, or simply and directly to ask a question poet. tjJ? dpeTfj<; iSpayra deal wpoirdpoiOev
:

eOrjKav, the gods placed sweat before virtue

49 dvBpa>v
Ohs.
;

Hom.

-KoQa)

from what

class of

men

are you P
or without

On the Indicative in hypothetical sentences with

2.

On the Aorist Ind. with ay, to express what usually happens, see 494.
av, 536, &c., in sentences expressing a wish, 515.

27ie Subjunctive.

508.

place;

it
it

Hence
let

expresses what ought to take always refers to the present, to reality. is used in the following cases
1.

The Subjunctive

509.

as a challenge in the first person:

;

'ieofiev,

us go

\_eamus'\
! let

well,

come

^epe B^, ra? fiapTVpui<s vjuv avar/vw, me read you the testimonies \recitern\.
firj

510.

2.

with the negative

in prohibitions
:

and in

>iegative admonitions (comp. 518)

tie

firj

tovto

TroiJ^o-j;?,

hocfeceris,

you ought not

to

do

this.

511.

3.

In hesiiafim^ iimiieimm7heTe

it

is

asked

! :

284

THE OPTATIVE MOOD.

:

51!t.

what should be done

TTois

rt ^cS

what

am I to

say ? Horn.
;

Tt? roi

7rp6(j)pa)v

eireaiv

ireiOnfjTai

A.')(aiS}v

how

shall

any of
-nfici^

the

Be^ea-Oe
to

Aehaeans willingly trust thy words? n aTri(o/u,ev ; will you receive us, or are we
ia sentences expressing fear or
a\.r]6e<;

depart ?

512. 4. with
:

jxri

anxiety

firj

op/poiKorepov to

ehrelv, if it he not
is

rather rude to say the truth.

If the anxiety

to

be
and

negatively expressed,
^paicr/j,r}

jjJfj

ov

is

used

Horn,

firj

vv rot ov

crKfjirrpov

xal

crTef:ifj,a

6eolo, lest the staff

wreath of the god should not help thee, i. e. it will certainly be of little help to thee [Lat. vereor ne ncn or Comp. 533, 616, Obs. 3, 621, a. ut tejuvet].
The Homeric language employs the Subjunctive of 513. 06s. future events, quite like the Fut. Ind. to express a thing that is to be expected ( 545) : ov yap ttco tocovs tSov dvipas ovSs 'IScofiai, for never yet did 1 see such men nor Tnay (shall) I see them, av is
sometimes added in
Kidapis
TO.

Hom.

to this Subjunctive

ovk av toi

;i(pai'(r/ii7

T 6mp' 'A0po8iTT)f, the lyre

and Aphrodite's

gifts

would

not help

thee.

Comp.

500, Ols.

3.

The

Optative.

514.
is
:

av)

1. The Optative alone (without the particle used to express a wish that something may take

place

poet.

&

iral,

yevoio 7raTpo<; e\nv)(iaTepo<;,

boy

may you
Subj.].

be happier than

your father [Lat. Pres. or Perf.

The
515.

particles
:

used

(like Lat. utinam) to introduce a

wish are

el

(Horn,

at),

eWe (Horn.

atOe), el yap,
is

o)?.

Ols.

If it is to

be intimated that a wish

not to he

and expressed by the Imperfect or Aorist Indicative tiff rjo-Ba Bwarbs Spav otrov 7rp6dvp,os ei, would that you were able to do what you wish ; eWe croi Tore a-uveyevop-qv, would that I then had met you. The same kind of wish is expressed by the Aorist m^eXov (properly " I owed ") and the Infinitive oXeVflai &(j)e\ov TrjS' rjpepa, would that I had perished on that day [Lat. Imperf. and Plup. Subj.]. Comp. 537.
realised, it is referred to the past,
:

516.

2.

The Optative with the

Digitized

particle av (Horn. Ke by Microsoft

519.

THE IMPEEATIVE MOOD.

285

or Kev) exTpresses possibiUti/ : tovto yivoir av, that (coald) might be ; rt '^ap yevoir av eX/co? /xei^ov <^/\o? KaK6<; ; what greater evil could there be than a bad friend ? ttov Stjt' av elev ol ^evoi ; why ! where can the strangers be ? [Lat. Pres. and Perf. Subj.] The Optative with av is therefore called the potential Optative.
-rj

517.

Ohs. 1.

Hence the Optative

:

witii av is

used in modestly-

expressed assertions
Svvaio

ovk hv
e'lrj,

Xe'yoi/it,

I would not

say [non dixerini]

j>pa &v ava-Kevd^eardai

firj

it is

perhaps time

to hreah

up

ovk &v

Kafimv eiSai/ioveiv, you could not witJwut taking trouble

he happy.

Ohs. 2. In the poets the Optative in a potential sense is also used without av: Horn, peia deosy id^Xmv Koi TrjXodev avSpa a-aacrai, a god who is willing can easily save a man even afar off. But this use of the Optative to denote a possihle and merely imaginary case is originally peculiar to this mood, and hence is preserved in dependent clauses, 528, 529, 532, 06s., 546, 552, Ols.

518. 4. The Imperative.

is

The Imperative

the

mood

of

command

and, with

negatives, of prohibition.

A prohibition
Imperative
/t?;
:
/j,7)

in the second person can be expressed

viz. either

only in two ways,

with

fj})

and the Present

n-pd^ri';,

irparre, of a continued action, or with

fir;

and the Aorist Subjunctive: Momentary action, do not do : raOrd

xal
firj

of

fiot irpa^ov,

tekvov,

child,

^pdSvve fjiriS" iirifiVTjaOfj'i ere and delay not nor think further
jj^rj

Tpoia<;, do

me

this,

of Troy.
aWco<;,

In the third person also

is

with the Aorist Imperative

let

admissible

fj/riBel<;

ifi&v TrposBoKrj(rdTa)

none of you expect otherwise. On the Infinitive instead of the Imperative, see On the Imperative as a substitute for a hypo577.
thetical clause, 545, 05s. 3.

B) The Moods in Compound Sentences.

519.

Preliminary remarks on the connexion of

one'S!($Mi^.'W'crosoft

sentences with

286
1.

THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES.

519.

Two

simple sentences
viz. eitlier

361, 2)

may

be combined

in two ways,

a) so, that the

other

this

one may be quite independent of the combination is called Co-ordination, or Parathey mutually are referred to each other their combicombination
is

taxis (Trapdra^hs).
b) so, that

and express a complete thought only in

nation

this

called Subordination, or

Hypotaxis (vTroTa^is). 2. Of two Co-ordinate sentences each is a principal sentence, and in every respect independent of the
other Koivrj rj tvx^ ''^''' "^o fieXKov doparov, fortune is common, and the future invisible ; tovto iryo) ovt e'cprjKa, ovre Xiyoi/u,!, dv, I have Tieither said that, nor could I
:

say

it.

the manner in which coordinate sentences may be combined, 624, a. 3. By Subordination two sentences are combined in such a way that one expresses the principal idea, the

On

other a secondary one.

Subordinate.

The former

is

called the

leading sentence, the latter the secondary, dependent or

One

leading sentence often has several

it.

subordinate ones dependent on

ordinate sentences are in

The moods

of sub-

many ways

determined by the
rbv ILvpov

leading sentence
"TTjJo?

Ti,(Tcra(f>epv7]<;

Sia/SdWei,

rov dSeX(j}6v,

d>^

i-irt^ovXevoL uvtS,

Fissaphemcs
his
brother,
trol

brings

calumny against

Cyrus

before

(saying) that he was plotting against

dfi ea-TTofieO', ocjjpa

him; Hom.

av

%at/Jj?9,

we have followed

thee thai

thou mayst
4.

rejoice.

connexion of sentences is a special kind of subordination. Of two correlative sentences, one always refers to the other. The one is called the
Correlative

The

Protasis, and the other the Apodosis. The Protasis, which requires to be completed by another sentence, is

subordinate (3). The Apodosis is a leading sentence, which furnishes |jie.feng^es^i;g^^(^pletion Hom. S,

520.

THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES.

&<;
fjLiv

287
iiinir
the-

iSev,

eSv x^'^'

^^ ^^^

*^

wrath seized

Horn. OTTirowv k

Mnd

eVo? rolov k enaKovaai,^, of word you speak such you will hear.
et-Trrjada

Obs. 1.

This

correlation is frequently expressed

ty two Pronouns-

or Particles referring to eacli other ( 216, 217), as in the examples just quoted, hut not always : ci tv-tj ex^is avrCKiyciv,.
dj/TiXeye, if

Obs. 2.
&.V

The'Apodosis often precedes the

0(TTis KOcriudnTara

you can in any way

reply, reply,

Protasis

oStos iScXno-ros-

e'ir]

ras (ru/i0opaf <^epciv Sivarai, he would

he the lest

who can

hear calamities with most dignity.

5.

From

the subordination of one clause to another^,

two

there arises a compound sentence.

Ols. 1.

The same thought may often be

6vi5ltrj}$,

as well expressed in

Co-ordinate sentences as in one

Compound
tv^tj,

sentence

/iijSevJ-

(Tv^opav
IxrjScvi

kolv^
is

yap

f]

reproach no one with

tj

a calamity, for fortune

one with a calamity.
Ols. 2.
is

common ;

or iwe\

Tixo

koivt)

iariy

(TVji^opav oveiBloTjs, since fortune is

common

reproach no
in series-

The Homeric language abounds

of Co-ordinate sentences (the paratactio arrangement).

Frequently a word belonging to

is

the Dependent sentenceit

drawn

into the Principal sentence, where

may

appear in
;

different cases.

If the Principal sentence stands first the ar-

rangement
Kai
fioL

called prolepsis (jrpokijijns, taking beforehand)

el

Tov vlov fine,

pepdBrjKe ttjv tcx"'!^

'='

f"" f OTe, el
6'

6-

viis fjffia^Tjxe TrjV Tex'"]" ( 397).

yvoirjs, TvoTepoKTi p-erelr),

Horn.

TtiSeifij/i'

ovk av

you could

scarce perceive

on which side

Tydides stood ; koI twv ^apfidpav iiTep,eKeiTo, as nokep.eiv iKavoi he also took care that the barbarians should he capable of carrying on war. On the other hand a substantive may pas from the Principal to the Subordinate sentence Hom. fiera S ecraerai fjv tot aTnjvpav Kovprjv Bpicrrjos, among them also will b& the daughter of Srises whom I then tooh away (comp. 602).
eirjo-av,
:

6.

On

the different kinds of sentences according

to-

their substance,

624, &c.

Only those kinds

will

here
the-

be noticed which are most important in regard to

use of the Moods.

is

520.

The use of the Moods

Indicative in

in

Dependent sentences

subject to the following general rules

1.

The
in

Greek

is

Yery extensively used'

even

Depend@i^'^^fetofcM'ee1he

Greeks

merely

288

THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES.

521.

annexing or inserting many sentences without any mark of dependence where the Latin language marks the dependence by the Subjunctive or Infinitive: [irj ft avepy, Tt? elfjbi, ash me not who I am \ne me interroges,
quis

si'wi].

521.

also denotes always that

can

Dependent sentences which ought to take place, and generally be employed only when the leading
2.

The

Subjunctive in

sentence contains a principal tense.

Every verbal form is regarded as a Principal tense which connects the action with the present ; hence the
Fresent
Perfect,

(except

the

Historical Present,

487), the

and the Future Indicative, and aU tenses of the Sviijunctive and Imperative.

522.

3.

The

Optative (without av) denotes some-

thing merely conceived or supposed ( 517, Obs. 2), and generally can be employed only when the Principal

sentence contains an Historical tense. Every verbal form, however, is regarded as an Historical tense which connects the action with the past, hence the Historical Fresent ( 487), the Indicative of the Aorist, the Imperfect and Fluperfect. Dependent clause, moreover, frequently has the Optative when this mood occurs in the Principal sen-

tence.

523. 4. In indirect speech (oratio ohliqua) the Opta'

(without dv), but only after an Historical tense, is used to denote something which is to be stated, not as the opinion of the speaker, but of another person at
tive
:

AO'qvaZoi
eTTe^dr/oi,

TlepiicKea

eKaKi^ov,

oti,

aTpaTrjyo'i

wv ovk

eVt tou9 iroKefiLovi, the Athenians reproached

Fericles because being a general he did not lead them out

against the enemy \c[uod non duceret]

ev^avro a-anrjpM
they vowed

dvaeiv evda irpcoTov

et? <j)i\[av yrjv a(j)iKoivTO,

to offer thank-offerings whenever they should first come to

a friendly land;

el tl<: ttoXi? eTrt "roKiv Digitized by Microsoft

aTparevcroi, eV!


526.

MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSEETIONS,

eKJyrj

ETC.

289

ravTTjv

Uvai, si qua civitas contra [aliarn] eivitatem

pugnatura In this

esset,

contra hanc se dixit iturum.

case,

however, the Indicative also

is

admis-

sible according to 520, but never the Subjunctive even after a Principal tense, its employment being limited to

the case mentioned in

524. 5.

527.

The

Potential Optative (with dv)

may

occur

in Dependent, in the

same sense

as in Independent,

516) to denote something as merely posav ryevoiTo, I say that this probably could not happen.
(

sentences

sible: \e7t0, oTO TovTo oiiK

The
is

further use of the

treated of specially in

different

in Dependent sentences what foUows according to the kinds of Dependent sentences.

Moods

I.

Moods in Dependent Assektions and Dependent Intekkogative Sentences.

vs

525. Sentences containing Dependent assertions are those which annex the substance of a speech or opinion to a Principal sentence by means of the conjunctions,

on,

ai<;,

that

Dependent or

indirect Interrogative sen-

tences are connected with the Principal sentence

by

means of

el,

if ; v6repov...r] \utrum...an'\, whether. ..or (in

(

double questions), or Interrogative Pronouns Adverbs.

is

214) or

526.

1.

The

Indicative

used in those sentences, which when conceived independently would have the Indicative, and thus
a)

when

the leading sentence has a Principal tense

:

dire fxoi, rlva the Indicative must be used ( 521) r^va/MTiv e-xei^, tell me, what opinion you have (direct:

TtW
b)
tlie

lyvwjXTjv
;

%6f?)

[Lat.

die mihi,

quam

sententiam

habeas']

when the
Indicative
elxov,

leading sentence has an Historical tense

may be used

522)

elirov,

rjvTtva
;

fvmfi/qv

d&^iti^m^ Mmim^<^'>n haberem

rjKev

290

MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSEETIONS, ETC.

ta?

527

ar/yiWwv tk,

bringing the news that

'EXareta KarelXTjTTTM, some one cameMatea was taken (direct: 'EXis

dreia KaTeLXTjiTTat).
case admissible,

Besides the Indicative, the Optative also 528, a.

527.
2.

in

this-

The

Subjunctive

all in Dependent assertions, and in Dependent Interrogative sentences only if, when conceived as independent, they woidd necessarily have th& Subjunctive, and thus

cannot occur at

a)

when the leading sentence has a Principal

Subjunctive
:

tense

the

d-TToSpa),

I am

according to
te effugiam'l

^ov\evojj,ai, ttm? o-e must remain planning how to escape from you (direct 511 Troi? ce diroBpo)) [delibero, quo modo
:

when the leading sentence has an Historical tense the Subjunctive may sometimes occur i^ovXevofirjv, but the Optative is more frequent in TTfti? ere drrohpS) The Subthis case than the Subjunctive ( 528, b).
5)
:

junctive in Dependent Interrogative sentences accord-

ingly

is

to

be translated by

may

or shall.

528.

3.

The

Optative (without av)

may

occur in such sentences

a) as

substitute
is

for the Indicative

526,

b), i. e.

when

there

an Historical tense in the leading sen:

tence, in case the

Dependent sentence, if conceived independently, ought to have the Indicative el-rrov, ^vriva
ryvmfjbijv

exoifj-t
;

(direct

el'xpv)

[Lat. dixi,

quam
eiTj,

senten-

tiam habereni]

eyvcocrav oti Kevo'i 6 <f)6^ov

:

they hnew

that the fear was groundless (direct

6 j>6Po<s Kevb<} ^v),

comp.

523.

a substitute for the Subjunctive ( 527, 5), i. e. Historical tense occurs in the leading sentence, in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived independently, ought to have the Subjunctive i^ovXevo/irjv,
b) as

when an

jTsi? a-e diTohpai'qv (direct

Digitized

ttco?

ae aTroSpo)) [Lat.

delibe-

by Microsoft


530.

MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE.

te effugererri],

291

ralam, quo modo

should escape you.

was
is

refieeting

how 1

In the second by should.

Obs.

case the Optative

to be translated

Whicli

of the

two meanings belongs

to the Optative

is

generally perceived from the connexion quite as easily as in the

Latin nesciebat quid faceret, he knew not what he did or what

he should do.
529.

The Optative

as a substitute for the Indicative

is

found

also without a Conjunction in the continuation of a direct speech

eXeyov ttoXXoI, oti Travrhs a^ta Xeyet ( 526 &), x^ifioiv yap eoy Koi oixaSe diroirXelv oi bwarou c'iri, many said that he says what is worthy of the utmost regard, for that it was winter, and that it was impossible
to sail home.

On

tions,

the Infinitive in assertions, 560. 593.

On

the Participle in asser-

Mixed examples
TlvOa/^opof; 6
ehrelv,

Adfiw;

irpooTO'; ev To2<;"E)\X7]a-iv iroXfirjcrev

to fiev aaifia redv^^erat ( 291), 57 Be ^vxv avaTTTacra ( 316, 5) ol'X^'^ceTai addvaro'; Kot dr/Tjpoj';,

on

Pythagoras the Samian was the first among the Greeks to maintain that the body will he dead, but the soul, flying upward, will depart immortal and ever young ;

who ventwred

via en wv eXeyev, m? KadevSeiv avrov oi/c to tov MtXTtaSov Tpoiraiov, Themistocles, when still young, used to say, that the trophy of Miltiades would not
e[jbi(rT0KKri<;

iarq

let

him sleep ;

'A-jropai,

I am

at a loss

what
el

to

tov ( 214, Obs. 1) irpwTov fjuvrja-Oai, mention first; 01 'ETriSafivioi tov

deov eirripovTo,

irapaholev K.opivOioi'i rrjv iroXiv, the

JEpidamnians ashed the god whether they should give up

their city to the Corinthians.
II.

Moods

in Sentences of Purpose, or Final Sentences.

530. Sentences which express an object or a purpose

'iva,

are introduced by the Conjunctions

9, oTTw?, in order that, that, in order

(Horn, otppa), or
otto)?
/iif,

to, fii],

iva

firj,

in order

thf^^n^ by Microsoft

292

MOODS IN SENTENCES OP PUEPOSE.

sentences express something which
:

531,
ex'

As such
531.
1.

is

pected to happen, they take

The Subjunctive

a) necessarily/,

when the leading sentence has a PrinriKeK, ottcds

to

cipal tense

eh Kaipov

t^?

Sikt?? dKova-rj<;,

you have come

b)

at the right time

hear the trial \in

tempore odes, ut eausam audias\

more rarely, when the leading sentence has an His:

torical tense

eh Kaipbv
;

^/ce?,

otto)?

t^?

S/kt;? aKova-ri<;

^aderas
rjBicTTa

ut audires^
Stdyrj^,

eVtViySe? tre ov/c Tjyeipov, iva co?

purposely did not wake you thai you

might pass your time as pleasantly as possible.

Ohs.

The Conjunctions

as, ovas,

KcV)

added to them in this sense

sometimes have av (Hom. xe', tovt avro vvv diSaax, ottcos

:

hv iKfxada, explain that very thing now that I may learn it. The purpose is thereby represented as one whose attaiimient depends on conditions (as here, if you explain it). Comp. 554.

532.

2.

The

Optative

as a regular substitute for the Subjunctive

when
T?;Se?

( 531, 5), the leading sentence has an Historical tense iirl:

ere

ovk

ifyeipov,

"va

a><;

rjBocTTa Siar^oi';

Hom.

'Tvheihrj Atofi'^Bei
"v

IlaXXa?

'A6i^v7]

SuKe

fievo<;

Kal ddpcro?
to

eKBrj\o<; fierd irda-iv 'Apyeioicrt, yevoiTO,

Tydides

Diomedes Pallas Athene gave strength and courage that he might be distinguished amrnig all the Argives [JDiomedi Minerva animos dedit, ut insignis fieret inter cunctos
Argivos'].
Ois.

sentences of purpose after

between the Subjunctive and Optative in an Historical tense consists in the rarer Subjunctive expressing the sentence more as an object or
distinction

The

demand

that

may be

attained, the Optative,

more

as the thought

or conception of the acting person (comp. 521, 522). On the Future Indicative with oTrtos, 500, 553. On the hypothetical Indicative in Sentences of Purpose, 500. On the

non-intended conseriuence (coot*), 565.

533.

or

firj

oi (Lat.

Sentences expressive o! fear introduced by jiij (Lat. ne), ut") follow the construction of sentences of purpose

Ccomp. 512).

They have the Subjunctive Digitized by Microsoft

necessarily

when depen-


536.

MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.

;

293

dent on a Principal tense : oi ^o(3ei, fj-ri ^Sij jrpcafivTepos f/s do you not fear to he already too old [nonne times, ne aetate provectior sis] ? The Optative is commonly used after an Historical tense itjyofiovvro,
:

jif)

n irddoi,

they feared he might suffer somewhat [vereiamtur ne quid

;

illi

accideret]

tut not unfrequently

fifj

also

the

Subjunctive
the

oi

'Adrivaloi Toiis ^vfijiaxovs eSfSUa'av,

aiTO(rrStcri.v,

Athenians

were alarmed
Obs.

lest the allies

oTrtos

shmdd

revolt

(comp. 519,

5, Ohs. 2).

fir)

and

after verbs of fearing f^

seldom have the

refers to a
Kafi,fv,

Future Indicative, oftener the Perfect Indicative when the fear completed action : ^o^ovfieBa, /irj ifiipoTipav fniaprfjivefear loe have failed in hoth.

Mixed Examples
TOVTO ov irpoTjprjfjyai Xeyeov, Iva Tiaiv I have not chosen to say this in order
of you
;

vjjloiv

wKeydavaijiai,

to be

hateful to some
e')(oi,

KOjOo? <f>l\av Sera BelaOai,

to? avvepyoii';

Cyrus thought friends necessary

helpers
;

that

he

might

have

oUahe ohov, I amafraid lest we should forget the way home ; 4>iXt7r7ro? ev <f>o^a) ?iv, fir] eKcpvyoi to, irpdyfiara avTov, Philip was in
AiSoixa,
fir)

iiriXadoifieda rrj^

fear

lest the affairs

might escape him.

in.

The Moods

in Conditional Sentences.

534. Conditional or hypothetical sentences belong

(

to the Correlative sentences

states a condition

519,

4).

The

Protasis

under which something is to occur the Apodosis states that something happens under a certain condition. Both sentences together form a
Hypothetical Period.

535. In the Protasis

ffv,

el

(Horn,

al),
if,

iav

(i.

e.

el-av),

contracted to

or av (Horn, ei Ke-v),
is

are employed

in the Apodosis the particle av

sometimes used to

show that it is true only under certain conditions. In Greek there are four principal forms of the Hypothetical Period
536. 1. in the Protasis el with the Indicative, in the Apodosis the Indicative without av, or the Impera^ '
,.

Digitized

by Microsoft

294

MOODS

IN

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.

537.

This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed when the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is
to be

represented as one absolutely necessary, actual, without any opinion being expressed by the speaker as el 6eol to the probability or improbability of the case elalv, ea-Ti km epya 6ewv, if there are gods, there are alsi
:

worhs of oods ; aol el irrj dWy BeSoKrai, "Keye koX BiBacrKe, if you have any different opinion, speak and explain.
Ois.

All

tenses

may

br used in this form, consequently also

Historical tenses.

If these latter occur, care

must be taken not

:

to confound this first principal form with the second

e^rjv croi

amivai ix t^s
^ecrn
el
fir)

TroXetor, (I /x^ rjpetrKov <rot oi vd/ioi,

you were free

to leave the eity, if its

laws did not please you (in the present

;

apeaKova-L)

ri tS>v

ovK

ip,i (jiTfa-iv

ainov

yeyevrjtrdai, if

Seovrav ewpd^dri, tov Kaipov, anything right was done, he

says that the occasion, not I,

was

the cause.

sure sign of the

second principal form

is

the particle av in the apodosis.

el

537.

2. in

the Protasis,
;

with the Indicative of an

Historical tense

in the Apodosis, av with the Indicative

of an Historical tense.

This form of the Hypothetical Period is applied when the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be represented indeed as one quite necessary, but at the

same time

The Indicative in neither of them as real. such conditional sentences is called tJie Hypothetical Indicative, which, therefore, always denotes the opposite to reality (comp. 515). In such Conditional Sentences, a sentence contraof

dictory

the Protasis

may

always be supplied in

thought.

Hence the Protasis may have the following forms

538. a)

The Imperfect

is

used when a condition

el

is

tov ^IXnnrov ra SiKuia irpuTTOvTa ecopojv, a-(f>oSpa av Oav/xaarov ^yovur/v avTov, if I saw (were to see) Philip acting justly, I should

stated as not existing at present:

deem him very admirable.

Protasis the

Here we may oppose

r^ SIkuiu

to the
irpdr-

thoug^^^^^.^^^^w

541.

MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.

295
of this

Tovra, but now

I see Mm not

act justly.

The verb

contradiction to be supplied is in the Present.

To

this
:

form corresponds in Latin the Imperfect Subsi

junctive

viderem, putarem.

539. h)
is

The

Aorist Indicative

is

used when a con-

dition

stated which did not take place in the past

aired avov av, el /xr) rj rwv rpiaKOVTa ap^r) KareXiBrj, I should have died, if the government of the thirty had not ieen overthrown. Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought The verb of this xareXvOri Si, but it was overthrown.

contradiction to be supplied

is

in the Aorist.

To

this
:

form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Subesset.

junctive

periissem, nisi dominatio eversa

c) is

540.

The Pluperfect
stated
:

is

used when a non^completed

agreed, toesliould easily

condition

el

tovto d)fio\6y7]To ^fuv, paSlco^ av

SoefiaxoiJ'e6a,ifinthiswe

had been

carry the contest through. Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought atO^ ou% mn,o')J)'y7}Tai, but we have not been agreed. The

verb of this contradiction to be supplied

Perfect.

is

in the

To

this
:

form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Subsi inter

junctive
541.

nos convenisset.
to a Hypothetical Protasis of

The Apodosis

this

kind

may have

either the Imperfect or the Aorist

Indicative, or the Pluperfect with dv

[Hom.

Ke-v],

and

that quite independently as to which of the three tenses occurs in the Protasis. In this case, also, the Imperfect corresponds to the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive; the

junctive

Aorist and Pluperfect, to the Latin Pluperfect Subel TOTe e^orjdijcrafiev, ovk av ^vco'x^ei, vvv 6 ^iXtTTTTo?, if we then had rendered help Philip would
:

not now be troublesome; el avrapKr] ^iXuiriTO'; waXai ay iSeSaiKei SIktjv,

suffieerent,

to, ^jf7)<pLa-/u,aTa rjv,

si plebiscita

per

se

Philip'^ dudum poenam

dedisset.

296
542.

MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.

Ohs.

5*2.

apodosis

sometimes omitted in the ye ovtos e^T\'ira.rri8r]v, I shoidd be ashamed, if I liad ieen deceived by an enemy.

1. The

particle av is

jia-xuvofofv, el iirb irdKefiiov

543.

Obs. 2.

The Imperfect sometimes

erroiei

refers to a past

time

when
phatic

the continuance of an action is to be

:

made

particularly
av,

em-

el

TOVT
is

(not

iirotria-ev')

eKaaros,

evUav

if each

so, they would be victorious. On the other hand, sometimes used referring to present time, when the rapid commencement of an action is to be indicated e'i tie a-e fjpeTo, hi aireRpivu) (not mreKpivav) ; if any one asked you, what answer would you give ?

had been acting

the Aorist

Hypothetical Apodosis may stand alone, the 544. Obs. 3. Protasis being supplied in thought or deduced from the context :
efiovXoixrjv av,

I should
(i. e.

like (ei livvafajv, if

I could,

dared')

St' i/jias

avTois iTokai av diro\a>\eiTe, you would long since have perished

through yourselves

if left to

yourselves).

545. 3. in the Protasis lav {fjv, av, Horn, el' Ke-v) with the Subjunctive ; in. the Apodosis the Indicative of a Principal tense or the Imperative. This form of the Hypothetical Period is used to

express or prescribe something in regard to a case that

taken for granted and expected. It is admissible only in connexion with present and future time ( 521), and is met with chiefly in maxims or proverbs Set
is to be
:

Ta jSekTiara avrl twv ^Becov, av fjur] crvvafKJjoTepa i^, Xafi^dveiv, ycni must choose what is best rather than what is agreeable, when both together are not allowed; av to,
TrapeXrjXvOoTa
^ovXevcret,, if
/jlvt] fj,ovvrji;,

afietvov irepi
the past,

twv fieWovrcov
will judge better

you remember

you

about the future.

Obs. 1.

The

Aorist Subjunctive in such conditional sentences

often comes very near to the Latin

irovr](rps, yjjpas eeis

Future Perfect:

veos av

ev6a\es, si Juvenis laboraveris, senectute'in

habebis

jucundam.
el

Obs. 2.

We find

with the Subjunctive in Homer, and occasion-

ally also in Attic writers, in the

same sense

as eav, el av

and

el

Ke-v

Soph. avSpa,

Ke'l

Tis

<ro<f)6s,

oi&ev,

for a man, even if he

is

to fxavOdveiv irdXX', ala-xpov wise, to learn much, is no disis

grace.

Obs.

3. The

Subjunctive in Conditiorwi sentences

akin to the

S 548.

MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.

297

Subjunctive of Challenging ( 509). The spealser thereby puts or demands an assertion, to which, for the present, he requires the hearer's assent tovto iav a"K07r^re, evpTja-cre, or Trdvratv
:

you will find that it is the lest almost identical with the challenge consider this, &o. [comp. Lat. Naturam expellas furca, tamen usque recurref]. In a similar way the Imperative sometimes takes the I)lace of a Hypothetical Protasis Poet. ttKovth tc yap Kar
apiara
of
all
;

f^fi, if you consider this

which

is

oiKov, ei jSouXct, fieya Ka\

Tvpavvov

a")(r]ii

^X^^> ^^^

^*

^"^V

TovTOiv ri j(alptv,
be rich, if

rSXV

eyo) Kairvov cKias ovk hv irpiai^riVj

for

in the splendour of a great ruler; hut if joy he wanting to it, I would not give the
will, at
live

you

home, and

shadow of smohefor

the rest.

(Comp.

549.)

546. 4. in the Protasis el with the Optative ; in the Apodosis av (Ke-v) with the Optative. This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed

what is said as quite uncertain, merely conceived case el tc^; kskt-t)fiivoi; elr) irkovrov, 'Xpauro he avTa> fj,rj, ap av evBatfiovol should any one possess wealth and not make use of it (suppose any one possessed), would he be happy P Comp.
intentionally to represent
as merely possible, as a
:

The Present or Perfect Suhjunc 516, 517, Ohs. 2. tive in Latin corresponds to this form: si possideat (or
possederit),
Ohs.

num
Homer
:

beatus sit?
the
et

^Tn

has K-v or av
if

Protasis of such a period also sometimes rovTa Ke Xd^oifiev, dpoifiedd kcv Kktos etrffkov,

we should

get these two,

we should

get glorious fame.

The

Attic writers very rarely use av in the Protasis.

547. Since et with the Optative intimates that a thing is merely possible, it expresses in reference to the past what possibly might have been, i. e., a repeated case (comp. 494, Obs. 1) the Apodosis then usually has
;

the Indicative
j^pvcro'^aXivov

e'i

ttov i^eXavvoi 'AaTvaiy7j<;,

e'^'

iinrov

tov K.vpov, if ever Astyages rode out (might ride out) he tooTc Cyrus with him on a horse
'Trepirjye

with a golden

bridle.

548. 61 with the Optative in the oratio obliqua, takes the place, accordfegf/tec/ >528jrooiffti' with the Ind. (1).

298

MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.

549

or idv with the Subjunctive (3), when a Hypothetical sentence depends on a Historical tense : fjBei, K.vpo<;, on
0 Ti jJ-axV^ TTore ^e-qaoi,, e/c
"XtjiTTeov
ett}.

t&v

(plXcov

avrS TrapatTTaTa^

Gyrus knew that, if ever any battle should be necessary, Jte would have to take his supporters from his own friends. In direct language, Cyrus would say, ^v
TTore
Serjcrr)

or

el'

Trore Seijcrei

XTjirriov iari.

If in its

relation to the time of the governing verb, the condition

lies in the Future, the Future Optative is used. seldom, in this case, find idv with the Subjunctive.

We

The following general remarks also are

in regard to Conditional sentences

to

be observed

549. 1. The two members of a Hypothetical Period are not so dependent on each other, as that the one

necessarily requires a special form in the other.

Protasis of one form may, on the contrary, be joined

with the Apodosis of another form.

frequently that a Protasis
is

It occurs very

in the

first

or third form,

and the Apodosis in the fourth, in order to represent the Assertion which it contains as merely possible: el tovto A,6'7et?, dfjbaprdvoi^ av, if you mean this, you would be in
error ; iav iOeXijarjTe irpdrrecv
a^ia><; vfiaiv

avr&v,

i(Ta><i

you should be disposed to act in a manner worthy of yourselves, you would perhaps ain great good. The connexion of a Protasis of the second form with an Apodosis of the fourth is rare: Horn. Kai vv Kev ev6' diroXoiro dva^ dvSpwv Klvela^, i IJUT) ap o^v voTjcre Ato? Ov^drqp 'A(f)poSiTrj, and now assuredly Aeneas, ruler of men, would there have perished, if Zeus' daughter Aphrodite had not kept a sharp look
fxkrja Ti KTijcraLcrOe dryadov,

av

if

out.

Hypothetical Period may partly or entirely be in 550. 2. sorted in another sentence. The most peculiar, in this respect, are sentences expressing a purpose, when connected with Conditional
sentences d yap &(j>e\ov oioiVc dvm o'c jroXXoi tcl niyiara Kaxa e^epya^fjOm, Iva oioiVe ^a-av aS koi dyaSa Ta fieyiara, I would that ihe many were capaMe^/#g^,ifi'/4t<Mfc98^^ greatest evil, in order
:


552.

MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES.

299

hat they might also on the other hand le capable of (effecting) the rreatest good (instead of : for if they were capable, they would also )e capable). The Hypothetical Indicative here denotes the imjracticable purpose ( 515, 537). On the Hypothetical Participle, 583, 595. On the Hypothetical
Infinitive, 575, dtc.

MiTxd Examples.
Et
must
aioi
rich

viro <f>!Xc0V ide\ei<; a/yairacrOai, rovv <j)i\ov^ evep-

you wish to he loved by your friends, you your friends ; Et to e^eiv ovtco'; wcnrep ro Kafi^aveiv '^Sv "qv, 'ttoXv av Biiipepov evSai/xovia ol ttXovyeTTjTeov, if
benefit

TMv "TrevijTQyv, if having were as sweet as getting, the would be greatly distinguished above the poor in blessedness ; Poet. Et iraa-b ravro koKov ecpv croipov ff afjLa, ovK ?jv av a/i(J3iXKT0<; avOpwTroi,'; epi^, if the same thing were to all beautiful and wise, people would have no bitter disputes ; TiXdrcov Trpof nva rwv iraiScov, fjiefiacTTiycoao av,
servants,
e^rj,

el fir)

ojpyi^ofi/rjv,

Plato said

to one of his

you would have been flogged if I were not angry ; 'Eaz/ iJjEV t4 vfuv hoKW dXrjde^ Xiyeiv, ^wofioXoy^aaTe, if you think I utter any truth, agree with me; Et nroKK dvBpMV ar/a9cov yevoiTO, 'irpi/Md')(r]Tov av eiTj ro fifj dp'^eiv, wiirep vvvl to dp^eiv, if there were a state (consisting) of good men, it would be an object of contention to avoid ruling (how one might not rule), as now to rule; 'Hi/ Toiv OTpaTicoTcov So'Yjia, ei ti<;, oiroTe r) arparid i^ioi, IBla \r)LtpiTO, STjfiocria elvai rd Xr}(j)6evTa, it was a decision of the soldiers, if, when the army went out, any one took booty by himself, what he took was common property (direct
Idv Xrjt^rjTai

Br/fjioaia eara)).

IV.

The Moods

in Eblative Sentences.

551. Relative sentences are those which are connected with others by means of Eelative pronouns [ 213, 214, 216), or Eelative adverbs ( 217).
,

the

552. In Eelative sentences all moods are possible in same meanin^/fisei^yiMfie^flient or hypothetical

300
sentences
:

MOODS IN EELATIYB SENTENCES.

553.

ovk e^^to 6 n -n-pSirov Xd^a, I have (know) not what I shall take first ( 511, comp. 527) opw ae SiwKovTa a)v fir] rvxofi, I see you pursuing what, I pray, you may rwt attain; ( 514) v/xet? eo-re -Kap aiv av KaXkia-Tci TK TovTo fidOot, you are they from whom any one might
; ;

ovk fjdeXov Xeyeiv Trpo^ v/j,d<; this ( 516) Toiavra oV av v/jllv 7]BiaT rjv aKoveiv, I did not wish to say to you such things as might he pleasantest to you to
best learn
;

hear.
Ois.

Comp.

544.
tlie

Sometimes, especially in
S.v

Poets, Eelative sentences have

the Optative without

in an indefinite assertion, very

:

much
rovSe

like the potential Optative vrith av

Xprj

ov nSKis

a-rrjo-fie,

Aveiv,

whom

the State fnay appoint,

him we must

listen to

(comp. 517, Ols. 2).

553.

On

the Future Indicative in Eelative sentences

expressive of purpose, see

500.

6wco<;,

how, that, in

order that, very frequently has the Future Indicative

(yet,

according to

531, also the Subjunctive of other

tenses) after verbs which denote looking after, earing for,

striving, avoiding
:

aKOirei, otto)? to, 'irpdryfiaTa awO'^crerai,

e/c

see that the affairs (the state) shall be safe ; Set

iravTo<;

Tpoirov diravra dvSpa tovto irapaaKevd^ecrdai,,

otto)? <u?

aotpcoTaro^ ecrrai, every one ought to take care in every

way

to

(that

he

shall) become as wise as possible.

Ohs.

oircDf is often used in challenges and warnings in such a manner that the governing sentence has to be supplied ojrms TrapeVci els Trjv etmepav, tliat you shall lie here for the evening (more completely somewhat Uke a-xoVft ms-ais, see that you, &C.) OTTfflS Trepi tov iroXefiou fir^hiv epe'is, that you shaU say nothing about the war (supply something like (jivKdrrov, take
: : ; :

care).

554,

lielative

The particle dv (Horn. Ke-v) is added to the when the Eelative sentence expresses some-

thing merely conceived, so that the assertion contained in the leading sentence is true only when what is asserted
in the Eelative sentence really occurs.
tive is called

a Hypothetical Eelative.
Digitized

Such a EelaThe Hypothetical

by Microsoft

555.

MOODS IK EELATIVE SENTENCES.

301

is used only where the verb the leading seutence is in a principal tense, and is then iccompanied by the Subjunctive. Such a Eelative sentence may easily be changed to a Hypothetical sentence nrav 6 3f the third form ( 545) av jxiXKy'i ipeiv

Relative with av in general

In

irpoT^pov ejn.uKO'rrei
to

rfj ypm/irj,

whatever you

may

be about

say

(=

edv ri ipeiv

fiiXKr;';),

examine
oirr)

it first

in your

mind ; in which
follow wherever
^yi]Tai),

it is left
;

quite undecided, whether one

sTrea-de

wishes to say anything

av rts

^yriTac,

any one may lead you {= edv rt? irrj where you must first wait to know whether any
Eelative
is

one leads.
Obs. 1.

As the
n

generalised

may

often in English be translated

av TovTav perito ; Xeye

Obs. 2.

Spa TeBvara,
oer

by the addition of &v, it by ever (Lat. cunque) 6s guicvngue horum aliqwid fecerit,
:

&v de^ys, say whatever you wish (comp. iav the Subjunctive with a

Ti BeXjjS Xe'ye).

In the same sense the Poets use

xe'-v)
:

Belative without av (or

at t^avacr
self-caused (comp.

tS>v 8e Tnffiovav /ioKiora Xmrova-'

afflict most which appear with the Subj., 545, Obs. 2). Homer has also the Fut. Ind. with /ce and the Eelative ( 500 Obs.).

aidaiperoi, the sufferings

torical

555. If the verb in the leading sentence is an IRstense or an Optative, the Eelative without av

with the Optative is used, quite in the same sense, as a These substitute for the Subjunctive ( 522, 523). l^elative sentences take the place of those mentioned in

554, in the same

way

as the fourth kind of Con-

ditional sentences takes the place of the third ( 548) sKeXevcrev avTol<; eTrecrdai, oiroi Tt? '^yolro, he bade them
follow wherever

any one might

lead.

Thus we read in
eOeKovra
vo-ija-o)

Homer

6v he k iyav dirdvevOe

fid'^ij'i

ULfivd^etv,
oiaivov';,

ov

ol eireiTa apKiov ia-a-etrai <f)vyieiv Kvva<; ^8'

but whomsoever
battle, to

I WMy see
rov

inclined to remain

away

from the
logs

him

there shall be no security of escaping

and

birds

(i. e.,

death), but

ovrwa

fiev

^acriXfja

val e^oxov
TacTKe,

avSpa

Ki^xeirj,

8' dr/avo2<;

eireea-a-Lv epr]Tv-

but whateve^.^^^^x^^'<j^.hing^r prominent

man

he


302

MOODS IN TBMPOEAL SENTENCES.

556.

might meet with, him he soothed with gentle words. Horn, ft)? airokono kuI aXKo<i o tk Toiavrd ye pi^oi, so ma^ any other 'perish who shall do such things (but 8? av pe^rj
aTToXea-Ba)).
Ohs. 1.

often as he might find one ( 547).

Ohs. 2.

implies This Optative The Subjunctive and the

often

repetition, ovriva Kix^ixj, as

Relative with av occur only

exceptionally after an Historical tense, and the Optative with

the Eelative and av, in the same case (comp. 546, Ohs.}.

V.
556.

The Moods

in

Temporal Sentences.
i. e.

Temporal Sentences,

those which indicate

entirely in the use of

time, are properly only a particular kiad of Eelative

senteaces,

and foUow them almost

:

The particles of time employed in such the Moods. sentences, are eVei, eVetS)?, to? (when, after, as) ; ore,
oTTore, fjViKa,

when, as;

&)?,

e'sre,

fii-xpi-<;,

till;

irplv,

before ; in Horn. 6j>pa, as long as, till

rjfio^,

when ; and

besides the Eelative expressions

iv
a>,

a^
is

ov,

ef ov, since

whilst ; a%pt ov, et?

o,

until.

used when anysupply the place of the Indicative in indirect speech after an His-

In these sentences the Indicative

is

thing actual

stated;

the Optative

may

torical tense ( 522).

557.

When

a Temporal sentence states something

merely

ticle of time, like

only conditionally, the parthe Eelative, has dv (Ke-v) joined to it This occurs usually only when the leading ( 554). sentence has a principal tense, and the Subjunctive must
conceived, occurring

follow. By combination with av, are formed the Hypothetical particles of time orav, oirorav, enredv, or

then

eTTrjv,

eireihdv

iTreiBav iravra dKovcrrjTe, Kpivare, wlien

ye have heard

all, judge; eto? av am^rfTai to aicdfo';, Tore Kol Kv^epvijTTjv KoX TrdvT dvSpa irpodvfiov^ ehai, ad Xpv

long as the vessel

is safe,

the sailor, the pilot,

and every me
2).

ought
Ohs.

to be zealous.

Here

also av is

sometimes wanting ( 554, Ohs.

Digitized

by Microsoft

558.

MOODS IN TEMPOEAL SENTENCES.

tense,

303^

558. If the leading yerb is in an Historical

eXeryev
oti,

the

particle of time with the Optative without av occurs in

the same sense

Kpiveoav.
Obs. 1.

hreihh irdvTa aKovcreiavy

Here,

too, the

Optative often implies repetition (comp.

554, Obs., and 547), so that ore, djrdi-e, tVe/ with the Optative may he translated hy, " as often as," " whenever :"
OTTore oi
EXXT/veff rots TToKefiiois iirioiev, padicos a7T^<\>evyov, as-

often as the Hellenes

fled.

went up

to the

enemy, the

latter readily

^Here, too, exceptionally, av and the Suhjunotive sometimes occur after an Historical tense ( 555, Obs. 2). On irpiv with the Iniinitive, 565.

Obs. 2.

Mixed Hxamples
'Tfiel'i

of Relative and Temporal sentences. Trdvra Xoyicrdfievoi ravra '^ecpoTovelS' 6 Ti av

,

vfitv

SoKrj

fjbdXiirra
this, vote

<7Vfi(f>epeiv

ry

iroXei,

after havinff
benefit

weighed all
the state ;

for what you thinh will most

WTTret?,

01 t&v

^apfidpcov

Srivi

evT%i^-)(dvoi,ev

whatever

^XXrjvi, irdvra'i e/creivov, the cavalry of the barbarians, Greek they met, hilled them all; M.e')(pi<;
iyo) Sjkco, ai (nrovSal /jLevovTcov, till
iTraiv>^arj<;,

av

I come,
Trplv

let

the

treaty remain; Poet. Mjjttot'

av

el8fj<;

dvSpa

cra<f>r]va><;,

opyfiv /cal pvdfiov Ka\ rpo-irov

clearly

never praise a
bearing,

man before you

know his

temper,

oWt? av , and

and character ;
;

Kal

i-TTopevoirro, after

'ETretSi; ifKpdryoiev, dviaravro having eaten something, they rose and

proceeded

OTTore VTTO

'O XcoKpdTr]'; roii'i avvovTa^ eTrolei ov fiovov T&v dvdpdyjrcov opavTO, wnk'yeijQaL twv dhiKwv

teal alcT'Xpwv, oKka, Kal OTrore iv eprifjbLa elev, Socrates caused his disciples to abstain from what was unjust and shameful, not only when they were seen by men, but alsa

when they were

in solitude.

Digitized

by Microsoft


304

THE

INFINITIVE.

559

Chap. XXII.

The

Infinitive.

A)

Tlie use of the Infinitive gefMrally.

559.

1.

The

Infinitive is a verbal

noun

which, as such, has certain properties in verb, others with a noun.

common

225, 5) with a

With a noun

the Infinitive agrees

a) in expressing the action of

a verb in general, like

Trpdrretv, doing;

the nomina actionis ( 342)

iroielv,

comp.
TO

-TToiTjai';, Tr/jfi^t?.

b) in

the fact that

it

may have

the article like nouns

iroLi](TUi,
r]

iroieiv,

TO irpdrTeiv, the doing; comp. ^

With
agrees

the verb,

on the other hand, the

Infinitive

power of denoting different times: Troieiv, and of being formed from the Active, the Middle, and the Passive iroiriaai, n-oirjiraa) in its
TroLrjaai,

treiroi'qKevai,

ffdai, 'TTOiTjOrjvai.

i) in

being occasionally joined with dv, and thereby

sharing the functions of

c)

mood

575, &c.).

as the verb to which rd SiovTa, doing ymir duty ; '^p'i^crdai Toi? oTrXot?, making use of arms. d) in being qualified, like the finite verb, by adverbs, never by adjectives: KaXSi^ Trpdrrew, doing nobly, but
it

in governing the
:

same case

belongs

Troieiv

KaXr) -Trpd^K, a noble action.

2.

The

Infinitive is used

very extensively in Greek.

definite

Very
sion,

often, besides the

more

mode

of expres-

less

by means of a Conjunction with a finite verb, the definite, by means of the Infinitive is admissible.

560.

The

Infinitive serves to
:

complete and qualify

occasion,
capability,
tltey

different sorts of verbs, viz.

1.

those which

express
:

the

modality of an action

SvvavTai direkOelv,
by Microsoft

can go

Digitized

S562.

THE INFINITIVE.
jieli^ov

305

away ;
e(f>vv,

ti exet elirelv, he has smnething greater to

oiiroi,

say (can say); Poet,

crvvexOeLv

aXKa

a-viM^Ckeiv
;

I am

horn not

to

Join in hating but in loving

dp^oti-

fiai Xiyeiv,

I begin

to to

speak ;

eTriTpiirco aoi, woi.eiv 6

av

0ovXr],

do whatever you wish ; 2. such verbs as denote appearance, perception, opinion So/cet? ajxapTelv, you seem to have erred ; 3. such verbs as denote striving after something, impelling towards, or frightening, deterring, preventing,
:

I leave you

something
rich
;

fir]

cnrevBe
p,e

ifkovTelv, do not hasten

to

he

Horn. KeXeai

fwOrjo-aaOai,
Oeoii^

you bid me

to

speak

7ravTe<i ahovvTUi toik; omnes homines precantur

ra ^avXa aTTOTpeireiv, mala avertant ; j)o^ovfj,ai SieXeyxeiv ere, I am afraid of refuting you ; eXeyov aoi /MT) rya/j^lv, dixi tibi, ne uxorem duceres ; rt? avrov KofKvaei Sevpo ^aSl^etv ; quis eum impediet, quominus hue veniat f ave^oKKeTo fiot, SiaXey^drjvai, he put off condeos, ut

versing with me.

561.

Even

the purpose of an action

may be

ex-

pressed by the mere Infinitive, as in English by the Infinitive with to or in order to: Svo<f>S)v to i^/Mo-v

Tov tTTpaTevfiarov KaTeKiire ^vXarreiv to aTpuTOTreBov, JCenophon left half the army behind to guard the camp ;
7rapi')(a)

i/j,avTov
to the

rm laTpm
physician

Tefiveiv

koI KUietv,

I
;

give

myself up

to cut

and burn (me)

iTLelv

BtBovat TLvi, to give any one (something) to drink.

Ohs.

Nqt only with verts of

:

this kind,

tioned in 560, this Infinitive has a

in Ilonaer

apuTTevetTue fudxecrdai,

but also with those menmuch wider application he used to he tlie first in
^vverjKe ^d^ecdai, he

fighting
to

da-l koI olSe rdS' elnefiev, these too, then, are (able)
;

say this

^ij

Uvat, he started to go

urged (them)

to fight.

562.

The

Infinitive, serves to

complete or qualify

adjectives of different kinds, partly in the sense of the

English Infinitive with to, partly corresponding to the Latin supine in u : 'xaXeirov evpeiv, difficult to find [difficile inventu]; oiK^jt'^^pj^i^i^^e^aa-dai, a house very

; ;

306
pleasant to
to get
live
;

THE INFINITIVE.
in ;

563.

afto?

eo-rt TrXi^ya?

Xa^elv,

Tie

deserves

blows
Iceen

o^vrarol iare yvavao

to, fnjdevra,

you are
T^yeiv,

very

in perceiving

what

is

said

Sivb<;

powerful in speaking ; 6 xpovo^ ^payv'i d^t&j? Sir]yija-ar aOai TO, rrrpaxOevra, the time is short for worthily narrating what has happened.
Ohs.

In Homer such
ia-aofievoiai,
:

Infinitives are particularly frequent

ixeya

Koi

TwBia-Bai, great also for posterity to learn

6eUiv

dvefiotrriv ofioioi, like the

substantives

duvfw. iSea-dat,

winds in running a wonder to see.

Inf.,

so with

some

On

otoffj

oiosTe,

and

o(tos,

with the

GOl.

5G3.

The

Infinitive, as in Englisli

and

Latin,

is

used as the Subject of a sentence to which the predicate is a neuter adjective, a substantive, or an intransitive verb Trdcnv aSelv '^aXeTrov, to please all is difficult KivSvvo'; iartv riTTaaOai, there is danger of being worsted ; crov epyov Xeyetv, speaking is your business.
:

564. The infinitive is used in a freer way, without depending on a particular word, with and without the particle as, in several phrases almost like a free Accusative ( 404) as emelv, so to speak
:

efio\ SoKcIv,

as seems to

me ;

present ; Kara toiito

eluai,

oKiyov Suv, almost in this respect.

to vvv

etvai,

for

the

On

(Kav dvai, 570, Ohs.

565.
its

and

The Conjunctions Homeric synonym

:

to?Te, so
7ra/ao?,
r/v

that;

-rrpiv,

before,

are joined with the

JLvpo^,

Infinitive

^iXofiadeaTaTO';

Kovov cLvarkrivaij tov hraivelaOai, eveKa,

fond of

learning, so as to
-Trplv

S^re irdvTa Cyrus was very endure any trouble for the sake
o
a,p')(r)v

of being praised;

rrjv

op6S)<;

virodea-Oat,

fidraiov '^yovfiai irepl t?}? reXei/T?)? ovrivovv Troieiadai,

Xoyov, before properly establishing the foundation

it useless to

I deem
finite

Obs.

make any words whatever about the end. 1. These conjunctions may also he joined with the

verb (oomp. 556) ; aore with the Indicative represents a sentence as an actual consequence more independent and by
itself,

lience

and may accordingly be often translated by therefore, ds rnv varepaiav ovv nKf v, as6' ol 'EXKrives ichpovritov. i rf ' Digitized by Microsoft

567.

THE
came not on

INFINITIVE.

307

he

the following day, therefore the Hellenes hecame

anxious.
Ohs. 2.
irpLv,

For
when,

irpiv
it

we

also find Trpiv

is

means sooner than,

abbreviation for irpiv rj, Latin prius. On the Infinitive after rj, than, see the following On i<j> are, on condition that, with the Infin. 601.
566. After

rj, prtus-quam; properly always to te regarded as an npiv originally answering entirely to the

a comparative the Infinitive is preceded by ij asrc or sense of than that: t^o^ovjiai iifj n fisi^ov i) &sTt <j}tpeiv Svvaa-Bai kokov t^ TrdXei (rujujSj, i fear lest too great an evU should befall the state for it to be able to bear (greater than that it should be able).

^ alone in the

On

the Genitive of the Infinitive vrith the Article, which also

is

possible here, 574, 3, Ohs.

B) The

case of the Subject

and Predicate with

the

Infinitive.
567. The /Subject of the Infinitive is that word from which the action of the verb ia the Infinitive proceeds. When the Subject is to be expressed with the Infinitive it

appears
1.

most generally, as in Latin, in the Accusative, which

:

gives rise to the construction of the Accusative with the

Infinitive

ijyyeiXav

rov

K.vpov

vncrjaai,

nuntiabant

Cyrum
is

vioisse.

The

use of the Accusative with the

Infinitive, like that of the Infinitive alone ( 559, etc.),

more common in Greek than in Latin. Not onlycan the substance of a statement or perception which, however, may be also expressed in one of the forms discussed 525, etc. be given in this construction, but Hence also the effect and consequence of an action. the Accusative with the Infinitive also occurs after verbs of happening, and is admissible after verbs of comirdvTe's ofioXoyovcrt manding, demanding, forbidding ^7]v ofiovoiav fie<yi.arov ayaOov elvai, all agree that concord is a very great good; avvk^t] fiTjSepa rav arpaTTjjap TrapeivM, it happened that none of the generals was pre-

sent ;

eypa^lra airoifkeiv

rrjv

ra'X^ia-rrjv

rovf

TT/aecT/Set?,

proposui ut

quam

cM&li^>%tftiiP^f^iscerentur.

308
The Accusative with

THE INFINITIVE.

5o*.

the Infinitive is properly dependent on the verb of the leading sentence (comp. the English : I hear you sing, I hid you go), and is explained by the prolepm meotioned
Instead of rjyyeCKav in 519, 5, Ois. 2. we might have : fjyyeiXav tov Kvpov on
iv'uaia-ev, viKrja-ai,

on

eviKrja-ev

Kvpos ivUrjo-ev, and for on

;

according to 560, 2 ; thus we obtain ilyyeCKav If the governing verb is intransitive or TOV Kvpov viKTia-ai. iXirls iari passive, the Accusative is of a freer kind ( 404)
:

Ts-avra

KoXas

ex^'") '^'s '^

^i'^

*^'*'

'^^^

'^ iDell. '*

*'^

Ohs. 1.

The

impersonal verbs Set and

xP'ht

necessary, are

joined with the Accusative and Infinitive like the Latin oportet

Xp^ Tokfiav x^^7rot(Ttf eV oKysa-i Kelpevov avbpa, the man thai in painful sufferings ought to he courageous. Obs. 2. As a continuation of an Accusative with the Infinitive the same construction may be employed in indirect speech m Eelative sentences and after Conjunctions, denoting time and circumstances roiavT arra o-cj^as <pr} dt^Xex^ivras Uvaf eVec
lies
:

de yeveaBai eVt
TTjv

rr}

OLKia

ttj

'Ayddcovos, dvay^evr]v Karakap-^dveiv

;

6vpav, he said that after such conversation they went

hut

that

when they reached Agathmi's

2.

house, they found the door open.

568.

Predicate referring to such a Subject

:

must

necessarily be in the Accusative

tov dSiKov koc

dvSpa (fi7}/u a&Kbov elvat, I maintain that the unjust and had man is miserable. Not unfrequently a Predicative expression requires an indefinite Subject (tovo) to be supplied to. roiavTa
TTovTjpov
:

h^eiJTi

(riva) fierpijaavTa Kol apidfiijaavra elhevau, one

may hnow

such things by measuring and counting.

3.

569.

When

the Subject of an Infinitive

vo/j,l^(o
;

is

the

same as that of
expressed at all :
think

the leading sentence, it is usually not

vevLKijKevai,
eXTrtfet?

puto me

vieisse,

have conquered

rev^eaOai &v av

herj,

yo%h hope to obtain

el<;

TTjv iaTrepav,

what you need ; vTreaxero irapeaeadai, promisit se affuturum ad vesperam.

Ohs.

when opposition to somebe expressed, the subject may be added, and that either in the Accusative or Nominative Herod, oi hlyivTioi ivofuCo" (oivTovs npaiTovs yevecrOai dvdp&waiv, the Egyptians thougld
greater emphasis, especially
is to

For

thing else

that they first of

I]

all

men came

into existence

d o'Ua-Be XaXxiSeas

Mcyapeas rfjv'JiiXdSa

criiff-(ui,.vu.iis^

dno8paaea-6ai rd irpdy

571.

THE INFINITIVE.

309

Hara, oix opdas o'Ua-Be, if you think the Chalcidians and Megarians will save Greece, hut you escape from trotthle, you are

mistaken.

570. 4. Predicative qualifications referring to the Principal Sviiject are in the Nominative : 6 'AXe^avBpo'; e<f>aa-Kev elvat ^i,o<; vlo^, Alexander dicebat se esse Jovis

filium

iyw ovk

ofioKoyija-eo ukXi^to'; rjKew,

ahX

iiiro crov

KK\r]fievo<;,

I will

not acknowledge that

I am

come unin-

vited,

hut invited by you; ol BoKovvTe<; ao^ol elvai, they

to be ivise.

who seem
Obs.

From the
5.

Predicate ixav joining the freer Infinitive

ehm

( 564), arises the combination excov eivai : tovto ckcov elvat ov iroifjira, this (if I am) to he offree wiU I will not do.

571.

In

many

cases a personal instead of

is

an

used in Greek, the Subject of the Infinitive being made the Subject of the so instead of the English, " it was leading sentence announced that Cyrus had conquered " (rjyyiXOT] tov
impersonal form
of expression
;

Kvpov

vcicrja-ai),

we

have, d KOpo? r^yyeXOrj

viKpiffai,,

Cyru^ was announced to have conquered. This form of expression occurs not only as in Latin with diatur, with SoKei, eotKe, it seems; Xeyerai [dicitur, videtur traditur'\ ; dyyiXXeTai, it is announced ; 6/j,oXoyelTai,, it is agreed, but also with crv/i^aivei, it happens, and with

several adjectives with

Seto?, eVt/catpto?, fitting ;

el/j^l,

as:

BiKaw;,

jtist ;

eVtTJj-

eVt'So^o?, probable ;

avar/Kam,
it

necessary
to

avT6<;

fioi,

Sokco ivOdhe Kara/ievelv,

appears

myself shall remain here ; hUaio<; el ariew (you are avOpmirov^, it is just that you should lead iTriSo^oi. elai, to uvto ireiaejustified in leading men)

me

that

mm

aOai,

it is

to be

Poet, irpeiraiv

ecj)v<;

expected that they will suffer the same irpo Toi>vSe (j>coveiv, it becomes you to

speak in their presence. The Personal construction is explained, like that of the Accusative with the Infinitive ( 567), by prolepsis
(

For ^yjeXOr] on 6 KO/oo? ivUrjae there might be ^iffl^'&^d^TO^ on evLier^ae, and for
519,
5, Obs. 2).

310

THE

INFINITIVE.
viKrja-ai,
;

575,

this again yyyeXOr] 6

KOpo?

oTb TO avTo TTeiaovrai

crovrac,
Ols.

for iiriSo^ov eariv^

iirl^o^ol elcn ort to

avTO

Trei-

and hence
:

iirLBo^oi elai to

avTo

-jreiaecrOac.

The

where applicatle
vicisse.

Accusative construction, however, is almost everyXeyerai rbv Kvpov viKrjOai, dicimf Cyrum

572.

6.

Predicative

qualifications

referring to a
:

Genitive or Dative
tS)v

may be

in these cases
to

^p^ov

iiri tivo.

Sokovvtwv aocpwv etvai, I came seem to he wise ; eX&yov roi? SoKovcri

to those,

one of those

who

<to<^oI<; elvai,

I said
iravTl

&c.

Kvpov iheovTO
to

co? Trpodv/jboTaTov yevea-Qai,

they legged Cyrus

he

as

ready as possible

dp'^ovTi wpo'srjKet ^povlfnp elvai, it becomes every ruler

to he judicious.
Still

the Predicate

is often
rj

in the Accusative

(rvn^ipei airols

(pCKovs elvai jiaiKKov

TToK^fuLovs, it is to their

advantage rather

to ie friends than enemies.

0) The Infinitive with the Article.

573. The Substantive nature of the Infinitive is made more manifest by prefixing the Article. Yet the

Infinitive with the Article

must nevertheless have a noun in the case required by the verb to which the
Infin.

belongs
;

to

Taif rjhova^ ^evyeiv,

the shunning of
is

pleasures

adverbs

the Infinitive in this case also to koXm'; ^rjv, living rightly.

qualified

by

The rules given 567-572 for the case of the Subject and Predicate are applicable also to the Infinitive with the Article. Thus the Acciisative with the Infinitive is
by the Article: to irpoeihevac tov Oeov TO fieXKov Kai to irpocrrjfjiaivew & ^ovKerai, kuI tovto iravTeii kol Xeyova-i koI vofii^ovai, Gfod's foreknowing the
often preceded

future and pointing

assert

it

out beforehand to

whom

he

will, all

and

believe.

574.

By

having the Article prefixed the Infinitive

becomes Gerund.

declinable,

and thus

answers

to

the Latin

Digitized

by Microsofi

 574.

THE INFINITIVE.
Nominative:
TO tppoveXv
is
I

311

1.

Poet.

evSaifiovia^

irpwrov

ip-dp^ei,

to

be

thoughtful

the first step to happiness ; 'to dfiapTaveiv

dvdpmirovi

ovTa'i

ovBev

6av/j,acrT6v,
is

tnat

those

should

commit errors who are human

2.

nothing isurprising.

Accusative:

axiTo TO dTToOvrjCKeiv owSets (po^eLTai,

dying
the

itself

no one
on

dreads.

Especially to be noticed
et?,

is

Accusative

with the Prepositions

account
of,

/cara, in reference to; Sid,

because

jrpo'i,

hri, besides

KOpo? hid to

(Nominative according to 570) ehai ttoXXA irapovTUf dvijpooTa, Cyrus, through being eager for Ttnowledge, asked those present about many things ; izpo's
(pi\o/Ma6ri<;

Toil?

TO

jjierpicov Seia-Oai /caXto? ire'iraiSev/j.ai,

I have

leen well

trained to require what

Ohs.

is

moderate.

This Accusative of the Infinitive with the Article has sometimes a freer connexion with a verb or adjective after the

manner of the

freer

Accusative ( 404)

ot

HeXonovvfia-ioi

aveKiTUTToi elai to is Trjv yrjv ruiav is^aKXeiv, the Peloponnesians

Tmve no hope in regard to invading our country,

3.

Grenitive:

Tov Trieiv, desiderium bibendi; to ev irpdTTeiv irapd TTjv d^iav dipopfir} tov kukS)'; (ppovelv roi? dvor\Toi<i <yu^veTai, prosperity without merit is an occasion to fools
eiTidviiia

of base sentiments; ifiol oiSev irpea^vTepov tov oti BeKTicTTov ifie yevea-Oai ( 416), nothing is more important
to

me than my becoming

as good as possible.

Especially

to be noticed is the Genitive with the prepositions 6, from ; irpo, before ; evsKa, because, on account of ; virep,
for, for the saJce of, in order to ; Sid, by, through ; dvev, without: oi dv6pco7roi irdvTa iroiovdiv vrrep tov imt) Sovvai Slk7)v, people do everything in order not to suffer

punishment.
Obs.

Purpose is often expressed by the Genitive of the Infinitive even without a preposition tov fiTf Bia^evyeiv tov Xayav ck tS>v
:

we place scouts that the hare may not escape from the nets. (Comp. the rare use of the Lat. Genitive of the Qetym^^^^f^ffff^^^j^imt^ndae libertatis.)
StKTvav a-KOTTovs KaBioTafjiev,

312
4. Dative.

THE INFINITIVE.

576.

The Dative

is

eepecially frequent to

express Instru-

mentality ( 438) ; it is then, like the Latin Ablative of the Gerund, to be translated, 5y : ^iXiTTTro? KSKpaTijKe Tco TTpoTepo'; ( 570) ttjOo? Toii'; TroXefiiov; ikvai, Philip

has gained the victory ly going first against tJie enemy [comp. the Latin, docendo discimus'] ; also with the prepositions iv, in
;

eVt, on,

on condition that
ix
t?}?

irpo';, besides,

and others
T0U9
iiothing

tt/so?

tw

/juTjSev

irpea^euK Xa^eXv

al-)(jj,a'Xa>Tov<;

sk twv ihlwv iXvad/j/rjv, besides gaining

from

the embassy,

I set free

the captives at

my own

expense.

D) The

Infinitive with av.

potential or hypothetical meaning,

the addition of av the Infinitive acquires a and denotes therefore either that something only might happen, or that under certain circumstances something vjould happen, or would
575.

By

have happened.
1.

Here two

cases are possible

the Infinitive with dv can be replaced

:

by the Opta-

tive
fiTjv

with av fiaki(TTa olfiai av crov "TTvOeadab (pTi irvBolav), I think I could learn it best from you; BoKeiTe
TToXu ^eKTiov av av ^ovXeva-aicrde),
nrepl
el

fioc

tov TrdXifiov ^ovXevaaaOai,

Trj<;

(oTi

tov tottov
it

%copas

7r/309 fjv

"TToXe/MecTe

ev6v/j,7j6eir]Te,

seems
if

to

me you would much

into account the

better settle about

localities

the

war

you took

of the country against which you are making

ivar.

This Infinitive with, av therefore answers either to the Potential Optative ( 516), or to the apodosis of a Hypothetical Period of the fourth form ( 546).
576. 2. The place of an Infinitive with dv can be supplied by the Hypothetical Indicative with dv Kvpo';
:

el

i^iwaev, dpiaTO<; av SoKec

dp'^^cov yevicrOai, (ol/j,ai oTt,

av iiyiveTo), if Cyrus had lived, it seems he would have become one of the best of rulers ; tov<; raOra a/yvoovvra'; 'ZeoKparr]'; avBpaTiroBmBei^ av KeKknaSai '^jeiTO (i, e. X. Digitized by Microsoft


? 578

THE PARTICIPLES.

313
av avBpathis,

rjyetro,

on

el rive:;

ravra

'^yvoovv, itceKKriVTO

TToScoSet?), Socrates

thought that, if any did not know

they would be called slavish.

This Infinitive with Hv thns answers to the apodosis of a Hypothetical Period of the second form ( 537, &c.).
Obs.

The

context

must show
is

into

which of the two forms the

Infinitive

with av

to be resolved.

E) The

Infinitive instead of the Imperative

577. belongs almost entirely to poetry ; it is used for the second and, rarely, for the third person. The

Subject

and Predicate are in the Nominative: Horn.

vvv,
Ai6/J/r]Se^,
iirl

GapaSiv

Tpcoecrcrt

fid-y^eadai,,

cou-

rageously now, Biomede, fight against the. Trojans ; iralha E ifiol \vcrab re (jjlXrjv to, t diroiva Se^etr^at, deliver up
to

me my dear

child

and

accept the ransom.

Chap. XXIII.

The

Participles.

Preliminary Remark.

A Participle,
noun
(

like the Infinitive ( 559, l), is a verbal-

It has the same things in common with 225, 5). the verb as the Infinitive, the same points also in common

with the noun but it is distinguished from the Infinitive inasmuch as the latter resembles a nomen actionis, whereas the Participle has the nature of an adjective.
;

578.

A) Their
is

Attributive Use.

A
to
it
i.e.

Participle, corresponding to

an adjective or to a

relative sentence,

joined to a substantive, to ascribe

:

a permanent quality TroXt? evpeia'; aryvia'; exovaa, Horn, evpvdyvia or ^ evpeia^ aryvM^ ^%^'> ^ ^^^2/
streets ; al KaXovf^evai,

having broad

Alokov

vfjaoi,,

the so-

called islands of Aeolus ;

6 Trapoov

Ka.ip6<;,

the present

opportunity (comp.

p^if dl^JVlicrosoft

314
06s.

THE PARTICIPLES.

579.

Like an

adjective the Participle also

article prefixed
:

becomes a substanpresent

tive

by having the

ol irapdvres, (hose

(comp. 379); d nxdiv, the first comer. Such participles may often be translated by substantives : 6 Spauras, the doer ; oj \eyovTfS, the speakers ; to av/icfifpov, the advantage ; ra Seovra, the duty ; npos to TeXcvToiov ( 361, 8) ix^av exaarov tS>v irpXv virap^avTtav Kplverai, everything that happened before is judged accordance with its final result. of On the peculiar use of the Put. Part, with the Article, 500.

B)

Tlieir

Appodtive Use.

579.

The

Participle serves to ascribe to a substanactivity.

merely transient quality or the Participle is a shorter and

tive a

In

this case

less definite

mode

of

expression for what

is

otherwise

expressed by sub-

ordinate clauses with conjunctions of the most different

Idpds (comp.

583, Ohs.).
is

A Participle used in this way

580. 1. Temporal, with the distinctions of time nientioned in Chap. XX. (esp. 496) 7rj0o?6;;^6T6 tovtoi<; dva/yiyvcoa-KOfievoti; tov vovv, give attention to this whilst being read; Horn, w?
:

dpa

^avijcrati ave^-^crero

= 67ret

o)? icpcovrjae,

after having

Observe especially e^^toz; and ^epa>v in descriptions, which may frequently be translated by the English with : ra? i/au? airea-Teikav 'expvra
thus spoken he went away.
'AXKiBav, they sent
"XpwjMevo'i,

away Aleidas with (having)

:

the ships ;
j^cofiepo^,

in a similar sense

ttoXX^

'^s-)(vr]

with (using)
itolSsv,

much
;

skill.

So

also, dp^ofJiepo';, at first

reXevTav, at last ;
fortunately
civ

Bi,aXnra>v ^(povov, after

a time

ev

KaXw'i Trot&v, Justly.

is

The

Participle

cannot be omitted when being

:

to be ascribed to a
iOavfid^ero, while

substantive

'AX/ct/StaS?;?

en

Trat?

av

yet a boy (Lat., merely puer) Aldbiades was admired

(

428, Obs.).

581. 2. Causal and final, where the Participle is to be resolved by

Digitized

since,

by or fy

by Microsoft

583.

THE PAETICIPLEM.
tJiat,

315

the fact

when

by
is

that, in order that,

referring to the present or past, and when referring to the future : ovk

eoTiv aBiKovvra Svvafuv ^e^aiav KTrjcraaOai, firm power not to he gained by acting unjustly; tov aSi/covvra
Sf/tacrTa? ar/etv Set Blktjv Bcoa-ovra,

irapa tov;
that he

he

who

acts unjustly ought to be brought before the judges in order

may
3.

suffer punishment.

582.

Concessive,
:

a somewhat rarer use t6 vBap evatvoTarov apurrov ov, water is the cheapest though it is the test ; ifiels icfiopaiticvoi to imrpayfieva Kai Svsx^paimvTes rjycTc r^v elprjvriv o/ims, though suspicious of what had been done, cmd indignant, you still maintained the

583. 4. Hypothetical, a very frequent use, where the Participle is to be resolved by if, and corresponds to one of the forms of the Hypothetical Protaseis mentioned in 534, etc. roii?
:

<j)C\ov'i

vepyeTOvvTe<; koI tov<; i'^Opov'; hvvrjaeaOe Ko\d-

^eiv, if you benefit your friends you will he able also to punish your enemies (idv) ; also with the article o fjirj Sapel<s av6payiro<; ov iraiZeverai, a person is not educated if he has not been beaten. Such a Participle with (jltj may often be translated by without: ovk ecrriv dpxeiv fj,rf SiBovra fitcrdov, a man cannot rule without giving pay.
:

Ots.

Witli the varied use of the Appositive Participles it must not be overlooked that such a Participle of itself does not clearlyexpress any of the meanings developed in 580-583, but that we make use of the one or the other turn in translating, only in order to express in a more precise way what is simply suggested
the Participle.

by

Hence there

are

many

transitions

between

these meanings, especially between the Temporal and Causal,.

but also between the Temporal and Hypothetical meanings, just by quv/m : iravra ravra avviS6vTas anavras (ifms) Set ^orjdeiv, it becomes every one ofyoUy when you have considered all these things, to render help;
as in Latia sentences introduced
vofii^tt)

afieivov

av Vjias

irepX

Stv

vvv

ipS>

Kplvat,

Trporepov ttotc prjdevraiu fivrj^oveva-avras,

tetter

fUKpa Twv thinh you would

judge about what I am now going rememier a little 0)^i?feai?*i^aiwfc^afeiW

to say,

when you

316

THE PARTICIPLES.
C) The Participle with an Absolute Case.

5St,

584. The Participle with a noun or pronoun in the Ahsolute Genitive ( 428) or Accusative, serves to point out the circumstances mentioned in 579-583. The noun or pronoun to which the Par-

action expressed

from it proceeds the This construction, therefore, may be resolved by a separate clause, beginning with a conjunction, in which the word in tne Genitive or Accusative must appear in the
ticiple refers

may be regarded
by the

as its subject, since

Participle.

Nominative
whilst this
1.

Tovratv avayiyvaa-KOfievaiv tov vovv irposfx^Te, attend

is

being read (comp. 580).

for

The Absolute Genitive (comp. 428), which may be substituted clauses with temporal,
:

causal, concessive, or hypothetical conjunctions

K\eov<; '^yovfievov 'ttoXKo, Kau koXo,

Hepiepya a/wehel^avTO ol ^AOrjvaloi, as long as Pericles led them (Pericle duce), the Athenians produced many and splendid works ; vavfia')(ia<;
'yepofj,ev7]<;

rerrapa^

Tpiijpei,<;

Xafi^dvei Topyanrai;, navali

;

pugna facta
TToXeo)? ev
<TTparr)'y&,
TO,

Crorgopas quattuor triremes capit

6\7](;

ri)?

rot? 'jroXefiiKOK kivSvvok iTriTpewofiem]';

rm

fieyaXa rd r dyaOa KaTop6ovvro<; avrov, Kol

Kaica Siafiaprdvoi'TO'; et/co? yeveadat, OS the whole state

in the dangers of
general,
it is is

war

is

committed

to

the care of the

when he
a God

natural both that great good should happen successful, and great evil when he fails.

Poet. yevoLT av irav deov re'^vwfievov, all

contrives
it (el

may

be done ij

Teyyayro).

585. The Absolute Genitive differs from the corresponding Latin construction of the Ablative Absolute in the following points. a) The subject of the Participle is more frequently omitted in

Greek, when

it

is

either easily understood

it

from the meaning of the verb, or when

from what precedes, or remains indefinite (comp.

,

361, 3, Obs. 2) : irpoiovTosv, as (they) went forwards ; uoiroj when he (Zeus) rains ; e^ayycXBevrav, when it had been announced.
b)

On

the necessity of the Participle of dvai

aov

naiSbs ovtos

[Lat. te puero] see 580, 482, Obs.

ticiples

An exception
ifiov ukovtos,

occurs in the case

of the adjectives cKa>v and axmi/, which very

:

cfiov eKovTos,

with

my

luill ;

much resemble Parme invito. The

Poets take other licences. c) As the Greclffl have two active Participles to express a past action, they use the Absolute Genitive of a Passive Participle less Digitized by Microsoft

587.

THE PARTICIPLES.
Romans do

317

frequently than the

their Ahsohite Ablative: 6 KOpor,

Tov Kpo1(rov

viKr\tras, Karea-Tpe^jraTo Toiis A.v8ovs,

Cyrus, Croeso vicia,

lydos

sibi suhjecit.

d) The Absolute Genitive is employed even where the subject of the Participle is mentioned also in the leading sentence: ravr dmvTos avTov eSogc X/yeii/ ry Aa-rvdyei, after thus speaking he

'

seemed
locutus

to

Astyages to say something (of importance).

'

[Lat.

ita

visus esi.]

is

586. 2. Tlie Absolute Accusative usual in the case of some impersonal verbs, especially Uov, it being a duty; e^6v, irapov, it being allowed,
it

feasible; Trpo^rjKov,

being befitting; So^av,

it

having been

decided

ovBeh i^ov

elprjVTjv op/eiv TroXe/iov alprjcreTai,,

no

one, being allowed to be at peace, will choose

war ; ttoXXAkk

vjuv i^ov TrXeoveKTrjcrai ovk rjdeKrjaare, though it was often easy for you to gain more you were unwilling ; oi %vpaKovcrwt Kpavyfj ovk oXiyr/ i-^^pwvTo, ahvvaTOV 6v iv vvktI

dXkw
it
-

T(p

a7)fji,rjvai,

the

being impossible to
else.

make a

Syracusans raised no small shout, signal during the night by

anything

D) Supplements

to Participles.

For the sake of greater clearness, certain paradded to Appositive Participles, as well as to Participles joined with an absolute case they give more distinct prominence to the idea expressed by the Participle. Such Supplements to Participles are
587.
ticles are
;

1.

ajxa,

at

the

same time, denoting contemporaneousness

ajxa
iropevojiivoi,
tile

ot

'EXXtj^cs

ijia.)(ovTO

Hellenes fought vjhilst

marching.
2. fiera^v,

iireax^
3.

between, amidst, with pretty nearly the same meaning XeyavTa fiera^v, he checked me in the midst of my speech. airUa and eidvs to express immediate succession tm Scliw
f-^
:

Kspa fvdiis aTTO^ePtjKoTi

f jre/ceivro,

they pressed

upon

the right

wing

immediately after

its

landing.

4. ToVe, ilra (Kara), eireira, ourfflj, are added to the principal verb, to indicate that the action of the Participle was past before, and laKe up the substance of it with various accessory ideas : KaToXin-ww

^povpav ovTois eV o'Qi&*ii9^)^f0^i9^l^ having

left

a garrison

S18

THE PAETICIPLES.
;

583

he thus went away home

lest

Poet,

/i^

though

now

escaping

we should afterwards

vvv ^vyovres el6^ SKwfiev varcpoy, he caught.

Participle, to

be transmeaning Kaimp ovrat a-QCJios toy jSeXrtcoz' hv yevoto, though so wise you might perhaps become better ; Homer often separates Kai from nep ol Se Kai a^vijifvoi nep iir avra rjSv yekacrcrav, and though vexed they heartily laiighed at him ; op.a>s in the same sense though or yet, is used with the principal verb Herod, varcpov aTriKopevoi t^s av/i^oX^s
5. KaiTTfp

(more rarely Kai alone), with a

lated though, renders prominent the

concessive

ifielpovro oiMcos Berja-ao'dai roits Mrjdovs, though they

till

did not come

after the engagement, yet they desired to see the Medes.

6.

are with a Participle (like oTov, ota

Sri)

answers to the English

its

in as far as, since, and brings into prominence

causal meaning

Karedapde Trdvv ttoXv are p^oKpav rcov wktS)u ovo'av, he slept a great while since the nights were long. [Comp. Lat. quippe guum, quippe
ijp.ii.'\

588.

7.

(s

and

a)<s-irep

added to a Participle suggest

is subjective,
i.

that what
is

is

expressed in the participle

e.

the opinion, the conception, the view of the principal

subject.

Both

particles are joiaed to the Appositive

Participle as well as to a Participle connected with an

absolute case, either the absolute Genitive or the absolute Accusative.

far

The latter case in this connexion is more extensively used than without those particles
If the opinion expressed in the Participial
is

{ 586).

construction

to be characterised at once as false, w?

and

&<;irep

may be

translated

by

as if:

SeBia<Ti tov

BdvaTov CBS ev et'Sors? on fjkkrjiuTov rS)V KaKwv icrriv, they fear death as if they well Tmew that it was the greatest of evils ; but by in the belief that, since, in tJie feeling that, etc., if the correctness of the opinion is to be left undecided rjfjLel<; irdvTe'i epXeirofiev irpo'i avTov to? avTLKa fjbaXa aKovcTOfievot davfiaaiov^ Tivai Xoyoi/?,
:

tve

all

looked

at

him expecting immediately

to

hear

some wonderful statements ; Poet, e^eart ^a>velv e/M)v /iWTj? TreXa?, you may speak out since (in the conviction that) I alone am near ; Xiyei to? SiBaKTov ovarjf; T^? dper^'i, he speaks thinking that virtue is capable of
being taught;

"Tre^^f^^T^^^^^g^^/Xou?

cb?

airk

fiev

590.

THE PAKTICIPLES.

319

e/cooTOS ov iroirjo-wv to So^av, rov Se m-Xria-lov -TTpd^ovra (absolute Accusative), you looked at one another thinking
that each one of

you would not do what was decided wpm,,

hut that his neighbour would.

E) The Predicative
589.

Participle.

Participle, like the Infinitive ( 560), serves to complete a verb, by attributing to a word con-

The

tained in the sentence something which

is

not a mere

addition but an essential part of the statement. The Supplementary or Predicative Participle may refer either 1. to the subject of the sentence ( 361, 5, 7, 8)
iraveade ae\ nrepl rwv avreov ^ovKevofjuevoi, cease always

same things ; ta-Ot, Xvirnjpb'; civ, know you are troublesome, or 2. to a dependent word in the sentence (comp. 361, o TroXe/io? eiravcre tou? AOt^vuIov; asl 10, and 403) irepl tSxv avrav ^ov\evo/j,evov<;, the war caused the Athenians to cease from always consulting about the same things ; olZa avrov Xvirrjpbv ovra, J know Jdm to be
consulting about the

that

'

troublesome.

In English such Predicative Participles are mostly

expressed by the Infinitive with to, or by sentences with In some cases that, sometimes also in other ways.

however, the English language also makes use of a Participle in a similar way I- feel myself affected by it,
:

he found him armed (comp.

361, 10, Obs.).

The verbs which admit

of a
:

Supplementary Participle

may be

classified as follows

to be I I escape notice ; (palvofiai, StjTww, (Poet. Kvpem) <^avep6^, Brpw'; elfii, lam manifest; eoiKa, I seem ; SiareXio), Bidr/co, I continue ; avk')(pfi,ai, KapTepico, I hold out, endure ; Kafivm, I grow weary ; a-rrop/opevw, I despair ;

as

590. 1. Verbs which express a condition, chanee am in a condition ; rvyxava, exco,

Xavdavto,

as

weU

as the verbs

which denote the

beginning, inter-

rupting, or ending (l>^imm^^vm:ef^ff^iJ.ai,

I begin ; <f)6dva>.

; : :

320

THE PARTICIPLES.
;

E9L

I am beforehand
Ti.eiTTco,

oi^ojx.ai,,

break

off,

suspend ;

I depart, I am off ; eVt-, Stoiravai, I make to cease

(pravofjuM,

I cease).

In translating we frequently change

:

the Participle into the principal verb, and render the principal Greek verb by an adverb. Examples Kripv^a<; e')(ai (more emphatic than iKi^pv^a, comp. Lat. nuntiatum
haheo),

happened

erv^e Trapayevofievo'; ; who BiareKw evvotav e^cov Traaiv vjjuv, I continue cherishing a kindly feeling for you all UT] Kafifj^ (plXov dvSpa evepyerwv, don't grow weary of

I have
to

announced ;

rk

be present ?

benefiting a friend ; aXKa fjuvpla eirCKeiira) Xeycov, frain from saying innumerable other things ; Horn, dTTOTTTdfievoi;, he luas gone flying away.
Obs.
rj

re-

clyj^er

Even

the verb

eljii

may

be

joined witb a Participle

rovTO ovK eVrt yiyvo^ievov irap Tjfuv ; is this not liajppeniruf (usual) among us? Participle is necessarily so used witli

fi/ii

to complete certain verbal fonns,

cially the Participle of the Perfect or Aorist

comp. 287, 291, espewith Afii instead of

the Future Perfect

hehaxais or bovs

c<ret

= dederis.

591.
opdca,

2.

Verbs of perceiving,

I see (jrepiopoM, I overlook, endure) ; dKovm, J hear ; otSa, I know ; fiavddvoa, I learn ; yirfvaxTKa, I get to know alaOdvofjuii, I perceive ; evpia-Kos, I find ; I remember. In several of these the object
as
:

IJL,eiM>rjiJiai,

is to?

in

the Genitive according to

avTOV<;
ireKafyvra';,
e(j>evyov,

420.

Examples

elhov

oi

XerfkaTOvvTei eu6v<;
eos appropinquantes

a<f)evTe<;

rd

')^p-ijfiaTa

cum

vidissent,

praedantes praeda stdtim relicta

"rrepi

fugam

capes-

siverunt; iJKOvcrd Trore XcoKpdTov;

fjbhov,

cf)iXcov

Stdkeyo-

once heard Socrates discoursing about friends

[audivi Socratem
TToXei?

disputanteni]

'Keppovqaov Kare/uide
he
learnt

evBexa

rj

SooSeKa

ej^ovcrav,

that the

Chersonese had eleven or twelve

cities ;

dvOpeoTroi /caXol

Koyadol eTreiSdv yvdoaiv

ov
(fiiXovcri roil';

dTricrTovfievoi

(comp.

483,

l),

dTnaTovvTa<;,

they are distrusted,

tlvem.

when good men perceive that they do not like (hose who distrust
by Microsoft

Digitized

S 595.
Ois.

THE PARTICIPLES.

321

With (TvvocSd fioi, 1 am conscious, the Participle may be connected with the Nominative of the Subject or the Dative

: ffiavTW a-vvfiSeiv oiStv iTnardfievos or eTriora/ieVa), I was conscious of knowing nothing. In the sense of " to be aware " it may also have the Accusative witli the Participle.

(joi)

592.

3.

Verbs of emotion,
TjBofiai,

as

%a^jO(B,

Tepirofiai,

I rejoice ;
fero;

arfairaco,

satisfied;

^aXeircSi; ^ipco, aegre

dyPofxai,,

I am I am
I am

dissatisfied ; cuyavaKTeoj,

I am
or

vexed ; atVywo/iat,
fioi,

ashamed;

iMerafiikofjiai,
:

yaera/ieXet

repent.

Examples

Horn.

he (ppeal
;

repweT aKovav, but he

(jbeTafjueKei

rejoiced in heart at hearing (it)

fievw, he repents

avT&

^jrevcra-

having told a

lie.

593. 4. Verbs oi pointing out

SeiKVVfit,
a-jroipalveo,

and
;

asserting.

as

convict ;

a/yyeWco,
:

shew announce ;

e^eXer/yw,
o/j-oXoyeoi,

I I

prove,
assent.

Examples
XeyKTai,

^tXtTTTro? irdvTa eveKa eavTov ttokSv e^ekrj-

it

has been proved that Philip does everything

;

for his dim sake

TubvTjpov'; ovTa<;,

anro^aivovo't, roix; cpevyovra'i jraKai

they

make manifest

that the banished

had

long been base.

594.

Obs.

The
;

Infinitive according to

560 may be used as vcell

:

as the Participle with

many

of the verbs enumerated in 590-

593, but in a
teaching)

somewhat
;

different sense

Sp^o^ai

SiSda-Ktov,

iegin to he a teacher

apxa/iai SiSaVicf tv,

/ begin
saying.

to teach

(my
it

alcrxivonai \iyav,

I am ashamed
me from

though

say

aurxivofuu Xeyeiv, shame prevents

F) The Participle with

av.

595.

By

tbe addition of the Particle av the Par-

in every case like the Infinitive ( 575 and 576), acquires the meaning of possibility or that of an Apodosis
ticiple,

in a hypothetical /Sentence, in two

1,

and

may therefore

be resolved

ways
Optative with dv ( 516

by the
elfii

and 546)
^Bia><;
S'

eya>

tcov rjMo)^ fiev

av eK^yOevrmv,
of those

av

iXey^dvTwv,

I am

one

who

tvould gladly be

refuted {ol hv e\ey^i^^,hfrf4^^sgf^ gladly refute {ot An

; :

322
eXiy^eLav)
;

THE PAETICIPLES.
evpia-KO)

59.

twv would be the only "prevention of the coming dangers (on av ryevoiro) ; Lcr/jLev Koi v/MO,'; av koX aXKov;, iv ry ainfj Svvdfiet rjfuv yevofievov^, SpMvra<i av avro, we know tliat you as well as others in the same position would do the same tiling, i. e. oTi el yevoiaOe Bpare av.
ravTTjv
fiovriv
r^evoiievrjv

av

jjueXKovToiv KivSvvcov airoTpoTrrjv,

I find

this

the hypothetical Indicative with dv ( 536, &c.) ILoTiSaiav eXaiv koI SirvrjOeh av avro? ej^etv, 64 i^ov\rj6ri, 'OXwOCok uTreBcaKev, when Philip had taJcen
2.

By

<l'iXt77Tro?

Potidaea and might have (ore iSwijOt] av) kept it himself, if he had wished, he gave it back to the Olynthians.

G) The Verbal

Adjectives.

596. Verbal Adjectives are, like Participles, verbal nouns of an adjective kind, but differ from participles by a usage much more restricted, and referring to no special time, which has been treated of generally in 300. The Verbal Adjectives in -Teo9, implying necess^y, are worthy of notice. A double construction is here

possible
1. The object of a necessary action becomes the subject, and the Verbal Adjective agrees with it o irarrip aoi,
:

TifiTjTec;
7ro\lTai,<;

iaTiv, pater tibi venerandus est

di<peX7]Tea,

77

TroXt? rot?

the

state

must be

assisted

by

its

citizens.
2.

In

this construction the subject is emphatic.

The Neutral

or impersonal construction, where the

is

necessity of the action

object of the action

made

specially prominent

the

is
:

in each instance in the case

StcoKTeov
rrjv apeTijv,

required

by the verb
;

we mmi
est

pursue virtue

elpijvTjv

aKTeov

ecrriv,

pax agenda

you must try war ; ^oriOrireov rjiuv iari Tol<; itpar^ihacriv, tve must help the state. The person, who is to, or must, do something, is in both cases in the Dative in the second, according to the analogy of Set ( 567, 05s. 1), sometimes in the
diTTeov Tov -TToXifiov,
:

Digitized

by Microsoft

^597.

PECUIilAEITIES OF EELATIVB SEHTENCES.

:

328

Accusatiye

ovBevl Tpoirq) eKovra^ aSiKrjTeov, in no

way

must you
Ohs. 1.

willingly do injustice.

Middle
Obs. 2.

The Verbal Adjective sometimes has the meaning of a neiareov we must obey not TreWm). In the Neuter construction we often find the Plural:
:

ea-riv,

(jreidofMi

irokeiiTjTia iariv,

we must fight (comp.

364).

Chap.

XXTV.

Some
A)

Peouliakities of Eelative Clauses.

Attraction.

i;lie

597.
rule,

The Eelative Pronoun in general follows that it agrees in Gender and Number with its
1.
is,

antecedent, that

with the word to which

it refers,

but in Case with what /oZ^ows; that is, it accommodates itself to the sentence in which it stands fie/MvrjcrOe tou opKov ov ofico/ioKare, be mindful of tJie oath which you
:

lime sworn.
2.

An

exception from this rule

to

is

the Attraction, or

the process, by which the Eelative

also

is attracted in

Case

by the word
:

which

it refers,

so as to take its

case
S.

fiifjuvqa-Oe

tov opKov ov o/im/ioKaTe.

bined,

process is frequently comThis consists ra the Article or the Demonstrative Pronoun being left out, and the
viz.,

With Attraction another

shortening.

Eelative with the word to which together into a single clause:

hpKov.

it

refers being

drawn

fjiefwriaOe

ov

ofi,wiM>KaTe.

4. If the word referred to by the Eelative is a mere pronoun, the Eelative remains quite alone, but stands

in the case

which the Demonstrative would have had

^fivrjcrde ov 6/J,c0fi6KaTe

fie/ivrjcrOe

tovtov o

dfia>/j,OKaTe,
fie

'jrpoLTTeuv

remember that which you have sworn ; a/teXw mv d/ieXS rovrwv a fie Set irpdrTew, I what I shmdd do. Digitized by Microsoft

Bel

neglect

324

PECULIAEITIES OF KELATIVE SENTENCES.

59&

598. Attraction, however, can occur only under the-

following conditions 1. The Relative clause

must be

closely connectecC

with the word to which it refers, must be an essential part Attraction is iuadmissible in a Relative, clause,, of it.

which only loosely adds a remark to a substantive,, which might quite as well be wanting, or be annexed by means of Kai and a demonstrative pronoun. 2. The sentence must be such as would have the' Relative pronoun in the Accusative, but its antecedent
in the Genitive or Dative:
TV^')(avei

rt?

rj

cc^eXeia toZ?

^eoZ?-

ovaa airo t&v Bcopcov Siv -Trap' tificov Xafi^dvovcriv, what advantage have the gods from the presentswhich they receive from you ? eh^epere acj)' oaav eKaa-To<r ex^h contribute from what each has (airo Tocjovrayv ocra).;. "X.eyei'i ov avfKpava 019 to 'jrpwTov eXeye^, you do not say; what harmonises with what you first said (rouTot? a) T& ry^eyJiVi irLaTevcro^v a> av Kvpo? So), we shall trust the commander whom, Cyrus gives (us), (tovto) ov).
;.

Ols.

Attraction
all

iVTvyxo-vtii

fioKuTTa ayafiai

very seldom takes place with other cases iiv (re, i. e., Tovrav oTs, -Z" admire you
:

most of

I meet.
clauses

599.

AU

subordinate to a Relative Seninflexion,

0??

tence, so far as they consist of words referring to the

Relative,

and are capable of

:

must likewise be
vixeTepoi<;
i. e.,

modified iu the Attraction

TovToi<i TTavra

oSaiv

e^eh

ToXXa ao-^aXco?

KeicTTjTai,

v/Merepa ex^h Tovroi'i, he keeps all the rest

a ovra in safety by

means of what he has of yours.

600. oTos,

and sometimes

oeros

and ffKUos have quite a peculiar

eiwu is often omitted when it woiild stand with olos in the nominative, and the latter is put in the same case as its antecedent otta ye efioi jravraTrao'tv airopov tovto, i. e., ToaovTio olos iya> el/ii, that is quite impossible to such a man as I am. Sometimes the article is prefixed at the same time : toIs olois Jjpv, to such as
attraction
;

viz.,

we.
ever,

By
i. e.,

the same ellipsis ostisovk acquires the fixed meaning, whoany whatever : ovk coti Sixaiov av&pos /SXaTrreii' ovtivovv

dyOpaiircov, it is

not a just man's nature to injure any person whatDigitized by Microsoft

^603.

PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES.

325

(i. e.,

liomini nocere.2
like quivis.

any one, whoever he may be). [Comp. Lat. <yuicimque So Ssns ^ouXsi means the same as oSt-os Sv /3ovX
'

601. Other Kelative expressions, Shortening or Attraction, are

all

inyolving either
or avri tovtcov

avff

Siv,

because,

i.

e.

avrl tovtwv

a,

on: ah ev eTrolirjcra^ avff &v cTra^es, ^ou did good because you received good (for that which you received).
one (Herod. eVt rowrp, eV one), jw the on condition that, i. e. eVt rourp w?Te, often with the Infinitive ol rpid/covTa ypWrja-ave^) &r6 crvyrypdyjrai vofiov;, the thirty were chosen for the purpose of drawing up laws.
e(f &,
i<j)

purpose

of,

e^ ov,

d(j)

ov,

ex quo,

since,

i.

e.

since the time that,

'On kv
oh's,
'Of the

S),

eh o, dxpi ov, 556. more complete tolovto's

that, of the

olo'i,

with the Infinitive,

and oloyre, with the Inifinitive, able, possible : ovk ^v &pa o'la dpBeiv rb ireSiov, it was not the season to water the field; ovx oloke ^aav
kind
to,

Mnd

,fiorj07i(rai,

Saov, for

they were not able to render help (camp. 562). ToaovTo ocrov, enough to, with the Infinitive

^ofiev

ocrov diro^riv,

we have enough

to live on.

602.

-An inverted Attraction takes place

is

noun or pronoun

when a put in the same case as the Kelative

rjv

Tvhich refers to it: r-qv ovaiav

vr\eiovo<;

KareXi/jre

r^

vlet oi

d^la eariv, the property which he not worth more, instead of ^ oiaia ijv.
S' difTrep

left his son is

Poet. Ta?Se
see (the

ehopa.'; ijKovai tt/jo? ae, those

whom you
So oiBek,
:

girls)

have come to you (atSe a?).

as
it

fiySeh,

become one word,

were, with ojrt s ov

ovSevl oro)

OVK diroKpiverai, properly

whom
as
:

he does not answer.

i.

ovSei<; iartv ora ovk, nobody Observe also such expressions

6aviMa<TTo<; ocro?,

e.

davfiacrrov iariv oaoi;, wonderi.

fully great ;
it is

Oavfiaa-ra)!; <?,

e.

davp^aaTov ecniv

o)?,

wonderful how.
603.

Comp.
is

519, 5, Obs. 2.

singular anomalv'

presented
js.

hy
is

Relative sentences

after eo-rt,

in the sense ot

"mere

tari

in the Singular even

326
when
i.

COMBINATION OF KELATIVE SENTENCES.

the relative is in the Plural
;
:

604.

<ttiv o", there

are those who,

to

Utmv oh ovx ovtois eho^fv, thera are some So (mv ore (= iviore), sometimes ; it did not appear so. in some places ; eanv ^, in some ways.
e.

some

whom

ea-nv ov,.

B)

CompUeation..

604. In translating Greek Eelative clauses into English, difficulties sometimes arise through the particular relations of the sentences
1. When the Eelatiye as an Accusative of the Subject belongs to an Infinitive: ol iroXeiiioi, ov? wovro airo(pvyelv, e^ai(j)vrj<; Trapfjaav, hostes, quos aufugisse putahant, subito aderant, the enemy whom tliey thought to have fled,

were suddenly there. 2. When the Eelative depends on

Xa/j.^dvovcn
reiT^^o?

a,

participle: /carairore

ret')(^iaafjivoi
at

Axapvave^

KOivo) BiKaa-Ttjpia) exp^vro (==

i'XpwvTo Tet%to-a/iez'06

nians, after building

3.

avrl), they take possession of the fort which the Acarnait, used as a common judgment hall.

When

the Eelative
aperrj,

is

in the Gfenitive dependent

on a comparative:

fi<i

ovBev KTrjixa aefivorepov,.

virtue, than which no possession is more venerable ( 416). 4. When the Eelative depends on the verb of an

inserted clause

alpov/j.e6a avTOfj,6Xov<;, ot? oiroTav

tk

ifKelova, fitaOov StScS, fj.er eKeivwv aKoXovOrjcrovdiv (duces)

eligimus transfugas, quibussi quis pliis stipendii praebuerif

illos

sequentur

qui, si iis

praebuerit, sequentur), we cJmose deserters, who,

gives

(i. e.

oi,

oirorav

ti<;

StSm, aKoXovOrjcrova-iv,

if

any <me
Ohs.

them more pay, will follow him.

enumerated under 2 and
4, as well as those

In the

cases

discussed in 605, and others hesides, the Greek language satisfies itself with putting only once a word which has to be supplied
in different cases for several clauses belonging to one another.

605.

C) Combination of several Relative Glauses.

When several Eelative clauses follow one another, the Eelativepronoun need be expressed only once, even when, the second time, ifc would require to be in a different case Hom. avmydi 6c' iiiv ya ^ '^ '
:

Digitized

by Microsoft


606.

INTEKKOOATIVE SENTENCES.
r^
orea) re jrarrjp KiXerai Koi Avbdvei avr^y hid her

327
marry
ov]

fieeo'dai

whomsoever her father urges and (who) ^'leases

fjfifls

herself; 'Aptalos, ov
[afji'

rj6e\oiiev ^atrCKea Kadiardvai

Ka\ [a] iSmxafiev Kol

ireipaTai,,

Aa/So/ifv

mora, oiros

rjfias

Kaxms noieiv

Ariaeus,

wished

to

make

king,

and

(to

whom

we) gave and (from

ill

whom we whom we)

is substi-

received pledges of fidelity, attemjpts to

Ohs.

use us.

Sometimes instead of the repeated Relative airos

tuted in the case required

by

the construction of the sentence.

So likewise
Xeyovres ou8

jiiv

in Homer,: oi npoyovoi,

oh

ovk ixaptCovB'

ol

e(j)t\ovv avrovs, cosnep vfias ovroi vvv, Trevre Kal

TCTTapaKovra err] tZv ''EWfivav rjp^av eKovTiov, your ancestors, whom the speakers did nrjt gratify, nor did they flatter them, as these now do you, ruled forty -five years over the readily submitting Hellenes. Horn. avrldeov Ilo\v<p7}fiov, oov Kparos earl
;

fieyioTov irdaiv KvKkamea-aL, Gdcocra

6e' p,Lv

reKe

vvfi(f>r),

godlike

Polyphemus whose power

is the

greatest
lore.

among

all the Cyclops,

and him (whom)

the

nymph Thoosa

Chap.

XXV.

^Inteeeogative Sentences.

606. 1. The simple direct, question may be introduced by the Interrogative pronouns or adverbs mentioned 214, etc. In Greek several different questions may be included in one interrogative sentence: Hom. Tt's jTodev eh avhpwv ; what man, whence are yon ? cnrb rovTtov (j^avepov jev^crerai, rk rivo^ atrw^ eariv, from this it will be clear who is chargeable with what (who is

chargeable and with what).

06s. 1.

An
:

Interrogative pronoun
<f>p<o

strative

ayyfklav

may be joined with a demon^apeiav riva Tavrrjv ; I bring heavy

eanv ;)
a subordinate clause

tidings
06s. 2.

A question may
jiartioiple
:

what

(is) that ? (ris avrrj

also be expressed in

a xpn irpaiere ; inei&av -rl yivqTai when will you do your duty ? luhen what shaU happen ? n I8a Tov Kpvro^ovXov voLOvvra ravra KareyvaKas avroS; what have you seen Critohulus doing that you have charged him with this ? ivOpwOl iToKai 'Adrjvalot ov SifKoyla-avro, imp oTa TrcTTOirjKoriov calaulate how jrov KivdweviyovS^tieeil i^MJAm:^^s did not

and by a

ttotc

328
much
Of

INTEKEOGATIVE SENTENCES.

607.

people have done for whom they were going to incur risk. kind also are the phrases tL irad<!>v ; what ham you passed through, that? tI iiaB&v; what have you got to know,
this
:

that

Ti

iraj9av dSoceis

1-171'

narpiba ;

through to

make you

act unjustly towards

what have you passed your country f

607. 2. When the question refers not to a single word, but to a whole sentence, it may be indicated oii (po^el fiij rfirj a) merely by the tone of voice
:

TTpecy^vrepo^
too old ?
h)

<; ;

do you not fear that you are already

by

Interrogative particles, which, in translating into

English, cannot always be expressed by separate words, but often may be rendered by the position of the words

and the tone of pronunciation.

to the Latin affix -ne.

The most important

?),

Interrogative particles are apa and

indicated

both comparable
is

Which answer
:

expected,
are

is

by neither

of these particles
rj

ap'
eicriv

eljuX fidvTi,<;
;

am I
Ohs.

a prophet ?
If

ovtol -TroXe/Moi

those

enemies ?

an affirmative answer

is

to be specially indicated oi

is

added, if a negative, firj is added to Spa. Hence apa oi corresponds to the Latin nonne. &pa p.rj to the English, surely not.
608.

Of
rj
:

other Interrogative expressions the following

isn't it ? ^

may

he

nov ; surely ? cSX\o rt rj, properly aXXo does anything else happen than f hence, also with ^ Ti ecTTLv rj omitted (comp. 626, Ols.), like the Lat. nonne, where an affirmative answer is expected SlCKo ti rj ahiKovfiev ; are we not doing wrong ? SKKo ti ovv rnvra ravra av eirj p-ia imarfjpr) ; would not this, then, he all one science ? ov put in a question also anticipates an affirmative answer, and may be compared with nonne and the English not. The opposite to it is pij, which may often be translated by surely, as pS>v, formed from /ii) oSv, surely not, always points to a negative answer, pfj 'A;^tXXe'a oiet (^poi/nVai Bavarov kcu kiv&vvov ; surely you do not think Achilles cared about death and danger ?
noticed
:

yap ;

609.

3.

The
is

indirect question in Greek, according

clearly

to

520,

by no means

distinguished in

regard to

Mood from

the direct.

So likewise the direct

Interrogatives, pronouns

and adverbs, are often used

:

instead of the indirect ones al ywacKe'i rjpmTwv avTov<;, Digitized by Microsoft

612.

THE NEGATIVES,
elev,
J).

329 who
they

TiVe?
(

the

women

ashed

them

were

475,

610.
is

4.

The English

whether

represented by

indirect Interrogative if or el ( 525, etc.), more rarely

by edv (with the Subj.), sometimes by apa, and in Horn. by rj (r)). Whether or not or whether perhaps may be rendered by firj a-KOTreire, el SiKauo<; j^pijcro/jLai, t&
:

\6jq>, see whether

see

I speak justly

6pa,

/irj

irai^tov eXeyev,

whether or not he spoke in jest.

the subject of the Interrogative Sentence heing

On

drawn pro-

leptically into the principal sentence, see 397, 519, 5, 06s. 2.

611.

The

direct double question (disjunctive ques-

tion) is

^,

most generally introduced by mTepov (-n-oTepa) an : irorepov BeSpuKev rj ov ; irorepov Lat. utrum

uKcov

rj

eKcov

has he done

it

or not ? mllingly or unwil-

lingly ?

In an indirect double question the same Interrogatives may be used, but also el rj, whether or, and efre eXre a/iropoviiev, elVe clkoiv elVe eKwv BiSpaKev, we

ure in dvuit whether he did

Obs.

it

willingly or unwillingly.

for the direct, but more frequently for the indirect double question, the conjunctions 7 (r/e),

The

Homeric language has

v/A^' v
frjecra-t.

did Poseidon overpower you in your ships, or have hostile men injured you on land f elire Se
ibrjKrjtravT
iiri

V (^0 avbpes

*5

Ilo(reiddo}V eBafxaa-trev,
;

7]

irov avaptrioi

x^pcrou

fioL fivrjOTrjs

dXo^ov jSouX^v re voov

rj

re,

rje

fievet jrapa iratbl Koi

e/iireSa irdvTa (j>vKd<r<rei.,

tell

rjhrf

fuv yr)fiev 'Kxp-iaiv orris Spurros,

purpose and inclination of the wooed wife, whether the son and guards all carefully, or has already married him who is the lest of the Achaeans ? ^ (rje) is also used for rj (^e) in the second member.
the

me

she remains with

Chap.

XXVI.The
A) Simple

Negatives.

Negatives.
different negatives,
oii

612.

The Greeks have two

and

fiy.

NumereoBf/zedS^BMdsft^.nd derivatives are

330

THE NEGATIVES.
:

613.

formed from each, as

/i9j8a/A(S?.

ovtb,

/j^i^tc,

oiiSek,

firjBei';,

ouSa/xw?,

The

principal distinction between ov

/m'^

and

fj,ij

is

that ov denies, but

declines.

Hence

arise

th&

foUowiag special rules

used in aU direct statements, whether is denied by the Indicative, or the possibility or probability of something by the Optative with dv ^IXnnro^ ovk dyei elprjvqv, Philip does not maintain peace ; ovk av d<yoi elprjvrjv, he would not (will hardly) maintain peace; ovk av Svvato firj

613.

1.

oil is

the reality of something

Ka/MQiv evBai/jMvelv,

ymi could not

he

happy without labour-

ing

516).

Obs.

ov is also used in the peculiar Subjunctive of the Homeric language mentioned 513.

ov is used in direct questions to which an affirmaanswer is expected ( 608) ; but ^rj when a negative answer is expected ( 608).
2.

tive

614.

3.

In independent sentences

ixrj

is

used with

the Subjunctive ( 510, 512), with the Optative of wishing ( 514), with the Indicative of wishing ( 515), and with the Imperative : fir] dopv^rjarjTe, do not make a
disturbance ;
jjlt)

r^evoiTo,

may
it

it

not happen;

Hom.
to

&<; fxrf

cicpeKXe yevea-Oat,,

would

nsver happened!

firjiroT

aTrpijKTota-L voov 6%e, never devote

is impracticable.
Obs.'

your thoughts

hr what

jxr] generally corresponds to the Latin ne. It used in negative oaths with the Indicative, in so far as the swearer declines something ( 612) Hom. iot<b vvv toSe Vaia . ftrj 6t ifirjv lorqra llo<rL8dtov .... nTjfjiaiveL Tptoasy let Oaea now know this .... not with my consent does Poseidon

In these oases
. . .

is often

afflict the

Trojans,
is

615. 4. ov in general

used in

all

those dependent

sentences which do not express a negative purpose or a

ov paSiov eir), I knew it was not : ySeiv, oto a ovk idre tou? vratSa? TroLelv, ravra avTol ttokIts, what you do not allow your children to do you do your
condition

easy

selves.
Digitized

by Microsoft

616Obs.
1

THE NEGATIVES.

331

1. In indirect questions oi as well as firj may he used with in the sense of whether : crKOTrafiev, el Trpiiret 17 oi, let ui consider whether it is hecoming or not; neipatroiiai /iade'iv, el'

Obs. 2.

I will try to learn whether it is true or not. such Relative Sentences as contain quite a general idea, fifj may be used & fir) olSa, oiSe o'Loy-ai elSevai, what 1 do not know, I do not think I know.
dXr]6es
rj

In

firj,

616. 5.

/iTj

in general

is

used in

all

those dependent
is

sentences in whicli a negative purpose or a condition

the negative in sentences denotingintention or purpose ( 530), in those indirect Interrogative and Relative sentences where a purpose of hindering is implied, in all the Protaseis of Hypothetical Periods ( 534, &c.), and lastly in Hypothetical Eelative
;

expressed

hence

fjirj

is

clauses ( 556, 557)

OTTO)?
/XT]

554) clauses, as well as in Hypothetical Temporal edv tk Kafiy, jrapaKaXei'; larpov,

:

a-TToddvy,

when any one

is ill,

you send for a

e'f

fhysidan, that he

may
to

not die; i]nf)<^ia-aa0e Toiavra

vote

av

/j/rjEeTTore

v/uv

/MeTafieXijcret,,

for such things as

vos
see that they
et

will never cause

poeniteat'\
;

you
;

repent

\_ea

quorum numquam

opa, ottib?

/u.^

aoi diroaTijaovTai,
aoi airdvai

do not abandon you

fMT]

i^fjv

m ttj? TroXew?,

was at your choice to leave the state, if its laws did not please you ; dedaaade, o)? aaOpov i(7Ti irdv, o n av fir) ScKaia<; y TreTTpar/fiivov, see, how
ijpea-Kov aoi ol vofioi, it

rotten everything

ryir/verai accTT^pia,
it is

which is not Justly done; fieyia-TTj orav yvvrj irpo'i dvSpa firj SiXoc^raTfj, the greatest safety when a wife is not at variance with
is,

her husband.
Obs.

1.In sentences of this kind, sometimes oi negative a single word : iravrais ovras ex^i, lav re or assert re 0^re, it is entirely so whether you deny 2.The

is

used to
<j>rJTe

m
it.

eav

Obs.

Optative expressing repetition likewise has

. .

/i^.

( 547). the Latm ne, signihes. Obs. 3.With verbs of fearing, /i^ like oboi, I fear that: SeSoiKO, firi eTrCKa6a>ne6a r?js oixaSe lest 01

we forget the way home (comp. 533). Even without & may happen is mtrogoverning verb the fear that something
lest

duc6d by

i^i,,

only not,. whi0i^fflfe|feigys?\?fc^to*e translated if


332
or if but not
:

THE NEGATIVES.
/ifi

617

iTriKadaiieBa ttjj oiKaBe oSoC, if only

we da

notforyet the

way home (comp.

620, 621,

and 512).
firj,

617. 6.

The

Infinitive generally
:

has

particularly

"when the Infinitive has the article ra? ofioia'; x^dpiraf jMr) avTiBiBovat alcr')(p6v, not to return equal thanks is
base
;

aoi to

fir)

criyfjcrai

Xonrov

r)v, it

remained for you

not to he silent.
Obs. 1.

ov may he put with thelnfimtive after verbs of declaring and conceiving : 6no\oyS> ov Kara toutous ehai pfjraip, 1

acknowledge
Obs. 2.

has

fiTj,

Obs. 3.

when joined with the more rarely After verbs of hindering, forbidding,
Ssre, so that,
ou.

I am

not an orator in their sense.

Infinitive generally

refusing, denying,

and others which contain the idea of declining ( 612), fif) is usually added to the Infinitive, and is rendered in English by from, or not expressed at all KaXvofitBa jii] im6eiv, we are
:

hindered

from learning; ^pvovvro

firj

jrejrrmKcVat, they denied

having fallen.

618.

7.

With Participles
583)
:

firj

is

used when they are to

jj,r]

he understood hypotheticaUy, i. e., in the sense of a Hypothetical Protasis (

jjioveiv,
i.

ovk av Svvaio
613)
;

xafiav evBai-

e. el fir) KajMoi'i (

so, likewise,

when the
:

Participle has the article, if

it

can be resolved into a

o
fir]
i.

hypothetical or a hypothetical relative clause

Sapel<;

avOpcoTTd ov TraiBeverai,
Bapfj ( 583).
fir)

e.

idv Tt?

fj-rj

Bapfj, or

o? av

/Mr]

Obs. 1.

When
i. e.,

is

added as a Negative to single

:

woi'ds,

they

are likewise to be taken hypotheticaUy

good,
Obs. 2.

to

^ij

dyadov, the not

often

6 &v

firj

dyadov

rj.

With Participles

as well as with other words

fif]

occurs as a Negative on account of the prohibitive, declining,

TTokf/iov

or hypothetical nature of the whole sentence ^rjcjiia-aiTBe tov firj <j>opridevTes to airlKa Seivov, determine upon the war
:

without fearing the immediate danger.

B) Several Negatives combined.

619. 1. A Negative is not neutralised by a subsequent compound Negative of the same Mnd, but only continued.^ In translating, the Negative is employed only mee in
Digitized

by Microsoft

:;

621.

THE NEGATIVES.
is

335
supplied
fj

English, and the place of the other Negative

by an

indefinite

Poet, ovk eariv ovSev Kpeiaaov

v6/j.oe

TToXet, tJiere is not

for a state than laws ouSet9 "TroyjTOTe AtOKparovi ovSev aae^e^ ovSe avocriov ovre irpaTTOVTo^ 0VT6 XeyovTO'; ^Kovaev, no one has ever heard Socrates either doing or saying anything impious or unholy,
better
Obs.

anytMng

A Negative

is
:

neutralised

by a subsequent
(i. o.,

simple Negative

of the same kind penalty.

ovSelff avdpairoiv dSiKSiV tlo'lv

no one who does wrong will not

ovk diroSacet.^ every one will) pay the

620. 2.

oi)

followed

by

fir)

with the Subjunctive or

This mode Future Indicative is an emphatic negative. of speaking is to be explained by the idea of fear being supplied after ov (comp. 616, Ohs. 3) oii fj,fj iroi.ria-a), about the same as ov ^o^rjTeov /ir/ iroirjaa, there is no fear that I shall do it, i. e. I shall certainly not do it
:

ovheh

jjLrjiTOTe evp^cret,

to KaT

ifie

ovSev ikXei^div, no one

is

will ever find that anything, as

far as depends on me,

neglected; ov firjiroTe e^apvo<;

'^kvajj.ai,

I shall

certainly

never deny.

621.

3.

iiri

followed

by ov

is

used in very different

ways
a) After verbs of fearing,

Lat. ne
SeBoiKa,

nm,

or ut, and

is

fir) oil

6e/MTov

fi,

/j-tj ov corresponds to the be translated by that not : vereor, ne nonjustum sit, I fear

to

that it is not just (comp. 616, Obs. 3)

also without a

governing verb, fii) ov defurov y, if it be but not right, i. e. Obs. 3) if it be only not wrong (comp. 512, and 616, aKrjin-pov Kal arefi^a Oeoh, Horn, /i?; vv Toi ov xpalanri you. the god's staff and garland will surely not help
b)

In indirect questions where

(
fir)

/j-v

would mean

if

perhaps
adpei

whether perhaps not : 610), fi^ ov means if or look whether perhaps ov rovro ro afyaeSv,
a and

this is not the good.

Ohs. In the

cases adduced under

b,

is

a Negative Con'

junction, and

oia/i#/2ie66ja)Mrdi)&)fi^oial word.

'

:S34
c)
fit}

THE NEGATIVES.
is

822.

ov

used with the Infinitive after Negative

expressions, in the sense of so as not, or not to : ouSei? o16<;t6 aXXco? Xiyav firj ov KaTor/eXaa-ro? elvai, no on

speaJdng otherwise
d)
/j,^ oil is

is able

not to he ridiculous.

further used with the Infinitive after negative verbs, or questions containing verbs of hindering, The Inforbidding, denying, refusing ( 617, 05s. 3).
finitive in this case is often

preceded by the Article.

:

not expressed ov KwXvo/ieda we are not hindered from learmng ; fiv jj.ri ov fiaOeiv, -jrapfj^ TO /u.^ ov <})pdcrai, do not omit saying it ; riva oiei

In English the negative

is

ATTapvrjcrea-Oai

fit)

oiixi'

eTTicrTacrdai,

ra BiKaia

whom
is

do you
Just ?
Ols.

think will deny at all understanding what

ov

is

here only a repetition of the Negative contained in

the principal sentence.

C) Some Negative Phrases.

622.

1.

ovBev, /MrjSev,

and

ovti,

fJiriTi,

rwthing, are

often used as free Accusatives, like the Latin nihil,

meaning

not, not at all;

comp.

404, Obs.

2. ovirto, ixriTTco, not

yet ; are to be carefully distin-

guished from.

ovKert,, /irjKeri,,
jroi^a-co,

no longer

oihrfo

ire'jrovr]fca,

nondumfeci; ovKeri
3.

nan amplius faciam.

mot

ovx oTi stands for ov Xeya on, I do not say that, mention; koL ovy otl 6 JS-piTav iv rjair)(l.a r)v, aXKa jcal oi t^iXoi avTov, and not to mention (i. e. not only) Crito was quiet, but his friends also were.
to
eiirco on ottib?) means dont fifj by which the mention of something is declined as unnecessary, and hence may sometimes be translated in Negative sentences by not only not : fir} on Sea's, aXXa Kal av6po)Troi ov (piXova-i tov<; aTTKyrovvTa';,

4.

jxr)

oTi for

(/J.'tj

suppose, nedum,

don't suppose that only Gf-od, but men also do not love the In faithless [non homines injidos amant ; nedum dens].
like

manner ov%

ott&j?,

properly not that, don't suppose^

by Microsoft

Digitized

624

a.

THE PAETICLES.

335

may
tives

frequently be rendered in connexion with Nega-

by not only
oil,
;

not.

5. ixovov

fjLovov

oiixh
ov,

o^^y not,

is

equivalent to

ulmost, nearly

temporal [tantum nan'], nearly, almost: KarayeXa vtt avSpav ou? crii fiovov oil iTpo<iKvveif, you are ridiculed by men whom you almost worship. 6. ov fJirjv or oil fiivTov aXkd, however, notwithstanding, is to be explained by an ellipsis 6 iWo? /iiKpou
:

oaov

cKeivov i^eTpayrjXia-ev
iirifji,ei,vev

oil fir]v (viz.

i^eTpaxv^ta-ev)
off,

odXa
(did)

6 Kvpo<;, the horse

nearly threw him

625.

not, however, but

Cyrus kept

his seat.

On

oine,

fcijre, oiiBe, /J-rjSe,

Chap.

XXVIL The

Pakticles.

623. Particles are those indeclinable words which serve partly to connect sentences, partly to give em-

and to enliven which serve to connect sentences are called Conjunctions; those which give prominence to particular parts of a sentence, or impart animation by making entire sentences prominent, are
phasis to particular parts of a sentence,

language.

The

Particles

called emphatic particles.

In regard to position they are either prepositive, i. e. first place in a sentence, or postpositive, i.e. always stand after at least one other word in a sentence.
take the
Ohs.

The Conjunctions
their

are divided into various classes according

Conjunctions, however, belong equally to different classes. They will he arranged according to their original or primitive signification.
to

meaning.

Several

A)

Conjunctions.

Preliminary Eemark. here enumerated 624. a. The Conjunctions are without regard to the formal relation of sentences to

one another

( 519). ^

But
by Microsoft

[digitized


336
1.

THE PAKTICLES.
Co-ordination
is

624.

implied ia

all

Copulative and Dis-

junctiye Conjunctions, the Adversative Conjunctions with the exception of o/iCD? which is used principally in the

Apodosis,

among

the Causal Conjunctions yap, and all

;

Illative Conjunctions except axire

2.

Subordination

is

implied in

all

the rest.

Ols.

more rarely than in modem languages, more rarely word or one sentence added to another The Asyndeton (aa-uvin Greeli without some Conjunction. hiTov, want of connexion') takes place more frequently only in an Epexegesis (Jire^f]yrj(ns), i.e., a subsequent explanatoryalso than in Latin, is one

Mucli

addition to something already alluded to in the previous sen-

tence
iroiSi,

elfii

Tis

yiKoios

larpos-

lafievos

fifi^ov

to

voayifun

I am an

vjorse.

odd physician ; iy curing the disease I make if Wherever the Asyndeton occurs in other cases, the
effect

speaker generally intends to produce a special

by

it.

I.

Copulative Conjunctions.

624. 1. The two Copulative Conjunctions are kcu, which in general corresponds to the Latin ei, and the postpositive enclitic re, which in general corresponds to the Latin que. The language of poetry has besides ^Se and 'tSe with the meaning and [comp. atque']. 2. The Greeks, like the Eomans, are fond of expressing the idea of addition in two connected parts of a sentence, Kai or re Kai, or re re kol Kara jrjv either by /cat

Kol Kara. daXaa-aav, loth hy land and ly water 'ArpetSai re Kai aSXoi
iv/cv>j/j,i,Be<;

Horn.

'A^atot, ye Atridae as
;

well as ye other ivell-greaved Achaeans

Tot,

Horn, alel yap

strife is

epi^ re ^i\r] iroKeiiol re fid'^ai re,

for
also.

always
further

pleasant to you and wars and

add the Epic

Obs.

^fiev

battles.

r/Be,

as well

as

We
St,

may

In single
is

instances

we

also find re

where the second

member
3.

made more prominent by

contrast.
:

Kai has, moreover, the meaning also

o'C

Horn.

Trap'

efioiye koo aXXoi,

Ke

fie rip/ria-ovai,

with

me

aro also

others,

who

will honour me.

Digitized

by Microsoft

25.

THE PARTICLES.

337

In this sense, also, km is frequently used in both the connected parts of a sentence koX rjfuv ravTo, SoKet d'/rep jtai ^aajX^l, we also approve the same t}dng as the king
:

does

{also).

The meaning

also

tjomes even ; koX Xiav, even very

site case even hut

by intensification bemuch ; and in the oppo-

Kal ^paypv )(p6vov, even but a short : Koi Si answers to the English and also : SUaiov Kal irpeirov Se dfjia, just and at the same time also becoming.
time.

ojjLOLw; Kai,

After words of resemblance or Kkeness aeque ac.

(cat

/cat

means

as

4. aXXffls re

also;"

it

serves to give

properly means, "totli in other respects, and prominence to the subsequent word or

words, and

may he

translated

by

especially

j^aXfTroi/

eWi

Sia^alveiv

TOP TtOTafiov

aXXmr re

Ka\ noXefilav iroiKXStv eyyui ovrtov, it is difficult

to cross the river especially as

many

of the enemy are near,

km

8fi

Kal

is

used to make the

a-o(j)urTai, Koi

last part of

series

emphatic

Herod.

iKpoiVou jSao-iXevovTOS awiKviovTai is SdpSis oXXot re oi ndiTfS ix

TTTis

'EXXdSos

there

came from Sellas hoth

Solon [Lat.
5.

cum

tum\

8^ Koi SdXav, during the reign of Croesus all the other wise men and especially

In the Epic Dialect re is frequently employed to indicate the agreement not only of separate parts of a sentence, but of whole sentences, often, too, in connexion with other Particles, such as In these cases Kai, iiiv, Sf, aXKa, and with relatives (osre, oo-osre). Tc must generally be left untranslated or rendered by an unaccented dso : Hom. os Ke QeoXs Imit^WriTai iiaXa t eicKvou aiiroVf whoever
obeys the gods they greatly listen to
Ohs.

him

also.

The re in asri,
Kal, not only

oldsTe,

which occurs

also in prose, is of the

same
6.

origin.

The

rising climax

aXXa
OTTO)?,

but

is

also expressed

by

oi fiovov
oti,

also.

On

ou% on,

/jltj

ou%
/xi^Te

see 622.
1.

625.

The

Particles

ovBi,

fjjjSe

and

oike,

serve to form a negative series.

Two

different

meanings

belong to ovBi and

a) rwyr either,

yui^Se, viz.

and not

in this sense they are used to

connect a single
:

one negatively t/ou touch not meat nor drink either ; ^pd<^.o,, to your (^^d^ft^^m^^cPo^lM

member of a sentence with a preceding Hom. ^pwfiTjs ovt^ aTrreai, ovBe ttot'^to?,
tt/so? crov ovS"

ifiov

"^"^^ ^'"^'^^ 'P"^^


338
5)

THE PARTICLES.
also not, not event

826*.

iXwi^eo

ovBe

roii';

rroXefiiovr-

fieveiv eri,

I hope
i^rjv,

ovSe TovTo
liceiai].

enemy also will not longer stay ; not even this was allowed \ne hoc quidem
that the

ovre, fxriTe fJi.riTe, are used with mutual reference to each other, and may be translated neither nor : Horn, ovre ttot e? iroXefiov TraiXiaKeTo, ovTe iror eh ar/opriv, he neither went to war nor to the assembly. Sometimes a negative member of a sentence is brought into relation with a positive one, by means of ovre or T6 [Lat. neque ^] : cjfioa-av fiijTe irpohaxrew fjLriTe
2.

ovTe

aXKrjkov;

avfiyi,a')(pi

re ecreaOat,, they swore not

to

betray

one another
Obs.
^If

and

to be allies.
else

be added to tTvo members connected by may be done by ovbe, jirjSe. When,, on the contrary, oi8e or ^ijSe corresponds to a preceding otVe or lifjre, it mnst be called an irregularity (comp. re-Se, 624, 2, Obs.), and the member thus added is emphatic, dWa yapotVe
oiVe,
/u^re
jthTe, it

something or

ovre TOVTbtv ovdev ecrriv oK-qBes, ovde y el rivos aKijKoare,

oys

hut neither is any of these things true, nor even if you have heard fro-ni any one that I undertake to train men.

iya

TTaiBeveiv e7n;^etp dvBpbiiTovs,

II.

Disjunctive Oonjunetions.
^/

626. 1. 7], carefully to be distinguished from ( 643, 607), means

a) or,
or,

for

and in this sense is often doubled 7 ->j, either which tjtoi ^ is used when greater emphasis is
:

to be given to the first

member of the
citizen or

sentence

r>

aa-ros

TK

rj

^evo<;, either

some

a
;

stranger.

b) than, after

comparatives and comparative adjectives

eTepo<;,

like aXXo9, alius ;

ivavTLo<;,
croi
;

alter

Bid^opot;,

different

;.

opposed

to,

&c.

whom

should
rj

av fiaXKov TnaTevaaifM 4 trust more than you ? ovhev aXkcf

:

TtVt

i'mT7]Sevovaiv
else

a'TToOinjaiceiv,

they think upon nothing

than dyin^.

Ohs.

After

liKiov (jrXeiov contracted

n-Xetj/),

more, and eXarrov,

neiov,

less, fj is

sometimes omitted with numerals, just as juo?

Digitized

by Microsoft


629.
is after

THE PARTICLES.
339
more than seventy
is

plus

enj yeyov^s irXelov i^hofirjKovTa,

years old [^lus septuaginta annos natus]. also after oXXo in questions ( 608).

The same

the case

627.

2. e'ire

Latin

sive

elVe,

iavre
it is

idvre
be
e'x^ew,

sive,

when

to
:

left

are used like the undecided which of

two
it

sides is to

be chosen

etVe aXTy^e? etVe -i/reOSo?, ov

KcCkov fiob SoKei TovTo Towo/j,a

whether true or false

seems

to

me

not fair to have this name.

III.

Adversative Conjunctions.

expresses so slight a contrast or oppo sition, that though it is generally rendered by but, it may also, and especially in Horn., be translated by and.
1.
Be,

628.

The Greeks, however,

also like to indicate the first of

two sentences which are contrasted to one another, and this they do by /j,iv, in truth, truly, indeed; but it may often be left imtranslated Horn. SXkoi fiev pa Oeol re teal dvepe<; hriroKopvcTTai evBov iravvv-^ioi,, Ata S' ovk e')(e vijSvfio^ vTTvo';, the other gods, indeed, and the horse:

hair crested

men

slept

through the night, hut sweet

here, fiev

sleep

did not hold Zeus.

so elsewhere

As

Se express a contrast,

they indicate only a difference: Aapelov

[lev K.vpo';,

Kal TiapvcrdTi,So<; jlyvovrai TratSe? Svo, -jrpea/Svrepot;

Darius and Parysatis had two children, the elder Artaxerxes, the younger Cyrus; Hom. Trept fiev ^ov\y Aavatov irepl B' 'iare fid'^^ea'Oai, in council, on the one hand, and in battle on the other, you are distinguished among the Danai.
'Apra^ep^<;, vemrepa he
Ohs.

In

Homer an

Apodosis also

may he

opposed to

its

Protasis

by means

of 8e, especially
:

temporal conjunction
spirit

6vfi6v, rjXBe 8' 'ABrjvr],

the Protasis is introduced by a ecos 6 ravB' apjiaive Kara (j)pEva Koi Kara while he pored on this in his mind and
is

when

Athene came.

This

ordination and subordination.

founded on a combination of coComp. 519, 1 and 5, Ohs.

PL Neut. of denotes a stronger contrast than Be: Hom. ovk evB' aXXoi fiev Travre^ i'7rev(fyijfj,7jaav A^ostot
629. 2. dXKa, yet, hut (originally Ace.
aXKo^),

dW

'ArpelBy 'Aya/j,e/j,W9^iz^$9imicS3^^

dWd

KaKcb'i d^iei,,

; :

340

THE PABTICLES.
it

630.

then all the other Achaeans assented, yet

did not meet

dis-

the feelings of Atrides Agamemnon, but he harshly missed him.

Ols. 1

stood, oXkA.,

either expressed or undersometimes with a strengthening yi added to it, may frequently he rendered by hut or yet at least: ei fif) iravra, aWa TToXXa y 'ia-re, if not all, yet you know at least much

After a kypothetical sentence

S)

dWa vvv, oh gods of my not before]. Oha. 2. oKKa frequently serves to break off a long discussion and emphatically to introduce a request Horn. aXKa iridea-Be Koi
Poet.
6eo\ irarpaoi crvyyevia-Oe y'

fathers, he with

me

at least

now

[if

i'/ii/iej,

hut do you also follow me. negatives aXX'

rj

Ohs. 3.

After

or

apyvpiov iih ovk exa> aXX' ^ iiiKpov little. On ov fiTjv aWa, 622, 6.

ri,

aXKa alone means except I have no money except a

630. Other Conjunctions which point out a contrast

or a transition to something different are

3. av, avre, 4.

properly again, then on the other hand, yet. Horn, avrdp, and ardp, but, on the contrary, yet.
643, 13.

5. fiivToi, certainly, however, see 6. Kairoi,,

1.
ofiQ)';,

and

yet, still.

nevertheless, yet,

denotes a strong contrast

o/itu?

[Lat. tamen, nihilominus'\.

On

as a supplement to

a participle,
1.
is
09,

587, 5
Conjunctions of Comparison.

681. IV.
as (Lat ut)

properly the adverb of o?, rj, o. It differs in accent from w?, so or thus ( 99), except when in poets and the

Homeric
( 98,

it is placed after the word compared which case it is oxytone ira-TTjp &? r;7rto? fjev, he was gentle as a father. Like the Lat. ut it is employed in very different ways a) In its original comparative sense (u? means as or how, and is used in comparisons : d><; /SouXet, as you wish ; jiaKpov (1)9 yepovTi, far for me an old man (Lat. tanquam) ; Horn. 0)9 jmol Bi'^erai KaKov eic Kaicov alei (liow with TM one evil follows anotlier, I^at. quam) ; with super-

Dialect,

a) in

Digitized

by Microsoft

 632-

THE PAETICLES.
quam :
09

341

latives like the Lat.

rdxi(7Ta,
oti).

quam ceUrrime ;

as quickly as possible (comp.

In statements of

number and measure

about ten
;

it means about, nearly ; co? SeKa, to ttoXv, for the most part ; with verbs of motion or action it indicates what is merely intended,

&>?

em

apparent

dirriei cb? et?

tou? TroXefiiov;, he went

(as
if

away

in

the direction of the

enemy

he went against the

enemy)
and on
b)

hence

it

described
oi?

588.

On

occurs with participles in the manner its use with the Infinitive, 564,

as a preposition,

450.

In a temporal sense

<a?

means

wlien,

as soon as

(comp. Lat. ut) : Horn, co? etS', &<; jmlv /moXKov eSv x^^^! when he saw him, anger pierced him the more; co? Tdxtcrra
B9
inri<j)aivev,

idvovro, as soon as

dawn

appeared, they

sacrificed [Lat. ut primum"].

c) In a carnal sense m? means as (Lat. quum), since, and with subsequent statement of the reason, for: heojxat

crov

irapafieivai,

to?

eym

rjhio'Ta

cLKOvcrai^i,

crov,

beg

you

to stay here, as

should hear you with the greatest

pleamre.
d) After verbs of saying
7\Kev ar/yeXXa>v

and declaring m? means

thai

tk, ft)? 'EXareta KaTeiXrjTTTat,, some one came announcing that Elataea was taken. 526, b.
e)
ft)?

is

rarely used in a consecutive

sense, so that

((5j?T6).

/) In a final sense

!)?

means

in order that

(u?

/j-rj

TTai/Te? oXcovTab, in order that all

may

not perish.

Comp.

530, &c.
g)

On

to?

expressing a wish (Lat. utinam) see

514.

is

632. 2. mirep, as, only a strengthened w? (comp. only in a comparative sense.

3.
oTTfi)?,

641,

3),

and

is

used

how,

that, in order that,

is

principally used as a final Conjunction, and

Digitized

may

then

by Microsoft


342

'

THE PAKTIOLES.
that,

63S.

be translated by that, or in order On ov^ oTTM?, 622, 4.

4.
&J9Te, as, so that,

comp.

530, &c.

has rarely the comparative meaning as, generally the consecutive so that, when it is followed either by an
Infinitive or a finite verb.
5.

Comp.
like,

565.

Horn, ^vre,

as,

just as,

only in comparisons.

1. is

633. V.

Declarative Conjunctions.

oTi, that, because [Lat. quodi],

OST49,

Neuter of the pronoun on the distinction of which from oti, compare 214, Obs. 2. Like the Latin quod, 'on has two prinoriginally nothing but the
Ti,

cipal

meanings, the declarative

that,

and the caudal

and declaring

became.
a) oTi

means
525)
:

that after verbs of saying

'}lpdK\eCTo<; Xeyec,
oti,

(comp.
ovSev
nothing

fiivei,
is

irdvra 'X^'pel Kal Heraclitus says, that everything moves and

stationary.
it is

Hence the phrase

hrjkov

on

(also

written BrjXovoTo),
Ohs.

clear that, manifestly.

introduced by on, so that
:

Sometimes,
ypafjjrj,

also, a direct speech, is

is,

the Conjunction
fi

as

it

were, a mere sign of quotation

tJko)

eS^Xou

on

ScfiiaroKX^s

napa

uk, {he letter stated (that')

TJiemistocles

am

come

to you.

h) because, that [Lat. quod'\ Horn, 'xaonevo';, tov apiarov ^A'^ai.wv ovBev enaw;, angry that you have not honoured the best of the Achaeans.
:

The use
attention
possible;
aia, there
2.
:

of on (or o n) with a superlative deserves on rd-x^icrra like w? Taj^iara, as quickly as and on except, besides: oiiic fjv Kptjvr) otl
fj,j],
/jltj

was no fountain except

631, d.

one.

o)?, tJiat,

3.

Sion, that,

636, 2,

4. ovveKa, that,

636,

3.

Digitized

by Microsoft


'^

635.

THE
VI.

PAETICI/ES.

343

Temporal Conjimatdam.

634. (Eespecting the Moods, see

1.

556, &e.)
orav, oTrorav,

ore, OTTOTe,
rjv
rjv,

when, as [^qucmdo, cum]

when, if: r/evr] ovK

Trore 'xpovo'i, ore deal jmsv rjaav,

dvqra Se
Xijj.kvo'i

there once

was a time wliencjods

S'
fj,ev

existed, hut

mortal races did not exist; Horn, oi

-TToXv/Sev^eo? eVro? lkovto, laria
'they got within the deep

ore 8^

crreiXavTO, hut

when

harhour t^y furled the sails, 'ore and oiroTe with the Optative, according to 558, Ohs. 1, mean whenever, as often as: Horn, 'ivda -n-dpo^ Koi/iad' ore fj-iv jXvkv^ vttz/o? iKavoc, where formerly he
to lie down whenever sweet sleep came upon him. Sometimes ore has the causal meaning sirtce.

used

2.
3.

Hom.

e5T6

0Te.

^vLKa, oTTTjvlKa, when, at ike time

:

when

( 217),
e^arrrivrj'i

denotes rather a point of time

.iiTKpaivovTat ol TroXifjuiot,

iJi/tW rjv SetXij,

it

when

was evening

the

enemy

'Suddenly appeared.
4. ^/i09, poet,

when.:
ovpavov
a/;i</>(|3cj3^Kei, (cni

Horn.

5/*0E 8' Tfikios fica-ov

r^

817

ireia iraTTjp

tViVatve TaKavra,

when

(at the

moment)

the

XP^' sim

had entered mid heaven, just

'then the

father raised the golden

635.

5.

eirei,

after,

when, as:
koX

iiredv,
iBrjTvoi;

hr-qv,
.e'f

eirdv,

-wJien ;

Hom. airap
i/7reo-%6T0

eirel Trocrto^

epov evTO,

hut when they 'had quenched the desire for food and drink;

K-vpa
fivd'i,

dvSpl eKdcrro) Bdxreiv irevre dpryvplov

iirdv

ek Ba^vXava
five
eirel

each
to

man

silver

Babylon,
is

ij/caa-iv, Cyrus promised to give minae when they should come to frequently introduces a reason, and then

be translated by because or for:

vfip.e'i,

Hom. dXKd

TriOeaOe Kal

ivrel

weiOeaOai, d/ieLvov, hut do you

also ohey me, for

it is better to obey.

6. iirei^ri, now strengthened by

since,

since

eVetSa?/,

when,

is

eVet

( 642),

and points more strongly

iirei:
iareiSij

to the reason assigned

Digitized

than

dvecpx^V ^o

by Microsoft


344

THE PAETICEES.
now
since the prison

68S

Sea/MOT'ijpcov,. ehrjKOo^iev,

was
:

openedn

we

entered.
1.

Sbt, as Ivng as,

till

\_quamdiu, dum, donee]

is still

ew? eV*
eco?

iX-TTK,

as long as there

hope; irepiejMevofiev
till

avoix^eij] TO Sea-/j,coTi^piov,
be opened.
8.

we waited

the prison should

69Te.

"
^'"''

8. /*e%/3t, a'xpi

(comp.

455)

10. poet. 6j>pa, as long as, till:

Ham.

o<j)pa

fiiv Tjiis ^v,

rfXf'crtjTj,

as long as it

was morning ; Horn,

till

cj^fi
is-

k6tov, o(j>pa

he nurses wrath

he fulfils

it.

ocppa

very often a Particle of purpose or intention, and then to be translated by that, in order that : Horn. o(f)pa firj olos dyepavTos^ ta, in order that I may not he alone unhonoured.
11. Trpiv, before, sooner [^priusquam]
is-

(comp.

565),

joined sometimes, with, the InfinitiTe, sometimes with a finite yerb. Its original adverbial meaning, previously,,
earlier,

has been preserved, especially in to irplv, forIn Hom. the Conjunction Trpiv may refer back, to the adverb wpiv ovh^ o^e irplv Aavaolcnv aetKea
merly.
:

\oi/yov aTTaxrei, irpiv

-TTcSa Kovpriv,

a-TTo

iraTpl

^iXa

Sofievai eXiKO)-

and he

will not avert the dreadful suffering'

from
12.

the
to

Danai, before they have given back the quick-eyed'

her father.

maiden

irdpo'i,

Hom. ==
VII.

Trpiv.

Causal Conjunctions.

636.

1.

oTt,

633,

2. BioTi, because,

properly 8ia tovto on, for this reason-

ihat,
3.

or that.
ovveKsa, because; poet.,

'ivsKa oTi,
that.

from o5 eveKO, for rovrov for this reason that ; because, also declarativeSo likewise odovveKa from otov (ovtivc;) eveica.
635,
5.

4. eVet,
5. OTe, 6.

634,

1.

yap (always

postpositive),

for,

namely,

to

witr

Special peculiarities in the use of yap are

Digitized

by Microsoft


637

THE PAKTICLES.

345

a)

reason
is

In animated discourse the sentence containing a is often put before the one for which the reason
:

given, especially after a Vocative

Horn.

TToWol 7^/3 redvacn KapijKOfj.oavre'; ^A.yaioi

iroKefiov Travcrai, Atrides,

tw

'ArpelSr],

ae yprj

have died,

for many rich-haired Achaeanstherefore you ought to put an end to the war.

b) By namely, ydp may be translated when it introduces the substance of a speech or opinion before announced, so especially after TSKfiripuov Be, fiaprvpioi/

Si (supply
c)

eo-Tt),

for that there

is

a proof, a testimony.

In answers ya/j may often be rendered by yes^ certainly, but must in reality be explained by an cuycovia-Teov fiev apa tjimv Trpo'i tov<; dvSpa^ ellipsis avarfKt) <ydp, eiftrj, must we then contend with the men? yes, it is necessary, said he the complete answer would be, we must contend, for it is necessary.
:

In animated questions ^a/j serves to give emphasis nam : tl yap ; quidnam ? how so ? rj yap ; ov yap ; is it not so ? ttw yap ov ; how could it he otherdXKa, yap \at enim'\ wise ? el yap is the Lat. utinam. corresponds to the English but surely; ov yap dXKa properly for it is not so, but, hence however.
d)
like the Lat.
:

YIII.

Inferential Conjunctions.
enclitic pd, poet, also apa,

637.

1.

apa (Ep. dp and

postpositive), then, therefore, accordingly, always refers

something known or resulting from what has gone It is most frequently used in Homer to connect sentences slightly: w? dp' ejyt), thus then he spoke; 'ArpeiBrj^ B' apa vfja Oorjv SXaBe irpoepva-a-ev, and Atrides accordingly drew the fleet ship to the sea (as was to be ovk apa often means not forsooth, el dpa if expected),
to
before.

then or if perhaps, and in perhaps.

indirect questions whether

On
2.

the Interrogative apa,

607,

b.

oZv (NewIoB,Jj',^os|j)ositi^), then, consequenthj.


:346
is

THE PARTICLES.
:

63So

more emphatic than dpa

ifiolo'
Oeo-n-poiriTj';

Hom.

IjTot voctto^ aircuXeTo

irarpo?

out' oiiv ayyeXLTj

ert,

Treidofiai,

e'i

Trodev

MXdoi, oiiTe

i/Mird^ofiao,

mirely
believe

my

father's
if

return
phecy,

is lost,

therefore

no longer

a message,

.one comes

from anywhere, nor concern myself about proovv (comp.

8'

jjbev

well tTien ;
o\)v,

ovv, certainly

643, 12), no doubt, certainly, aXX' ovv, but certainly ; yap

6<;ri,<;ovv,

yet surely.

When

joined to relatives, oh) has the

:

generalising meaning of the Lat. cunque

ever,

who-

quicunque ( 218, 600). By combination with ovv

not
then,

we

obtain the Negative

ovKovv,
-oiiKovv,

to be carefully distinguished from

which is properly an Interrogative, not then?' but as an affirmative answer is expected after an. interrogative with ov ( 608), it has acquired the positive
meaning,
hence
therefore, accordingly,

now

ovkow

'ifioir/e
fj,r;

SoKei,

I do

not thinJc so ; Poet, ovkovv orav

hr)

aOevco,

ireirava-oixao, well, then,

I mil

cease

when

I really

have no

.strength.
3. vvv (enclitic, postpositive), a weakened vvv, corresponds to the unaccented English naw.

4. Toivvv, hence, therefore, surely, is

a vvv strengthened

by the assuring

rot ( 643, lo).

5. roir/ap, so then, therefore,

yet

more emphatic

roi-

ydpTOO, Toiyapovv.
6. co<iTe, so that,

632, 4.

IX.

Final Conjunctions.

(Eespecting the Moods,

530, &c.)
to [Lat. vij,

638.

1.

wa, that, in order that, in order

as

an adverb

also signifies where in a relative sense

:

in indirect questions

ovx

opa<;

"v

not see in what

(position

of)

evil

and KaKov ; do you you are? "va as a

el
;

Particle of purpose

is elliptical
e. tliat

in

must be supplied,

i.

what

ha tL where ykv^rat may happen? why?

Digitized

by Microsoft


? "39.

THE PAETICLES.
and
see 631, 632,

3.

347

On

2. (B?

3. gTTco?,

4.

S^pa,

635, 10.

5. ^77
etc.,

= Lat.
X.

m,

614

after verbs of fearing,

that not, in order that not, 530, 616, Obs. 3.

Hypothetical Conjunctions.

(Eespecting the Moods,

639.
1.
el, if,

535, etc.)

in indirect questions whether,

610

in wishes (where

d6e,

el

yap are also used),

(irj

if only, if but, 514.

Observe

in the sense of exc&pt, like the Lat. nisi: tjimv ovSiv eariv ar/adbp aXKo el /j,r} oirXa koX aperrj, we have
also el

no other good except weapons and valour ;

unless;
e'iTrep,

el

fir] el,

nisi

si,

siquidem, if indeed, certainly if, contains an emphatic assurance Poet. ^ Kal yeyrjOo)'? ravr ael
:

Xi^eiv 8oKei<;

rfj^ dXrjOeia^ cr6ivo<;, do you really think you will always speak thus joymisly? (answer) if indeed (certainly if) there is any force in
;

e'lirep

ri 7' eaTi

truth.
2.

eav,

1.

e. ei

av (av,

rjv), if;

in indirect questions, whether, 610.

3. dv, I suppose, perhaps (postpositive) always denotes that something may happen only under

certain conditions,

and hence

is

often untranslatable.

On
,,

av with the (potential) Optative,

516.

(hypothetical) Indicative, 537.

Indicative, denoting repetition, 494. Future Indicative, 500, Obs.

Qls.

Subjunctive with relatives,

554.

with particles of time,

557.

Infinitive, 575, 576.

is

Participles, 595.

av

ouS' vyiS>i 6 TOVTO-TroincrasirfM

often "used twice in the same clause : ovk av opdSts ovBims av Xoyia-mro, he who did


348
this

THE PAETICLES.
would
not,

S 6*0-

I suppose, judge

correctly or soundly about

any

thing.
4.

Horn,

ki, kcv (enclitic

and postpositive)

is

used almost entirely

like Sv.

XI.

Concessive Conjunctions.

640.

1.

el

KM

{iav Kai), if even, although,

:

denotes a simple concession

/SXevret?,

poet. iroXiv, el koI

firj

^povelt

8' '6fJM<;,

o'Ul

voaai ^vveariv, though you

have not sight, yet you are aware in what misery the city
is involved.
2. Ka\ el {jcaX edv, Kciv), even if, even though denotes an emphatic concession, like etiamsi : avBpo'i elvab arfaBov oitpeXelv tovs (^tXou?, Kal el

fj'^evTO

/iijSet?

/jbiXXoi e'ia-eadai,

he deemed

it

to belong to

a good
it.

man

to

benefit his friends, even if

Ois.

no one should know

el

The

distinction

between

nal

and

koi ft consists

mainly in
cases

the former giving the emphasis of the kqi to the Protasis, the

the Apodosis. almost the same.

latter to
3.

Hence the meaning

is

in

many

Kainep with the participle, 587, 5.

In the Apodosis the Concessive Conjunctions are often followed by

ofi:os,

notwithstanding, 630, 7.

B) Particles of Emphasis.

641.

quidem],

and is a more emphatic accent on the word

attached:
^Tjaet,,

76 (enclitic and postpositive), at least [Lat. word before it greater weight, often represented in other languages merely by
1.

gives the

to

which je

is

Hom.
and

eiwep 'yap"FiKTa)p ye kukov kuI avaXKiSa

dXX' ov

(you) base
(it)
;

-TreicrovTai Tpwe?, for if Sector shall call effeminate, yet the Trojans will not believe

Hom. aXXa crv, el hvvaaai ye, TrepLcryeo TraiB6<;, but do you, if you can, protect the son; tovto ye olfiai vfi,d<; airavra<i rjaOrjaOai, this at least I think you all have perceived
;

Hom.

ocTTt?

eiieh things,

ye

is

TOMiira ye pe^oi, whoever sfiould do very frequently affixed to pronouns

by Microsoft

Digitized

642.
Mycoye,

THE PARTICLES.
ego quidem,
o?,
'cr/e

349
;

(Horn, he, he spedally)

0976

strengthened

qui quidem.
at least [Lat. certe\, is comand hence more emphatic than

2. <yovv (postpositive),

pounded of 76 and
76 alone.
3.
-jrep

oiiv,

(enchtic and postpositive), just, exactly, very,

shortened from the adverb irepl, very ( 466), serves to give precision to the relative o?7rep ( 218), the very
:

one

who ; w?

irep,

just as.

In

Homer

it

is

added to

participles in a sense similar to that of KuiTrep ( 587, 5) ^rjS' ovrms ar/a96<; irep iav OeoeiKsX' 'A')(^0O^ev KXeirTe

vow, he not so stealthy in purpose, divine Achilles, though

you are

so very noble (ironical).

Sj;

642. 4.

(certainly, to be sure, well then, therefore),

is

points to

what

sentence.
a) to
(Jx^eXei
;

S77 is

obvious in a single idea, or in a \hole used principally in three ways

:

emphasize single words

vyieia
ical
Icr-xp^

Trota

icmv a

-^f^as
Sr/,

koX KaXKo<i Kal TrXovro^

what kind of things are

strength
be sure it
Sij,

those

which

benefit

us ? health and
hrj,

and

beauty, and, certainly, wealth; hrjXa,

to

is clear ; vvv opare B^,

;

well ! come
so,

tI

Stj ;

much

at the beginning of

what an apodosis
Kal, 624, 4.

surely see ; dye then ? fiaXia-ra h-q, very

;

now you

koI tots

hr],

now, just then.

b) to

On

koI

Brj

confirm a sentence by referring to what preTov

/Mev Br]
-TrefiTrei,,

cedes
KovBe

him, then, he sends ; Poet.

Br)

01

TtjXiKoiBe Kal BiBa^6fiea6a

(jjpovelv 'rrpo<;

avSpo?

ttj^i-

the ; we even at such an age are, tJien (according to preceding speeches), to be taught wisdom byaman of such an age ? w^ ev nvi (^povpa ia/j-ev 01 dvOpmirot, Kal ov

eavTov eK ravrT]'; Xveiv, we men are, as it were, placed at some post, and it is therefore not proper to
Bel
Br]

abandon
c)

it.

referring to time, very

r]Br],

much
Br]

like the particle of

time,

Lat.

jam

Kal ttoXKo,

and

after having already stated ' '^

dXKa \e^a<; elirev, many other things, he

Digitized'by Microsoft

350
said
;

THE PAKTICLES.
vvv
hrj,

643.

just now.

Horn, ra

hr]

vvv irdvTa reXetTaif

all that is just

5.

now
1

being done.

Stjttov, surely,

suppose, also hfjirovBev,

is

often used ironically in assertions

which admit of no reply

Tp4<f>eTai 8

^vxfj Tivi ; fia6r]jj.a<Ti. hrjTTov, the sovl is nourished ly what? (answer) surely by learning, rl S^ttou, well then, what do you suppose ?
fi^TQ, certainly,

6.

negative ov S^ra, certainly not

7. Brj6fv, clearly, evidently.

ri hrjra, well

what then

8. Sat,

another form of what ? how so ?

6i;,

but only used in questions

rt fiai

well!

643.

9.

^, verily, truly,
rj,

(to

be distinguished from

or,
rj

than,

626), strengthens

an assurance. of an oath
:

jJLrjv

(Horn,
'6pKov<s

fiev) is
iMrjV

the
firj

common form
fivrjcriKaKi^a-etv,

a/J^ocrav

r]

they swore that they would truly not cherish revenge.

On

the Interrogative

fj,

607, 608.

In
is

Homer

tj

is
:

strength to
written.

them

iirel

appended to eVet and ti, to add fj, rt r), for which also iirar], Ttry

10. Toi (enclitic

and postpositive),

I assure
:

you,

let

me

tell

you.

oUtoi, truly not, strengthened

forms

rolyap, roiyapovv, toi-

yaproi ( 637, 5).

11.
rJToi.,

verily, faith

(Jj

and

toi),
:

serves as a naive assurance in Epic poetry

^Vot

o-y'

tis iliriav

KOT ap' effTO, noiu when he had so spoken he sat down.

On

the disjunctive
fiTjv

rjroi

rj,

either, or, see 626, a.

12.
ver6\,

(Hom.
yap

fidv, fiv),

verily,

truly [Lat. verum,

Horn.
will

Sihe

i^epeco, kul firjv TereXecrfievov ea'Tat,for so

I speak

out,

and truly

it

will be fulfilled ; rt

/tTji/

why ! what P why

not ? (comp. 404, Ohs^.

13. ixkvToi, yet, however, certainly, Lat. vero,

from fi,iv the weaker form of ^jurjv e? OtVtaSa? earparevaav koI irroKiopKovv, ov jjAvtol etkov ye, dXhJ ave^(oprjo-ai) eV o'Ikov, they made an expedition against
:

Digitized

by Microsoft

643.

THE PAKTICLES.
and
besieged
it ;

351
it,

Oeniadae,

yet they did not conquer

hit'

returned home,
14. vai, yea, in fact.

15.

vij,

truly,

followed

by the names of gods

in the Accusative,
:

who

ure invoked as witnesses in an oath

16. fid, truly,

vrj

Ala, by Zeus.
also in-

in negative oaths:
positive ones,

oii

fih Ala, no,

by ZeMs

when

vai precedes: vaX /la Ala, truly by'

Zeus

399, Ohs.).

17. Horn. 6rjv (enclitic), trnly, surely,

similar to the Attic brjirov ( 642, 5), often witli an ironicali meaning : ov 6r]v /uv irdXiv aSris dutjati. Bvfios ayrivicp peiKeUiv
8acn\rtas, his courageous heart will surely not again incite

Mm te-

taunt Kings,

Digitized

by Microsoft


;;

352

ENGLISH INDEX.
{Tlte nuttibers indicate the $,

not the pages.')

ATTEIBUTB.

COMPLETED.
Attx. compounds, 359, 2, and Obs. (Comp. 360) Attributive additions, 383-386 Attributive Partic, 578. Augment, 234, etc. Omitted, 234. D.; 235Double, 237; in Compounds, 238, 240

* Abode," to be supplied, 411. Absohite Genit, 428; 584 Ace, 586.

Abstracts in the Plur-, 362,

Adv., 22J with the Art, 379 as Adject., 382. "Aim," expressed by Ace.,

406.

Ob3.~inostly Fem., loj.

General etc. .Accent, 17, of Nouns, rules, 79, etc. 107, etc.; 118; 123; 148 of of Comparatives, 171 1*100., 207 Irregularities ia the declCDsions, 121

Alphabet, 3. Anastrophe, 90.

12? ; i^i ; 1J3; 142; 163 J 166; 181; 183 in Adverbs, 201; 165 in Verbs, 229; 3ii, etc. in the Strong Aor., 255 in the Perf.^. 276 ; 284 in the Strong Pass. Stem, irreg., 29 j in derivation, 332, etc. 340, Obs. 4, etc. .Acaisative, orig. ending, 17J, meaning, 395 Obs. of the outer obj., 396, etc. of the inner obj., 400, etc. of double obj., 402, etc. of the predicate, 403 free Ace, 404, etc. Adverbial, 201 ; 203 ; with Prep., 447, i with the Inf., 567, etc. "Acdcstonied to," expressed by Aor. and Imperf. Ind,, with av, 494, Obs. I. " Acquainted vxith '* or " igno-

AoriU, weak^ with trans, meaning, 329 with k, 310 strong with intrans. meaning, 329 of proverbs and gnomes, 494 Ind., 492, etc. in CondiL sentences, 54J in Condit. sentences, 541 Moods, 495, etc. 5^9;

etc.irreg., 270, D.
Barytones, 19. " e," " become/'
etc.,

" make,"

417

361,

7.

" Begin," " Interrupt," " end,"

SubJ. cond. Obs. Opt. and

in
I.

verbs with Part., 590

Genit., 419, "
!>.

with

sent., 545, Inf., 497

Part., 496.
Apocope, 64. D. Apostrophe, 15; 64; 65, D. Apposition, 361, 12 ; 385 Appositive Partic, 579 ; 583. Article, 106 Crasis, 65 without Accent, 97, i as

S&neftmg," Verbs of, 396. "Buy," Verbs with Genit,

421.

" Capability,"

etc,

Verbs

Demonstr. Pron., 212,

I).

with Inf., 560, 1. Cardinal Num., 220.

Case,

100 Use

for the Relative, 213, D. Origin in Homer, 368 ; 370, Obs. omitted, 376, etc. Meaning, 369, etc. Nent, with Genit., 381; 410 Po-

Endings, 100 Ace, 142 153in Comps., 354 Obs. " Cause," in the Genit, 408,

of,

392, etc.

7422

426Dat., 439

sition, 383-390, Aspirates, J2; 52, etc. at the begin, of two successive

Part., 581. Challenge or Command in the Subjunc, 509 by ottws, 553, Obs.

Cliaracteristic, 249.

syll.,

53; 274.

I Redupli62.

Circumfex, 21

80; 83, etc.;

rant of," with Genit., 414,

3.

cated

by Tenues,

Aspiration

Actiout Suffixes for, 342. Active, 476 Act., Mid., Pass, meaning, 328. Acute Accent, 17; 80, etc.

dropped or removed, 3 2, D. thrown back, 54 omitted, 52, D. in the

87, 2.
"**

Adapted for"

Suffix, 351.

Adjective, declens., 114 ; 126 Compar., e;98. 154; 164, etc. 197 Genders, 180, etc. of "Attempting an action," ex3 Endings, 185, etc. of 2 pressed by the Imperf., 489. Endings, 182; 189 of i Attic Decl., 132 Ending, 157 Ending, 190Derived, 350 Fut, 263 Reduplic, 275, Contr., 183Subs, fem., I , 278. with Art., 379 Attraction, 127, 4 in597, etc. follow the Genit., 412, Obs. verted, 604. Adverbs, lor, etc. Corre- Attribute, 361, II Attrilutlve, 217, etc Num. butive Adject. Art., 384^

strong Perf., 279. Assimilation, 45 ; 47, etc. ; 50, &; 51; 56. Asyndeton, 624, a, Obs. AtoTux, 97 before EncMt, 93,

87,0. Classes of Verbs In la, 247250; 320-327 ; of Verbs in jLLi, 305-319Collective Sing., 362. Cominon Gend., 127, 5 ; 140. " Commwiity," expressed by

Dat, 4 J 6. Comparative,

192,

Adv., 203 with Genit, 416 Adj. and Verbs with

Genit., 416, Obs. 3

clens., 170, etc.

etc.

^de199

irreg.,

G<ympensation
ing,

42

for

by
V,

; 423. lengthen-

49, Obs. 3

147, i;

133,2ioTVT,vQ,v&,

50 ; 147, I ; 187for tr, 270. Completed Action in Verbs, 484; 435; 502-506-

Digitized

by Microsoft

ENGLISH INDEX.
COMPO'OKDS.

353
IHTEEROGATIVB.

Compmmds,
i8j;

Accent, 8;; iji

Divis.of Syll., "jj ; 165;

352 Adj., 182, etc.; Augm. in Comp. 189, i Verlis, 2?8, etc. treated as

Deponents, 482 Pass., 328, 2 Pass. Mean., 328, 4 ; 48J, 3. Oerivative Ending in Comps.,
i51-

In A Declens., 122in Declens., 127 in Cons. Declens., 137, eta Generic Article, 375Genitive Perispome, 100; 118 Oxytone, 131, 2 I'aroxytone, 181 in Monosyl., 142 represented by 6ev and ^Lv, 178, D.; 118 Meaning. 407 with Prepos,, 447, 2 with Subst, 408, etc. with Adj. and Adv., 414, etc. with Verbs, 417, etc. free Genit, 425, etc. Gentile Names, 349 ; 3^0.

simple Verbs, 402 Genit., 424 with

with
Dat.,

Description expressed by the Imperf., 488. Desideratives, 353, Obs. 2.

437Concessive Participle, 582. CanditianaX Sentences, 534, 54^ negat., 616. Conjunctions, 62j,etc.

Determinative Comps., 359, and Oba, (Comp. 360). Diaeresis, 9 ; 22, Obs.

i,

Vowels, 2jj, i, 2, 5; 262, etc.; 275. Consonants, Divis. of, 30, etc., 44in dividing Syll., -jii
CoriTiectiTig

etc.

Contraction, 36, etc. in Dedens., 118; J2z; 128: 130,

i6j, D.; 166; Double, 1 6-7 Omitted, 35, D. i; 165; 166, D. ; 2JJ, D. 4; 243, D.; 268, D, of the Pres. Stem, 245, etc. of Adv., 201Contr. Syll. long, "75, Obs. Accent, 87 163; 331 Oontr Fut, 259;
etc.;

Digairvma, 3, 1); 34, D. ; 35, D. 2 ; 63, D ; 75, D. ; 160 237 ; 253, Obs. ; 360, Obs. Diphthongs, Pronunt., 8 Origin, 26 ; 35, 2 before Vowels, 3?. Obs. ; 160; 248, Obs. without Augm., 235 spurious, 27. Disjunctive questions. (See

Chave accent,
Gutturals, 48; 260
y,

19, etc.

86.
|,

168

Double question.) Dissimilation, 46. Distributives, 223.

Doric Fut., 264. Doubling of Conson., 62 ; 34. Double questions, 611 ov

47 with 57 Charact of 251, D.

(,,

before

30 with it form
ft,

become become tra;

Pres.,

250

Eeteroclites, 174.

Miatu,
4-

63 apparent,

63,

and fj.T}, 61;, Obs. i. Dual represented by PI., 365,

Effect and Consequence ex-

SypotJietical Sent (See Conditional Sent).

262, etc Coordination, 519, i a, z. Coronis, 16 ; 65. Correlation, 519, 4 Correl. Pron. 216; 218 Adv., 217,

pressed by Ace. and

567.
JBlision.

Inf.,

etc.

Crasis,
89.

16;

65Accent

in,

Dative, Perispome, 109 Oxyin Monosyl., tone, I33j 2 142in o-i(p), 68 ; 165, D. ^represented by <i)iv, 178,

D.

Accents, 88 64 before Enclit, 96, 3. 92, etc. retaining the Accent, 96. landing, 100 changed in Comps., 355 of tbe ist Declens., 134 of 2nd, 172. Enjoying, verbs of, with GeETiditics,

Imperative, 228 i Aor., 53 268. D. ; 518in Cond. Sent, 545, Obs. 3 exp, by 2 Pers. Fut. with oil, 499, Obs. supplied by Inf., 577, Impeifect, 488, etc. in Cond. Sent, 54J in Prot and Apod., 538; 541.

Epexegesis, 624, a, Obs. Meaning, 429, etc. with Prepos., 447, 3 of ad- Ethical Dative, 43 3of Exclamations, 393 in Ace, vant. and disadv., 411
interest, 431, etc.

nit, 419, d.

433
etc. etc.

of measure, 440

of community, of instrument,

Inclination, 91, etc. Incomplete Action, 484, etc. Indefinite Subject 361,3, Obs. 2 in Neut, 364. Indefinite Pronouns, 214, etc.

ethical,

399, Obs.

in Genit., 427.

Adv., 92, Indicative, 507 in Depend. Sent, 520; 523 in depend,

216
4.

4j6, 4j8,
free,

Extent, exp. by Ace, 405.

Fear and Anxiety, 513

512

44I-443" J)eclaration,"

Verbs of with Ace. and Inf., 567 with Inf., 560, 2 with Part., 593 with ov, 617, Obs. i
Sentences
of, 525,

6t6, Obs. 3. Feeling, verbs of, with Ace., 399 with Dat, 439, O^s. with Genit, 422, Obs. with Part, 592-

declar. and Interr. Sent, 526in Condit. Sent, 536, in temp. Sent., etc., 545 556 hypoth. Ind. in Cond. Sent, 537 in Sent of pur-

pose, 550.

Indirect Object, 430 a. Individualising Article, 371,

etc.

Feminines,
163.

103;
67,

127; 138;
etc.

Decomposites, Augm. in, 239. Defectives in Compar., 200. Defining Object, 400 c Inf.,

Final
D. 2
183.

letters,

Syl.

Infinitive

Act, in

/iecat,

longbef. vowels

562.

Contr.
trans.

short, 75, Accent, 87 ;

Deminutives, 347 ; T04. Demonstrative Article, 369 Pron., 212; 216; 475 follows the predicate, 367
389. Denominatives, 339.

Future, 499,

etc.,

484 Act.

with

Meaning, 329

Art with,

Dental Cons.,

30 tlissim. 46
47
;

Fut. periphrastic, 501 Perf, 505 Ind. with kc, Part with Obs. 2 ^^^, Art, 500.

become

tr,

67 mutes
Gender,
rules,

617wiih 621, c dfor Imper., 577. Injure," Verbswith Acc-. 396. Instrument, 34^ Naand
ov,
ftTj

; 255, D. in vat' Aor. and Perf. Accent, s^^i 1-5; 268, Obs. I Use, 559 with Art, 379 as SubAce., 2 ject, 563 ; 574, 1 Gea, 3 Dat, 4 with /Lt,

2J3, D. 3

fj.ev,

ov,

'

suffix,

dropped before a, 49; 147, 1; 149; 260 in Perf., 281

known by
loi, etc.;

Charact.

general 127 by

tive of, 4j8; 574, 4. Interest or Advantage,

in

Verbs, 250,
3.

ending of Stem, 125;

137.

Obs. Fut.,

260,

of, 43 r, etc. Middle of, 479 Interrogative Pron., 214; 21O

Dat

2a


;;

;;

; 5

354

ENGLISH INDEX,

direct and 6 609 in depend. Sent., 525 joined with Demonstr., 606, Obs. Irregular Mouns, Verbs,
indirect, 4'75,
I.
I'j'j

Narrative in Aor.
Ifasals, 33

in

Ind., 492. divis. of Sy].,

Patronymics, J48. Peculiar Charact.

SuflBx, 351

72.1Necessity, exp. A^j., 300.

Genit,
by
Verbal
" Perceive,"

408, 8.

Verbs of with

J 20, Obs. Iterative form, J34, D., etc. in Imperf. and Aor., JJ5, D.

Negatives, 619, and Obs. Negative Pron. and Adv., 219. Neuters, 104; 139 Dental Stems, 147, 6 ; Liquid

Genit, 420; 417, Obs. with Inf., 560, 2 with

JUdicnnX Proceedings, Verbs of

with

Genit., 422.
225,
2.

Kinds of Verbs,

Labials, jo before before &, 48 ; 260

/x,

47 verbal

Stems, 151-Sigma Stems, 16; Marks of, 105, 3 ; 125 136 Accent, 340, Obs. 4 Adv., 201 ; 20J ; 401 Plu. with Sing. Verbs, 36J Adj. as Predic, 366.

Part, 591. Perfect, weak, 277, D. ; 280, etc.-strong, 277, etc.intrans. meaning, 330 trans, and intrans. meaning, 329 use of the Ind., 502

fects

Moods, Inf., Part, 506 Perwith Pres. meaning,

503.

Nominal

Predicate,

361,

4,

stem, 249. etc. LPMgtImiivg, 40, etc. ; 147 ; Nominative Dual oxytone, in 155; 165 ; 17J, Obs. 131,1 forVoc, 129; 393 Pres., 248 in the Fut., 260, meaning, 392. in Redupl., 275. Nouns from Verbal Stems, 2 ; 261 (Comp., 27J, D. ; 278). of 245. Vowels, 24J, D. i ; 26;, D. Numbers, loo, i ; 225, i " two " in the PI., 365. Liquids, 33 in divis. of Syll., Nvanerals, 220, Obs, 72.1with

Period, bypoth., 5J4~lnterposed, 550 Negative, 616. Perispomes, 21 before Eji-

clit,,

9J, b.

Personal Endings, 226 Pronoun, 250, etc. ; 92, 2 Meaning, 469 Genit., 470, a

for pron., 471, Obs, a, b Personal Constr., 571.

reflpc.

Place, Suffix of,

of,

345 Genit.

Locative, 179.

Art., 37475.

Long by Nature,

Objective

Inf.,

561

Genit,
;

442

Desig.
414,

Adv. with Genit, 41

of, 82,

412;

415;

425 Dat,
;

Marnier, exp. by Dat,, 441. Masculines, 102 ; IJ7disting. from Fem., ti} ; 122; 134 for Fem., ?62, Obs. 2. Material, sulfix, 352, 3, 4 Genit., 408, j ; 414, 2; 418. Measwe, in Dat., 440. Mediae, ii.

179

41

2.

574,

Obs. Part., 581

361,

Plenty and Want, Adj.

of,

2 Verbs,

418.

"

Metaplasm,
Metathesis,

i.75.

59;

with strong

Aor, Act and Mid., 257 D., 282, 285; with strong Aor. Pass., 29;, D. Middle, 477, etc. direct, 478 depend, declar. and interr. indirect 479 Snbjective, Sent., 528 in Sent of pur480 Causative, 481 Aor. pose, 532 in Sent of fear, with Mid. meaning, 255, 2; 533in Condlt Sent, 546, 271, Fut. with Act. meanetc. in Relat Sent, 555 ing, 264; 266; 328, I with in tempor. Sent, 556 ; 558 Pass, meaning, 266. exp. interest, 4J0. Modesty of Assertion, exp. in Ordinal Numbers, 220 in Opt., with av, 517, Obs. I. Ace, 405, Obs. I. Momentary Action, 484 ; 492- Oxytonts, 17 before Enclit,

Objective Comps., 159, 3, and Obs. Genit, 408, s, b\ 413, Opinion to he of," Verb, with Inf., 560, 2 ; 567. Optative, 228 Pres., 2 Pars. Sing, in irBa., 133, D. i Perf. Mid., 289-514 potential with av, 517, Obs. 2 552, Obs.In dep. sent., 524 Opt. in dep. Sent, 522, etc. in indir. Speech, 523 in

Plural, 3 Pers. PI. Mid. in

; 2JJ, D., Mid. in fieaBa, 233, D. 362, etc Position, 71, etc. ; 19J. Possessive Article, 373 Pron.,

-arat, -aro, 226, D.

5,

61

208with Art, 388; 47Q of the reflective, 472, 6, c Poss. exp. by Genit, 408, 2
414, I by Dat, 422. Possibility, exp. by Verb Adj.,

300

by
;

etc.

546

by Part with

187.

Opt. with av, 516,

av,

595-

Predicate,

361, 3, etc^dependent, j6i, to; 589,

without Art, 378,

Predicative Ace. 403 Genit, 417 Ace. with Inf., 570 Gen. or Ace., 572 Part,

589.

498.

93. a.

Monosyllabic Stems, lengthened, 142, b in A, V, p, Perf., Paroxytones, 17In Crasls, 89 282 Accent of Mon. words, before Enclit, 93, c. 142 with Enclit., 94. Participles, Declens., 187 Mocds, 225, 4. Voc Sing., 148 Perf. Act, Miiltiplicatiues, 22^. Fem., 188; 277, 276, D. " Must " " Should," and I>.~Pre8. Aor. and Perf. Verbs of, in Imperf., 490. Mid., J33, 6-10 with Art., Mutes, 31, etc. AssiiniUition, in 379, etc. ; 578, Obs. Dat., 43 5. Obs. 49, U. ; 52 before Liquids bypoth, and Nasals, 78 Stems of withiinj, 583,618. Verbs, 248. Partides, 92, 5 ; 623, etc. Partitive Genitive, 408, 4; Name in Genit., 408, 412 ; 419. Animals, Gender, 140. Passice, 483 with Dative, ^Name," "Select," etc.. Verbs Aor. In Act verbs 4J4 of, 361, 7, 10; J92;403. with Mid. meaning, 328, 3.

Prepositions, lose their Accent 88 Elision in dissyl.,

64; 90; 238 Anastrophe, 90 Augm. aft Prep., 2?8, etc. Use, 444Adverbial, with Ace, 449, 446 Genit, 451, etc. Dat, 456, etc. Genit and Ace, 458 with three cases, 462, etc.

spurious, 445.

Present Ind., Moods, Inf.

486,

etc.

9^f

Part, 491 hist, 487 exp. by Ind. Aor., 494, Obs. 2 enlargement of, 246 Stem, 231 like the Verb Stem, 247 Stfni with lengthened Vowel, 248 from Verl

Digitized

by Microsoft

ENGLISH INDEX.
PRIMITIVE.

355

SUBJDKCrrVE.

Stem with
2^0, etc.

t,

249

with

i,

Remit of an Act, 34i In Ace, 400, d.

Root, 245.

the

in

temper, sent.,

55*?,

jcS.

Primitive words, J39. Principal Conjugations,

2jo
" Scare," "Obstruct," and other Verbs, with the Inf.,
yjo, J.

first,

231, etc,

Declensecond, 302-319 sions, III first, 112-134 second, 135. ProcUtics (see Atona).

320, etc.

Obs, 2, Subordi7iatUm., 519, j, Substavtive, degrees of, 199, D.joined to the Dat., 430, Obs., 432, Obs.
Sujjixes,

^40; 178.

Semivowels, 31.
Sentences, Compound, 519, 3, Principal, Subordinate, 5

"Prohibition," 518; 510; 499 Prohibit, Hinder, Deny, etc. have the Inf. with jllm,

bi";,

Obs. i

with
5.

jlltj

ov,

621, d. Prolep&is,

$ 19.

Obs.

519, 4 Moods 525, Condlt., 534; 549, Negat., 616 of Experience in Aor. 494 525 of Pui-pose, 5 jo-533
of,

etc,

Superlatives, Adv., 203 with Genit., 416, Obs. with ws. 631, with oTt, 633, I, b. Supplements to the Part., 361,

^^c*

8.

Supplementa/ry
etc..

Aorist,

270,

Ind.,

Interr.,

Syllabic
initial

Augm., 234
vowel,

with,

CComp.,.56'7;5'jO. Fronvmciation, 4, etc.

Prt^pa/roxi/tones, Eincl., 93, d.

Negat., 616.

237 omitted,

Pi'operispomes,

before 11 before
17

" Shew," Verbs of with Part.,

59 J
;

283.

580.

Syllables of both quantities,

75.

End., Qj, d. Proper Names in -a, iiy, D. 2 -^s. 174 k\yi^, 167 with Art,, 37t, Obs. ; 375, Obs.;
387, Obs.

Slwrtening, at the begin., 74, D. of the final syll., 75, D. 2 in the Perf., 285, D. in the SubJ., 228, D.; in Rel. Sent., 233, D. 2

D- i;77;

Synizesis, 39
61,

66

243, D., 3.

c;257, D.

6.

597.

3.

" Taking part in," with Genit., 414, 5 ; 419, a.

" Should,
of,

"Property," SufBx

346;

Sent,

by

exp. In depend. the Subj., 527, b.

;

34h Obs.
QuwnUty, in
Monosyl.,
Crasis,

Opt., 528,

doubtful, T42 reversing quant,, 75, D., I 37, D., 2; 161, Obs. Quantitative Adj. and Adv., 224 with Art., ^74. Questions, dubious in the

65

in

Sigma, tuture, 259

Aor., 269.
4
268,

260, etc.

Singular,

Accent on Imp. Mid., 2 Accent on 2 Aor,

3 Pers. in e (y), 68,

Temporal Adj., 352, 4, Obs. Augm., 234, 6; 2J5. Tevses, 225 ; 3 Princip. Tenses, 521- Subord.. 522Tense Stems, 227, Tenues, 32 for Aspirates, 32,

D.

Time, in Ace., 399, 6

in Genit.,

405

Imper, Act. and Mid., 333,

ri, 12, 362.

443 Adv. of with Genit., 415

kinds, degrees of, 484, i, 2. rransiiiue and In trans. Meaning, 329, etc.; 476 Mid., 477. " Touch," and other Verbs

42& in

Dat.

"Space," exp. by the Ace.,

399, b. Spiritus, position,

Subj., 511.

12;

22

Reciprocal Pron., 211. B&iuplication, 51, 10, a in the Perf., 273, etc. in the 2 Aor., 257, d in Verbs in

with p and pp, ijSpir. in Augm., Asper, 6d, b

235,

Obs.-Spir,

Leiiis, 11.

with

Genit., 419, b.
Syll., 35, D., i.

Stem,

100St, Vowel

leiigtb-

fxL,

308.

Refliective Pron.,

for 1st and 2nd Pers., Obs. c to denote possession, 472 for Recipr,,
ing,

471

3rd

210

^Mean-

ened, 147, 2 ; 248 ; 253. Obs, 2^1, 270, changed to e, 157. "Strive," "Aim at," Verbs with Genit,, 419, c with

Uncontracted

Vej'ba Cuntracta among Iteratives, 336, d V. puru,

475. Relative A(^., 414. Relative Pron., 21J

Craais,

216

Inf., 560, 3Omitted, Obs. Subject, 361, 2 ^with Genit, Abs., 585, a of a Subord. Sent, as

impura, 247.
FerftaZPredic,

361,4Nouns,

Obs.

65 Compound, 214, 2-^Hypoth., 554 fol-

lows the Predic. Subst., 367 used once only, 605. Relative Sentences, 551 with Fut. Ind., 500 with /a^, complication, 615, Obs. 2 604 Connection, 605. " Reference to," exp. by the

the Principal Object of Sent, 397 ; 5i9. 5 Obs. 2 Subj. of Prill, Sent, in the Subord. Sent., 602; 519. 5. Obs. 2.
Sut^ective Genit., 408,
Svhjyjnctive,
5, a,

Stem, 245, etc. 225, Pres. Stem, 246 ; 260, 3.

Vocal Stems, i Perf., 280. Vowels, 24, etc. in divis. of Syll., 470 before others, 74 long without Augm., 235 Clianges, 40, etc. in 2 Perf., 278-in derivation, 340, Obs. J.

228Shortened,
I
;

233, D, 2; 255, D.

502, D.

Ace, 404.

Rejection of letters, 61 of a Vowel at begin., see Syncope of a vowel at end,

the Perf, Mid., 289 of verbs in p-t, accent, 309 IWeaning, 508, etc. similar

of

sfe Elision.

R^etition, exp. by the Opt., 547 (Negative, 616, Oba 2) 555, Obs. 15558, Obs. I,

to Fut., 5 1 J in dep. sent,, in dep. assert, and 521 interrog., 527 in sent, of purpose, 531. 5?2 Obs. in condlt, express, fear, 533 sent,, 545, 554. 555. Obs. 2

Weakening of Conson., 60. " When," exp. by Dat., 443 " Whither," exp. by Ace, 406. '* Wish," exp. in the Opt., 514,
etc.

Worth and
nit.,

Price, in the Ge408, 6; 421.

Digitized

by Microsoft

; ; ; ;

356

GEEEK INDEX,

afJivai.

for

rj,

24,

D.

a a becw, 268;278 bee. 0,268. a bec.Tj,4o; 115, i,c; ii6,d;

115, D. I ; ; 270, Obs. for T], 277, D.

41, D. 121, D. 2; 235,

D. 2

aStKe'w, with, the Accus., Signif., 486, Obs.

396
t],

420, 591.

and Obs.

with Partic.

ae

(aij)

into

a,

38; into

a
a a a

a
a,

235; 270; 268; 278; 303bee. , 31, !> 2; 169, D. 243, D. 3. bee. at, 24, D. 3. from ao, aw, see ao. after e, t, p, 41 ; 115, i, a ; 116, c; 121 ; 180; 261 270; 278. before vowels, 235, connecLing vowel, 276 in the 336, O.; 358, D.

243, D. 2 into aa, 336, D. into a, 243, aet into a, 38 Obs.into at, 38, Obs. ae'^to, 312, D. 13. aea-a, 327, D. 17. -a^io. Verbs in, 353, Fut. 263.

aKparos, Comparison of, 196 5. CLKpoaof'.ai, rut., 261 witU Gen., 420.

Gen. Abs., 585, oXaKKov, 326, D. II.

aKoiv,

b.

aKa>a]p.at, 275, D.

dAao/iot, Pass. Uepon., 328, 2 Perf., 275, D. I,

a.\yeiv6<;.
,

a.7}Butv,

Gen. Sing., 163.

Comparative

of,

afjixL,
oLYjp,

Masc,

313. D. 3. 140.

199.8.

at,

in the

Compar. for o or
77,

o),

195into
-at,

235.

aAS^CTKto, 324> D- 30. aAe'ao-^at, 269, D. aX.et4>ap, 176.

3 Plur., 302, J. a, cbaracteristie of the First or Weak Aorist, 268. in Adj. a, privative, 360

Elided, '64, D. Short in regard to the Accent, 83, Obs. 2 ; 108 ; 229 ; 268, Obs. i.

Perf, 27$, I. okeKTpvcov, of both genders,

aAei'^iu,

140.
aX-^fjLevat, 325, ^- d. 326, II. akibi, 301, r. oX-f\Qe<;, 165. oASo/iat, 326, D. 39. aAty, with Gen., 414, 2. Perf., okia-KOfiaL, 17 327, 275. 2 Aor., 316, 12 with the Genit., 422. aKiTaCvtii, 323, D. 37. aAK:)7, Dat Sing., 175, D.

at, al6e, see el, et$e. atSeojuat, alSofxai, 301, 1

aXv,

-a,
-a,

with the Genlt.,4r4, Obs. 5. ending of the Accus., 141

Depon., 328, 2 with the Accus. 399. 'AtSijs, 177, D. 19 1/, ts

JO
Piiss.

326,

aki^tii,

156; 17J, Obs.; 181 ; 276. quantity of, 117; 121; 161 ; 169; 181, I. -a, Plur, ending of Neuters, 125, 2 ; 136; 141; 173.

'Atfiou, 411atS(09, i6j.

-a,
-a,

Adverbs

Nom.

in, 202. of Substant. in, 172.

-aiv, in the Dual, 173, 4. -atva, Fein, ending, 115, i b. alveia, 301, 3atvviJiti.1, 319, D. 27.
-aivaj,

-a,

from ao in theGenit.,122,
i.

at|, of
atpe'o),

Verbs in, 353, 7. both genders, 140.

oAAo,

Obs, ayaBoq, Comparison, 199,

ayajLLai,

327> Distinct,

1 Perf.,

6, d. ;

629 a/Aa yap, 636, aXX' Jj, 629, Obs. 3

294,

275, D. I

between Act. and

(a7a0|aat), 312, 8 Pass. Depon., 328, 2. ayavaKTeta, with the Particip., 592.
(iyaTTw,

Oba. with the Partic., 592. ayyeKKofj.at, construed personally, 571 iyyeAAo), with a Partic, 59 j. aye S^, 642, 4, a. i-yeipui, 2 Aor., 257, D. Perf.,

with the Dative, 439,

b. Pass, meaning, 483. 3atpio, Aor., 270, Obs. -ats, Subst. in, 172. -at?, in the Dat. PI., 119. aladd.vofji.aL, 322, II with the Gen., 420 with the Partic,

Mid., 481

aXX.' ofiv, 637, 2. aAAao-o-o), I Aor. Pass.,

_

Obs.

oAA-^Aotv, etc., 211. oAAo/i-at, I Aor., 270, Obs. 2 Aor., 316, D. 32.

oAAos, 211

275, I. , ayTJOxo, 279. ayiveui, 32}, D. 39. iyvvfiL, 319. 13 Perf., 275, 2

Comparison of, 198. with Ace, 399 with Dat., 439, Obs. with Partic., 592 with the Inf., 594 alaxuvio, Perf., 286, D. aiTe'ti), with double Ace, 402.
aia^poi;.
attrviji'oiu.at,

oAAo Tt ^ Tt ; 608. oAAo); TE Ka.i, 624. 4oAs, 150. dAu'tTK-to, 324. 27, Obs. aA(/)dva>, 323, D. 38.
dAtii'at, 324.

aAAo

dAwTnj^, irreg.
a/ia,

IT Nom.
I.

Sing., 14^.

with Dat., 43b

322,
e.

c with

Part, 587,
VLfxap-TOLvui,

Signif.

J30,

I.

Comparison of, 203, D. with the Genlt, 415. ayui, 2 Aor., 257 Imper, of
oyX'-t

aKaxt'^w, 319, D, 30. aKeojuat, 30I1 ! aicqKoa., 275, I ; 280,

aKvjxefittTO, 287,

12

with
r,

Genit, 419

Obs
27,,
I

a.fx^\i<TK(a, 324, 18.

ajLtet'^o/iiat,

D.

with Ace., 398.

Obs,

Aor., 263, D. a3eA,0o!r, Voc. Slug., 129,

aKovji, Perf. Perf. Mid.,

Act,

the Nom., 392, Obs. with Gen.,

288 with

d/xetV(ui', Signif., 109,

djLLeAe'ti),

with Genit., 420.

312, D. 13.

djLiei^at,

Digitized

by Microsoft

;; .

OEEEK INDEX.
aju.iAAdo|U.aL.
ajU-iAXdojULai.

357
/3ao"tA.Uff.

apxvv.
Pass.
avri,
oi/ti),

bepon.

451

without
204
1 1

Ana-

J 28, 2.
ativriixuiv,

strophe, 90.
'withGenit., 414, 5.

Compar.

aiLLotpoy, witli Genit,, 414, 5.

a/ji6?,-aftds, 208,
ajLtTTfixo), 5J,

D.

d.

Genit,, 415. avtaya, 3 17, D. 283, D.

with Plup.,
414, 4

dpxop-aL and ap^d), Distinction, 481, 6.

opxop.ot, with Genit., 419,

with inf., 560, 1 with Part,, 590 with Inf. and Part.

ijitTrtiTxvou/iai, 32J, 36.

ajLiTrXaKLO'KCdi 324, 2j.
aii.irvvvQr\t
:Jl6,
ajuffit,

a^tos.

With

Genit.,

with

inf., 562.

298, D.

afj-irwro,

D. 29. 462

without

Ana-

strophe, 90. afi^UvvuiiL, 319,

5 Augra.,
402.

240 with double Ace,

221

aftdxpetos, 184. 00 into a, 37, J ; 122, D. 2. into w, 37; 122, 13. 3 c intoew, 37, D. 2; 122, D. 3 b; 132; 243, D. 3. ao, Genit. Sing., 1 22, Obs., etc.,

594dpxf^, with Genit., 423 DifF. of Pres. and Aor., 498. -a?, Ending of the Acc. PL, 141. -d9, Fem. in, 138.

Neut, in, 139. -a?, Subst. in, 172.

-a5,
ao-jLievo?,

319,

i).

Compar,,

afi^U}, afJ-ffiOTepoi, afitfiOTepov,

atL^OTepuiOev,

D.

3 y.

196, h.

with

aot, into w, 37.

S^aov,
afTTTJp,

atrcroTipoi, 203, D.

Genlt., 415.
av-, affixed to

form the Pre-

sent Stem, 322. av privative, 360.

'dv, see kav.

aou, into Eta, 24J, D. 3 h. airayopopeuta, with Part., 59'^* aTravToib}, Fut. Mid. with Act,

Dat.

PI.,

d<TTv,

158 Gend,,

151. IJ9.

meaning, 266.
aTraxj)L(rK(o,

'av, 639,

3 with

324, D. JJ.
3.

time, 557 in the Apodosis of Conditional Sentences,

particles of

aireiTTOV, 327, 12.

aTretpos,

with Genit., 414,

535; 5J7;54i;Comp. 542; 546 with Aor., 494, Obs. i with SubJ., 51; with Put. Ind., 500, Obs. with Imperf., 494, Obs. i with with Int., Ind., 5j6, etc. 575, etc. with Opt., 516; 546_with Part., 595 with Relatives, 554; 555. Obs. 2. 'avt Nom. Mas. and Neut.,

aTTCx^avo/xai, 322, J6. airexofxai, with Genlt., 419

iird,

452 Apocope, 64, D. Compar., 204.

e.

-arat, -aro, 3 PI- Mid., 226, D. 233, D. 6; 287, and D. drdp, avrdp, 630, 4. are, with l^art., 587, 6. arep, 45S, 5. drra, ana, 214. aS, aSre, 6jp, 3. av^dvo}, av^ioy 322, 13. -avy, Fem. in, 172.

atroSCSofiaL, with Genit., 421. airoSiSpaa-Kui, with Ace, 398.

avTiKa, with l^art., 587, 3. auTo?, 200 position with the

Art.,

aTTOEpcra, 270, D. a.7roA.auw, Fut. Mid.'with Act. meaning, 266 with Genit., 419. d.

Obs.

389 with Dat., 441, in the Genit. with 474for the Relat., with 605, Obs. 6
i'ossess.,

avT6<;f

172. -av for a.<av. Gen. Plur. a-Decl., 118, D.

'AnoWtJiv, 148, Obs.

oLTroa-repeia,

A CO.,

171; Voc,

Dat. 4 J 6, b.
ai^atpe'op.at,

with double Acc,

of

with Double Acc., with

Genit.,

402.
aTTorvyxo-vta,

402. a^da-ata, 250, D.

a0tv)/xt,,
d<f>'

ava, see ava^. Apocope, 64, D. ai/d, 461

3U.

I Augm.
D,

240.

o5, 556; 601.

without Anastrophe, 90. ova)3dAAo/xai, with Inf., 560, 3.

arajSiMO-KOjLiai, 324, ir.

cLvayKoios ei/xt, construed personally, 571. avakCaKOi, avaKuxrto, 324. 19*

avaixifiv^a-Ktii,

(MToupa?, 316, D, 18. airo^aCvta, with Part., 593. airoxpV' 512, 6. aTTTO/Ltat, with Genit., 419, &. -ap, Subst. in, 172. apa and Spa, Distinction, 99.

a^vtrcria, i Aor,, 269,

dxapis, compar. 19 j, D.

Depon. 326, 12 dxBofjiai, with Part., Pass., 328, 2

With

double

dpa

(ap'),

Apocope, 64, D.

Ace., 402. Voc. Shig., 148, D. ard|tos, with Genit., 414, 4. av8av(o, 322, 23 Augm., 237. avSpdiroSov, Dat. PL, 175, Daveyvbiv, a.v4yK<ii(ra, DifF. of Slgnif., 329. I^avv, 445 ; 455, 5
S.va^,
,

637. I. 5pa, in questions, 607, &

direct,

injlitJ,

610; 5p* ov, Spa

D.

607, Obs.
dpapla-K(o, 324,

34 Perf.,
and

592. Plup. dxwfj,ai, 319. D. 287. D. aXpt(0. 69, Obs. 3; 445; 455, & ; without Elision, 64, Obs. I dxpi.o5, 556. -aw. Verbs In, 353. 2, and lengthening, 24J, Obs.

30

275. D.J. apeCuiv, dpnTTOff,

^

D.J.
199, i,

-aw, P'ut. iO, 263, D.

p, inserted between p. and p, 51, Obs. 2, andD.; )3 for /x,

Obs.

dv^Ojuat, double Augm., 240

Part., 590. avetoya, ave(px-> 3^9> Distinction, 279. avrjvoBev, 275i D>
awJii,

with

^9

153; 177. 1 Genit., 51, Obs. 2. omJp, 65, Obs. I.

av9' &v,6oi.
avoCyio,

Augm.,
.

237 Perf.,
Augm.,
avTiKpii,

275. 2; 279-

apetrKta, 324, 10. dpTjpws, 280, D. 'Api]?, 177. 2-apLOF, Neuters m, 3 47, Obs 1 apK4(a, Aor., 301, 1. Obs. Filt., apjuoTTto, 250, 260, 3Depon. Pass., 328, 2. apveofiai, api'de, etc., 177, 3. apW^Lai, Aor., 319. I*- 29. Perf. Pass., 27 J, apdw, 3or,
. .

see

ft.

pa&t^u}, Fut. Mid. meaning, 266.

with Act.

PatVw, 321,
317,
X I

I,

Perf, Aor., 316, I

andD.

Aor. Mid., 268, D. of the meaning, 329, 2 Perf., 50 J. Aor., jif), D. 19 ^dAAw,
Perf.,

476, 2.

avopBooi, double

240.
seej^
-

D.I.

282 Signif.,

avra,

avrqv,

^dpStoTos, 198, D.
apX^' 45.

avTi. avrexofitu, with Gemt-, 419

0.

Obs

z.

^ao-iAeta and ^ao'tA.eta, Il7< PflwtAevs, i6r, D.

358

GREEK INDEX.
SpOTOS.

^acrtXevta, with Gen it., 42 J Dlff. of Pves. and Aor 498.

^e^ftiaOa}, J24, D. I J. iSeiofiat, /Seo/j-at, 265,

2with
14 with

Genit.,

417with
316,

dixo/J-ai, Perf., 273,

Dat., 4 J 2. ytyi/wo-Kw, J24,

316,

D.

34

Aor.
2
1.

D. 2 Aor.,
Pass.

14 Aor.,

D.

I'art, 591.

Signif., 328, 4. Setu (I bind), 301,

Con-

Pet'u, ^^T), etc., ^16, D. I.

^eKTLoiv, j3e'A,Ti(rros, 199, I. Pass, meaning, ^Ld^oixai,

48J> 3-

^L^aq, }11, D. 14. pCfikoq, Fern., 127, 5. fii^pJia-Kio, ^24, ij

J

Aor.,
Piirt.,

yA, yv, Redupl. with, 274, Ex. yoao), 325, D. n. ydvu, I77> 4yovv, 641, 2. ypauy, 159. ypd^ofiat, with Genit., 422. ypd<^ofi.a.i and ypa^io, Diff.,
481,
&.

traction, 244,
Sd(o, SeofjLai, (I

1 6, D. Perf. J 17, D. 16. 3id(i>, Aor., ii6, ij.

23

^A, Redup., 274, Kx. )3Aa(3eTat., Horn. Pres., 249, D. ^KdiTTio, Aor. Pass., 299

with Ace, J96.

^kaerrdvto, 522, I4/SA^o-flat, etc., Jl6, 19. (SAiTTO), 250, Obs, |8AiTKu, 324, 12; 51, D.
/Socitoj,

S inserted betw, v and p, 51, Obs. 2; 287, D.; 612 Character, 251. See Dentals. Sat, 642, 8. Saotwc, of two Genders, 140. Opt., SiaLvvixL, 319. U. 32

am in want of), 326, 15 with Genii., 418. Affix, 218. St}, 642, S^flef, 642, 7. S-^Aof oTt, 633, I, a, StjAow, Meaning, 476, i 6t7Aoco and SijAds eifii, with Part., 590, A>j^tJtt)p, 153. St^v, makes position, 77, D. 5T77roT6, afBx, 218.

SrJTTov, S-qirovOev,
-5]s,

642, 5.

Masc.
J

in, 348.

S^a-a,

26,

D. 15.

S^To, 642, 6. 5t into ^, 58; 251.

5ta,

318, D.
8a.u>i,

448

458 without Ana-

Fut. Mid. with Act. Meaning, 2j6.

Meaning, 330, D.

9.

SdKviii, 321, 8.

^dAeTa^, j66, D. 14. ^oppdq, Genit. Sing., 122, Obs.

^otr/co),

SdKpvov, 175*
SdiJ-ap, 147, I,
SdjULi^p.t,

strophe, 90 with Inf. and Article, 574, 2, 3. Sta, 181, D.

Stayto,
StaAetTTto,

Ex.

J26, 13J26,
J

(SoTpug, ilasc, r4o.

j3ouAo/j.a[,

Obs. Mid., 233,

2?4, J28,
|3ou?,
2.

14 Augm., Sing. Pros. Depon. Pass.,

312. I'- a Subj. Pass., 293, D.

Aor.

BiareXeta,

with

Part., 590.

Siatra, IiJ.
fiiatTow, 240.

159; 160; 35, Obs. of two Genders, 140. ^pdcra-ti}, 250, Obs.
^pdrrtTiav, 198, D.

DifF. of Act. and Mid., 481, b. BapBdvui, 322, 15. 5^9, Accent, of Genit. Pi. and 'Dual, 142, J. SariofiaL, 325, D. I Aor. Inf., 269, D.

Savei^di,

With double Augm.,

with double Augm.,

Siojcoveai,

-Se,

Ppaxv<;, with Inf., 562.

fiporos, $1, D. ^v^a^, 32J, J2 jSutras. J5. U-

affixed, 94; 212; 216 Enclitic, 92, ]iOcal Sufiix,

240. 5iaAyop.ai, Depon. Pass., 328, Redupl., 274, Ex. with Dat., 436, a. SioAeKTos, Fem., 127, 5*.

SLa<f)epofLa.i,

178.
5e,
I-

Steufiepbi,

423

43^i '^ ; 440.

6285' oSc,

637,

a.

Searo, 269, D.
Se'yjaat, 312, D., T4, b.

Bidifyopoi, 476, b. SiSda-Kb), 324, 28,

y,

Pronunt.,

Char,

Verb.s, 251, Obs. their Fut., 260, Perf., 279.

of

Se'Saoc, 324, D. 28; 326, D.40. SeSeyfj-ai, Se^u>, etc., 318, D.

Obs,-Aor., with double 326, D. 40 Ace., 402 StSda-KOfxai, 4S1.

SCSr}fjit.

SeSia, SehoLKo., 317, 5, and D. Set (see Se'cu), with Ace. and
Inf., 567,

StSojjLLt,

Com pounds M caning

3tl.

2.

476, 2

with
fii'^Qj,

Inf., 561.

J25, I. ydmifiat, I19. D. JI. yap, 6j6, yap oSi/, 6j7,

yafidii),

Obs.

I I5et,

490.

i.

yoo-TTip,

151 Fern.,

140.

forms Position, 77, D. Doubling of the 5, 254, D. with Part., 6etKT;/xt, 318
&iS(o,

SUcrav,

StSpao-Kti), 324, 2 etc., 313,

Aor.,316,3
D. 4. D. 5.
p<ir

Sifij/iat,

3i;3.

SLKf^op.at,
St'icatd?

Meaning, 481.
construed

yv, Ohar. of Verbal Stems, 251, Obs. y4, 641, I Affix, ibid.
ye'yoftt, Jl'], 14-

593Selua, Indef. Pronoun, 215. Snivoq, with Inf., 562. Setpv), 115.
SeVfipoi*,
l'}ly.

ei/xt,

sonally, 571. free Ace,, 404, Obs. fitoTt, 636, 2.

fitiojr,

yeyioviia, J 25. 0. tt. yeicojuat, Signif., J29, 8. yeAoto, joi, I Aor. Pass.,

SiTrAatrtos, Sttrtro?, etc., 223

Pass.,

Fut.

S4ofj.aL,

Depon.

328, 2.

with Genit., 416, Obs.

Si'xa.

3,

Mid.

with

298 Act.

See

Seia.

445-

Seov, 586.
aeiray, Dat. PI., 169, D. BepKOfxai, Depon. Pass., 328, 2

meaning, 266. yeAws, 169, D. yejiAui, with Genit, 418.

vei/4o-6aLt yei'^o'o/i.ai, etc.,

Aor., 257, D.

59,

D.
PI.,

J27,

Bea-fios,

with Ace,, 400, c. Nom. and Ace.

^wfTC, 316, D. 3J. yepaids. Compar., 194. yevuj, with Genit., 419, D. yijfle'u), 325, 2. yijpaffKw, 324, 1 Aor., J16, 2. yi into ^, 58; 251.

J7?, D. SecnroTTK, Voc. Sing., Ace. Sing., 174, D.

5evoju.ai, 326,

121

Contr., 244, 2. StuKto, with Genit., 422. 5jLtu5, Gen. PI. and Dual, 142. j. Soiio, etc., 220, D. SoKcM, 325, witb Inf., 560. Construed personally, 571. SoKos, Kem., 127, 5. So^avt Ace. Abs., 586. Sopv, 177. 6.
fiti//o(o,

D. 15. SeuVaros, 199, ^' (Defectives).

SevTEpos ,

SoUTre'ttf,

SpojLieti/,

32y, D. C. Spa/xov/xat, etc., ]27t

yt'yi/ojaat, 32"',

14

with Genit.,

416,

II,

Perf., 317,

bi^^-esd by Microsoft

fipaTOS, 300,

D.

; ;

GREEK INDEX.
5paa>.
eliTov.
efxireipoi,
-etp,

359

SpoMj Aor. Pass., 298. fipotros, Fem., ii'j, 5.

6vvafxait

{ypvyopa^ 275.
e-yveXus, 158.
eyo),

254, Opt., Accent., 309 Depou. Pass., j28, with Inf., 560, I. Compounds with, j6o, Su's, Obs. Augm., 241. fiwoi, J2I, T ; 301, 4 fiiiftj, I Aor. Mid., z68, D. 2 Aor.,

Obs.

512,9

Angm,,

Synizesis,
I.

66

eipyiofjixt,

eytuye,

etpyto, Perf,

Subj.,

641,

^
B bee.
-tj.

in, 172. 319, 15. and Plup., 287, D. with Genit., 419, e

Subs,

eS^et-at, 31?. D. 3* J27, D. 4. efiojitai, Fut,, 265. See eo-fltw. ee bee. ei, 36 bee. et and 77,

eipTjKa, 274, Ex.; 327, 13. eipop,at, 326, D, 16.

etpto,

243, D.

i}

in the

and
elff,

Dual.

See

2 Sing, of

Aor., 270, D. Perf. Plup,, 275, D. 2. etp.t, 92, D.

J 16, 16

Meaning, ^29,
D. bee.
a,

4.

e for a, 268,

257

eepxo-TO, 287, D. -ees bee. is in Nom. PL, 157 bee. ew and tjs, 161, d. -CT) for -eia, 185, D.
ei]"5,

els,

97,
-et9, -eis,

h, 448 ; 449 Atonon, 2with Inf. and Art.,

574.

2 ets

6, 556,

Kom.

PI.,

157; i6r, d.

282; 285; 295; 298. e bee. 7}, 40; 147, 2; 151; 161, D.; 2JJ, 4; 23S; 29J. e bee. et, 24, D. j ; 42 ; 147, i

213, D.

Mas. and Fem,

eeC^ta, et for etc,

et,

Augm.,

236,

236 ; 24J, D.
e bee.
o,

270
;

165

278

29?, D. J40, Obs. 3

;

e, 24, D, for ai, 267, from e, t, see , i. Redupl., 274, etc. in the

sts, 2

in, 172. Sing, Ind. Act., 233, 2.

-eis-etro-a-ei/,

187

Dat.

AdJ, in, J52, 5; Pl 50, Obs. 1;

149.
elo-o, def.
eta-Kta,

bee. oj, 278. for digamma,

-et

34,

D. 4;

Plup., 283. in the Dat, Sing., 157 161, & connecting vowel,

Aor., 269, D. 324, D. 35-

237. De inserted, 264; 269, D. rejected, 153; 24J, D. B; 257, D. in Synizeais, 59, D. eontr. with preceding vowel, 166, D. e affixed to tbe Stem, 322,

Obs.; j24,Obs.; J25, etc. considered as Stem-vowel,

4^
e

in the Augm., 236; See Syllabic Augm.

274*

275.

233. 13 Sing. Ind. Act, 233. 22 Sing. Ind, Mid., 233. 3. et, 639, I Atonon, 97, 3 in Cond. Sent., 535 with Ind., 536 with Opt., 546, etc, for edv, 545, Obs. 2. t, etde, et yap, In a wish, 514 " whether " in Depend. Interr, Sent., 525 ; 610. et-^, 611 t Kev, see edv

ettJOjuat, etc., 314, D. I. ettrw, with Genit., 415.

etro,
etT,

with Part, 587, 4*. 94 etre-eire. Oil ; 627,

ettofla,

275, 2; 278,

K, ef, 69, Obs, 2;

448; 453 with Augm., 238 Atonon. 97, 2with Inf. and Art,

ei

apa, 637,

e inRedupl.,

275asliedupl.,

6, dr

el
I-

45, Obs. 47, Ex. e^o{l, 556; 601. eKas, Compar., 203, D. eKeti'Off, 212.

574<

3 unaltered,

et

yap, 637,
I

KaC, 640,
in,

et firj,

eKc'/cAero, 257, D.; 6t, eK;^etptoL, 53, TO, d.

4-

639.
-eta,

and D,

conneqtlng vowel, 133, h J, 6; 262; 336, D.

Fem.
;

185
2,

Quantity,

eKKkncrLd^ia,
eKAeiTro),

Augm., 239, with Acc, 398.

117

341, Obs,; 342, Obs.

m, D.
-e

ei'aTO, 3i5r

D.
8,

in Nom. Ace. and Dual, 141.

Voc.

eUov, 327,
-etTj,

d, 130bee. 17, 38. for vv in -ea for eta, 185, D. Ace. Sing., 185 In t and

ea bee.

^u Stems,

157 in
ij

Diphth.

D. z, 317, D, 7. ; 220. etKu, with Genit., 419, e. e'lKuv, Genit., 163.

in, 115,
el/ce, etKTOi',

Fem,

eK\r]$dvio, 322, D. 26. eKTrA'^TTOjuat, with Ace., 399. eKTOS, 327. 6. eKTog, witii Genit, 415.
eKiav,

eiKoo-t(i'), 68, 3

e\d<rcr(av,

Genit Abs., 585, 6. eKtav etvai, 570, Obs, iKdx'-o'TOS, I99t 4 eAoTToi', without , 626,

Stems,
ibid.
VI.,

bee. in the ibid. bee. a or

t/,
*

161 bee.

ij

and

a,

Ace, in 77

dKioi, 625, D. d. L\T]\ovea., 40, D.; 317, D. 13.

elKT}<pa, eiATjya, 274,

Obs
^Aavcw, 321,
Perf., 275,

Ex.

Adj., rSj Ending of the Plup., 283. D.

Fem. of

eava, 275, 2; 319, 13.

ecu, bee.

38

bee.
1.

elAo;a, 274, Ex.; 279. elKov, etc., 327, I. 1 Aor., 270, D. elKoi, 253,

Meaning, 476,
Perf, 286, Obs. eKeiv, 327, I.
eAe'yYO),
eAeuflepdfa),

2 Fut., 263 I Plup., 287, D.

i.

Mid.,

275,

D.
D.

ei,

ibid.,

et/iat, 3I9>

5.

Obs.

edv, 639, 2

in

eiiLiaprat, 274* ^'^'

Condit. Sent.,

eifii.

5i5; 545; 548"Whether,"

315. 315, Obs.

I EncIIt.,
2

with Genit., 419,

e.

with

92, 3;
Part.,

610 Comp.
a$a,3t9' U-

edi/re-eavre, 627.

-eas bee. -et5 in Acc. PI., 157 from Tjaff, 161, Obs.

earai, etc., 315, D.

2.

used as eauToi), 2io sessive, 472, a. edta, Angm., 236.

eyyus,

a pos-

Compar.,
415,
,

204

with

287; 289; 291; 505; 59o> with Genit., 417 Accent of Dat., 432 compounds of eip-L, 31$, 'iKpiv?, 50, Obs. 2. Obs. 3&V, 428, Obs,; 580; eATTifw, with inf., 569. Mean* eAiroj, Perf., 275, D. 2 585, 6 Tf^ ovTi, 441. in& 330, D. 10. eV, 314. I Meaning, 314. eA(ra,27o, D.; 325, D. d. Obs. ep.avTOu, 210 Poss., 472, a. EtVeKa, see eVe/co, ep.ip7\KQV, 283, D. elvvov, 319- D- 5Obs.

with

eKOeZv, iKeverop-aL, 3 27. 2. eAvjAaSaro, 287, D. eAto-ffO), 236. AugDl., eAicufa), eAxo), JOt, I 236.

feenit.,

el^atri, 317, 7.

ep.4bi,

301,

I.

eyfiovirqcra, 325, D. c.

-etov,
etTTOv,

Neuters
327,

in,

345,

2.

ryetpw, 2 Aor,, 275. D.~-Perf.,

etTrep, 639, I.

275,1

3I7,D.

12 Meaning,

13 Aor,

Imper.

3iO, 2.

pig^sff^bpMhrosoft

3^5i ^' ^^ enixopa, 274, I). eiJ.irqp.VKCL, 275, D. I. ifjLireipoi, with Genit., 414,
ejLtjLtei/at,


360

3 ;

GREEK INDEX.
^WVVUfXl.

with Genlt, 414, 2. ifJiirpoa-Oey, with Genit., 415. ev (evC), 448 ; 456 unaltered In compounds, 49, Oba. i Atonon, bef. p, 51, Obs. 2 with Inf. and Art., g^, 2
ejLiTrXews,

eiri.AajU/Sai'OjLiat,

eTrtAarflavo;

juai,

eTTiAetTrw,

eTTt/xeAojUAt,

with Genit,, 419, 6 420. with Part., 590, Pass,, Depon. with Genit., 420, 328, 2

eTTioraiaat,

312,

10

Accent.
309

see dawrta, eVepoff, wi th Genit,, 416, Obs, j. enqtrCai, Genit. PL, 123. eropov, 3 26, D. 44, eu bee. ef, 35, D. 2; 248, Obs.
Tai/)i)v,

574.
-e(j/), J

4 ev
Sing

(S,
,

556.
2';2.

of Subj.

and

Opt,,

eS,

68, 4. Pass,, 293,

v,

Nom,

of Neuters,

-ev, 3 PI.

Aor.

D.

Pass., 328, 2. inLo-T-qiJuov, with Genit., 414, construed iirLTrjSeLo^ eijai,

Depon.

from 202 Augm. pounds, 241 eS

eOj eov, S. eo, eou,

in

Comwith

TTOtew,

Ace., 396. evaSov, 322, D, 23.

euSto?, Compar., 195,
eiiepyertbi, with Ace., 396eu^u, with Genit., 415 eu5i/s,

-eVai, Inf., 27'J.

Augm., 239. Depon. Augm., 239. 328, 2 evavTLOs, with Dat., 436,
ei'ttipo),

ei'ttVTtdo/i.at,

Pass.,
b.

personally, 571. eTriTpeVw, with Inf,, 560, I, eirKrjTO, 312, D.,/. 7ro/iat, 327, 5 Augm., 236.

with

Part., 587,

3.

ivatrcra,

meaning

3 29,

D.

evSe^s,
evSvto,

with Genlt., 414, 2. with double Ace, 402 Meaning, 329, 4.

;

ipsCKai (^eveiKoi), Jl'], T). 12. with eVeKo, 445 448 ; 445, 8

epafe, 178, D, epafJ-ai, 312, II. epaw, Aor. Mid,, joi, D. Genlt., 420. epya^Ojuat, Augm., 236. epyaOoi/, 319, D, 15.

euKTi/xeJ'os, 3t6,
6vAa)3e'oju,ai,

D. 25.
Pass.,

with

with Ace,, 399. 328, 2 evvov?, Accent, 183 Compar.,

Depon.

196, c.
evpCa-Koi, 324,

25

^with
D,
;

Part.,

epSw, 527,

3.

591evpv's,
-ev<;,

Jnf.

and
"

efeVw,

Art., 574, 5. evvGTTe, ei/iUTra),

etc.,

J27, D. 13. evepTcpot, 199, D. (Defect.) ev^voOsv, 275, D. 2. lirqvoxo; 327, 12. ei-i, 90. ei'tTTTO), 2 Aor., 257( D.
evLdO'di, 250,
ei'DvAe'co,

epeVuo), 250, Obs. Fut., 260, 3, epevyofj.ai, 322, D, 40. ip-npiSaraty 287, D, ept^Wj with Dat., 436, a, epiTjpo?, Nom. Pi., 175, D. epTToj, epTTu^d), Augm,, 236,

Acc. Sing., 157, D,

in, 161,

Genit.

-eiis,

Nom.

Sing.,

165, D. 341, i

349, i;_i37; 172.

eSre, see ore.
ev<j)pa.Cvm,

Meaning

of

the

D.

evvvfiL, 319, ;.

eppaSaraL, 287, D. e^^w, 526. 17, epptaya, 278; 319, 24. eppujueVo?, Compar., 196, &.
epoT], 115.

Aor. Pass., 328, 3. euu. Verbs in, 353, 4.

<|)ayor,
3

27, 4.

0'

c3, (/>' (are,

601.

double Augm., 240. ecTo?, with Genlt, 415. ei^peVo/ittt, with Genit., 420. e^eKiyx^ui, With Part., 593.
e^LKvovfjiai,
t^oi^,

with Genit., 419,0.

204

epcn)v, 189, D. epuyyai/u), 323, D. 40. e^uKO), 2 Aor., 257, D. eputr^at, etc., 314, D,
kpvia, Aor,, 3or,

c^eo^ 269. ex^pos, Compar., 198.

exto,

586,

elw,
eo

Compar.,

with
ev,

epycurai, etc.,

D. 319, D. 15.
2.

327, 6 Augm., 236 Meaning, 476, 1 DifF. of Pres. and Aor., 498with Inf., 560, 1 with Part., 590 expiJ.aL, with eX*^"* 580

eo*

Genit., 415. bee. ov, in

bee,
;

epxo^at, 327,
17,

D. i; 165, D 24?, D, B, C.
efi,

233, D.

4;

epai, 327, 13, and epbig, 177, D, 20,

ObS,

ei//oj,

epcuTooi,
-e?,
-e^,

with double Ace, 402.

Genit., 419, b. 326, 19, for ao, see ao in the Attic Declens., i?2, etc. in Con-

eo,

eXo, etc.,

205, D.

Nom,

con275, 2 strued personally, 571 with Part., 590, eokira, 275, D, 2. eopya, 327, D. 3. eopTdifo), Augtn., 237. edy, 208, D. -eo?, Genit. in, i6r, D. -eos, Aty. in, 352,4; i8j for
-e(<)5, 184, D. eov bee, ou, 37 hec, D, I ; 243. D. B. ^

0t bee, ot, 37. eotKo, 317, 7;

of Neuters, 172. Knding of Nom. PL, 141

tracted

173. 8, 2. 6(701(0,315. D, 3 (ecr0ti>); with Genit., 419, d,

Herod. as one SylL, 121, D. 3, &; 131. i; 157327,4 6to, Genit. Sing., 121, D. 3, 6;

Verbs,

243,

D.,

etTKov, 337,

D,
Obs,

ecTTreitr/xai, 286, T,

ecnrd^T)!', etc., 327, 5, eoTTOv, 327, U, IJ.

-eo-o-a,

Verbs in, 248; 177, II Fut., 260, 2; 264; 253, 3 263. e<ada, 275, D. 2,
etaii-ev, etc.,

312,

D.

13.

Fcm. of

Adj., 187.

-etav,

Genit. of a-Decl., 118, D.

ecra-ai. etc., 269,

D.

ewff ("till"),
6(09, eiDs,

556; 635,

7.

-eo-<ri(v),

eu,

37,

Dat. PL, 141, D,; 153, D.; 158, D,; 165, D.

DecL, 163.
Genit., i6i, Obs.

etrcrup-ai, 274.

D.
f,

^iravpi<rKOfJ.a.i, 324, 24etreC,

66 with
en-eiS^,

^$6^eireciv, iirriv, eirdv, 557 ; 6J5. 5 in Synizesis,

ea-cuiv, 199, D. 2, eo-re, " until," 556.

-ecrrepoff,

-eoTaro?,

Compar.

Pronunt., 5 Pres. In, 251, Obs. ^oM, contract,, 244, 2.

-fe,

Stems

Aor. Ind., 493 "whenever," 558, Oos. i.

556; 635,6.

eTTetra,
eiTL,
_

with Part., 587, 4. 448 ; 463 with Inf. and Art. 574, 2,4, ^

Ending, 196, ecmjfu), jli, 291, ea-H, Accented, 96 ; 31$, Obs. 2 edTiv 01, 06, etc., 603.

eo-Ttato,

Augm.,
c

eTTtfiogoy, eTTt/caipto? et/At,

con-

Ace., 400, 419, d.

e(rxp-T0<5,
ea-ui,

with

236

with
Genit.,
e'lata.

strued personally, 571,

enUcraa-Oai., 319. 5iTTiBvixed}, with Genit., 420.

200; 391. CompojT., 204.

See

Local Suffix, 178. feuyimp-i, 319, 16. Zeu<r, 177, 7. ^e'to, 301, I. ^TjAdta, with Acc, 398. <u, Cbar. of Verbs, 251, Obs, and D. Fut., 260, 3- Comp. 263.

^(lvin<ju.t,

319, 9.

eTaOiqVf 298.

Digitized

by Microsoft

; ;

;; ;

GREEK INDEX.
H for D.
D. 2 161, D.;
45.

361

a, 24,
;

1 15,

180, U.
I)

270, Obs.
jj,

See

244, 2;
e.

after o, 180,
Syll.
PI.,

Ex. bee. w, Augm., 234, Obs.

-)j,

Voc. Sing., AcCm 157in the Dual, 158; 166 in the Ace. Sing., 161, Conn, vowel, 133, I).; 166
I

121 in

Ending
4-

of i and 3 Pi.

Plup., 283. -ij, 2 Sing. Ind.

n(r(rajy, 199, 2, Mtruxos. Compar., 195. IJTOt, 94.; 643, ^Tot- ^, 626, a. ^Top, Gender, 139. TiTTdofiaL, with Genit., 423. ibTTtoi/, 199, 2. T^rire, 632, 5. inii^iEi, 240; 313, 1. ix<^ 279. flvt, 217, D.

Locative Ending, 179 Demonst., 212 Nent. in, 139; 172. -t, !Nom. Ending in the PL, Dat, Sing,, 141 134, 9
-I,

173,
I,

2.

and SubJ. Mid.,

Tjojs,

163,

D.

t.

Sign of the Opt., 228 Redupl., 308: 327,1). ^Connect, vowel, 348; 351 Affixed to the Stem in the Dat. PI., 119; 134,8. Subscribed, 8 ; 12; 27; 65,

23h h

5 and ^, Synizesis, 66 09 ; 64 J. 9V (M)-^ (?i)' ^^^' Obs.

^,

Obs,
Diff.,
e,

Pronunt.,
286,

7 in

2 Dat.
2.

Sing., 134, 3

the Perf.,
t.

in Indir. questions, 6ro

^ and ij-n, 626, a, and Obs. n and T] SitTTe, with Inf.,

566.
7},

Interr.,

607,

6 "really?"

643, 9^ yap, ^ TTou, 608; 636, 6, d ^^v, 643, g. fi, "he spoke, 312, i. ^a,7Jen/, 314' jSatTKh), 324) 3. nyayov, 257. ^Se, 624, b, I. ^Sojuat, Depon. Pass., 328, 2

Pass. Stem, 298 Nom. Sing, of Stems in, 147, Obs. 2 Affixed to Pres. and 2 Aor. Stems, 338, P. bee. a, 307. See also Dentals. Oavelv, 324, 4. Qanruif 54, c ; 298.

4 in

169; 173,

the

Weak

Verbs in the Pres. with,

250, etc.; 322, Obs. their Fut., 260, 3 ; 262, 10, 348. -La, Fem. in, J46, 3 ; 185,

la for

etc,
la,
iT}<3,

in, Ito,

220, D,

I.

ia.Qu.aL,

Meaning of the Aor

flappe'w,
flatrtroi',

with Ace, 399.

see raxvS'
417,

Pass., 3 28, 4.

OcLTEpov, 65, Obs. I. davfid^bj, With Genit.,

lavM, 327, D. 17. -taw. Verbs in, 353, Obs,

ISe (ConJ.),.624, b,

2.

i (Imper.)

Obs.; 422, Obs.

9avp.aa-T0<: oct-o?, etc., 6o2. Bsd, 115, D. 2; 117. 9e\tti, ede'Au, 326, 20. eifjLLS, 177, D. 21.
-0e(v), Sufifix, 178, 2; 68, for the Genit., 205,

327,8; 333.12-lSlov, Neut. in, 347, i, Obs, with tfitoff, with Genit,, 414, i

with

Dat., 439,

Obs. with

Part., 592. nSus, Fern., 185, D.

IX
D.

netpa, 270, D. jJKO, 313.

ijKtCTTa. 199, 2.

178, D.
6e6<;,

nKw, meaning, 486, Obs. nAiKos, Attr. in, 600. ^KiTov, 323,0.37. nKvOov, 327, 2.
^(xjSpOTOi', 322,

Voc. Sing., 129, D. fiepeio?, 350.

0epoju,at, Fut., 262,

Dat., 436, &. 158 ; i8g, 3. ISpvui, Aor, Pass,, 298, D. iSpMs, 169, D. cepds, with Genit., 414, i. L^dvoi, 322, I7> l^opai, 3z6, 21.
tSpts,
-tffti,

D.
2.

Verbs

in, 353,

Fut,,

deio,

248Fut.,

260,

263.
LT},

0^A.us, as Fem., 185, Obs. e-rjv, Euclit., 92, 5; 643, 17.

Char, of the
1.

Opt, 293

D. 12.
&,-

nfi4u-i}Se, 624,
Bjiit, ijv,

2.

Bjipaw, 01 bee.

with Accus., 398.

(TO-,

tTjjLit,

302, 4. 313,

^, 312,

I.

57. -61, Loc. Suif., 178,

IEnding
;

I6vs, Superl., 193, LKp.evo9,3 16, D.;

D,

323,0.33.

jftos,

556; 634.4-

of 2 P. Imper., 228
307. Oiyyavia, 3 22, 24. 0A.aw, 301, I.
evYiCTKbi, 324,

302, 5

qixiTHTxov, 323, 36-

qfin\aKov, 324, 23.

7}fi<l}Ce<ra,
-171/,

319, 5.

Nom., 172.

ni/,

see eaf.

nveyKOi', ni'eiKa, 327i ^2.

^viKa, 556; 634. JnvCirairov , 257> J^-

7JWT0, 319. D. 28. 7)0 bee. ti), 37 1JOS, -rjo, -Tjaj, 161, Obs. Tjov bee. u, 37.

Perf., 317. Perf. Part., 276, 3 Fut., 291Slgnif., 486, Obs. 9oip,dTLov, 65, Obs, I dopvufiat, 324, D. 15. ^p^^, 54. ; 145.

LKviop.ai, LKvovp.ai, 323. 33 I Aor., 268, D. with -iKog, Adj. in, 351 Genit., 414, 6. l\d<rKou.at, 324, 5 Imper.,

D.

3i2,D.
iju.acro'w, -IV,

15.

iXeo)?, 184.

250, D.
in,

Subs,

172

Lv,

Du.
Dat.,

Ending in Genit. and

134.6; 175.4Lva, 638,
-iro?,
-top,
-to?,

OpVITTbi, 54)
flpWO-KO),

c-

176. 324, D. 3J. ->)p, Nom., 172. 142, 4. ^p, HpaxA^S, 167, D. npapov, 3 24, D. 34. iqpiirov, meaning, 329, D. ijpofLTnv, 326, 16.
'^Trap,
r)ira<f)OV,

59; 324- ^5Qvy6.T^p, 153. ev- irpo- Bvp.iop.ai, Depon. Pass., 328, 2. 0upa<7t(i'), 179. Aor. Pass., 53, 0ufti, 301,

I in Sentences of Purpose, 530. Adj. in, 352, 3, 4. Obs. -to, Genit, Ending, 128, D.

Neut.

in, 347, i.

A^.

in, 350.

10, &.

'

t^ov, 323,

0WS, Genit., PI.

t,

and Du.,

142, 3.

tpM, 35.
-ts,

D.3J. O. I,
of

^q,
-7j?,
-yjff,

Nom. Nom.

PI., 161, d.

Sing., 172; 174,

D.

-ns,

^o-i(i/),

Prop, names in, 174. Adj. in, 355 Compar., 197. Dat. PI. <jf a-DecL.

Long by Nat., Pronunt., Lengthened, 83, Obs. I t bee. I, ei, 01, 253, Obs. 40 ; 278 t of the Stem bee. Changes, 55; 168; 6, 157

Barytones
Compar,,

Nom,

Fem. in, 138; 172

In A.ce, Shig.

156. tO-KE, 324, D. 36.

-tffKOff, -tcTKij,

Subs,

in, J4'7> 2.

la-OS,

19S with

i^l,

11*0.

bigM&^y Microsoft

4i^ &.


362

GEEEK INDEX.

fLOJcpav.

itTTepoy,

Compar.,

Kepa.wvu.1, 319312, D. 16.

KepSaCvtii,

Sub.
270.

Mid.

Kvvrepo^, 199. D.

197.
i.(mjju.i,

529,

I of the
Dat.

Perf., 3 17, 4 Meaning, Perf., 503.

Aor.,

Obs.

Perf., 322, Obs.

icTXT^w, Diff.

of Pres. and Aor.,

Sing.,

KeaKBTo, 33 7
KYJSu},

Kvpeio, Kvpto, 325, 4 Fut,, 262, Ex. with Part., 59c. Kvirai, Kvaa-a, 323, D. 34.
Kvu)V, 177, 8. K(a\vu}, with Inf., 560, 3.

498.
Ix'Sv^f

Ace. PI., 158 Masc, 140. t^wp, Ace. Sing., 17?, D.

-twf,

158,

D.

K^ai, etc., 269, D. 326, D. 41. KVjpvi, 8 J, Obs. r; 145.

Nom,

of Masc.

in, 348,

Obs.
-itov, -LOTOS,

Compar., 198.

KtK\-qaK(a, 324t t). ?!. KLWfJiai,, 319, D. 34. Kipvy\}i.i, 312, D. 6. Kivavta, 321, 18.
KL^-qfii, 313. I>.

A doubled after the Syll. Augm., 234, D, Char., 252.

p.,

V,

p.

Metathesis, 59
77, /, 274, 2

Position,

6; 322, 18.

Redupl.,

Fut.
in,

and

D.
oi

K,

New. in ovK, 6g, Obs. i Ion. for IT, 216, D. Asp. in the Perf., 279.-866 also
Gutturals.

Ktvpyj/Ai, 312, 7.
etc., 319, D. 34. KKa^ta, 251, Obs. Meaning of the Perf. Act., 276, D.
(cieoi',

Stems
K, V, p,

in,

262Aor., 270
Perf.
Pass., 298.

Perf., 280.

282

Aor.

Monoa. Stems

-Ka, I Aor. in, jio, Kade&0VlJi.aL, J26, 21,

KadevSui, 326.
KaOrifiai, J 1 5. KoBC^ui, Fut.,

18Augm.,

2 Augm.,
etc.,

240. 240. 326. 21

253, Obs.; 326, 22 Fut., 260, 2. KAaw, 301, I. KAct's, Acc,, 156. KAet'w, Kk-mi, Perf. Mid., 288.
KAat'tt),

KoLyxavfo, 322, 27

with Genit.

and Acc.,
Xayios, 174-

419, Obs.

KaBpa, with Genit., 415. ka.Ko';, Compar., 197.

Aa/A^di/oi, 322, 25

KAe'jTTTjs,

Kttt,

Crasis, 6; with Numbers, 222 with 5 Tov, 369, 587* 2 KaC-KaC, 624* i 3Kal Kat, 624, 4 624, 640, 2 Kal t6t
624, b
>^<^'-

Augm.,

240.

KAeTTToj, Perf.,

Compar., 197. 279 Aor. Pass.,

Perf,

274,

Ex.-^with Genit., 419,

Mean., 480.
K6.p.\\iop.ai,

&

295.
-kAiJs,

IVrt.,

Proper Names

in,

167

05, /cat

zeal
2)

5e,

174. KXivui, Perf., 282.

322, U. 25. kavOdvia, 322, 26 with Acc.,

Si)

Kctl

ei,

Si],

642, 4, a.

KaCvv{J.ai, 319' I^- ^JKaCirep, with Part., 587, 5.

Aor., 316, D. 27. Kvona, Contr., 244, 2. KvCtray], 115, D. 2. Kotfdy, KOLi/ufEu, with Genit., with Dat., 414, i; 419, a
kA-u'w,

398 with Part., 590. Aas, 177, 9. AauKtfj, 324, 29, and Obs, keyopLai, constr. personally,
571.

Aeyw

(collect),

Perf.,

279

KaiToi, 630, 6; 94. Kauu, 35 Obs.; 253, Obs. Fut., 260, 2 I Aor., 269, D.

436, a, &.
fcoio?, Kocro?. etc., 216, D. KoKoKevio, with Acc, 396. KOTTTw and cJDmpounds, Meaning, 476, 2. KopdvwfL, 319, 6. KOpe'o), Aor., 301, D.

KaKov

\4y(o,

KaKus

TTOieu,
2.

with

2 Aor. M., 316, D. 35. with Genit., 423. AeKTO, Aey/xevos, etc., 316, D. 36; 268, D.
AetTTOjuat,
Ae'AijKa, 324, 29.

Ace., 402; 396. KOKos, Compar., 199, koAeoj, 3oi> 3*

KoXoff,
KdiJivto,

Kdkoyva, ill,
Aeu'to,

1).

27.

Perf. Mid., 288.

Compar., 199, 6. Pei-f., jzi, 9

KOpiJ, KOppT},

Hy.

A^5w, 322, 26.

AijKeu, 324, D, 29. A^fojLtat, 322, 27. A^i^OjLLat, 322, 25. Ai bee. AA, 56; 252. At'trcrofiat, 250, D. AA, Pres. Stems in, 252. Aoe, 244, D. 4. Aoetrtra, 269, D.

with

Ace.,

400,

&
3-

with

282

Part., 590.
KO-veov, Kavovv, lii, Kapa, 177, D. 22.

D. 250, 286, D. -Kos, Adj. in, 351. Koreta, Aor., 301, D. Part., 277, D.
Kopv<rcru},

Perf.,

Perf.

KapTepeu),

with (cpaffa), Kara, 448 459^Apocope, 64, Kparsiii, with Genit., 423. D. with Inf. and Art., Kpdrog, etc., see Kapa.
Part., jqo.

251

Perf., 317, 8.

574. 599-

2;

/caTaTrXijTTOjUiai,

With
2J9-

Acc.,

Kparu's, Positive, 199, D. I. Kpeitrcrmv, KparnTTOs, 199,

TO
I.

AotTTOi',

405, Obs. 2.

Obs.

Aoio^Off, AoiVflioy, 199, D. -Ao?, Acjj. in, 352, Obs.

Aov'ti),

Kanjyope'ttf,
KttTto, KeltLL, etc.,

Augm.,

Compar., 204.

269, D. KijLiai, 3i4> 2. KCtl/O?, see KlVO^. KeCpo}, f'ut^ 262, D. KEKacT/iai, 320, D. J
KK\7tfj,ai,

KpefxavvvfU., Kpefxafiai, 3 ig, 2 ; 312, Acc. Of Sub. and Opt., 309.

Constr., 244,

Aor,

12

269,0.
AvTTouftat,

with Dat., 439, Obs.

KpeiJ.6u),

319, D.

2.

Aval, 301, 2

Perf. Opt. Mid.,

Kpi(T<r(av, 199,
Kp-jfjiva/jiaL,
J.

D.

I.

289,

D.Aor.,

316, D.
e.

28

312, D. c.

with Genit., 419,

icpii/o),

KeKTYfftai,

289

Meaning, 50J. Moods, 274, Ex. Meaaing, 503.

jcpoiiio,

253, Obs.Perf., 282; 286, Obs. Perf. Mid., 288.

\<atiov, AucTTO;, 199, I

p.

KpvTTTbi,

with double Acc., 402.

bef. p, 51, Obs. bef. A bee. of prej3, 51, D. Change

KsKaSebi, 325, D. e. Kekevta, Perf., 288. Ke'AAcu, Fut., 266, Ex. KeKofjLCLi., Aor., 257, D.
e(v), 68,

KTcCvia, Aor., 316, 4,

ceding Cons., 47

286,

KrCvwfu., 319' '7KTUTreo), 325.

doubled

D-

ff.

Augm,
p.a,

after 2J4, D.

the

Syll.

kulVko), 324, 21.

92,

fto, 64J, 16.

D. Enclit.,

5.

KVKSMv, Acc. sing., 171, D.

KuAt'w. Perf. Mid., 288. Kvveui, J 23, 34.

Nom.

of Neuters, 343,

See af.
KevTcw, 325, D./.

1^9;
/LLUKpaf, 405, Obs. 2.

Digitized

by Microsoft


GEEEK INDEX.
ILoXa, jUftWov, jLtdXtOTO, 202 jU.oXiO'Ta Srj, 642, a.
fidv, see fn^f.

; ; ;

; ;

363

Verba of

fearing, 512;

navOdvo}, J22, 28
/idi'Tis,

with

Part.,

591. of both Genders, 140. fxdpvafiaL, ImpeL'., ji2, D. d.

fiaprvpiit}, 325, 5H-oprus, ITJ. 10,
fi.o.(ra-u)V,

616, Obs. i with Fut. and Perf. Ind., 533, Obs, with Hypoth. Partic, 583 ln'(luestions, 608 " whether

533;

veto,
vri,

perchance," 621; 512;

622, 4.
fi.Tj&ei^,
fjuijiTta,

6ro

/atj

ov,
Sti,

5iiM
etc.,

326, 28. 248 fut. 260, 2. 64^, 15. vl^ia, 251, Obs. VLKOna 'OKvfi.iTt.oL, 400, mean., 486, Obs. etc, 205, D.
vifitii,

aTTo-, Sta-, kv-, irpo-

voioftai,

see ouSei's,

ju.^Kio-T09, 198,

Obs. 251, 260, J. ftda^L^, 177, D. 23. fiaxofJ-atf jLtaxe'ofiai, 326, 2J, and D. with Dat., 436, a.
fxaurrL^ai,

D. Fut.

ovTTOi, etc.
jU.i)Kdo/Li,aL,
fi.-ffv,

325, D. 0. 64J, 12. M-Tj-njp, 150, lyj, -ju.1,, I Pers. Sing, Act., 226 302, I Subj., 233. D. 1;
^255. fi.lywp.1, 3191 18.

Dep. Pass., 328, 2. with Genit, with Inf., 569. -cos, Adj in, 352. Obs.
vofi-L^ui,

417

vofxiia, Diff.

of Pres, and Aor.,

5.

/A7as,
jLLeya,
jU,e5ojU.at,

191 Compar., 198

401.
326, D. 42.

498.
POO-OS, -vTt, 3

Fem., 127,

PL of

Prlnc. Tenses

Act., 226.
-I'Twi/, 3

jU.e0uc7KW, 3 24, 22. {jLetpoixaL, Perf., 274,

jitei5,

D.

jueiW,

177, D. 24. see jwikoos without ^, 626, Obs. iu.e'\as, 186.

/xe'Aet,

/utetov

Gompar., 199, 3. meaning, 328, 4 with Ace., J98. fLtflir/ja-Kto, 274, Ex.; 324,6 with Genit., li.i.ii.v7j(rK0iJ.at.,
fiLKpo?,
fi-LfLeofiat,

-w

PL Iraper. Act., 228. affixed to Verb. Stems, 304, 2; 318, I.

68,

326,

24 with

Genit.,

420. jutV, 205, D. MtVcu?, Ace.

1

42a
fi.i\>Mi, 326, 25 Augm., 234, Obs. as Fut., 501 iruff, Ti oil jLieAAw, 50T, Obs. 2.

74,

Sing,,

163, D.

Voc. Sing., 117, D. 3. D. EncL, 92, 5 of vvv and wv, 99; vvv Srj, 642. 4 & 637, 3 wwiTepos, 208, D.
vvfui^a,

vv{y\

Diff.

fi.C<Ty(o,

327, 7

Aor. Mid. 316,

c.

f,

D.37fjLv,

-^,

34 48 260. Masc. and Fem.

; ;

in,

172.

in divis, of Syll., 72, i.

|eai,3oi, 1.
^vpdfii, 325, 6.

fietutTov, etc., 317, D. 9.

fivd,

Genit, Sing., ti6,

fiefi^\tTaL, etc., J26, I). 24. (*e>^AuKa, 51. D.; 282, D.;

fivijfjLtov,

with Genit., 414,

3.

$via, Perf.
o,

Mid., 288.

324, D. 12.
fiefieTifxevo^, JiJ,
fj.efj.vr}fj.at,

fio\ovp.aL, 324, 12. fiovov ov, oiixh ^^2, 5fi.ovo<fia.yost

-ju-os,

D.

I.

289,
jLte'c,

D.

meaning,
fj-ev-

274,

Ex. Sub. Opt.,

50;

comp. 197, Masc. in, 342. 2

Ad).

bee. ou, 24, D 3 ; 42; 147, 1. bee. 01, 24, D, 3 bee. to,

with Part., 591.

-/xei', I

Si, 628 coinp. fivv oSv, 037, fteyPers. Dual and PI. Act,
2.

352, Obs. ^v'fw. ^26- 27. juvfcdo/xai, 325, iu.{is, Masc, 140.
in,
I/,

40; 147,2; 151; 193; 233,4 bee. e, 243, D. c dropped

after at, 194

p.

226.
-fievaL,
I).

Inf. Act,, 2J3, -ju.ev, A.or, Pass., 3 ; 255, D. 1). in Verbs in fit, 29J, J02, D.

fiii/TOLt

6 JO,

5,

fAfiW, J 26, 26.

Obs. 2. C3ompar., 195 meaniu.e'o-0?, ing, 301. ju-ecTTOs, with Genlt., 414, 2. fterd, 448; 464Ad verb, 446. fxerakafi^dvia, ^eTa6t5a)/j.t, with Genit., 419, a.
fj-eoTitippia, 5(,

lxeTati,4\ofj.at,

with Part., 592.

with

Dep. Pass., 528, 2

dropped, before <t (and 49; 147, r; 149; 187 bef. other Oonson,, 51 bee. 7, 51; 282 Pres. Stems in, Perf. dropped in 253 Stems, 282; 286, I, Obs. inserted in i Aor. Pass., 298, D.affixed to Verb.Stem, 321 doubled after the Syll. Augm., 234, D. doubled hi the Pres. Stem, moveable, 68. 318, 3 -V, in the Ace. Sing., 134.45 141; 155, etc.; 173, 3in Neuters, 125 i Pers. Sing,

Conn. Vowel, 178 ; 354 233.1; 354-0, Genit Endfng, 122, Obs.; 128; 131, D.
o, for OS,

for

a, 268,

D.

213,

Crasis, 65, oTt, 633, I Tov Koi. fi.iv-0 Si, 369, 1

D.Neut

for

Tov

oa

369, 2. See TO. bee. ftj, 3*71)60. a, 183.

ohe,

212

475.

See

also

Demonst. Pron.
bSvpetrQai, with Acc^ 400, c. oSioSa, I'JS, D. I. oe bee. OU, 37oet bee. ot or ov, 37 ; 243, Obs.
in, 359. 2, Obs. 275, D. I. 37. ofli, Trd0t, t69i, 217, D, 69ovveKa, 636, j. ot from t, 40 bee. <a, 235. -ot, dropped, 64, D. Short in regard to Ace., 83, Obs, 2 108 Voc. ending 163.
-oeiSrjs,

Adj.

6^10, 326,
oTj

29 Perf.

bee,

CO,

Heraiv, 445; 448; 455,

Part., 587, 2.
fi.e7aTrifi.iT0fxa.it

Pass, mean., Indir. Mid., 479. 48J, ^erexci), /ac'toyos, with Genit., 4T9, a, and Obs. ; 414, 5.

in Hist. Tenses Act., 226 3 PI. in Hist. Tenses, 226 302, D. -va, affixed to Verb.-Stems, 312, D.
-vat, Inf., 302, 6; 33i, 1.

fj^ixp'-(s),

69,

Obs. 3;

448
fiT},

556 ; 455, 6 ; Elision, 64, Obs. i.

etc.

445; without

vaC, 643, 14' vaterdb), Contr., 24J,

D.
,

I.
.
a-,

vavs, 177. ^\vS,

v6, VT,

dropped before

50147, 1 ; 149Synizesis, 66 Neg., 6r2, Verb.-Stems, in sentences of pur- -ve, afOxed to Verbs of 323. with pose, 5JO ""*^ prohibiting, 518 ; 51" -^i^/bf5?fgfe(y^ Microsoft

olywp.1, 319. 19* with Part, 591. otSo, 317, oiSdvto, olSita, 322, I9. OiStVous, 1 74, D. -0117, ending for -ota, 115, D. 2 -ottf, Genit. and Dat Dual 128, D.; 141, D. otKoSe, 94; 178.


364

GREEK INDEX.
TTaO^W,
Obs. OTTOJS ju.^, with Verbs of Fearing, 533, Obs.

o'lKiio?,

with Genit,, 414, with Dat., 436,6.

Compar., 198.

OUJTtu, 622, 2.
oupe'ti),

oiKOL, 179.
ot/crpos,
oljuai, 244oi/Aw^oj, 251,

Double Augm., opaio, 327, 8 2J7 Perf., 327, 8; 275, D.i

Mean,
-otf,

Obs. Fut, 260,3 of Fut. Mid., 266.

with Part., 591.

Augm.i
in,

237.

-ous,

Adj.

183; 352,
172,

Nom. of Subs.,
oSs,

opyaiVw, Aor., 270, Obs.

hpiywfj.L, 319' "-* 36. opiyofj-ai, with Genit., 419, c. hpiovTo, 320, D. 37. opvL?, 177, 12 Ace. Sing., 1 56. 2 Aor. Qpwfj.1, 319, D. 37 Mid., 316, D. 38. opoi'Tat, 327, D. 8.

177. 13; 142. 140. ovrdd}, Aor., 316, 20,

3 Neui.,
D

ending of Genit. and Dat,

Dual, 141; i-jj, 4. olvoxodo, Augra., 237, D. -OLo, in the Genit., 128, D. 2 Pers. Sing. Opt. Mid., 233, 5. oTo. 21 J, D.
olofAai, OLO/xai, 326,

oure-ouTe, ouTC-ovSe, 625, 2, and Obs. ouTi, 622, 1, ovTOt, 643, 10, oStos, 212; 475; in addressingi 393 ouToo-h 212.

ouTei94

JO

2 Pers.
3Dep.
94

Sing.

Prea., Pass,, J 28, 2.

olos, Attr.

233,

243, B. 3. a. opcreo, 268. D. opvo-trw, Perf., 275, opbipa, 320, D, 37.

Dpdta),

oi;Tw(s), 69, Obs,

3 with Part.,

,587.4T.

and

Article,

with
oTof,

Inf.,

601

600
Part.,

-OS,

Neuters

in,

243,

2,

and

ovx^ 97, Obs. ovx OTt, ox'x ojTw?, 622, 3, 4b^eCKia and bipiWdi, Diff, 253,
Obs. o0eiAw, 326, 32.
o^e'Mo), I Aor., 270, D, b^Kta-Kavo), 322, 22, oi^pa, 556; 6?5, 10. See Iva. o^piis, Ace. PI., 158. oxos, PI. 174, D. o^wKa, 327, D. 6.

otdsre,

ola

Si],

with

Obs.; 139; 172 Ending of Genit., 141; 157, D. ; 173,

8, I.

587. 6. olff, r6o. oto-e, 268, D.

-oto-iCi'),

OS,
OLO-et,

Dat.

PI.,

327, 12. 128, D.

oitrw, etc., ^27, 12.

OLvpjLLati
ot;^ve'tjj, 326, jl, and D. Meaning, 486, Obs. with Part., 590.

Relative, 21 j Demonst., D; 213. Obs. and D.~ for the Possessive of i and 2 Pers., 471, Obs. c, ; 208, D.
212,

oo-os. Attr.,
oo-oi" ov,

600

0(701',

601

622,

5.

oi^tos,

Comp,

195.

6o"o"aTto?, 216,
oo-o-e,

D.

d)^o/xai, 327, 8-

oXeKo),

}i% D.

20.

oKCyos, Compar., 199, 4. oAtyupe'to, with Genit., 420. oKicrddvoi, 322, 20. oAAu/Lit, 319, 20 Mean, of Perf., 329,9; 503 Iterative, 337. D. o\os, Position, 390. 'OA.u/j.7rta, 40O1 C. 6ju.t\e'a), with Dat., 436, a.

177, D. 25. oo-Tts, 94 214, Obs, 2 oo-Tts and 60-T19 ovv, meaning, 6do. 00-^paiVojU.a.t, 322, 21, andObs. ore, OTav, 556; 634, i with

01^000.705, Compar., 197.

-0(0,

ofAWfJ-L,

J19,

21

with

Aor. Ind., as," 558, Obs. I. oTi and o Ti, 214, Obs. 2, oTi, 633, I without Elision, in Dependent 64, Obs. I

493 "as often

243, D. 263, D.

Length, in Contr. Verb, A. 3 Attic Fut, Verbs in, 353, i,

and Obs.
TT,

i.

TTats,

doubled, 217, D. (62, D.) Aspir. in Perf., 279. Genit. PI. and Du..
142, 3

Voc.

Sing.,

148of

the

Declarative Sentences, 525

Ace, 399.
ofioios, bfj-oioofjiai,
ofjuov,

OTt

JU.1J,

633,

1, &.

o/ioAoYeo),

ori-q,

218.

etc.,

with Dat. 4j6,

conatr.

OTIS, 2I4j

D,

a, b, c.
61u.oA07eoju.a1,

ov from
person-ov,

o,

See

140. Mid., 288. TToAaios, Compar., i94' irdXiv, in Compos, before a;

iraiui, Perf.

two Genders,

o,

Genit, ending, 122, 2; 128;

ally, 571.

Q^6pywiJ.i, 3T9. 22.

o(i.ij}wis.o<;,

&.

Conn, Vowel, 233, i I34t 2 2 Pers, Sing. Imper. and

5-

with
7

6^(05,

630,
5.

436, after Part.,

Dat.,

Imperf. Mid. 2j3.

49, Obs. I, irdWxo, Aor. 257, D. 2 Aor. Mid., 316. D. 40. jTav, 142, & in Compos, before 0-, 49, Obs. I.

587.
-ov,

Kom.

ov, ovK, ovx, 69, Obs. 1 ^ 52, D. Atonous, 97, 4; 612, etc.

of Neuters, 172,

oi'eipo?, 175bvCvT]fj.i,

3x2, 2 Ace. of Aor. Sub. and Opt. Mid., 309

with Accus., 396.

114, D. ofuvw, Perf. Mid., 286, Obs. 00 bee. ov, 36; 130. -00?, Adj. in, 183. Sou, 213, D.
Oi/O/J-ai,

onrfVtKa, 634, 3. OTTia-Oev, with Genit., 415. OTTOTe, birorav, 55^; 634, I "as often a.s," 558, Obs. i. orrtoTra, 275, D. I. oTTto?, 632, in sentences of

Prohibitives, 499, Obs. in questions, 608 ov yap, ov yap aWa, 636, 6, d. ou &r)Ta, 642, 6 OVK apa, ou fJi.Yj, 620011 fJLTJV 637, I (jaeVTOt) ccAAo, 622, 6--^u jU.di/oi'-aAAa Kaii 624, 6. o5, ol, e, etc, meaning, 471, Obs. &. ovSe, 625, I ovSei's, 221 Attr., 602 ovSeVi 622, I. OVKTt, 622, 2. ouKoOi' and ovkovv, DifF. 99; ,637,2.

with

iravTd.ira(rL(y), 68, J, irapd, TTopai, Trdp, 4481

465

Apoc, 64,

Hl-i

t>.

irdpa, 90.
Trapavo/ieu), irreg.
7rapa7rA.Tjo"t.os,

Augm., -239,

with Dat., 436, 6 195. TrapariBefxai,, ^Sx. Trapaxwpe'tij.with Genit., 419. irapeyiii and Trapevoiitai, 480. Trapex*^, with Ini,, 561. irapoLi/eu, double Augm. 240. irap6v, 586, Trapos, 565; 635, 12

Compar.

irappTqo'Ld^Ofiai,
jtSsj

Augm.,

239-

purpose,
531.

with av, 5J0 h; Obs. with Fut. Ind., 500; 553 in Cliallenges and Warnings, 553,

ovK6fj.evo^, 3 19, D, 20 o^v, 637, 2 Affixed, 218. -ovv, Ace. Sing., 1^3, D.

Trdo-o-u),

meaning with and without Art., 390, and Obs. 250, Obs.Fu^2(io,
142, 2
3.

Genit. and Dat. Accent.,

irda-iTiav, 198,

D.

oiVcKo, 636, J.

irda-xto, 327,

9 Perf.

317, D.

ouf, 65; D.

14.

Digitized

by Microsoft

GREEK INDEX.
irariofjLaL,

365

irareoftai, ;25t 7>

irarrjp, l5iiTa.voiJ.ai,

TrtirpaffKW, 324 7-

Aor., 298 with Genit., 419, e with Part. mean., 590. 7rei9io, Aor., 257, D. Perf., Fut, and Aor. J17, D. 15 Part., 326, D. 43 meaning, iio,i\ $03.

irtiTTOi,

327,
!> 17-

15

Perf.

Part.,

317.

with npoTTOfiai, Ace., 402. wpeV/3us, 177, 15.

TrpnObi, 312, 4. irpia^aty 2 Aor.,

doable

fft'trupes,

220, D. 4.

TTLTviui, 323, 35-

312, D. gf. n-i.0aua'K(t>, 324, 1'- 32.

iriTTrqp.i,
TTWdi',

316, 8 Accent, of Aor. Sub. C^t.,

309.
TTptV,

Compar., ig6, a.
Obs.

556; 635,

II with
i, 2.

Inf^

Treivdo), Contr,, 244> ^^ ireitro/xou, 527, 9.

ireXa^ti), I

irXd^oi, 251, Obfl. 7rAao-(7w, 250,

Fut.
?

565,
irpCto,

and Obs,

260,3.
irKeCoiv,
TrAe'of,

Aor. Imper., 268, D.

157.

irAeioTO?,

199.

ire\eKv<s,

Masc, 1 40;

mfiTTOi, Perf., 279. nevT]^, Compar. 192 Genit,, 414, 2.

ireJroL9tL,

with
diff.,

without Tj, 626, Obs. n\evv, 199, D. 5. TrAeKu, Aor. Pass., 295.
ttX&m,

Perf. Mid., 288. trpo, 448, B ; 454Crasis, with Augm., In Compos., 238with Inf. and Art.,

65

574 J
TTpoff

T^po Toi), 369, 3.

(ttoti, irpoTt),

248 Fut.

260, 2; 264

467 Adv., 446with

and
Art., 574,
2, 4.
TTpoffflei/,

448, Til. Inf.

317, D. 15.

TTerrovOa, J17, D. 14. TTerrpaya. and Trdwpaxa,

Perf. Mid., 288. with TrAe'w?, 184

Genit., Genit.,

TTpomo, with Genit.,

414.
Tr\r}$(j>,

2.

330.
Trerrpwrai, 285, D. irdnTOfiaL, 274, Ex. TreTTTWKa, 274, Ex. ; 527, 15. TreTTUKo, 527, 10. TreiTfiiv, Compar., 196, a.
^Enclit, 92, 5 641, 3 AflBx, 218. Comirepo, with Genit., 415 par., 200. irepSti), J26, 33. Tripdbi, 2 Aor., 257, D. ; 59, D. Aor. Inf. Mid., 316, D. 41. wept, 448, III. ; 466 without Anastr., Elision, 64, Obs. i
trip,

312,

3with

418.
n-K-qu,

Trpos^Koi', 586, irpo^toTTov, Nom.

Ace.

Pl

445

4?5. 9-

175. D.
TTpOTepOff, TTpWTOff, 200.

ir\rjpTjs, ttXtjpoiii,

with Genit.,

414,2; 418. Compar., 195 with Genit, 415irKrjcra-u, 1 Aor. and Fut. Paes,,
jrXTjtrtoc,

irpovpyov, Compar., 195, TTpwioy, Compar., 195.

TTTntrwoj, 316,
jTrttrerw,

250,

D. 2I. Obs.

Fut-,

295.
ttA^to, 316, D, 22. -TrAouff, in Multiplicat., 223. TrAoucrtoy, with Genit., 414, 2. ttAww, Perf, 282. ttAww, Aor., 316, D. 24. m/ew, 248 Fut., 260,2; 264

260,3.
301, I. irTwxos, Compar., 197. TTvOifrQai, 322, 29. UvKvS^, 177, 14. n-u/iaros, 190, D. (Defect,).
TTTUft),

446

Adverb,

iftid.

with
double

Perf., 285,
400,
c.

D, with Ace,

Augm., 238.
jrepij3aAAo|U.at,

With

Ace., 402.
ireptyCyi'op.ai,
TrepCeifii,

TTofios,

IXz^Jf, 177, 14. see TTous.

nvvOdvoiMii, 322, 29 with Genit., 420. TTvp, 142, b; 151 ; 175 Neut.. 140.
jr, 7rt6(s), Encl., 92, 4.

with

TToOiv, Encl,, 92, 4.

TToOeui, 301, 4,

TTus,

with
oil,

Genit., 423. iTipirqp.1, Part., 312, D.

ydp

Genit., 415 636, 6, d,

^ws
the

e.

vepv(rt(y\ 68, 3.
3^7. i?250, Obs. ireTomnjfjLL, 319, IiTe<reiv,

7ro5^ see wou. JTO^ End., 92, 4.

TToie'oj

and

7roteoju.ati

4^

p,

doubled,

62

after

Augm., 234^-after Kedupl.,

Metathesis, 59 in 274, 2 Aor,, 257, p. pp, 13, See apa. pa. End., 92, 5. pa/3So9, Fem., 127, 5. paSios, Compar., 199, 7.

ire{r<T<ai

with
P.
;

Genit-, 417.

irtJAts, 157,

D. Gender,
3.

138, 6

Hercw?,
257.

(aenit. Sing., iji,

iriTOfiat, 3 26,

34

2 Aor.,
5.

Compos., 189,
TToAtreuw and 480. Obs.

61, C

n-oAireuojitat,

D.; ?>6,

jrev^ojLMLt, 322, 29.

TroAAaKt(s), 69, Obs. 3

224.

poLLvoi,

Plup. 287, D.

257t DTre^yfoTCS, 277, D.

iri<f>vov,
TT^, IlSlclit.,

iroAuV, I9X Compar., 199, _5 TTOAA^, TToAu, 404, Obs.

92, 4.

jnjwuiitt,

2 Aor. 23 319. Mid., 316, D. 39Meaning,

530,4.

with Comp., 440.

TToveo), 30T, 4<

^^d, 327. 3pepUTTtojLteVos, 274, D. ^e'w, 248; 326.35 Fut. 260,2. p^Vi/ufLt, 319,

24; 278

mean-

iroppu),

IXoo-eLfiwi',

with Genit., 415. Ace. Sing., 171

4.

irnvLKa,

with Genit., 415.

154.

Vac., 148, Obs.

TTore,

ing, 330, 5. pr]9^(rop.ai, etc., 327, 13. piyeto, 325, D. i.

jnjxvy,
TTtflt,

Masc, 140;

End., 92,
ij,

TTtc^e'w, TTte'^w, 3 25( -D-

irorepov
TTOTL,
Ti-ov,

611

in

depend.

316, 15. jrtA,paju.at, Aor., 3 1 2, D./. with Genit., TTi/i-TrAij/ii, 3 12, 418. 7rtJLtirpT7ju,i, 312, 4irtVw, 321, 4; ?27, 10 P^lt, 265Aor.,32T, 4; 316, 15

interr. sentences, 525.

see TTOO?.
Encl., 92,

with Genit.,

pCyiov, T99, p. piyota, Contr,, 244, 3. plTTTeb), ptTTTW, 315, 8. pva-Bai, etc., 314, D. piawufii, 3x9, 10.
o",

415.
irovAu'?,

Fem., 185, D.
^;
PI.,

2;

33,

ceffect

on pre-

iTovs,

142.

Meaning,
-rrCofJLaL,

329, Genit., 4r9, d,

^itb

Dat.

147. i y-^. 49, D.; 141, D.;

cedii^ Vow. and Cons., 46, etc, ; 260, etc, ; 286 Corabin.,

and Obs.
,

265

327, i'

in 149, Masc., 140. Trpaos, 191.

D.

Compos., 160

to
Spir,

48Assim.
A,
jit,

to p, 50, 6

A^,,

irtTTto-Kw,

324, 20.

5 Obs.

from

r, p, 270, D. bee. 60, b ; jo8; 327

t,

see t.

GREEK INDEX.
cr0e'.

366

dropped, 6i, a, h in Sigma -crto, -aiq, Fem, in, 342, i. a^^S, Masc, 140, Stems, i66 in Pres. Stems, triyaw, Difif, of Pres. and Aor,, (TxeOeetv, 338, D. In the Fut., 498meaning of Fut. Mid., (Txe?, etc, 316, II ; 327, 6. 233. J, 4, 5 a-voKaloi, Compar., 194. 262, Obs., etc. in the i 266, Aor., 268 ; 269, D. ; 270 -criju,og, AdJ, in, 352, Obs. (Tw^w, I Aor. Pass,, 298. in the 2 Aor. Mid., 307 In o-iwTTcu.), meaning of Fut, Mid., StuKpa-nj?, 174. the Perf. and Plup. Mid., (Tois, 184. 266, forming Inchoatives, crwT^p, Voc Sing,, 152. 284, D. o-K, in (T, inserted in the Perf,, 288 324 Iteratives, 334, D,, etc. in the Weak Pass. Stem, (TKeSdvvvfLL, 319, 4, 298 in the Verb. A^J, joo o-Ke'AAu, Aor, 316, 10 mean- T, Pronunt, 4 bee. 0, 54 in deriv., 340, Obs. 2 in ing, 329, 6. bee, a, 60, a; 67; 187 Compos., 358, 2. Dropped, 147, 2 ; 169 in crKiBvr}fj.i, 3i2,T>.h; 319.4. ff, doubled in the Dat. PI., CKOTriia and eoftai, 480, the Perf,, 281 changes before, 286, 3 158, D.in the Fut., 261, D. (TKOTOg, 174* affixed to in the 1 Aor., 269, D. after 2kuAAi7, 115, D. 2. Verb. Stem, 249 moveable, Syl. Augm., 234, D. CTKtop, 176. 169, D. Obs. j b, dropped, 69, rdv. Defect., 177, 16. ufLOM, Contr., 244, 2, Compar., 204. id,, -o-o, 2 Pers, Smg, Imper, Taw/iai, 319, D. 38. 228, s, ending of Norn. Sing, 173, i jdxa-, 212 T7}v TtLxCfmjv, 40$, 113; 122, I ; IJ4, i; 141; o-Traw, 301, I Perf, Mid., 288. Obs. 2. i; 155; 160 oTTeuSo), Fut., 260, Perf. Taxv?j Compar. Qda-tnov, J4, b ; 145; 147, wanting, 122, D. i ; 147, 2 Mid., 286, Obs, 198. 151; 163. UTreos, 166, D. -re, 2 Pers. PL Act, 226 s, ending of Dat. PI, 119 (Tir4(r&a.t, etc., 327. 52 Plm-. Imper. Act, 228, 134, 8of Ace. PL, IJ4, loj (nreuSw, with Inf., 560, 3. EncL, 92, 5 -T6, 624, b 173. 7 of 2 Pers, Sing, in o-JTovSa^o), meaning of Fut, AfiBx, 94; 624, 5re'-Kat, Hist. Tenses Act., 226 Mid., 266. re'-Se, 624, 2, and Obs, Nom. of Fem., 348; J49, o-c. 57 ; 250, TeQirq^bi, 2QI. Obs. -CTo-w, Verbs in, 250 Fut.,, reti', 205, D. -o-d, Fem, ending, 187. 260, 3. TeiVtd, Perf. 2821 Aor. Pass,
ff,

251, Obs. -a-av, 3 PI, in Preter., 302, 7. SapTTTyfiwi', 174, D. a-^evvviXL, 319, 7 2 Aor., 316, 9j 3 1 3, 5 meaning, 329, 5.
o-aATTt'^oj,
-o-e, Local Suffix, 178. <reavTov, 2ro Poss., 472, a.

-OTO, 307, ara^oi, 251, Obs.

<rTaxv^,
oTet'iSco,

Fut,, 260,3.

298. -reipa, Fem., 341,

2.

Masc,
326, 36.

140.

reK(j.T}pcov 8e, 636, 6, &.

(TTeWoi, Perf., 282 Aor, Pass,, 295. arei/d^to, Fut., 25 1, Obs.

reXew, 301,
Tefiet, 321,

i Perf. Mid., 288.

D. 10.

TifiviMf 321, 10.

o-e^ofLaL,
-o-et'w,

Verbs

Dep. Pass., J 28, in, 3$i, Obs.

2.
2.

260, 3.

treiui, Perf, Mid., 288, o-euw, 248, D. I Aor., 269, D, Perf. Mid., 274, D., 285, D. Aor,, 316, 1). 30.

Masc, 127, 2, arepyui, with Dat, 4^9, Obs. with <TTepL<TK<ii, 26 324,
(rTV(inr6s,

Genit, 419,

e.

meaning of Perf., 3 jo, 6. 0^9, Genit., PL and Du., 142, 3, 0-0, after Cons., 61, a; 286, 4. itrfla, in the 2, Pers. Sing, Sub, and Opt, 233, D, i; 255, D, 1 Ind. 302, D, in the I Pers. Plur. Pres, Mid., 23i, D. 5-o-fle, 2 Pers. PL, Imper. Mid.,
CT^TTfa),

cTTtfw, 251, Obs. Fut.. 260, 3. o-Too, 115 (Ex.).

etc, 214, D. red?, 208, D. -reo?. Verb, AdJ 300; 596 with Dat., 434, -T6po5, Compar., 192 ; 208, Obs.; 216, TepTTOfxat, Aor,, 59, D, ; 257,
Te'o, Tei), retu,

D.;
592-,

295, D.

with

Part,

(TTOpivWlLL, JI9, 8. OTopi^/xt, 3 19, 25. ffTO^a^o/xat, with

419.
c.

Genit.1

Teraytav, 257, D. rerajta, 282,

TeVA-Tjica, 317,
T4.Tfj.ov,

<jTpe'^{o, Perf.,

285

meaning
3.

D. 10.

of Aor. Pass., 328,

<TTpiavwiJ.Lt 319, II, a-TVyeui, 325, D. fc.
(Tvjii.(3atVM,

228.
-a-9ov, I Pers,
'2

Constr. personally,

J J,

D.

Du. Pres, Mid., Pers. Du. J

571.
irvix(l}tiiv4(o, (TvvtfSbi,

257, D, TETpaCvdi, Aor., 270, Obs. TCTpTJXa, 277, D. rervKelv, 322, D. 30, Teu^w, 322, 30 Perf. Mid, 285, D.

with Dat,

Imperf., 233, D.
-trdio,
-a-Qiiiv,

72

T^Kw, Meaning, 330,

TTjAtKoOros,

7,

Pera. Pers.

4j6, a.
(HJi',

TTjAtKosSe,
j

212;
Pers.

Uu. Imper. Mid., 228,

-cTf)io<Tav, 3

^lif,

in

Compos,

and

-crt,

Sing. Du. 228, 2 Pers.

PL Imper. Mid.,
Sing,

^,.49, Obs. 1 tributives, 22?.

-iruvTjt

In Dis-

bef.

o-

475.
-TTjv,

Ending of the

Fem., 346,

2.

Du, of the Hist. Tenses, Act, 226 of the 2 Pers.

of
i;

Priuc
2,

trvvoiSa. /aoi,

with Part, 591,

Du., 233, D.
-njp,

7.
;

Tenses Act., 226; 302,

trtCi/),

Obs,
<Tvv(owp.o^,
oT/s,

Dat. PL, 68,

134.8;

119; 141; 160; 173,6--

with Dat, 4j6, b. of two Genders, 142, 6

J Pers, Sing. Pres, Subj., 23?, D. i; 255, D. I Loc. ending, 179; 68, 23 Pers.

140.
<T^d\kofj.at,
tr^e, 205,

PL and

Sing,, 68,

5.

with Genit, 419, e. D. cr^fcTepos, 472, b a^os, 208, D.

Masc in, 141, 2 137. -T7}piov, Neut in, 345, i. -T)]q, Nom. of Masc. in, 341, 2 Voc Sing,, 121 349, 2 Nom. of Fem. in, 346,1; ij8.

in

bee. a-iT, derival^ion, 351,

57 inserted

Digitized

by Microsoft


GKBEK INDEX.
ifisi&Ofiai.

367
Xpioi.

J Pera. Sing. Act. in the Princip. Tenses, 226. Tt; why? 404, Obs. Tt Yap; 6j6, 6, dTt 61} ; 642, 4, a Tt fii7Trou ; 042, 5 Tt S^ra ; 642, 6-rt fj-adiav ; Tt iraBbiv ; 006, Obs. 2 Tt ju-^c; 641, 12. Ttl), 218.
-Ti,

Tvyxdvui, 322, 30, etc.

Llie

Twrjfit,
TtjLiaa),

Aor. Pass., 5J,

6.

Genit,, 419, c with J-*art., 590. Tvvrf, 205, 1>. TUTTTtO, 326, 37, TVi})u}, 54i c. Tu;^eii', 322, Jo. -riu, Tuv, 3 Pers. Sing, and l)u, Imper. Act., 228. -Tup, Nom. Masc. in, 341, 2;

with

315, D. 4. ijiepTepos. <t>epTaTOi, ^ept(7T0S,

(fiepTe,

199, D.

I.

^epM, 327, 12 Imperat. ol I Aor. Act., 268, D. Meaning, 476, 2(}}epoiV, 580.
^Gvyiii, 322,
J

I Fut. Mid., 264

Perf. Mid., 285, D. with Acc, 398 with Genit. 422,

<fyY}i/,C,

TiKTw, 249.
Genit., 421. Ti/iftjpe'o/xat and -e'o), 481, b -eojitai, with Acc., 396. riw{i.t, 319, D. 35. TtVtil, 321, 5. TtTrre, 61, 1),

n7-Two-ai',

with

Meaning, 486, Obs. 312, 5 Pres. Ind. End.,

3 Pers. Act., 228.

PI.

Imper.

92, i. ^Odvta, 321,3

with

2 Aor., 316. 7
398

Acc,

with

Ttpw?,
-Tis,

50. ^ Obs. 2. Nom. Fem., 341,

beu 40; 278 bee.

Obs.
V,

bea

p,

3^,

J->.

2; 160; 248,

4o^bec.
e,

Part., 590. ^Beiptii, Perf.,

282 Meaning,
.*

e.v,

ov, 40, 0.

330, D. II.
tbOCvia, ill,

of the Stem bee.

2
;

214 for osTts, 609, tW, Tt, 214 Kncl., g2, i rivd, to be supplied, 568.
Tts, Tt,
TLTpoti), 3271 16'

?42,

r.

-V,

157 Long by nature, 83, Obs. i lengthened, 253, Obs. dropped, 253not dropped,
64.

Aor. Mid., 316,

1,

D. 26.
4>i\iui, 325,

D.

Compar., 195. (jytKoTifxeop^ai, Dep.

0tA.o?,

Pass.,

TVrpuitrKia, J24, 16.

TiTUtTKOjuat, J22, D. 30;

J24,

p.i7.
etc, Ji6, 6, Tju.^7w, J2I, D. 10. TO, 379. Obs.; 104; 559, TO y-iv, TO 6e', 569, Obs. irptV, 635, II. Toflt, ToQev, TO)?, 217, r>. End., 92, 5. Tot, 64J, 10
r\y\va.t,

Neut. in, 139; 172. with Acc., 396. ujBptcTT^?, Compar., 197. -vSptof, Neut. in, 347, Obs, v&tap, 176 Neut., 140.
v^pi^ia,

i.

328, 2. ^t(y}, 178, D. ^o/Sou/iat, Mean, of Aor., 328, 3 with Inf., 560, J.

6
to

ve bee. v, 158. vt, Dlphth., 28. -uta, Fem. of Perf. Part., 188.
vlo'i,

Obs. i; 145. ^op^ifat, see Adpiii.

<^oti/tf, 83,

4>pdywfj.t, ^apytnjfJLL, 3l9i 26. 0pafa>, Aor., 257, D.

(ftpeap, 176.
4>p-'}V,

177, 17.
SjLLti',

vp.iv,

etc.,

207

vfi.6^,

Toiyap, Totyapoui/, TOtyapTOt, ToCvvv, 043, 10; 6 J 7, 5

203, D.
vv,

Nom.

of Masc. and Neut,

8.

in, 172.

6J7, 4TOto, etc., 212, D. TotovTOS, TOLOsSe, 212; 475. Totsfieo-t, 212, D.
TO^jLtO,

vvui. Verbs in, 353,

virai, see vir6.
UTToiTO?, 200.

and Obs. -</)u^?, Adj. in, Acc. Sing., ib6. 0uAaTTo/xat, with Acc, 399. (/>upu), Fut, 262, D. ipvia, Aor., 316, 17 Meaning,

Fem., 140. ^uyotSe, 178, D. i^uyyaj'to, 322, 3T,

115 (EXO-

virip (u7retp),448,
'

Pers. Ehi. Act., 226 J Pers. Du. Imperf., D. 72 Pers. Du, Im21J, perf., 228. -Tos. Verbal Adj. tn, joo.
-Toc, 2

and

with
Inf.,

II.,

A.; 460

329. 3<jim, ^(jls, Genit. PI.

I {2,

Inf.

and

Art,, 574,

and Du.,

viTia-xvovp.0.1,
vTTo,

323, 36

with

3-

3-

569. 448, III.; 64, D.

468 Apoc,
Fem., 172

Xo-Cpoif

326,

38

with

Dat,,

vn-OTTTevo),
-us,

too-oOto9, TotrdsSe, 212; 475. Tore, with Part., 587, 4. Tov, Tw, 214, Obs. I. -Tpa ioT -rep In the Dat. PL,
153,

Augm., 2^.
in Acc. Sing.,

Barytones
156.

Nom. Masc. and

439, Obs. with Part., 592. ;^aAaw, 30I> IXaXeiraCvu}, with Dat., 439, Obs.
XoXeiro^, with Inf., 562.
XaKeiTti}^ ^epoi,vfith Part., ^02.

va-fLLVT},

Dat. Sing., 175, D.

vo'TaTtos,

XO-vBdvui, 323, D. 41-

Tpa, Fern,
rparot,

in, 344,

2 Aor. 2 Aor. Pass.,

Act,,

257 294
Perf.,

^ Obs.

v<rrepo^,

vararoSf 200; 199, D.

;

v(TTpos, ixTTepita,

with Genit,,

XavovfiaL, 324, 9. xdpiv, 404, Obs. xcipt?, Compar. of

witti, 197. Xda-Kio, 324, 9. xeip, i77> )8

compounds

416, Obs, 3

423.

279; 285. Tpe^oi, 54, c Perf., 279; 285

Aor. Pass., 295 Aor. Act. Meaning, 329, D.

rpe\w. 54.C; J27, II. rp^o-w, ?27, 16. -rpto. Fern, in, 341,

2 Quan-

tity, 117. Tpi^pTj?, Genit. Pi., 166. "Tpts, Fern, in, J4I' 2-

Tptxds, see BpC$

Tpov,
Tpcoff,

Tpioyiu, 2

Neut, in, 344. Aor. Act., 257. Genit. PI. and Du., 142, j.
D. 16. see cro",
-o"o-to.

^, Pronunt., 6. ^aavBrfV, 321, D. ^aetvds, SuperL, 193 D. ^atVo), 0aetVw, 321, D, Perf., 282 Meaning,' 330, 8 Aor. Meaning, Pass., 298, D. Diff. of Pres. and 328, 3 Aor., 498. <^atvo^at, if>avep6^ eifil, With Part, 590,

Fem., 140 XeLpwv, x^^P^(^^> ^99 ^

X^icrofAaL, 323, D.-4I.
Xep7)s, etc., 199,

X6W, 248

Fut.,
Aor.,

D.

2.

265

Perf.
Aor.

28i~i

2692
D. in.

316, D. 31.
Xpo-to'P-eoi, 325,

Tpdita, 324,

324, 8. ^eiSofiai, 326, D. 45 Aor. and Fut., 257, D.with Genit.,

(ftda-Kio,

TT,

TTW)

I 419, e. Digitized

Xpaofxai, XP^' Contr., 244, 2 Fut,, 261 with Dat., 438. Obs. xpflp,49o with Xp-n, ?I2, Acc. and Inf., 567, Obs. i. Xpijo-TTjs, Genit. Pi., 123. xpt'w, Perf. Mid., 288.

by Microsoft


368

GREEK INDEX.
9 SylL
98 with ; with Inf., to vvv eli/at, etc, 564 " as though," etc., with Part, 588" when," "as," 556 with Aor. Ind., 493 "that," in Dependent
Atonon, 97, 3 Compar. 6ji, a
lis enrelv, dis

Xpoo, 115 (Ex.).

Xp<ovwfJ.i,

w9iia, J 25,

Augm.,

(1)9,

3I9j 12.
e.

2n*
SAAol, 65, D.
&jU)/LLaL,

Xwptgo), with Genit, 419, XwptV, 455. 5i/f,

J 27, 8.

J4

48

260.

-i^,

Subs,

in, i-jz.

Perf. Mid., 288with Genit., 419, b. \pdiii, Gontr., 244, 2. ^6u5oju,ai., with Genit., 419, e.
i//au(u,
(u,

of Masc. and I'em., 172; J45, 3 Genit, 118; 134.7; 141; 175. 5d)i/ajLt7jF, etc., 314, D. Siva4, 65, D. toi/e'o/xai, Syll. Augm., 2J7 with Genit, Perf., 275, ^
-wi/,
_

Nom.

Declarative 525 " in order Sentences, Senthat," in tences of Purpose, 530

421.
ui^vfiaai, j86, I, Obs. -wp, Subs. In, 172.
u>pa(ri(y), 179*
-wff,

for

o,

Declens. from from 7j, see ij. o), Fem. in, ij8
in,

276, D.

See
o,

Att.
o

see

Adv. JiTames in Ace. 16 D. in the Genit, 122, D. c Conn. Vowel, 2jj,

Sing.,
j,

Nom., 172 204 Prop.

3,
i

Nom.

172

Adj.,
;
;

Perf. Part, 276

Adv. 201 203 Ending of Genit Sing, 161 with and v- Stems,
ij8
in,

184 188Fem.,

with av, 631, 6, Obs.in expressing a wish, 514. w?, Prep., 445; 448, A.; 450. with Part, 588. wsTrep, 632 wsre, 94; 566; 632, with

Inf.,

;66Joined with
D.

fjn^

617, Obs. 2. oiTos, see oS?.

uiv, IJiphth., 26,

157

in -eu Stems, i6t, a.

Diff.,

I-

tovTo?, etc., 209, D.

a)0eA.e'w,

Pers. Sing. Ind.

J27, D. 6.

Act, 2 jj,

2.

W9 and<5s, 217.

with Acc., 396

Syyt^-aL,

wgand m,
631.

99; 217 D.

u)if>e\ov,

wfiTjs,

Adj.

in,

^59, 2 Obs.

326, 32 in exprasfi ing a wish, 515

THE END.

XONUON

PEIHTKD BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS 8TA1IFOKD AND CHABINQ CEOSS.

Digitized

Si'rttKT

by Microsoft

Digitized

by Microsoft

STANDARD SCHOOL BOOKS, PUBLISHEB BY ME. MURRAY.

DR. WM. SMITH'S DICTIONARIES. A LATIN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. (1200 pp.) Medium
8vo.
21s.

Latin and English Dictionaries, tlio best representation gf the scholarship of the day is uudoubtsdly that of Dr. Wm. Smith." Rev. Dr. DoNALDSox.

"Of

A SMALLER LATIN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. With

Proper Names, Calendar, Weights and
from the above.
Square 12mo.
7s. tSd.

3lEASl)Kii:s.

Abridged

AN ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY.
from the
.ibove.

Compiled from
Theopuilus D.

original sources. By Wm. Smith, LL.D., and Hall, M.A. (040 pp.) Medium Svo. 21t.

A SMALLER ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY. Abridged

Square 12mo.
7s. 6d.

CLASSIC.iL DICTIONARY OF BIOGEAPHV, and GEOGRAPHY. For

IN Schools.

MYTHOLOGY,
the

Higher Forms

Compiled from the larger Dictionaries. With 750

Svo.
ISs.

Woodcuts.

A SMALLER CLASSICAL DICTIONARY OF MYTHOLOGY, BIOGEAPHY, and GEOGRAPHY. the above. With 200 Woodcuts. Crown Svo.
ANTIQUITIES.
200 Woodcuts.

Abridged from
7s. Cd.

A SMALLER DICTIONARY OF GREEK AND ROMAN

Abridged from the larger Dictionary.

With

Crown

Svo.

7s.

6d. its

A CONCISE BIBLE DICTIONARY:

tions.

Antiquities,

Biography, Geography, and Natural History.

With

Illustra-

Medium

Svo.

21s.

A SMALLER BIBLE DICTIONARY:

and
Illustrations.

ita

Antiquities,

Biography, Geography, and Natural History.

With 40 Maps

Crown

Svo,

7s. tjd.

DR. WM. SMITH'S INITIA GRJ5CA. Part I.

Containing a Delectus, 12mo. 3s. ijd.

GREEK COURSE. A First Gbkbk Course.

Book,

Exercise
II.

and Vocabularies.
Book.'

INITIA GR^CA.

Part

Greek Reading

Containing short Tales, Anecdotes, Fables, Mythology, and Grecian History. Arranged in a systematic Progression. With a Lexicon. 3s. Gd.

INITIA QR^CA.
Exercises.

Part IIL

Gbeek Pbose Composition.

the Use By Professor

Containing the Bules of Si'ntax, with Copious Examples and 12mo. 3s. iid.

THE STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR Fob

OF Colleges and the Upper Forms in Schools.
Clrtids.

Post Svo.

Cs.

ELUCIDATIONS of the STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR.

Translated from the German of ERNEST CURTIUS, with the Author's aid and sanction, by EVELYN ABBOT.

A SMALLER GREEK GRAMMAR.

the Middle and Lowep. Forms,
12mo.
8s. 6d.

Fob the Use op

ii'ora

Abridged

the above

MATTHI^'S GREEK GRAMMAR FOR SCHOOLS.

Assistant-Matter in M-irlbQTOUf?h Cclkge.

Abridged by the late BISHOP BLOJtFIELD. An entirriy new and enlarged Edition. By E. S. CROOKE. B.A, formerly Post Svo, 4s.
ICoiUinued,

Digitized

by Microsoft

Digitized

by Microsoft

Digitized

by Microsoft